diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:24:38 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:24:38 -0700 |
| commit | 7f361c70cc0dfc7a8579f5707409b53198ba2ffd (patch) | |
| tree | b6973aae876f3ac566ecf4f8d5b4999a84c67781 /old | |
Diffstat (limited to 'old')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20120829-4994-h.htm | 6188 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20120829-4994-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 106849 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20120829-4994.txt | 6671 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/20120829-4994.zip | bin | 0 -> 105983 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/ftmun10.txt | 6518 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/ftmun10.zip | bin | 0 -> 105442 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/ftmun10h.htm | 6150 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/ftmun10h.zip | bin | 0 -> 108832 bytes |
8 files changed, 25527 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/20120829-4994-h.htm b/old/20120829-4994-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fc3fdb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20120829-4994-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,6188 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<html> +<head> +<title>Five Thousand Miles Underground</title> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> +<style type="text/css"> +<!-- +body {margin:10%; text-align:justify} +blockquote {font-size:14pt} +P {font-size:14pt} +--> +</style> +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +Project Gutenberg's Five Thousand Miles Underground, by Roy Rockwood + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Five Thousand Miles Underground + +Author: Roy Rockwood + +Posting Date: August 29, 2012 [EBook #4994] +Release Date: January, 2004 +First Posted: April 7, 2002 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FIVE THOUSAND MILES UNDERGROUND *** + + + + +Produced by Jim Weiler + + + + + +</pre> + + + +<h1> +Five Thousand Miles Underground</h1> +<h4>Or</h4> +<h2>The Mystery of the Centre of the Earth</h2> +<h2> +by Roy Rockwood, 1908</h2> +<HR> +<h3>CHAPTER I</h3> +<h4>WASHINGTON BACKS OUT</h4> +<P> +"WASHINGTON! I say Washington!" +<P> +Throughout a big shed, filled for the most part with huge pieces of machinery, +echoed the voice of Professor Amos Henderson. He did not look up from a small +engine over which he was bending. +<P> +"Washington! Where are you? Why don't you answer me?" +<P> +From somewhere underneath an immense pile of iron, steel and aluminum came +the voice of a colored man. +<P> +"Yas sir, Perfesser, I'se goin' t' saggasiate my bodily presence in yo' +contiguous proximity an' attend t' yo' immediate conglomerated prescriptions +at th' predistined period. Yas, sir!" +<P> +"Well, Washington, if you had started when you began that long speech you +would have been at least half way here by this time. Hurry up! Never mind +tightning those bolts now. Find the boys. I need them to help me with this +engine. They must be around somewhere." +<P> +"I seen 'em goin' fishin' down by th' brook a little while ago," answered +the negro, crawling out from under what seemed to be a combined airship and +watercraft. "Jack says as how yo' gived him permission t' occupy his +indisputatious period of levity in endeavorin' t' extract from th' liquid +element some specimens of swimmin' creatures." +<P> +"If you mean I said he and Mark could go fishing in the brook, you're right, +Washington," replied the professor with a smile. "But you waste a lot of +time and breath trying to say it. Why, don't you give up using big words?" +<P> +"I reckon I was brought up t' it," replied the colored man grinning from +ear to ear. He did not always use big words but when he did they were generally +the wrong ones. Sometimes, he spoke quite correctly. +<P> +"Well, I suppose you can't help it," resumed Mr. Henderson. "However, never +mind that. Find the boys and send them to me." +<P> +"With th' least appreciatableness amount of postponement," answered the +messenger, and he went out. +<P> +Washington White, who in color was just the opposite to his name, a general +helper and companion to Professor Henderson, found Mark Sampson and Jack +Darrow about a quarter of a mile from the big shed, which was in the center +of a wooded island off the coast of Maine. The lads were seated on the bank +of a small brook, fishing. +<P> +"Perfesser wants yo' immediate," said Washington. +<P> +"But we haven't caught a single fish," objected Mark. +<P> +"Them's the orders from headquarters," replied the colored man. "Yo' both +got t' project yo'selves in th' vicinity of th' machine shop. I reckon th' +new fangled contraption that th' perfesser is goin' t' navigate th' air an' +sail th' angry seas in, am about done. He want's t' try th' engine." +<P> +"Come on then," said Jack. "We probably would not catch any fish, anyhow, +Mark." +<P> +Accompanied by Washington, the youths, each of whom was about eighteen years +old, started toward the big shed. +<P> +While they are on their way opportunity may be taken to tell a little about +them, as well as about Washington and the professor, and the curious craft +on which the scientist was working. +<P> +A few years before this story opens Mr. Henderson had invented a wonderful +electric airship. He had it about completed when, one day, he and the two +boys became unexpectedly acquainted, and, as it developed, friends. +<P> +Mark and Jack were orphans. After having rather a hard time knocking about +the world trying to make a living, they chanced to meet, and resolved to +cast their lots together. They boarded a freight train, and, as told in the +first volume of this series, entitled, "Through the Air to the North Pole; +or the Wonderful Cruise of the Electric Monarch," the cars were wrecked near +where Professor Henderson was building his strange craft. +<P> +The boys were cared for by the scientist, and, after their recovery from +hurts received in the collision, they accepted his invitation to make the +trip through the upper regions in the airship, to search for the north pole. +With them went Andy Sudds, an old hunter, and Tom Smith and Bill Jones, two +farmers, but who were hired as helpers on the voyage. The party had many +adventures on the trip, having battles with savage animals and more savage +Esquimaux, and were tossed about in terrible storms. After making some scientific +observations, which the professor was much interested in, they started back +home. +<P> +Having found he could successfully sail in the air, Mr. Henderson resolved +to try what it might be like under water. +<P> +He moved his machine shop to a lonely spot on the Maine coast, and there, +with the help of the boys, Washington, Andy and two machinists constructed +a submarine boat, called the <I>Porpoise.</I> +<P> +In this the professor resolved to seek the south pole, he having a theory +that it was surrounded by an open sea. After much hard work the <I>Porpoise +</I>was made ready for the voyage. +<P> +What occurred on this great trip is described in the second book of this +series, called "Under the Ocean to the South Pole, or the Strange Cruise +of the Submarine Wonder." In that is told how once more Tom and Bill, with +Andy, the boys and Washington, accompanying Professor Henderson, had many +thrilling experiences. +<P> +They were caught in the grip of the grass of the terrible Sargasso Sea. Monstrous +suckers grasped the boat in their powerful arms, and had to be fought off. +They were caught in a sea of boiling water and imprisoned between big fields +of ice. +<P> +By means of strong diving suits they were able to leave the ship and walk +about on the bottom of the sea. They visited a graveyard of sunken ships, +saw many strange monsters as well as many beautiful fish in the great depths +to which they sunk. Many times they were in dire peril but the resources +of the professor, the bravery and daring of the boys, no less than the help +Washington and Andy Sudds, the hunter, rendered at times, brought them through. +<P> +Those of you who read of their adventures will recall the strange island +which they came upon in the Atlantic Ocean, far from the coast of South America. +<P> +When they first drew near this island they were almost sucked into the depths +of a great whirlpool, caused by water pouring down a big hole that seemed +to lead far into the earth. They reversed their ship just in time. +<P> +But, on going to another side of the island they were able to approach safely, +as at this point the great hole was farther from the shore. Then they landed +and investigated. +<P> +They found the island was almost circular, and the hole was also round, but +not in the center of the land. It was an immense cavity, so wide they could +not see across, and as for the depth they could only guess at it. Looking +down they could only see rolling masses of vapor and clouds caused by the +water which poured down from the ocean with the force of a Niagara. +<P> +Gazing down into the big hole Mark suggested it might lead to the centre +of the earth, which some scientists claim is hollow. The professor admitted +that the cavity looked as though it led to China. +<P> +They had no means of investigating further the mystery of the opening and +returned to their submarine, completing the voyage to the south pole. +<P> +It was now about two years since they had come back from that eventful trip. +One of the first things the professor did, after docking the <I>Porpoise, +</I>was to shut himself up in his study and begin to draw plans. To the questions +of the boys he returned no answer for several days. Then he announced he +was working on a craft which could both sail on top of the water and navigate +the air. +<P> +In time the plans were done, and, in order to keep the work secret, the shop +was moved to an island which the professor owned. +<P> +Parts of the <I>Monarch </I>and the <I>Porpoise </I>were used in constructing +the new craft, so there was no need to get other help than that which the +boys, Washington and Bill and Tom could give, since the two latter accepted +an offer of the professor to remain and work for him. The boys, of course, +would not leave their friend. +<P> +The professor realized that he had a more difficult task in his new venture +than he had set himself on other occasions. For a ship to be light enough +to rise in the air, and, at another time, and with no change, to be strong +enough to navigate the ocean, was indeed something to tax Mr. Henderson's +ingenuity. +<P> +However, in the course of a little over a year the larger part of the work +was done. Inside the big shed was the huge affair which, it was hoped, would +enable its owner to be master of both air and water. +<P> +"Did the professor say anything special?" asked Mark of Washington. +<P> +"Nope. I reckon he were too busy problamatin' the exact altitude projected +in an inverse direction by th' square root of th' new engine when operated +at a million times inside of a few seconds, but he didn't say nothin' t' +me. I were busy underneath th' ship, fixin' bolts when he tole me t' find +yo'. I wouldn't be s'prised if he had th' thing goin' soon." +<P> +"Do you think he'll be generating the new gas to-day?" asked Jack eagerly. +"That's the most troublesome part; to get that gas right." +<P> +"He didn't say nothin' t' me 'bout it," Washington stated, as he walked along +beside the two boys. "He jest seemed anxious like." +<P> +"We'd better hurry," advised Mark. "He may be at an important part in his +experiments and probably needs us. I hope it will work. He has spent many +days on it, and we all have worked hard. It ought to be a success." +<P> +"Perfesser allers makes things work," declared Washington stoutly. +<P> +"That's a good way to feel about it, anyway," observed Mark. "Well, we'll +soon know." +<P> +The three hurried to the shed which they could see as they rounded a turn +of the path through the wood. They noticed an elderly man approaching with +a gun on his shoulder. On one arm he carried a game bag. +<P> +"Guess Andy got something for dinner," remarked Jack. +<P> +"I hopes so, honey," put in Washington. "I'se got a sort of gone feelin' +in my stomach!" +<P> +"Any luck, Andy?" called Mark, when he came within hailing distance. +<P> +"Fine," replied Andy Sudds. "Rabbits and quail. We'll have a good dinner +to-morrow." +<P> +While Andy entered the living part of the big shed to put away his gun and +game, the boys and Washington kept on to the engine room. They found the +professor, with Bill and Tom, busy fitting pipes to the small engine which +was set up at one side of the structure. +<P> +"Come, boys, I need your aid," remarked Mr. Henderson as they entered. "Take +off your coats and pitch in. Tighten up these bolts, Jack. Mark, you mix +up those chemicals the way I taught you, and see that the dynamo is in working +order for Washington to attend to." +<P> +In a little while the shop was a veritable hive of industry, and it resounded +to the sound of hammers, wrenches and machinery. In the background was the +big ship, which seemed like two immense cigars, one above the other, the +lower one the larger. +<P> +"Where was you calalatin' t' take this here ship when it gits done, Perfesser?" +asked Washington, during a lull in the operations. +<P> +"Do you remember that big hole in the island we visited on our trip to the +south pole?" +<P> +"I suah does," answered the colored man. +<P> +"We are going to explore that," went on the scientist. "We are going to make +a voyage to the interior of the earth in our <I>Flying Mermaid."</I> +<P> +"Go down into th' earth!" exclaimed Washington, his eyes big with fright. +<P> +"Certainly; why not?" +<P> +"Not for mine!" cried the colored man, dropping the wrench he was holding. +"No sire I'm not goin' t' project myself int' a grave while I'se alive. Time +enough when I kicks th' bucket. No sir! If yo' an' the boys wants t' risk +yo' se'ves goin' down int' th' interior of th' earth, where th' Bible says +there's fiery furnaces, yo' kin go, but Washington White stays on terra cotta! +That's where he stays; He ain't ready t' be buried, not jest yet!" and the +frightened colored man started to leave the shed. +<h3>CHAPTER II</h3> +<h4>THE FLYING MERMAID</h4> +<P> +"HERE! Stop him!" cried Professor Henderson. "Don't let him get away. We +still need his help to get the ship in shape. He needn't be frightened. We're +not going to start at once." +<P> +Mark and Jack ran after Washington, whose progress was somewhat impeded because +he kept looking back as if he feared the new ship was chasing him. +<P> +"Come on back!" said Mark. "There's no danger, and if there was we're not +going to start to-day." +<P> +"Ain't yo' foolin' me?" asked Washington, pausing and looking doubtfully +at the boys. +<P> +"Of course not," answered Mark. "You know Professor Henderson would not make +you do anything you didn't want to do, Wash. He wishes you to stay and help +him get ready, that's all." +<P> +"Well, Washington," observed the aged scientist. "I didn't think you'd go +back on me." +<P> +"I'd do mos' anything fer yo', Perfesser," said the colored man, "but I got +t' beg off this time," and he looked at the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>as if he +thought the metal sides would open and devour him. +<P> +"Then help me get things in shape to generate the gas," the scientist said. +"I want to give the new vapor the first real test in lifting power to-day. +On the success of it depends the future of the ship." +<P> +Seeing there was no immediate danger of being carried to the centre of the +earth, Washington resumed his labors. The professor, the boys, Bill and Tom +were also hurrying matters to enable a test to be made before night. +<P> +As will readily be seen, even by those not familiar with the construction +of airships and submarines, the chief problem was to find some agent strong +enough to lift from the earth a weight heavier than had ever before been +put into an apparatus that was destined to traverse the clouds. For the +<I>Flying Mermaid </I>was not only an airship but an ocean voyager as well. +It had to be made light enough to be lifted far above the earth, yet the +very nature of it, necessitating it being made heavy enough to stand the +buffeting of the waves and the pressure of water, was against its flying +abilities. +<P> +Professor Henderson realized this and knew that the chief concern would be +to discover a gas or vapor with five times the lifting power of hydrogen, +one of the lightest gases known, and one sometimes used to inflate balloons. +<P> +After long study he had been partially successful, but he knew from experiments +made that the gas he had so far been able to manufacture would not answer. +What he wanted was some element that could be mixed with the gas, to neutralize +the attraction of gravitation, or downward pull of the earth. +<P> +While he was seeking this, and experimenting on many lines, the construction +of the air-water ship went on. In general the outward construction was two +cigar shaped hulls, one above the other. Aluminum, being the lightest and +strongest metal that could be used for the purpose, formed the main part +of both bodies. +<P> +The upper hull was one hundred feet long and twenty feet in diameter at the +widest part. It tapered to points at either end. It was attached to the lower +hull by strong braces, at either end, while from the center there extended +a pipe which connected with the lower section. This pipe was intended to +convey the lifting gas to the part which corresponded to the bag of the balloon, +save that it was of metal instead of silk, or rubber as is usual. +<P> +There were two reasons for this. One was that it would not be liable to puncture, +particularly in the proposed underground trip, and the other was that it +did not have to be so large as a cloth bag would have had to be. It was also +a permanent part of the ship, and on a voyage where part of the time the +travelers would be in the air and part on the water, and when the change +from one to the other would have to be made quickly, this was necessary. +It would have taken too long to raise the ship in the air had a cloth bag +been used to contain the gas. +<P> +The lower hull or main part of the craft was one hundred and fifty feet long, +and forty feet through at the largest part, in the centre. +<P> +It was divided into four sections. The forward one contained the sleeping +quarters of Professor Henderson and his crew. There was a small stateroom +for each one. Above was a conning or observation tower, reached by a small +flight of steps. From this tower the ship could be steered, stopped and started, +as could also be done from the engine room, which was in the after part of +the hull. +<P> +As in the <I>Porpoise </I>and <I>Monarch, </I>electricity formed the motive +power and was also used for many other purposes on board. Engines operated +by gas produced the current which heated, lighted and moved the ship, as +well as played a part in producing the wonderful gas. +<P> +The ship moved forward or backward by means of a novel arrangement. This +was by the power of compressed air. From either end of the lower hull there +projected a short pipe working in a ball and socket joint, so it could be +turned in any direction. By means of strong pumps a current of compressed +air could be sent out from either pipe. Thus when floating above the earth +the ship was forced forward by the blast of air rushing from the pipe at +the stern. It was the same principle as that on which a sky rocket is shot +heavenward, save that gases produced by the burning of powder in the pasteboard +rocket form its moving impulse. +<P> +In the case of the <I>Flying Mermaid, </I>it could be made to move backward +by sending the air out of the forward tube. Thus, when in the water, the +compressed air rushing from the pipe struck the fluid and forced the ship +forward or backward as was desired. It floated on the surface, the deck being +about three feet out of water, while the aluminum gas bag was overhead. +<P> +The engine room was a marvel of machine construction. It contained pumps +for air and water, motors, dynamos, gas engines, and a maze of wheels and +levers. Yet everything was very compact and no room was wasted. +<P> +The use of the air method of propulsion did away with the necessity of a +large propellor such as most airships have to use, a propellor which must +of necessity be very light and which is easily broken. +<P> +Next to the engine room was the kitchen. It contained an electric range and +all necessary appliances and utensils for preparing meals. There were lockers +and a large reserve storeroom which when the time came would be well stocked +with food. Forward of the kitchen was the living and dining room. It contained +comfortable seats, folding tables and a small library. Here, also were many +instruments designed to show how the various machines were working. There +were gages, pointers and dials, which told the direction the ship was traveling, +the speed and the distance above the earth or below the surface. Similar +indicators were in the conning tower, which had a powerful search light. +<P> +The ship was lighted throughout by incandescent lamps, and there was even +a small automatic piano worked by the electric current, on which popular +airs could be played. +<P> +If the gas and the gravity neutralizer worked as Professor Henderson hoped +they would, as soon as the ship was completed, all that would be necessary +to start on the voyage would be to fill the aluminum bag and set the air +compressor in motion. +<P> +The gas was made from common air, chemically treated and with a secret material +added which by means of a complicated machine in a measure did away with +the downward pull of the earth. Thus all that was necessary to carry on a +long voyage was a quantity of gasolene to operate the engine which worked +the electric machines, and some of this secret compound. +<P> +The professor and his helpers had been working to good advantage. At last +all was in readiness for the gas test. +<P> +It was proposed to try it on an experimental scale. Some of the fluid was +to be generated and forced into an aluminum cylinder under the same pressure +it would be used in the air ship. To this cylinder were attached weights +in proportion to the weight of the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>with its load of +human freight, engines and equipment. +<P> +"This cylinder is just one one-hundredth the size of the cylinder of the +ship," said the professor. "I am going to fasten to it a hundred pound weight. +If it lifts that our latest contrivance will be a success." +<P> +"You mean if the little cylinder pulls a hundred pounds up the big ship will +take us and the machinery up?" asked Mark. +<P> +"Certainly," answered the professor. "If this cylinder lifts a hundred pounds, +one a hundred times as big (as that of the <I>Mermaid </I>is), will lift +a hundred times as much, or ten thousand pounds. That is five tons, or more +than a ton over what I figure to be the weight of our ship and contents. +The latest war balloon can lift one ton with ease, and if my machine can +not do five times as well I shall be disappointed." +<P> +The last adjustments were made, pipes were run from the gas generator to +the cylinder, and the hundred pound weight was attached. +<P> +"Everybody look out now," said Mr. Henderson. "I am going to start the machine +and let the gas enter the cylinder. It is a very powerful gas and may break +the cylinder. If it does you must all duck." +<P> +The scientist gave a last look at everything. The boys got behind some boards +whence they could see without being in danger. Washington, who had little +fear so long as there was no danger of going under ground, took his place +at the dynamo. Andy Sudds, with Bill and Tom, stationed themselves in safe +places. +<P> +"All ready!" called the professor. +<P> +He pulled a lever toward him, turned a wheel and signalled to Washington +to start the dynamo. There was a sound of buzzing machinery, which was followed +by a hiss as the gas began to enter the cylinder under pressure. Would it +stand the strain? That question was uppermost in every one's mind save the +professor's. He only cared to see the cylinder leave the ground, carrying +the weight with it. That would prove his long labors were crowned with success. +<P> +Faster and faster whirred the dynamo. The gas was being generated from the +air. The secret chemical made a hissing which could be heard for some distance. +The gage registered a heavy pressure. Anxiously the professor watched the +cylinder. +<P> +"There!" he exclaimed at length. "It has all the gas it can hold. Now to +see if it works!" +<P> +He disconnected the pipe leading from the generator. This left the cylinder +free. It seemed to tremble slightly. There appeared to be a movement to the +hundred pound weight which rested on the ground. It was as if it was tugging +to get loose. +<P> +"There it goes! There it goes!" cried Mark, joyfully. +<P> +"Hurrah!" shouted Jack. "There she rises!" +<P> +"It suttinly am projectin' itself skyward!" yelled Washington, coming from +the dynamo. +<P> +Sure enough the cylinder was slowly rising in the air, bearing the weight +with it. It had lifted it clear from the ground and was approaching the roof +of the big shed. +<P> +"It will work! It will work!" exclaimed the professor, strangely excited. +<P> +The next instant the cylinder, carrying the weight, sailed right out of an +open skylight, and began drifting outside the shop, and across the fields. +<P> +"Quick! We must get it back!" cried Mr. Henderson. "If it gets away my secret +may be discovered and I will lose all! We must secure it!" +<P> +But the cylinder was now two hundred feet in the air and being blown to the +east, the weight dangling below it, making it look like a miniature airship. +<P> +"We can never catch that!" cried Mark. +<h3>CHAPTER III</h3> +<h4>WASHINGTON DECIDES</h4> +<P> +"WE must catch that cylinder!" the professor exclaimed. "Some one may find +it when it comes down and analyze the gas. Then he would discover how to +make it. The cylinder must come down!" +<P> +"Don't see how we can proximate ourselves inter th' vicinity of it lessen +we delegate th' imperial functions of orinthological specimens t' some member +of this here party," observed Washington. +<P> +"If you mean we can't catch that there contraption unless we turn into birds +I'll show you that you're mistaken!" cried Andy Sudds. "I guess I have a +trick or two up my sleeve," and the old hunter quickly threw open the breech +of his gun and inserted a couple of cartridges. +<P> +He raised the piece to his shoulder and took quick aim. There was a sliver +of flame, a puff of smoke and a sharp report. The professor and the boys +who were watching the cylinder saw it vibrate up in the air. Then there came +a whistling sound. An instant later the metal body began to descend, and +it and the weight fell to the earth. +<P> +"I'm sorry I had to put a bullet through it, Professor," said old Andy with +a queer smile, "but it was the only way I saw of bringing it down. Hope it +isn't damaged much." +<P> +"It doesn't matter if it is," the scientist answered. "I can make more cylinders, +but I don't want that secret of the gas to become known. Your bullet served +a good turn, Andy, for it let the compressed vapor out just in time." +<P> +"Then we may consider the experiment a success," said Mark, as Washington +went to where the cylinder had fallen, to detach it from the weight and bring +both to the shed. +<P> +"It seems so," Mr. Henderson answered. "True, it was only an experiment. +We have yet to test the ship itself." +<P> +"When can we do that?" asked Jack. +<P> +"I hope by Monday," the scientist answered. +<P> +"Will you try it in the water or air first?" asked Mark. +<P> +"I'm almost certain it will float in the water," the aged inventor said. +"It does not require much work to make a ship which will do that. But the +air proposition is another matter. However, since the cylinder rose, I am +pretty sure the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>will. +<P> +"But we have done enough work to-day. Let's rest and have something to eat. +Then, with Sunday to sit around and talk matters over, we will be ready for +Monday's test." +<P> +Some of the game Andy had killed was soon on the table, for Washington, in +addition to his other accomplishments, was an expert cook. During the evening +the boys and their friends sat in the living room of the big shed and talked +over the events of the day. +<P> +Sunday was spent in discussing what adventures might lie before them should +they be able to descend into the big hole. Washington did not say, much, +but it was easy to see he had no notion of going. He even began to pack his +few belongings in readiness to leave the service of Mr. Henderson, for whom +he had worked a good many years. +<P> +No one remained long abed Monday morning. Even Washington was up early in +spite of the interest he had lost in the professor's voyage. +<P> +"I jest wants t' see yo' start fer that place where they buries live folks," +he said. +<P> +In order to properly test the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>it was necessary to move +the craft from the shed from which place it had never been taken since it's +construction was started. It had been built on big rollers in anticipation +of this need, so that all which was now necessary was to open the doors at +the end, and roll the craft out. +<P> +This was accomplished with no small amount of labor, and it was nearly noon +before the big ship was moved into the open. It was shoved along to a little +clearing in front of the shed, where no trees would interfere with its possible +upward movement. +<P> +Everyone was bustling about. The professor was busiest of all. He went from +one machine to another; from this apparatus to that, testing here, turning +wheels there, adjusting valves and seeing that all was in readiness for the +generating of the powerful gas. +<P> +As the airship was half round on the bottom and as it rested in a sort of +semi-circular cradle; it brought the entrance some distance above the ground. +To make it easier to get in and out while preparations for the trial were +going on, Bill and Tom had made an improvised pair of steps, which were tied +to the side of the ship with ropes. +<P> +Up and down these the professor, the boys and Andy went, taking in tools +and materials, and removing considerable refuse which had accumulated during +the building of the craft. +<P> +Finally all was in readiness for starting the making of the gas. The ship +was not wholly complete and no supplies or provisions for the long voyage +had been taken aboard. The <I>Flying Mermaid </I>was about a ton lighter +than it would be when fully fitted out, but to make up for this the professor +had left in the ship a lot of tools and surplus machinery so that the craft +held as much weight as it would under normal conditions. If the gas lifted +it now it would at any other time. +<P> +"Start the generator," said Mr. Henderson, to Mark. "We'll soon see whether +we are going to succeed or fail." +<P> +The boy turned a number of levers and wheels. The machine which made the +powerful vapor was soon in operation. The professor had already added enough +of the secret compound to the tank containing the other ingredients, and +the big pump was sucking in air to be transformed into the lifting gas. +<P> +The boys and the professor were in the engine room. Andy Sudds, with Bill +and Tom, had taken their places in the living room, to more evenly balance +the ship, since the things in it were not yet all in their proper places. +As for Washington he was busy running from the shed to the ship with various +tools and bits of machinery the professor desired. +<P> +The gas was being generated rapidly. Throughout the ship there resounded +a hissing noise that told it was being forced through the pipe into the aluminum +shell above the ship proper. +<P> +"I wonder how soon it will begin to lift us," said Mark. +<P> +"It will take about half an hour," replied Mr. Henderson. "You see we have +first to fill the holder completely, since there is no gas in it. After this +we will keep some on hand, so that it will only need the addition of a small +quantity to enable the ship to rise." +<P> +He was busy watching the pointer on a dial which indicated the pressure of +the gas, and the lifting force. The boys were kept busy making adjustments +to the machinery and oiling bearings. +<P> +Suddenly, throughout the length of the craft there was felt a curious trembling. +It was as though the screw of a powerful steamer was revolving in the water. +<P> +"What is it?" asked Jack. +<P> +"I hope it is the lifting power of the gas making itself felt," the professor +answered. "Perhaps the <I>Flying Mermaid is </I>getting ready to try her +wings." +<P> +The trembling became more pronounced. The gas was being generated faster +than ever. The whole ship was trembling. Tom and Bill came from the room, +where they were stationed, to inquire the meaning, but were reassured by +the professor. +<P> +"Don't be alarmed if you find yourselves up in the air pretty soon," he remarked +with a smile. "Remember the <I>Electric Monarch, </I>and the flights she +took. We may not go as high as we did in her, but it will answer the same +purpose." +<P> +The gas was hissing through the big tube as it rushed into the overhead holder. +The gage indicated a heavy pressure. The ship began to tremble more violently +and to sway slightly from side to side. +<P> +"I think we shall rise presently," said Mr. Henderson. His voice showed the +pride he felt at the seeming success with which his invention was about to +meet. +<P> +Suddenly, with a little jerk, as though some one with a giant hand had plucked +the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>from the earth, the ship gave a little bound into +the air, and was floating free. +<P> +"Here we go!" cried Mr. Henderson. "The ship is a success. Now we're off +for the hole in the earth!" +<P> +The <I>Flying Mermaid </I>was indeed rising in the air. True it did not go +up so swiftly as had the <I>Monarch, </I>but then it was a much heavier and +stronger vessel, and flying was only one of its accomplishments. +<P> +"It's a success! It's a success!" shouted Mark, capering about in his excitement. +<P> +"Now we'll see what the centre of the earth looks like," went on Jack. "I +can hardly wait for the time to come when we are to start on the voyage." +<P> +At that instant, when the ship was but a few feet from the ground, but slowly +rising, the boys and the professor heard a shouting below them. +<P> +"What's that?" asked the scientist. "Is any one hurt?" +<P> +Mark ran to a small window, something like a port hole in an ocean steamer, +and looked out. +<P> +"Quick!" he shouted. "Stop the ship! Washington will be killed!" +<P> +In fact from the agonized yells which proceeded from somewhere under the +craft it seemed that the accident was in process of happening. +<P> +"Save me! Save me!" cried the colored man. "I'm goin' to fall! Catch me, +some one!" +<P> +"What is it?" asked the professor, making ready to shut off the power and +let the ship settle back to earth, from which it had moved about fifty feet. +<P> +"It's Washington," explained Mark. "He evidently tried to walk up the steps +just as the boat mounted skyward. He rolled down and managed to grab the +end of the rope which was left over after the steps were tied. Now he's swinging +down there." +<P> +"Are you going to lower the ship?" asked Jack. +<P> +"Of course!" exclaimed the professor. "I only hope he hangs on until his +feet touch the earth." +<P> +"Keep a tight hold!" shouted Mark, from out of the small window. +<P> +"That's th' truest thing yo' ever said!" exclaimed Washington. "You bet I'm +goin' to hold on, and I'm comin' up too," which he proceeded to do, hand +over hand, like a sailor. +<P> +The boys and the professor watched the colored man's upward progress. The +ship had hardly begun to settle as, in the excitement, not enough gas had +been let out. Closer and closer came Washington, until he was able to grasp +the edge of the opening, to which the steps were fastened. +<P> +"I thought you weren't coming with us," observed the professor, when he saw +that his helper was safe. +<P> +"I changed my mind," said the colored man. "It's jest luck. Seems like th' +ship done wanted me t' go 'long, an' I'm goin'. I'll take my chances on bein' +buried alive. I ain't never seen th' centre of th' earth, an' I want's to +'fore I die. I'm goin' 'long, Perfessor!" +<h3>CHAPTER IV</h3> +<h4>WHAT DID MARK SEE?</h4> +<P> +"WELL, I'm glad you've decided at last," the professor remarked. "Now come +inside and we'll see how the ship works." +<P> +Once over his fright, Washington made himself at home on the craft he had +helped build. He went from one room to another and observed the engine. +<P> +"She certainly am workin'" he observed with pride. "Are we still goin' up, +Perfessor?" +<P> +"Still mounting," replied Mr. Henderson, "We are now three hundred feet above +the earth," he added as he glanced at a registering gage. +<P> +The great air pump was set going and soon from the after tube, a big stream +of the compressed vapor rushed. It acted on the ship instantly and sent the +craft ahead at a rapid rate. By elevating or depressing the tube the craft +could be sent obliquely up or down. Then, by forcing the air from the forward +tube, the <I>Mermaid </I>was reversed and scudded backward. +<P> +But it was more with the ship's ability to rise and descend that Professor +Henderson was concerned, since on that depended their safety. So various +tests were made, in generating the gas and using the negative gravity apparatus. +<P> +All worked to perfection. Obeying the slightest turn of the wheels and levers +the <I>Mermaid </I>rose or fell. She stood still, suspended herself in the +air, or rushed backward and forward. +<P> +Of course the machinery was new and did not operate as smoothly as it would +later, but the professor and his friends were very well satisfied. +<P> +"Now we'll try something new," said the scientist to the two boys as they +stood beside him in the tower. "I only hope this part succeeds, and we shall +soon be off on our voyage." +<P> +He turned several levers. There was a hissing sound as the gas rushed from +the container, and the ship began to settle down. +<P> +"What's th' matter? Are we goin' t' hit th' earth?" yelled Washington, rushing +from the engine room. +<P> +"Keep quiet," ordered the professor. "We are only going down, that's all." +<P> +"But good land! Perfesser!" exclaimed the colored man. "The ocean's right +under us! You forgot you sailed sway from the island! We'll be drowned suah!" +<P> +"Leave it to me," said Mr. Henderson. "The <I>Flying Mermaid </I>is going +to take a bath!" +<P> +"As long as it swims it will be all right," observed Mark in a low tone to +Jack. "I'm glad I can take care of myself in the water." +<P> +Before Jack could reply the <I>Mermaid </I>seemed to take a sudden dive through +the air. The next instant she struck the water with a splash that sent the +waves rolling all about. The craft rocked violently to and fro on the surface +of the sea. For a while there were anxious hearts aboard, for there was no +certainty but that the ship might not sink to the bottom. +<P> +But the old professor had not calculated and builded in vain. After rocking +about like a vessel newly launched, the strange craft rode safely and upright +on the water. It set down far enough to bring the propelling tubes well under, +but not so far but that the conning tower was well out and there was a small +deck available. +<P> +"Now to see if we can conquer the water as we did the air!" cried the professor. +"Mark, start the air pump. Jack, you steer, for I want to watch the machinery +under the additional strain." +<P> +From the rear tube rushed such a volume of air that the ocean near it bubbled +and foamed. The ship trembled from stem to stern, and then, after hanging +for an instant as if undecided what to do, it began to move forward as easily +as though it had never sailed any other element than the sea. +<P> +"She fits her name!" the professor cried. "She is indeed the <I>Flying Mermaid, +</I>for she sails the ocean as easily as she navigates in the clouds!" +<P> +For a mile or two the craft was sent ahead over the waves. Then it was reversed +and run backwards. Satisfied that his long months of work had not gone for +naught, the professor after trying several experiments, decided to try and +raise the ship while in motion. +<P> +With Jack and Mark to look after the air pumps, while Washington, Tom and +Bill busied themselves in the engine room, Mr. Henderson began to generate +the gas and start the negative gravity apparatus. All the while the craft +was forging ahead. +<P> +There was again the hissing sound that told of the aluminum holder being +filled. For a few minutes there seemed to be no change, the <I>Mermaid +</I>plowing forward. +<P> +Then like a bird rising from the waves, or like a flying fish leaping from +the sea to escape some pursuing monster of the deep, the new ship shot up +diagonally from the surface and winged its way into the upper regions of +the air. +<P> +"Success! Success!" cried the professor. "This proves all I wanted to know. +Now we are ready for our great trip!" +<P> +Great were the rejoicings in the camp that night. It was like living over +again the days when they were aboard the diving <I>Porpoise </I>or the flying +<I>Monarch. </I>To the recollections were added the anticipations of what +was before them in the trip to the interior of the earth. +<P> +Busy days followed, for there was still much to be done to the <I>Flying +Mermaid. </I>The machinery, which was only partly completed, had to be finished. +Besides this the professor was working on some apparatus, the use of which +he did not disclose to any one. It was stored aboard the ship at the last +minute. +<P> +Plenty of provisions had to be taken aboard, and many supplies needed to +work the <I>Mermaid </I>and insure that it would go to the end of the voyage. +The materials for generating the gas and negative gravity, spare parts, records +for the automatic piano and other things were stored away. +<P> +Some guns and ammunition were taken along as were a few revolvers, since +old Andy had said it was best to prepare for any thing in the shape of enemies +or wild beasts that might be met with in the interior regions. +<P> +It was decided to make the start by sailing along the surface of the sea +for several days, as in the event of any weakness in the machinery being +discovered there would be less danger. If, at the end of four days, no trouble +developed, the professor said he would send the <I>Mermaid </I>into the air +and make the rest of the voyage through the sky. +<P> +The night before the start was to be made the professor, with the boys, +Washington and the other helpers, went about through the various shops and +buildings, locking them up securely. For they could not tell how long they +would be away, and they had to leave behind much valuable material. +<P> +As there were several things that needed attention they divided the work +up. Mark had finished his share and was walking back toward the living cabin +where they were all quartered, when, down at the shore, near where the boat +was moored, he fancied he saw, in the gathering darkness, a moving figure. +<P> +"I wonder who that can be," he thought. "All the others are near the machine +shop, for I just left them there. Perhaps it's some one trying to spy out +how the <I>Mermaid </I>is built." +<P> +Knowing the professor wanted his secret well guarded, Mark walked softly +toward the little dock that served as a place whence the <I>Mermaid </I>could +be easily boarded. As he approached he saw the figure moving. Something struck +the boy as peculiar. +<P> +Though the object had some of the characteristics of a man it did not walk +like a human being, but shuffled along more like a huge ape or monkey. It +seemed bent over, as if it stooped toward the ground. +<P> +"Who are you?" called Mark suddenly. +<P> +For an instant the figure halted and then hurried on faster than before, +with a curious, shuffling walk. It was approaching the ship. +<P> +Somehow it struck Mark as if it was an uncanny being; an inhabitant of some +other world. Then he laughed at his half-fear, and started on a run toward +the dock. +<P> +"If it's some tramp trying to find a place to sleep he'd better not go aboard +the ship, he might do some damage," the boy thought. +<P> +He could hardly see the figure now as it had passed into the shadow cast +by the boat. He was about to summon the professor to make an investigation, +when Washington started going the search light which was placed just over +the door of the living cabin. It was kept there as a sort of beacon light, +as, near the island was a dangerous ledge of rocks. +<P> +Then, in the blinding white glare from the big lantern as Washington accidentally +swung it toward the <I>Mermaid, </I>Mark beheld a strange sight. +<P> +The figure he had been watching stood out in bold relief. Though it was shaped +like a human being it was not like any person the boy had ever seen. It seemed +covered with a skin twice too large for it; a skin, which, in spite of the +clothes that concealed it, hung in folds about the arms and legs, dropping +pendent like from the neck like a big garment, and flapping in the wind. +<P> +For an instant Mark was so startled he cried out, and the professor and the +others ran to see what was the matter. +<P> +"There—by the ship! A horrible creature!" exclaimed Mark. +<P> +Shouting to Washington to keep the light steady in the direction of the dock, +Mr. Henderson ran toward the moored <I>Mermaid. </I>Jack, Andy, Bill and +Tom, with Mark in the rear followed him. +<P> +"Nothing here," said the scientist, after a careful search about. "Are you +sure you saw something, Mark?" +<P> +"Positively," replied the lad with a shudder. He described the vision of +the darkness. +<P> +"I guess it was a big otter, or maybe an enormous turtle," the professor +said. +<h3>CHAPTER V</h3> +<h4>ATTACKED BY A WHALE</h4> +<P> +BUT Mark was certain it was nothing like that, though a careful search failed +to reveal anything or any person near the ship. It was too dark to examine +for footprints, and even Mark, after taking a look all about, felt he might +have been deceived by shadows. Still he was a little nervous, and could hardly +sleep for imagining what the thing he saw could have been. +<P> +The next day every one was so busy that no one, not even Mark, recalled the +little excitement of the night before. Shortly after noon, final preparations +having been made, they all got aboard the <I>Mermaid </I>and started off. +<P> +It was a bright sunshiny day, and the craft, speeding away from the island +where it had been constructed, over the dancing blue waves, must have presented +a strange sight had there been any spectators. For surely no such ship had +ever before sailed those waters. +<P> +However, there was no other vessel in sight, and the island, as far as the +professor and his friends knew, had never been inhabited. +<P> +"We will not try for any great speed," Mr. Henderson remarked as he, with +Mark and Jack, stood in the conning tower managing the <I>Mermaid. </I>"We +don't want to strain any joints at the start or heat any engine bearings. +There will be time enough for speed later." +<P> +"Yes, and we may need it more when we get into the centre of the earth than +we do now," observed Mark. +<P> +"Why so?" asked Jack. +<P> +"No telling what we may run up against underneath the ground," went on Mark. +"We may have to fight strange animals and stranger beings. Besides, the +atmosphere and water there can't be the same as up here; do you think so, +Professor?" +<P> +For a few minutes the scientist was silent. He seemed to be thinking deeply. +<P> +"I will tell you what I believe," he said at length. "I have never spoken +of it before, but now that we are fairly started and may eventually have +a chance to prove my theory, I will say that I think the centre of this earth +on which we live is hollow. Inside of it, forming a core, so to speak, I +believe there is another earth, similar to ours in some respects which revolves +inside this larger sphere." +<P> +They were well out to sea now, as they could observe when they emerged on +the little deck. Above their heads was the aluminum gas holder, which served +as a sort of protection from the sun that was quite warm. The <I>Mermaid +</I>rode with an easy motion, being submerged just enough to make her steady, +yet not deep enough to encounter much resistance from the water. In fact +it could not have been arranged better for speed or comfort. +<P> +"I think we will sail well to the eastward before making our course south," +Mr. Henderson said. "I do not care to meet too many ships, as those aboard +will be very curious and I do not want too much news of this venture to get +out. We will take an unfrequented route and avoid delays by being hailed +by every passing vessel whose captain will wonder what queer craft he had +met with." +<P> +The boys enjoyed the sail, for the weather could not have been better. Even +old Andy, who seldom said much, seemed delighted with the prospect of having +strange adventures. He had his rifle with him, and, indeed, he seldom went +anywhere that he did not carry it. +<P> +"For there's no telling when you may see something you want to shoot or that +ought to be shot," he used to say, "and it's always the man without a gun +who needs it most. So I'm taking no chances." +<P> +They sailed all that afternoon without meeting with a craft of any kind. +Straight to the east they went, and when night began to settle down Washington +got supper. It was decided to run slowly after dark until all hands were +more familiar with the ship. +<P> +Morning found the <I>Mermaid </I>about a hundred miles from the island where +she had been launched. The night had been uneventful, except that Mark told +Jack he heard some strange noise near his bunk several times. He was nearest +the storeroom where spare parts, and the curious cylinder the professor had +brought aboard, were kept. +<P> +"I guess it was rats," said Jack. "They are always in ships." +<P> +"Old wooden ships, yes," admitted Mark. "But I'll bet there's not a rat aboard +the <I>Mermaid."</I> +<P> +"Then you were dreaming," said Jack, as if that settled it. +<P> +Mark did not speak further of the noise, but he did considerable thinking. +However, the next night there was no further disturbance. +<P> +The fourth day out, when everything had passed off well, the engines doing +their best, the professor decided to speed them up a bit, since he was satisfied +they had "found" themselves as mechanics term it. +<P> +"We'll see how fast we can go through the water," said Mr. Henderson, "and +then I think we can safely turn our course south. We are well beyond the +ordinary lines of travel now." +<P> +Having oiled the bearings well, and seen that everything was in place and +properly adjusted, the professor and the boys took their places in the conning +tower, while Washington, Tom and Bill remained in the engine room. Andy stayed +on deck with his gun. +<P> +"I might see a big fish, and we could vary our bill of fare," he said with +a laugh. +<P> +"Here we go!" exclaimed the professor as he shifted the levers and turned +some wheels and valves. "Now we'll see how fast we can travel." +<P> +As he spoke the <I>Mermaid </I>responded to the added impulse of the compressed +air and shot through the water at a terrific speed. The sudden increase in +momentum almost threw the boys from their feet, and they would have fallen +had they not grasped some projecting levers. +<P> +"I guess that will do," Said the scientist. "I think we have speed enough +for almost any emergency. I'll let her run at this rate for a while, and +then we'll slack up." +<P> +Looking ahead, the boys could see the green waters parting in front of the +bow of the <I>Mermaid, </I>as if to make room for her. Two huge waves were +thrown upon either side. +<P> +Suddenly, dead ahead, there loomed up a big black object. +<P> +"Look out you'll hit the rock!" cried Mark to the professor, who was steering. +<P> +With a turn of his wrist Mr. Henderson moved the wheel which controlled the +tube. It was deflected and sent the boat to larboard. +<P> +At that instant from the rock two small fountains of water rose in the air, +falling back in a shower of spray through which the sun gleamed. +<P> +"That's not a rock! It's a big whale!" cried Jack. "And we're going to hit +him!" +<P> +The professor had miscalculated the speed of the craft, or else had not thrown +her far enough to larboard, for, a second later, the <I>Mermaid </I>was almost +upon the big leviathan. +<P> +With a desperate twirling of the steering wheel the professor veered the +craft as far as possible. But all he could do did not suffice, for the craft +hit the whale a glancing blow on the side, and the ship careened as if she +would turn turtle. +<P> +At the same time there rang out from upon deck the sound of a rifle shot. +Old Andy had taken a chance at the enormous creature of the deep. +<P> +"Hurrah!" the bays heard him shout. "I give him one plumb in the eye! A fine +shot! And we hit him besides with the boat. I guess he's a goner!" +<P> +"I'm afraid not," muttered the professor. "That was a bad blow we struck +him, but I think it will only ruffle his temper. We'll have to look sharp +now, boys." +<P> +By this time the ship had rushed past the whale, but the boys, looking through +a window in the rear of the tower could see the huge body. Now the fountains +of water which the whale spouted were tinged with red. +<P> +"He's bleeding!" exclaimed the professor. "I guess Andy hit him in a vital +spot." +<P> +"But not vital enough!" cried Mark. "See! He's coming after us!" +<P> +And so it proved. The whale, angered, and, probably half crazed by the pain +of the bullet and the blow, was coursing after the ship, coming on with the +speed of an express train. Straight at the <I>Mermaid </I>he lunged his huge +bulk. +<P> +"We must escape him!" cried Mr. Henderson. "If he hits us he'll send us to +the bottom!" +<P> +He had made ready to slow up the <I>Mermaid </I>to see if it had sustained +any damage from the impact with the whale, but when he saw the monster coming +after the boat he knew the only safety lay in flight. +<P> +"Let us go up into the air and so escape him!" cried Jack, with sudden +inspiration. +<P> +For an instant neither Mark nor the professor grasped what Jack meant. Then, +with an exclamation, the professor pulled forward the lever that generated +the gas and set working the gravity neutralizer, which would enable the ship +to rise. +<P> +Faster through the water went the <I>Mermaid, </I>and faster after her came +the whale. Above the hum of the engines was heard the hiss of the powerful +gas. The ship trembled more violently. +<P> +"We are rising!" exclaimed the professor, as he looked at a gage. +<P> +The boys could feel the craft lifting from the waves which clung to her as +if they hated to lose her. The boys knew the gas was beginning to operate. +<P> +"If it is not too late!" whispered Mark, half to himself. +<P> +For the monster of the seas was coming on, lashing the water to foam with +his terrible flukes, and sending aloft a bloody spray. His speed was awful. +<P> +Now he was but ten feet away from the fleeing craft—now but eight—now five! +Ten seconds more and the big head, like the blunt stern of a battle ship, +forced forward by the tons of blubber, flesh, bone and fat behind it would +strike the <I>Mermaid </I>and crush it like an egg shell. +<P> +Now if ever was the need for the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>to prove herself worthy +of the name. Now, if ever, was the time for her to leave the watery element +and take to the lighter one. +<P> +And she did. With a last tremble, as if to free herself from the hold of +the waves, the gallant craft soared up into the air, leaving the water, which +dripped from her keel like a fountain's spray, and shooting aloft like a +bird, escaped her terrible enemy which passed under her, so close that the +lower part of the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>scraped the whale's back. +<P> +"Saved!" exclaimed the professor. +<h3>CHAPTER VI</h3> +<h4>THE CYCLONE</h4> +<P> +IT was only in the nick of time, for a second later and the big mammal of +the ocean would have struck the ship and split it from stem to stern. +<P> +Higher and higher into the air mounted the <I>Flying Mermaid, </I>while in +the water below, the whale, incensed by missing his prey, was lashing the +waves to foam. +<P> +"Well, that was a narrow squeak; as close as I ever care to come to it!" +exclaimed Andy as he let go of the steel rail to which he was clinging and +entered the conning tower. "I had no idea of hitting the big fish." +<P> +"I guess he would have taken after us whether you had fired at him or not," +said Mr. Henderson. "He was probably looking for trouble, and took the first +thing that came in his way, which happened to be us. Some whales are like +that, so I have read; big bull creatures, exiled from the school to which +they once belonged, they get like mad creatures and know neither friend nor +foe. Something like rogue elephants, I imagine." +<P> +Now, having thus unexpectedly risen into the air, the professor decided to +continue travel in that style for a while at least. It would require less +force to propel the ship, and the going would be more comfortable, since +in the upper regions the <I>Mermaid </I>rode on an even keel, while in the +water there was more or less rolling, due to the action of the waves. +<P> +Once recovered from their fright caused by the whale, and having lost sight +of the enormous creature, for they were now far above the ocean, the adventurers +began to think of something to eat. +<P> +Washington lost little time in preparing a meal, and it was eaten with a +relish. The electric cooking stove worked to perfection, for the colored +man had learned how to use that aboard the <I>Porpoise </I>and <I>Monarch, +</I>and could be depended on to turn out appetizing dishes. +<P> +"What do you say to traveling through the air at night?" asked Mr. Henderson, +as he arose from the table. +<P> +"Suits me," replied Mark. "There's less danger than in the water, I think." +<P> +Bill, Tom and Washington arranged to stand the night watch, and, when the +professor had examined the engines and given orders about keeping the ship +on her course through the air, he retired to his bunk. Jack and Mark soon +followed. +<P> +It must have been about midnight when Mark was awakened by a movement that +seemed to come from the storeroom next to where his sleeping place was located. +At first he thought he had been dreaming, but, as he found he was wide awake, +he knew it was no imagination that had affected him. +<P> +"I certainly heard something," he said to himself. "It sounded just as it +did the other night. I wonder if I ought to investigate." +<P> +He thought over the matter carefully as he sat upright in his bunk in the +darkness. True the noise might be a natural one, due to the vibration of +the engine, or to some echo from the machinery. As Mark listened he heard +it again. +<P> +This time he realized it was the slow movement of some heavy body. He felt +a cold shiver run over him and his hair evinced an uncomfortable tendency +to stand upright. But he conquered his feelings and resolved to keep cool +and see if he could discover what had awakened him. +<P> +He got up and moved softly about the little room that contained his bunk. +He could hear better now, and knew it was no echo or vibration that had come +to his ears. +<P> +Once again he heard the strange sound. It was exactly the same as before; +as if some big creature was pulling itself over the floor. +<P> +"Maybe it's a snake; a water snake!" thought Mark. "It may have crawled aboard +when we did not notice it." +<P> +Then he remembered that the ship had not been open in any way that would +enable a serpent to come on it, since it had been started on its ocean trip. +Before that, he was sure no snake had entered the <I>Flying Mermaid. </I>Still +it sounded more like a snake than anything else. +<P> +"I'm going to make a search," decided the boy. +<P> +He took a small portable electric light, run by a storage battery, and, slipping +on a pair of shoes and a bath robe, he left his stateroom. +<P> +He had decided that the noise came from the storage compartment and so made +for that. The door he knew was not locked, since he had seen Mr. Henderson +go in late that afternoon, and the professor had used no key. +<P> +Moving softly, Mark left his room and soon found himself in a corridor, on +either side of which were located the sleeping quarters of the others. He +did not want to awaken them, and, perhaps, be laughed at for his curiosity. +<P> +To get to the storeroom Mark had to go first from the corridor into the dining +room. He soon reached the door that guarded what he thought might be a strange +secret. Trying the knob softly he found it giving under his fingers. +<P> +"I wonder if I had better go in," he thought. "Perhaps, after all, it was +only rats, as Jack said." +<P> +But, even as he listened he again heard the odd sound coming from the room. +This determined him. He would solve the mystery if possible. +<P> +Cautiously he turned the knob. The door was slowly swinging open when Mark +was startled by a noise from behind him. He turned suddenly to see Professor +Henderson confronting him. +<P> +"What is it, Mark? Is the ship on fire? What's the matter? Is any one hurt?" +<P> +"I was just going in this room to——" began Mark. +<P> +"Don't do it! Don't do it!" exclaimed the professor in an excited whisper. +"No one must go in that room. I forgot to tell you and Jack about it. No +one must enter. It contains a secret!" +<P> +"I heard a strange noise and——" Mark began again. +<P> +"It could make no noise! It would be impossible for it to make a noise!" +the professor exclaimed. +<P> +"I heard something," the boy insisted. +<P> +"You were dreaming!" said the professor. "Now go back to bed, Mark, and don't +let this happen again. Remember, no one must enter that room unless I give +permission!" +<P> +Somewhat crestfallen at the outcome of his investigations, but realizing +that the professor could do what he wanted to aboard his own ship, Mark went +back to bed. But he could not sleep. All the rest of the night he was wondering +whether Mr. Henderson had some strange creature hidden aboard the <I>Mermaid. +</I>He feared lest the old scientist's mind might be affected and, in his +wildness he had made some infernal machine that would, in time, blow the +whole ship apart. +<P> +But tired nature asserted itself at last, and, weary with vain imaginings, +Mark fell into a slumber. The next morning he awoke with a start from a dream +that he was being devoured by an immense water snake. +<P> +He said nothing to the others about his night's adventure, for, as it transpired, +no one else had been awakened by his investigations. The professor did not +refer to his conversation with Mark. +<P> +"There's something queer going on aboard the ship this trip," said Mark to +himself. "But I guess it's none of my business. Professor Henderson seems +to know what he is doing and I guess I can trust him." +<P> +He resolved to think no more of the strange noises and movements, and, for +several nights thereafter he was not disturbed by them. +<P> +The weather, which, up to this time had been fair, took a sudden turn for +the worse about the fourth day after Mark's little night expedition. One +evening the sun sank in a mass of dull lead-colored clouds and a sharp wind +sprang up. +<P> +"We're going to have a storm," said Mr. Henderson. "It's liable to be a bad +one, too, from the way the barometer is falling." +<P> +He looked at the glass, and scanned the various instruments that told how +high up the <I>Mermaid </I>was and how fast she was traveling. +<P> +"We're pretty high up in the air," he said, "and scooting along at about +fifty miles an hour. We are going against the wind, too, but fortunately +it is not blowing hard." +<P> +At that moment there sounded from without a peculiar howling sound, as if +a siren whistle was being blown. +<P> +"'Pears like there's goin' t' be a tumultuous demonstration of sub-maxiliary +contortions in th' empherial regions contiguous t' th' upper atmosphere!" +exclaimed Washington, entering from the engine room into the conning tower. +<P> +"What's the trouble?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"Terrible big black cloud chasin' us from behind!" exclaimed the colored +man. +<P> +Noting the alarm in Washington's voice the professor glanced from the rear +window. What he saw caused him to exclaim: +<P> +"It's a cyclone! We must drop down to avoid it!" +<P> +He sprang to a lever controlling the gas and yanked it toward him. There +was a shrill hissing sound, and a second later the <I>Mermaid </I>began to +sink. The boys watching the gages on the wall of the tower, saw that the +craft was falling rapidly. +<P> +But, with a rush and roar, the terrible wind was upon them. It caught the +craft in its fearful grip and heeled it over as a ship careens to the ocean +blast. +<P> +"It's a storm in the upper regions! We'll find it calm below!" cried the +professor above the howling of the gale. He opened the gas outlet wider and +the ship fell more rapidly. +<P> +"Are you sure we're over the ocean?" asked Mark. +<P> +"Positive!" the professor called back. "We have been traveling straight south +over the Atlantic for the last week. We will land in the midst of the waters +and float safely." +<P> +Lower and lower went the <I>Mermaid. </I>The wind was now blowing with the +force of a tornado, and, as the craft had to slant in order to descend, it +felt the power of the gale more than if it had scudded before it. But, by +skilful use of the directing tube, the professor was able to keep the boat +from turning over. As they came further down toward the earth the force of +the wind was felt less and less, until, as they came within two hundred feet +of the water which they saw below them in the gathering dusk, it died out +altogether. +<P> +"Now we are free from it," said the professor as the <I>Mermaid </I>came +down on the waves like an immense swan. +<P> +"Are you going ahead or going to stop here?" asked Mark +<P> +"We'll keep right on," Mr. Henderson answered. "No telling when the storm +may strike down here. We'll go as far as we can to-night." +<h3>CHAPTER VII</h3> +<h4>A QUEER SAIL</h4> +<P> +NOW that the fear and worriment was over they all began to feel hungry, and, +while Mark and Jack took charge of the conning tower Washington got breakfast. +The professor seemed preoccupied during the meal, and several times, when +Mark spoke to him, he did not reply. +<P> +"I wonder if he is worried about something, or is thinking of something which +seems to be concealed in the storeroom," the boy thought. +<P> +But, after a while, the professor seemed to be more like himself. He was +busy over several maps and charts, and then announced the ship would try +air-sailing again for a while. +<P> +"We can make better time above than we can on the water," he said, "and I +am anxious to get to the mysterious island and learn what is in store for +us." +<P> +Perhaps if the professor had been able to look ahead, and see what was soon +going to happen, he would not have been so anxious for it to occur. +<P> +It was shortly after dinner when, the gas container having been filled, the +ship rose in the air, and began sailing over the ocean, about a mile up. +The day was a fine one, and, as they were moving south, it was constantly +growing warmer. Down on the water, in fact, it was quite hot, but in the +air it was just right. +<P> +Like some immense bird the <I>Mermaid </I>went flying through the air. The +boys and the professor sat upon the deck in easy chairs. It was like being +on the top of some tall "sky-scraper" building which, by some strange power, +was being moved forward. Below them the ocean tumbled in long, lazy swells. +<P> +Suddenly Mark, who was looking through a telescope at the expanse of water +stretched out under them, gave a cry. +<P> +"There's a ship! She's on fire!" +<P> +"Where?" asked the professor, stretching out his hand for the glass. +<P> +"Just to the port of the forward tube. See the smoke!" exclaimed Mark. +<P> +Mr. Henderson looked. Through the lens he saw a column of black vapor rising +skyward. Mingled with it were red flames. +<P> +"Lower the <I>Mermaid!" </I>he cried. "We must save those on board if we +can!" +<P> +Mark ran to the conning tower, where Washington was, to give the order. The +colored man, who was looking ahead, intent on guiding the ship, did not at +first hear what Mark called. +<P> +"Lower us! Send the <I>Mermaid </I>down!" Mark cried again. +<P> +The sudden shout, and the excited voice of Mark so startled Washington, that, +fearing some accident had happened, he pulled the lever, controlling the +gas supply, with more force than necessary. +<P> +There was a loud explosion, followed by a crackling sound, a flash of light, +and the <I>Mermaid </I>came to a sudden stop. +<P> +"What's the matter?" cried Mark, feeling that something was wrong. +<P> +"I don't know!" Washington replied, as he dashed toward the engine room. +<P> +The <I>Mermaid, </I>her forward flight checked, hung in the air, suspended, +neither rising or falling. +<P> +"Why don't we go on down?" the professor asked, hurrying to the tower. +<P> +"There has been an explosion—an accident!" exclaimed Mark. "I guess we can't +go down!" +<P> +"But we must!" Mr. Henderson insisted, seizing the lever which should have +produced a downward motion. The handle swung to and fro. It was disconnected +from the apparatus it operated. +<P> +The ship was now stationary in the air, moving neither forward nor backward, +neither rising nor falling. Washington had stopped the air pumps as soon +as he learned something was wrong. +<P> +When Mr. Henderson saw the useless lever, which had controlled the outlet +of gas from the holder, he ran out on deck. One glance told him what had +happened. One of the electric wires had become short-circuited,—that is, +the insulation had worn off and allowed the current to escape. This had produced +a spark, which had exploded the gas which was in the pipe leading from the +generator up into the aluminum holder. Fortunately there was an automatic +cut-off for the supply of vapor, or the whole tank would have gone up. +<P> +As it was, only a small quantity had blown up, but this was enough to break +the machinery at the point where the lever in the conning tower joined the +pipe. If it had not been for the automatic cut-off all the gas in the holder +would have poured out in a great volume, and the ship would have fallen like +a shot. +<P> +"Can we do nothing to save those on the burning vessel?" asked Mark, pointing +to where a cloud of smoke hung over the ocean. +<P> +"I fear not, now," answered the professor. "We are in a bad plight ourselves." +<P> +"Are we in any danger?" asked Jack. +<P> +"Not specially," Mr. Henderson replied. "But we must find a means of lowering +ourselves gradually." +<P> +"Then it will be too late to save any of those on the ship," observed Mark. +<P> +"I'm afraid so," the scientist made reply. +<P> +The <I>Mermaid </I>rested some distance above the surface of the waters. +She moved slightly to and fro with the wind, and rocked gently. The professor +was examining the broken machinery. +<P> +"I have a plan!" suddenly cried Mark. +<P> +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"Can't we bore a hole in the tank, insert a small faucet or tap, and let +the gas out that way gradually?" asked the boy. "When we get down we can +rescue those in danger of fire, and, later, can repair the break." +<P> +"The very thing!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "I never thought of that! Here, +Washington! Bring me a drill, and a small stop-cock!" +<P> +The drill was obtained from the engine room. Working rapidly Mr. Henderson +bored a hole in the lower part of the holder. As soon as the metal was penetrated +the gas, which was under considerable pressure, rushed from the tank with +a hissing sound. At once the <I>Mermaid </I>began to settle rapidly. +<P> +But the professor was prepared for this. He thrust the end of the stop-cock +into the hole. It was screwed fast and the valve turned. This stopped the +flow of gas and checked the descent of the ship. Then, by opening the tap +the vapor was allowed to escape gradually, bringing the <I>Flying Mermaid +</I>gently to the water. +<P> +As the adventurers approached they could see that the vessel was now a mass +of flames. The wind was driving the fire toward the forecastle, and the crew +had sought refuge aft. But this expedient could not last long, for, already +the tongues of fire were licking the sides of the craft and coming nearer +and nearer the seemingly doomed men. The vessel was a large one, and heavily +laden. +<P> +As those in peril caught sight of the <I>Mermaid </I>settling down into the +water, apparently from the clouds, their fears gave place to astonishment. +So great was this that they ceased their cries of terror. Then, as they saw +that the strange craft navigated the ocean, for the engines were started +aboard the <I>Mermaid, </I>they began to call for help. +<h3>CHAPTER VIII</h3> +<h4>THE FLYING MERMAID DISABLED</h4> +<P> +"WE'LL save you!" shouted Mr. Henderson, who was on the deck, while Mark +was steering the craft. "Hold on a few minutes longer and we'll be alongside!" +<P> +"They're real! They're real!" some of those aboard the burning ship could +be heard to shout. Evidently more than one of them had taken the <I>Mermaid +</I>for a delusion of their fear-crazed brain. +<P> +"They are real persons!" they called again and again. "They are coming to +save us!" +<P> +Mr. Henderson ran his ship as near the burning craft as he dared. Then he +called to the crew to leap into the water and swim to him. He, with Washington, +Jack, Bill and Tom, stood ready to haul aboard any who were too weak to help +themselves. +<P> +In a few minutes all of those left alive on the sailing vessel—fourteen +in all—had come safely aboard the <I>Mermaid. </I>The ship was now completely +enveloped in flames. +<P> +"Are there any more left on her?" asked Mr. Henderson of one who appeared +to be a mate of the burning craft. +<P> +"Not a soul!" was the answer. "The captain and ten men perished in the flames. +The fire broke out a week ago in the lower hold. We fought it as well as +we could but it got the best of us. Then it suddenly broke through the decks, +almost like an explosion, a little while ago, and the captain and others +were lost, and so were our small boats. We managed to get aft but were about +to give up when you appeared." +<P> +"What ship is it and where are you from?" +<P> +"The <I>Good Hope, </I>laden with logwood, hides, jute and other materials +from South America," the mate answered. "We were bound for New York." +<P> +"It is more like the <I>Last Hope </I>instead of the <I>Good Hope," +</I>observed Mr. Henderson in a quiet voice, as he saw the flames mount higher +and higher over the ship. A few seconds later the craft seemed rent by an +internal explosion. It appeared to break in two parts, and, amid a shower +of sparks and a cloud of black smoke, the vessel sank under the water and +was seen no more. +<P> +The rescued men turned to behold the final end of their ship. They betrayed +no particular emotion, and some of them even laughed, which the professor +thought, at the time, was rather strange. But there was little opportunity +for speculation. The men were in a sad plight. Few of them had more than +the clothes they stood in, though each one wore about his waist a belt, and +all of them seemed to guard the leather circlets jealously. +<P> +The professor and his crew were soon busy supplying remedies for burns, since +several of the men were seared by the flames. Then, as it was learned they +had eaten nothing for many hours, it having been impossible to use the galley, +a meal was prepared and the survivors of the wreck were well fed. +<P> +The hunger of the newcomers having been appeased, they showed much curiosity +over the strange craft that had so opportunely come to their rescue. Most +of the sailors were ignorant men, and the professor had little fear of them +learning anything concerning his secrets. He explained briefly about the +<I>Mermaid, </I>but said nothing of whither she was bound. +<P> +The addition of fourteen men to the rather small accommodations of the +<I>Mermaid </I>was a serious matter to consider. The ship was able to hold +them all, and even to sail through the air with them, since Mr. Henderson +had provided an excess of power. But it was going to be a problem to feed +so many, and still save enough provisions, for the long voyage which lay +ahead. +<P> +However, Mr. Henderson felt his first duty to be toward his fellowmen, even +if his voyage must be delayed, or given up for a time, while he got more +provisions. There would be no sleeping quarters for the sailors, but when +this was explained to them they cheerfully said they would sleep on deck +if necessary. In fact some of them had to, but as the weather was warm and +clear this was no hardship. A few found quarters in the engine room and other +apartments of the <I>Mermaid.</I> +<P> +Finding, after an examination, that his ship was in good order save for the +broken gas apparatus, Mr. Henderson gave orders to proceed along the surface +of the ocean. The sailors wanted to see how it felt to mount into the air, +but Mr. Henderson, refused to attempt a flight until he had made complete +repairs, and this would take a day or more. +<P> +At this there appeared to be some discontent among the survivors, and they +muttered to each other as they stood in a group on deck. But the professor +and his assistants were too busy with their preparations for fixing the break +to notice this. +<P> +While the men were gathered in a knot near the after part of the small deck, +the mate separated from them, and, coming close to where Mark was standing, +unscrewing some of the broken parts of the pipe said, in a low voice. +<P> +"Tell the captain to watch out." +<P> +"What do you mean?" asked Mark quickly. +<P> +"Hush! Not so loud!" the mate exclaimed. "If the men hear me talking to you, +or see me, they may kill me. Tell the captain to look out; that's all. Be +on guard, and watch the engine room carefully." +<P> +"But why—?" Mark began, when, turning suddenly, the mate left him. It was +well he did so, for, at that instant, one of the sailors, who had observed +the two conversing, strolled in their direction. +<P> +Much alarmed, Mark sought Mr. Henderson and told him what he had heard. +<P> +"I suppose the fire may have turned the poor man's head," the scientist said. +"I wonder if he thinks the men I rescued would mutiny and take possession +of my ship? If they did they would not know how to work it, so what good +would it do?" +<P> +"Hadn't we better look out?" asked Mark. +<P> +"I'm not afraid," replied the professor. "I will be too busy the next few +days, repairing the break, to think of anything else. Besides, what would +they want to harm us for? Didn't we save their lives?" +<P> +Seeing the scientist placed no faith in what the mate had said, Mark went +back to his task. +<P> +It soon became too dark to work, and it was decided, after supper, to halt +the ship until morning as it would be less risky. +<P> +Mark did not sleep well, his dreams being disturbed by visions of pirates +and black flags. But morning came and nothing had developed. The men seemed +to recover their spirits with daybreak, and mast of the crew, after breakfast, +greeted Mr. Henderson pleasantly, and asked to be allowed to help fix the +ship. +<P> +It took the skilled labor of the professor, Washington and the boys to mend +the break, and, even at that, it was four days in the repairing. But at last +the final bolt was in place, and the <I>Mermaid </I>was able to resume her +trips through the air. +<P> +"We will rise the first thing in the morning," said the professor to Mark +and Jack that night. "I am anxious to see how the ship behaves with a big +load aboard." +<h3>CHAPTER IX</h3> +<h4>THE MUTINY</h4> +<P> +MARK was awakened that night by feeling some one trying to turn him over. +At first he thought it was Jack, and sleepily muttered that he wanted to +be let alone. +<P> +"Sorry I can't oblige ye, my hearty!" exclaimed a rough voice in his ear, +"but I got particular orders t' tie you up!" +<P> +At that Mark tried to sit up, but he found he could not. He discovered that +he was closely bound with many turns of a rope, while in front of his bunk +stood one of the rescued sailors. +<P> +"There," said the man, with a final tightening of the ropes. "I guess you're +safe." +<P> +"What's the matter? What does it all mean?" asked Mark, much bewildered. +<P> +"It means that we have possession of the ship," the sailor answered, "and, +if you're wise you'll not make a fuss. It wouldn't do any good, anyhow, as +all your friends are in the same condition." +<P> +Then, picking Mark up, as if he was a baby, the man slung him over his shoulder +and carried him to the living room. There Mark saw Jack, the professor, +Washington, and the others similarly bound. +<P> +"Do you realize what you are doing?" asked the professor angrily of his captors. +"You are mutinying, and are liable to severe punishment." +<P> +"If they ever get us," added one of the men. "We've got the ship now, and +we mean to keep her. You'll have to run her or show us how." +<P> +"Never!" cried the professor. +<P> +"I guess he will when he feels this," said one of the men, as he dragged +from a recess two wires. "I happen to know something of electricity, and +when he feels these perhaps he'll change his mind. I'll start the dynamo." +<P> +The sailor showed that he was acquainted with machinery, for soon the hum +of the electric apparatus was heard. +<P> +"Now to make him tell!" the man with the wires exclaimed, advancing toward +the professor, who turned pale. +<P> +"Stop! You must not torture the old man!" cried a voice, and the mate of +the <I>Good Hope </I>stepped in front of the sailor with the electrified +wires. +<P> +"Who's going to stop me?" asked the man. +<P> +"I will. It's not necessary," the mate went on quickly. "If we make him weak +we may kill him, and he can not tell us what we want to know. One of the +boys can tell us how to run the ship." +<P> +The mate came quickly over to where Mark lay, and whispered: +<P> +"Consent to tell. It is the only way of saving his life. Tell 'em how to +raise the craft. Then leave all to me. I will save you all and the ship, +too, if I can. But consent." +<P> +Mark nodded his head, and the mate cried: +<P> +"I knew I could fetch 'em. I have hypnotic power. This boy will raise the +ship for us. Loosen his bonds, some of you." +<P> +Satisfied that they were now on the way to experiencing a new sensation, +the sailors took the ropes off Mark's arms and legs, and he was allowed to +rise. With a reassuring nod toward the professor he led the way to the engine +room, followed by half the men. He resolved to start the gas machine slowly, +so as to make the upward trip last longer, thinking before it had gone far, +some way of escape from the mutineers might be found. +<P> +While a crowd of the sailors stood near him, Mark operated the machinery +in the engine room that started the gas generating, and set the negative +gravity apparatus working. +<P> +"You'd better not try any tricks on us," said one of the men in an ugly tone +of voice. +<P> +"I'm not going to," replied Mark. "If you go out on deck you will soon see +the ship leaving the water and mounting into the air." +<P> +"Some of you go," ordered a man with a big bushy red beard. "See if the ship +rises. When she begins to go up sing out. I'm going to stay here and see +how the young cub does it so I can work it myself." +<P> +Obeying the red-bearded man, who seemed to be a leader, several of the sailors +went out on the deck. It was quite dark, but there was a phosphorous glow +to the water which made the rolling waves visible. +<P> +The gas was being generated, as could be told by the hissing sound. Mark +watched the machinery anxiously, for he knew much depended on him, and the +professor was not at hand to guide and instruct him. He watched the dial +of the gage which registered the gas pressure and saw it slowly moving. In +a little while it would be at the point at which the ship ought to rise. +<P> +Presently a quiver seemed to run through the <I>Mermaid. </I>Now a shout +came from the watchers on deck. +<P> +"She's going up!" +<P> +The ship was indeed rising. The red-bearded man, who was addressed as Tony, +ran from the engine room to the deck. He saw that the ship was now ten feet +above the water. Back he came to where Mark stood by the gas machine. +<P> +"Lucky for you that you didn't fool us, lad," he said with a leer. "See that +you mind me hereafter. Now show me how the shebang works." +<P> +When the ship had risen as far as Tony desired he made Mark send it straight +ahead. The boy adjusted the air tube to carry the craft toward the south, +but Tony, seeing by a compass in which direction they were headed, ordered +Mark to steer due east. +<P> +"Fix things so they will stay so, too," added Tony. "I don't want to stop +until I get a thousand miles away. Then we'll come down, sail to some sunny +island, and enjoy life." +<P> +Mark locked the steering apparatus so as to keep the <I>Mermaid </I>headed +due east. +<P> +"Now you can go back to your friends," Tony said. "When I want you I'll send +for you." +<P> +With a heavy heart Mark rejoined the professor and others. He found them +with their bonds removed. But to guard against their escape several men were +on watch outside the door. +<P> +"What are they doing?" asked the professor eagerly as Mark entered, and the +boy told him what had taken place. +<P> +"They will ruin my ship and spoil the whole trip," cried the old scientist. +"Oh, why did I ever go to the rescue of the scoundrels?" +<P> +"Never mind," said Jack. "Perhaps we may yet outwit them." +<P> +Morning came at last. The ship was still shooting forward at fast speed, +in an easterly direction. The sailors had learned, in their short stay aboard, +where the food and stores were kept, and they lost little time in getting +breakfast. They sent same in to their captives, including a big pot of hot +coffee, and, after partaking of this the professor and his friends felt better. +<P> +The mate of the <I>Good Hope </I>came in to help clear away the dishes. As +he passed Mark he slipped into the boy's hand a note. +<P> +"Don't read it until you are alone," he said in a low voice, as he hurried +from the room. +<P> +As soon as the other sailors had left, Mark glanced at the slip of paper. +It bore these words: + +<BLOCKQUOTE> + "Open when you hear three raps, then two, then three, and keep silent." +</BLOCKQUOTE> +<P> +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +Mark showed him the paper. +<P> +"I wonder what it means," the boy said. +<P> +"Do you think he is a friend of ours?" the professor asked. +<P> +Mark told him of the mate's conversation the night previous. +<P> +"I think we can trust him," the scientist went on. "He must intend to pay +us a visit when the others are asleep. When we hear the knocks as he specifies +we must open the door and let him in." +<P> +All that day the captives were kept in the living room. Once or twice Mark +was sent for to make some adjustment to the machinery, but the apparatus, +for the most part, was automatic, and needed little attention. The professor, +as well as the others, were all impatience for the promised visit of the +mate. Still they felt he would not come until night. +<P> +In fact it was long past midnight before Mark, Jack and the professor, who +were anxiously listening, heard the three raps, then two, then three more. +Mark quickly opened the door, and the mate stepped inside, holding his finger +to his lips as a sign of caution. Old Andy, Washington, Bill and Tom had +fallen asleep. +<P> +"I have only time for a few words," the mate said. "I am closely watched. +Tony mistrusts me. I will save you if I can." +<P> +"Why have they repaid my kindness with such actions?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"Because they are desperate men," replied the mate. "They are nothing more +than pirates. They mutinied on the other ship, killed the captain and those +of the crew who would not join them, and started off to seek their fortunes. +I pretended to join them to save my life, but I have only been watching for +a chance to escape. +<P> +"Because of lax discipline the ship was sent on fire. We tried to put it +out but could not. The rest you know." +<P> +"I heard them plan to capture this airship, but could do nothing to stop +them. Then I resolved to pretend to act with them. They fear pursuit for +their other mutiny, and are anxious to get as far away as possible." +<P> +"Do you think they will abandon the ship in a little while?" asked the professor +hopefully. +<P> +"I'm afraid not," answered the mate. "I think they want to get rid of all +of you, so they can sail about as they please. Tony is a smart man. He could +soon learn to run this ship, he thinks." +<P> +"I doubt it," Mr. Henderson answered. "But how are you going to help us?" +<P> +"I have not fully made up my plans," the mate answered. "However I wanted +you to know I would do my best to save you. Now I must go. Be on the watch +and when I can I will let you know what I have decided on. I will hand Mark +a note when I bring your meals, just as I did to-day. I think——" +<P> +"Hark! What was that?" asked the professor. +<P> +There was a noise outside the door, as if some one was listening. +<P> +"Put out the lights!" whispered the mate, and Jack switched off the electric +incandescents. +<P> +A knock sounded on the door and the voice of Tony called: +<P> +"Mark! Come here! I want you to look at the gas machine. It has stopped working, +and we are falling!" +<h3>CHAPTER X</h3> +<h4>FOOLING THEIR ENEMIES</h4> +<P> +MARK hurried into the corridor, taking care to close the door after him, +so Tony could get no glimpse of the mate who had risked so much to save his +friends. But he need not have been alarmed for the leader of the mutineers +was too excited over the stopping of the gas apparatus to give any heed to +who was in with the captives. +<P> +"Do you think you can fix it?" he asked the boy. +<P> +"I guess so," Mark replied confidently. "If I can't there is no danger, for +we will fall gradually and land in the water." +<P> +"But I don't want to do that," Tony objected. "I want to keep on through +the air." +<P> +Mark did not reply. By this time he was at the gas machine. He soon saw nothing +was the matter save that new material must be placed in the retort where +the vapor was generated. He refilled it, the gas was manufactured once more, +and the ship began to rise. +<P> +"I will know how to do it next time," Tony said with a grin. Mark realized +that every time he showed the leader of the mutineers something about the +ship it was putting the professor and his friends more and more into the +power of the scoundrels. But there was no help for it. +<P> +The ship was still plunging ahead, and kept about a mile above the earth. +As there was no further need of Mark, he was told he could go back to his +friends. When he reached the room where they were held prisoners, he found +the mate had gone away, promising again to do all he could for them. +<P> +The next night, which it seemed would never come, for the day, locked as +the captives were in their room, seemed endless, finally closed in. Mark, +Jack and the professor were anxious to know whether the mate would pay them +another visit. As for Andy, Tom and Bill, while they were interested in the +ship, and wanted to be free from the power of the mutineers, they did not +lose any sleep over it. +<P> +Shortly after midnight, there came again the peculiar knock, and the mate +entered the room. He seemed much excited over something, and, as soon as +the portal was securely closed he said to Professor Henderson: +<P> +"Is there an island any where near here where men could live for a time?" +<P> +"What do you mean?" asked the scientist. "Do you want us to desert the ship +and leave these scoundrels in charge?" +<P> +"Nothing of the sort," replied the mate, who, had said his name was Jack +Rodgers. "But first answer my question. A great deal may depend on it." +<P> +Seeing Rodgers was in earnest, the professor looked over some maps and charts, +and announced that they were within a few hundred miles of a group of islands. +<P> +"When would we reach them?" was Rodgers's next question. +<P> +Mr. Henderson made a few rapid calculations on a piece of paper. +<P> +"At the present rate of sailing," he said, "we should be there about ten +o'clock to-morrow. That is, provided the ship does not slacken speed or increase +it." +<P> +"There is no danger of either of those two things happening," said the mate. +"Tony is too afraid of the machinery to do anything to it. So you may safely +figure that our speed will continue the same." +<P> +"Then I can guarantee, with all reasonable certainty," the professor said, +"that about ten o'clock to-morrow we will be less than a mile from the islands. +They are a group where friendly natives live, and where many tropical fruits +abound. One could scarcely select a better place to be shipwrecked. But I +hope the plans of Tony and his friends do not include landing us there." +<P> +"No, nothing like that," the mate answered. "Quite the contrary. But I had +better be going. I will try and see Mark some time to-morrow. Tony does not +mind when I speak to him." +<P> +With this Rodgers left the captives, as he heard some of the sailors moving +about and did not want to be discovered. The professor and the boys wondered +what the mate's plan might be, but they had to be content to wait and see. +<P> +The night passed without incident. About nine o'clock the next morning the +mate came to the door of the room where the professor and his friends were +prisoners. He made no secret of his approach, but knocked boldly. +<P> +"Tell Mark I want to see him," he said, as the professor answered. "All of +you keep quiet," he added in a whisper. "There may be good news soon." +<P> +Mark slipped from the room. He followed the mate to the upper deck which, +at that time was deserted as all the sailors were in the dining room eating, +which practice they indulged in as often as they could. +<P> +"I have a plan to get rid of these rough men," the mate said to Mark. "It +may work, and, again it may not. At any rate it is worth trying, It all depends +on you with what help I can give you." +<P> +"I'm willing to do my share," Mark said, and for the next ten minutes the +boy and the mate were in earnest conversation. +<P> +It was about thirty-five minutes later when there arose a sudden commotion +in the ship. Mark had returned to his friends and the mate had disappeared. +The confusion seemed to come from the engine room where Tony had posted some +of his men. +<P> +"We're falling down! We'll all be killed!" shouted the men. "The ship is +falling into the sea!" +<P> +"What is the trouble?" asked the professor as he heard the commotion. +<P> +"It is part of the mate's plan," said Mark. "He told me to tell you to do +nothing. If Tony or any of the other men come to you just refer them to me." +<P> +Two minutes later Tony came rushing into the apartment where the captives +were held prisoners. +<P> +"Here! Come quickly, Mark!" he exclaimed. "Something has gone wrong with +the gas machine again, and you must come and fix it before we are all dashed +to pieces!" +<P> +With every appearance of haste Mark rushed from the apartment, following +Tony. The latter led the way to the engine room. +<P> +"Can anything be done?" he asked. +<P> +Mark took a survey of the machinery. +<P> +"It is too late," he said as though much excited. "The ship is falling down +toward the sea with terrific force." +<P> +It needed but a glance at the height gage to show this. The pointer was revolving +rapidly about the face of the dial. +<P> +"Will the ship stand the blow?" asked Tony. +<P> +"Not at the rate it is falling," replied Mark. "She will go all to pieces +when she strikes the water, and she may explode!" +<P> +"What are we to do then?" asked the leader of the mutineers. +<P> +"We must save ourselves!" cried the mate, running in at this juncture. "Let +our prisoners shift for themselves as best they can. Let's all leap into +the sea. There we at least have a chance for our lives. But if we stay on +this ship we will all be drowned like cats in a bag." +<P> +"What do you propose?" asked Tony, his face white with fear. +<P> +"When the ship comes near enough the surface of the water to make it safe +we should all drop overboard!" the mate exclaimed. "We are near some islands, +I understand, and we can thus save our lives by swimming ashore." +<P> +This plan seemed to meet with instant favor, and a little later there was +a rush for the deck, as each one wished to be the first to escape from the +boat they believed to be doomed. +<P> +Lower and lower fell the <I>Mermaid. </I>She was like a wounded bird which +the shot of the hunter has crippled. Down and down she fluttered. +<P> +By this time all the sailors, save the mate were on deck. He and Mark remained +in the engine room. +<P> +"Don't let her get too low," the mate whispered. +<P> +"I'll watch out," Mark replied. "I want to give them a good scare while I'm +at it." +<P> +The ship was now within fifty feet of the water. There was a cry of terror +from the sailors. Some of them leaped over the rail and started to swim ashore, +as the ship was by this time close to a group of islands. +<P> +Suddenly, from the engine room the mate rushed. +<P> +"Jump! Jump for your lives!" he exclaimed. "The ship is about to blow up!" +<h3>CHAPTER XI</h3> +<h4>MYSTERIOUS HAPPENINGS</h4> +<P> +THE voice of the mate echoed through the <I>Mermaid. </I>Those on deck heard +it, as did Tony in the engine room, where he was vainly trying to understand +the complicated machinery. +<P> +An instant later there sounded from beneath the ship a series of splashes. +More sailors were leaping from the deck of the craft to the ocean. The distance +was not great, particularly as they all landed in water. +<P> +"Quick!" cried the mate to a group of sailors that hesitated before taking +the jump. "The ship may blow up any minute now." +<P> +The men needed no second urging. As soon as they struck the water they began +to swim ashore, as it was not far away. One after another they jumped over +the rail. Tony was the last to go. He urged the captives to follow him, but +they all refused. +<P> +A minute later the only one of the pirate crew left on the ship was the mate. +The others were all struggling in the sea. Eventually they all reached shore +in safety. +<P> +The airship was now within about twenty feet of the water. It was still falling +but not so rapidly. +<P> +"Better send her up, now," said the mate to Mark, and the boy turned the +necessary levers to accomplish this. +<P> +Dipping into the water as a sea gull does when searching for food on the +wing, for she had come quite low, the <I>Mermaid </I>mounted once more into +the air, and was soon sailing along over the heads of Tony and his gang. +<P> +"What's it all about?" asked Mr. Henderson, who seemed in a sort of stupor. +"I thought the ship was broken. How, then, can it rise?" +<P> +"It was only a trick of mine," Rodgers said. "The gas machine is not broken. +I had Mark fix it so that only a little vapor would be generated. When the +supply in the holder was not enough, and no more was being made, the ship +had to sink. Mark and I pretended it was worse than it really was just to +scare the scoundrels." +<P> +"And you evidently succeeded," observed Mr. Henderson. "They have all left +us. I am glad you stayed." +<P> +"So am I," said Rodgers. "I was just waiting for a chance to escape from +that crowd. This was the plan I thought of that night. I wanted to see the +men put on some island where they could manage to live, and which was not +too far away." +<P> +The <I>Mermaid </I>was now mounting upward rapidly, as Mark had adjusted +the machinery properly. The craft was well rid of the pirate crew, and was +able to proceed on its way, and enable Mr. Henderson to carry out his plans. +<P> +When the <I>Mermaid </I>had reached a certain height her prow was turned +the other way, and she was sent back racing over the ground she had just +covered. But now the ship was in the hands of friends. Fortunately no great +damage had been done by the sailors, and the professor was soon able to get +things in ship-shape. The engines had not been molested and were working +better than ever. +<P> +"Now to make another attempt to reach the big hole in the earth," the professor +cried. "We will be careful next time, who we rescue from ships at sea." +<P> +The island was soon left behind, becoming a mere speck on the ocean. Those +aboard the <I>Mermaid </I>knew no harm could befall the sailors, as there +were no savage tribes on the little spot of land. Eventually the sailors +were picked up by a passing vessel and taken to their homes. The story of +their first mutiny leaked out and they were properly punished. +<P> +It required several days travel before the airship regained the distance +she had lost because of the plans of the pirates. Also, there were a number +of minor repairs to make, and the professor and his friends were kept busy. +<P> +"How much longer before we come to the big hole?" asked Jack, one day. +<P> +"I think we ought to be near it in about two weeks," the professor replied. +"I only hope we shall not be disappointed, and will be able to explore it." +<P> +"'Tain't goin' t' be no fun t' be decimated an' expurgitated inter a conglomerous +aggregation of elements constituting th' exterior portion of human anatomy," +said Washington in dubious tones. +<P> +"You mean you're afraid of being boiled in the steam from the big hole?" +asked Mark. +<P> +"Jest so," replied the colored man. +<P> +"You don't need to worry about that," put in the professor. "I will not take +the ship down if there is any danger, though of course there will be some +risk." +<P> +The ship, having been fully repaired, was now able to be speeded up, and +was sent scudding along toward her destination. Rodgers proved a valuable +acquisition toward the crew, for he had sailed many years in the waters over +which they were flying, and was able to give the professor many valuable +hints. He had heard vague stories of the island with the big hole, but had +never been near it. He did not make the trip however, as, at his request, +he was put off at an inhabited island one night. +<P> +It was about a week after the sailors were frightened from the ship, that +a curious experience befell Mark. Washington was on duty in the conning tower, +attending to the apparatus as the ship flew through the air, and all the +others had gone to bed. Mark had remained up, later than the others as he +was interested in reading a book on science. +<P> +About ten o'clock he became hungry, and going to the pantry got some bread +and cold meat. He set these on a table, and then, remembering he would need +some water to drink, started after some in the cooler, which was in a little +room near the tower. +<P> +Washington heard the boy as he turned the faucet to draw the liquid, and +spoke to him, as the colored man was rather lonesome at his post. Mark did +not linger more than a minute or two, but when he returned to where he had +left the food he was much surprised. +<P> +There was not a trace of it to be seen. The dishes were on the table, but +every vestige of bread and meat had disappeared. +<P> +"I wonder if a cat or dog has been here," was Mark's first thought. Then +he remembered that no such animals were aboard the <I>Mermaid.</I> +<P> +Something on the floor caught his eye. He stooped and picked it up. It was +a slice of bread, but in such shape that the boy stared at it, puzzled as +to how it could have become so. +<P> +It was flattened out quite thin, but the strangest part of it was that it +bore what seemed to be the marks of thumb and fingers from a very large hand. +So big, in fact, was the print, that Mark's hand scarce covered half of it, +and, where the bread had been squeezed into a putty like mass (for it was +quite fresh) the peculiar markings on the skin of the tips of the fingers +were visible. +<P> +"It looks as if a giant grabbed this slice of bread," Mark observed. "There +are strange happenings aboard this ship. I wish I knew what they meant." +<P> +He looked all around for the food, thinking perhaps a rat had dragged it +off, but there was no trace of it. +<P> +Suddenly the boy thought he heard a sound from the big storeroom. He was +almost sure he heard something moving in there. He started toward the door +when he was stopped by hearing the professor's voice call: +<P> +"Don't open that door, Mark. Have I not told you that place must not be entered?" +<P> +"I thought I heard some one in there," Mark replied. +<P> +"There is nothing in there but some apparatus of mine," Mr. Henderson said. +"I want no one to see it. What is the matter?" +<P> +Mark explained matters to the scientist, who had, as he said later, arisen +on hearing the boy, moving about. +<P> +"Oh, it was a rat that took your stuff," Mr. Henderson said. "I guess there +are some pretty big ones on the ship. Get some more food and go to sleep." +<P> +Mark felt it best to obey, though he was by no means satisfied with the +professor's explanation. He listened intently to see if any more noises came +from the storeroom, but none did, and he went to bed. +<P> +Several times after that Mark tried the experiment of leaving food about. +On each occasion it was taken. +<P> +"It looks as if the ship was haunted," he said. "Of course I know it isn't, +but it's very queer. They must be strange rats that can get food from shelves +when there is only the smooth side of the ship to climb up," for on some +occasions Mark had tried the experiment of putting the food as nearly out +of reach as possible. +<P> +It took several nights to learn all this, and, as he did not want to take +any one into his confidence, he had to work in secret. But, with all his +efforts he learned nothing, save that there was something odd about the ship +that he could not fathom. +<P> +At first he believed the professor had some strange animal concealed in the +storeroom, but he dismissed this idea almost as soon as he thought of it. +For what could the scientist want with an animal when they were going to +the interior of the earth? That some beast had slipped aboard was out of +the question. Mark was much puzzled, but finally, deciding the matter did +not concern him a great deal, gave up trying to solve the mystery, at least +for a time. +<P> +The ship was now in the neighborhood of the equator and the climate had become +much warmer. So hot indeed were some nights that they slept out on deck, +with the <I>Mermaid </I>flying through the air at a moderate pace, for it +was deemed best not to go at any great speed after dark. +<P> +One night the professor, after consulting various charts and maps, and making +calculations which covered several sheets of paper announced: +<P> +"We should sight the mysterious island to-morrow." +<P> +"That's good news!" exclaimed Jack. "I'm anxious to see what's below inside +of that big hole." +<P> +"Everybody git ready for their funerals!" exclaimed Washington in a deep +voice. "I ain't got many——" +<P> +"Cheer up," interrupted Jack, poking Washington in the ribs. The colored +man was very ticklish, and he began to laugh heartily, though, perhaps, he +did not feel like it. +<P> +Suddenly, above the sound of his shouts, there came a crashing, grinding +noise from the engine room. +<h3>CHAPTER XII</h3> +<h4>THE BIG HOLE</h4> +<P> +"SOMETHING has gone wrong!" exclaimed the professor as he jumped up. He reached +the engine room ahead of any one else, and when the two boys got there they +found him busy twisting wheels and shifting levers. +<P> +"Anything serious?" asked Jack. +<P> +"It's the gas machine again," Mr. Henderson replied. "It broke where we fixed +it. However it doesn't matter. I was going to lower the ship anyhow, as I +want to approach the island from the water. We will go down a little sooner +than I counted on." +<P> +The disabling of the gas machine caused the vapor to escape slowly from the +tank, and this made the ship sink gradually. By means of the emergency stop-cock +the descent could be controlled almost as well as though the machinery was +in working order. Half an hour later the <I>Mermaid </I>rested on the water. +<P> +It was a little rough, as there was quite a swell on, and not so pleasant +as floating in the air on an even keel, but they made the best of it. +<P> +On account of the little accident, and not being certain of its extent, it +was deemed best not to send the ship ahead. So they laid to until morning. +<P> +For the better part of two days all those on board the <I>Mermaid </I>had +their hands full mending the break and making other repairs found necessary. +In that time they lay to, floating idly with the currents, or blown by the +wind, for the professor would not start any of the engines or apparatus until +the ship was in good condition. +<P> +In this time Mark had several times recalled the curious happenings in regard +to the disappearing food, and the mystery of the storeroom. But there were +no further manifestations, and no other signs that there might be a strange +visitor aboard. +<P> +"I couldn't have imagined it all," said Mark, "but I guess what did happen +may have been caused by natural means, only I can't discover them." +<P> +It was about two days after this, the ship having sailed scores of miles +on the surface of the water, that Mark, who was in the conning tower exclaimed: +<P> +"That looks like a waterspout ahead of us." +<P> +"That's what it is!" Jack agreed. "What shall we do?" +<P> +"Call the professor!" said Mark. "He'll know." +<P> +When Mr. Henderson came, he looked for a long time at a cloud of black vapor +which hung low in the east. +<P> +"It may be a waterspout," he said. "We'll rise in the air and see if we can +avoid it." +<P> +The ship was sent up into the air. As it rose higher and higher, the professor, +making frequent observations from his conning tower, cried out: +<P> +"That is no waterspout!" +<P> +"What is it?" asked Mark. +<P> +"It is the steam and vapor rising from the big hole in the earth! Boys, we +are almost there!" +<P> +"Are you sure that's it?" asked Mark. +<P> +"Almost positive," Mr. Henderson replied. "You can see how much warmer it +has become of late, as we approached the equator. We are almost due at the +island, and I have no doubt we have reached it." +<P> +As the ship flew forward the mass of dark vapor became more pronounced. Through +the glasses it could be noticed to consist of rolling masses of clouds. What +lay beneath them no one knew. The adventurers were going to try to find out. +<P> +Now that they had arrived at the beginning of the main part of their journey, +the travelers felt their spirits sink a little. It was one thing to plan +to go down into the depths of the earth, but it was quite another to make +the actual attempt. Still, they were not going to give up the project. The +professor had confidence in his ship and believed it could safely make the +trip. Still it was with no little apprehension that Mr. Henderson watched +the nearer approach of the craft to that strange island. +<P> +"Perfesser, are yo' really an' truly goin' t' depress this elongated spheroid +an' its human consignment int' that conglomerous convoluted mass of gaseous +vapor regardless of th' consequences?" asked Washington, as he gazed with +wide opened eyes at the sight before him. +<P> +"If you mean am I going to let the <I>Mermaid </I>go down into that hole +you are perfectly correct," the scientist answered, "though you could have +said it in fewer words, Washington." +<P> +"I—I guess I'll get out an' walk," the colored man made reply. +<P> +"This isn't any trolley car," observed Mark. "Don't lose your nerve, Wash. +Stay with us, and we'll discover a gold or diamond mine, maybe." +<P> +"Is there diamonds down there?" asked the colored man, his fright seeming +to leave him. +<P> +"There are all sorts of things inside the earth," the professor answered. +<P> +"Then I'm goin' along!" Washington declared. "I always did want a diamond +ring, an' I knows a little colored gal that wants one, too. I'm goin' all +right! This suttenly am th' most kloslosterous conjunctivity of combativeness +that I ever sagaciated!" and he began to do a sort of impromptu cake-walk. +<h3>CHAPTER XIII</h3> +<h4>DOWN INTO THE EARTH</h4> +<P> +IT was now noon, but the adventurers did not think of dinner in the excitement +of approaching the mysterious island. The speed of the ship was increased +that they might the more quickly come to it. As they approached they could +see the masses of vapor more plainly, and it appeared that some great commotion +must be going on inside the big hole, since clouds of steam arose. +<P> +"I only hope it doesn't prove too hot for us," observed the professor. "However, +I provided a water jacket for the ship, and we may need it, as well as the +vacuum chambers to keep the heat from us." +<P> +It was about three o'clock when the flying ship reached the edge of the island. +From there it was about a mile to the rim of the big hole, over one side +of which the waters of the ocean poured with a roar that could be heard over +half a mile off. +<P> +"I think we had better halt and see that everything is in good shape before +proceeding," said Mr. Henderson. "Jack, you and Mark make a thorough inspection +of the engine room, and see that all the apparatus is in working order." +<P> +The two boys prepared to do as they were told. Mark, who was walking a little +ahead of Jack, entered the apartment from which the storeroom opened. As +he did so he saw, or thought he saw, the door of the place where the extra +supplies were kept, close. Without saying anything to Jack he hurried forward, +and tried the knob. It would not turn. +<P> +"That's funny," said Mark to himself. "I could almost swear I saw some one +go into that room. Yet I know the professor did not enter, for I just left +him. And none of the others would dare to. I wonder if I will ever solve +the mystery." +<P> +But he had too much to do to allow him to dwell on that matter. Several of +the dynamos needed adjusting and for two hours he and Jack had all they could +do. +<P> +In the meanwhile the professor had gone over the other parts of the ship, +and gotten everything in readiness for the descent. The <I>Mermaid </I>was +lowered to within a few hundred feet of the sea, and, through a hose that +was let down, the compartments, provided for this emergency were filled with +water. These compartments were between the outer and inner hulls of the lower +part of the craft, and were designed to prevent the interior becoming heated +in case the travelers found they had to pass close to fire. There were also +vacuum chambers, and from these the air was exhausted, as of course every +schoolboy knows a vacuum is a non-conductor of either heat or cold. +<P> +"Now I think we are ready," the professor announced at length. +<P> +"Everything's all right in the engine room," announced Jack. +<P> +"Yes, an' everything's all right in th' kitchen," put in Washington. "I've +got a good meal ready as soon as any one wants to eat." +<P> +"It will have to wait a while," Mr. Henderson remarked. "We are going to +start to make the descent before we dine." +<P> +The hose was reeled up, and the ship was sent a few hundred feet higher into +the air, as Mr. Henderson wanted to take a last good observation before he +went down into the hole. +<P> +But having risen some distance above the masses of rolling vapors he found +he was at no advantage, since the strongest telescope he could bring to bear +could not pierce the cloud masses. +<P> +"We'll just have to trust to luck," the scientist said. "I judge we're about +over the centre of the opening. Lower away Mark!" +<P> +The boy, who, under the watchful eye of the professor, was manipulating the +levers and wheels in the conning tower, shifted some handles. The gas was +expelled from the holder, the negative gravity apparatus ceased to work, +and the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>sank lower and lower, toward the mysterious +hole that yawned beneath her. +<P> +The hearts of all beat strangely, if not with fear, at least with apprehension, +for they did not know what they might encounter. Perhaps death in some terrible +form awaited them. But the desire to discover something new and strange had +gripped all of them, and not one would have voted to turn back. +<P> +Even old Andy, who seldom got excited, was in unusual spirits. He took down +his gun and remarked: +<P> +"Maybe I can kill some new kind of animal, and write a book about its habits, +for surely we will see strange beasts in the under-world." +<P> +Lower and lower sank the ship. Now it was amid the first thin masses of vapors, +those that floated highest and were more like a light fog, than anything +else. By means of a window in the bottom of the craft, which window was closed +by a thick piece of plate glass, Professor Henderson could look down and +see what was beneath them. +<P> +"The clouds seem to be getting thicker," he said, as he peered through the +small casement. "If they would only clear away we could see something." +<P> +But instead of doing this the vapors accumulated more thickly about the ship. +It was so dark inside the <I>Mermaid </I>now that the electric lights had +to be switched on. In the room with the floor-window the lights were not +used, as had they shone one could not have seen down below. +<P> +The professor maintained his position. The descent was a perilous one, and +he wanted to be on the watch to check it at once if the <I>Mermaid </I>was +liable to dash upon some pointed rock or fall into some fiery pit. His hand +was on the signal levers. +<P> +Suddenly he looked up and glanced at a gage on the wall. The hand of it was +slowly revolving. +<P> +"We are at the earth's surface," the scientist said. "Now we are below it. +Now we are fairly within the big hole! Boys, we may be on the verge of a +great discovery!" +<P> +An instant later it seemed as if a hot wave had struck the <I>Mermaid, </I>or +as if the craft had been plunged into boiling water. +<P> +"It's going to be hot!" cried the professor. "Lucky I provided the water +jackets!" +<P> +Then the lights in the interior of the ship went out, leaving the whole craft +in darkness. +<P> +"What has happened?" cried Mark. +<h3>CHAPTER XIV</h3> +<h4>MANY MILES BELOW</h4> +<P> +"DON'T be alarmed," spoke the calm voice of the professor. "I have only turned +off the electrics. I want to switch on the search lights, to see if we can +learn anything about our position." +<P> +As he spoke he turned a switch, and, the gloom below the ship, as the boys +could see by glimpses from the floor-window, was pierced by a dazzling glare. +In the bottom of the <I>Mermaid </I>were set a number of powerful electric +arc lights with reflectors, constructed to throw the beams downward. The +professor had built them in for just this emergency, as he thought that at +some time they might want to illuminate what was below the craft. +<P> +Not that it was of much avail on this occasion, for, though the lights were +powerful, they could not pierce the miles of gloom that lay below them. The +beams only served to accentuate the darkness. +<P> +"I guess we'll have to trust to luck," the professor said, after a vain attempt, +by means of powerful glasses, to distinguish something. "There is too much +fog and vapor." +<P> +"What makes it so warm?" asked Mark, removing his coat. +<P> +"Well, you must remember you are approaching the interior of the earth," +the professor answered. "It has been calculated that the heat increases one +degree for every fifty-five feet you descend. We have come down several hundred +feet and of course it is getting warmer." +<P> +"Then if we go down very far it will get so hot we will not be able to stand +it," Jack put in. +<P> +"I do not believe we will suffer any great inconvenience," Mr. Henderson +went on. "I believe that after we pass a certain point it will become cooler. +I think the inner fires of the earth are more or less heated gas in a sort +of inner chamber between two shells. If we can pass the second shell, we +will be all right." +<P> +"But aren't we liable to hit something, going down into the dark this way?" +asked Mark. +<P> +"We will guard ourselves as far as possible," the scientist answered. +<P> +The <I>Mermaid </I>seemed to be going down on a side of the immense shaft +a good way distant from the strange waterfall. When they had first dropped +into the hole the travelers could hear the rush of waters, but now the noise +was not audible. +<P> +"I think the hole must widen out the farther down we go," the professor said. +"We are probably many miles from the fall now." +<P> +"I'm sure I hope so," put in Jack. "It would be no fun to have to take a +shower bath in this place." +<P> +After a meal, the boys and the professor took some more observations, but +with all their efforts nothing could be seen below the ship but a vast black +void, into which they were steadily descending. +<P> +"I wonder when we're going to stop," asked Mark. "It's like playing the game +'Going to Jerusalem,' you keep wondering when the music will cease and you +will have a chance to grab a chair. I only hope we have a chair or something +else to sit on, in case we go to smash." +<P> +"We're not liable to have any accidents with the professor in charge," Jack +answered. "Didn't he bring us safe out of some pretty tight holes when we +went to the north pole in the airship, and again when we found the south +pole in the submarine?" +<P> +"Yes, but this is different," objected Mark. +<P> +"Well, I'm not worrying," Jack went on. "It doesn't do any good, and only +makes you lie awake nights. By the way, I wonder what time it is getting +to be." +<P> +He looked at his watch and found it was close on to eight o'clock in the +evening. So late had dinner been served, and so varied were the happenings +of the last few hours, that time had passed quickly. +<P> +"Why it's almost bed-time," said Jack. "I wonder if we are to go on dropping +into the depths of nowhere all night." +<P> +At that moment the professor entered the room where the boys were. He seemed +quite pleased over something, and was smiling. +<P> +"Everything is going along famously," he said. "I have just tested the air +and find it is rich in oxygen. We shall suffer nothing on that score. The +heat too, seems to have decreased. On the whole, everything favors us." +<P> +"Are we going on down?" asked Mark. +<P> +"As far as we can," Mr. Henderson answered. "Let me see how far we are below +now." +<P> +He went to the gage that indicated the vertical position of the ship. Because +of the changed conditions, the craft now sinking below the surface of the +earth instead of rising above it, as was its wont, some calculations were +necessary. These the scientist made as quickly as he could. +<P> +"We are now ten miles underground!" he exclaimed. "That is doing very well. +My theories are working out. I think we shall land somewhere before long." +<P> +"I hopes so!" exclaimed Washington coming in at this point. "I'm mighty skeered +shootin' down int' this dark hole, and no time-table t' show when we's due +t' arrive." +<P> +"We ought to land in a couple of days more," the professor answered. "Never +mind about worrying Washington, I'll take care of you." +<P> +"I hopes so, Perfesser," the colored man said. "I got a little girl waitin' +for me back in Georgia, an' I'd like t' see her 'fore I git burned up." +<P> +Accompanied by the professor, the boys made a tour of the ship to see that +all the machinery and apparatus were in working order. Owing to the changed +conditions the negative gravity engine had to be worked at faster speed than +usual, since the downward pull of the earth was greater the farther they +descended into the interior and they did not want to fall too swiftly. But +this was easily provided for, since the professor had made the apparatus +capable of standing a great strain. +<P> +The ten miles had become fourteen when the professor, finding that everything +was in good shape, proposed that the boys go to bed. They, did not want to, +though they were sleepy, and they feared to miss some strange sights. +<P> +But when the professor had promised to call them in case anything unusual +developed, they consented to turn in, and Bill and Tom assumed their duties, +which were light enough, now that the ship was merely falling into the immense +shaft. +<P> +When Mark turned into his bunk he could not go to sleep at once. It may have +been the excitement over their new position, or because he had eaten too +hearty a supper, but the fact was he remained awake for some time. +<P> +While thus tossing restlessly on his bed, wondering what ailed him, he thought +he heard a noise in the main apartment out of which the storeroom opened. +He crawled softly from his bed, and looked from his stateroom door. +<P> +In the light of a shaded electric Mark saw the figure of some one glide across +the floor and take refuge in the room, which Professor Henderson always was +so particular about. +<P> +"I wonder what or who that was," reasoned Mark. "There is some mystery in +this. Can the professor have concealed some one on this ship whose presence +he does not want to admit? It certainly looks so." +<P> +Not wanting to awaken the ship's crew, and remembering what Mr. Henderson +had said about any one entering the storeroom, Mark went back to bed, to +fall into an uneasy slumber. +<P> +"Breakfast!" called Washington breaking in on a fine dream Jack was having +about being captain of a company of automobile soldiers. "Last call for +breakfast!" +<P> +"Hello! Is it morning?" asked Jack. +<P> +"Not so's you could notice it," Washington went on. "It's as dark as a stack +of black cats and another one throwed in. But breakfast is ready jest the +same." +<P> +The boys were soon at the table, and learned that nothing of importance had +occurred during the night. The <I>Mermaid </I>had been kept going slowly +down, and about seven o'clock registered more than fifty miles below the +earth's surface. +<P> +Still there was no change in the outward surroundings. It remained as black +as the interior of Egypt when that country was at its darkest. The powerful +electrics could not pierce the gloom. The ship was working well, and the +travelers were very comfortable. +<P> +Down, down, down, went the <I>Mermaid. </I>The temperature, which had risen +to about ninety went back to sixty-nine, and there seemed to be no more danger +from the inner fires. +<P> +They were now a hundred miles under the surface. But still the professor +kept the <I>Mermaid </I>sinking. Every now and again he would take an +observation, but only found the impenetrable darkness surrounded them. +<P> +"We must arrive somewhere, soon," he muttered. +<P> +It was about six o'clock that night that the alarm bell set up a sudden ringing. +The professor who was making some calculations on a piece of paper jumped +to his feet, and so did a number of the others. +<P> +"We are nearing the bottom!" he cried. "The bell has given us warning!" +<h3>CHAPTER XV</h3> +<h4>IN THE STRANGE DRAUGHT</h4> +<P> +THE boys ran to attend to the engines and apparatus to which they had been +assigned in view of this emergency. The professor, Washington, Bill, Tom +and Andy, who had kept to themselves since the descent, came running out +of the small cabin where they usually sat, and wanted to know what it was +all about. +<P> +"We may hit something, in spite of all precautions," Mr. Henderson remarked. +"Slow down the ship." +<P> +The <I>Mermaid </I>was, accordingly checked in her downward flight, by a +liberal use of the gas and the negative gravity machine. +<P> +The bell continued to ring, and the dials pointed to the mark that indicated +the ship was more than one hundred and fifty miles down. +<P> +Mark, who had run to the engine room to check the descent, came back. +<P> +"Why didn't you slow her down?" asked the professor. +<P> +"I did," replied the boy. "The negative gravity and the gas machines are +working at full speed." +<P> +"Then why are we still descending?" asked the scientist. "For a while our +speed was checked, but now we are falling faster than before." +<P> +"I attended to the apparatus," Mark insisted. +<P> +Just then, from without the ship, came a terrible roaring sound, as though +there was a great cyclone in progress. At the same time, those aboard the +craft could feel themselves being pulled downward with terrific force. +<P> +"We are caught in a draught!" Mr. Henderson cried. "We are being sucked down +into the depths of the earth!" +<P> +He ran to the engine room. With the help of the boys he set in motion an +auxiliary gravity machine, designed to exert a most powerful influence against +the downward pull of the earth. As they watched the great wheels spin around, +and heard the hum and whirr of the dynamos, the boys watched the pointer +which indicated how low they were getting. +<P> +And, as they watched, they saw that the needle of the dial kept moving, moving, +moving. +<P> +"Our efforts are useless! We can't stop!" the professor cried. +<P> +Grave indeed was the plight of the adventurers. In their ship they were being +sucked down into unknown regions and all their efforts did not avail to save +them. It was an emergency they could not guard against, and which could not +have been foreseen. +<P> +"What are to do?" asked Mark. +<P> +"We can only wait," Mr. Henderson replied. "The terrible suction may cease, +or it may carry us to some place of safety. Let us hope for the best." +<P> +Seeing there was no further use in running the engines in an effort to check +the downward rush the machines were stopped. Then they waited for whatever +might happen. +<P> +Now that they seemed in imminent peril Washington was as cool as any one. +He went about putting his kitchen in order and getting ready for the next +meal as if they were sailing comfortably along on the surface of the ocean. +As for old Andy he was nervous and frightened, and plainly showed it. With +his gun in readiness he paced back and forth as if on the lookout for strange +beasts or birds. +<P> +Bill and Tom were so alarmed that they were of little use in doing anything, +and they were not disturbed in their staterooms where they went when it became +known that the ship was unmanageable. +<P> +The boys and the professor, while greatly frightened at the unexpected turn +of events, decided there was no use in giving way to foolish alarm. They +realized they could do nothing but await developments. +<P> +At the same time they took every precaution. They piled all the bedding on +the floor of the living room, so that the pillows and mattresses might form +a sort of pad in case the ship was dashed down on the bottom of the big hole. +<P> +"Not that it would save us much," Jack observed with a grim smile, "but somehow +it sort of makes your mind easier." +<P> +All this while the ship was being sucked down at a swift pace. The pointer +of the gage, indicating the depth, kept moving around and soon they were +several hundreds of miles below the surface of the earth. +<P> +The professor tried, by means of several instruments, to discover in which +direction they were headed, and whether they were going straight down or +at an angle. But some strange influence seemed to affect the gages and other +pieces of apparatus, for the pointers and hands would swing in all directions, +at one time indicating that they were going down, and, again, upward. +<P> +"There must be a strong current of electricity here," Mr. Henderson said, +"or else there is, as many suspect, a powerful magnet at the center of the +earth, which we are nearing." +<P> +"What will you do if the ship is pulled apart, or falls and is smashed?" +asked Mark with much anxiety. +<P> +"You take a cheerful view of things," said Jack. +<P> +"Well, it's a good thing to prepare for emergencies," Mark added. +<P> +"If the ship was to be separated by the magnetic pull, or if it fell on sharp +rocks and was split in twain, I am afraid none of us could do anything to +save ourselves," the professor answered. "Still, if we were given a little +warning of the disaster, I have means at hand whereby we might escape with +our lives. But it would be a perilous way of——" +<P> +"I reckon yo' all better come out an' have supper," broke in Washington. +"Leastways we'll call it supper, though I don't rightly know whether it's +night or mornin'. Anyhow I've got a meal ready." +<P> +"I don't suppose any of us feel much like eating," observed Mr. Henderson, +"but there is no telling when we will have the chance again, so, perhaps, +we had better take advantage of it." +<P> +For a while they ate in silence, finding that they had better appetites than +they at first thought. Old Andy in particular did full justice to the food +Washington had prepared. +<P> +"I always found it a good plan to eat as much and as often as you can," the +hunter remarked. "This is a mighty uncertain world." +<P> +"You started to tell us a little while ago, Professor," said Mark, "about +a plan you had for saving out lives if worst came to worst, and there was +a chance to put it into operation. What is it?" +<P> +"I will tell you," the aged inventor said. "It is something about which I +have kept silent, as I did not want to frighten any of you. It was my latest +invention, and I had only perfected it when we started off on this voyage. +Consequently I had no chance to try it. The machine works in theory, but +whether it does in practice is another question. That is why I say there +is a risk. But we may have to take this risk. I have placed aboard this ship +a——" +<P> +The professor was interrupted in what he was about to say by a curious tremor +that made the whole ship shiver as though it had struck some obstruction. +Yet there was no sudden jolt or jar such as would have been occasioned by +that. +<P> +At the same time Washington, who was out in the kitchen, came running into +the dining room, crying: +<P> +"We're droppin' into a ragin' fire, Perfesser!" +<P> +"What do you mean?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"I jest took a look down through th' hole in th' bottom of the ship!" cried +Washington. "It's all flames an' smoke below us!" +<P> +"I wonder if it is the end," the professor muttered in a low voice. +<P> +Followed by the boys, the inventor hastened to the floor-window. The lights +were turned off to enable a better view to be had of what was below them. +<P> +Leaning over the glass protected aperture the boys and the professor saw, +far, far down, a bright light shining. It was as if they were miles above +a whole town of blast furnaces, the stacks of which were belching forth flames +and smoke. The rolling clouds of vapor were illuminated by a peculiar greenish +light, which, at times, turned to red, blue, purple and yellowish hues. +<P> +The effect was weird and beautiful though it was full of terror for the +travelers. It seemed as if they were falling into some terrible pit of fire, +for the reflection of what they feared were flames, could plainly be seen. +<P> +"I wish I'd never come on this terrible voyage!" wailed Washington. "I'd +rather freeze to death than be burned up." +<P> +"Washington, be quiet!" commanded the professor sternly. "This is no time +for foolishness. We must work hard to save our lives, for we are in dire +peril. +<P> +"Mark, you and Washington, with Jack, start the engines. Turn on every bit +of power you can. Fill the gas holder as full as it will hold, and use extra +heavy pressure. I will see if I can not work the negative gravity apparatus +to better advantage than we did before. We must escape if possible!" +<P> +The boys, as was also Washington, were only too glad to have something to +do to take their mind off their troubles. All three were much frightened, +but Mark and Jack tried not to show it. As for Washington he was almost crying. +<P> +Soon the whirr and hum of the machinery in the <I>Mermaid </I>was heard. +The craft, which was rushing in some direction, either downward, ahead or +backwards within the unknown depths, shivered from the speed of the dynamos +and other apparatus. Soon the boys could hear the professor starting the +negative gravity engine, and then began a struggle between the forces of +nature and those of mankind. +<P> +Once more the adventurers anxiously watched the gages and indicators. For +a while the ship seemed to be holding out against the terrible influence +that was sucking her down. She appeared to hesitate. Then, as the downward +force triumphed over the mechanical energy in the craft, she began to settle +again, and soon was descending, if that was the direction, as fast as before. +<P> +"It is of no use," said the professor with a groan. "I must try our last +resort!" +<P> +He started from the engine room where Mark and Jack had gone. As he did so, +he glanced at a thermometer hanging on the wall near the door. +<P> +"Has any one turned on the heat?" he asked. +<P> +"It's shut off," replied Mark, looking at the electric stove. +<P> +"Then what makes it so hot?" asked the scientist. +<P> +He pointed to the little silvery column in the tiny tube of the instrument. +It registered close to one hundred degrees, though a few minutes before it +had been but sixty. And the starting of the machinery could not account for +the rise in temperature, since most of the apparatus was run by electricity +and developed little heat save in the immediate proximity. The thermometer +was fully ten feet away from any machine. +<P> +"It's the fiery furnace that's doing it!" cried Washington. "We're falling +into th' terrible pit an' we're goin' t' be roasted alive!" +<P> +"It certainly is getting warmer," observed Mark, as he took off his coat. +Soon he had to shed his vest, and Jack and the professor followed his example. +The others too, also found all superfluous garments a burden, and, in a little +while they were going about in scanty attire. +<P> +Still the heat increased, until it was almost torture to remain in the engine +room. Nor was it much cooler elsewhere. In vain did the professor set a score +of big electric fans to whirring. He even placed cakes of ice, from the small +ice machine that was carried, in front of the revolving blades, to cool off +the air. But the ice was melted almost as soon as it was taken from the +apparatus. +<P> +"Them flames is gittin' worser!" Washington cried a little later. "We's comin' +nearer!" +<P> +From the bottom window the professor and the boys looked down. True enough +the curious, changing, vari-colored lights seemed brighter. They could almost +see the tongues of flame shooting upward in anticipation of what they were +soon to devour. +<P> +The heat was increasing every minute. The sides of the ship were hot. The +heads of the travelers were getting dizzy. They could hardly talk or move +about. +<P> +"I must save our lives! I must trust to the——" The professor, who was muttering +to himself started toward the storeroom. As in a dream Mark watched him. +He remembered afterward that he had speculated on what might be the outcome +of the mystery the professor threw about the place. "I will have to use it," +he heard the scientist say softly. +<P> +Just as Mr. Henderson was about to open the door there came a fiercer blast +of heat than any that had preceded. At the same instant the conditions in +the <I>Mermaid </I>became so fearful that each of the travelers felt himself +fainting away. +<P> +"Go to—storeroom—get cylinder—get in——" the professor murmured, and then +he fell forward in a faint. +<h3>CHAPTER XVI</h3> +<h4>THE NEW LAND</h4> +<P> +"WHAT is it? Tell us!" exclaimed Jack, almost in his last breath, for, a +few seconds later he too toppled over senseless. Then Washington went down, +while Andy, Bill and Tom succumbed to the terrible heat. +<P> +Mark felt his head swimming. His eyes were almost bulging from their sockets. +He dimly remembered trying to force himself to go to the storeroom and see +what was there. He started toward it with that intention, but fell half way +to it. +<P> +As he did so he saw something which impressed itself on his mind, half +unconscious as he was. +<P> +The door of the storeroom suddenly opened, and from it came a giant shape, +that seemed to expand until it filled the whole of the apartment where the +stricken ones lay. It was like the form of some monster, half human, half +beast. Mark shuddered, and then, closing his eyes, he felt himself sinking +down into some terrible deep and black pit. A second later the whole ship +was jarred as though it had hit something. +<P> +How long he and the others remained unconscious Mark did not know. He was +the first to revive, and his first sensation was one as though he had slept +hard and long, and did not want to get up. He felt very comfortable, although +he was lying flat on the floor, with his head jammed against the side of +a locker. It was so dark that he could not distinguish his hand held close +to his face. +<P> +"I wonder if I'm dead, and if all the others are dead too," he thought to +himself. "What has happened? Let's see, the last I remember was some horrible +shape rushing from the storeroom. I wonder what it could have been? Surely +that was not the secret the professor referred to." +<P> +Mark shuddered as he recalled the monster that seemed to have grown more +terrible as each second passed. Then the boy raised himself up from his prostrate +position. +<P> +"Well, at any rate, some one has turned off the heat," he murmured. "It's +very comfortable in here now. I wish I could strike a light." +<P> +He listened intently, to learn if any of the others were moving about. He +could hear them breathing, but so faintly as to indicate they were insensible. +Mark stretched out his hand and felt that some one was lying close to him, +but who of the adventurers it was he could not determine. +<P> +"If only the dynamo was working we could have light," he said. "But it seems +to have stopped," and, indeed there was a lacking of the familiar purr and +hum of the electrical machine. In fact none of the apparatus in the ship +was working. +<P> +"The storage battery!" exclaimed Mark. "That would give light for a while, +if I can only find the switch in the dark." +<P> +He began crawling about on his hands and knees. It was so intensely black +that he ran into many things and received severe bruises. At last he came +to a doorway, and as he did so his hand came in contact with an easy chair. +It was the only one aboard, and by that he knew he had passed into the sitting +room. He had his general direction now, and knew if he kept straight on he +would come to the engine room. There he was familiar enough with the apparatus +and levers to be able to turn the electric switch. +<P> +Crawling slowly and cautiously, he reached the room where all the engines +were. Then he had to feel around the sides to locate the switch. At length +he found it. There was a click, a little flash of greenish fire, and the +copper conductors came together, and the ship was flooded with the glow from +the incandescents. +<P> +Mark hurried back to where the others were lying. They were still unconscious, +but an uneasy, movement on the part of Jack told that he was coming out of +the stupor. Mark got some ammonia and held it beneath his comrade's nose. +The strong fumes completed the work that nature had started and Jack opened +his eyes. +<P> +"Where am I? What has happened? Are any of them dead?" he asked quickly. +<P> +"I hope no one is dead," Mark replied. "As to the other question, I can't +answer. I don't know whether we are a thousand miles underground, or floating +on the ocean, though I'm more inclined to the former theory. But never mind +that now. Help me to bring the others back to their senses. I'll work on +the professor and you can begin on Bill or Tom. Washington seems to be all +right," for at that moment the colored man opened his eyes, stared about +him and then got up. +<P> +"I thought I was dead for suah!" he exclaimed. +<P> +"Some of the others may be if we don't hurry," said Mark. "Get to work, Wash!" +<P> +With the colored man to help them the two boys, by the use of the ammonia, +succeeded in reviving Bill, Tom and old Andy. But the professor, probably +on account of his advanced age, did not respond so readily to the treatment. +The boys were getting quite alarmed, as even some of the diluted ammonia, +forced between his lips, did not cause him to open his eyes, or increase +his heart action. +<P> +"If he should die, and leave us all alone with the ship in this terrible +place, what would we do?" asked Jack. +<P> +"He's not going to die!" exclaimed Mark. "Here I have another plan. Washington +bring that medical electrical battery from the engine room." This was a small +machine the professor had brought along for experimental purposes. +<P> +Quickly adjusting it, Mark placed the handles in the nerveless fingers of +Mr. Henderson. Then he started the current. In about a minute the eyelids +of the aged inventor began to quiver, and, in less than five minutes he had +been revived sufficiently to enable him to sit up. He passed his hand across +his forehead. +<P> +"What has happened?" he asked in a faint voice. +<P> +"I don't know; none of us knows," Mark answered. "We all lost our senses +when it got so hot, and there seemed to be some peculiar vapor in the air. +The last I remember was seeing some horrible shape rush from the storeroom, +soon after the ship struck. Then I fainted away. When I woke up I managed +to turn the lights on, and then I came back here." +<P> +"I wonder where we are," the old man murmured. "I must find out. We must +take every precaution. Washington, go and look at the gage indicating our +depth." +<P> +The colored man was gone but a few seconds. When he returned his eyes were +bulging in terror. +<P> +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson, who, thanks to the battery, had almost +completely recovered. +<P> +"It ain't possible!" gasped Washington. "I'll never believe it!" +<P> +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson, while the others waited in anxiety for +the answer. +<P> +"We're five hundred miles down!" declared Washington. +<P> +"Five hundred miles!" muttered the inventor. "It does not seem possible, +but it must be so. We fell very rapidly and the terrible draught sucked us +down with incredible rapidity. But come, we must see what our situation is, +and where we are. We are stationary, and are evidently on some solid substance." +<P> +They all felt much recovered now, and, as the terrible fright of being consumed +in a fiery furnace had passed, they all were in better spirits. +<P> +At the suggestion of the professor, the boys and Washington made a tour of +the ship. They found, for some unaccountable reason, that nearly all the +engines and apparatuses were out of gear. In some the parts had broken, and +others were merely stopped, from the failure of some other machine, on which +they were dependent. +<P> +"I'm afraid this is the end of the <I>Mermaid," </I>said Mark, in a sorrowful +tone. +<P> +"Nonsense!" replied Jack, who was of a more cheerful nature. "Things are +not so bad as they look. The professor can fix everything." +<P> +"I'm sure I hope so," Mark went on, not much encouraged, however, by Jack's +philosophy. "It would be no joke to have to stay five hundred miles underground +the rest of our lives." +<P> +"You don't know," retorted Jack. "Don't judge of a country you've never seen. +This may be as fine a place as it is on the surface of the earth. I want +a chance to see it," and Jack began to whistle a cheerful tune. +<P> +They completed the tour of the ship, and found, that, aside from the damage +to the machinery, the <I>Mermaid </I>had not sustained any harm. The hull +was in good order, though of course they could not tell about the gas holder. +It was not possible to see this except by going into the conning tower or +out on the small deck, and this they did not venture to do. The connections +between the holder and the main ship seemed to be all right, and there was +still a small quantity of gas in the big tank, as Mark found on opening a +stop-cock. +<P> +They went back to the professor and told him what they had observed. He seemed +somewhat alarmed, the more so as the experience he had just passed through +had weakened him considerably. +<P> +"I hope I shall be able to make the repairs," he said. "It is our only hope." +<P> +As he spoke he looked up at the electric lights that shone overhead from +wall brackets. +<P> +"Who is shutting down the power?" he asked. +<P> +"There is no power on, Professor," replied Mark. "I am running the lights +from the storage battery. But something is the matter, for they are growing +dim." +<P> +The filaments were now mere dull red wires, and the ship was being shrouded +in gloom again. +<P> +"The battery is failing!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "We shall be left in darkness, +and there is no other way to produce light. I ought to have brought some +lamps or candles along in case of emergency." +<P> +The next instant the <I>Mermaid </I>became as black as Egypt is popularly +supposed to be, and something like an exclamation of terror came from the +professor. +<P> +For several minutes they all sat there in the blackness and gloom, waiting +for they knew not what. Then, suddenly, there sounded throughout the ship, +a creaking as of metal sliding along metal. Some big lever creaked, and, +a second later the whole place was flooded with light. +<P> +"What has happened?" cried the professor, starting to his feet in alarm. +<P> +"We are going to be burned up!" exclaimed old Andy. +<P> +"It's all right! It's all right!" yelled Washington from the engine room +where the boys had left him. "Don't git skeered! I done it! I opened the +port holes, by yanking on the lever. Golly, but we's arrived at the new land! +Look out, everybody!" +<h3>CHAPTER XVII</h3> +<h4>A STRANGE COUNTRY</h4> +<P> +THEY all ran to the port holes, which were openings in the side of the ship. +They were fitted with thick, double glass, and covered on the outside with +steel shutters. These shutters were worked by a single lever from the engine +room, so that one person could open or close them in a second or two. Washington, +by accident, it appeared later, had slid back the protecting pieces of steel, +and the rest followed. +<P> +As the adventurers looked from the glass ports they saw that the light which +had flooded the ship came from without. They were in the midst of a beautiful +glow, which seemed to be diffused about them like rays from a sun. +<P> +Only, in place of being a yellow or white light, such as the sun gives off +at varying times, the glow was of violet hue. And, as they watched, they +saw the light change color, becoming a beautiful red, then blue, and again +green. +<P> +"Well, this is certainly remarkable!" the professor said. "I wonder what +causes that." +<P> +"We've arrived! We're here, anyhow!" Washington cried, coming into the room. +"See the country!" +<P> +Then, for the first time, the travelers, taking their attention from the +curious light that was all around them, saw that they had indeed arrived. +They were on a vast plain, one, seemingly, boundless in extent, though off +to the left there was a range of lofty mountains, while to the right there +was the glimmer of what might be a big lake or inland sea. +<P> +"See, we are resting on the ground!" exclaimed Jack. He pointed out of the +window, and the others, looking close at hand, noted that the <I>Mermaid +</I>had settled down in the midst of what seemed to be a field of flowers. +Big red and yellow blossoms were all in front, and some grew so tall as to +almost be up to the edge of the port. +<P> +"I wonder if we can be seeing aright," the professor muttered. "Is this really +the interior of the earth; such a beautiful place as this?" +<P> +There could be little doubt of it. The ship had descended through the big +shaft, had been sucked down by the terrible air current, and had really landed +in a strange country. +<P> +Of its size, shape and general conditions the adventurers, as yet, could +but guess. They could see it was a pleasant place, and one where there might +be the means to sustain life. For, as the professor said afterward, he felt +that where there were flowers there would be fruits, and where both of these +provisions of nature were to be found there would likely be animal life, +and even, perhaps, human beings. +<P> +But, for the time, they were content to look from the port on the beautiful +scene that lay stretched out before them. The ship rested on an even keel +and had landed so softly that none of the plates were strained. +<P> +"We have plenty of air, at all events," said the professor as he took a deep +breath. "I was afraid of that, but it seems there was no need. The air appears +to be as good and fresh as that on the surface of the earth, only there is +a curious property to it. It makes one feel larger. I imagine it must be +thinner than the air of the earth, which is a rather strange thing, since +the higher one goes the more rarefied the air becomes, and the lower, the +more dense. Still we can not apply natural philosophy to conditions under +the earth. All the usual theories may be upset. However, we should be content +to take things as we find them, and be glad we were not dashed to pieces +when the ship was caught in the terrible current." +<P> +"What do you suppose caused the awful heat, and then made it go away again?" +asked Jack. +<P> +"I can only make a guess at it," Mr. Henderson answered. "There are many +strange things we will come across if we stay here long, I believe. As for +the fire I think we must have passed a sort of interior volcano." +<P> +"But what sort of a place do you think we have come to, Professor?" asked +Mark. +<P> +"It is hard to say," the scientist replied. "We are certainly somewhere within +the earth. Our gage tells us it is five hundred miles. That may or may not +be correct, but I believe we are several hundred miles under the crust, at +all events. As to what sort of a place it is, you can see for yourselves." +<P> +"But how is it we can breathe here, and things can grow?" asked Bill, who +was beginning to lose his fright at the thought of being practically buried +alive. +<P> +"I do not know what makes such things possible," Mr. Henderson replied, "but +that there is air here is a certainty. I can hardly believe it is drawn from +the surface of the earth, down the big hole, and I am inclined to think this +place of the under-world has an atmosphere of its own, and one which produces +different effects than does our own." +<P> +"They certainly have larger flowers than we have," said Mark. "See how big +they grow, and what strong colors they have." +<P> +He pointed to the port, against which some of the blooms were nodding in +the wind that had sprung up, for, in spite of the many differences, the +under-world was in some respects like the upper one. +<P> +"Probably the difference in the atmosphere accounts for that," the professor +said. "It enables things to grow larger. And, by the way, Mark, that reminds +me of something you said about seeing some horrible monster fleeing from +the ship. Did you dream that?" +<P> +"I did see something horrible, Professor," he answered. "I'm not positive +what it was, but I'll tell you as nearly as I can what it was like." +<P> +Thereupon Mark detailed what he had seen. +<P> +"But how could anything, least of all some big monster, be concealed in the +storeroom, and we not know anything about it?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"I thought you did know something of it," replied Mark. +<P> +"Who, me? My dear boy, you must be dreaming again. Why should I want to conceal +any being in the storeroom? Come, there is something back of this. Tell me +all you know of it. I can't imagine why you think I was hiding something +in the apartment." +<P> +"I thought so because you were always so anxious not to have me go near it," +answered the boy. "Don't you remember when you saw me going toward it, several +times, you warned me away?" +<P> +"So I did!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson, a light breaking over his face. "But, +Mark, it was not because I had hidden some human being or animal there. I +can't tell you what it is yet, save that I can say it is merely a machine +of mine that I have invented. For reasons of my own I don't want any one +to see it yet. Perhaps it may never be seen. I thought, not long ago, that +we might have to undertake a terrible risk in escaping from this place. I +directed you to go to the storeroom—but there, I can't say any more, my +friends. Sufficient that I had nothing in the animal line concealed there." +<P> +"But I am certain there was some beast or human being in there," insisted +Mark. "I heard curious noises in there. Besides, how do you account for the +food disappearing and the door being open at times?" +<P> +"It might have been rats," said Jack. +<P> +"I don't believe there are rats in the ship," put in the professor. "More +likely it was one of us who got up hungry and took the victuals." +<P> +"I'm sorry I can't agree with you," Mark added respectfully. "I am sure some +strange being was on board this ship, and I believe it has now escaped. Who +or what it was I can't say, but you'll find I'm right, some day." +<P> +"All right," spoke Mr. Henderson with a laugh. "I like to see any one brave +enough to stick up for his opinion, but, at the same time, I can't very well +imagine any person or thing being concealed in that storeroom ever since +we started. How could it get in?" +<P> +Mark did not; answer, but there came to him the recollection of that night, +previous to the sailing of the <I>Flying Mermaid, </I>when he had observed +some strange shadow that seemed to glide aboard the craft. +<P> +"Now let's forget all about such things," the professor went on. "We are +in a strange country, and there are many things to see and do. Let's explore +a little. Then we must see what we can do with the ship. We are dependent +on it, and it will not do to allow it to remain in a damaged state. We expect +to travel many miles in the interior of the earth if it is possible, and +we have only our craft to go in." +<P> +"I reckon we'd all better assimilate into our interior progression some molecules +and atoms of partly disentegrated matter in order to supply combustion for +the carbonaceous elements and assist in the manufacture of red corpuscles," +said Washington, appearing in the door, with a broad grin on his good-natured +face. +<P> +"Which, being interpreted," the professor said, "means, I suppose, that we +had better eat something to keep our digestive apparatus in good working +order?" +<P> +"Yo' done guessed it!" exclaimed the colored man, relapsing into his ordinary +speech. "I'se got a meal all ready." +<P> +They agreed that they might not have another opportunity soon to partake +of food, so they all gathered about the table, on which Washington had spread +a good meal. +<P> +"Come on, let's go outside and view this new and strange land at closer +quarters," the professor said, when they had satisfied their appetites. "We +can't see much from inside the ship." +<P> +Accordingly the heavy door in the side of the <I>Mermaid </I>was slid back, +and, for the first time the travelers stepped out on the surface of the land +in the interior of the earth. +<P> +At first it seemed no different than the ordinary land to which they were +accustomed. But they soon found it had many strange attributes. The queer +shifting and changing light, with the myriad of hues was one of them, but +to this the adventurers had, by this time, become accustomed, though it was, +none the less, a marvel to them. It was odd enough to see the landscape blood +red one instant, and a pale green the next, as it does when you look through +differently colored glasses. +<P> +Then, too, they noticed that the grass and flowers grew much more abundantly +than in the outer part of the world. They saw clover six feet high, and blades +of grass even taller. In some places the growth of grass was so big that +they were in danger of getting lost in it. +<P> +"If the grass is like this, what will the trees be?" asked Mark. +<P> +"There are some away over there," Jack replied. "We'll have to take a sail +over. They must be several hundred feet high." +<P> +"Well, at any rate, here's a little brook, and the water looks good to drink," +went on Mark. "I'm thirsty, so here goes." +<P> +He hurried to where a stream was flowing sluggishly between grassy banks. +The water was as clear as crystal, and Mark got down on his face and prepared +to sip some of the liquid up. +<P> +But, no sooner had his lips touched it, than he sprang up with a cry and +stood gazing at the water. +<P> +"What's the matter?" asked Jack. "Hot?" +<P> +"No, it isn't hot," Mark replied, "but it isn't water. It's white molasses!" +<P> +"White molasses?" repeated the professor, coming up at that moment. "What +are you talking about?" +<P> +He stooped down and dipped his finger into the stream. He drew it up quickly, +and there ran from it big drops that flowed as slowly as the extract of the +sugarcane does in cold weather. +<P> +"You're about right, Mark," he said. "It's water but it's almost as thick +as molasses." He touched his finger to his tongue. "It's good to drink, all +right," he went on, "only it will be a little slow going down." +<P> +Then he dipped up a palm full, and let it trickle down his throat. +<P> +"It is the strangest water I ever saw," he added. "It must be that the lack +of some peculiar property of air, which we have on the surface, has caused +this. I must make some notes on it," and he drew out pencil and paper. He +was about to jot down some facts when he was interrupted by a cry from +Washington. +<P> +"Come and see what's the matter with this stone!" he cried. +<h3>CHAPTER XVIII</h3> +<h4>CAUGHT BY A STRANGE PLANT</h4> +<P> +"WASHINGTON is in trouble!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. Followed by the two +boys he ran to where the colored man stood in a stooping position over a +small pile of stones. +<P> +"What is it? Has something bit you?" asked the scientist, as he came up on +the run. +<P> +"No, but I can't git this stone up!" Washington said. "Look at what a little +stone it is, but I can't lift it. Something must have happened to me. Maybe +some one put th' evil eye on me! Maybe I'm bewitched!" +<P> +"Nonsense!" exclaimed the professor, "what did you want the stone for?" +<P> +"Nothin' in particular," replied Washington, still tugging away at the stone, +which was the size of his head. "I was just goin' t' throw it at a big bird, +but when I went to lift it this little stone 'peared t' be glued fast." +<P> +Washington moved aside to give Mr. Henderson a chance to try to pick up the +piece of rock. As the scientist grasped it a look of surprise came over his +features: +<P> +"This is most remarkable!" he exclaimed. "I can't budge it. I wonder if a +giant magnet is holding it down." +<P> +He tugged and tugged until he was red in the face. Then he beckoned to the +two boys, and they came to his aid. There was barely room for them all to +each get one hand on the rock, and then, only after a powerful tug did it +come up. Almost instantly it dropped back to the earth. +<P> +"This is remarkable!" the professor said. "I wonder if the other stones are +the same." +<P> +He tried several others, and one and all resisted his efforts. It was only +the small stones he was able to lift alone, and these, he said, were so weighty +that it would have been a task to throw them any distance. +<P> +"The water and the stones are strangely heavy in this land," he said. "I +wonder what other queer things we shall see." +<P> +"I saw a bird a little while ago, when I went to pick up that stone," observed +Washington. +<P> +"What kind was it?" asked the inventor. +<P> +"I don't know, only it was about as big as an eagle." +<P> +The travelers wandered about a quarter of a mile from the ship. They avoided +the tall grass and the lofty nodding flowers that seemed to grow in regular +groves, and kept to places where they could walk with comparative freedom. +<P> +"Have you formed any idea, Professor, as to the nature of this country?" +asked Mark, who liked to get at the bottom of things. +<P> +"I have, but it is only a theory," Mr. Henderson answered. "I believe we +are on a sort of small earth that is inside the larger one we live on. This +sphere floats in space, just as our earth does, and we have passed through +the void that lies between our globe and this interior one. I think this +new earth is about a quarter the size of ours and in some respects the same. +In others it is vastly different. +<P> +"But we will not think of those things now. We must see what our situation +is, whether we are in any danger, and must look to repairing our ship. There +will be time enough for other matters later." +<P> +The travelers were walking slowly along, noting the strange things on every +side. As they advanced the vegetation seemed to become more luxuriant, as +if nature had tried to out-do herself in providing beautiful flowers and +plants. The changing lights added to the beauty and weirdness of the scene. +<P> +The plain was a rolling one, and here and there were small hills and hollows. +As the travelers topped a rise Jack, who was in advance, called out: +<P> +"Oh what queer plants! They are giant Jacks-in-the-pulpit!" +<P> +The others hastened forward to see what the boy had discovered. Jack was +too eager to wait, and pressed on. The hill which sloped away from the top +of the little plateau on which he stood, was steeper than he had counted +on. As he leaned forward he lost his balance and toppled, head foremost, +down the declivity, rolling over. +<P> +"Look out!" cried Mark, who had almost reached his comrade's side. +<P> +The scene that confronted the travelers was a strange one. Before them in +a sort of hollow, were scores of big plants, shaped somewhat like a +Jack-in-the-pulpit, or a big lily, with a curved top or flap to it. +<P> +The plants were about eight feet tall, three feet across the top, and the +flap or covering was raised about two feet. They were nodding and swaying +in the wind on their short stems. +<P> +"He's headed right for one of them!" Mr. Henderson exclaimed. "I hope he'll +not fall into one of the openings." +<P> +"Is there any danger?" asked Mark. +<P> +"I'm afraid there is," the inventor added. "Those plants are a variety of +the well-known pitcher plant, or fly-trap, as they are sometimes called. +In tropical countries they grow to a large size, but nothing like these. +They are filled, in the cup, with a sort of sticky, sweet mixture, and this +attracts insects. When one enters the cup the top flap folds over, and the +hapless insect is caught there. The plant actually devours it, nature providing +a sort of vegetable digestive apparatus. These giant plants are the same, +and they seem large enough to take in a man, to say nothing of Jack!" +<P> +With anxious faces the adventurers turned to watch the fate of their comrade. +Jack was slipping, sliding and rolling down the hill. He could not seem to +stop, though he was making desperate efforts to do so. He was headed straight +for one of the largest of the terrible plants. +<P> +In vain, as he saw what was in front of him, did he try to change the course +of his involuntary voyage. Over and over he rolled, until, at length, he +struck a little grassy hummock, bounced into the air, and right into the +opening of a monster pitcher plant. +<P> +"It has him!" cried Mark. "We must save him! Come on everyone!" +<P> +He raced down the hill, while the others came closely after him. They reached +the plant into which Jack had bounced. The flap, or top piece, had closed +down, tightly over the unfortunate boy. +<P> +"Quick! We must save him or he will be smothered to death or drowned in the +liquid the cup contains!" Mr. Henderson exclaimed. "Attack the plant with +anything you can find!" +<P> +"Let's cut through the side of the flower-cup!" suggested Mark. "That seems +softer than the stem." +<P> +His idea was quickly put into operation. Andy's long hunting knife came in +very handy. While the sides of the long natural cup were tough, the knife +made an impression on them, and, soon, a small door or opening had been cut +in the side of the pitcher plant, large enough to enable a human body to +pass through. +<P> +When the last fibre had been severed by Andy, who was chosen to wield the +knife because of his long practice as a hunter, there was a sudden commotion +within the plant. Then a dark object, dripping water, made a spring and landed +almost at the feet of the professor. +<P> +It was Jack, and a sorry sight he presented. He was covered from head to +foot with some sticky substance, which dripped from all over him. +<P> +With hasty movements he cleared the stuff from his eyes and mouth, and +spluttered: +<P> +"It's a good thing you cut me out when you did. I couldn't have held on much +longer!" +<h3>CHAPTER XIX</h3> +<h4>THE BIG PEACH</h4> +<P> +JACK soon recovered from his remarkable experience. The terrible plant that +had nearly eaten him alive was a mass of cut-up vegetable matter which attracted +a swarm of insects. Most of them were ants, but such large ones the boys +had never seen before, and the professor said they exceeded in size anything +he had read about. Some of them were as large as big rats. They bit off large +pieces of the fallen plant and carried them to holes in the ground which +were big enough for Washington to slip his foot into, and he wore a No. 11 +shoe. +<P> +But the adventurers felt there were more important things for them to look +at than ants, so they started away again, the professor telling them all +to be careful and avoid accidents. +<P> +It was while they were strolling through a little glade, which they came +upon unexpectedly, that Washington, who was in the lead called out: +<P> +"Gracious goodness! It must be Thanksgivin'!" +<P> +"Why so?" asked Jack. +<P> +"'Cause here's th' remarkablest extraordinary and expansionist of a pumpkin +that ever I laid eyes on!" the colored man cried. +<P> +They all hurried to where Washington had come to a halt. There, on the ground +in front of him, was a big round object, about the size of a hogshead. It +was yellow in color, and was not unlike the golden vegetable from which mothers +make such delicious pies. +<P> +"I allers was fond of pumpkins," said Washington, placing his hand on the +thing, which was almost as tall as he was, "but I never thought I'd come +across such a one as this." +<P> +The professor and the two boys went closer to the monstrosity. Mr. Henderson +passed his hand over it and then, bending closer, smelled of it. +<P> +"That's not a pumpkin!" he exclaimed. +<P> +"What is it then?" asked Washington. +<P> +"It's a giant peach," the inventor remarked. "Can't you see the fuzz, and +smell it? Of course it's a peach." +<P> +"Well I'll be horn-swoggled!" cried Washington, leaning against the big fruit, +which easily, supported him. +<P> +"Hurrah!" cried Jack, drawing his knife from his pocket and opening the largest +blade. "I always did like peaches. Now I can have all I want," and he drove +the steel into the object, cutting off a big slice which he began to eat. +<P> +"It may be poisonous!" exclaimed Mark. +<P> +"Too late now," responded Jack, the juice running down from his mouth. "Taste's +good, anyhow." +<P> +They all watched Jack while he devoured his slice of fruit. Washington acted +as if he expected his friend to topple over unconscious, but Jack showed +no bad symptoms. +<P> +"You'd better all have some," the boy said. "It's the best I ever tasted." +<P> +Encouraged by Jack's example, Mark thought he, too, would have some of the +fruit. He opened his knife and was about to take off some of the peach when +suddenly the thing began to roll forward, almost upon him. +<P> +"Hi! Stop your shoving!" he exclaimed. "Do you want to have the thing roll +over me, Jack?" +<P> +"I'm not shoving!" replied Jack. +<P> +"Some one is!" Mark went on. He dodged around the far side of the immense +fruit and what he saw made him cry out in astonishment. +<P> +Two grasshoppers, each one standing about three feet high, were standing +on their hind legs, and with their fore feet were pushing the peach along +the ground. They had been attracted to the fruit by some juice which escaped +from a bruise on that side, which was the ripest, and, being fond of sweets +had, evidently decided to take their find to some safe place where they could +eat it at their leisure. Or perhaps they wanted to provide for their families +if grasshoppers have them. +<P> +"Did you ever see such monsters?" asked Jack. "They're as big as dogs!" +<P> +At the sound of his voice the two grasshoppers, becoming alarmed, ceased +their endeavors to roll the peach along, and, assuming a crouching attitude +seemed to be waiting. +<P> +"They certainly are remarkable specimens," Mr. Henderson said. "If the other +animals are in proportion, and if there are persons in this new world, we +are likely to have a hard time of it." +<P> +This time the immense insects concluded the strangers were not to their liking. +With a snapping of their big muscular legs and a whirr of their wings that +was like the starting of an automobile, the grasshoppers rose into the air +and sailed away over the heads of the adventurers. Their flight was more +than an eighth of a mile in extent, and they came down in a patch of the +very tall grass. +<P> +"Let's go after them!" exclaimed old Andy. "I was so excited I forgot to +take a shot at them. Come on!" +<P> +"I think we'd better not," counseled the professor. "In the first place we +don't need them. They would be no good for food. Then we don't know but what +they might attack us, and it would be no joke to be bitten by a grasshopper +of that size. Let them alone. We may find other game which will need your +attention, Andy. Better save your ammunition." +<P> +Somewhat against his will, Andy had to submit to the professor's ruling. +The old hunter consoled himself with the reflection that if insects grew +to that size he would have some excellent sport hunting even the birds of +the inner world. +<P> +"I wonder what sort of a tree that peach grew on," Jack remarked, as he cut +off another slice, when the excitement caused by the discovery of the +grasshoppers had subsided. "It must be taller than a church steeple. I wonder +how the fruit got here, for there are no trees around." +<P> +"I fancy those insects rolled it along for a good distance," Mr. Henderson +put in. "You can see the marks on the ground, where they pushed it. They +are wonderful creatures." +<P> +"Are we going any farther?" asked Mark. "Perhaps we can find the peach tree, +and, likely there are other fruit trees near it." +<P> +At the professor's suggestion they strolled along for some distance. They +were now about three miles from the airship, and found that what they had +supposed was a rather level plain, was becoming a succession of hills and +hollows. It was while descending into a rather deep valley that Jack pointed +ahead and exclaimed: +<P> +"I guess there's our peach orchard, but I never saw one like it before." +<P> +Nor had any of the others. Instead of trees the peaches were attached to +vines growing along the ground. They covered a large part of the valley, +and the peaches, some bigger than the one they first discovered, some small +and green, rose up amid the vines, just as pumpkins do in a corn field. +<P> +"Stranger and stranger," the professor murmured. "Peaches grow on vines. +I suppose potatoes will grow on trees. Everything seems to be reversed here." +<P> +They made their way down toward the peach "orchard" as Jack called it, though +"patch" would have been a better name. Besides peaches they found plums, +apples, and pears growing in the same way, and all of a size proportionate +to the first-named fruit. +<P> +"Well, one thing is evident," Mr. Henderson remarked, "we shall not starve +here. There is plenty to eat, even if we have to turn vegetarians." +<P> +"I wonder what time it is getting to be," Jack remarked. "My watch says twelve +o'clock but whether it's noon or midnight I can't tell, with this colored +light coming and going. I wonder if it ever sets as the sun does." +<P> +"That is something we'll have to get used to," the professor said. "But I +think we had better go back to the ship now. We have many things to do to +get it in order again. Besides, I am a little afraid to leave it unguarded +so long. No telling but what some strange beast—or persons, for that +matter—might injure it." +<P> +"I'm going to take back some slices of peaches with me, anyhow," Mark said, +and he and Jack cut off enough to make several meals, while Bill, Tom and +Washington took along all they could carry. +<P> +As they walked back toward the ship the strange lights seemed to be dying +out. At first they hardly noticed this, but as they continued on it became +quite gloomy, and an odd sort of gloom it was too, first green, then yellow, +then red and then blue. +<P> +"I believe whatever serves as a sun down here is setting," the professor +observed. "We must hurry. I don't want to be caught out here after dark." +<P> +They hurried on, the lights dying out more and more, until, as they came +in sight of their ship, it was so black they could hardly see. +<P> +Mark who was in the rear turned around, glancing behind him. As he did so +he caught sight of a gigantic shadow moving along on top of the nearest hill. +The shadow was not unlike that of a man in shape, but of such gigantic stature +that Mark knew it could be like no human being he had ever seen. At the same +time it bore a curious resemblance to the weird shadow he had seen slip into +the <I>Mermaid </I>that night before they sailed. +<P> +"I wonder if it can be the same—the same thing—grown larger, just as the +peach grows larger than those in our world," Mark thought, while a shiver +of fear seemed to go over him. "I wonder if that—that thing could have been +on the ship——" +<P> +Then the last rays of light died away and there was total darkness. +<h3>CHAPTER XX</h3> +<h4>OVERHAULING THE SHIP</h4> +<P> +"KEEP together!" shouted the professor. "It will not do to become lost now. +We are close to the ship, and will soon be there. Come after me." +<P> +It was more by following the sound of the scientist's voice, than by any +sight which the others could get of him, that they managed to trail along +behind. They reached the ship in safety, however, and entered. There was +no sound as of beasts or insects within, and, though Mark felt a little +apprehensive on account of what he had seen, he and the others as well, were +glad to be again in something that seemed like home. +<P> +"I wish we had some candles, or some sort of a light to see by," the professor +remarked. "We can do nothing in the dark, and there is no telling how long +this night is going to last once it has set in. If I could have a little +illumination, I might be able to fix the dynamo, and then we could turn on +the incandescents. That portable light we had is broken. +<P> +"By cracky!" exclaimed Andy. "I believe I have the very thing!" +<P> +"You don't mean to say you have a torch or a candle with you, do you?" asked +Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"No, but I have my patent pipe lighting apparatus," the hunter said. "I always +carry it. It gives a little light, but not much, though it may be enough +to work by." +<P> +Not until after several hours work, handicapped as they were by lack of light, +were the repairs to the ship completed. +<P> +"Now we'll start the engine and see how we will come out," the inventor +exclaimed, as he wiped his hands on some waste. +<P> +It did not take long to generate enough power to turn the dynamo. Soon the +familiar hum and whirr was heard, and, a few seconds later the filaments +in the lamps began to glow a dull red, which gradually brightened until they +were shining in all their usual brilliancy. +<P> +"Hurrah!" cried the boys. "Now we can see!" +<P> +They all felt in better spirits with the restoration of the lights, and, +washing off the grease and dirt of their labors in the engine room, they +prepared to sit down to the meal which Washington prepared. +<P> +As soon as the dynamo was working well, care had to be taken not to speed +it too much on account of a mended belt. The professor turned off part of +the lights and switched some of the current into the storage batteries, to +provide for emergencies. For there was no telling how long the night might +last. +<P> +Jack was the first one to finish the meal—they did not know whether to call +it dinner, supper or breakfast. He went into the conning tower, and, as soon +as he reached it he called out: +<P> +"Come on up here, professor! There's something strange going on!" +<P> +Mr. Henderson, followed by Mark, hurried to the tower. As he reached it and +looked out of the forward window, a beautiful white glow illuminated the +whole scene, and then, from below the horizon, there arose seven luminous +disks. One was in the centre, while about it circled the other six, like +some immense pin-wheel. +<P> +"It's the moon!" cried Mark. +<P> +"It's seven moons!" Jack exclaimed. "Why it's almost as light as day!" +<P> +And so it was, for the seven moons, if that is what they were, gave an +illumination not unlike the sun in brilliancy though it was like the beams +from the pale moon of the earth. +<P> +"I guess we need not have worried about the darkness," the professor remarked. +"Still it is a good thing I fixed the dynamo." +<P> +For some time he and the other adventurers watched the odd sight of the moons, +as they rose higher and higher overhead. The scene was a beautiful, if weird +one, for the whole plain was bathed in the soft light. +<P> +"I guess we can turn off the incandescents, and use all the power for the +storage batteries," Mr. Henderson went on, as he descended into the ship, +and opened the port shutters which had been closed when they started off +on their exploring tour. The interior of the <I>Mermaid </I>was almost as +light as when the odd colored beams had been playing over the new earth to +which they had come. +<P> +"I think we had better continue with our work of making repairs," Mr. Henderson +said. "We can't count on these moons remaining here any length of time, and +I want to take advantage of them. So though some of us perhaps need sleep, +we will forego it and fix up the <I>Mermaid. </I>I want to take a trip and +see what other wonders await us." +<P> +They all agreed that they would rather work than sleep, and soon the entire +force was busy in the engine room. There was much to be done, and the most +important things were attended to first. The motive power was overhauled +and found to be in need of several new parts. These were put in and then +the gas generator, and the negative gravity machine, were put in shape. +<P> +It would have taken something very substantial to have awakened any one on +board the <I>Mermaid </I>that night. They all slept soundly and awoke to +find the strange colored lights shining in through the glass covered port +holes. +<P> +"Well, the sun, or what corresponds to it, is up," observed Jack, "and I +guess we had better do as the little boy in the school reader did, and get +up, too, Mark." +<P> +Soon all the travelers were aroused, and the sound of Washington bustling +about in the kitchen, whence came the smell of coffee, bacon and eggs, told +the hungry ones that breakfast was under way. +<P> +After the meal work was again started on repairing the ship, and by noon +the professor remarked: +<P> +"I think we shall try a little flight after dinner. That is, if one thing +doesn't prevent us." +<P> +"What is that?" asked Jack. +<P> +"We may be held down, as were those stones," was the grave answer. +<h3>CHAPTER XXI</h3> +<h4>THE FISH THAT WALKED</h4> +<P> +IT was with no little apprehension that the professor prepared to take his +first flight aboard the ship in the realms of the new world. He knew little +or nothing of the conditions he might meet with, the density of the atmosphere, +or how the <I>Mermaid </I>would behave under another environment than that +to which she was accustomed. +<P> +Yet he felt it was necessary to make a start. They would have to attempt +a flight sooner or later, and Mr. Henderson was not the one to delay matters. +So, the last adjustment having been made to the repaired machinery, they +all took their places in the ship. +<P> +The boys and the professor went to the conning tower to direct matters, while +Washington and the others were in the engine room to see that the machinery +worked properly. Mark gave a last look outside as he closed the big steel +cover over the hole through which admission was had to the craft. He thought +he might catch a glimpse of the queer shadow, but nothing was in sight. It +was like a beautiful summer's day, save for the strange lights, shifting +and changing. But the travelers had become somewhat used to them by this +time. +<P> +The professor turned the valve that allowed the gas to enter the holder. +There was a hissing sound and a sort of trembling throughout the entire ship. +The dynamos were whizzing away and the negative gravity machine was all ready +to start. +<P> +For several minutes the travelers waited until the big lifting tank was filled +with the strong vapor. They watched the gages which indicated the pressure +to be several hundred pounds. +<P> +"I think we can chance it now," remarked Mr. Henderson, as he threw over +several levers. "We'll try, at any rate." +<P> +With a tremor the <I>Mermaid </I>left the surface of the inner earth and +went sailing upward toward the—well it wasn't exactly the sky, but it was +what corresponded to it in the new world, though there were no clouds and +no blue depths such as the boys were used to. At all events the <I>Mermaid +</I>was flying again, and, as the adventurers felt themselves being lifted +up they gave a spontaneous cheer at the success which had crowned their efforts. +<P> +The ship went up several hundred feet, and then, the professor, having brought +her to a stop, sent her ahead at a slow pace. He wanted to be sure all the +apparatus was in good working order before he tried any speed. +<P> +The <I>Mermaid </I>responded readily. Straight as an arrow through the air +she flew. +<P> +"Well, this is almost as good as being on the regular earth!" exclaimed Jack. +<P> +"It's better," put in Mark. "We haven't seen half the wonders yet. Let's +open the floor shutter, and see how it looks down below." +<P> +He and Jack went to the room where there was an opening in the floor of the +ship, covered by heavy glass. They slid back the steel shutter and there, +down below them, was the strange new, world they had come to, stretched out +like some big map. +<P> +They could see mountains, forests, plains, and rivers, the water sparkling +in the colored light. Over green fields they flew, then across some stretches +where only sand and rocks were to be seen. Faster and faster the ship went, +as the professor found the machinery was once more in perfect order. Jack +was idly watching the play of tinted lights over the surface of the ground. +<P> +"I wonder what makes it," he said. +<P> +"I have tried to account for it in several ways," said the professor, who +had called Washington to the conning tower and come to join the boys. "I +have had first one theory and then another, but the one I am almost sure +is correct is that hidden volcanic fires cause the illumination. +<P> +"I think they flare up and die away, and have become so regular that they +produce the same effect as night and day with us. Probably the fires go out +for lack of fuel, and when it is supplied they start up again. Perhaps it +is a sort of gas that they burn." +<P> +"Well, it's queer enough, whatever it is," Jack remarked. "What strikes me +as funny, though, is that we haven't seen a single person since we came here. +Surely this place must be inhabited." +<P> +Mark thought of the strange shadow he had seen, but said nothing. +<P> +"I believe it is," the professor answered. "We will probably come upon the +inhabitants soon. I only hope they are a people who will do us no harm." +<P> +"If they tried any of their tricks we could mount up in our ship and escape +them," said Andy. +<P> +"Provided they gave us the chance," Mr. Henderson put in. "Well, we'll not +worry about that now." +<P> +For several hours the ship traveled on, until it had come to a different +sort of country. It was wilder and not so level, and there were a number +of streams and small lakes to be seen. +<P> +"Are you going to sail all night?" asked Jack. +<P> +"No," replied the professor. "I think we'll descend very soon now, and camp +out for a while. That lake just ahead seems to offer a good place," and he +pointed to a large sheet of water that sparkled in the distance, for by this +time they had all gone back to the conning tower. +<P> +The lake was in the midst of a wood that extended for some distance on all +sides, and was down in a sort of valley. The ship headed toward it, and in +a short time a landing was made close to shore. +<P> +"Maybe we can have some fresh fish for supper," exclaimed Jack as he ran +from the ship as soon as the sliding door in the side was opened. "Looks +as if that lake had some in it. It is not thick water like in that stream +we stopped at," he added. +<P> +"I believe you're right," old Andy put in, as he turned back to look for +some lines and hooks among his traps. He soon found what he wanted, and gave +them to the boys, taking his trusty gun along for himself. +<P> +While the professor, Washington, Tom and Bill remained behind to make some +adjustments to the machinery, and to get things in shape for the night, which, +they calculated would soon be upon them, Jack, Mark and Andy went down to +the shore of the lake. The boys cut some poles from the trees, and baiting +the hooks with some fat worms found under the bark, threw in. +<P> +"Let's see who'll get the first bite," spoke Jack. "I'm pretty generally +lucky at fishing." +<P> +"Well, while you're waiting to decide that there contest, I think I'll take +a stroll along shore and see if I can see anything to shoot," Andy remarked. +<P> +For several minutes the boys sat in silence on the bank of the lake, watching +the play of the vari-colored lights on the water. Suddenly Jack felt a quiver +on his line, and his pole began to shake. +<P> +"I've got something!" he cried. Then his pole bent almost double and he began +to pull for all he was worth. "It's a whopper!" he cried. "Come and help +me, Mark!" +<P> +Mark ran to his friend's aid. Whatever was on the other end of the line was +strong enough to tax the muscles of both boys. They could hear the pole beginning +to break. But for the excellent quality of Andy's line that would have parted +some time before. +<P> +All at once there came a sudden slacking of the pull from whatever was in +the water. And so quickly did it cease that both boys went over backward +in a heap. +<P> +"He's got away!" cried Jack, getting up and brushing some of the dirt from +his clothes. +<P> +"There's something that didn't get away!" cried Mark, who had risen to his +knees, and was pointing at the lake. Jack looked and what he saw made him +almost believe he was dreaming. +<P> +For, emerging from the water, dragging the pole and line the boys had dropped +along with it, was a most curious creature. It was a big fish, but a fish +with four short legs on which it was walking, or rather waddling along as +much as a duck, with a double supply of feet, might do. +<P> +"Say, do I see that or is there something the matter with my eyes?" sung +out Jack, making ready to run away. +<P> +"It's there all right!" exclaimed Mark. "Hi! Andy! Here's something to shoot!" +he yelled, for indeed the creature was big enough to warrant attack with +a gun. It was about five feet long and two feet through. +<P> +On and on it came, straight at the boys, as if to have revenge for the pain +the fish hook must have caused it, for the barb could be seen dangling from +its lip. On and on it came, waddling forward, the water dripping from it +at every step. It had the body and general shape of a fish, save that the +tail was rather large in proportion. As it came nearer the boys noted that +the feet were webbed, like those of a water fowl. +<P> +"Come on!" cried Jack. "It may attack us!" +<P> +At that moment the creature opened its mouth, showing a triple row of formidable +teeth, and gave utterance to a sort of groan and grunt combined. +<P> +This was enough to send Jack and Mark off on a run up the bank, and did they +stop until they heard Andy's voice hailing them. +<P> +"What's the matter, boys?" +<P> +"Come here! Quick!" answered Jack. +<P> +The fish-animal had halted and seemed to be taking an observation. To do +this, as it could not turn its neck, it had to shift its whole body. Old +Andy came up on the run, his gun held in readiness. +<P> +"Where is it?" he asked, and the boys pointed silently. +<P> +The hunter could not repress a start of astonishment as he saw the strange +creature. But he did not hesitate a second. There was a crack of the rifle, +and the thing, whatever it was, toppled over, dead. +<P> +Andy hurried up to it, to get a closer view. +<P> +"Well, this is the limit!" he exclaimed. "First we have grasshoppers that +can roll peaches as big as hogsheads, and now we come across fish that walk. +I wonder what we will see next." +<P> +"I don't want to go fishing in this lake any more," spoke Jack, as he looked +at the repulsive creature. "I never want to eat fish any more." +<P> +"Same here," agreed Mark, and old Andy was of the opinion that the thing +killed would not make a wholesome dish for the table. +<P> +"There don't seem to be any game in this section," he remarked. "Not a sign +could I see, nor have I since we have been here, unless you count those +grasshoppers. But the fruit is good, I'll say that." +<P> +"Come on, we'd better be getting back," Mark said, as he noticed it was getting +dark. "I'm hungry." +<h3>CHAPTER XXII</h3> +<h4>THE SNAKE-TREE</h4> +<P> +THEY managed to make a good meal of the food supplies they had brought along, +and as a dessert Washington made some peach short-cake from the slices of +the giant fruit they had found, the day before. Just as they finished supper +it got very dark, but, in about an hour, the moon-beams, as the travelers +called them, came up, and illuminated the lake with a weird light. +<P> +As the machinery of the <I>Mermaid </I>was now in working order there was +no further alarm because of the darkness. The ship rested on a level keel +about a hundred yards back from the lake, and, seeing that all was snug, +and the fastenings secure, the travelers went to bed. +<P> +Though they had to forego fish for breakfast the travelers made a good meal. +After seeing that the ship was in readiness for a quick start, the professor +suggested they take a walk around and see what sort of country they might +be in now. +<P> +They tramped on for several miles, meeting with no adventures, and seeing +nothing out of the ordinary. It was a pleasant day, just warm enough to be +comfortable, and a little wind was blowing through the trees. +<P> +"It would be almost like home if it wasn't for the strange lights, and the +memory of the queer things here," said Jack. "I feel fine. Let's see if you +can hit that dead tree over there, Mark." +<P> +Jack stooped to grab up a stone, but no sooner had his fingers touched it +than he called out: +<P> +"There! I forgot all about the stones here being heavier than lead. Guess +we can't throw any of 'em. But come on. I'll race you to the dead tree!" +<P> +Mark was willing, so the two boys set off at a fast pace. +<P> +"Look out where you're going!" the professor called after them. "No telling +what may be in those woods," for the boys were approaching a little glade, +on the edge of which the dead tree stood. +<P> +Jack reached the goal first, and stood leaning against the trunk, waiting +for Mark. +<P> +"You'd better practice sprinting!" exclaimed the victor. +<P> +Mark was about to excuse himself for his poor showing, on the plea of having +eaten too much breakfast, when to his horror he saw what seemed to be a long +thin snake spring out from the branches of a nearby tree and twine itself +about Jack. +<P> +"Help me! Save me!" cried the unfortunate boy, as he was lifted high into +the air and pulled within the shadow of the wood. +<P> +For an instant Mark was too horror-stricken to move. Then with a shout that +alarmed the others, who were coming along more slowly, he made a dash for +the place he had last seen Jack. +<P> +Had old Andy not been on the watch, with those keen eyes of his, there might +have been a double tragedy. He had seen from afar the sudden snatching up +of Jack, and noted Mark's rush to save his chum. +<P> +"Stand still! Don't go in there for your life!" yelled the hunter, at the +same time running forward with gun ready. +<P> +His example was followed by the professor, Washington and the other two men. +<P> +"A snake has Jack!" called Mark, when Andy was at his side. +<P> +"No! It's not a snake!" replied the hunter. "It's worse. It's the snake-tree!" +<P> +"What's that?" asked Mr. Henderson, hurrying up. +<P> +"The snake-tree has Jack," the hunter went on. "It is a plant, half animal, +half-vegetable. It has long branches, not unlike a snake in shape. They can +move about and grab things." +<P> +"One of them got a grip on Jack as he leaned against the dead tree trunk. +I just caught a glimpse of it, and called to prevent Mark from running into +danger." +<P> +"Can't we save him?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"I'm going to try!" replied Andy. "Quick! Gather up some pieces of dry wood. +I have some paper, and my pipe lighter. We must fight the snake-tree with +fire!" +<h3>CHAPTER XXIII</h3> +<h4>THE DESERTED VILLAGE</h4> +<P> +JACK'S Cries were growing fainter and fainter. Peering in through the branches +of the dead tree the professor could see the whip-like limbs winding closer +and closer about the boy. +<P> +"I am afraid we will be too late!" he said. +<P> +Andy had twisted some paper into a rude torch. He set fire to it with his +pocket lighter, and, when Bill and Mark brought him some little pieces of +dead wood the old hunter added them to his bundle, which was now blazing +brightly. +<P> +"How are you going to do it?" asked the professor. +<P> +"I'll show you," replied Andy. He bound the sticks and paper together with +wisps of grass and then, when it was so hot he could hardly hold it longer, +he ran as close as he dared to the snake-tree and tossed the torch at the +foot of it. +<P> +The blazing bundle fell among some damp leaves and grass, as Andy had intended +it should, and soon a dense smoke arose, pouring straight up through the +branches of the animal-tree, the limbs of which were gathered in a knot about +the half-unconscious form of the boy. +<P> +For a few minutes they all waited anxiously. Would Andy's trick succeed? +Had the terrible tree not already squeezed the life from Jack? +<P> +But, while they watched, there seemed to come a change over the tree. The +snake-like arms waved less and less. They seemed to straighten out, as though +deprived of power by the smoke which was now so dense as to hide Jack from +sight. Then the arms suddenly relaxed and something rolled from them and +fell to the ground. With a quick movement Andy darted in, crawling on his +hands and knees beneath the limbs, and brought Jack out. The boy was white +and his eyes were closed. +<P> +"Get some water!" cried the old hunter. +<P> +Mark ran toward a stream a little distance away. He brought some of the curiously +thick liquid in his hat, and while Andy held the boy the professor sprinkled +some of the drops on his face, and forced some between his lips. In a little +while Jack's eyes slowly opened. +<P> +"Don't let it eat me!" he begged. +<P> +"You're all right now," said Andy heartily. "Not a bit harmed, Jack. But," +he added in a low tone, "it was a close call." +<P> +A few whiffs from a bottle of ammonia the professor carried soon brought +Jack's color back. +<P> +"Do you feel better now?" asked Mark. +<P> +"I guess so. Yes, I'm all right," replied Jack, struggling to his feet. "What +happened? Feels as if I had been tied up with a lot of rope." +<P> +"That's about what you were," Andy replied, "only it was the worst kind of +rope I ever saw. Those snake-trees are terrible things. I've read of 'em, +but I never saw one before. The book that told of them says they squeeze +their victims to death just as a snake does. The only way to do is to make +some smoke and fire at the bottom. This sort of kills the branches or makes +them stupid and they let go. The trees are half animal, and awful things. +I hope we don't meet with any more." +<P> +"Same here," added Jack fervently, as he grasped Andy's hand, and thanked +him for saving his life. +<P> +"Do you think you can go on, or shall we return to the ship'?" the professor +asked. +<P> +"Oh I can trail along, if you move a little slowly," Jack replied. "I'm a +bit stiff, that's all." +<P> +So they resumed their journey. They had gone, perhaps, three miles when +Washington, who was in the lead, suddenly stopped and called: +<P> +"Sounds like thunder." +<P> +The others listened. Sure enough there was a dull rumble and roar audible. +It seemed off to the left, but they could see no clouds in the sky, nor any +signs of a storm. +<P> +"Let's take a walk over that way and see what it is," Mr. Henderson suggested. +<P> +As they walked on the noise became louder, until in about half an hour it +was like the sound from a blast furnace. +<P> +"What do you suppose it can be?" asked Mark. +<P> +"Perhaps some new freak of nature," the professor replied. "We seem to have +a good many of them here." +<P> +They were all on their guard now, for there was no telling into what danger +they might run. As they went up a little hill the noise became much louder. +The professor and Andy, who had taken the lead, kept a sharp lookout ahead, +that they might not unexpectedly fall into some hidden stream or lake. As +they topped the hill they saw before them a deep valley, and in the midst +of it was that which was causing the roaring sound. +<P> +From the centre of an immense mound of rock and earth there spouted up a +great column of water, three hundred feet or more, as straight as a flag +staff. It was about ten feet in diameter, and at the top it broke into a +rosette of sparkling liquid, which as the vari-colored lights played on it, +resembled some wonderful flower. +<P> +"It's a great geyser!" the professor exclaimed. "We have come to a place +like Yellowstone Park. We must be very careful. The crust may be very thin +here, and let us down into some boiling spring." +<P> +The others gathered around the professor, and, from a safe distance watched +the ever rising and falling shaft of water. +<P> +It was not regular in motion. Sometimes it would shoot up to a great distance, +nearly a thousand feet, the professor estimated. Again it would sink down, +as the power sending it out lessened, until it was only a few hundred feet +above the rounded top of the mound from which it spurted. But it never fell +below this. All the while there was the constant roaring sound, as though +the forces of nature below the surface were calling to be let out. +<P> +"I hope there are not many of those about," Mr. Henderson remarked after +a pause. "If the ship should hit one during the night it would be all up +with us. We must keep a careful look-out." +<P> +The spouting column had a fascination which held them to the spot for some +time. From the hill they had a good view of the surrounding country, but +did not see any more geysers. +<P> +"Do you think it is hot water?" asked Mark. +<P> +"There is no vapor," the professor answered, "but most of the geysers are +produced by the action of steam in the interior of the earth. However we'll +not take any chances by investigating. I fear it would not be safe to go +into that valley." +<P> +"Look there!" cried Andy. "I guess we're better off here!" He pointed a little +to the right of where the water spouted. The others looked, and saw, coming +from a hole in the ground, some shaggy black object. +<P> +"What is it?" asked Jack. +<P> +"It looks like a bear," replied the hunter, "but I never saw one like it +before." +<P> +Nor had any of the others, for the creature was a terrible one. It had the +body of a bear, but the feet and legs were those of an alligator, while the +tail trailed out behind like a snake, and the head had a long snout, not +unlike the trunk of an elephant. The creature was about ten feet long and +five feet in height. +<P> +"Let me try a shot at it!" exclaimed Andy. "That is something worth shooting," +and he cocked his rifle. +<P> +"Don't!" exclaimed the professor shortly. "You might only wound it, and it +would pursue us. We are not ready to fight such creatures as that, and you +are the only one armed." +<P> +"I never missed anything I aimed at yet," said Andy, a little hurt that any +one should doubt his ability to kill at the first shot. +<P> +"Perhaps not, but how do you know but what this creature has a bullet proof +armor under its hide. This is a strange world, Andy. It is better to take +no chances." +<P> +"I hate to see him get away," the hunter said. +<P> +But, as it happened, the beast was not to get away. As they watched they +saw the horrible animal approach the mound from which the water spurted. +Up the sides it climbed. +<P> +"I guess he's going to get a drink," said Mark. +<P> +That was evidently the beast's intention. It went close to the spouting column +of water, and thrust its head out so that its tongue could lap from the side. +It seemed to have been in the habit of doing this. +<P> +For once, and for the last time, however, it made a mistake. The water seemed +to veer to one side. In its eagerness to get a drink the animal took another +step forward. At that moment the direction of the column changed again, and +it tilted over toward the beast. +<P> +Suddenly, as the travelers watched, the full force of the big column caught +the beast just under the fore shoulders. Up into the air the creature shot, +propelled by thousands of pounds pressure. Right up to the top of the column +it went, and this time the water rose a thousand feet into the air. +<P> +Up and up went the animal, struggling to get away from the remorseless grip. +Then, when the water had reached its height, it shot the beast off to one +side. Then the brute began to fall, twisting, turning, wiggling and struggling. +Down it came with a thud that could be heard above the noise of the geyser. +<P> +"I reckon that finishes him," observed Andy. And it had, for there was not +a sign of life from the creature. +<P> +"I guess we have seen enough for one morning," the professor said, "Let's +go back to the airship. It must be nearly dinner time." +<P> +They started away. Mark gave a last look at the queer column of water and +the dead body of the strange animal. As he passed down the hill he thought +he saw the creature move, and stayed to see if this was so. But a second +glance convinced him he was mistaken. +<P> +The others had gone on and were some distance ahead. Mark hurried on to join +them. As he got a last glance at the top of the column, over the brow of +the hill, he happened to look off to the left. There was another hill, about +the size of the one they had been on. +<P> +And, as Mark looked he saw something move. At first he thought it was another +beast. But, to his terror he saw that the creature had only two legs, and +that it stood upright like a man, but such a man as Mark had never seen before, +for he was nearly twelve feet tall. +<P> +He was about to cry out and warn the others, when the thing, whatever it +was, sunk down, apparently behind some tall bushes, and disappeared as if +the earth had opened and swallowed it. +<P> +"I wonder if I had better tell them," thought Mark. "I can't show them anything. +I wonder if I really saw it, or if it was only a shadow. I guess I'll say +nothing. But it is very strange." +<P> +Then he hurried on to join the others. +<P> +"What makes you so pale?" asked Jack of his chum. +<P> +"Nothing," said Mark, somewhat confused. "I guess I'm a little tired, that's +all." +<P> +They reached the ship in safety, and, having dinner started the machinery +and took the <I>Mermaid </I>up into the air. +<P> +"We'll travel on and see if we can't find some human beings," the professor +said. +<P> +All that afternoon they sailed, the country below them unfolding like a panorama. +They passed over big lakes, sailing on the surface of some, and over rivers, +and vast stretches of forest and dreary plains. But they never saw a sign +of human inhabitants. +<P> +It was getting on to five o'clock, the hour when the brilliant lights usually +disappeared, when Mark, who was steering in the conning tower, gave a cry. +<P> +"What is it?" asked the professor, looking up from a rude map he was making +of the land they had just traversed. +<P> +"It looks like a town before us," said the boy. +<P> +Mr. Henderson and Jack looked to where Mark pointed. A few miles ahead and +below them were great mounds, not unlike that from which the geyser had spouted. +But they were arranged in regular form, like houses on a street, row after +row of them. And, as they approached nearer, they could see that the mounds +had doors and windows to them. Some of the mounds wer rger than others, +and some were of double and triple formation. +<P> +"It's a city! The first city of the new world!" cried Jack. +<P> +"It is a deserted village!" said the professor. "We have found where the +people live, but we have not found them." And he was right, for there was +not a sign of life about the place, over which the airship was now suspended. +<h3>CHAPTER XXIV</h3> +<h4>THE GIANTS</h4> +<P> +"LET'S go down and investigate," suggested Jack. +<P> +"Better wait," counseled the professor. "It will soon be dark, and, though +we will have moonlight, we can not see to advantage. I think it will be best +to keep the ship in the air to-night, and descend in the morning. Then we +can look about and decide on what to do." +<P> +They all agreed this was the best plan, and, after making a circle above +the deserted village, and noting no signs of life, the <I>Mermaid </I>was +brought to a halt over the centre of the town, and about three hundred feet +above it. There the travelers would be comparatively safe. +<P> +It was deemed best to keep watch that night, and so, Mark, Jack, Bill and +Tom took turns, though there was nothing for them to do, as not a thing happened. +With the first appearance of dawn Mr. Henderson gave orders to have the ship +lowered, and it came to rest in the middle of what corresponded to a street +in the queer mound village. +<P> +"Now to see what kind of people have lived here!" cried Jack. "They must +have been a queer lot. Something like the Esquimaux, only they probably had +more trouble keeping cool than the chaps up at the north pole do." +<P> +Now that they were down among the mound houses, they saw that the dwellings +were much larger than they had supposed. They towered high above the boys' +heads, and some of them were large enough in area to have accomodated a company +of soldiers. +<P> +"Say, the chaps who lived in these must have been some pumpkins," said Jack. +"Why the ceilings are about fifteen feet high, and the doors almost the same! +Talk about giants! I guess we've struck where they used to hang out, at any +rate." +<P> +The houses were a curious mixture of clay and soft stone. There were doors, +with big skins from animals as curtains, and the windows were devoid of glass. +Instead of stairs there were rude ladders, and the furniture in the mound +houses was of the roughest kind. +<P> +There were fire-places in some of the houses, and the blackened and smoked +walls showed that they must have been used. In one or two of the houses clay +dishes, most of them broken, were scattered about, and the size of them, +in keeping with everything else, indicated that those who used them were +of no small stature. +<P> +"Some of the bowls would do for bath tubs," said Jack, as he came across +one or two large ones. +<P> +By this time the professor, Bill and Tom had joined the boys, and the five +went on with the exploring tour, while Washington and Andy remained in the +ship to get breakfast. +<P> +"The inhabitants are evidently of a half-civilized race," the professor said. +"Their houses, and the manner in which they live, show them to be allied +to the Aztecs, though of course they are much larger than that race." +<P> +"What's bothering me," Bill said, "is not so much what race they belong to, +as what chance we'd stand in a race with them if they took it into their +heads to chase after us. I've read that them there Azhandled races——" +<P> +"You mean the Aztecs," interrupted the professor. +<P> +"Well the Aztecs, then. But I've read they used to place their enemies on +a stone altar and cut their hearts out. Now I'm not hankerin' after anything +like that." +<P> +"Don't be foolish," spoke Mr. Henderson. "Wait until you meet some of the +giants, if that is what they are, and then you can decide what to do." +<P> +"It may be too late then," remarked Bill in a low tone, and the boys were +somewhat inclined to agree with him. +<P> +However, there seemed to be no immediate danger, as there was no sign of +any of the big people about the village. The adventurers walked about for +some time, but made no discoveries that would throw any light on the reason +for the place being left uninhabited. It seemed as if there had been a sudden +departure from the place, for in a number of the houses the remains of +half-cooked meals were seen. +<P> +"Well, I think we have noted enough for the time being," the professor remarked, +after they had traversed almost half the length of what seemed to be the +principal street. "Let's go back to the ship and have something to eat. +Washington may have become alarmed at our absence." +<P> +They made a circle in order to take in another part of the town on their +way back. While passing through a sort of alley, though it was only narrow +by comparison with the other thoroughfares that were very wide, Mark came +to a place where there was a circular slab of stone, resting on the ground. +In the centre was a big iron ring. +<P> +"Hello! Here's something new!" he exclaimed. "Maybe it leads to a secret +passage, or covers some hidden treasure." +<P> +"I guess it will have to continue to cover it then," Jack spoke. "That probably +weighs several tons. None of us could move it." +<P> +They made their way back to the ship, where they found Washington and Andy +discussing the advisability of going off in search of them. +<P> +"Breakfast is mighty near spoiled," said the colored man with an injured +air. +<P> +But the travelers did full justice to the meal, notwithstanding this. Deciding +there was nothing to be gained by staying in that vicinity, the professor +started the ship off again. +<P> +They traveled several hundred miles in the air, and, as the afternoon was +coming to a close, Jack, who was in charge of the conning tower, spied, just +ahead of them, another village. +<P> +"We will descend there for the night," the professor said. "Does there seem +to be any sign of life about?" +<P> +"None," replied Mark, who was observing through a telescope the town they +were approaching. "It's as dead as the other one." +<P> +The airship settled down in a field back of some of the mound houses. +<P> +"Now for supper!" cried Jack. "I'm as hungry as——" +<P> +He stopped short, for, seeming to rise from the very ground, all about the +ship, there appeared a throng of men. And such men as they were! For not +one was less than ten feet tall, and some were nearly fifteen! +<P> +"The giants have us!" cried Bill, as he saw the horde of creatures surrounding +the ship. +<h3>CHAPTER XXV</h3> +<h4>HELD BY THE ENEMY</h4> +<P> +"KEEP the doors closed!" cried the professor. "It is our only hope! I will +send the ship up again!" +<P> +But it was too late. Washington, who had obeyed the signal from the conning +tower to shut off the engines, had disconnected most of them so they could +not be started again save from the main room. At the same time there came +a yell of dismay from the colored man, who had slid back the steel covering +of the main side entrance to the <I>Mermaid.</I> +<P> +"I'm caught!" cried Washington. +<P> +As the professor and the boys hurried from the tower, they could hear a struggle +from where Washington was, and his voice calling: +<P> +"Let me go! Let me go!" +<P> +Reaching the engine room, which opened directly on the side entrance, the +professor saw a pair of enormous hands and arms dragging poor Washington, +feet first, out of the ship. Bill and Tom were crouched in one corner, pale +with fright. +<P> +"Wait until I get my gun!" cried Andy, as he ran for his rifle. +<P> +"Hold on!" called the professor in a loud voice. "It will be folly to shoot +them! We must try strategy!" +<P> +Washington's cries ceased as he was drawn entirely from the ship, the giant +hands disappearing at the same time. +<P> +"Follow me!" yelled Mr. Henderson, running out of the door. +<P> +Hardly knowing what they did, the boys went after him, and their hearts almost +stopped beating in fright as they saw the terrible things, which, in the +glare of the changing lights, were on every side of them. +<P> +For the men were very repulsive looking. They there attired in clothes, very +similar in cut to those worn by the travelers, and which seemed to be made +of some sort of cloth. But they were loose and baggy and only added to the +queer appearance of the giants. Veritable giants they were too. Their faces +seemed as large as kegs, and they were so clumsy in shape that Mark, even, +frightened as he was, exclaimed: +<P> +"They look like men made of putty!" At the same time he saw they bore a +resemblance to the creature he had observed on the hill top. +<P> +"What shall we do?" asked Andy of the professor. "They are really carrying +Washington away!" +<P> +Three of the giants were dragging the colored man along the ground, while +the other terrible beings stood about as if waiting to see the outcome of +the first sally. +<P> +"I will try to speak to them," Mr. Henderson said. "I know several languages. +They may understand one." +<P> +But before he could start on his parley a surprising thing happened. There +was a struggle in the little group about Washington. The colored man seemed +to be fighting, though the odds, it would appear, were too great to enable +him to accomplish anything. But, making a desperate effort to escape, Washington +quickly wrenched himself free from the giants' hands and then, striking out +with his fists, knocked the three down, one after another. +<P> +"I never knew Washington was so strong!" exclaimed Jack. +<P> +"Nor I," put in Mark. "Why I should think the men could carry him in one +arm as if he was a baby." +<P> +The three giants rose slowly to their feet. They uttered strange cries, and +motioned with their hands toward the professor, the boys, and the others +in the crowd. +<P> +"Look out! They're goin' t' grab yo'!" cried Washington. +<P> +Three of the giants approached Mark, and a like number closed in on Jack. +<P> +"Back to the ship!" cried the professor. "We must defend ourselves!" +<P> +But by this time the big men had grabbed the two boys. Then a strange thing +took place. Mark and Jack, though they felt that the giants must overcome +them in a test of strength, struggled with all their might against being +captured. They fought, as a cornered rat will fight, though it knows the +odds to be overwhelming. But in this case the unexpected happened. +<P> +Both boys found they could easily break the holds of the giants, and Mark, +by a vigorous effort, pushed the three men away from him, one at a time violently +so that they fell in a heap, one on top of the other. +<P> +"Hurrah! We can fight 'em!" cried Mark. "Don't be afraid. They're like mush! +They're putty men!" +<P> +And, so it seemed, the giants were. Though big in size they were flabby and +had nothing like the muscle they should have had in proportion to their build. +They went down like meal sacks and were slow to rise. +<P> +Jack, seeing how successful his comrade was, attacked the three giants who +were striving to make him a captive. He succeeded in disposing of them, knocking +one down so hard that the man was unable to rise until his companions helped +him. +<P> +"That's the way!" cried Washington. "They're soft as snow men!" +<P> +The vanquished giants set up a sort of roar, which was answered by their +fellows, and soon there was a terrible din. +<P> +"All get together!" called the professor. "They are evidently going to make +a rush for us. If we stand by one another we may fight them off, though they +outnumber us a hundred to one. Besides it will soon be dark, and we may be +able to escape!" +<P> +Washington, Jack and Mark retreated toward the ship, in the direction of +which the others had also made their way. The big men had gathered in a compact +mass and were advancing on the adventurers. +<P> +"What do you suppose makes them so soft?" asked Mark. "I believe I could +manage half a dozen." +<P> +"It must be the effect of the climate and conditions here," the professor +replied. "Probably they have to be big to stand the pressure of the thick +water, and the increased attraction of gravitation. Then too, being without +the weight of the atmosphere to which we are accustomed, they have probably +expanded. If they were to go up to earth, they might shrink to our size." +<P> +"Do you think that possible?" +<P> +"Of course. Why do you ask?" +<P> +"Nothing in particular," replied Mark. But to himself, he added: "That would +explain it all." +<P> +It was getting dusk now. The travelers had reached their ship, and rushed +inside and tried to close the doors in the face of the advancing horde. But, +by this time the giants were so close that one or two of them thrust their +big feet in, and prevented this movement. At the same time they set up a +great howling. +<P> +"Quick!" cried the professor. "We must start the ship and get away!" +<P> +"I can't close the door!" yelled Washington, who had been the last to enter. +<P> +"Never mind that! Go up with it open! Drag them along if they won't let go!" +answered Mr. Henderson, as he ran toward the engine room. +<P> +There was a sudden rush among the giants, and a sound as if something was +being thrown over the top and ends of the ship. Mark turned the gas machine +on, while Jack worked the negative gravity apparatus. They waited for the +ship to rise. +<P> +"Why don't we go up?" asked the professor. +<P> +"'Cause they've caught us!" called out Washington. +<P> +"Caught us? How?" +<P> +"They've thrown ropes over the top and ends of the ship, and fastened them +to their big houses!" +<P> +Running to a side window the professor saw that the <I>Mermaid </I>was fastened +down by a score of cables, each one six inches thick. They were held captives +by the enemy. +<h3>CHAPTER XXVI</h3> +<h4>A FRIEND INDEED</h4> +<P> +THOUGH the giants, man for man, were no match for the travelers, collectively +the horde proved too much. They had swarmed about the ship, and, by passing +the big cables over her, effectively held her down. +<P> +"Let me get out and I'll cut 'em!" cried Andy. "We must get away from these +savages!" +<P> +"No, no, don't go out!" exclaimed the professor. "They would eventually kill +you, though you might fight them off for a time. We must wait and see what +develops. They can have no object in harming us, as we have not injured them." +<P> +"I'd rather fight 'em," insisted the old hunter. +<P> +But the professor had his way and Andy was forced to obey. The giants had +withdrawn their big feet from the side door and Washington had closed it. +But nothing else had been accomplished, and the ship could not rise. The +gas and negative gravity machines were stopped, as they were only under a +useless strain. +<P> +Suddenly, the colored lights which had been growing dimmer and dimmer, with +the approach of night, went out altogether. Almost as suddenly, Mark, who +was watching the giants from the conning tower, as they made fast the loose +ends of the cables, saw them make a dash for the mound houses. +<P> +"They're afraid of the dark!" he cried. "Come on! We can go out now and loosen +the ropes!" +<P> +He hurried to tell the professor what he had noticed. +<P> +"Good!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "Perhaps we can escape now!" +<P> +They waited a few minutes, listening to the sound of many big feet running +away from the ship, and then, Bill cautiously opened the side door. The others +were behind him, waiting, with knives and hatchets in their hands, to rush +out and cut the restraining cables. +<P> +"All ready!" called Bill. "There doesn't seem to be a one in sight!" +<P> +He stepped out but no sooner had he set foot on the ground than there came +a thud, and Bill went down as if some one had knocked his feet from under +him. +<P> +"Go back! Go back!" he cried. "They hit me with something. I'm being smothered!" +<P> +"Bring a light!" cried the professor, for the sally had been started in the +dark. +<P> +Jack brought the portable electric it having been repaired and flashed it +out of the door. In the gleam of it, Bill was seen lying prostrate, half +covered by an orange, about half as big as himself. The fruit was as soft +and mushy as some of the giants themselves, or Bill would not have fared +so easily. +<P> +Then, as the others stood watching, and while Bill arose and wiped some of +the juice from his face, there came a regular shower of the monstrous oranges. +<P> +"Get inside quick! We'll be smothered under them!" Mr. Henderson cried. +<P> +Pausing only to rescue Bill, the adventurers retreated inside the ship, and +made fast the door. Outside they could hear the thud as the oranges were +thrown, some hitting the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>and many dropping all about +her. +<P> +"I guess they are going to have things their own way," observed Bill, as +he gazed down on his clothes, which were covered with juice from the fruit. +<P> +The night was one of anxiety. The travelers took turns standing guard, but +nothing more occurred. The giants remained in their houses, and the heavy +ropes still held the ship fast. +<P> +"We must hold a council of war," the professor decided as they gathered at +breakfast, which was far from a cheerful meal. +<P> +With the return of the colored lights the giants again made their appearance. +They came swarming from the mound houses, and a great crowd they proved to +be. Several thousand at least, Jack estimated, and when he went up into the +conning tower and took a survey he could see the strange and terrible creatures +pouring in from the surrounding country. +<P> +"I'm afraid there will be trouble," he said, as he came down and reported +what he had seen. +<P> +"We must hold a council of war," repeated the professor. "Has any one anything +to suggest?" +<P> +"Get a lot of powder and blow 'em up!" cried Andy. +<P> +"Arrange electric wires and shock 'em to death!" was Bill's plan. +<P> +"Can't we slip the ropes in some way and escape?" asked Jack. "I don't believe +we can successfully fight the giants. They are too many, even if they are +weak, individually." +<P> +"I think you're right there," Mr. Henderson said. "We must try some sort +of strategy, but what? That is the question." +<P> +For a few minutes no one spoke. They were all thinking deeply, for their +lives might hang in the balance. +<P> +"I think I have a plan," said Mark, at length. "Did we bring any diving suits +with us?" +<P> +"There may be one or two," the professor replied. "But what good will they +do?" +<P> +"Two of us could put them on," continued Mark, "and, as they afford good +protection from any missiles like fruit, we could crawl out on the deck of +the ship. From there, armed with hatchets or knives we could cut the ropes. +Then the ship could rise." +<P> +"That's a good plan!" cried the scientist. "We'll try it at once." +<P> +Search revealed that two diving suits were among the stores of the <I>Mermaid. +</I>Jack and Mark wanted to be the ones to don them, but as the suits were +rather large, and as the professor thought it would take more strength than +the boys had to do the work, it was decided that Andy and Washington should +make the attempt to cut the ropes. +<P> +The hunter and colored man lost little time in getting into the modern armor. +In the meanwhile Jack, who had been posted as a lookout, reported that there +seemed to be some activity among the giants. They were running here and there, +and some seemed to be going off toward the woods, that were not far away. +<P> +"Now work quickly," urged the professor. "We will be on the watch, and as +soon as the last rope is cut we will start the machinery and send the ship +up. We will not wait for you to come back inside, so hold fast as best you +can when the <I>Mermaid </I>rises." +<P> +"We will," answered Andy, just before the big copper helmet was fastened +on his head, and Washington nodded to show he understood. +<P> +The two who were to attempt the rescue of their comrades were soon on deck. +In the conning tower Jack and the professor kept anxious watch, while Mark, +Bill and Tom were at the various machines, ready, at the signal, to start +the engines. +<P> +The giants had now become so interested in whatever plan they had afoot, +that they paid little attention to the ship. Consequently Washington and +Andy, crawling along the deck in their diving suits, did not, at first attract +any attention. +<P> +In fact they had cut several of the big ropes, and it began to look as if +the plan would succeed, particularly as they were partly hidden from view +by the upper gas holder. They were working with feverish haste, sawing away +at the big cables with keen knives. +<P> +"I guess we'll beat 'em yet!" cried Jack. +<P> +"I hope so," replied the professor. "It looks——" +<P> +He stopped short, for at that moment a cry arose from the midst of the giants, +and one of them pointed toward the ship. An instant later the air was darkened +with a flight of big oranges, which the queer creatures seemed to favor as +missiles. Probably they found stones too heavy. +<P> +"Well, those things can't hurt 'em much with those heavy suits on," observed +Mr. Henderson. "There, Washington got one right on the head that time, and +it didn't bother him a bit." +<P> +Jack had seen the fruit strike the big copper helmet and observed that the +colored man only moved his head slightly in order to get rid of the orange. +<P> +In fact the giants, seeing for themselves that this mode of warfare was not +going to answer, since the two men on the ship continued to cut the restraining +cables, gave it up. There was a good deal of shouting among them, and a number +ran here and there, seemingly gathering up long poles. +<P> +"I wonder if they are going to try the flailing method, and beat poor Andy +and Washington," said Mr. Henderson. "It looks so." +<P> +The two rescuers were now about a quarter through their hard task. The throwing +of the oranges had ceased. But the giants were up to a new trick. They divided +into two sections, one taking up a position on one side of the ship, and +the other on the opposite. There were about two hundred in each crowd, while +the others in the horde drew some distance back. +<P> +"They're up to some queer dodge," observed Jack. "What are they placing those +sticks to their mouths for?" +<P> +The professor observed the throng curiously for a few seconds. Then he exclaimed: +<P> +"They are using blow-guns! They are going to shoot arrows at Washington and +Andy! We must get them in at once!" +<P> +He darted toward a door that opened from the conning tower out on the deck. +<P> +"Don't go!" cried Jack. "It's too late! They are beginning to blow!" +<P> +He pointed to the throng of giants. The professor could see their cheeks +puffed out as the big creatures filled their lungs with air and prepared +to expel it through the hollow tubes. +<P> +Then there came a sound as if a great wind was blowing. It howled and roared +over the ship, not unlike a hurricane in its fury. But there was no flight +of arrows through the air, such as would have come from regular blow guns. +<P> +"That is strange," said the professor. He thought for a moment. "I have it!" +he cried. "They are trying to blow Washington and Andy, off the ship by the +power of their breaths! They are not blowing arrows at them! My, but they +must have strong lungs!" +<P> +And, in truth, that was the plan of the giants. The hollow tubes, made from +some sort of big weed, sent a blast of air at the two men on the ship's deck, +that made them lie flat and cling with both hands to avoid being sent flying +into the midst of the giants, on one side or the other. But the giants had +reckoned without the weight of the diving suits, and it was those, with the +big lead soles of the shoes, that helped to hold Washington and Andy in place. +<P> +"Come back! Came back!" cried the professor, opening the conning tower door +and calling to the two brave men. "Come back, both of you! Do you hear?" +<P> +As the portal slid back the rush of air was almost like that of a cyclone. +Then it suddenly ceased, as the giants saw their plan was not likely to succeed. +<P> +But now there arose from the outer circle of the horde a shout of triumph. +It was caused by the return of those who had, a little while before, hurried +off to the woods. They came back bearing big trees, tall and slender, stripped +of their branches, so that they resembled flag staffs. It took a dozen giants +to carry each one. +<P> +The whole throng was soon busy laying the poles in a row in front of the +ship. +<P> +"What can they be up to now?" asked Jack. +<P> +"It looks as if they were going to slide the ship along on rollers," the +professor replied. +<P> +Sure enough this was the giant's plan. A few minutes later those in the +<I>Mermaid </I>felt her moving forward, as the giants, massed behind, shoved. +On to the poles she slid. The ropes were loosened to permit this, but not +enough to enable the boat to rise. +<P> +Then the travelers felt the ship being lifted up. +<P> +"They are going to carry us away, with the poles for a big stretcher!" cried +the professor. +<P> +Looking from the side windows the boys saw that a great crowd of the big +men were on either side of the <I>Mermaid, </I>each giant grasping a pole, +and lifting. Farther out were others, holding the ends of the cables which +Washington and Andy had not succeeded in cutting. +<P> +The ship was being carried along by a thousand or more giants, as the ancient +warriors, slain in battle, were carried home on the spears of their comrades. +<P> +"This is the end of the <I>Mermaid!" </I>murmured Mr. Henderson in sorrowful +tones. +<P> +As they looked from the conning tower the professor and the two boys observed +a commotion among the leaders of the giants. They seemed to be wavering. +Suddenly the forward part of the ship sank, as those ahead laid their poles +down on the ground. Then those behind did the same, and the <I>Mermaid, +</I>came to a stop, and once more rested on the earth. +<P> +"What does this mean?" asked the scientist in wonder. +<P> +All at once the entire crowd of giants threw themselves down on their faces, +and there, standing at the bow of the ship, was a giant, half again as large +as any of the others. He was clad in a complete suit of golden armor on which +the changing lights played with beautiful effect, and in his hand he held +an immense golden sword. He pointed the weapon at the ship as if he had raised +it in protection, and his hand was stretched in commanding gesture over the +prostrate giants. +<P> +"Perhaps he has come to save us!" cried Mark. +<h3>CHAPTER XXVII</h3> +<h4>A GREAT JOURNEY</h4> +<P> +SUCH indeed, seemed to be the case. The golden-armored giant, after standing +for a few moments in an attitude of command, waved his sword three times +about his head, and uttered a command, in a voice that sounded like thunder. +Then the prostrate ones arose, and, making low bows hurried away in all +directions. +<P> +Watching them disappear, the golden one sheathed his weapon and approached +the ship. He caught sight of the professor and the two boys in the conning +tower, for Mark had gone there when he found the ship being transported, +and held up his two hands, the palms outward. +<P> +"It is the sign of peace in the language all natives employ," said the professor. +"I think I shall trust him." +<P> +Followed by the boys he descended from the little platform in the tower, +and to the door that opened on the deck. +<P> +"Shall we go out?" he asked. +<P> +"We can't be much worse off," replied Mark. "Let's chance it." +<P> +So, not without many misgivings, they slid back the portal and stepped out +to face the strange and terrible being who had so suddenly come to their +rescue. +<P> +The giant in the golden armor did not seem surprised to see them. In fact +he acted as though he rather expected them. He continued to hold up one hand, +with the palm, outward, while, with the other, he removed his helmet and +bowed low. Then he cast his sword on the ground and advanced toward the ship. +When within ten feet he sat down on the ground, and this brought his head +nearer the earth, so that his auditors could both see and hear him to better +advantage. +<P> +As soon as the giant saw the travelers were outside their ship he began to +speak to them in a voice, which, though he might have meant it to be low +and gentle, was like the bellowing of a bull. At the same time he made many +gestures, pointing to the ship, to himself and to Mark. +<P> +"What is he saying, professor?" asked Jack. +<P> +"I can't understand all he says," Mr. Henderson replied. "He uses some words +derived from the Latin and some from the Greek. But by piecing it out here +and there, and by interpreting his motions I am able to get at something." +<P> +"And what is it all about?" +<P> +"It is a strange story," the scientist replied. "He has only gone about half +way through it. Wait until he finishes and I will tell you." +<P> +The golden-armored giant, who had stopped in his narrative while Jack was +speaking, resumed. His gestures became more rapid, and his words came faster. +Several times Mr. Henderson held up his hand for him to cease, while he puzzled +out what was meant. +<P> +At one point, the professor seemed much startled, and motioned for the strange +being to repeat the last part of his discourse. When this had been done Mr. +Henderson shook his head as though in doubt. +<P> +At length the story was finished, and the lone giant, for there were no others +in sight now, folded his arms and seemed to await what the professor's answer +might be. Mr. Henderson turned to the boys, and to the others of the +<I>Mermaid's </I>company, who, by this time, had joined him, and said: +<P> +"Friends, I have just listened to a strange story. It is so strange that, +but for the fact that our own adventures are verging on the marvelous, I +could hardly believe it. In the first place, this man here is the king of +this country. That is why all the other natives obeyed him. +<P> +"In the second place it seems he has been a passenger in our boat, and came +here from the earth's surface with us!" +<P> +"What's that?" cried Jack. +<P> +"That explains the strange happenings!" ejaculated Mark. "No wonder I could +never solve the secret of the storeroom." +<P> +"You are right, it does," replied Mr. Henderson. "I will not go into all +the details of how it happened, but it seems the big hole through which we +came is only one of two entrances to this inner world. Rather it is the entrance, +and there is another, close to it, which is the exit. Through the latter +a big stream of water spouts up, just as one pours down through the opening +we used. +<P> +"Hankos, which is the name of the king, was for many years a student of science. +He longed to see where the big stream of upward spurting water went, and +wanted to know whence came the down-pouring one. So he undertook a daring +experiment. +<P> +"He constructed a great cylinder, and, keeping his plans a secret, conveyed +it to the spouting water, entered it, and, by means of pulleys and levers, +after he had shut himself inside, cast himself into the up-shooting column. +He took along compressed air cylinders to supply an atmosphere he could breathe, +and some food to eat, for it appears our giant friends are something of inventors +in their way. The current of water bore him to the surface of the earth, +and he was cast up on the ocean, in what was probably taken for a waterspout +if any one saw it. +<P> +"Then a strange thing happened. No sooner did Hankos open his cylinder, which +served him as a boat, than he lost his gigantic size, owing to the difference +of the two atmospheres. He became almost of the same size as ourselves, except +that his skin hung in great folds on him, and he seemed like a wrinkled old +man. His clothes too, were a world too large. +<P> +"He had a terrible time before he reached shore, and a hard one after it, +for his strange appearance turned almost every one against him. He was sorry +he had ventured to solve the mystery of the up-shooting stream of water, +for he was worse than an outcast. +<P> +"Then he began to plan to get back to his own inner world. But he could not +find the downward stream, and, not knowing the language of the countries +where he landed, he had no means of ascertaining. He traveled from place +to place, always seeking for something that would lead him back to his own +country. +<P> +"Finally he heard of us, and of our ship, though how I do not know, as I +thought I had kept it a great secret. By almost superhuman struggles he made +his way to our island. He says he concealed himself aboard the <I>Mermaid +</I>the night before we sailed, but I hardly believe it possible. It seems——" +<P> +"He did it, for I saw him!" interrupted Mark. +<P> +"You saw him!" cried Mr. Henderson. +<P> +Then Mark told of the many things that had puzzled him so, how he had seen +the queer figure slinking aboard the boat, of the disappearance of food from +time to time, and of the strange noises in the storeroom. +<P> +"That bears out what he told me," the professor said. "Hankos says he used +to steal out nights and take what food he could get, and he also mentions +some one, answering to Mark's description, who nearly discovered him once +as he hurried back into the apartment. +<P> +"However, it seems to be true, since Mark confirms it. At any rate Hankos +stayed in hiding, and made the entire trip with us, and, just as we all became +overcome with the strange gas he escaped, having begun to expand to his original +giant size, and being unable to remain any longer in his cramped quarters." +<P> +"That's so, he did!" cried Mark. "I saw him come out of the place just before +I lost my senses. It was a terrible sight, and none of you would believe +me when I told you some of the occurrences afterward." +<P> +"You must forgive us for that," the professor said. "We have learned much +since then." +<P> +"What did Hankos do after he left the ship when it landed in this country?" +asked Jack. +<P> +"He traveled until he came to this village, which is the chief one of this +country," replied the professor. "Part of the time he followed us at a distance, +being able to travel very fast." +<P> +Mark remembered the strange figure of a giant he had seen on the hill tops +several times, and knew that he had been observing the being who had played +such a queer part in their lives. +<P> +"When he came back among his own people," went on Mr. Henderson, "they would +not receive him at first, believing him to be an impostor. But Hankos convinced +them of his identity and was allowed to don the golden armor, which is the +badge of kingship. He had only been in office for a little while when he +heard of the arrival of the strange thing, which turned out to be our ship. +He recognized it from the description, and, learning that we were likely +to be sacrificed to the fury and ignorance of the giants, he hurried here +and saved our lives. +<P> +"He says he can never thank us enough for being the means whereby he was +able to get back to his own country, and says the freedom of this whole inner +world is ours. He has given orders that we are to go wherever we like, and +none will molest us. He tells me the land is a wonderful one, compared to +our own, and urges us to make a long journey. He would like to go with us, +only, now that he has resumed his natural size, he can not get inside the +ship." +<P> +"Hurrah for King Hankos!" cried Jack and the others joined him in a hearty +cheer. +<P> +The giant in the golden armor evidently understood the compliment which was +paid him, for he waved his helmet in the air and responded with a shout of +welcome that made the ground tremble. +<P> +Hankos waited until the professor had translated all of the story to the +other travelers. Then the genial giant began to talk some more, and the professor +listened intently. +<P> +"He says," spoke Mr. Henderson to his friends, "that we will be supplied +with all the fruit we want, and with the best of the houses to sleep in on +our journey. He also tells me he has great stores of shining stones and piles +of the metal of which his armor is made, and that we are welcome to as much +as we want. If this means unlimited gold and diamonds, we may make our fortunes." +<P> +"Jest let me git ma' hand on a few sparklers an' I'll quit work!" exclaimed +Washington. +<P> +"I have told him," the scientist went on, "that we will take advantage of +his kind offer. We will start on our trip in a day or so, after we have looked +over the ship to see if it is not damaged. He tells me the gold and sparkling +stones are several thousand miles away, on top of a high mountain. We will +make that our objective point." +<P> +The interview between the king and Mr. Henderson having ended, the former +waved his sword in the air and the swarm of big men came back. They had been +hiding back in the woods. Now their manner was very different. They carefully +removed the rollers and ropes, and soon there was brought to the adventurers +an immense pile of fine fruits. If our friends had stayed there a year they +could not have eaten it all. The giants were judging the appetites of the +travelers by their own. +<P> +That night the adventurers slept more soundly than they had since entering +the strange world. They felt they had nothing to fear from the giants. In +the morning they were not molested, though big crowds gathered to look at +the ship. But they kept back a good distance. The machinery was found to +be in good shape, save for a few repairs, and when these were made, the professor +announced he would start on a long journey. +<P> +For several weeks after that the travelers swung about in their ship, sometimes +sailing in the air and again on big seas and lakes viewing the wonders of +the inner world. They were many and varied, and the professor collected enough +material for a score of books which he said he would write when he got back +to the outer world once more. +<P> +One afternoon, as they were sailing over a vast stretch of woodland, which +did not seem to be inhabited, Mr. Henderson, looking at one of the gages +on the wall, asked: +<P> +"Boys do you know how far you have traveled underground?" +<P> +"How far?" asked Jack, who hated to guess riddles. +<P> +"More than four thousand miles," was the answer. +<P> +"But we haven't come to that mountain of gold and diamonds," said Mark. "I +am anxious to see that." +<P> +"Have patience," replied the professor. "I have not steered toward it yet. +There are other things to see." +<P> +Just then Washington's voice could be heard calling from the conning tower: +<P> +"We're coming to a big mountain!" +<h3>CHAPTER XXVIII</h3> +<h4>THE TEMPLE OF TREASURE</h4> +<P> +"WHAT'S that?" fairly yelled the professor. +<P> +"We am propelling ourselves in a contiguous direction an' in close proximity +to an elevated portion of th' earth's surface which rises in antiguous proximity +t' th' forward part of our present means of locomotion!" said the colored +man in a loud voice. +<P> +"Which means there may be a collision," the professor said, as he and the +boys hurried toward the tower. +<P> +"Jest what I said," retorted Washington. "What'll I do?" +<P> +"Send the ship a little higher," answered Mr. Henderson. "We mustn't hit +any mountains." +<P> +Washington forced more gas into the holder, and speeded the negative gravity +machine up some, so that the <I>Mermaid, </I>which was flying rather low, +ascended until it was in no danger of colliding with the peak which reared +its lofty height just ahead of them. +<P> +As the ship sailed slowly over the mountain, Mark gazed down and exclaimed: +<P> +"Doesn't that look like the ruins of some building?" +<P> +The professor took a pair of field glasses from a rack in the wall and took +a long view. +<P> +"It must be the place," he said in a low voice. +<P> +"What place?" asked Jack. +<P> +"The temple of treasure," was the answer. "Hankos told me it was on top of +the highest mountain in the land, and this must be it, for it is the loftiest +place we have seen. But we must be careful, for there is danger down there." +<P> +"What kind?" asked Mark. +<P> +"The place was long ago deserted by the giants," Mr. Henderson went on. "Ages +ago it was one of their storehouses for treasure, but there were wars among +themselves, Hankos said, and this part of the country was laid waste. Savage +beasts took up their abode in the temple, and since then, in spite of the +great size of the giants, they have not dared to venture here. If we brave +the animals we may have all the gold and diamonds we can take away." +<P> +"Then for one, I'm willin' t' go down an' begin th' extermination at once," +put in Andy. "I've always wanted t' be rich." +<P> +"We must proceed cautiously," the professor said. "We are ill prepared to +fight any such beasts as we saw at the big geyser. At the same time they +may have deserted this place. I think we will lower the ship down over the +temple, and spend several hours in observation. Then, if nothing develops, +we can enter and see if the treasure is there." +<P> +This plan was voted a good one, and the <I>Mermaid </I>after having been +steered directly over the ruined temple, was brought to a halt, and enough +gas let out so that it fell to about fifty feet in the air above it. +<P> +The adventurers began their watch. The afternoon waned and there were no +signs of any beasts in or about the temple. +<P> +"I reckon we can take a chance," said Andy, who was anxious to get his hands +on some diamonds. +<P> +"Better wait until morning," counseled Mr. Henderson. "It will soon be dark, +and it doesn't look like a nice place to go stumbling about in by moonlight." +<P> +So, though all but the scientist were anxious, they had to wait until the +night had passed. Several times Washington got up to see if the temple had, +by any chance, taken wings during the long hours of darkness, but each time +he found it was still in place. +<P> +"Seems laik it'll never come mornin'." he said. +<P> +But dawn came at length, and, after a hasty breakfast, preparations to enter +the temple were made. Andy loaded his gun for "bear" as he expressed it, +and the boys each took a revolver. +<P> +The ship was lowered to as level a place as could be found, and then, seeing +that everything was in readiness for a quick departure, the professor led +the way out of the <I>Mermaid.</I> +<P> +The entrance to the temple was through a big arched gateway. Some of the +stones had fallen down, and the whole structure looked as if it might topple +over at any moment. +<P> +"Go carefully," cautioned Mr. Henderson, "Watch on all sides and up above. +Better let Andy and me go ahead." +<P> +The scientist and the old hunter led the way. Through the arch they went, +and emerged into what must at one time have been a magnificent courtyard. +Before them was the temple proper, a vast structure, with an opening through +which fifty men might have marched abreast. But the doors were gone, and +the portal was but a black hole. +<P> +"I hope there ain't any ghosts in there," said Washington, with a shiver. +<P> +"Nonsense!" exclaimed the professor. "There may be things as bad, but there +are no such things as ghosts. Have your gun ready, Andy." +<P> +With every sense on the alert, the old hunter advanced. Every one was a bit +nervous, and, as Mark and Jack afterward admitted, they half expected some +terrible beast to rush out at them. But nothing of the kind happened, and +they went into the interior of the temple. +<P> +At first it was so dark they could see nothing. There were vast dim shapes +on every side, and from the hollow echo of their footsteps they judged the +roof must be very high and the structure big in every way. +<P> +Then, as their eyes became used to the darkness, they could make out, up +front, something like an altar or pulpit. +<P> +"Perhaps that's where they offered up the gold and diamonds as a sacrifice +to their gods," spoke Mark in a whisper. +<P> +"Sacrifice to their gods!" came back a hundred echoes and the sound made +every one shudder. +<P> +"Oh!" said Washington, in a low voice. +<P> +"Oh! Oh! Oh!" repeated the echoes in voices of thunder. +<P> +"Well, this is pleasant," spoke Andy, in his natural tones, and, to the surprise +of all there was no echo. It was only when a person whispered or spoke low +that the sound was heard. After that they talked naturally. +<P> +"You stay here, and Andy and I will go up front and see what there is," said +Mr. Henderson. "Be on your guard, and if you hear us coming back in a hurry, +run!" +<P> +It was with no little feeling of nervousness that the boys, Bill, Tom and +Washington watched the two men move off in the darkness. They could hear +their footsteps on the stone flags and could dimly see them. +<P> +"They must be almost to the altar by this time," said Mark, after a long +pause. +<P> +Hardly had he spoken than there came a loud, sound from where Mr. Henderson +and Andy had gone. It was as if some giant wings were beating the air. Then +came shrill cries and the voice of the old hunter could be heard calling: +<P> +"Kneel down, Professor! Let me get a shot at the brute!" +<P> +Those waiting in the rear of the temple huddled closer together. What terrible +beast could have been aroused? +<P> +The next instant the place seemed illuminated as if by a lightning flash, +and a sound as of a thousand thunder claps resounded. +<P> +"I think I winged him!" cried Andy's voice, and the boys knew he had fired +at something. +<P> +Then there came a crash, and from the roof of the old temple a dozen stones +toppled off to one side, letting in a flood of colored light. +<P> +By this illumination could be seen, flapping through the big space overhead, +an enormous bat, as large as three eagles. And, as it flew about in a circle +it gave utterance to shrill cries. +<P> +"Bang!" Andy's gun spoke again, and the bat with a louder cry than before, +darted through the hole in the roof made by the falling stones, which had +been loosened by the concussion from the rifle. +<P> +"Come on!" cried the old hunter. "That was the guardian of the treasure! +We are safe now!" +<P> +Then, in the light which streamed through the broken roof, the adventurers +could see, heaped up on a great altar, behind which sat a horrible graven +image, piles of yellow metal, and sparkling stones. In little heaps they +were, arranged as if offerings to the terrible god of the giants. There were +bars and rings of gold, dishes of odd shape, and even weapons. As for the +sparkling stones, they were of many colors, but the white ones were more +plentiful than all the others. +<P> +"Gold and diamonds! Diamonds and gold!" murmured the professor. "There is +the ransom of many kings in this ancient temple." +<P> +"Wish I had a big bag!" exclaimed Washington, as he began filling all his +pockets with the precious metal and gems. "If I had a-thought I'd have brought +a dress-suit case!" +<P> +"A dress-suit case full of diamonds!" exclaimed Mark. +<P> +Then he too, as did all the others, fell to filling his pockets with the +wealth spread so lavishly before them. There was the riches of a whole world +in one place and no one but themselves to take it. +<P> +For several minutes no one spoke. The only sound was the rattle of the stones +and the clink of gold, and when some of the diamonds dropped on the floor +they did not bother to gather them up. There were too many on the altar. +<P> +"We will be rich for life!" gasped old Andy, who had been poor all his years. +<P> +"I can't carry any more!" gasped Washington. "I'm goin' back for——" +<P> +What he was going back for he never said, for, at that instant, happening +to look up at the hole in the roof, he gave a startled try: +<P> +"Here come the terrible bats!" +<P> +They all gazed upward. Through the opening they could see a great flock of +the awful birds, headed for the temple, and they were led by one which seemed +to fly with difficulty. It was the guardian of the treasure that Andy had +wounded. +<P> +"Quick! We must get out of here!" shouted the old hunter. "They are big enough +and strong enough to tear us all to pieces. Hurry!" +<P> +Down the centre of the temple they rushed, and not a moment too soon, for, +ere they had passed half way to the entrance, the opening in the roof was +darkened by the coming of the bats, and soon the flapping of their wings +awoke the thundering echoes in the ruined structure, while their shrill cries +struck terror to the hearts of the travelers. +<P> +Up to the altar circled the bats, and then wheeling they flapped down the +dim aisles toward the adventurers. +<P> +"Hurry! Hurry!" shouted Andy, who was in the rear. +<P> +He raised his rifle and fired several shots into the midst of the terrible +creatures. +<P> +A number of the bats were wounded, and the others were so frightened by the +sound of the shots and the flashes of fire that they turned back. This enabled +the fleeing ones to gain the entrance to the temple, and soon they were outside. +<P> +"To the ship!" yelled Bill. +<P> +"There's little danger now!" called Andy, panting, for the run had winded +him. "They will hardly attack us in the light!" +<P> +And he was right, for, though they could hear the bats flying about inside +the temple, and uttering their cries, none came outside. +<P> +But no one felt like staying near the uncanny structure, and little time +was lost in reaching the <I>Mermaid. </I>Then the doors were fastened, and +the ship was sent high up into the air. +<P> +"Which way?" asked Jack, when Mr. Henderson told him to go to the conning +tower and steer. +<P> +"Back to where we first met the giants," replied the professor. "We must +prepare to start for our own earth again soon." +<P> +"I've almost forgotten how real sunlight looks," thought Jack, as he headed +the ship around the other way. As he turned the levers a big diamond dropped +from his pocket and rolled on the floor. +<P> +"This will be a good reminder of our trip though," he added. +<P> +The travelers, even including Mr. Henderson, were so taken up with their +suddenly acquired riches that they hardly thought of meals. At the professor's +suggestion they tied their gold and stones up in small packages convenient +to carry. +<P> +"Better place them where you can grab them in a hurry in case of accident," +the old scientist went on. "Of course if there should be too bad an accident +they would never be of any use to us down here, but we'll look on the bright +side of things." +<P> +"Do you anticipate any accident?" asked Jack anxiously. +<P> +"No, Oh no," replied Mr. Henderson, but Jack thought the aged man had something +weighing on his mind. +<h3>CHAPTER XXIX</h3> +<h4>BACK HOME—CONCLUSION</h4> +<P> +ON and on sped the <I>Mermaid. </I>Now that the travelers felt their journey +accomplished they were anxious to begin the homeward trip. They made a straight +course for the village where they had so nearly met with disaster, and where +the king of the giants had saved them. They went in a direct line, and did +not travel here and there, as they had after they left the town. Consequently +they shortened the route by a great distance. Yet it was long enough, and +when they finally came in sight of the place the dial registered a trip of +five thousand miles underground. +<P> +It was one evening when they landed almost at the spot whence they had taken +flight eventually to reach the temple of the treasure. Most of the giants +had betaken themselves to their mound houses, but Hankos was walking in the +fields, and, when he caught sight of the airship hovering above him he waved +his great sword in welcome. +<P> +He rushed up to shake hands with the travelers when they came out of the +ship, though to greet him it was only possible for the adventurers to grasp +one of his immense fingers. +<P> +As soon as the greetings were over Hankos began to speak rapidly to the +professor, at the same time going through many strange motions. +<P> +"It is as I feared!" suddenly exclaimed the scientist. +<P> +"What is the matter?" asked Mark. +<P> +"The worst has happened!" went on Mr. Henderson. "The great hole by which +we came into this place has been closed by an earthquake shock!" +<P> +"The hole closed?" repeated Jack. +<P> +"An earthquake shock!" murmured Mark. +<P> +"Then how are we going to get back to earth?" asked old Andy. +<P> +A terrible fear entered the hearts of the travelers. The closing of the opening +by which they had come to the strange world meant, in all probability that +they would have to spend the rest of their lives in this underground place. +<P> +"What good did it do us to get all those diamonds and that gold?" asked Mark +in a sorrowful tone. +<P> +Hankos began to speak again, using his gestures which were almost as eloquent +as words. The professor watched and listened intently. Then there seemed +to come a more hopeful look to his face. He nodded vigorously as Hankos went +on with what seemed to be an explanation. +<P> +"It's worth trying, at all events!" the scientist exclaimed. "It is our only +hope!" +<P> +"What is?" asked Jack. +<P> +"Friends," began the professor in solemn tones. "I must admit our plight +is desperate. At the same time there is a bare chance of our getting back +to our own earth. As you remember, Hankos went from this place to the upper +regions through the upward spouting column of water." +<P> +"If we had our submarine we might also," interrupted Jack. "But the <I>Mermaid +</I>isn't built to sail in that fashion." +<P> +"Nor would the <I>Porpoise </I>have served us in this emergency," said the +professor. "It would prove too heavy. But, nevertheless, I think I have a +plan. Now, Mark, you are about to learn the secret of the storeroom. The +real one, not the hiding of Hankos in there, which you imagined to be the +cause of my desire to keep something hidden. When we planned a trip to this +underground world I had a dim idea that we might meet with trouble. So I +planned and made a cylinder lifeboat." +<P> +"A cylinder lifeboat?" repeated Mark. +<P> +"Yes," replied Mr. Henderson. "I have it in the storeroom. I did not want +any of you to see it for fear you would have faint hearts. I thought there +might be no necessity of using it. But, since there is, we must do our best. +I will admit it may be a fearful ordeal, but we will have to risk something +in order to escape. +<P> +"I have in the storeroom a large cylinder, capable of holding us all. It +will also contain food and drink for a month, but we will all have to go, +packed almost like sardines in a box. My plan is to take the <I>Mermaid </I>to +the place where the column of water shoots up. There we will get into the +cylinder, close it, and trust ourselves to the terrible force that may bring +us back to the upper world. What do you say? Shall we attempt it?" +<P> +For a few seconds no one spoke. Then Jack said slowly: +<P> +"I don't see that we can do anything else. I don't want to stay here all +my life." +<P> +"I wants a chance t' wear some of them sparklers," put in Washington. +<P> +"Then we will make the attempt," the professor added. "Now all aboard for +the place where the water shoots up!" +<P> +Questioning Hankos, the professor learned how to reach the strange place. +It was in the midst of a desolate country where none of the giants ever went, +so afraid were they of the strange phenomenon. +<P> +It was a week's journey. Sometimes the <I>Mermaid </I>flew through the air, +and again it sailed on vast lakes or inland seas. On the trip they met with +big waterfalls and terrible geysers that spouted a mile or more into the +air. They traveled by night as well as day, though it was necessary to keep +a sharp watch. +<P> +Sometimes the ship passed through great flocks of birds that surrounded her +and sought to pierce the aluminum hull with their sharp beaks and talons. +Over the mountains and valleys the ship sailed until, one evening, there +sounded through the air a strange rumbling sound. +<P> +"It is thunder," said Old Andy. +<P> +"It is the water column," replied the scientist. "We are at the end of our +trip. May the remainder be as successful!" +<P> +The ship was lowered to the surface, as it was deemed best to approach the +column when the lights were shining. No one slept much that night, for the +roaring and rumbling never ceased. +<P> +In the morning the ship was sent forward slowly. Ever and ever the terrific +sound increased, until it was almost deafening. They had to call to each +other to be heard. +<P> +Then, as the <I>Mermaid </I>passed over a mountain, the adventurers saw, +in a valley below them, the up-shooting water. +<P> +It was a vast column, nearly three hundred feet in thickness, and as solid +and white as a shaft of marble. Up, up, up, it went, until it was lost to +sight, but there were no falling drops, and not even a spray came from the +watery shafts. +<P> +"There is a terrible power to it," the professor said. "May it prove our +salvation!" +<P> +The ship was lowered about a hundred feet away from the waterspout. All around +them the ground was vibrating with the force of the fluid. +<P> +"To think that connects with the world above!" exclaimed Jack. +<P> +"It's a good thing for us that it does," Mark answered. +<P> +"We must lose no time," the professor put in. "If the earthquake destroyed +the downward shaft, it may effect this one in time. We must escape while +we can." +<P> +Then, for the first time, he opened the storeroom and the big cylinder was +disclosed to view. It was made of aluminum, and shaped like an immense cigar. +The hull was double, and it was strongly braced. Inside were padded berths +for the occupants, and there was just room enough for the seven adventurers. +Once they had entered they could not move about, but must stay in their little +compartment. +<P> +Compressed air in strong cylinders furnished a means of breathing, and there +were tiny electric lights operated by a storage battery. There was also a +chamber to be filled with the lifting gas. The cylinder was so arranged that +it would float on it's long axis if thrown into the water. A trap door +hermetically sealed gave access to the interior. A small propeller, worked +by compressed air, furnished motive power. +<P> +The food supply consisted of compressed capsules on which a man could subsist +for several days. There was also some water, but not much, since that can +not be compressed and would, therefore, take considerable room. +<P> +"The only thing for us to do," said the professor, "is to get into the cylinder, +seal it up, and trust to Providence. This is what I intended to use when +we were caught in the draught." +<P> +"How can we get into the column of water after we shut ourselves into the +cylinder?" asked Mark. +<P> +"The cylinder fits into a sort of improvised cannon," said Mr. Henderson. +"It is fired by electricity and compressed air. We will aim it at the column, +press the button and be projected into the midst of the water. Then——" He +did not finish the sentence, but the others knew what he meant. +<P> +"When are we to start?" asked Mark. +<P> +"As soon as possible," replied the professor. "I must arrange the cylinder, +compress the air and lay out the food supply." +<P> +It took the rest of the day to do this, as the inventor found it would be +advisable to attach a weight to the end of the cylinder, to hold it upright +in the column of water. The weight could be detached automatically when they +were shot up into the midst of the ocean, where, as Hankos had told them, +the column spurted forth. +<P> +Then some food was stored in the tiny ship that was destined to be their +last hope, and some tanks of water were placed in it. +<P> +"I think we are almost ready," Mr. Henderson said about noon the next day. +<P> +"What about our gold and diamonds?" asked Jack suddenly. "Can we take them +with us in the cylinder?" +<P> +"That's so!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "I forgot about them. I'm afraid we'll +have to leave the riches behind. We will not be able to carry them and the +food we need, for it may be a week or more before we can leave the cylinder. +Gold and diamonds will be a poor substitute for something to eat." +<P> +"I'm goin' t' take mine!" said Washington with much conviction. "I might +as well starve rich as starve poor!" +<P> +"We may be able to take a few diamonds," the professor answered. "The gold +will be too heavy. Let each one select the largest of the diamonds he has +and put them in his pockets." +<P> +Then began a sorting of the wealth. It was strange, as they recalled afterward, +throwing away riches that would have made millionaires envious, but it had +to be done. All the wealth in the world would not equal a beef capsule when +they were starving, and they realized it. So they only saved a few pieces +of gold as souvenirs, and took the best of the diamonds. But even then they +had a vast fortune with them. +<P> +At last all was in readiness. The cylinder had been placed in the tube from +which it was to be shot gently forth by compressed air, so that it would +fall into the upward spouting column of water. The charge of compressed air +was put in and the electric wires arranged. +<P> +"Are we all ready?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"I think so," said Jack, in what sounded like a whisper, but which was loud, +only the noise of the water muffled it. +<P> +"Then we had better enter the cylinder," spoke the inventor. "Take a last +look at the <I>Flying Mermaid, </I>boys, for you will never see again the +ship that has borne us many thousand miles. She served us well, and might +again, but for the freak of nature that has placed us in this position." +<P> +For the first time the adventurers realized that they must abandon the craft +in which they had reached the new world. So it was with no little feeling +of sadness that they climbed up the ladder that had been arranged and slid +down into the cylinder. One by one they took their places in the padded berths +arranged for them. It was a snug fit, for the professor knew if there was +too much room he and the others might be so tossed about as to be killed. +<P> +Mr. Henderson was the last to enter. Standing at the manhole he took a final +look at his pet creation, the <I>Mermaid. </I>Through the opened windows +the colored lights came, shifting here and there. Outside the terrible column +of water was roaring as if anxious to devour them. +<P> +"Good-bye, <I>Mermaid!" </I>said the professor softly. +<P> +Then he closed down the manhole cover and tightened the screws that held +it in place. He touched a button that turned on the electric lights and the +interior of the cylinder was illuminated with a soft glow. +<P> +"Are you all ready?" he asked. +<P> +"Jest as much as I ever will be," replied Washington, who, as the crisis +approached, seemed more light-hearted than any of the others. +<P> +"Then here we go!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. +<P> +His fingers touched the button that connected with the electric machine, +which operated the compressed air. +<P> +There sounded a muffled report. Then it seemed to those in the cylinder that +the end of the world had come. They shot upward and outward, through the +top of the conning tower which had been removed. The cylinder, launched straight +at the column of water struck it squarely and, an instant later was caught +in the grasp of the giant force and hurled toward the upper world. +<P> +Up and up and up the mass of metal with its human freight went. Now it was +spinning like a top, again it shot toward the earth's crust like an arrow +from the archer's bow. +<P> +It was moving with the velocity of a meteor, yet because of being surrounded +with water, and traveling with the same velocity as the column, there was +no friction. Had there been, the heat generated would have melted the case +in an instant. +<P> +For the first few seconds those in the cylinder were dazed by the sudden +rush. Then as it became greater and greater there came a curious dull feeling, +and, one after another lost consciousness. The terror of the water column, +and the frightful speed, had made them senseless. +<P> + <HR> +<P> +It seemed like a month later, though, of course, it could have been only +a few hours or a day at most when Jack opened his eyes. He saw his companions, +white and senseless all around him, and at first thought they were dead. +Then he saw Mark looking at him, and Washington asked: +<P> +"Is any one livin' 'sides me?" +<P> +"I am," replied Jack decidedly. +<P> +Then, one after another they regained their senses. But they were in a strange +daze, for they were being carried along like a shooting star, only, as they +went at the same rate as did the element carrying them, they did not realize +this. +<P> +"I think I'm hungry," said Bill, who had the best appetite of any of the +travelers. +<P> +"You'll find a beef capsule in the little compartment over your head," spoke +the professor. +<P> +Bill was about to reach for it, when they were all startled by a sudden side +motion of the cylinder. Then came a violent shock, and a sound as of splashing +water. Next the cylinder seemed to be falling, and, a few minutes later to +be shooting upward. Following this there was another splash and the cylinder +began to bob about like a cork on a mill pond. +<P> +"We have reached the sea! We are afloat on the ocean!" cried the professor. +<P> +Hurriedly he disengaged himself from the straps that held him to his bunk. +He pushed back the lever that opened the manhole. Into the opening glowed +the glorious sunlight, while to the occupants came the breath of salt air. +<P> +"Hurrah!" cried Jack. "We are safe at last!" +<P> +"Safe at last!" the professor answered, and then they all gave a cheer. +<P> +For their cylinder, which might now be termed a boat, was floating on the +great Atlantic. The blue sky was overhead and the air of the sea fanned their +cheeks. +<P> +They had shot up from the underground earth, in the column of water, had +been tossed high into the air, had fallen back when the liquid shaft broke +into spray, had descended into the ocean, gone down a hundred feet or more, +and then had shot up like a cork to bob about the surface. +<P> +For a week they were afloat, and then they were picked up by a passing vessel, +rather weak and very much cramped, but otherwise in good shape. They said +nothing of their adventures, save to explain that they were experimenting +in a new kind of boat. About a month later, for the ship that had rescued +them was a slow sailer, they were back on the island whence that wonderful +voyage was begun. +<P> + <HR> +<P> +"Well, we solved the mystery of the center of the earth," remarked Jack, +one evening, when they were gathered in the old shack where so many wonderful +adventures had been planned. +<P> +"Yes, we did," said Mr. Henderson. "And no one else is ever likely to go +there." +<P> +"Why?" +<P> +"Because the only way of getting there was destroyed by the earthquake, and +no one could ever force his way down through that upward-shooting column +of water." +<P> +"That's so. Well, we have the diamonds, anyway," spoke Mark. "They ought +to make us rich." +<P> +And the jewels did, for the stones proved to be of great value, even though +the adventurers had saved only a few of the many they found in the ruined +temple. +<P> +But there was money enough so that they all could live in comfort; the rest +of their lives. As the professor was getting quite old, and incapable of +making any more wonderful inventions, he closed up his workshop and settled +down to a quiet life. As for Washington, Andy, and Bill and Tom, they invested +their money received from the sale of the diamonds in different business +ventures, and each one did well. +<P> +"I am going in for a good education," said Jack to Mark. +<P> +"Just what I am going to do," answered his chum. "And after we've got that——" +He paused suggestively. +<P> +"We'll go in for inventing airships, or something like that, eh?" +<P> +"Yes. We've learned a great deal from Mr. Henderson, and in the course of +time we ought to be able to turn out something even more wonderful than the +<I>Electric Monarch, </I>the <I>Porpoise, </I>or the <I>Flying Mermaid."</I> +<P> +"Yes, and when we've invented something better——" +<P> +"We'll take another trip." +<P> +"Right you are!" +<P> +And then the two chums shook hands warmly; and here we will say good-bye. +<h4>THE END.</h4> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Five Thousand Miles Underground, by Roy Rockwood + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FIVE THOUSAND MILES UNDERGROUND *** + +***** This file should be named 4994-h.htm or 4994-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/4/9/9/4994/ + +Produced by Jim Weiler + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</BODY> +</HTML> + diff --git a/old/20120829-4994-h.zip b/old/20120829-4994-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..628c6a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20120829-4994-h.zip diff --git a/old/20120829-4994.txt b/old/20120829-4994.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..662f5bf --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20120829-4994.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6671 @@ +Project Gutenberg's Five Thousand Miles Underground, by Roy Rockwood + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Five Thousand Miles Underground + +Author: Roy Rockwood + +Posting Date: August 29, 2012 [EBook #4994] +Release Date: January, 2004 +First Posted: April 7, 2002 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FIVE THOUSAND MILES UNDERGROUND *** + + + + +Produced by Jim Weiler + + + + + + + + + +Five Thousand Miles Underground + +Or + +The Mystery of the Centre of the Earth + +by Roy Rockwood, 1908 + + + + +CHAPTER I + +WASHINGTON BACKS OUT + + +"WASHINGTON! I say Washington!" + +Throughout a big shed, filled for the most part with huge pieces of +machinery, echoed the voice of Professor Amos Henderson. He did not +look up from a small engine over which he was bending. + +"Washington! Where are you? Why don't you answer me?" + +From somewhere underneath an immense pile of iron, steel and aluminum +came the voice of a colored man. + +"Yas sir, Perfesser, I'se goin' t' saggasiate my bodily presence in +yo' contiguous proximity an' attend t' yo' immediate conglomerated +prescriptions at th' predistined period. Yas, sir!" + +"Well, Washington, if you had started when you began that long speech +you would have been at least half way here by this time. Hurry up! +Never mind tightning those bolts now. Find the boys. I need them to +help me with this engine. They must be around somewhere." + +"I seen 'em goin' fishin' down by th' brook a little while ago," +answered the negro, crawling out from under what seemed to be a +combined airship and watercraft. "Jack says as how yo' gived him +permission t' occupy his indisputatious period of levity in +endeavorin' t' extract from th' liquid element some specimens of +swimmin' creatures." + +"If you mean I said he and Mark could go fishing in the brook, you're +right, Washington," replied the professor with a smile. "But you waste +a lot of time and breath trying to say it. Why, don't you give up +using big words?" + +"I reckon I was brought up t' it," replied the colored man grinning +from ear to ear. He did not always use big words but when he did they +were generally the wrong ones. Sometimes, he spoke quite correctly. + +"Well, I suppose you can't help it," resumed Mr. Henderson. "However, +never mind that. Find the boys and send them to me." + +"With th' least appreciatableness amount of postponement," answered +the messenger, and he went out. + +Washington White, who in color was just the opposite to his name, a +general helper and companion to Professor Henderson, found Mark +Sampson and Jack Darrow about a quarter of a mile from the big shed, +which was in the center of a wooded island off the coast of Maine. The +lads were seated on the bank of a small brook, fishing. + +"Perfesser wants yo' immediate," said Washington. + +"But we haven't caught a single fish," objected Mark. + +"Them's the orders from headquarters," replied the colored man. "Yo' +both got t' project yo'selves in th' vicinity of th' machine shop. I +reckon th' new fangled contraption that th' perfesser is goin' t' +navigate th' air an' sail th' angry seas in, am about done. He want's +t' try th' engine." + +"Come on then," said Jack. "We probably would not catch any fish, +anyhow, Mark." + +Accompanied by Washington, the youths, each of whom was about eighteen +years old, started toward the big shed. + +While they are on their way opportunity may be taken to tell a little +about them, as well as about Washington and the professor, and the +curious craft on which the scientist was working. + +A few years before this story opens Mr. Henderson had invented a +wonderful electric airship. He had it about completed when, one day, +he and the two boys became unexpectedly acquainted, and, as it +developed, friends. + +Mark and Jack were orphans. After having rather a hard time knocking +about the world trying to make a living, they chanced to meet, and +resolved to cast their lots together. They boarded a freight train, +and, as told in the first volume of this series, entitled, "Through +the Air to the North Pole; or the Wonderful Cruise of the Electric +Monarch," the cars were wrecked near where Professor Henderson was +building his strange craft. + +The boys were cared for by the scientist, and, after their recovery +from hurts received in the collision, they accepted his invitation to +make the trip through the upper regions in the airship, to search for +the north pole. With them went Andy Sudds, an old hunter, and Tom +Smith and Bill Jones, two farmers, but who were hired as helpers on +the voyage. The party had many adventures on the trip, having battles +with savage animals and more savage Esquimaux, and were tossed about +in terrible storms. After making some scientific observations, which +the professor was much interested in, they started back home. + +Having found he could successfully sail in the air, Mr. Henderson +resolved to try what it might be like under water. + +He moved his machine shop to a lonely spot on the Maine coast, and +there, with the help of the boys, Washington, Andy and two machinists +constructed a submarine boat, called the Porpoise. + +In this the professor resolved to seek the south pole, he having a +theory that it was surrounded by an open sea. After much hard work the +Porpoise was made ready for the voyage. + +What occurred on this great trip is described in the second book of +this series, called "Under the Ocean to the South Pole, or the Strange +Cruise of the Submarine Wonder." In that is told how once more Tom and +Bill, with Andy, the boys and Washington, accompanying Professor +Henderson, had many thrilling experiences. + +They were caught in the grip of the grass of the terrible Sargasso +Sea. Monstrous suckers grasped the boat in their powerful arms, and +had to be fought off. They were caught in a sea of boiling water and +imprisoned between big fields of ice. + +By means of strong diving suits they were able to leave the ship and +walk about on the bottom of the sea. They visited a graveyard of +sunken ships, saw many strange monsters as well as many beautiful fish +in the great depths to which they sunk. Many times they were in dire +peril but the resources of the professor, the bravery and daring of +the boys, no less than the help Washington and Andy Sudds, the hunter, +rendered at times, brought them through. + +Those of you who read of their adventures will recall the strange +island which they came upon in the Atlantic Ocean, far from the coast +of South America. + +When they first drew near this island they were almost sucked into the +depths of a great whirlpool, caused by water pouring down a big hole +that seemed to lead far into the earth. They reversed their ship just +in time. + +But, on going to another side of the island they were able to approach +safely, as at this point the great hole was farther from the shore. +Then they landed and investigated. + +They found the island was almost circular, and the hole was also +round, but not in the center of the land. It was an immense cavity, so +wide they could not see across, and as for the depth they could only +guess at it. Looking down they could only see rolling masses of vapor +and clouds caused by the water which poured down from the ocean with +the force of a Niagara. + +Gazing down into the big hole Mark suggested it might lead to the +centre of the earth, which some scientists claim is hollow. The +professor admitted that the cavity looked as though it led to China. + +They had no means of investigating further the mystery of the opening +and returned to their submarine, completing the voyage to the south +pole. + +It was now about two years since they had come back from that eventful +trip. One of the first things the professor did, after docking the +Porpoise, was to shut himself up in his study and begin to draw plans. +To the questions of the boys he returned no answer for several days. +Then he announced he was working on a craft which could both sail on +top of the water and navigate the air. + +In time the plans were done, and, in order to keep the work secret, +the shop was moved to an island which the professor owned. + +Parts of the Monarch and the Porpoise were used in constructing the +new craft, so there was no need to get other help than that which the +boys, Washington and Bill and Tom could give, since the two latter +accepted an offer of the professor to remain and work for him. The +boys, of course, would not leave their friend. + +The professor realized that he had a more difficult task in his new +venture than he had set himself on other occasions. For a ship to be +light enough to rise in the air, and, at another time, and with no +change, to be strong enough to navigate the ocean, was indeed +something to tax Mr. Henderson's ingenuity. + +However, in the course of a little over a year the larger part of the +work was done. Inside the big shed was the huge affair which, it was +hoped, would enable its owner to be master of both air and water. + +"Did the professor say anything special?" asked Mark of Washington. + +"Nope. I reckon he were too busy problamatin' the exact altitude +projected in an inverse direction by th' square root of th' new engine +when operated at a million times inside of a few seconds, but he +didn't say nothin' t' me. I were busy underneath th' ship, fixin' +bolts when he tole me t' find yo'. I wouldn't be s'prised if he had +th' thing goin' soon." + +"Do you think he'll be generating the new gas to-day?" asked Jack +eagerly. "That's the most troublesome part; to get that gas right." + +"He didn't say nothin' t' me 'bout it," Washington stated, as he +walked along beside the two boys. "He jest seemed anxious like." + +"We'd better hurry," advised Mark. "He may be at an important part in +his experiments and probably needs us. I hope it will work. He has +spent many days on it, and we all have worked hard. It ought to be a +success." + +"Perfesser allers makes things work," declared Washington stoutly. + +"That's a good way to feel about it, anyway," observed Mark. "Well, +we'll soon know." + +The three hurried to the shed which they could see as they rounded a +turn of the path through the wood. They noticed an elderly man +approaching with a gun on his shoulder. On one arm he carried a game +bag. + +"Guess Andy got something for dinner," remarked Jack. + +"I hopes so, honey," put in Washington. "I'se got a sort of gone +feelin' in my stomach!" + +"Any luck, Andy?" called Mark, when he came within hailing distance. + +"Fine," replied Andy Sudds. "Rabbits and quail. We'll have a good +dinner to-morrow." + +While Andy entered the living part of the big shed to put away his gun +and game, the boys and Washington kept on to the engine room. They +found the professor, with Bill and Tom, busy fitting pipes to the +small engine which was set up at one side of the structure. + +"Come, boys, I need your aid," remarked Mr. Henderson as they entered. +"Take off your coats and pitch in. Tighten up these bolts, Jack. Mark, +you mix up those chemicals the way I taught you, and see that the +dynamo is in working order for Washington to attend to." + +In a little while the shop was a veritable hive of industry, and it +resounded to the sound of hammers, wrenches and machinery. In the +background was the big ship, which seemed like two immense cigars, one +above the other, the lower one the larger. + +"Where was you calalatin' t' take this here ship when it gits done, +Perfesser?" asked Washington, during a lull in the operations. + +"Do you remember that big hole in the island we visited on our trip to +the south pole?" + +"I suah does," answered the colored man. + +"We are going to explore that," went on the scientist. "We are going +to make a voyage to the interior of the earth in our Flying Mermaid." + +"Go down into th' earth!" exclaimed Washington, his eyes big with +fright. + +"Certainly; why not?" + +"Not for mine!" cried the colored man, dropping the wrench he was +holding. "No sire I'm not goin' t' project myself int' a grave while +I'se alive. Time enough when I kicks th' bucket. No sir! If yo' an' +the boys wants t' risk yo' se'ves goin' down int' th' interior of th' +earth, where th' Bible says there's fiery furnaces, yo' kin go, but +Washington White stays on terra cotta! That's where he stays; He ain't +ready t' be buried, not jest yet!" and the frightened colored man +started to leave the shed. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +THE FLYING MERMAID + + +"HERE! Stop him!" cried Professor Henderson. "Don't let him get away. +We still need his help to get the ship in shape. He needn't be +frightened. We're not going to start at once." + +Mark and Jack ran after Washington, whose progress was somewhat +impeded because he kept looking back as if he feared the new ship was +chasing him. + +"Come on back!" said Mark. "There's no danger, and if there was we're +not going to start to-day." + +"Ain't yo' foolin' me?" asked Washington, pausing and looking +doubtfully at the boys. + +"Of course not," answered Mark. "You know Professor Henderson would +not make you do anything you didn't want to do, Wash. He wishes you to +stay and help him get ready, that's all." + +"Well, Washington," observed the aged scientist. "I didn't think you'd +go back on me." + +"I'd do mos' anything fer yo', Perfesser," said the colored man, "but +I got t' beg off this time," and he looked at the Flying Mermaid as if +he thought the metal sides would open and devour him. + +"Then help me get things in shape to generate the gas," the scientist +said. "I want to give the new vapor the first real test in lifting +power to-day. On the success of it depends the future of the ship." + +Seeing there was no immediate danger of being carried to the centre of +the earth, Washington resumed his labors. The professor, the boys, +Bill and Tom were also hurrying matters to enable a test to be made +before night. + +As will readily be seen, even by those not familiar with the +construction of airships and submarines, the chief problem was to find +some agent strong enough to lift from the earth a weight heavier than +had ever before been put into an apparatus that was destined to +traverse the clouds. For the Flying Mermaid was not only an airship +but an ocean voyager as well. It had to be made light enough to be +lifted far above the earth, yet the very nature of it, necessitating +it being made heavy enough to stand the buffeting of the waves and the +pressure of water, was against its flying abilities. + +Professor Henderson realized this and knew that the chief concern +would be to discover a gas or vapor with five times the lifting power +of hydrogen, one of the lightest gases known, and one sometimes used +to inflate balloons. + +After long study he had been partially successful, but he knew from +experiments made that the gas he had so far been able to manufacture +would not answer. What he wanted was some element that could be mixed +with the gas, to neutralize the attraction of gravitation, or downward +pull of the earth. + +While he was seeking this, and experimenting on many lines, the +construction of the air-water ship went on. In general the outward +construction was two cigar shaped hulls, one above the other. +Aluminum, being the lightest and strongest metal that could be used +for the purpose, formed the main part of both bodies. + +The upper hull was one hundred feet long and twenty feet in diameter +at the widest part. It tapered to points at either end. It was +attached to the lower hull by strong braces, at either end, while from +the center there extended a pipe which connected with the lower +section. This pipe was intended to convey the lifting gas to the part +which corresponded to the bag of the balloon, save that it was of +metal instead of silk, or rubber as is usual. + +There were two reasons for this. One was that it would not be liable +to puncture, particularly in the proposed underground trip, and the +other was that it did not have to be so large as a cloth bag would +have had to be. It was also a permanent part of the ship, and on a +voyage where part of the time the travelers would be in the air and +part on the water, and when the change from one to the other would +have to be made quickly, this was necessary. It would have taken too +long to raise the ship in the air had a cloth bag been used to contain +the gas. + +The lower hull or main part of the craft was one hundred and fifty +feet long, and forty feet through at the largest part, in the centre. + +It was divided into four sections. The forward one contained the +sleeping quarters of Professor Henderson and his crew. There was a +small stateroom for each one. Above was a conning or observation +tower, reached by a small flight of steps. From this tower the ship +could be steered, stopped and started, as could also be done from the +engine room, which was in the after part of the hull. + +As in the Porpoise and Monarch, electricity formed the motive power +and was also used for many other purposes on board. Engines operated +by gas produced the current which heated, lighted and moved the ship, +as well as played a part in producing the wonderful gas. + +The ship moved forward or backward by means of a novel arrangement. +This was by the power of compressed air. From either end of the lower +hull there projected a short pipe working in a ball and socket joint, +so it could be turned in any direction. By means of strong pumps a +current of compressed air could be sent out from either pipe. Thus +when floating above the earth the ship was forced forward by the blast +of air rushing from the pipe at the stern. It was the same principle +as that on which a sky rocket is shot heavenward, save that gases +produced by the burning of powder in the pasteboard rocket form its +moving impulse. + +In the case of the Flying Mermaid, it could be made to move backward +by sending the air out of the forward tube. Thus, when in the water, +the compressed air rushing from the pipe struck the fluid and forced +the ship forward or backward as was desired. It floated on the +surface, the deck being about three feet out of water, while the +aluminum gas bag was overhead. + +The engine room was a marvel of machine construction. It contained +pumps for air and water, motors, dynamos, gas engines, and a maze of +wheels and levers. Yet everything was very compact and no room was +wasted. + +The use of the air method of propulsion did away with the necessity of +a large propellor such as most airships have to use, a propellor which +must of necessity be very light and which is easily broken. + +Next to the engine room was the kitchen. It contained an electric +range and all necessary appliances and utensils for preparing meals. +There were lockers and a large reserve storeroom which when the time +came would be well stocked with food. Forward of the kitchen was the +living and dining room. It contained comfortable seats, folding tables +and a small library. Here, also were many instruments designed to show +how the various machines were working. There were gages, pointers and +dials, which told the direction the ship was traveling, the speed and +the distance above the earth or below the surface. Similar indicators +were in the conning tower, which had a powerful search light. + +The ship was lighted throughout by incandescent lamps, and there was +even a small automatic piano worked by the electric current, on which +popular airs could be played. + +If the gas and the gravity neutralizer worked as Professor Henderson +hoped they would, as soon as the ship was completed, all that would be +necessary to start on the voyage would be to fill the aluminum bag and +set the air compressor in motion. + +The gas was made from common air, chemically treated and with a secret +material added which by means of a complicated machine in a measure +did away with the downward pull of the earth. Thus all that was +necessary to carry on a long voyage was a quantity of gasolene to +operate the engine which worked the electric machines, and some of +this secret compound. + +The professor and his helpers had been working to good advantage. At +last all was in readiness for the gas test. + +It was proposed to try it on an experimental scale. Some of the fluid +was to be generated and forced into an aluminum cylinder under the +same pressure it would be used in the air ship. To this cylinder were +attached weights in proportion to the weight of the Flying Mermaid +with its load of human freight, engines and equipment. + +"This cylinder is just one one-hundredth the size of the cylinder of +the ship," said the professor. "I am going to fasten to it a hundred +pound weight. If it lifts that our latest contrivance will be a +success." + +"You mean if the little cylinder pulls a hundred pounds up the big +ship will take us and the machinery up?" asked Mark. + +"Certainly," answered the professor. "If this cylinder lifts a hundred +pounds, one a hundred times as big (as that of the Mermaid is), will +lift a hundred times as much, or ten thousand pounds. That is five +tons, or more than a ton over what I figure to be the weight of our +ship and contents. The latest war balloon can lift one ton with ease, +and if my machine can not do five times as well I shall be +disappointed." + +The last adjustments were made, pipes were run from the gas generator +to the cylinder, and the hundred pound weight was attached. + +"Everybody look out now," said Mr. Henderson. "I am going to start the +machine and let the gas enter the cylinder. It is a very powerful gas +and may break the cylinder. If it does you must all duck." + +The scientist gave a last look at everything. The boys got behind some +boards whence they could see without being in danger. Washington, who +had little fear so long as there was no danger of going under ground, +took his place at the dynamo. Andy Sudds, with Bill and Tom, stationed +themselves in safe places. + +"All ready!" called the professor. + +He pulled a lever toward him, turned a wheel and signalled to +Washington to start the dynamo. There was a sound of buzzing +machinery, which was followed by a hiss as the gas began to enter the +cylinder under pressure. Would it stand the strain? That question was +uppermost in every one's mind save the professor's. He only cared to +see the cylinder leave the ground, carrying the weight with it. That +would prove his long labors were crowned with success. + +Faster and faster whirred the dynamo. The gas was being generated from +the air. The secret chemical made a hissing which could be heard for +some distance. The gage registered a heavy pressure. Anxiously the +professor watched the cylinder. + +"There!" he exclaimed at length. "It has all the gas it can hold. Now +to see if it works!" + +He disconnected the pipe leading from the generator. This left the +cylinder free. It seemed to tremble slightly. There appeared to be a +movement to the hundred pound weight which rested on the ground. It +was as if it was tugging to get loose. + +"There it goes! There it goes!" cried Mark, joyfully. + +"Hurrah!" shouted Jack. "There she rises!" + +"It suttinly am projectin' itself skyward!" yelled Washington, coming +from the dynamo. + +Sure enough the cylinder was slowly rising in the air, bearing the +weight with it. It had lifted it clear from the ground and was +approaching the roof of the big shed. + +"It will work! It will work!" exclaimed the professor, strangely +excited. + +The next instant the cylinder, carrying the weight, sailed right out +of an open skylight, and began drifting outside the shop, and across +the fields. + +"Quick! We must get it back!" cried Mr. Henderson. "If it gets away my +secret may be discovered and I will lose all! We must secure it!" + +But the cylinder was now two hundred feet in the air and being blown +to the east, the weight dangling below it, making it look like a +miniature airship. + +"We can never catch that!" cried Mark. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +WASHINGTON DECIDES + + +"WE must catch that cylinder!" the professor exclaimed. "Some one may +find it when it comes down and analyze the gas. Then he would discover +how to make it. The cylinder must come down!" + +"Don't see how we can proximate ourselves inter th' vicinity of it +lessen we delegate th' imperial functions of orinthological specimens +t' some member of this here party," observed Washington. + +"If you mean we can't catch that there contraption unless we turn into +birds I'll show you that you're mistaken!" cried Andy Sudds. "I guess +I have a trick or two up my sleeve," and the old hunter quickly threw +open the breech of his gun and inserted a couple of cartridges. + +He raised the piece to his shoulder and took quick aim. There was a +sliver of flame, a puff of smoke and a sharp report. The professor and +the boys who were watching the cylinder saw it vibrate up in the air. +Then there came a whistling sound. An instant later the metal body +began to descend, and it and the weight fell to the earth. + +"I'm sorry I had to put a bullet through it, Professor," said old Andy +with a queer smile, "but it was the only way I saw of bringing it +down. Hope it isn't damaged much." + +"It doesn't matter if it is," the scientist answered. "I can make more +cylinders, but I don't want that secret of the gas to become known. +Your bullet served a good turn, Andy, for it let the compressed vapor +out just in time." + +"Then we may consider the experiment a success," said Mark, as +Washington went to where the cylinder had fallen, to detach it from +the weight and bring both to the shed. + +"It seems so," Mr. Henderson answered. "True, it was only an +experiment. We have yet to test the ship itself." + +"When can we do that?" asked Jack. + +"I hope by Monday," the scientist answered. + +"Will you try it in the water or air first?" asked Mark. + +"I'm almost certain it will float in the water," the aged inventor +said. "It does not require much work to make a ship which will do +that. But the air proposition is another matter. However, since the +cylinder rose, I am pretty sure the Flying Mermaid will. + +"But we have done enough work to-day. Let's rest and have something to +eat. Then, with Sunday to sit around and talk matters over, we will be +ready for Monday's test." + +Some of the game Andy had killed was soon on the table, for +Washington, in addition to his other accomplishments, was an expert +cook. During the evening the boys and their friends sat in the living +room of the big shed and talked over the events of the day. + +Sunday was spent in discussing what adventures might lie before them +should they be able to descend into the big hole. Washington did not +say, much, but it was easy to see he had no notion of going. He even +began to pack his few belongings in readiness to leave the service of +Mr. Henderson, for whom he had worked a good many years. + +No one remained long abed Monday morning. Even Washington was up early +in spite of the interest he had lost in the professor's voyage. + +"I jest wants t' see yo' start fer that place where they buries live +folks," he said. + +In order to properly test the Flying Mermaid it was necessary to move +the craft from the shed from which place it had never been taken since +it's construction was started. It had been built on big rollers in +anticipation of this need, so that all which was now necessary was to +open the doors at the end, and roll the craft out. + +This was accomplished with no small amount of labor, and it was nearly +noon before the big ship was moved into the open. It was shoved along +to a little clearing in front of the shed, where no trees would +interfere with its possible upward movement. + +Everyone was bustling about. The professor was busiest of all. He went +from one machine to another; from this apparatus to that, testing +here, turning wheels there, adjusting valves and seeing that all was +in readiness for the generating of the powerful gas. + +As the airship was half round on the bottom and as it rested in a sort +of semi-circular cradle; it brought the entrance some distance above +the ground. To make it easier to get in and out while preparations for +the trial were going on, Bill and Tom had made an improvised pair of +steps, which were tied to the side of the ship with ropes. + +Up and down these the professor, the boys and Andy went, taking in +tools and materials, and removing considerable refuse which had +accumulated during the building of the craft. + +Finally all was in readiness for starting the making of the gas. The +ship was not wholly complete and no supplies or provisions for the +long voyage had been taken aboard. The Flying Mermaid was about a ton +lighter than it would be when fully fitted out, but to make up for +this the professor had left in the ship a lot of tools and surplus +machinery so that the craft held as much weight as it would under +normal conditions. If the gas lifted it now it would at any other +time. + +"Start the generator," said Mr. Henderson, to Mark. "We'll soon see +whether we are going to succeed or fail." + +The boy turned a number of levers and wheels. The machine which made +the powerful vapor was soon in operation. The professor had already +added enough of the secret compound to the tank containing the other +ingredients, and the big pump was sucking in air to be transformed +into the lifting gas. + +The boys and the professor were in the engine room. Andy Sudds, with +Bill and Tom, had taken their places in the living room, to more +evenly balance the ship, since the things in it were not yet all in +their proper places. As for Washington he was busy running from the +shed to the ship with various tools and bits of machinery the +professor desired. + +The gas was being generated rapidly. Throughout the ship there +resounded a hissing noise that told it was being forced through the +pipe into the aluminum shell above the ship proper. + +"I wonder how soon it will begin to lift us," said Mark. + +"It will take about half an hour," replied Mr. Henderson. "You see we +have first to fill the holder completely, since there is no gas in it. +After this we will keep some on hand, so that it will only need the +addition of a small quantity to enable the ship to rise." + +He was busy watching the pointer on a dial which indicated the +pressure of the gas, and the lifting force. The boys were kept busy +making adjustments to the machinery and oiling bearings. + +Suddenly, throughout the length of the craft there was felt a curious +trembling. It was as though the screw of a powerful steamer was +revolving in the water. + +"What is it?" asked Jack. + +"I hope it is the lifting power of the gas making itself felt," the +professor answered. "Perhaps the Flying Mermaid is getting ready to +try her wings." + +The trembling became more pronounced. The gas was being generated +faster than ever. The whole ship was trembling. Tom and Bill came from +the room, where they were stationed, to inquire the meaning, but were +reassured by the professor. + +"Don't be alarmed if you find yourselves up in the air pretty soon," +he remarked with a smile. "Remember the Electric Monarch, and the +flights she took. We may not go as high as we did in her, but it will +answer the same purpose." + +The gas was hissing through the big tube as it rushed into the +overhead holder. The gage indicated a heavy pressure. The ship began +to tremble more violently and to sway slightly from side to side. + +"I think we shall rise presently," said Mr. Henderson. His voice +showed the pride he felt at the seeming success with which his +invention was about to meet. + +Suddenly, with a little jerk, as though some one with a giant hand had +plucked the Flying Mermaid from the earth, the ship gave a little +bound into the air, and was floating free. + +"Here we go!" cried Mr. Henderson. "The ship is a success. Now we're +off for the hole in the earth!" + +The Flying Mermaid was indeed rising in the air. True it did not go up +so swiftly as had the Monarch, but then it was a much heavier and +stronger vessel, and flying was only one of its accomplishments. + +"It's a success! It's a success!" shouted Mark, capering about in his +excitement. + +"Now we'll see what the centre of the earth looks like," went on Jack. +"I can hardly wait for the time to come when we are to start on the +voyage." + +At that instant, when the ship was but a few feet from the ground, but +slowly rising, the boys and the professor heard a shouting below them. + +"What's that?" asked the scientist. "Is any one hurt?" + +Mark ran to a small window, something like a port hole in an ocean +steamer, and looked out. + +"Quick!" he shouted. "Stop the ship! Washington will be killed!" + +In fact from the agonized yells which proceeded from somewhere under +the craft it seemed that the accident was in process of happening. + +"Save me! Save me!" cried the colored man. "I'm goin' to fall! Catch +me, some one!" + +"What is it?" asked the professor, making ready to shut off the power +and let the ship settle back to earth, from which it had moved about +fifty feet. + +"It's Washington," explained Mark. "He evidently tried to walk up the +steps just as the boat mounted skyward. He rolled down and managed to +grab the end of the rope which was left over after the steps were +tied. Now he's swinging down there." + +"Are you going to lower the ship?" asked Jack. + +"Of course!" exclaimed the professor. "I only hope he hangs on until +his feet touch the earth." + +"Keep a tight hold!" shouted Mark, from out of the small window. + +"That's th' truest thing yo' ever said!" exclaimed Washington. "You +bet I'm goin' to hold on, and I'm comin' up too," which he proceeded +to do, hand over hand, like a sailor. + +The boys and the professor watched the colored man's upward progress. +The ship had hardly begun to settle as, in the excitement, not enough +gas had been let out. Closer and closer came Washington, until he was +able to grasp the edge of the opening, to which the steps were +fastened. + +"I thought you weren't coming with us," observed the professor, when +he saw that his helper was safe. + +"I changed my mind," said the colored man. "It's jest luck. Seems like +th' ship done wanted me t' go 'long, an' I'm goin'. I'll take my +chances on bein' buried alive. I ain't never seen th' centre of th' +earth, an' I want's to 'fore I die. I'm goin' 'long, Perfessor!" + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +WHAT DID MARK SEE? + + +"WELL, I'm glad you've decided at last," the professor remarked. "Now +come inside and we'll see how the ship works." + +Once over his fright, Washington made himself at home on the craft he +had helped build. He went from one room to another and observed the +engine. + +"She certainly am workin'" he observed with pride. "Are we still goin' +up, Perfessor?" + +"Still mounting," replied Mr. Henderson, "We are now three hundred +feet above the earth," he added as he glanced at a registering gage. + +The great air pump was set going and soon from the after tube, a big +stream of the compressed vapor rushed. It acted on the ship instantly +and sent the craft ahead at a rapid rate. By elevating or depressing +the tube the craft could be sent obliquely up or down. Then, by +forcing the air from the forward tube, the Mermaid was reversed and +scudded backward. + +But it was more with the ship's ability to rise and descend that +Professor Henderson was concerned, since on that depended their +safety. So various tests were made, in generating the gas and using +the negative gravity apparatus. + +All worked to perfection. Obeying the slightest turn of the wheels and +levers the Mermaid rose or fell. She stood still, suspended herself in +the air, or rushed backward and forward. + +Of course the machinery was new and did not operate as smoothly as it +would later, but the professor and his friends were very well +satisfied. + +"Now we'll try something new," said the scientist to the two boys as +they stood beside him in the tower. "I only hope this part succeeds, +and we shall soon be off on our voyage." + +He turned several levers. There was a hissing sound as the gas rushed +from the container, and the ship began to settle down. + +"What's th' matter? Are we goin' t' hit th' earth?" yelled Washington, +rushing from the engine room. + +"Keep quiet," ordered the professor. "We are only going down, that's +all." + +"But good land! Perfesser!" exclaimed the colored man. "The ocean's +right under us! You forgot you sailed sway from the island! We'll be +drowned suah!" + +"Leave it to me," said Mr. Henderson. "The Flying Mermaid is going to +take a bath!" + +"As long as it swims it will be all right," observed Mark in a low +tone to Jack. "I'm glad I can take care of myself in the water." + +Before Jack could reply the Mermaid seemed to take a sudden dive +through the air. The next instant she struck the water with a splash +that sent the waves rolling all about. The craft rocked violently to +and fro on the surface of the sea. For a while there were anxious +hearts aboard, for there was no certainty but that the ship might not +sink to the bottom. + +But the old professor had not calculated and builded in vain. After +rocking about like a vessel newly launched, the strange craft rode +safely and upright on the water. It set down far enough to bring the +propelling tubes well under, but not so far but that the conning tower +was well out and there was a small deck available. + +"Now to see if we can conquer the water as we did the air!" cried the +professor. "Mark, start the air pump. Jack, you steer, for I want to +watch the machinery under the additional strain." + +From the rear tube rushed such a volume of air that the ocean near it +bubbled and foamed. The ship trembled from stem to stern, and then, +after hanging for an instant as if undecided what to do, it began to +move forward as easily as though it had never sailed any other element +than the sea. + +"She fits her name!" the professor cried. "She is indeed the Flying +Mermaid, for she sails the ocean as easily as she navigates in the +clouds!" + +For a mile or two the craft was sent ahead over the waves. Then it was +reversed and run backwards. Satisfied that his long months of work had +not gone for naught, the professor after trying several experiments, +decided to try and raise the ship while in motion. + +With Jack and Mark to look after the air pumps, while Washington, Tom +and Bill busied themselves in the engine room, Mr. Henderson began to +generate the gas and start the negative gravity apparatus. All the +while the craft was forging ahead. + +There was again the hissing sound that told of the aluminum holder +being filled. For a few minutes there seemed to be no change, the +Mermaid plowing forward. + +Then like a bird rising from the waves, or like a flying fish leaping +from the sea to escape some pursuing monster of the deep, the new ship +shot up diagonally from the surface and winged its way into the upper +regions of the air. + +"Success! Success!" cried the professor. "This proves all I wanted to +know. Now we are ready for our great trip!" + +Great were the rejoicings in the camp that night. It was like living +over again the days when they were aboard the diving Porpoise or the +flying Monarch. To the recollections were added the anticipations of +what was before them in the trip to the interior of the earth. + +Busy days followed, for there was still much to be done to the Flying +Mermaid. The machinery, which was only partly completed, had to be +finished. Besides this the professor was working on some apparatus, +the use of which he did not disclose to any one. It was stored aboard +the ship at the last minute. + +Plenty of provisions had to be taken aboard, and many supplies needed +to work the Mermaid and insure that it would go to the end of the +voyage. The materials for generating the gas and negative gravity, +spare parts, records for the automatic piano and other things were +stored away. + +Some guns and ammunition were taken along as were a few revolvers, +since old Andy had said it was best to prepare for any thing in the +shape of enemies or wild beasts that might be met with in the interior +regions. + +It was decided to make the start by sailing along the surface of the +sea for several days, as in the event of any weakness in the machinery +being discovered there would be less danger. If, at the end of four +days, no trouble developed, the professor said he would send the +Mermaid into the air and make the rest of the voyage through the sky. + +The night before the start was to be made the professor, with the +boys, Washington and the other helpers, went about through the various +shops and buildings, locking them up securely. For they could not tell +how long they would be away, and they had to leave behind much +valuable material. + +As there were several things that needed attention they divided the +work up. Mark had finished his share and was walking back toward the +living cabin where they were all quartered, when, down at the shore, +near where the boat was moored, he fancied he saw, in the gathering +darkness, a moving figure. + +"I wonder who that can be," he thought. "All the others are near the +machine shop, for I just left them there. Perhaps it's some one trying +to spy out how the Mermaid is built." + +Knowing the professor wanted his secret well guarded, Mark walked +softly toward the little dock that served as a place whence the +Mermaid could be easily boarded. As he approached he saw the figure +moving. Something struck the boy as peculiar. + +Though the object had some of the characteristics of a man it did not +walk like a human being, but shuffled along more like a huge ape or +monkey. It seemed bent over, as if it stooped toward the ground. + +"Who are you?" called Mark suddenly. + +For an instant the figure halted and then hurried on faster than +before, with a curious, shuffling walk. It was approaching the ship. + +Somehow it struck Mark as if it was an uncanny being; an inhabitant of +some other world. Then he laughed at his half-fear, and started on a +run toward the dock. + +"If it's some tramp trying to find a place to sleep he'd better not go +aboard the ship, he might do some damage," the boy thought. + +He could hardly see the figure now as it had passed into the shadow +cast by the boat. He was about to summon the professor to make an +investigation, when Washington started going the search light which +was placed just over the door of the living cabin. It was kept there +as a sort of beacon light, as, near the island was a dangerous ledge +of rocks. + +Then, in the blinding white glare from the big lantern as Washington +accidentally swung it toward the Mermaid, Mark beheld a strange sight. + +The figure he had been watching stood out in bold relief. Though it +was shaped like a human being it was not like any person the boy had +ever seen. It seemed covered with a skin twice too large for it; a +skin, which, in spite of the clothes that concealed it, hung in folds +about the arms and legs, dropping pendent like from the neck like a +big garment, and flapping in the wind. + +For an instant Mark was so startled he cried out, and the professor +and the others ran to see what was the matter. + +"There--by the ship! A horrible creature!" exclaimed Mark. + +Shouting to Washington to keep the light steady in the direction of +the dock, Mr. Henderson ran toward the moored Mermaid. Jack, Andy, +Bill and Tom, with Mark in the rear followed him. + +"Nothing here," said the scientist, after a careful search about. "Are +you sure you saw something, Mark?" + +"Positively," replied the lad with a shudder. He described the vision +of the darkness. + +"I guess it was a big otter, or maybe an enormous turtle," the +professor said. + + + + +CHAPTER V + +ATTACKED BY A WHALE + + +BUT Mark was certain it was nothing like that, though a careful search +failed to reveal anything or any person near the ship. It was too dark +to examine for footprints, and even Mark, after taking a look all +about, felt he might have been deceived by shadows. Still he was a +little nervous, and could hardly sleep for imagining what the thing he +saw could have been. + +The next day every one was so busy that no one, not even Mark, +recalled the little excitement of the night before. Shortly after +noon, final preparations having been made, they all got aboard the +Mermaid and started off. + +It was a bright sunshiny day, and the craft, speeding away from the +island where it had been constructed, over the dancing blue waves, +must have presented a strange sight had there been any spectators. For +surely no such ship had ever before sailed those waters. + +However, there was no other vessel in sight, and the island, as far as +the professor and his friends knew, had never been inhabited. + +"We will not try for any great speed," Mr. Henderson remarked as he, +with Mark and Jack, stood in the conning tower managing the Mermaid. +"We don't want to strain any joints at the start or heat any engine +bearings. There will be time enough for speed later." + +"Yes, and we may need it more when we get into the centre of the earth +than we do now," observed Mark. + +"Why so?" asked Jack. + +"No telling what we may run up against underneath the ground," went on +Mark. "We may have to fight strange animals and stranger beings. +Besides, the atmosphere and water there can't be the same as up here; +do you think so, Professor?" + +For a few minutes the scientist was silent. He seemed to be thinking +deeply. + +"I will tell you what I believe," he said at length. "I have never +spoken of it before, but now that we are fairly started and may +eventually have a chance to prove my theory, I will say that I think +the centre of this earth on which we live is hollow. Inside of it, +forming a core, so to speak, I believe there is another earth, similar +to ours in some respects which revolves inside this larger sphere." + +They were well out to sea now, as they could observe when they emerged +on the little deck. Above their heads was the aluminum gas holder, +which served as a sort of protection from the sun that was quite warm. +The Mermaid rode with an easy motion, being submerged just enough to +make her steady, yet not deep enough to encounter much resistance from +the water. In fact it could not have been arranged better for speed or +comfort. + +"I think we will sail well to the eastward before making our course +south," Mr. Henderson said. "I do not care to meet too many ships, as +those aboard will be very curious and I do not want too much news of +this venture to get out. We will take an unfrequented route and avoid +delays by being hailed by every passing vessel whose captain will +wonder what queer craft he had met with." + +The boys enjoyed the sail, for the weather could not have been better. +Even old Andy, who seldom said much, seemed delighted with the +prospect of having strange adventures. He had his rifle with him, and, +indeed, he seldom went anywhere that he did not carry it. + +"For there's no telling when you may see something you want to shoot +or that ought to be shot," he used to say, "and it's always the man +without a gun who needs it most. So I'm taking no chances." + +They sailed all that afternoon without meeting with a craft of any +kind. Straight to the east they went, and when night began to settle +down Washington got supper. It was decided to run slowly after dark +until all hands were more familiar with the ship. + +Morning found the Mermaid about a hundred miles from the island where +she had been launched. The night had been uneventful, except that Mark +told Jack he heard some strange noise near his bunk several times. He +was nearest the storeroom where spare parts, and the curious cylinder +the professor had brought aboard, were kept. + +"I guess it was rats," said Jack. "They are always in ships." + +"Old wooden ships, yes," admitted Mark. "But I'll bet there's not a +rat aboard the Mermaid." + +"Then you were dreaming," said Jack, as if that settled it. + +Mark did not speak further of the noise, but he did considerable +thinking. However, the next night there was no further disturbance. + +The fourth day out, when everything had passed off well, the engines +doing their best, the professor decided to speed them up a bit, since +he was satisfied they had "found" themselves as mechanics term it. + +"We'll see how fast we can go through the water," said Mr. Henderson, +"and then I think we can safely turn our course south. We are well +beyond the ordinary lines of travel now." + +Having oiled the bearings well, and seen that everything was in place +and properly adjusted, the professor and the boys took their places in +the conning tower, while Washington, Tom and Bill remained in the +engine room. Andy stayed on deck with his gun. + +"I might see a big fish, and we could vary our bill of fare," he said +with a laugh. + +"Here we go!" exclaimed the professor as he shifted the levers and +turned some wheels and valves. "Now we'll see how fast we can travel." + +As he spoke the Mermaid responded to the added impulse of the +compressed air and shot through the water at a terrific speed. The +sudden increase in momentum almost threw the boys from their feet, and +they would have fallen had they not grasped some projecting levers. + +"I guess that will do," Said the scientist. "I think we have speed +enough for almost any emergency. I'll let her run at this rate for a +while, and then we'll slack up." + +Looking ahead, the boys could see the green waters parting in front of +the bow of the Mermaid, as if to make room for her. Two huge waves +were thrown upon either side. + +Suddenly, dead ahead, there loomed up a big black object. + +"Look out you'll hit the rock!" cried Mark to the professor, who was +steering. + +With a turn of his wrist Mr. Henderson moved the wheel which +controlled the tube. It was deflected and sent the boat to larboard. + +At that instant from the rock two small fountains of water rose in the +air, falling back in a shower of spray through which the sun gleamed. + +"That's not a rock! It's a big whale!" cried Jack. "And we're going to +hit him!" + +The professor had miscalculated the speed of the craft, or else had +not thrown her far enough to larboard, for, a second later, the +Mermaid was almost upon the big leviathan. + +With a desperate twirling of the steering wheel the professor veered +the craft as far as possible. But all he could do did not suffice, for +the craft hit the whale a glancing blow on the side, and the ship +careened as if she would turn turtle. + +At the same time there rang out from upon deck the sound of a rifle +shot. Old Andy had taken a chance at the enormous creature of the +deep. + +"Hurrah!" the bays heard him shout. "I give him one plumb in the eye! +A fine shot! And we hit him besides with the boat. I guess he's a +goner!" + +"I'm afraid not," muttered the professor. "That was a bad blow we +struck him, but I think it will only ruffle his temper. We'll have to +look sharp now, boys." + +By this time the ship had rushed past the whale, but the boys, looking +through a window in the rear of the tower could see the huge body. Now +the fountains of water which the whale spouted were tinged with red. + +"He's bleeding!" exclaimed the professor. "I guess Andy hit him in a +vital spot." + +"But not vital enough!" cried Mark. "See! He's coming after us!" + +And so it proved. The whale, angered, and, probably half crazed by the +pain of the bullet and the blow, was coursing after the ship, coming +on with the speed of an express train. Straight at the Mermaid he +lunged his huge bulk. + +"We must escape him!" cried Mr. Henderson. "If he hits us he'll send +us to the bottom!" + +He had made ready to slow up the Mermaid to see if it had sustained +any damage from the impact with the whale, but when he saw the monster +coming after the boat he knew the only safety lay in flight. + +"Let us go up into the air and so escape him!" cried Jack, with sudden +inspiration. + +For an instant neither Mark nor the professor grasped what Jack meant. +Then, with an exclamation, the professor pulled forward the lever that +generated the gas and set working the gravity neutralizer, which would +enable the ship to rise. + +Faster through the water went the Mermaid, and faster after her came +the whale. Above the hum of the engines was heard the hiss of the +powerful gas. The ship trembled more violently. + +"We are rising!" exclaimed the professor, as he looked at a gage. + +The boys could feel the craft lifting from the waves which clung to +her as if they hated to lose her. The boys knew the gas was beginning +to operate. + +"If it is not too late!" whispered Mark, half to himself. + +For the monster of the seas was coming on, lashing the water to foam +with his terrible flukes, and sending aloft a bloody spray. His speed +was awful. + +Now he was but ten feet away from the fleeing craft--now but eight--now +five! Ten seconds more and the big head, like the blunt stern of a +battle ship, forced forward by the tons of blubber, flesh, bone and +fat behind it would strike the Mermaid and crush it like an egg shell. + +Now if ever was the need for the Flying Mermaid to prove herself +worthy of the name. Now, if ever, was the time for her to leave the +watery element and take to the lighter one. + +And she did. With a last tremble, as if to free herself from the hold +of the waves, the gallant craft soared up into the air, leaving the +water, which dripped from her keel like a fountain's spray, and +shooting aloft like a bird, escaped her terrible enemy which passed +under her, so close that the lower part of the Flying Mermaid scraped +the whale's back. + +"Saved!" exclaimed the professor. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE CYCLONE + + +IT was only in the nick of time, for a second later and the big mammal +of the ocean would have struck the ship and split it from stem to +stern. + +Higher and higher into the air mounted the Flying Mermaid, while in +the water below, the whale, incensed by missing his prey, was lashing +the waves to foam. + +"Well, that was a narrow squeak; as close as I ever care to come to +it!" exclaimed Andy as he let go of the steel rail to which he was +clinging and entered the conning tower. "I had no idea of hitting the +big fish." + +"I guess he would have taken after us whether you had fired at him or +not," said Mr. Henderson. "He was probably looking for trouble, and +took the first thing that came in his way, which happened to be us. +Some whales are like that, so I have read; big bull creatures, exiled +from the school to which they once belonged, they get like mad +creatures and know neither friend nor foe. Something like rogue +elephants, I imagine." + +Now, having thus unexpectedly risen into the air, the professor +decided to continue travel in that style for a while at least. It +would require less force to propel the ship, and the going would be +more comfortable, since in the upper regions the Mermaid rode on an +even keel, while in the water there was more or less rolling, due to +the action of the waves. + +Once recovered from their fright caused by the whale, and having lost +sight of the enormous creature, for they were now far above the ocean, +the adventurers began to think of something to eat. + +Washington lost little time in preparing a meal, and it was eaten with +a relish. The electric cooking stove worked to perfection, for the +colored man had learned how to use that aboard the Porpoise and +Monarch, and could be depended on to turn out appetizing dishes. + +"What do you say to traveling through the air at night?" asked Mr. +Henderson, as he arose from the table. + +"Suits me," replied Mark. "There's less danger than in the water, I +think." + +Bill, Tom and Washington arranged to stand the night watch, and, when +the professor had examined the engines and given orders about keeping +the ship on her course through the air, he retired to his bunk. Jack +and Mark soon followed. + +It must have been about midnight when Mark was awakened by a movement +that seemed to come from the storeroom next to where his sleeping +place was located. At first he thought he had been dreaming, but, as +he found he was wide awake, he knew it was no imagination that had +affected him. + +"I certainly heard something," he said to himself. "It sounded just as +it did the other night. I wonder if I ought to investigate." + +He thought over the matter carefully as he sat upright in his bunk in +the darkness. True the noise might be a natural one, due to the +vibration of the engine, or to some echo from the machinery. As Mark +listened he heard it again. + +This time he realized it was the slow movement of some heavy body. He +felt a cold shiver run over him and his hair evinced an uncomfortable +tendency to stand upright. But he conquered his feelings and resolved +to keep cool and see if he could discover what had awakened him. + +He got up and moved softly about the little room that contained his +bunk. He could hear better now, and knew it was no echo or vibration +that had come to his ears. + +Once again he heard the strange sound. It was exactly the same as +before; as if some big creature was pulling itself over the floor. + +"Maybe it's a snake; a water snake!" thought Mark. "It may have +crawled aboard when we did not notice it." + +Then he remembered that the ship had not been open in any way that +would enable a serpent to come on it, since it had been started on its +ocean trip. Before that, he was sure no snake had entered the Flying +Mermaid. Still it sounded more like a snake than anything else. + +"I'm going to make a search," decided the boy. + +He took a small portable electric light, run by a storage battery, +and, slipping on a pair of shoes and a bath robe, he left his +stateroom. + +He had decided that the noise came from the storage compartment and so +made for that. The door he knew was not locked, since he had seen Mr. +Henderson go in late that afternoon, and the professor had used no +key. + +Moving softly, Mark left his room and soon found himself in a +corridor, on either side of which were located the sleeping quarters +of the others. He did not want to awaken them, and, perhaps, be +laughed at for his curiosity. + +To get to the storeroom Mark had to go first from the corridor into +the dining room. He soon reached the door that guarded what he thought +might be a strange secret. Trying the knob softly he found it giving +under his fingers. + +"I wonder if I had better go in," he thought. "Perhaps, after all, it +was only rats, as Jack said." + +But, even as he listened he again heard the odd sound coming from the +room. This determined him. He would solve the mystery if possible. + +Cautiously he turned the knob. The door was slowly swinging open when +Mark was startled by a noise from behind him. He turned suddenly to +see Professor Henderson confronting him. + +"What is it, Mark? Is the ship on fire? What's the matter? Is any one +hurt?" + +"I was just going in this room to----" began Mark. + +"Don't do it! Don't do it!" exclaimed the professor in an excited +whisper. "No one must go in that room. I forgot to tell you and Jack +about it. No one must enter. It contains a secret!" + +"I heard a strange noise and----" Mark began again. + +"It could make no noise! It would be impossible for it to make a +noise!" the professor exclaimed. + +"I heard something," the boy insisted. + +"You were dreaming!" said the professor. "Now go back to bed, Mark, +and don't let this happen again. Remember, no one must enter that room +unless I give permission!" + +Somewhat crestfallen at the outcome of his investigations, but +realizing that the professor could do what he wanted to aboard his own +ship, Mark went back to bed. But he could not sleep. All the rest of +the night he was wondering whether Mr. Henderson had some strange +creature hidden aboard the Mermaid. He feared lest the old scientist's +mind might be affected and, in his wildness he had made some infernal +machine that would, in time, blow the whole ship apart. + +But tired nature asserted itself at last, and, weary with vain +imaginings, Mark fell into a slumber. The next morning he awoke with a +start from a dream that he was being devoured by an immense water +snake. + +He said nothing to the others about his night's adventure, for, as it +transpired, no one else had been awakened by his investigations. The +professor did not refer to his conversation with Mark. + +"There's something queer going on aboard the ship this trip," said +Mark to himself. "But I guess it's none of my business. Professor +Henderson seems to know what he is doing and I guess I can trust him." + +He resolved to think no more of the strange noises and movements, and, +for several nights thereafter he was not disturbed by them. + +The weather, which, up to this time had been fair, took a sudden turn +for the worse about the fourth day after Mark's little night +expedition. One evening the sun sank in a mass of dull lead-colored +clouds and a sharp wind sprang up. + +"We're going to have a storm," said Mr. Henderson. "It's liable to be +a bad one, too, from the way the barometer is falling." + +He looked at the glass, and scanned the various instruments that told +how high up the Mermaid was and how fast she was traveling. + +"We're pretty high up in the air," he said, "and scooting along at +about fifty miles an hour. We are going against the wind, too, but +fortunately it is not blowing hard." + +At that moment there sounded from without a peculiar howling sound, as +if a siren whistle was being blown. + +"'Pears like there's goin' t' be a tumultuous demonstration of +sub-maxiliary contortions in th' empherial regions contiguous t' th' +upper atmosphere!" exclaimed Washington, entering from the engine room +into the conning tower. + +"What's the trouble?" asked Mr. Henderson. + +"Terrible big black cloud chasin' us from behind!" exclaimed the +colored man. + +Noting the alarm in Washington's voice the professor glanced from the +rear window. What he saw caused him to exclaim: + +"It's a cyclone! We must drop down to avoid it!" + +He sprang to a lever controlling the gas and yanked it toward him. +There was a shrill hissing sound, and a second later the Mermaid began +to sink. The boys watching the gages on the wall of the tower, saw +that the craft was falling rapidly. + +But, with a rush and roar, the terrible wind was upon them. It caught +the craft in its fearful grip and heeled it over as a ship careens to +the ocean blast. + +"It's a storm in the upper regions! We'll find it calm below!" cried +the professor above the howling of the gale. He opened the gas outlet +wider and the ship fell more rapidly. + +"Are you sure we're over the ocean?" asked Mark. + +"Positive!" the professor called back. "We have been traveling +straight south over the Atlantic for the last week. We will land in +the midst of the waters and float safely." + +Lower and lower went the Mermaid. The wind was now blowing with the +force of a tornado, and, as the craft had to slant in order to +descend, it felt the power of the gale more than if it had scudded +before it. But, by skilful use of the directing tube, the professor +was able to keep the boat from turning over. As they came further down +toward the earth the force of the wind was felt less and less, until, +as they came within two hundred feet of the water which they saw below +them in the gathering dusk, it died out altogether. + +"Now we are free from it," said the professor as the Mermaid came down +on the waves like an immense swan. + +"Are you going ahead or going to stop here?" asked Mark + +"We'll keep right on," Mr. Henderson answered. "No telling when the +storm may strike down here. We'll go as far as we can to-night." + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +A QUEER SAIL + + +NOW that the fear and worriment was over they all began to feel +hungry, and, while Mark and Jack took charge of the conning tower +Washington got breakfast. The professor seemed preoccupied during the +meal, and several times, when Mark spoke to him, he did not reply. + +"I wonder if he is worried about something, or is thinking of +something which seems to be concealed in the storeroom," the boy +thought. + +But, after a while, the professor seemed to be more like himself. He +was busy over several maps and charts, and then announced the ship +would try air-sailing again for a while. + +"We can make better time above than we can on the water," he said, +"and I am anxious to get to the mysterious island and learn what is in +store for us." + +Perhaps if the professor had been able to look ahead, and see what was +soon going to happen, he would not have been so anxious for it to +occur. + +It was shortly after dinner when, the gas container having been +filled, the ship rose in the air, and began sailing over the ocean, +about a mile up. The day was a fine one, and, as they were moving +south, it was constantly growing warmer. Down on the water, in fact, +it was quite hot, but in the air it was just right. + +Like some immense bird the Mermaid went flying through the air. The +boys and the professor sat upon the deck in easy chairs. It was like +being on the top of some tall "sky-scraper" building which, by some +strange power, was being moved forward. Below them the ocean tumbled +in long, lazy swells. + +Suddenly Mark, who was looking through a telescope at the expanse of +water stretched out under them, gave a cry. + +"There's a ship! She's on fire!" + +"Where?" asked the professor, stretching out his hand for the glass. + +"Just to the port of the forward tube. See the smoke!" exclaimed Mark. + +Mr. Henderson looked. Through the lens he saw a column of black vapor +rising skyward. Mingled with it were red flames. + +"Lower the Mermaid!" he cried. "We must save those on board if we +can!" + +Mark ran to the conning tower, where Washington was, to give the +order. The colored man, who was looking ahead, intent on guiding the +ship, did not at first hear what Mark called. + +"Lower us! Send the Mermaid down!" Mark cried again. + +The sudden shout, and the excited voice of Mark so startled +Washington, that, fearing some accident had happened, he pulled the +lever, controlling the gas supply, with more force than necessary. + +There was a loud explosion, followed by a crackling sound, a flash of +light, and the Mermaid came to a sudden stop. + +"What's the matter?" cried Mark, feeling that something was wrong. + +"I don't know!" Washington replied, as he dashed toward the engine +room. + +The Mermaid, her forward flight checked, hung in the air, suspended, +neither rising or falling. + +"Why don't we go on down?" the professor asked, hurrying to the tower. + +"There has been an explosion--an accident!" exclaimed Mark. "I guess +we can't go down!" + +"But we must!" Mr. Henderson insisted, seizing the lever which should +have produced a downward motion. The handle swung to and fro. It was +disconnected from the apparatus it operated. + +The ship was now stationary in the air, moving neither forward nor +backward, neither rising nor falling. Washington had stopped the air +pumps as soon as he learned something was wrong. + +When Mr. Henderson saw the useless lever, which had controlled the +outlet of gas from the holder, he ran out on deck. One glance told him +what had happened. One of the electric wires had become +short-circuited,--that is, the insulation had worn off and allowed +the current to escape. This had produced a spark, which had exploded +the gas which was in the pipe leading from the generator up into the +aluminum holder. Fortunately there was an automatic cut-off for the +supply of vapor, or the whole tank would have gone up. + +As it was, only a small quantity had blown up, but this was enough to +break the machinery at the point where the lever in the conning tower +joined the pipe. If it had not been for the automatic cut-off all the +gas in the holder would have poured out in a great volume, and the +ship would have fallen like a shot. + +"Can we do nothing to save those on the burning vessel?" asked Mark, +pointing to where a cloud of smoke hung over the ocean. + +"I fear not, now," answered the professor. "We are in a bad plight +ourselves." + +"Are we in any danger?" asked Jack. + +"Not specially," Mr. Henderson replied. "But we must find a means of +lowering ourselves gradually." + +"Then it will be too late to save any of those on the ship," observed +Mark. + +"I'm afraid so," the scientist made reply. + +The Mermaid rested some distance above the surface of the waters. She +moved slightly to and fro with the wind, and rocked gently. The +professor was examining the broken machinery. + +"I have a plan!" suddenly cried Mark. + +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson. + +"Can't we bore a hole in the tank, insert a small faucet or tap, and +let the gas out that way gradually?" asked the boy. "When we get down +we can rescue those in danger of fire, and, later, can repair the +break." + +"The very thing!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "I never thought of that! +Here, Washington! Bring me a drill, and a small stop-cock!" + +The drill was obtained from the engine room. Working rapidly Mr. +Henderson bored a hole in the lower part of the holder. As soon as the +metal was penetrated the gas, which was under considerable pressure, +rushed from the tank with a hissing sound. At once the Mermaid began +to settle rapidly. + +But the professor was prepared for this. He thrust the end of the +stop-cock into the hole. It was screwed fast and the valve turned. +This stopped the flow of gas and checked the descent of the ship. +Then, by opening the tap the vapor was allowed to escape gradually, +bringing the Flying Mermaid gently to the water. + +As the adventurers approached they could see that the vessel was now a +mass of flames. The wind was driving the fire toward the forecastle, +and the crew had sought refuge aft. But this expedient could not last +long, for, already the tongues of fire were licking the sides of the +craft and coming nearer and nearer the seemingly doomed men. The +vessel was a large one, and heavily laden. + +As those in peril caught sight of the Mermaid settling down into the +water, apparently from the clouds, their fears gave place to +astonishment. So great was this that they ceased their cries of +terror. Then, as they saw that the strange craft navigated the ocean, +for the engines were started aboard the Mermaid, they began to call +for help. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +THE FLYING MERMAID DISABLED + + +"WE'LL save you!" shouted Mr. Henderson, who was on the deck, while +Mark was steering the craft. "Hold on a few minutes longer and we'll +be alongside!" + +"They're real! They're real!" some of those aboard the burning ship +could be heard to shout. Evidently more than one of them had taken the +Mermaid for a delusion of their fear-crazed brain. + +"They are real persons!" they called again and again. "They are coming +to save us!" + +Mr. Henderson ran his ship as near the burning craft as he dared. Then +he called to the crew to leap into the water and swim to him. He, with +Washington, Jack, Bill and Tom, stood ready to haul aboard any who +were too weak to help themselves. + +In a few minutes all of those left alive on the sailing vessel--fourteen +in all--had come safely aboard the Mermaid. The ship was now +completely enveloped in flames. + +"Are there any more left on her?" asked Mr. Henderson of one who +appeared to be a mate of the burning craft. + +"Not a soul!" was the answer. "The captain and ten men perished in the +flames. The fire broke out a week ago in the lower hold. We fought it +as well as we could but it got the best of us. Then it suddenly broke +through the decks, almost like an explosion, a little while ago, and +the captain and others were lost, and so were our small boats. We +managed to get aft but were about to give up when you appeared." + +"What ship is it and where are you from?" + +"The Good Hope, laden with logwood, hides, jute and other materials +from South America," the mate answered. "We were bound for New York." + +"It is more like the Last Hope instead of the Good Hope," observed Mr. +Henderson in a quiet voice, as he saw the flames mount higher and +higher over the ship. A few seconds later the craft seemed rent by an +internal explosion. It appeared to break in two parts, and, amid a +shower of sparks and a cloud of black smoke, the vessel sank under the +water and was seen no more. + +The rescued men turned to behold the final end of their ship. They +betrayed no particular emotion, and some of them even laughed, which +the professor thought, at the time, was rather strange. But there was +little opportunity for speculation. The men were in a sad plight. Few +of them had more than the clothes they stood in, though each one wore +about his waist a belt, and all of them seemed to guard the leather +circlets jealously. + +The professor and his crew were soon busy supplying remedies for +burns, since several of the men were seared by the flames. Then, as it +was learned they had eaten nothing for many hours, it having been +impossible to use the galley, a meal was prepared and the survivors of +the wreck were well fed. + +The hunger of the newcomers having been appeased, they showed much +curiosity over the strange craft that had so opportunely come to their +rescue. Most of the sailors were ignorant men, and the professor had +little fear of them learning anything concerning his secrets. He +explained briefly about the Mermaid, but said nothing of whither she +was bound. + +The addition of fourteen men to the rather small accommodations of the +Mermaid was a serious matter to consider. The ship was able to hold +them all, and even to sail through the air with them, since Mr. +Henderson had provided an excess of power. But it was going to be a +problem to feed so many, and still save enough provisions, for the +long voyage which lay ahead. + +However, Mr. Henderson felt his first duty to be toward his fellowmen, +even if his voyage must be delayed, or given up for a time, while he +got more provisions. There would be no sleeping quarters for the +sailors, but when this was explained to them they cheerfully said they +would sleep on deck if necessary. In fact some of them had to, but as +the weather was warm and clear this was no hardship. A few found +quarters in the engine room and other apartments of the Mermaid. + +Finding, after an examination, that his ship was in good order save +for the broken gas apparatus, Mr. Henderson gave orders to proceed +along the surface of the ocean. The sailors wanted to see how it felt +to mount into the air, but Mr. Henderson, refused to attempt a flight +until he had made complete repairs, and this would take a day or more. + +At this there appeared to be some discontent among the survivors, and +they muttered to each other as they stood in a group on deck. But the +professor and his assistants were too busy with their preparations for +fixing the break to notice this. + +While the men were gathered in a knot near the after part of the small +deck, the mate separated from them, and, coming close to where Mark +was standing, unscrewing some of the broken parts of the pipe said, in +a low voice. + +"Tell the captain to watch out." + +"What do you mean?" asked Mark quickly. + +"Hush! Not so loud!" the mate exclaimed. "If the men hear me talking +to you, or see me, they may kill me. Tell the captain to look out; +that's all. Be on guard, and watch the engine room carefully." + +"But why--?" Mark began, when, turning suddenly, the mate left him. +It was well he did so, for, at that instant, one of the sailors, who +had observed the two conversing, strolled in their direction. + +Much alarmed, Mark sought Mr. Henderson and told him what he had +heard. + +"I suppose the fire may have turned the poor man's head," the +scientist said. "I wonder if he thinks the men I rescued would mutiny +and take possession of my ship? If they did they would not know how to +work it, so what good would it do?" + +"Hadn't we better look out?" asked Mark. + +"I'm not afraid," replied the professor. "I will be too busy the next +few days, repairing the break, to think of anything else. Besides, +what would they want to harm us for? Didn't we save their lives?" + +Seeing the scientist placed no faith in what the mate had said, Mark +went back to his task. + +It soon became too dark to work, and it was decided, after supper, to +halt the ship until morning as it would be less risky. + +Mark did not sleep well, his dreams being disturbed by visions of +pirates and black flags. But morning came and nothing had developed. +The men seemed to recover their spirits with daybreak, and mast of the +crew, after breakfast, greeted Mr. Henderson pleasantly, and asked to +be allowed to help fix the ship. + +It took the skilled labor of the professor, Washington and the boys to +mend the break, and, even at that, it was four days in the repairing. +But at last the final bolt was in place, and the Mermaid was able to +resume her trips through the air. + +"We will rise the first thing in the morning," said the professor to +Mark and Jack that night. "I am anxious to see how the ship behaves +with a big load aboard." + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +THE MUTINY + + +MARK was awakened that night by feeling some one trying to turn him +over. At first he thought it was Jack, and sleepily muttered that he +wanted to be let alone. + +"Sorry I can't oblige ye, my hearty!" exclaimed a rough voice in his +ear, "but I got particular orders t' tie you up!" + +At that Mark tried to sit up, but he found he could not. He discovered +that he was closely bound with many turns of a rope, while in front of +his bunk stood one of the rescued sailors. + +"There," said the man, with a final tightening of the ropes. "I guess +you're safe." + +"What's the matter? What does it all mean?" asked Mark, much +bewildered. + +"It means that we have possession of the ship," the sailor answered, +"and, if you're wise you'll not make a fuss. It wouldn't do any good, +anyhow, as all your friends are in the same condition." + +Then, picking Mark up, as if he was a baby, the man slung him over his +shoulder and carried him to the living room. There Mark saw Jack, the +professor, Washington, and the others similarly bound. + +"Do you realize what you are doing?" asked the professor angrily of +his captors. "You are mutinying, and are liable to severe punishment." + +"If they ever get us," added one of the men. "We've got the ship now, +and we mean to keep her. You'll have to run her or show us how." + +"Never!" cried the professor. + +"I guess he will when he feels this," said one of the men, as he +dragged from a recess two wires. "I happen to know something of +electricity, and when he feels these perhaps he'll change his mind. +I'll start the dynamo." + +The sailor showed that he was acquainted with machinery, for soon the +hum of the electric apparatus was heard. + +"Now to make him tell!" the man with the wires exclaimed, advancing +toward the professor, who turned pale. + +"Stop! You must not torture the old man!" cried a voice, and the mate +of the Good Hope stepped in front of the sailor with the electrified +wires. + +"Who's going to stop me?" asked the man. + +"I will. It's not necessary," the mate went on quickly. "If we make +him weak we may kill him, and he can not tell us what we want to know. +One of the boys can tell us how to run the ship." + +The mate came quickly over to where Mark lay, and whispered: + +"Consent to tell. It is the only way of saving his life. Tell 'em how +to raise the craft. Then leave all to me. I will save you all and the +ship, too, if I can. But consent." + +Mark nodded his head, and the mate cried: + +"I knew I could fetch 'em. I have hypnotic power. This boy will raise +the ship for us. Loosen his bonds, some of you." + +Satisfied that they were now on the way to experiencing a new +sensation, the sailors took the ropes off Mark's arms and legs, and he +was allowed to rise. With a reassuring nod toward the professor he led +the way to the engine room, followed by half the men. He resolved to +start the gas machine slowly, so as to make the upward trip last +longer, thinking before it had gone far, some way of escape from the +mutineers might be found. + +While a crowd of the sailors stood near him, Mark operated the +machinery in the engine room that started the gas generating, and set +the negative gravity apparatus working. + +"You'd better not try any tricks on us," said one of the men in an +ugly tone of voice. + +"I'm not going to," replied Mark. "If you go out on deck you will soon +see the ship leaving the water and mounting into the air." + +"Some of you go," ordered a man with a big bushy red beard. "See if +the ship rises. When she begins to go up sing out. I'm going to stay +here and see how the young cub does it so I can work it myself." + +Obeying the red-bearded man, who seemed to be a leader, several of the +sailors went out on the deck. It was quite dark, but there was a +phosphorous glow to the water which made the rolling waves visible. + +The gas was being generated, as could be told by the hissing sound. +Mark watched the machinery anxiously, for he knew much depended on +him, and the professor was not at hand to guide and instruct him. He +watched the dial of the gage which registered the gas pressure and saw +it slowly moving. In a little while it would be at the point at which +the ship ought to rise. + +Presently a quiver seemed to run through the Mermaid. Now a shout came +from the watchers on deck. + +"She's going up!" + +The ship was indeed rising. The red-bearded man, who was addressed as +Tony, ran from the engine room to the deck. He saw that the ship was +now ten feet above the water. Back he came to where Mark stood by the +gas machine. + +"Lucky for you that you didn't fool us, lad," he said with a leer. +"See that you mind me hereafter. Now show me how the shebang works." + +When the ship had risen as far as Tony desired he made Mark send it +straight ahead. The boy adjusted the air tube to carry the craft +toward the south, but Tony, seeing by a compass in which direction +they were headed, ordered Mark to steer due east. + +"Fix things so they will stay so, too," added Tony. "I don't want to +stop until I get a thousand miles away. Then we'll come down, sail to +some sunny island, and enjoy life." + +Mark locked the steering apparatus so as to keep the Mermaid headed +due east. + +"Now you can go back to your friends," Tony said. "When I want you +I'll send for you." + +With a heavy heart Mark rejoined the professor and others. He found +them with their bonds removed. But to guard against their escape +several men were on watch outside the door. + +"What are they doing?" asked the professor eagerly as Mark entered, +and the boy told him what had taken place. + +"They will ruin my ship and spoil the whole trip," cried the old +scientist. "Oh, why did I ever go to the rescue of the scoundrels?" + +"Never mind," said Jack. "Perhaps we may yet outwit them." + +Morning came at last. The ship was still shooting forward at fast +speed, in an easterly direction. The sailors had learned, in their +short stay aboard, where the food and stores were kept, and they lost +little time in getting breakfast. They sent same in to their captives, +including a big pot of hot coffee, and, after partaking of this the +professor and his friends felt better. + +The mate of the Good Hope came in to help clear away the dishes. As he +passed Mark he slipped into the boy's hand a note. + +"Don't read it until you are alone," he said in a low voice, as he +hurried from the room. + +As soon as the other sailors had left, Mark glanced at the slip of +paper. It bore these words: + + "Open when you hear three raps, then two, then three, and keep + silent." + +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson. + +Mark showed him the paper. + +"I wonder what it means," the boy said. + +"Do you think he is a friend of ours?" the professor asked. + +Mark told him of the mate's conversation the night previous. + +"I think we can trust him," the scientist went on. "He must intend to +pay us a visit when the others are asleep. When we hear the knocks as +he specifies we must open the door and let him in." + +All that day the captives were kept in the living room. Once or twice +Mark was sent for to make some adjustment to the machinery, but the +apparatus, for the most part, was automatic, and needed little +attention. The professor, as well as the others, were all impatience +for the promised visit of the mate. Still they felt he would not come +until night. + +In fact it was long past midnight before Mark, Jack and the professor, +who were anxiously listening, heard the three raps, then two, then +three more. Mark quickly opened the door, and the mate stepped inside, +holding his finger to his lips as a sign of caution. Old Andy, +Washington, Bill and Tom had fallen asleep. + +"I have only time for a few words," the mate said. "I am closely +watched. Tony mistrusts me. I will save you if I can." + +"Why have they repaid my kindness with such actions?" asked Mr. +Henderson. + +"Because they are desperate men," replied the mate. "They are nothing +more than pirates. They mutinied on the other ship, killed the captain +and those of the crew who would not join them, and started off to seek +their fortunes. I pretended to join them to save my life, but I have +only been watching for a chance to escape. + +"Because of lax discipline the ship was sent on fire. We tried to put +it out but could not. The rest you know." + +"I heard them plan to capture this airship, but could do nothing to +stop them. Then I resolved to pretend to act with them. They fear +pursuit for their other mutiny, and are anxious to get as far away as +possible." + +"Do you think they will abandon the ship in a little while?" asked the +professor hopefully. + +"I'm afraid not," answered the mate. "I think they want to get rid of +all of you, so they can sail about as they please. Tony is a smart +man. He could soon learn to run this ship, he thinks." + +"I doubt it," Mr. Henderson answered. "But how are you going to help +us?" + +"I have not fully made up my plans," the mate answered. "However I +wanted you to know I would do my best to save you. Now I must go. Be +on the watch and when I can I will let you know what I have decided +on. I will hand Mark a note when I bring your meals, just as I did +to-day. I think----" + +"Hark! What was that?" asked the professor. + +There was a noise outside the door, as if some one was listening. + +"Put out the lights!" whispered the mate, and Jack switched off the +electric incandescents. + +A knock sounded on the door and the voice of Tony called: + +"Mark! Come here! I want you to look at the gas machine. It has +stopped working, and we are falling!" + + + + +CHAPTER X + +FOOLING THEIR ENEMIES + + +MARK hurried into the corridor, taking care to close the door after +him, so Tony could get no glimpse of the mate who had risked so much +to save his friends. But he need not have been alarmed for the leader +of the mutineers was too excited over the stopping of the gas +apparatus to give any heed to who was in with the captives. + +"Do you think you can fix it?" he asked the boy. + +"I guess so," Mark replied confidently. "If I can't there is no +danger, for we will fall gradually and land in the water." + +"But I don't want to do that," Tony objected. "I want to keep on +through the air." + +Mark did not reply. By this time he was at the gas machine. He soon +saw nothing was the matter save that new material must be placed in +the retort where the vapor was generated. He refilled it, the gas was +manufactured once more, and the ship began to rise. + +"I will know how to do it next time," Tony said with a grin. Mark +realized that every time he showed the leader of the mutineers +something about the ship it was putting the professor and his friends +more and more into the power of the scoundrels. But there was no help +for it. + +The ship was still plunging ahead, and kept about a mile above the +earth. As there was no further need of Mark, he was told he could go +back to his friends. When he reached the room where they were held +prisoners, he found the mate had gone away, promising again to do all +he could for them. + +The next night, which it seemed would never come, for the day, locked +as the captives were in their room, seemed endless, finally closed in. +Mark, Jack and the professor were anxious to know whether the mate +would pay them another visit. As for Andy, Tom and Bill, while they +were interested in the ship, and wanted to be free from the power of +the mutineers, they did not lose any sleep over it. + +Shortly after midnight, there came again the peculiar knock, and the +mate entered the room. He seemed much excited over something, and, as +soon as the portal was securely closed he said to Professor Henderson: + +"Is there an island any where near here where men could live for a +time?" + +"What do you mean?" asked the scientist. "Do you want us to desert the +ship and leave these scoundrels in charge?" + +"Nothing of the sort," replied the mate, who, had said his name was +Jack Rodgers. "But first answer my question. A great deal may depend +on it." + +Seeing Rodgers was in earnest, the professor looked over some maps and +charts, and announced that they were within a few hundred miles of a +group of islands. + +"When would we reach them?" was Rodgers's next question. + +Mr. Henderson made a few rapid calculations on a piece of paper. + +"At the present rate of sailing," he said, "we should be there about +ten o'clock to-morrow. That is, provided the ship does not slacken +speed or increase it." + +"There is no danger of either of those two things happening," said the +mate. "Tony is too afraid of the machinery to do anything to it. So +you may safely figure that our speed will continue the same." + +"Then I can guarantee, with all reasonable certainty," the professor +said, "that about ten o'clock to-morrow we will be less than a mile +from the islands. They are a group where friendly natives live, and +where many tropical fruits abound. One could scarcely select a better +place to be shipwrecked. But I hope the plans of Tony and his friends +do not include landing us there." + +"No, nothing like that," the mate answered. "Quite the contrary. But I +had better be going. I will try and see Mark some time to-morrow. Tony +does not mind when I speak to him." + +With this Rodgers left the captives, as he heard some of the sailors +moving about and did not want to be discovered. The professor and the +boys wondered what the mate's plan might be, but they had to be +content to wait and see. + +The night passed without incident. About nine o'clock the next morning +the mate came to the door of the room where the professor and his +friends were prisoners. He made no secret of his approach, but knocked +boldly. + +"Tell Mark I want to see him," he said, as the professor answered. +"All of you keep quiet," he added in a whisper. "There may be good +news soon." + +Mark slipped from the room. He followed the mate to the upper deck +which, at that time was deserted as all the sailors were in the dining +room eating, which practice they indulged in as often as they could. + +"I have a plan to get rid of these rough men," the mate said to Mark. +"It may work, and, again it may not. At any rate it is worth trying, +It all depends on you with what help I can give you." + +"I'm willing to do my share," Mark said, and for the next ten minutes +the boy and the mate were in earnest conversation. + +It was about thirty-five minutes later when there arose a sudden +commotion in the ship. Mark had returned to his friends and the mate +had disappeared. The confusion seemed to come from the engine room +where Tony had posted some of his men. + +"We're falling down! We'll all be killed!" shouted the men. "The ship +is falling into the sea!" + +"What is the trouble?" asked the professor as he heard the commotion. + +"It is part of the mate's plan," said Mark. "He told me to tell you to +do nothing. If Tony or any of the other men come to you just refer +them to me." + +Two minutes later Tony came rushing into the apartment where the +captives were held prisoners. + +"Here! Come quickly, Mark!" he exclaimed. "Something has gone wrong +with the gas machine again, and you must come and fix it before we are +all dashed to pieces!" + +With every appearance of haste Mark rushed from the apartment, +following Tony. The latter led the way to the engine room. + +"Can anything be done?" he asked. + +Mark took a survey of the machinery. + +"It is too late," he said as though much excited. "The ship is falling +down toward the sea with terrific force." + +It needed but a glance at the height gage to show this. The pointer +was revolving rapidly about the face of the dial. + +"Will the ship stand the blow?" asked Tony. + +"Not at the rate it is falling," replied Mark. "She will go all to +pieces when she strikes the water, and she may explode!" + +"What are we to do then?" asked the leader of the mutineers. + +"We must save ourselves!" cried the mate, running in at this juncture. +"Let our prisoners shift for themselves as best they can. Let's all +leap into the sea. There we at least have a chance for our lives. But +if we stay on this ship we will all be drowned like cats in a bag." + +"What do you propose?" asked Tony, his face white with fear. + +"When the ship comes near enough the surface of the water to make it +safe we should all drop overboard!" the mate exclaimed. "We are near +some islands, I understand, and we can thus save our lives by swimming +ashore." + +This plan seemed to meet with instant favor, and a little later there +was a rush for the deck, as each one wished to be the first to escape +from the boat they believed to be doomed. + +Lower and lower fell the Mermaid. She was like a wounded bird which +the shot of the hunter has crippled. Down and down she fluttered. + +By this time all the sailors, save the mate were on deck. He and Mark +remained in the engine room. + +"Don't let her get too low," the mate whispered. + +"I'll watch out," Mark replied. "I want to give them a good scare +while I'm at it." + +The ship was now within fifty feet of the water. There was a cry of +terror from the sailors. Some of them leaped over the rail and started +to swim ashore, as the ship was by this time close to a group of +islands. + +Suddenly, from the engine room the mate rushed. + +"Jump! Jump for your lives!" he exclaimed. "The ship is about to blow +up!" + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +MYSTERIOUS HAPPENINGS + + +THE voice of the mate echoed through the Mermaid. Those on deck heard +it, as did Tony in the engine room, where he was vainly trying to +understand the complicated machinery. + +An instant later there sounded from beneath the ship a series of +splashes. More sailors were leaping from the deck of the craft to the +ocean. The distance was not great, particularly as they all landed in +water. + +"Quick!" cried the mate to a group of sailors that hesitated before +taking the jump. "The ship may blow up any minute now." + +The men needed no second urging. As soon as they struck the water they +began to swim ashore, as it was not far away. One after another they +jumped over the rail. Tony was the last to go. He urged the captives +to follow him, but they all refused. + +A minute later the only one of the pirate crew left on the ship was +the mate. The others were all struggling in the sea. Eventually they +all reached shore in safety. + +The airship was now within about twenty feet of the water. It was +still falling but not so rapidly. + +"Better send her up, now," said the mate to Mark, and the boy turned +the necessary levers to accomplish this. + +Dipping into the water as a sea gull does when searching for food on +the wing, for she had come quite low, the Mermaid mounted once more +into the air, and was soon sailing along over the heads of Tony and +his gang. + +"What's it all about?" asked Mr. Henderson, who seemed in a sort of +stupor. "I thought the ship was broken. How, then, can it rise?" + +"It was only a trick of mine," Rodgers said. "The gas machine is not +broken. I had Mark fix it so that only a little vapor would be +generated. When the supply in the holder was not enough, and no more +was being made, the ship had to sink. Mark and I pretended it was +worse than it really was just to scare the scoundrels." + +"And you evidently succeeded," observed Mr. Henderson. "They have all +left us. I am glad you stayed." + +"So am I," said Rodgers. "I was just waiting for a chance to escape +from that crowd. This was the plan I thought of that night. I wanted +to see the men put on some island where they could manage to live, and +which was not too far away." + +The Mermaid was now mounting upward rapidly, as Mark had adjusted the +machinery properly. The craft was well rid of the pirate crew, and was +able to proceed on its way, and enable Mr. Henderson to carry out his +plans. + +When the Mermaid had reached a certain height her prow was turned the +other way, and she was sent back racing over the ground she had just +covered. But now the ship was in the hands of friends. Fortunately no +great damage had been done by the sailors, and the professor was soon +able to get things in ship-shape. The engines had not been molested +and were working better than ever. + +"Now to make another attempt to reach the big hole in the earth," the +professor cried. "We will be careful next time, who we rescue from +ships at sea." + +The island was soon left behind, becoming a mere speck on the ocean. +Those aboard the Mermaid knew no harm could befall the sailors, as +there were no savage tribes on the little spot of land. Eventually the +sailors were picked up by a passing vessel and taken to their homes. +The story of their first mutiny leaked out and they were properly +punished. + +It required several days travel before the airship regained the +distance she had lost because of the plans of the pirates. Also, there +were a number of minor repairs to make, and the professor and his +friends were kept busy. + +"How much longer before we come to the big hole?" asked Jack, one day. + +"I think we ought to be near it in about two weeks," the professor +replied. "I only hope we shall not be disappointed, and will be able +to explore it." + +"'Tain't goin' t' be no fun t' be decimated an' expurgitated inter a +conglomerous aggregation of elements constituting th' exterior portion +of human anatomy," said Washington in dubious tones. + +"You mean you're afraid of being boiled in the steam from the big +hole?" asked Mark. + +"Jest so," replied the colored man. + +"You don't need to worry about that," put in the professor. "I will +not take the ship down if there is any danger, though of course there +will be some risk." + +The ship, having been fully repaired, was now able to be speeded up, +and was sent scudding along toward her destination. Rodgers proved a +valuable acquisition toward the crew, for he had sailed many years in +the waters over which they were flying, and was able to give the +professor many valuable hints. He had heard vague stories of the +island with the big hole, but had never been near it. He did not make +the trip however, as, at his request, he was put off at an inhabited +island one night. + +It was about a week after the sailors were frightened from the ship, +that a curious experience befell Mark. Washington was on duty in the +conning tower, attending to the apparatus as the ship flew through the +air, and all the others had gone to bed. Mark had remained up, later +than the others as he was interested in reading a book on science. + +About ten o'clock he became hungry, and going to the pantry got some +bread and cold meat. He set these on a table, and then, remembering he +would need some water to drink, started after some in the cooler, +which was in a little room near the tower. + +Washington heard the boy as he turned the faucet to draw the liquid, +and spoke to him, as the colored man was rather lonesome at his post. +Mark did not linger more than a minute or two, but when he returned to +where he had left the food he was much surprised. + +There was not a trace of it to be seen. The dishes were on the table, +but every vestige of bread and meat had disappeared. + +"I wonder if a cat or dog has been here," was Mark's first thought. +Then he remembered that no such animals were aboard the Mermaid. + +Something on the floor caught his eye. He stooped and picked it up. It +was a slice of bread, but in such shape that the boy stared at it, +puzzled as to how it could have become so. + +It was flattened out quite thin, but the strangest part of it was that +it bore what seemed to be the marks of thumb and fingers from a very +large hand. So big, in fact, was the print, that Mark's hand scarce +covered half of it, and, where the bread had been squeezed into a +putty like mass (for it was quite fresh) the peculiar markings on the +skin of the tips of the fingers were visible. + +"It looks as if a giant grabbed this slice of bread," Mark observed. +"There are strange happenings aboard this ship. I wish I knew what +they meant." + +He looked all around for the food, thinking perhaps a rat had dragged +it off, but there was no trace of it. + +Suddenly the boy thought he heard a sound from the big storeroom. He +was almost sure he heard something moving in there. He started toward +the door when he was stopped by hearing the professor's voice call: + +"Don't open that door, Mark. Have I not told you that place must not +be entered?" + +"I thought I heard some one in there," Mark replied. + +"There is nothing in there but some apparatus of mine," Mr. Henderson +said. "I want no one to see it. What is the matter?" + +Mark explained matters to the scientist, who had, as he said later, +arisen on hearing the boy, moving about. + +"Oh, it was a rat that took your stuff," Mr. Henderson said. "I guess +there are some pretty big ones on the ship. Get some more food and go +to sleep." + +Mark felt it best to obey, though he was by no means satisfied with +the professor's explanation. He listened intently to see if any more +noises came from the storeroom, but none did, and he went to bed. + +Several times after that Mark tried the experiment of leaving food +about. On each occasion it was taken. + +"It looks as if the ship was haunted," he said. "Of course I know it +isn't, but it's very queer. They must be strange rats that can get +food from shelves when there is only the smooth side of the ship to +climb up," for on some occasions Mark had tried the experiment of +putting the food as nearly out of reach as possible. + +It took several nights to learn all this, and, as he did not want to +take any one into his confidence, he had to work in secret. But, with +all his efforts he learned nothing, save that there was something odd +about the ship that he could not fathom. + +At first he believed the professor had some strange animal concealed +in the storeroom, but he dismissed this idea almost as soon as he +thought of it. For what could the scientist want with an animal when +they were going to the interior of the earth? That some beast had +slipped aboard was out of the question. Mark was much puzzled, but +finally, deciding the matter did not concern him a great deal, gave up +trying to solve the mystery, at least for a time. + +The ship was now in the neighborhood of the equator and the climate +had become much warmer. So hot indeed were some nights that they slept +out on deck, with the Mermaid flying through the air at a moderate +pace, for it was deemed best not to go at any great speed after dark. + +One night the professor, after consulting various charts and maps, and +making calculations which covered several sheets of paper announced: + +"We should sight the mysterious island to-morrow." + +"That's good news!" exclaimed Jack. "I'm anxious to see what's below +inside of that big hole." + +"Everybody git ready for their funerals!" exclaimed Washington in a +deep voice. "I ain't got many----" + +"Cheer up," interrupted Jack, poking Washington in the ribs. The +colored man was very ticklish, and he began to laugh heartily, though, +perhaps, he did not feel like it. + +Suddenly, above the sound of his shouts, there came a crashing, +grinding noise from the engine room. + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE BIG HOLE + + +"SOMETHING has gone wrong!" exclaimed the professor as he jumped up. +He reached the engine room ahead of any one else, and when the two +boys got there they found him busy twisting wheels and shifting +levers. + +"Anything serious?" asked Jack. + +"It's the gas machine again," Mr. Henderson replied. "It broke where +we fixed it. However it doesn't matter. I was going to lower the ship +anyhow, as I want to approach the island from the water. We will go +down a little sooner than I counted on." + +The disabling of the gas machine caused the vapor to escape slowly +from the tank, and this made the ship sink gradually. By means of the +emergency stop-cock the descent could be controlled almost as well as +though the machinery was in working order. Half an hour later the +Mermaid rested on the water. + +It was a little rough, as there was quite a swell on, and not so +pleasant as floating in the air on an even keel, but they made the +best of it. + +On account of the little accident, and not being certain of its +extent, it was deemed best not to send the ship ahead. So they laid to +until morning. + +For the better part of two days all those on board the Mermaid had +their hands full mending the break and making other repairs found +necessary. In that time they lay to, floating idly with the currents, +or blown by the wind, for the professor would not start any of the +engines or apparatus until the ship was in good condition. + +In this time Mark had several times recalled the curious happenings in +regard to the disappearing food, and the mystery of the storeroom. But +there were no further manifestations, and no other signs that there +might be a strange visitor aboard. + +"I couldn't have imagined it all," said Mark, "but I guess what did +happen may have been caused by natural means, only I can't discover +them." + +It was about two days after this, the ship having sailed scores of +miles on the surface of the water, that Mark, who was in the conning +tower exclaimed: + +"That looks like a waterspout ahead of us." + +"That's what it is!" Jack agreed. "What shall we do?" + +"Call the professor!" said Mark. "He'll know." + +When Mr. Henderson came, he looked for a long time at a cloud of black +vapor which hung low in the east. + +"It may be a waterspout," he said. "We'll rise in the air and see if +we can avoid it." + +The ship was sent up into the air. As it rose higher and higher, the +professor, making frequent observations from his conning tower, cried +out: + +"That is no waterspout!" + +"What is it?" asked Mark. + +"It is the steam and vapor rising from the big hole in the earth! +Boys, we are almost there!" + +"Are you sure that's it?" asked Mark. + +"Almost positive," Mr. Henderson replied. "You can see how much warmer +it has become of late, as we approached the equator. We are almost due +at the island, and I have no doubt we have reached it." + +As the ship flew forward the mass of dark vapor became more +pronounced. Through the glasses it could be noticed to consist of +rolling masses of clouds. What lay beneath them no one knew. The +adventurers were going to try to find out. + +Now that they had arrived at the beginning of the main part of their +journey, the travelers felt their spirits sink a little. It was one +thing to plan to go down into the depths of the earth, but it was +quite another to make the actual attempt. Still, they were not going +to give up the project. The professor had confidence in his ship and +believed it could safely make the trip. Still it was with no little +apprehension that Mr. Henderson watched the nearer approach of the +craft to that strange island. + +"Perfesser, are yo' really an' truly goin' t' depress this elongated +spheroid an' its human consignment int' that conglomerous convoluted +mass of gaseous vapor regardless of th' consequences?" asked +Washington, as he gazed with wide opened eyes at the sight before him. + +"If you mean am I going to let the Mermaid go down into that hole you +are perfectly correct," the scientist answered, "though you could have +said it in fewer words, Washington." + +"I--I guess I'll get out an' walk," the colored man made reply. + +"This isn't any trolley car," observed Mark. "Don't lose your nerve, +Wash. Stay with us, and we'll discover a gold or diamond mine, maybe." + +"Is there diamonds down there?" asked the colored man, his fright +seeming to leave him. + +"There are all sorts of things inside the earth," the professor +answered. + +"Then I'm goin' along!" Washington declared. "I always did want a +diamond ring, an' I knows a little colored gal that wants one, too. +I'm goin' all right! This suttenly am th' most kloslosterous +conjunctivity of combativeness that I ever sagaciated!" and he began +to do a sort of impromptu cake-walk. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +DOWN INTO THE EARTH + + +IT was now noon, but the adventurers did not think of dinner in the +excitement of approaching the mysterious island. The speed of the ship +was increased that they might the more quickly come to it. As they +approached they could see the masses of vapor more plainly, and it +appeared that some great commotion must be going on inside the big +hole, since clouds of steam arose. + +"I only hope it doesn't prove too hot for us," observed the professor. +"However, I provided a water jacket for the ship, and we may need it, +as well as the vacuum chambers to keep the heat from us." + +It was about three o'clock when the flying ship reached the edge of +the island. From there it was about a mile to the rim of the big hole, +over one side of which the waters of the ocean poured with a roar that +could be heard over half a mile off. + +"I think we had better halt and see that everything is in good shape +before proceeding," said Mr. Henderson. "Jack, you and Mark make a +thorough inspection of the engine room, and see that all the apparatus +is in working order." + +The two boys prepared to do as they were told. Mark, who was walking a +little ahead of Jack, entered the apartment from which the storeroom +opened. As he did so he saw, or thought he saw, the door of the place +where the extra supplies were kept, close. Without saying anything to +Jack he hurried forward, and tried the knob. It would not turn. + +"That's funny," said Mark to himself. "I could almost swear I saw some +one go into that room. Yet I know the professor did not enter, for I +just left him. And none of the others would dare to. I wonder if I +will ever solve the mystery." + +But he had too much to do to allow him to dwell on that matter. +Several of the dynamos needed adjusting and for two hours he and Jack +had all they could do. + +In the meanwhile the professor had gone over the other parts of the +ship, and gotten everything in readiness for the descent. The Mermaid +was lowered to within a few hundred feet of the sea, and, through a +hose that was let down, the compartments, provided for this emergency +were filled with water. These compartments were between the outer and +inner hulls of the lower part of the craft, and were designed to +prevent the interior becoming heated in case the travelers found they +had to pass close to fire. There were also vacuum chambers, and from +these the air was exhausted, as of course every schoolboy knows a +vacuum is a non-conductor of either heat or cold. + +"Now I think we are ready," the professor announced at length. + +"Everything's all right in the engine room," announced Jack. + +"Yes, an' everything's all right in th' kitchen," put in Washington. +"I've got a good meal ready as soon as any one wants to eat." + +"It will have to wait a while," Mr. Henderson remarked. "We are going +to start to make the descent before we dine." + +The hose was reeled up, and the ship was sent a few hundred feet +higher into the air, as Mr. Henderson wanted to take a last good +observation before he went down into the hole. + +But having risen some distance above the masses of rolling vapors he +found he was at no advantage, since the strongest telescope he could +bring to bear could not pierce the cloud masses. + +"We'll just have to trust to luck," the scientist said. "I judge we're +about over the centre of the opening. Lower away Mark!" + +The boy, who, under the watchful eye of the professor, was +manipulating the levers and wheels in the conning tower, shifted some +handles. The gas was expelled from the holder, the negative gravity +apparatus ceased to work, and the Flying Mermaid sank lower and lower, +toward the mysterious hole that yawned beneath her. + +The hearts of all beat strangely, if not with fear, at least with +apprehension, for they did not know what they might encounter. Perhaps +death in some terrible form awaited them. But the desire to discover +something new and strange had gripped all of them, and not one would +have voted to turn back. + +Even old Andy, who seldom got excited, was in unusual spirits. He took +down his gun and remarked: + +"Maybe I can kill some new kind of animal, and write a book about its +habits, for surely we will see strange beasts in the under-world." + +Lower and lower sank the ship. Now it was amid the first thin masses +of vapors, those that floated highest and were more like a light fog, +than anything else. By means of a window in the bottom of the craft, +which window was closed by a thick piece of plate glass, Professor +Henderson could look down and see what was beneath them. + +"The clouds seem to be getting thicker," he said, as he peered through +the small casement. "If they would only clear away we could see +something." + +But instead of doing this the vapors accumulated more thickly about +the ship. It was so dark inside the Mermaid now that the electric +lights had to be switched on. In the room with the floor-window the +lights were not used, as had they shone one could not have seen down +below. + +The professor maintained his position. The descent was a perilous one, +and he wanted to be on the watch to check it at once if the Mermaid +was liable to dash upon some pointed rock or fall into some fiery pit. +His hand was on the signal levers. + +Suddenly he looked up and glanced at a gage on the wall. The hand of +it was slowly revolving. + +"We are at the earth's surface," the scientist said. "Now we are below +it. Now we are fairly within the big hole! Boys, we may be on the +verge of a great discovery!" + +An instant later it seemed as if a hot wave had struck the Mermaid, or +as if the craft had been plunged into boiling water. + +"It's going to be hot!" cried the professor. "Lucky I provided the +water jackets!" + +Then the lights in the interior of the ship went out, leaving the +whole craft in darkness. + +"What has happened?" cried Mark. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +MANY MILES BELOW + + +"DON'T be alarmed," spoke the calm voice of the professor. "I have +only turned off the electrics. I want to switch on the search lights, +to see if we can learn anything about our position." + +As he spoke he turned a switch, and, the gloom below the ship, as the +boys could see by glimpses from the floor-window, was pierced by a +dazzling glare. In the bottom of the Mermaid were set a number of +powerful electric arc lights with reflectors, constructed to throw the +beams downward. The professor had built them in for just this +emergency, as he thought that at some time they might want to +illuminate what was below the craft. + +Not that it was of much avail on this occasion, for, though the lights +were powerful, they could not pierce the miles of gloom that lay below +them. The beams only served to accentuate the darkness. + +"I guess we'll have to trust to luck," the professor said, after a +vain attempt, by means of powerful glasses, to distinguish something. +"There is too much fog and vapor." + +"What makes it so warm?" asked Mark, removing his coat. + +"Well, you must remember you are approaching the interior of the +earth," the professor answered. "It has been calculated that the heat +increases one degree for every fifty-five feet you descend. We have +come down several hundred feet and of course it is getting warmer." + +"Then if we go down very far it will get so hot we will not be able to +stand it," Jack put in. + +"I do not believe we will suffer any great inconvenience," Mr. +Henderson went on. "I believe that after we pass a certain point it +will become cooler. I think the inner fires of the earth are more or +less heated gas in a sort of inner chamber between two shells. If we +can pass the second shell, we will be all right." + +"But aren't we liable to hit something, going down into the dark this +way?" asked Mark. + +"We will guard ourselves as far as possible," the scientist answered. + +The Mermaid seemed to be going down on a side of the immense shaft a +good way distant from the strange waterfall. When they had first +dropped into the hole the travelers could hear the rush of waters, but +now the noise was not audible. + +"I think the hole must widen out the farther down we go," the +professor said. "We are probably many miles from the fall now." + +"I'm sure I hope so," put in Jack. "It would be no fun to have to take +a shower bath in this place." + +After a meal, the boys and the professor took some more observations, +but with all their efforts nothing could be seen below the ship but a +vast black void, into which they were steadily descending. + +"I wonder when we're going to stop," asked Mark. "It's like playing +the game 'Going to Jerusalem,' you keep wondering when the music will +cease and you will have a chance to grab a chair. I only hope we have +a chair or something else to sit on, in case we go to smash." + +"We're not liable to have any accidents with the professor in charge," +Jack answered. "Didn't he bring us safe out of some pretty tight holes +when we went to the north pole in the airship, and again when we found +the south pole in the submarine?" + +"Yes, but this is different," objected Mark. + +"Well, I'm not worrying," Jack went on. "It doesn't do any good, and +only makes you lie awake nights. By the way, I wonder what time it is +getting to be." + +He looked at his watch and found it was close on to eight o'clock in +the evening. So late had dinner been served, and so varied were the +happenings of the last few hours, that time had passed quickly. + +"Why it's almost bed-time," said Jack. "I wonder if we are to go on +dropping into the depths of nowhere all night." + +At that moment the professor entered the room where the boys were. He +seemed quite pleased over something, and was smiling. + +"Everything is going along famously," he said. "I have just tested the +air and find it is rich in oxygen. We shall suffer nothing on that +score. The heat too, seems to have decreased. On the whole, everything +favors us." + +"Are we going on down?" asked Mark. + +"As far as we can," Mr. Henderson answered. "Let me see how far we are +below now." + +He went to the gage that indicated the vertical position of the ship. +Because of the changed conditions, the craft now sinking below the +surface of the earth instead of rising above it, as was its wont, some +calculations were necessary. These the scientist made as quickly as he +could. + +"We are now ten miles underground!" he exclaimed. "That is doing very +well. My theories are working out. I think we shall land somewhere +before long." + +"I hopes so!" exclaimed Washington coming in at this point. "I'm +mighty skeered shootin' down int' this dark hole, and no time-table t' +show when we's due t' arrive." + +"We ought to land in a couple of days more," the professor answered. +"Never mind about worrying Washington, I'll take care of you." + +"I hopes so, Perfesser," the colored man said. "I got a little girl +waitin' for me back in Georgia, an' I'd like t' see her 'fore I git +burned up." + +Accompanied by the professor, the boys made a tour of the ship to see +that all the machinery and apparatus were in working order. Owing to +the changed conditions the negative gravity engine had to be worked at +faster speed than usual, since the downward pull of the earth was +greater the farther they descended into the interior and they did not +want to fall too swiftly. But this was easily provided for, since the +professor had made the apparatus capable of standing a great strain. + +The ten miles had become fourteen when the professor, finding that +everything was in good shape, proposed that the boys go to bed. They, +did not want to, though they were sleepy, and they feared to miss some +strange sights. + +But when the professor had promised to call them in case anything +unusual developed, they consented to turn in, and Bill and Tom assumed +their duties, which were light enough, now that the ship was merely +falling into the immense shaft. + +When Mark turned into his bunk he could not go to sleep at once. It +may have been the excitement over their new position, or because he +had eaten too hearty a supper, but the fact was he remained awake for +some time. + +While thus tossing restlessly on his bed, wondering what ailed him, he +thought he heard a noise in the main apartment out of which the +storeroom opened. He crawled softly from his bed, and looked from his +stateroom door. + +In the light of a shaded electric Mark saw the figure of some one +glide across the floor and take refuge in the room, which Professor +Henderson always was so particular about. + +"I wonder what or who that was," reasoned Mark. "There is some mystery +in this. Can the professor have concealed some one on this ship whose +presence he does not want to admit? It certainly looks so." + +Not wanting to awaken the ship's crew, and remembering what Mr. +Henderson had said about any one entering the storeroom, Mark went +back to bed, to fall into an uneasy slumber. + +"Breakfast!" called Washington breaking in on a fine dream Jack was +having about being captain of a company of automobile soldiers. "Last +call for breakfast!" + +"Hello! Is it morning?" asked Jack. + +"Not so's you could notice it," Washington went on. "It's as dark as a +stack of black cats and another one throwed in. But breakfast is ready +jest the same." + +The boys were soon at the table, and learned that nothing of +importance had occurred during the night. The Mermaid had been kept +going slowly down, and about seven o'clock registered more than fifty +miles below the earth's surface. + +Still there was no change in the outward surroundings. It remained as +black as the interior of Egypt when that country was at its darkest. +The powerful electrics could not pierce the gloom. The ship was +working well, and the travelers were very comfortable. + +Down, down, down, went the Mermaid. The temperature, which had risen +to about ninety went back to sixty-nine, and there seemed to be no +more danger from the inner fires. + +They were now a hundred miles under the surface. But still the +professor kept the Mermaid sinking. Every now and again he would take +an observation, but only found the impenetrable darkness surrounded +them. + +"We must arrive somewhere, soon," he muttered. + +It was about six o'clock that night that the alarm bell set up a +sudden ringing. The professor who was making some calculations on a +piece of paper jumped to his feet, and so did a number of the others. + +"We are nearing the bottom!" he cried. "The bell has given us +warning!" + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +IN THE STRANGE DRAUGHT + + +THE boys ran to attend to the engines and apparatus to which they had +been assigned in view of this emergency. The professor, Washington, +Bill, Tom and Andy, who had kept to themselves since the descent, came +running out of the small cabin where they usually sat, and wanted to +know what it was all about. + +"We may hit something, in spite of all precautions," Mr. Henderson +remarked. "Slow down the ship." + +The Mermaid was, accordingly checked in her downward flight, by a +liberal use of the gas and the negative gravity machine. + +The bell continued to ring, and the dials pointed to the mark that +indicated the ship was more than one hundred and fifty miles down. + +Mark, who had run to the engine room to check the descent, came back. + +"Why didn't you slow her down?" asked the professor. + +"I did," replied the boy. "The negative gravity and the gas machines +are working at full speed." + +"Then why are we still descending?" asked the scientist. "For a while +our speed was checked, but now we are falling faster than before." + +"I attended to the apparatus," Mark insisted. + +Just then, from without the ship, came a terrible roaring sound, as +though there was a great cyclone in progress. At the same time, those +aboard the craft could feel themselves being pulled downward with +terrific force. + +"We are caught in a draught!" Mr. Henderson cried. "We are being +sucked down into the depths of the earth!" + +He ran to the engine room. With the help of the boys he set in motion +an auxiliary gravity machine, designed to exert a most powerful +influence against the downward pull of the earth. As they watched the +great wheels spin around, and heard the hum and whirr of the dynamos, +the boys watched the pointer which indicated how low they were +getting. + +And, as they watched, they saw that the needle of the dial kept +moving, moving, moving. + +"Our efforts are useless! We can't stop!" the professor cried. + +Grave indeed was the plight of the adventurers. In their ship they +were being sucked down into unknown regions and all their efforts did +not avail to save them. It was an emergency they could not guard +against, and which could not have been foreseen. + +"What are to do?" asked Mark. + +"We can only wait," Mr. Henderson replied. "The terrible suction may +cease, or it may carry us to some place of safety. Let us hope for the +best." + +Seeing there was no further use in running the engines in an effort to +check the downward rush the machines were stopped. Then they waited +for whatever might happen. + +Now that they seemed in imminent peril Washington was as cool as any +one. He went about putting his kitchen in order and getting ready for +the next meal as if they were sailing comfortably along on the surface +of the ocean. As for old Andy he was nervous and frightened, and +plainly showed it. With his gun in readiness he paced back and forth +as if on the lookout for strange beasts or birds. + +Bill and Tom were so alarmed that they were of little use in doing +anything, and they were not disturbed in their staterooms where they +went when it became known that the ship was unmanageable. + +The boys and the professor, while greatly frightened at the unexpected +turn of events, decided there was no use in giving way to foolish +alarm. They realized they could do nothing but await developments. + +At the same time they took every precaution. They piled all the +bedding on the floor of the living room, so that the pillows and +mattresses might form a sort of pad in case the ship was dashed down +on the bottom of the big hole. + +"Not that it would save us much," Jack observed with a grim smile, +"but somehow it sort of makes your mind easier." + +All this while the ship was being sucked down at a swift pace. The +pointer of the gage, indicating the depth, kept moving around and soon +they were several hundreds of miles below the surface of the earth. + +The professor tried, by means of several instruments, to discover in +which direction they were headed, and whether they were going straight +down or at an angle. But some strange influence seemed to affect the +gages and other pieces of apparatus, for the pointers and hands would +swing in all directions, at one time indicating that they were going +down, and, again, upward. + +"There must be a strong current of electricity here," Mr. Henderson +said, "or else there is, as many suspect, a powerful magnet at the +center of the earth, which we are nearing." + +"What will you do if the ship is pulled apart, or falls and is +smashed?" asked Mark with much anxiety. + +"You take a cheerful view of things," said Jack. + +"Well, it's a good thing to prepare for emergencies," Mark added. + +"If the ship was to be separated by the magnetic pull, or if it fell +on sharp rocks and was split in twain, I am afraid none of us could do +anything to save ourselves," the professor answered. "Still, if we +were given a little warning of the disaster, I have means at hand +whereby we might escape with our lives. But it would be a perilous way +of----" + +"I reckon yo' all better come out an' have supper," broke in +Washington. "Leastways we'll call it supper, though I don't rightly +know whether it's night or mornin'. Anyhow I've got a meal ready." + +"I don't suppose any of us feel much like eating," observed Mr. +Henderson, "but there is no telling when we will have the chance +again, so, perhaps, we had better take advantage of it." + +For a while they ate in silence, finding that they had better +appetites than they at first thought. Old Andy in particular did full +justice to the food Washington had prepared. + +"I always found it a good plan to eat as much and as often as you +can," the hunter remarked. "This is a mighty uncertain world." + +"You started to tell us a little while ago, Professor," said Mark, +"about a plan you had for saving out lives if worst came to worst, and +there was a chance to put it into operation. What is it?" + +"I will tell you," the aged inventor said. "It is something about +which I have kept silent, as I did not want to frighten any of you. It +was my latest invention, and I had only perfected it when we started +off on this voyage. Consequently I had no chance to try it. The +machine works in theory, but whether it does in practice is another +question. That is why I say there is a risk. But we may have to take +this risk. I have placed aboard this ship a----" + +The professor was interrupted in what he was about to say by a curious +tremor that made the whole ship shiver as though it had struck some +obstruction. Yet there was no sudden jolt or jar such as would have +been occasioned by that. + +At the same time Washington, who was out in the kitchen, came running +into the dining room, crying: + +"We're droppin' into a ragin' fire, Perfesser!" + +"What do you mean?" asked Mr. Henderson. + +"I jest took a look down through th' hole in th' bottom of the ship!" +cried Washington. "It's all flames an' smoke below us!" + +"I wonder if it is the end," the professor muttered in a low voice. + +Followed by the boys, the inventor hastened to the floor-window. The +lights were turned off to enable a better view to be had of what was +below them. + +Leaning over the glass protected aperture the boys and the professor +saw, far, far down, a bright light shining. It was as if they were +miles above a whole town of blast furnaces, the stacks of which were +belching forth flames and smoke. The rolling clouds of vapor were +illuminated by a peculiar greenish light, which, at times, turned to +red, blue, purple and yellowish hues. + +The effect was weird and beautiful though it was full of terror for +the travelers. It seemed as if they were falling into some terrible +pit of fire, for the reflection of what they feared were flames, could +plainly be seen. + +"I wish I'd never come on this terrible voyage!" wailed Washington. +"I'd rather freeze to death than be burned up." + +"Washington, be quiet!" commanded the professor sternly. "This is no +time for foolishness. We must work hard to save our lives, for we are +in dire peril. + +"Mark, you and Washington, with Jack, start the engines. Turn on every +bit of power you can. Fill the gas holder as full as it will hold, and +use extra heavy pressure. I will see if I can not work the negative +gravity apparatus to better advantage than we did before. We must +escape if possible!" + +The boys, as was also Washington, were only too glad to have something +to do to take their mind off their troubles. All three were much +frightened, but Mark and Jack tried not to show it. As for Washington +he was almost crying. + +Soon the whirr and hum of the machinery in the Mermaid was heard. The +craft, which was rushing in some direction, either downward, ahead or +backwards within the unknown depths, shivered from the speed of the +dynamos and other apparatus. Soon the boys could hear the professor +starting the negative gravity engine, and then began a struggle +between the forces of nature and those of mankind. + +Once more the adventurers anxiously watched the gages and indicators. +For a while the ship seemed to be holding out against the terrible +influence that was sucking her down. She appeared to hesitate. Then, +as the downward force triumphed over the mechanical energy in the +craft, she began to settle again, and soon was descending, if that was +the direction, as fast as before. + +"It is of no use," said the professor with a groan. "I must try our +last resort!" + +He started from the engine room where Mark and Jack had gone. As he +did so, he glanced at a thermometer hanging on the wall near the door. + +"Has any one turned on the heat?" he asked. + +"It's shut off," replied Mark, looking at the electric stove. + +"Then what makes it so hot?" asked the scientist. + +He pointed to the little silvery column in the tiny tube of the +instrument. It registered close to one hundred degrees, though a few +minutes before it had been but sixty. And the starting of the +machinery could not account for the rise in temperature, since most of +the apparatus was run by electricity and developed little heat save in +the immediate proximity. The thermometer was fully ten feet away from +any machine. + +"It's the fiery furnace that's doing it!" cried Washington. "We're +falling into th' terrible pit an' we're goin' t' be roasted alive!" + +"It certainly is getting warmer," observed Mark, as he took off his +coat. Soon he had to shed his vest, and Jack and the professor +followed his example. The others too, also found all superfluous +garments a burden, and, in a little while they were going about in +scanty attire. + +Still the heat increased, until it was almost torture to remain in the +engine room. Nor was it much cooler elsewhere. In vain did the +professor set a score of big electric fans to whirring. He even placed +cakes of ice, from the small ice machine that was carried, in front of +the revolving blades, to cool off the air. But the ice was melted +almost as soon as it was taken from the apparatus. + +"Them flames is gittin' worser!" Washington cried a little later. +"We's comin' nearer!" + +From the bottom window the professor and the boys looked down. True +enough the curious, changing, vari-colored lights seemed brighter. +They could almost see the tongues of flame shooting upward in +anticipation of what they were soon to devour. + +The heat was increasing every minute. The sides of the ship were hot. +The heads of the travelers were getting dizzy. They could hardly talk +or move about. + +"I must save our lives! I must trust to the----" The professor, who +was muttering to himself started toward the storeroom. As in a dream +Mark watched him. He remembered afterward that he had speculated on +what might be the outcome of the mystery the professor threw about the +place. "I will have to use it," he heard the scientist say softly. + +Just as Mr. Henderson was about to open the door there came a fiercer +blast of heat than any that had preceded. At the same instant the +conditions in the Mermaid became so fearful that each of the travelers +felt himself fainting away. + +"Go to--storeroom--get cylinder--get in----" the professor +murmured, and then he fell forward in a faint. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +THE NEW LAND + + +"WHAT is it? Tell us!" exclaimed Jack, almost in his last breath, for, +a few seconds later he too toppled over senseless. Then Washington +went down, while Andy, Bill and Tom succumbed to the terrible heat. + +Mark felt his head swimming. His eyes were almost bulging from their +sockets. He dimly remembered trying to force himself to go to the +storeroom and see what was there. He started toward it with that +intention, but fell half way to it. + +As he did so he saw something which impressed itself on his mind, half +unconscious as he was. + +The door of the storeroom suddenly opened, and from it came a giant +shape, that seemed to expand until it filled the whole of the +apartment where the stricken ones lay. It was like the form of some +monster, half human, half beast. Mark shuddered, and then, closing his +eyes, he felt himself sinking down into some terrible deep and black +pit. A second later the whole ship was jarred as though it had hit +something. + +How long he and the others remained unconscious Mark did not know. He +was the first to revive, and his first sensation was one as though he +had slept hard and long, and did not want to get up. He felt very +comfortable, although he was lying flat on the floor, with his head +jammed against the side of a locker. It was so dark that he could not +distinguish his hand held close to his face. + +"I wonder if I'm dead, and if all the others are dead too," he thought +to himself. "What has happened? Let's see, the last I remember was +some horrible shape rushing from the storeroom. I wonder what it could +have been? Surely that was not the secret the professor referred to." + +Mark shuddered as he recalled the monster that seemed to have grown +more terrible as each second passed. Then the boy raised himself up +from his prostrate position. + +"Well, at any rate, some one has turned off the heat," he murmured. +"It's very comfortable in here now. I wish I could strike a light." + +He listened intently, to learn if any of the others were moving about. +He could hear them breathing, but so faintly as to indicate they were +insensible. Mark stretched out his hand and felt that some one was +lying close to him, but who of the adventurers it was he could not +determine. + +"If only the dynamo was working we could have light," he said. "But it +seems to have stopped," and, indeed there was a lacking of the +familiar purr and hum of the electrical machine. In fact none of the +apparatus in the ship was working. + +"The storage battery!" exclaimed Mark. "That would give light for a +while, if I can only find the switch in the dark." + +He began crawling about on his hands and knees. It was so intensely +black that he ran into many things and received severe bruises. At +last he came to a doorway, and as he did so his hand came in contact +with an easy chair. It was the only one aboard, and by that he knew he +had passed into the sitting room. He had his general direction now, +and knew if he kept straight on he would come to the engine room. +There he was familiar enough with the apparatus and levers to be able +to turn the electric switch. + +Crawling slowly and cautiously, he reached the room where all the +engines were. Then he had to feel around the sides to locate the +switch. At length he found it. There was a click, a little flash of +greenish fire, and the copper conductors came together, and the ship +was flooded with the glow from the incandescents. + +Mark hurried back to where the others were lying. They were still +unconscious, but an uneasy, movement on the part of Jack told that he +was coming out of the stupor. Mark got some ammonia and held it +beneath his comrade's nose. The strong fumes completed the work that +nature had started and Jack opened his eyes. + +"Where am I? What has happened? Are any of them dead?" he asked +quickly. + +"I hope no one is dead," Mark replied. "As to the other question, I +can't answer. I don't know whether we are a thousand miles +underground, or floating on the ocean, though I'm more inclined to the +former theory. But never mind that now. Help me to bring the others +back to their senses. I'll work on the professor and you can begin on +Bill or Tom. Washington seems to be all right," for at that moment the +colored man opened his eyes, stared about him and then got up. + +"I thought I was dead for suah!" he exclaimed. + +"Some of the others may be if we don't hurry," said Mark. "Get to +work, Wash!" + +With the colored man to help them the two boys, by the use of the +ammonia, succeeded in reviving Bill, Tom and old Andy. But the +professor, probably on account of his advanced age, did not respond so +readily to the treatment. The boys were getting quite alarmed, as even +some of the diluted ammonia, forced between his lips, did not cause +him to open his eyes, or increase his heart action. + +"If he should die, and leave us all alone with the ship in this +terrible place, what would we do?" asked Jack. + +"He's not going to die!" exclaimed Mark. "Here I have another plan. +Washington bring that medical electrical battery from the engine +room." This was a small machine the professor had brought along for +experimental purposes. + +Quickly adjusting it, Mark placed the handles in the nerveless fingers +of Mr. Henderson. Then he started the current. In about a minute the +eyelids of the aged inventor began to quiver, and, in less than five +minutes he had been revived sufficiently to enable him to sit up. He +passed his hand across his forehead. + +"What has happened?" he asked in a faint voice. + +"I don't know; none of us knows," Mark answered. "We all lost our +senses when it got so hot, and there seemed to be some peculiar vapor +in the air. The last I remember was seeing some horrible shape rush +from the storeroom, soon after the ship struck. Then I fainted away. +When I woke up I managed to turn the lights on, and then I came back +here." + +"I wonder where we are," the old man murmured. "I must find out. We +must take every precaution. Washington, go and look at the gage +indicating our depth." + +The colored man was gone but a few seconds. When he returned his eyes +were bulging in terror. + +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson, who, thanks to the battery, had +almost completely recovered. + +"It ain't possible!" gasped Washington. "I'll never believe it!" + +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson, while the others waited in anxiety +for the answer. + +"We're five hundred miles down!" declared Washington. + +"Five hundred miles!" muttered the inventor. "It does not seem +possible, but it must be so. We fell very rapidly and the terrible +draught sucked us down with incredible rapidity. But come, we must see +what our situation is, and where we are. We are stationary, and are +evidently on some solid substance." + +They all felt much recovered now, and, as the terrible fright of being +consumed in a fiery furnace had passed, they all were in better +spirits. + +At the suggestion of the professor, the boys and Washington made a +tour of the ship. They found, for some unaccountable reason, that +nearly all the engines and apparatuses were out of gear. In some the +parts had broken, and others were merely stopped, from the failure of +some other machine, on which they were dependent. + +"I'm afraid this is the end of the Mermaid," said Mark, in a sorrowful +tone. + +"Nonsense!" replied Jack, who was of a more cheerful nature. "Things +are not so bad as they look. The professor can fix everything." + +"I'm sure I hope so," Mark went on, not much encouraged, however, by +Jack's philosophy. "It would be no joke to have to stay five hundred +miles underground the rest of our lives." + +"You don't know," retorted Jack. "Don't judge of a country you've +never seen. This may be as fine a place as it is on the surface of the +earth. I want a chance to see it," and Jack began to whistle a +cheerful tune. + +They completed the tour of the ship, and found, that, aside from the +damage to the machinery, the Mermaid had not sustained any harm. The +hull was in good order, though of course they could not tell about the +gas holder. It was not possible to see this except by going into the +conning tower or out on the small deck, and this they did not venture +to do. The connections between the holder and the main ship seemed to +be all right, and there was still a small quantity of gas in the big +tank, as Mark found on opening a stop-cock. + +They went back to the professor and told him what they had observed. +He seemed somewhat alarmed, the more so as the experience he had just +passed through had weakened him considerably. + +"I hope I shall be able to make the repairs," he said. "It is our only +hope." + +As he spoke he looked up at the electric lights that shone overhead +from wall brackets. + +"Who is shutting down the power?" he asked. + +"There is no power on, Professor," replied Mark. "I am running the +lights from the storage battery. But something is the matter, for they +are growing dim." + +The filaments were now mere dull red wires, and the ship was being +shrouded in gloom again. + +"The battery is failing!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "We shall be left +in darkness, and there is no other way to produce light. I ought to +have brought some lamps or candles along in case of emergency." + +The next instant the Mermaid became as black as Egypt is popularly +supposed to be, and something like an exclamation of terror came from +the professor. + +For several minutes they all sat there in the blackness and gloom, +waiting for they knew not what. Then, suddenly, there sounded +throughout the ship, a creaking as of metal sliding along metal. Some +big lever creaked, and, a second later the whole place was flooded +with light. + +"What has happened?" cried the professor, starting to his feet in +alarm. + +"We are going to be burned up!" exclaimed old Andy. + +"It's all right! It's all right!" yelled Washington from the engine +room where the boys had left him. "Don't git skeered! I done it! I +opened the port holes, by yanking on the lever. Golly, but we's +arrived at the new land! Look out, everybody!" + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +A STRANGE COUNTRY + + +THEY all ran to the port holes, which were openings in the side of the +ship. They were fitted with thick, double glass, and covered on the +outside with steel shutters. These shutters were worked by a single +lever from the engine room, so that one person could open or close +them in a second or two. Washington, by accident, it appeared later, +had slid back the protecting pieces of steel, and the rest followed. + +As the adventurers looked from the glass ports they saw that the light +which had flooded the ship came from without. They were in the midst +of a beautiful glow, which seemed to be diffused about them like rays +from a sun. + +Only, in place of being a yellow or white light, such as the sun gives +off at varying times, the glow was of violet hue. And, as they +watched, they saw the light change color, becoming a beautiful red, +then blue, and again green. + +"Well, this is certainly remarkable!" the professor said. "I wonder +what causes that." + +"We've arrived! We're here, anyhow!" Washington cried, coming into the +room. "See the country!" + +Then, for the first time, the travelers, taking their attention from +the curious light that was all around them, saw that they had indeed +arrived. They were on a vast plain, one, seemingly, boundless in +extent, though off to the left there was a range of lofty mountains, +while to the right there was the glimmer of what might be a big lake +or inland sea. + +"See, we are resting on the ground!" exclaimed Jack. He pointed out of +the window, and the others, looking close at hand, noted that the +Mermaid had settled down in the midst of what seemed to be a field of +flowers. Big red and yellow blossoms were all in front, and some grew +so tall as to almost be up to the edge of the port. + +"I wonder if we can be seeing aright," the professor muttered. "Is +this really the interior of the earth; such a beautiful place as +this?" + +There could be little doubt of it. The ship had descended through the +big shaft, had been sucked down by the terrible air current, and had +really landed in a strange country. + +Of its size, shape and general conditions the adventurers, as yet, +could but guess. They could see it was a pleasant place, and one where +there might be the means to sustain life. For, as the professor said +afterward, he felt that where there were flowers there would be +fruits, and where both of these provisions of nature were to be found +there would likely be animal life, and even, perhaps, human beings. + +But, for the time, they were content to look from the port on the +beautiful scene that lay stretched out before them. The ship rested on +an even keel and had landed so softly that none of the plates were +strained. + +"We have plenty of air, at all events," said the professor as he took +a deep breath. "I was afraid of that, but it seems there was no need. +The air appears to be as good and fresh as that on the surface of the +earth, only there is a curious property to it. It makes one feel +larger. I imagine it must be thinner than the air of the earth, which +is a rather strange thing, since the higher one goes the more rarefied +the air becomes, and the lower, the more dense. Still we can not apply +natural philosophy to conditions under the earth. All the usual +theories may be upset. However, we should be content to take things as +we find them, and be glad we were not dashed to pieces when the ship +was caught in the terrible current." + +"What do you suppose caused the awful heat, and then made it go away +again?" asked Jack. + +"I can only make a guess at it," Mr. Henderson answered. "There are +many strange things we will come across if we stay here long, I +believe. As for the fire I think we must have passed a sort of +interior volcano." + +"But what sort of a place do you think we have come to, Professor?" +asked Mark. + +"It is hard to say," the scientist replied. "We are certainly +somewhere within the earth. Our gage tells us it is five hundred +miles. That may or may not be correct, but I believe we are several +hundred miles under the crust, at all events. As to what sort of a +place it is, you can see for yourselves." + +"But how is it we can breathe here, and things can grow?" asked Bill, +who was beginning to lose his fright at the thought of being +practically buried alive. + +"I do not know what makes such things possible," Mr. Henderson +replied, "but that there is air here is a certainty. I can hardly +believe it is drawn from the surface of the earth, down the big hole, +and I am inclined to think this place of the under-world has an +atmosphere of its own, and one which produces different effects than +does our own." + +"They certainly have larger flowers than we have," said Mark. "See how +big they grow, and what strong colors they have." + +He pointed to the port, against which some of the blooms were nodding +in the wind that had sprung up, for, in spite of the many differences, +the under-world was in some respects like the upper one. + +"Probably the difference in the atmosphere accounts for that," the +professor said. "It enables things to grow larger. And, by the way, +Mark, that reminds me of something you said about seeing some horrible +monster fleeing from the ship. Did you dream that?" + +"I did see something horrible, Professor," he answered. "I'm not +positive what it was, but I'll tell you as nearly as I can what it was +like." + +Thereupon Mark detailed what he had seen. + +"But how could anything, least of all some big monster, be concealed +in the storeroom, and we not know anything about it?" asked Mr. +Henderson. + +"I thought you did know something of it," replied Mark. + +"Who, me? My dear boy, you must be dreaming again. Why should I want +to conceal any being in the storeroom? Come, there is something back +of this. Tell me all you know of it. I can't imagine why you think I +was hiding something in the apartment." + +"I thought so because you were always so anxious not to have me go +near it," answered the boy. "Don't you remember when you saw me going +toward it, several times, you warned me away?" + +"So I did!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson, a light breaking over his face. +"But, Mark, it was not because I had hidden some human being or animal +there. I can't tell you what it is yet, save that I can say it is +merely a machine of mine that I have invented. For reasons of my own I +don't want any one to see it yet. Perhaps it may never be seen. I +thought, not long ago, that we might have to undertake a terrible risk +in escaping from this place. I directed you to go to the storeroom--but +there, I can't say any more, my friends. Sufficient that I had +nothing in the animal line concealed there." + +"But I am certain there was some beast or human being in there," +insisted Mark. "I heard curious noises in there. Besides, how do you +account for the food disappearing and the door being open at times?" + +"It might have been rats," said Jack. + +"I don't believe there are rats in the ship," put in the professor. +"More likely it was one of us who got up hungry and took the +victuals." + +"I'm sorry I can't agree with you," Mark added respectfully. "I am +sure some strange being was on board this ship, and I believe it has +now escaped. Who or what it was I can't say, but you'll find I'm +right, some day." + +"All right," spoke Mr. Henderson with a laugh. "I like to see any one +brave enough to stick up for his opinion, but, at the same time, I +can't very well imagine any person or thing being concealed in that +storeroom ever since we started. How could it get in?" + +Mark did not; answer, but there came to him the recollection of that +night, previous to the sailing of the Flying Mermaid, when he had +observed some strange shadow that seemed to glide aboard the craft. + +"Now let's forget all about such things," the professor went on. "We +are in a strange country, and there are many things to see and do. +Let's explore a little. Then we must see what we can do with the ship. +We are dependent on it, and it will not do to allow it to remain in a +damaged state. We expect to travel many miles in the interior of the +earth if it is possible, and we have only our craft to go in." + +"I reckon we'd all better assimilate into our interior progression +some molecules and atoms of partly disentegrated matter in order to +supply combustion for the carbonaceous elements and assist in the +manufacture of red corpuscles," said Washington, appearing in the +door, with a broad grin on his good-natured face. + +"Which, being interpreted," the professor said, "means, I suppose, +that we had better eat something to keep our digestive apparatus in +good working order?" + +"Yo' done guessed it!" exclaimed the colored man, relapsing into his +ordinary speech. "I'se got a meal all ready." + +They agreed that they might not have another opportunity soon to +partake of food, so they all gathered about the table, on which +Washington had spread a good meal. + +"Come on, let's go outside and view this new and strange land at +closer quarters," the professor said, when they had satisfied their +appetites. "We can't see much from inside the ship." + +Accordingly the heavy door in the side of the Mermaid was slid back, +and, for the first time the travelers stepped out on the surface of +the land in the interior of the earth. + +At first it seemed no different than the ordinary land to which they +were accustomed. But they soon found it had many strange attributes. +The queer shifting and changing light, with the myriad of hues was one +of them, but to this the adventurers had, by this time, become +accustomed, though it was, none the less, a marvel to them. It was odd +enough to see the landscape blood red one instant, and a pale green +the next, as it does when you look through differently colored +glasses. + +Then, too, they noticed that the grass and flowers grew much more +abundantly than in the outer part of the world. They saw clover six +feet high, and blades of grass even taller. In some places the growth +of grass was so big that they were in danger of getting lost in it. + +"If the grass is like this, what will the trees be?" asked Mark. + +"There are some away over there," Jack replied. "We'll have to take a +sail over. They must be several hundred feet high." + +"Well, at any rate, here's a little brook, and the water looks good to +drink," went on Mark. "I'm thirsty, so here goes." + +He hurried to where a stream was flowing sluggishly between grassy +banks. The water was as clear as crystal, and Mark got down on his +face and prepared to sip some of the liquid up. + +But, no sooner had his lips touched it, than he sprang up with a cry +and stood gazing at the water. + +"What's the matter?" asked Jack. "Hot?" + +"No, it isn't hot," Mark replied, "but it isn't water. It's white +molasses!" + +"White molasses?" repeated the professor, coming up at that moment. +"What are you talking about?" + +He stooped down and dipped his finger into the stream. He drew it up +quickly, and there ran from it big drops that flowed as slowly as the +extract of the sugarcane does in cold weather. + +"You're about right, Mark," he said. "It's water but it's almost as +thick as molasses." He touched his finger to his tongue. "It's good to +drink, all right," he went on, "only it will be a little slow going +down." + +Then he dipped up a palm full, and let it trickle down his throat. + +"It is the strangest water I ever saw," he added. "It must be that the +lack of some peculiar property of air, which we have on the surface, +has caused this. I must make some notes on it," and he drew out pencil +and paper. He was about to jot down some facts when he was interrupted +by a cry from Washington. + +"Come and see what's the matter with this stone!" he cried. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +CAUGHT BY A STRANGE PLANT + + +"WASHINGTON is in trouble!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. Followed by the +two boys he ran to where the colored man stood in a stooping position +over a small pile of stones. + +"What is it? Has something bit you?" asked the scientist, as he came +up on the run. + +"No, but I can't git this stone up!" Washington said. "Look at what a +little stone it is, but I can't lift it. Something must have happened +to me. Maybe some one put th' evil eye on me! Maybe I'm bewitched!" + +"Nonsense!" exclaimed the professor, "what did you want the stone +for?" + +"Nothin' in particular," replied Washington, still tugging away at the +stone, which was the size of his head. "I was just goin' t' throw it +at a big bird, but when I went to lift it this little stone 'peared t' +be glued fast." + +Washington moved aside to give Mr. Henderson a chance to try to pick +up the piece of rock. As the scientist grasped it a look of surprise +came over his features: + +"This is most remarkable!" he exclaimed. "I can't budge it. I wonder +if a giant magnet is holding it down." + +He tugged and tugged until he was red in the face. Then he beckoned to +the two boys, and they came to his aid. There was barely room for them +all to each get one hand on the rock, and then, only after a powerful +tug did it come up. Almost instantly it dropped back to the earth. + +"This is remarkable!" the professor said. "I wonder if the other +stones are the same." + +He tried several others, and one and all resisted his efforts. It was +only the small stones he was able to lift alone, and these, he said, +were so weighty that it would have been a task to throw them any +distance. + +"The water and the stones are strangely heavy in this land," he said. +"I wonder what other queer things we shall see." + +"I saw a bird a little while ago, when I went to pick up that stone," +observed Washington. + +"What kind was it?" asked the inventor. + +"I don't know, only it was about as big as an eagle." + +The travelers wandered about a quarter of a mile from the ship. They +avoided the tall grass and the lofty nodding flowers that seemed to +grow in regular groves, and kept to places where they could walk with +comparative freedom. + +"Have you formed any idea, Professor, as to the nature of this +country?" asked Mark, who liked to get at the bottom of things. + +"I have, but it is only a theory," Mr. Henderson answered. "I believe +we are on a sort of small earth that is inside the larger one we live +on. This sphere floats in space, just as our earth does, and we have +passed through the void that lies between our globe and this interior +one. I think this new earth is about a quarter the size of ours and in +some respects the same. In others it is vastly different. + +"But we will not think of those things now. We must see what our +situation is, whether we are in any danger, and must look to repairing +our ship. There will be time enough for other matters later." + +The travelers were walking slowly along, noting the strange things on +every side. As they advanced the vegetation seemed to become more +luxuriant, as if nature had tried to out-do herself in providing +beautiful flowers and plants. The changing lights added to the beauty +and weirdness of the scene. + +The plain was a rolling one, and here and there were small hills and +hollows. As the travelers topped a rise Jack, who was in advance, +called out: + +"Oh what queer plants! They are giant Jacks-in-the-pulpit!" + +The others hastened forward to see what the boy had discovered. Jack +was too eager to wait, and pressed on. The hill which sloped away from +the top of the little plateau on which he stood, was steeper than he +had counted on. As he leaned forward he lost his balance and toppled, +head foremost, down the declivity, rolling over. + +"Look out!" cried Mark, who had almost reached his comrade's side. + +The scene that confronted the travelers was a strange one. Before them +in a sort of hollow, were scores of big plants, shaped somewhat like a +Jack-in-the-pulpit, or a big lily, with a curved top or flap to it. + +The plants were about eight feet tall, three feet across the top, and +the flap or covering was raised about two feet. They were nodding and +swaying in the wind on their short stems. + +"He's headed right for one of them!" Mr. Henderson exclaimed. "I hope +he'll not fall into one of the openings." + +"Is there any danger?" asked Mark. + +"I'm afraid there is," the inventor added. "Those plants are a variety +of the well-known pitcher plant, or fly-trap, as they are sometimes +called. In tropical countries they grow to a large size, but nothing +like these. They are filled, in the cup, with a sort of sticky, sweet +mixture, and this attracts insects. When one enters the cup the top +flap folds over, and the hapless insect is caught there. The plant +actually devours it, nature providing a sort of vegetable digestive +apparatus. These giant plants are the same, and they seem large enough +to take in a man, to say nothing of Jack!" + +With anxious faces the adventurers turned to watch the fate of their +comrade. Jack was slipping, sliding and rolling down the hill. He +could not seem to stop, though he was making desperate efforts to do +so. He was headed straight for one of the largest of the terrible +plants. + +In vain, as he saw what was in front of him, did he try to change the +course of his involuntary voyage. Over and over he rolled, until, at +length, he struck a little grassy hummock, bounced into the air, and +right into the opening of a monster pitcher plant. + +"It has him!" cried Mark. "We must save him! Come on everyone!" + +He raced down the hill, while the others came closely after him. They +reached the plant into which Jack had bounced. The flap, or top piece, +had closed down, tightly over the unfortunate boy. + +"Quick! We must save him or he will be smothered to death or drowned +in the liquid the cup contains!" Mr. Henderson exclaimed. "Attack the +plant with anything you can find!" + +"Let's cut through the side of the flower-cup!" suggested Mark. "That +seems softer than the stem." + +His idea was quickly put into operation. Andy's long hunting knife +came in very handy. While the sides of the long natural cup were +tough, the knife made an impression on them, and, soon, a small door +or opening had been cut in the side of the pitcher plant, large enough +to enable a human body to pass through. + +When the last fibre had been severed by Andy, who was chosen to wield +the knife because of his long practice as a hunter, there was a sudden +commotion within the plant. Then a dark object, dripping water, made a +spring and landed almost at the feet of the professor. + +It was Jack, and a sorry sight he presented. He was covered from head +to foot with some sticky substance, which dripped from all over him. + +With hasty movements he cleared the stuff from his eyes and mouth, and +spluttered: + +"It's a good thing you cut me out when you did. I couldn't have held +on much longer!" + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +THE BIG PEACH + + +JACK soon recovered from his remarkable experience. The terrible plant +that had nearly eaten him alive was a mass of cut-up vegetable matter +which attracted a swarm of insects. Most of them were ants, but such +large ones the boys had never seen before, and the professor said they +exceeded in size anything he had read about. Some of them were as +large as big rats. They bit off large pieces of the fallen plant and +carried them to holes in the ground which were big enough for +Washington to slip his foot into, and he wore a No. 11 shoe. + +But the adventurers felt there were more important things for them to +look at than ants, so they started away again, the professor telling +them all to be careful and avoid accidents. + +It was while they were strolling through a little glade, which they +came upon unexpectedly, that Washington, who was in the lead called +out: + +"Gracious goodness! It must be Thanksgivin'!" + +"Why so?" asked Jack. + +"'Cause here's th' remarkablest extraordinary and expansionist of a +pumpkin that ever I laid eyes on!" the colored man cried. + +They all hurried to where Washington had come to a halt. There, on the +ground in front of him, was a big round object, about the size of a +hogshead. It was yellow in color, and was not unlike the golden +vegetable from which mothers make such delicious pies. + +"I allers was fond of pumpkins," said Washington, placing his hand on +the thing, which was almost as tall as he was, "but I never thought +I'd come across such a one as this." + +The professor and the two boys went closer to the monstrosity. Mr. +Henderson passed his hand over it and then, bending closer, smelled of +it. + +"That's not a pumpkin!" he exclaimed. + +"What is it then?" asked Washington. + +"It's a giant peach," the inventor remarked. "Can't you see the fuzz, +and smell it? Of course it's a peach." + +"Well I'll be horn-swoggled!" cried Washington, leaning against the +big fruit, which easily, supported him. + +"Hurrah!" cried Jack, drawing his knife from his pocket and opening +the largest blade. "I always did like peaches. Now I can have all I +want," and he drove the steel into the object, cutting off a big slice +which he began to eat. + +"It may be poisonous!" exclaimed Mark. + +"Too late now," responded Jack, the juice running down from his mouth. +"Taste's good, anyhow." + +They all watched Jack while he devoured his slice of fruit. Washington +acted as if he expected his friend to topple over unconscious, but +Jack showed no bad symptoms. + +"You'd better all have some," the boy said. "It's the best I ever +tasted." + +Encouraged by Jack's example, Mark thought he, too, would have some of +the fruit. He opened his knife and was about to take off some of the +peach when suddenly the thing began to roll forward, almost upon him. + +"Hi! Stop your shoving!" he exclaimed. "Do you want to have the thing +roll over me, Jack?" + +"I'm not shoving!" replied Jack. + +"Some one is!" Mark went on. He dodged around the far side of the +immense fruit and what he saw made him cry out in astonishment. + +Two grasshoppers, each one standing about three feet high, were +standing on their hind legs, and with their fore feet were pushing the +peach along the ground. They had been attracted to the fruit by some +juice which escaped from a bruise on that side, which was the ripest, +and, being fond of sweets had, evidently decided to take their find to +some safe place where they could eat it at their leisure. Or perhaps +they wanted to provide for their families if grasshoppers have them. + +"Did you ever see such monsters?" asked Jack. "They're as big as +dogs!" + +At the sound of his voice the two grasshoppers, becoming alarmed, +ceased their endeavors to roll the peach along, and, assuming a +crouching attitude seemed to be waiting. + +"They certainly are remarkable specimens," Mr. Henderson said. "If the +other animals are in proportion, and if there are persons in this new +world, we are likely to have a hard time of it." + +This time the immense insects concluded the strangers were not to +their liking. With a snapping of their big muscular legs and a whirr +of their wings that was like the starting of an automobile, the +grasshoppers rose into the air and sailed away over the heads of the +adventurers. Their flight was more than an eighth of a mile in extent, +and they came down in a patch of the very tall grass. + +"Let's go after them!" exclaimed old Andy. "I was so excited I forgot +to take a shot at them. Come on!" + +"I think we'd better not," counseled the professor. "In the first +place we don't need them. They would be no good for food. Then we +don't know but what they might attack us, and it would be no joke to +be bitten by a grasshopper of that size. Let them alone. We may find +other game which will need your attention, Andy. Better save your +ammunition." + +Somewhat against his will, Andy had to submit to the professor's +ruling. The old hunter consoled himself with the reflection that if +insects grew to that size he would have some excellent sport hunting +even the birds of the inner world. + +"I wonder what sort of a tree that peach grew on," Jack remarked, as +he cut off another slice, when the excitement caused by the discovery +of the grasshoppers had subsided. "It must be taller than a church +steeple. I wonder how the fruit got here, for there are no trees +around." + +"I fancy those insects rolled it along for a good distance," Mr. +Henderson put in. "You can see the marks on the ground, where they +pushed it. They are wonderful creatures." + +"Are we going any farther?" asked Mark. "Perhaps we can find the peach +tree, and, likely there are other fruit trees near it." + +At the professor's suggestion they strolled along for some distance. +They were now about three miles from the airship, and found that what +they had supposed was a rather level plain, was becoming a succession +of hills and hollows. It was while descending into a rather deep +valley that Jack pointed ahead and exclaimed: + +"I guess there's our peach orchard, but I never saw one like it +before." + +Nor had any of the others. Instead of trees the peaches were attached +to vines growing along the ground. They covered a large part of the +valley, and the peaches, some bigger than the one they first +discovered, some small and green, rose up amid the vines, just as +pumpkins do in a corn field. + +"Stranger and stranger," the professor murmured. "Peaches grow on +vines. I suppose potatoes will grow on trees. Everything seems to be +reversed here." + +They made their way down toward the peach "orchard" as Jack called it, +though "patch" would have been a better name. Besides peaches they +found plums, apples, and pears growing in the same way, and all of a +size proportionate to the first-named fruit. + +"Well, one thing is evident," Mr. Henderson remarked, "we shall not +starve here. There is plenty to eat, even if we have to turn +vegetarians." + +"I wonder what time it is getting to be," Jack remarked. "My watch +says twelve o'clock but whether it's noon or midnight I can't tell, +with this colored light coming and going. I wonder if it ever sets as +the sun does." + +"That is something we'll have to get used to," the professor said. +"But I think we had better go back to the ship now. We have many +things to do to get it in order again. Besides, I am a little afraid +to leave it unguarded so long. No telling but what some strange +beast--or persons, for that matter--might injure it." + +"I'm going to take back some slices of peaches with me, anyhow," Mark +said, and he and Jack cut off enough to make several meals, while +Bill, Tom and Washington took along all they could carry. + +As they walked back toward the ship the strange lights seemed to be +dying out. At first they hardly noticed this, but as they continued on +it became quite gloomy, and an odd sort of gloom it was too, first +green, then yellow, then red and then blue. + +"I believe whatever serves as a sun down here is setting," the +professor observed. "We must hurry. I don't want to be caught out here +after dark." + +They hurried on, the lights dying out more and more, until, as they +came in sight of their ship, it was so black they could hardly see. + +Mark who was in the rear turned around, glancing behind him. As he did +so he caught sight of a gigantic shadow moving along on top of the +nearest hill. The shadow was not unlike that of a man in shape, but of +such gigantic stature that Mark knew it could be like no human being +he had ever seen. At the same time it bore a curious resemblance to +the weird shadow he had seen slip into the Mermaid that night before +they sailed. + +"I wonder if it can be the same--the same thing--grown larger, just +as the peach grows larger than those in our world," Mark thought, +while a shiver of fear seemed to go over him. "I wonder if that--that +thing could have been on the ship----" + +Then the last rays of light died away and there was total darkness. + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +OVERHAULING THE SHIP + + +"KEEP together!" shouted the professor. "It will not do to become lost +now. We are close to the ship, and will soon be there. Come after me." + +It was more by following the sound of the scientist's voice, than by +any sight which the others could get of him, that they managed to +trail along behind. They reached the ship in safety, however, and +entered. There was no sound as of beasts or insects within, and, +though Mark felt a little apprehensive on account of what he had seen, +he and the others as well, were glad to be again in something that +seemed like home. + +"I wish we had some candles, or some sort of a light to see by," the +professor remarked. "We can do nothing in the dark, and there is no +telling how long this night is going to last once it has set in. If I +could have a little illumination, I might be able to fix the dynamo, +and then we could turn on the incandescents. That portable light we +had is broken. + +"By cracky!" exclaimed Andy. "I believe I have the very thing!" + +"You don't mean to say you have a torch or a candle with you, do you?" +asked Mr. Henderson. + +"No, but I have my patent pipe lighting apparatus," the hunter said. +"I always carry it. It gives a little light, but not much, though it +may be enough to work by." + +Not until after several hours work, handicapped as they were by lack +of light, were the repairs to the ship completed. + +"Now we'll start the engine and see how we will come out," the +inventor exclaimed, as he wiped his hands on some waste. + +It did not take long to generate enough power to turn the dynamo. Soon +the familiar hum and whirr was heard, and, a few seconds later the +filaments in the lamps began to glow a dull red, which gradually +brightened until they were shining in all their usual brilliancy. + +"Hurrah!" cried the boys. "Now we can see!" + +They all felt in better spirits with the restoration of the lights, +and, washing off the grease and dirt of their labors in the engine +room, they prepared to sit down to the meal which Washington prepared. + +As soon as the dynamo was working well, care had to be taken not to +speed it too much on account of a mended belt. The professor turned +off part of the lights and switched some of the current into the +storage batteries, to provide for emergencies. For there was no +telling how long the night might last. + +Jack was the first one to finish the meal--they did not know whether +to call it dinner, supper or breakfast. He went into the conning +tower, and, as soon as he reached it he called out: + +"Come on up here, professor! There's something strange going on!" + +Mr. Henderson, followed by Mark, hurried to the tower. As he reached +it and looked out of the forward window, a beautiful white glow +illuminated the whole scene, and then, from below the horizon, there +arose seven luminous disks. One was in the centre, while about it +circled the other six, like some immense pin-wheel. + +"It's the moon!" cried Mark. + +"It's seven moons!" Jack exclaimed. "Why it's almost as light as day!" + +And so it was, for the seven moons, if that is what they were, gave an +illumination not unlike the sun in brilliancy though it was like the +beams from the pale moon of the earth. + +"I guess we need not have worried about the darkness," the professor +remarked. "Still it is a good thing I fixed the dynamo." + +For some time he and the other adventurers watched the odd sight of +the moons, as they rose higher and higher overhead. The scene was a +beautiful, if weird one, for the whole plain was bathed in the soft +light. + +"I guess we can turn off the incandescents, and use all the power for +the storage batteries," Mr. Henderson went on, as he descended into +the ship, and opened the port shutters which had been closed when they +started off on their exploring tour. The interior of the Mermaid was +almost as light as when the odd colored beams had been playing over +the new earth to which they had come. + +"I think we had better continue with our work of making repairs," Mr. +Henderson said. "We can't count on these moons remaining here any +length of time, and I want to take advantage of them. So though some +of us perhaps need sleep, we will forego it and fix up the Mermaid. I +want to take a trip and see what other wonders await us." + +They all agreed that they would rather work than sleep, and soon the +entire force was busy in the engine room. There was much to be done, +and the most important things were attended to first. The motive power +was overhauled and found to be in need of several new parts. These +were put in and then the gas generator, and the negative gravity +machine, were put in shape. + +It would have taken something very substantial to have awakened any +one on board the Mermaid that night. They all slept soundly and awoke +to find the strange colored lights shining in through the glass +covered port holes. + +"Well, the sun, or what corresponds to it, is up," observed Jack, "and +I guess we had better do as the little boy in the school reader did, +and get up, too, Mark." + +Soon all the travelers were aroused, and the sound of Washington +bustling about in the kitchen, whence came the smell of coffee, bacon +and eggs, told the hungry ones that breakfast was under way. + +After the meal work was again started on repairing the ship, and by +noon the professor remarked: + +"I think we shall try a little flight after dinner. That is, if one +thing doesn't prevent us." + +"What is that?" asked Jack. + +"We may be held down, as were those stones," was the grave answer. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +THE FISH THAT WALKED + + +IT was with no little apprehension that the professor prepared to take +his first flight aboard the ship in the realms of the new world. He +knew little or nothing of the conditions he might meet with, the +density of the atmosphere, or how the Mermaid would behave under +another environment than that to which she was accustomed. + +Yet he felt it was necessary to make a start. They would have to +attempt a flight sooner or later, and Mr. Henderson was not the one to +delay matters. So, the last adjustment having been made to the +repaired machinery, they all took their places in the ship. + +The boys and the professor went to the conning tower to direct +matters, while Washington and the others were in the engine room to +see that the machinery worked properly. Mark gave a last look outside +as he closed the big steel cover over the hole through which admission +was had to the craft. He thought he might catch a glimpse of the queer +shadow, but nothing was in sight. It was like a beautiful summer's +day, save for the strange lights, shifting and changing. But the +travelers had become somewhat used to them by this time. + +The professor turned the valve that allowed the gas to enter the +holder. There was a hissing sound and a sort of trembling throughout +the entire ship. The dynamos were whizzing away and the negative +gravity machine was all ready to start. + +For several minutes the travelers waited until the big lifting tank +was filled with the strong vapor. They watched the gages which +indicated the pressure to be several hundred pounds. + +"I think we can chance it now," remarked Mr. Henderson, as he threw +over several levers. "We'll try, at any rate." + +With a tremor the Mermaid left the surface of the inner earth and went +sailing upward toward the--well it wasn't exactly the sky, but it was +what corresponded to it in the new world, though there were no clouds +and no blue depths such as the boys were used to. At all events the +Mermaid was flying again, and, as the adventurers felt themselves +being lifted up they gave a spontaneous cheer at the success which had +crowned their efforts. + +The ship went up several hundred feet, and then, the professor, having +brought her to a stop, sent her ahead at a slow pace. He wanted to be +sure all the apparatus was in good working order before he tried any +speed. + +The Mermaid responded readily. Straight as an arrow through the air +she flew. + +"Well, this is almost as good as being on the regular earth!" +exclaimed Jack. + +"It's better," put in Mark. "We haven't seen half the wonders yet. +Let's open the floor shutter, and see how it looks down below." + +He and Jack went to the room where there was an opening in the floor +of the ship, covered by heavy glass. They slid back the steel shutter +and there, down below them, was the strange new, world they had come +to, stretched out like some big map. + +They could see mountains, forests, plains, and rivers, the water +sparkling in the colored light. Over green fields they flew, then +across some stretches where only sand and rocks were to be seen. +Faster and faster the ship went, as the professor found the machinery +was once more in perfect order. Jack was idly watching the play of +tinted lights over the surface of the ground. + +"I wonder what makes it," he said. + +"I have tried to account for it in several ways," said the professor, +who had called Washington to the conning tower and come to join the +boys. "I have had first one theory and then another, but the one I am +almost sure is correct is that hidden volcanic fires cause the +illumination. + +"I think they flare up and die away, and have become so regular that +they produce the same effect as night and day with us. Probably the +fires go out for lack of fuel, and when it is supplied they start up +again. Perhaps it is a sort of gas that they burn." + +"Well, it's queer enough, whatever it is," Jack remarked. "What +strikes me as funny, though, is that we haven't seen a single person +since we came here. Surely this place must be inhabited." + +Mark thought of the strange shadow he had seen, but said nothing. + +"I believe it is," the professor answered. "We will probably come upon +the inhabitants soon. I only hope they are a people who will do us no +harm." + +"If they tried any of their tricks we could mount up in our ship and +escape them," said Andy. + +"Provided they gave us the chance," Mr. Henderson put in. "Well, we'll +not worry about that now." + +For several hours the ship traveled on, until it had come to a +different sort of country. It was wilder and not so level, and there +were a number of streams and small lakes to be seen. + +"Are you going to sail all night?" asked Jack. + +"No," replied the professor. "I think we'll descend very soon now, and +camp out for a while. That lake just ahead seems to offer a good +place," and he pointed to a large sheet of water that sparkled in the +distance, for by this time they had all gone back to the conning +tower. + +The lake was in the midst of a wood that extended for some distance on +all sides, and was down in a sort of valley. The ship headed toward +it, and in a short time a landing was made close to shore. + +"Maybe we can have some fresh fish for supper," exclaimed Jack as he +ran from the ship as soon as the sliding door in the side was opened. +"Looks as if that lake had some in it. It is not thick water like in +that stream we stopped at," he added. + +"I believe you're right," old Andy put in, as he turned back to look +for some lines and hooks among his traps. He soon found what he +wanted, and gave them to the boys, taking his trusty gun along for +himself. + +While the professor, Washington, Tom and Bill remained behind to make +some adjustments to the machinery, and to get things in shape for the +night, which, they calculated would soon be upon them, Jack, Mark and +Andy went down to the shore of the lake. The boys cut some poles from +the trees, and baiting the hooks with some fat worms found under the +bark, threw in. + +"Let's see who'll get the first bite," spoke Jack. "I'm pretty +generally lucky at fishing." + +"Well, while you're waiting to decide that there contest, I think I'll +take a stroll along shore and see if I can see anything to shoot," +Andy remarked. + +For several minutes the boys sat in silence on the bank of the lake, +watching the play of the vari-colored lights on the water. Suddenly +Jack felt a quiver on his line, and his pole began to shake. + +"I've got something!" he cried. Then his pole bent almost double and +he began to pull for all he was worth. "It's a whopper!" he cried. +"Come and help me, Mark!" + +Mark ran to his friend's aid. Whatever was on the other end of the +line was strong enough to tax the muscles of both boys. They could +hear the pole beginning to break. But for the excellent quality of +Andy's line that would have parted some time before. + +All at once there came a sudden slacking of the pull from whatever was +in the water. And so quickly did it cease that both boys went over +backward in a heap. + +"He's got away!" cried Jack, getting up and brushing some of the dirt +from his clothes. + +"There's something that didn't get away!" cried Mark, who had risen to +his knees, and was pointing at the lake. Jack looked and what he saw +made him almost believe he was dreaming. + +For, emerging from the water, dragging the pole and line the boys had +dropped along with it, was a most curious creature. It was a big fish, +but a fish with four short legs on which it was walking, or rather +waddling along as much as a duck, with a double supply of feet, might +do. + +"Say, do I see that or is there something the matter with my eyes?" +sung out Jack, making ready to run away. + +"It's there all right!" exclaimed Mark. "Hi! Andy! Here's something to +shoot!" he yelled, for indeed the creature was big enough to warrant +attack with a gun. It was about five feet long and two feet through. + +On and on it came, straight at the boys, as if to have revenge for the +pain the fish hook must have caused it, for the barb could be seen +dangling from its lip. On and on it came, waddling forward, the water +dripping from it at every step. It had the body and general shape of a +fish, save that the tail was rather large in proportion. As it came +nearer the boys noted that the feet were webbed, like those of a water +fowl. + +"Come on!" cried Jack. "It may attack us!" + +At that moment the creature opened its mouth, showing a triple row of +formidable teeth, and gave utterance to a sort of groan and grunt +combined. + +This was enough to send Jack and Mark off on a run up the bank, and +did they stop until they heard Andy's voice hailing them. + +"What's the matter, boys?" + +"Come here! Quick!" answered Jack. + +The fish-animal had halted and seemed to be taking an observation. To +do this, as it could not turn its neck, it had to shift its whole +body. Old Andy came up on the run, his gun held in readiness. + +"Where is it?" he asked, and the boys pointed silently. + +The hunter could not repress a start of astonishment as he saw the +strange creature. But he did not hesitate a second. There was a crack +of the rifle, and the thing, whatever it was, toppled over, dead. + +Andy hurried up to it, to get a closer view. + +"Well, this is the limit!" he exclaimed. "First we have grasshoppers +that can roll peaches as big as hogsheads, and now we come across fish +that walk. I wonder what we will see next." + +"I don't want to go fishing in this lake any more," spoke Jack, as he +looked at the repulsive creature. "I never want to eat fish any more." + +"Same here," agreed Mark, and old Andy was of the opinion that the +thing killed would not make a wholesome dish for the table. + +"There don't seem to be any game in this section," he remarked. "Not a +sign could I see, nor have I since we have been here, unless you count +those grasshoppers. But the fruit is good, I'll say that." + +"Come on, we'd better be getting back," Mark said, as he noticed it +was getting dark. "I'm hungry." + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +THE SNAKE-TREE + + +THEY managed to make a good meal of the food supplies they had brought +along, and as a dessert Washington made some peach short-cake from the +slices of the giant fruit they had found, the day before. Just as they +finished supper it got very dark, but, in about an hour, the +moon-beams, as the travelers called them, came up, and illuminated the +lake with a weird light. + +As the machinery of the Mermaid was now in working order there was no +further alarm because of the darkness. The ship rested on a level keel +about a hundred yards back from the lake, and, seeing that all was +snug, and the fastenings secure, the travelers went to bed. + +Though they had to forego fish for breakfast the travelers made a good +meal. After seeing that the ship was in readiness for a quick start, +the professor suggested they take a walk around and see what sort of +country they might be in now. + +They tramped on for several miles, meeting with no adventures, and +seeing nothing out of the ordinary. It was a pleasant day, just warm +enough to be comfortable, and a little wind was blowing through the +trees. + +"It would be almost like home if it wasn't for the strange lights, and +the memory of the queer things here," said Jack. "I feel fine. Let's +see if you can hit that dead tree over there, Mark." + +Jack stooped to grab up a stone, but no sooner had his fingers touched +it than he called out: + +"There! I forgot all about the stones here being heavier than lead. +Guess we can't throw any of 'em. But come on. I'll race you to the +dead tree!" + +Mark was willing, so the two boys set off at a fast pace. + +"Look out where you're going!" the professor called after them. "No +telling what may be in those woods," for the boys were approaching a +little glade, on the edge of which the dead tree stood. + +Jack reached the goal first, and stood leaning against the trunk, +waiting for Mark. + +"You'd better practice sprinting!" exclaimed the victor. + +Mark was about to excuse himself for his poor showing, on the plea of +having eaten too much breakfast, when to his horror he saw what seemed +to be a long thin snake spring out from the branches of a nearby tree +and twine itself about Jack. + +"Help me! Save me!" cried the unfortunate boy, as he was lifted high +into the air and pulled within the shadow of the wood. + +For an instant Mark was too horror-stricken to move. Then with a shout +that alarmed the others, who were coming along more slowly, he made a +dash for the place he had last seen Jack. + +Had old Andy not been on the watch, with those keen eyes of his, there +might have been a double tragedy. He had seen from afar the sudden +snatching up of Jack, and noted Mark's rush to save his chum. + +"Stand still! Don't go in there for your life!" yelled the hunter, at +the same time running forward with gun ready. + +His example was followed by the professor, Washington and the other +two men. + +"A snake has Jack!" called Mark, when Andy was at his side. + +"No! It's not a snake!" replied the hunter. "It's worse. It's the +snake-tree!" + +"What's that?" asked Mr. Henderson, hurrying up. + +"The snake-tree has Jack," the hunter went on. "It is a plant, half +animal, half-vegetable. It has long branches, not unlike a snake in +shape. They can move about and grab things." + +"One of them got a grip on Jack as he leaned against the dead tree +trunk. I just caught a glimpse of it, and called to prevent Mark from +running into danger." + +"Can't we save him?" asked Mr. Henderson. + +"I'm going to try!" replied Andy. "Quick! Gather up some pieces of dry +wood. I have some paper, and my pipe lighter. We must fight the +snake-tree with fire!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII + +THE DESERTED VILLAGE + + +JACK'S Cries were growing fainter and fainter. Peering in through the +branches of the dead tree the professor could see the whip-like limbs +winding closer and closer about the boy. + +"I am afraid we will be too late!" he said. + +Andy had twisted some paper into a rude torch. He set fire to it with +his pocket lighter, and, when Bill and Mark brought him some little +pieces of dead wood the old hunter added them to his bundle, which was +now blazing brightly. + +"How are you going to do it?" asked the professor. + +"I'll show you," replied Andy. He bound the sticks and paper together +with wisps of grass and then, when it was so hot he could hardly hold +it longer, he ran as close as he dared to the snake-tree and tossed +the torch at the foot of it. + +The blazing bundle fell among some damp leaves and grass, as Andy had +intended it should, and soon a dense smoke arose, pouring straight up +through the branches of the animal-tree, the limbs of which were +gathered in a knot about the half-unconscious form of the boy. + +For a few minutes they all waited anxiously. Would Andy's trick +succeed? Had the terrible tree not already squeezed the life from +Jack? + +But, while they watched, there seemed to come a change over the tree. +The snake-like arms waved less and less. They seemed to straighten +out, as though deprived of power by the smoke which was now so dense +as to hide Jack from sight. Then the arms suddenly relaxed and +something rolled from them and fell to the ground. With a quick +movement Andy darted in, crawling on his hands and knees beneath the +limbs, and brought Jack out. The boy was white and his eyes were +closed. + +"Get some water!" cried the old hunter. + +Mark ran toward a stream a little distance away. He brought some of +the curiously thick liquid in his hat, and while Andy held the boy the +professor sprinkled some of the drops on his face, and forced some +between his lips. In a little while Jack's eyes slowly opened. + +"Don't let it eat me!" he begged. + +"You're all right now," said Andy heartily. "Not a bit harmed, Jack. +But," he added in a low tone, "it was a close call." + +A few whiffs from a bottle of ammonia the professor carried soon +brought Jack's color back. + +"Do you feel better now?" asked Mark. + +"I guess so. Yes, I'm all right," replied Jack, struggling to his +feet. "What happened? Feels as if I had been tied up with a lot of +rope." + +"That's about what you were," Andy replied, "only it was the worst +kind of rope I ever saw. Those snake-trees are terrible things. I've +read of 'em, but I never saw one before. The book that told of them +says they squeeze their victims to death just as a snake does. The +only way to do is to make some smoke and fire at the bottom. This sort +of kills the branches or makes them stupid and they let go. The trees +are half animal, and awful things. I hope we don't meet with any +more." + +"Same here," added Jack fervently, as he grasped Andy's hand, and +thanked him for saving his life. + +"Do you think you can go on, or shall we return to the ship'?" the +professor asked. + +"Oh I can trail along, if you move a little slowly," Jack replied. +"I'm a bit stiff, that's all." + +So they resumed their journey. They had gone, perhaps, three miles +when Washington, who was in the lead, suddenly stopped and called: + +"Sounds like thunder." + +The others listened. Sure enough there was a dull rumble and roar +audible. It seemed off to the left, but they could see no clouds in +the sky, nor any signs of a storm. + +"Let's take a walk over that way and see what it is," Mr. Henderson +suggested. + +As they walked on the noise became louder, until in about half an hour +it was like the sound from a blast furnace. + +"What do you suppose it can be?" asked Mark. + +"Perhaps some new freak of nature," the professor replied. "We seem to +have a good many of them here." + +They were all on their guard now, for there was no telling into what +danger they might run. As they went up a little hill the noise became +much louder. The professor and Andy, who had taken the lead, kept a +sharp lookout ahead, that they might not unexpectedly fall into some +hidden stream or lake. As they topped the hill they saw before them a +deep valley, and in the midst of it was that which was causing the +roaring sound. + +From the centre of an immense mound of rock and earth there spouted up +a great column of water, three hundred feet or more, as straight as a +flag staff. It was about ten feet in diameter, and at the top it broke +into a rosette of sparkling liquid, which as the vari-colored lights +played on it, resembled some wonderful flower. + +"It's a great geyser!" the professor exclaimed. "We have come to a +place like Yellowstone Park. We must be very careful. The crust may be +very thin here, and let us down into some boiling spring." + +The others gathered around the professor, and, from a safe distance +watched the ever rising and falling shaft of water. + +It was not regular in motion. Sometimes it would shoot up to a great +distance, nearly a thousand feet, the professor estimated. Again it +would sink down, as the power sending it out lessened, until it was +only a few hundred feet above the rounded top of the mound from which +it spurted. But it never fell below this. All the while there was the +constant roaring sound, as though the forces of nature below the +surface were calling to be let out. + +"I hope there are not many of those about," Mr. Henderson remarked +after a pause. "If the ship should hit one during the night it would +be all up with us. We must keep a careful look-out." + +The spouting column had a fascination which held them to the spot for +some time. From the hill they had a good view of the surrounding +country, but did not see any more geysers. + +"Do you think it is hot water?" asked Mark. + +"There is no vapor," the professor answered, "but most of the geysers +are produced by the action of steam in the interior of the earth. +However we'll not take any chances by investigating. I fear it would +not be safe to go into that valley." + +"Look there!" cried Andy. "I guess we're better off here!" He pointed +a little to the right of where the water spouted. The others looked, +and saw, coming from a hole in the ground, some shaggy black object. + +"What is it?" asked Jack. + +"It looks like a bear," replied the hunter, "but I never saw one like +it before." + +Nor had any of the others, for the creature was a terrible one. It had +the body of a bear, but the feet and legs were those of an alligator, +while the tail trailed out behind like a snake, and the head had a +long snout, not unlike the trunk of an elephant. The creature was +about ten feet long and five feet in height. + +"Let me try a shot at it!" exclaimed Andy. "That is something worth +shooting," and he cocked his rifle. + +"Don't!" exclaimed the professor shortly. "You might only wound it, +and it would pursue us. We are not ready to fight such creatures as +that, and you are the only one armed." + +"I never missed anything I aimed at yet," said Andy, a little hurt +that any one should doubt his ability to kill at the first shot. + +"Perhaps not, but how do you know but what this creature has a bullet +proof armor under its hide. This is a strange world, Andy. It is +better to take no chances." + +"I hate to see him get away," the hunter said. + +But, as it happened, the beast was not to get away. As they watched +they saw the horrible animal approach the mound from which the water +spurted. Up the sides it climbed. + +"I guess he's going to get a drink," said Mark. + +That was evidently the beast's intention. It went close to the +spouting column of water, and thrust its head out so that its tongue +could lap from the side. It seemed to have been in the habit of doing +this. + +For once, and for the last time, however, it made a mistake. The water +seemed to veer to one side. In its eagerness to get a drink the animal +took another step forward. At that moment the direction of the column +changed again, and it tilted over toward the beast. + +Suddenly, as the travelers watched, the full force of the big column +caught the beast just under the fore shoulders. Up into the air the +creature shot, propelled by thousands of pounds pressure. Right up to +the top of the column it went, and this time the water rose a thousand +feet into the air. + +Up and up went the animal, struggling to get away from the remorseless +grip. Then, when the water had reached its height, it shot the beast +off to one side. Then the brute began to fall, twisting, turning, +wiggling and struggling. Down it came with a thud that could be heard +above the noise of the geyser. + +"I reckon that finishes him," observed Andy. And it had, for there was +not a sign of life from the creature. + +"I guess we have seen enough for one morning," the professor said, +"Let's go back to the airship. It must be nearly dinner time." + +They started away. Mark gave a last look at the queer column of water +and the dead body of the strange animal. As he passed down the hill he +thought he saw the creature move, and stayed to see if this was so. +But a second glance convinced him he was mistaken. + +The others had gone on and were some distance ahead. Mark hurried on +to join them. As he got a last glance at the top of the column, over +the brow of the hill, he happened to look off to the left. There was +another hill, about the size of the one they had been on. + +And, as Mark looked he saw something move. At first he thought it was +another beast. But, to his terror he saw that the creature had only +two legs, and that it stood upright like a man, but such a man as Mark +had never seen before, for he was nearly twelve feet tall. + +He was about to cry out and warn the others, when the thing, whatever +it was, sunk down, apparently behind some tall bushes, and disappeared +as if the earth had opened and swallowed it. + +"I wonder if I had better tell them," thought Mark. "I can't show them +anything. I wonder if I really saw it, or if it was only a shadow. I +guess I'll say nothing. But it is very strange." + +Then he hurried on to join the others. + +"What makes you so pale?" asked Jack of his chum. + +"Nothing," said Mark, somewhat confused. "I guess I'm a little tired, +that's all." + +They reached the ship in safety, and, having dinner started the +machinery and took the Mermaid up into the air. + +"We'll travel on and see if we can't find some human beings," the +professor said. + +All that afternoon they sailed, the country below them unfolding like +a panorama. They passed over big lakes, sailing on the surface of +some, and over rivers, and vast stretches of forest and dreary plains. +But they never saw a sign of human inhabitants. + +It was getting on to five o'clock, the hour when the brilliant lights +usually disappeared, when Mark, who was steering in the conning tower, +gave a cry. + +"What is it?" asked the professor, looking up from a rude map he was +making of the land they had just traversed. + +"It looks like a town before us," said the boy. + +Mr. Henderson and Jack looked to where Mark pointed. A few miles ahead +and below them were great mounds, not unlike that from which the +geyser had spouted. But they were arranged in regular form, like +houses on a street, row after row of them. And, as they approached +nearer, they could see that the mounds had doors and windows to them. +Some of the mounds wer rger than others, and some were of double and +triple formation. + +"It's a city! The first city of the new world!" cried Jack. + +"It is a deserted village!" said the professor. "We have found where +the people live, but we have not found them." And he was right, for +there was not a sign of life about the place, over which the airship +was now suspended. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV + +THE GIANTS + + +"LET'S go down and investigate," suggested Jack. + +"Better wait," counseled the professor. "It will soon be dark, and, +though we will have moonlight, we can not see to advantage. I think it +will be best to keep the ship in the air to-night, and descend in the +morning. Then we can look about and decide on what to do." + +They all agreed this was the best plan, and, after making a circle +above the deserted village, and noting no signs of life, the Mermaid +was brought to a halt over the centre of the town, and about three +hundred feet above it. There the travelers would be comparatively +safe. + +It was deemed best to keep watch that night, and so, Mark, Jack, Bill +and Tom took turns, though there was nothing for them to do, as not a +thing happened. With the first appearance of dawn Mr. Henderson gave +orders to have the ship lowered, and it came to rest in the middle of +what corresponded to a street in the queer mound village. + +"Now to see what kind of people have lived here!" cried Jack. "They +must have been a queer lot. Something like the Esquimaux, only they +probably had more trouble keeping cool than the chaps up at the north +pole do." + +Now that they were down among the mound houses, they saw that the +dwellings were much larger than they had supposed. They towered high +above the boys' heads, and some of them were large enough in area to +have accomodated a company of soldiers. + +"Say, the chaps who lived in these must have been some pumpkins," said +Jack. "Why the ceilings are about fifteen feet high, and the doors +almost the same! Talk about giants! I guess we've struck where they +used to hang out, at any rate." + +The houses were a curious mixture of clay and soft stone. There were +doors, with big skins from animals as curtains, and the windows were +devoid of glass. Instead of stairs there were rude ladders, and the +furniture in the mound houses was of the roughest kind. + +There were fire-places in some of the houses, and the blackened and +smoked walls showed that they must have been used. In one or two of +the houses clay dishes, most of them broken, were scattered about, and +the size of them, in keeping with everything else, indicated that +those who used them were of no small stature. + +"Some of the bowls would do for bath tubs," said Jack, as he came +across one or two large ones. + +By this time the professor, Bill and Tom had joined the boys, and the +five went on with the exploring tour, while Washington and Andy +remained in the ship to get breakfast. + +"The inhabitants are evidently of a half-civilized race," the +professor said. "Their houses, and the manner in which they live, show +them to be allied to the Aztecs, though of course they are much larger +than that race." + +"What's bothering me," Bill said, "is not so much what race they +belong to, as what chance we'd stand in a race with them if they took +it into their heads to chase after us. I've read that them there +Azhandled races----" + +"You mean the Aztecs," interrupted the professor. + +"Well the Aztecs, then. But I've read they used to place their enemies +on a stone altar and cut their hearts out. Now I'm not hankerin' after +anything like that." + +"Don't be foolish," spoke Mr. Henderson. "Wait until you meet some of +the giants, if that is what they are, and then you can decide what to +do." + +"It may be too late then," remarked Bill in a low tone, and the boys +were somewhat inclined to agree with him. + +However, there seemed to be no immediate danger, as there was no sign +of any of the big people about the village. The adventurers walked +about for some time, but made no discoveries that would throw any +light on the reason for the place being left uninhabited. It seemed as +if there had been a sudden departure from the place, for in a number +of the houses the remains of half-cooked meals were seen. + +"Well, I think we have noted enough for the time being," the professor +remarked, after they had traversed almost half the length of what +seemed to be the principal street. "Let's go back to the ship and have +something to eat. Washington may have become alarmed at our absence." + +They made a circle in order to take in another part of the town on +their way back. While passing through a sort of alley, though it was +only narrow by comparison with the other thoroughfares that were very +wide, Mark came to a place where there was a circular slab of stone, +resting on the ground. In the centre was a big iron ring. + +"Hello! Here's something new!" he exclaimed. "Maybe it leads to a +secret passage, or covers some hidden treasure." + +"I guess it will have to continue to cover it then," Jack spoke. "That +probably weighs several tons. None of us could move it." + +They made their way back to the ship, where they found Washington and +Andy discussing the advisability of going off in search of them. + +"Breakfast is mighty near spoiled," said the colored man with an +injured air. + +But the travelers did full justice to the meal, notwithstanding this. +Deciding there was nothing to be gained by staying in that vicinity, +the professor started the ship off again. + +They traveled several hundred miles in the air, and, as the afternoon +was coming to a close, Jack, who was in charge of the conning tower, +spied, just ahead of them, another village. + +"We will descend there for the night," the professor said. "Does there +seem to be any sign of life about?" + +"None," replied Mark, who was observing through a telescope the town +they were approaching. "It's as dead as the other one." + +The airship settled down in a field back of some of the mound houses. + +"Now for supper!" cried Jack. "I'm as hungry as----" + +He stopped short, for, seeming to rise from the very ground, all about +the ship, there appeared a throng of men. And such men as they were! +For not one was less than ten feet tall, and some were nearly fifteen! + +"The giants have us!" cried Bill, as he saw the horde of creatures +surrounding the ship. + + + + +CHAPTER XXV + +HELD BY THE ENEMY + + +"KEEP the doors closed!" cried the professor. "It is our only hope! I +will send the ship up again!" + +But it was too late. Washington, who had obeyed the signal from the +conning tower to shut off the engines, had disconnected most of them +so they could not be started again save from the main room. At the +same time there came a yell of dismay from the colored man, who had +slid back the steel covering of the main side entrance to the Mermaid. + +"I'm caught!" cried Washington. + +As the professor and the boys hurried from the tower, they could hear +a struggle from where Washington was, and his voice calling: + +"Let me go! Let me go!" + +Reaching the engine room, which opened directly on the side entrance, +the professor saw a pair of enormous hands and arms dragging poor +Washington, feet first, out of the ship. Bill and Tom were crouched in +one corner, pale with fright. + +"Wait until I get my gun!" cried Andy, as he ran for his rifle. + +"Hold on!" called the professor in a loud voice. "It will be folly to +shoot them! We must try strategy!" + +Washington's cries ceased as he was drawn entirely from the ship, the +giant hands disappearing at the same time. + +"Follow me!" yelled Mr. Henderson, running out of the door. + +Hardly knowing what they did, the boys went after him, and their +hearts almost stopped beating in fright as they saw the terrible +things, which, in the glare of the changing lights, were on every side +of them. + +For the men were very repulsive looking. They there attired in +clothes, very similar in cut to those worn by the travelers, and which +seemed to be made of some sort of cloth. But they were loose and baggy +and only added to the queer appearance of the giants. Veritable giants +they were too. Their faces seemed as large as kegs, and they were so +clumsy in shape that Mark, even, frightened as he was, exclaimed: + +"They look like men made of putty!" At the same time he saw they bore +a resemblance to the creature he had observed on the hill top. + +"What shall we do?" asked Andy of the professor. "They are really +carrying Washington away!" + +Three of the giants were dragging the colored man along the ground, +while the other terrible beings stood about as if waiting to see the +outcome of the first sally. + +"I will try to speak to them," Mr. Henderson said. "I know several +languages. They may understand one." + +But before he could start on his parley a surprising thing happened. +There was a struggle in the little group about Washington. The colored +man seemed to be fighting, though the odds, it would appear, were too +great to enable him to accomplish anything. But, making a desperate +effort to escape, Washington quickly wrenched himself free from the +giants' hands and then, striking out with his fists, knocked the three +down, one after another. + +"I never knew Washington was so strong!" exclaimed Jack. + +"Nor I," put in Mark. "Why I should think the men could carry him in +one arm as if he was a baby." + +The three giants rose slowly to their feet. They uttered strange +cries, and motioned with their hands toward the professor, the boys, +and the others in the crowd. + +"Look out! They're goin' t' grab yo'!" cried Washington. + +Three of the giants approached Mark, and a like number closed in on +Jack. + +"Back to the ship!" cried the professor. "We must defend ourselves!" + +But by this time the big men had grabbed the two boys. Then a strange +thing took place. Mark and Jack, though they felt that the giants must +overcome them in a test of strength, struggled with all their might +against being captured. They fought, as a cornered rat will fight, +though it knows the odds to be overwhelming. But in this case the +unexpected happened. + +Both boys found they could easily break the holds of the giants, and +Mark, by a vigorous effort, pushed the three men away from him, one at +a time violently so that they fell in a heap, one on top of the other. + +"Hurrah! We can fight 'em!" cried Mark. "Don't be afraid. They're like +mush! They're putty men!" + +And, so it seemed, the giants were. Though big in size they were +flabby and had nothing like the muscle they should have had in +proportion to their build. They went down like meal sacks and were +slow to rise. + +Jack, seeing how successful his comrade was, attacked the three giants +who were striving to make him a captive. He succeeded in disposing of +them, knocking one down so hard that the man was unable to rise until +his companions helped him. + +"That's the way!" cried Washington. "They're soft as snow men!" + +The vanquished giants set up a sort of roar, which was answered by +their fellows, and soon there was a terrible din. + +"All get together!" called the professor. "They are evidently going to +make a rush for us. If we stand by one another we may fight them off, +though they outnumber us a hundred to one. Besides it will soon be +dark, and we may be able to escape!" + +Washington, Jack and Mark retreated toward the ship, in the direction +of which the others had also made their way. The big men had gathered +in a compact mass and were advancing on the adventurers. + +"What do you suppose makes them so soft?" asked Mark. "I believe I +could manage half a dozen." + +"It must be the effect of the climate and conditions here," the +professor replied. "Probably they have to be big to stand the pressure +of the thick water, and the increased attraction of gravitation. Then +too, being without the weight of the atmosphere to which we are +accustomed, they have probably expanded. If they were to go up to +earth, they might shrink to our size." + +"Do you think that possible?" + +"Of course. Why do you ask?" + +"Nothing in particular," replied Mark. But to himself, he added: "That +would explain it all." + +It was getting dusk now. The travelers had reached their ship, and +rushed inside and tried to close the doors in the face of the +advancing horde. But, by this time the giants were so close that one +or two of them thrust their big feet in, and prevented this movement. +At the same time they set up a great howling. + +"Quick!" cried the professor. "We must start the ship and get away!" + +"I can't close the door!" yelled Washington, who had been the last to +enter. + +"Never mind that! Go up with it open! Drag them along if they won't +let go!" answered Mr. Henderson, as he ran toward the engine room. + +There was a sudden rush among the giants, and a sound as if something +was being thrown over the top and ends of the ship. Mark turned the +gas machine on, while Jack worked the negative gravity apparatus. They +waited for the ship to rise. + +"Why don't we go up?" asked the professor. + +"'Cause they've caught us!" called out Washington. + +"Caught us? How?" + +"They've thrown ropes over the top and ends of the ship, and fastened +them to their big houses!" + +Running to a side window the professor saw that the Mermaid was +fastened down by a score of cables, each one six inches thick. They +were held captives by the enemy. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI + +A FRIEND INDEED + + +THOUGH the giants, man for man, were no match for the travelers, +collectively the horde proved too much. They had swarmed about the +ship, and, by passing the big cables over her, effectively held her +down. + +"Let me get out and I'll cut 'em!" cried Andy. "We must get away from +these savages!" + +"No, no, don't go out!" exclaimed the professor. "They would +eventually kill you, though you might fight them off for a time. We +must wait and see what develops. They can have no object in harming +us, as we have not injured them." + +"I'd rather fight 'em," insisted the old hunter. + +But the professor had his way and Andy was forced to obey. The giants +had withdrawn their big feet from the side door and Washington had +closed it. But nothing else had been accomplished, and the ship could +not rise. The gas and negative gravity machines were stopped, as they +were only under a useless strain. + +Suddenly, the colored lights which had been growing dimmer and dimmer, +with the approach of night, went out altogether. Almost as suddenly, +Mark, who was watching the giants from the conning tower, as they made +fast the loose ends of the cables, saw them make a dash for the mound +houses. + +"They're afraid of the dark!" he cried. "Come on! We can go out now +and loosen the ropes!" + +He hurried to tell the professor what he had noticed. + +"Good!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "Perhaps we can escape now!" + +They waited a few minutes, listening to the sound of many big feet +running away from the ship, and then, Bill cautiously opened the side +door. The others were behind him, waiting, with knives and hatchets in +their hands, to rush out and cut the restraining cables. + +"All ready!" called Bill. "There doesn't seem to be a one in sight!" + +He stepped out but no sooner had he set foot on the ground than there +came a thud, and Bill went down as if some one had knocked his feet +from under him. + +"Go back! Go back!" he cried. "They hit me with something. I'm being +smothered!" + +"Bring a light!" cried the professor, for the sally had been started +in the dark. + +Jack brought the portable electric it having been repaired and flashed +it out of the door. In the gleam of it, Bill was seen lying prostrate, +half covered by an orange, about half as big as himself. The fruit was +as soft and mushy as some of the giants themselves, or Bill would not +have fared so easily. + +Then, as the others stood watching, and while Bill arose and wiped +some of the juice from his face, there came a regular shower of the +monstrous oranges. + +"Get inside quick! We'll be smothered under them!" Mr. Henderson +cried. + +Pausing only to rescue Bill, the adventurers retreated inside the +ship, and made fast the door. Outside they could hear the thud as the +oranges were thrown, some hitting the Flying Mermaid and many dropping +all about her. + +"I guess they are going to have things their own way," observed Bill, +as he gazed down on his clothes, which were covered with juice from +the fruit. + +The night was one of anxiety. The travelers took turns standing guard, +but nothing more occurred. The giants remained in their houses, and +the heavy ropes still held the ship fast. + +"We must hold a council of war," the professor decided as they +gathered at breakfast, which was far from a cheerful meal. + +With the return of the colored lights the giants again made their +appearance. They came swarming from the mound houses, and a great +crowd they proved to be. Several thousand at least, Jack estimated, +and when he went up into the conning tower and took a survey he could +see the strange and terrible creatures pouring in from the surrounding +country. + +"I'm afraid there will be trouble," he said, as he came down and +reported what he had seen. + +"We must hold a council of war," repeated the professor. "Has any one +anything to suggest?" + +"Get a lot of powder and blow 'em up!" cried Andy. + +"Arrange electric wires and shock 'em to death!" was Bill's plan. + +"Can't we slip the ropes in some way and escape?" asked Jack. "I don't +believe we can successfully fight the giants. They are too many, even +if they are weak, individually." + +"I think you're right there," Mr. Henderson said. "We must try some +sort of strategy, but what? That is the question." + +For a few minutes no one spoke. They were all thinking deeply, for +their lives might hang in the balance. + +"I think I have a plan," said Mark, at length. "Did we bring any +diving suits with us?" + +"There may be one or two," the professor replied. "But what good will +they do?" + +"Two of us could put them on," continued Mark, "and, as they afford +good protection from any missiles like fruit, we could crawl out on +the deck of the ship. From there, armed with hatchets or knives we +could cut the ropes. Then the ship could rise." + +"That's a good plan!" cried the scientist. "We'll try it at once." + +Search revealed that two diving suits were among the stores of the +Mermaid. Jack and Mark wanted to be the ones to don them, but as the +suits were rather large, and as the professor thought it would take +more strength than the boys had to do the work, it was decided that +Andy and Washington should make the attempt to cut the ropes. + +The hunter and colored man lost little time in getting into the modern +armor. In the meanwhile Jack, who had been posted as a lookout, +reported that there seemed to be some activity among the giants. They +were running here and there, and some seemed to be going off toward +the woods, that were not far away. + +"Now work quickly," urged the professor. "We will be on the watch, and +as soon as the last rope is cut we will start the machinery and send +the ship up. We will not wait for you to come back inside, so hold +fast as best you can when the Mermaid rises." + +"We will," answered Andy, just before the big copper helmet was +fastened on his head, and Washington nodded to show he understood. + +The two who were to attempt the rescue of their comrades were soon on +deck. In the conning tower Jack and the professor kept anxious watch, +while Mark, Bill and Tom were at the various machines, ready, at the +signal, to start the engines. + +The giants had now become so interested in whatever plan they had +afoot, that they paid little attention to the ship. Consequently +Washington and Andy, crawling along the deck in their diving suits, +did not, at first attract any attention. + +In fact they had cut several of the big ropes, and it began to look as +if the plan would succeed, particularly as they were partly hidden +from view by the upper gas holder. They were working with feverish +haste, sawing away at the big cables with keen knives. + +"I guess we'll beat 'em yet!" cried Jack. + +"I hope so," replied the professor. "It looks----" + +He stopped short, for at that moment a cry arose from the midst of the +giants, and one of them pointed toward the ship. An instant later the +air was darkened with a flight of big oranges, which the queer +creatures seemed to favor as missiles. Probably they found stones too +heavy. + +"Well, those things can't hurt 'em much with those heavy suits on," +observed Mr. Henderson. "There, Washington got one right on the head +that time, and it didn't bother him a bit." + +Jack had seen the fruit strike the big copper helmet and observed that +the colored man only moved his head slightly in order to get rid of +the orange. + +In fact the giants, seeing for themselves that this mode of warfare +was not going to answer, since the two men on the ship continued to +cut the restraining cables, gave it up. There was a good deal of +shouting among them, and a number ran here and there, seemingly +gathering up long poles. + +"I wonder if they are going to try the flailing method, and beat poor +Andy and Washington," said Mr. Henderson. "It looks so." + +The two rescuers were now about a quarter through their hard task. The +throwing of the oranges had ceased. But the giants were up to a new +trick. They divided into two sections, one taking up a position on one +side of the ship, and the other on the opposite. There were about two +hundred in each crowd, while the others in the horde drew some +distance back. + +"They're up to some queer dodge," observed Jack. "What are they +placing those sticks to their mouths for?" + +The professor observed the throng curiously for a few seconds. Then he +exclaimed: + +"They are using blow-guns! They are going to shoot arrows at +Washington and Andy! We must get them in at once!" + +He darted toward a door that opened from the conning tower out on the +deck. + +"Don't go!" cried Jack. "It's too late! They are beginning to blow!" + +He pointed to the throng of giants. The professor could see their +cheeks puffed out as the big creatures filled their lungs with air and +prepared to expel it through the hollow tubes. + +Then there came a sound as if a great wind was blowing. It howled and +roared over the ship, not unlike a hurricane in its fury. But there +was no flight of arrows through the air, such as would have come from +regular blow guns. + +"That is strange," said the professor. He thought for a moment. "I +have it!" he cried. "They are trying to blow Washington and Andy, off +the ship by the power of their breaths! They are not blowing arrows at +them! My, but they must have strong lungs!" + +And, in truth, that was the plan of the giants. The hollow tubes, made +from some sort of big weed, sent a blast of air at the two men on the +ship's deck, that made them lie flat and cling with both hands to +avoid being sent flying into the midst of the giants, on one side or +the other. But the giants had reckoned without the weight of the +diving suits, and it was those, with the big lead soles of the shoes, +that helped to hold Washington and Andy in place. + +"Come back! Came back!" cried the professor, opening the conning tower +door and calling to the two brave men. "Come back, both of you! Do you +hear?" + +As the portal slid back the rush of air was almost like that of a +cyclone. Then it suddenly ceased, as the giants saw their plan was not +likely to succeed. + +But now there arose from the outer circle of the horde a shout of +triumph. It was caused by the return of those who had, a little while +before, hurried off to the woods. They came back bearing big trees, +tall and slender, stripped of their branches, so that they resembled +flag staffs. It took a dozen giants to carry each one. + +The whole throng was soon busy laying the poles in a row in front of +the ship. + +"What can they be up to now?" asked Jack. + +"It looks as if they were going to slide the ship along on rollers," +the professor replied. + +Sure enough this was the giant's plan. A few minutes later those in +the Mermaid felt her moving forward, as the giants, massed behind, +shoved. On to the poles she slid. The ropes were loosened to permit +this, but not enough to enable the boat to rise. + +Then the travelers felt the ship being lifted up. + +"They are going to carry us away, with the poles for a big stretcher!" +cried the professor. + +Looking from the side windows the boys saw that a great crowd of the +big men were on either side of the Mermaid, each giant grasping a +pole, and lifting. Farther out were others, holding the ends of the +cables which Washington and Andy had not succeeded in cutting. + +The ship was being carried along by a thousand or more giants, as the +ancient warriors, slain in battle, were carried home on the spears of +their comrades. + +"This is the end of the Mermaid!" murmured Mr. Henderson in sorrowful +tones. + +As they looked from the conning tower the professor and the two boys +observed a commotion among the leaders of the giants. They seemed to +be wavering. Suddenly the forward part of the ship sank, as those +ahead laid their poles down on the ground. Then those behind did the +same, and the Mermaid, came to a stop, and once more rested on the +earth. + +"What does this mean?" asked the scientist in wonder. + +All at once the entire crowd of giants threw themselves down on their +faces, and there, standing at the bow of the ship, was a giant, half +again as large as any of the others. He was clad in a complete suit of +golden armor on which the changing lights played with beautiful +effect, and in his hand he held an immense golden sword. He pointed +the weapon at the ship as if he had raised it in protection, and his +hand was stretched in commanding gesture over the prostrate giants. + +"Perhaps he has come to save us!" cried Mark. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII + +A GREAT JOURNEY + + +SUCH indeed, seemed to be the case. The golden-armored giant, after +standing for a few moments in an attitude of command, waved his sword +three times about his head, and uttered a command, in a voice that +sounded like thunder. Then the prostrate ones arose, and, making low +bows hurried away in all directions. + +Watching them disappear, the golden one sheathed his weapon and +approached the ship. He caught sight of the professor and the two boys +in the conning tower, for Mark had gone there when he found the ship +being transported, and held up his two hands, the palms outward. + +"It is the sign of peace in the language all natives employ," said the +professor. "I think I shall trust him." + +Followed by the boys he descended from the little platform in the +tower, and to the door that opened on the deck. + +"Shall we go out?" he asked. + +"We can't be much worse off," replied Mark. "Let's chance it." + +So, not without many misgivings, they slid back the portal and stepped +out to face the strange and terrible being who had so suddenly come to +their rescue. + +The giant in the golden armor did not seem surprised to see them. In +fact he acted as though he rather expected them. He continued to hold +up one hand, with the palm, outward, while, with the other, he removed +his helmet and bowed low. Then he cast his sword on the ground and +advanced toward the ship. When within ten feet he sat down on the +ground, and this brought his head nearer the earth, so that his +auditors could both see and hear him to better advantage. + +As soon as the giant saw the travelers were outside their ship he +began to speak to them in a voice, which, though he might have meant +it to be low and gentle, was like the bellowing of a bull. At the same +time he made many gestures, pointing to the ship, to himself and to +Mark. + +"What is he saying, professor?" asked Jack. + +"I can't understand all he says," Mr. Henderson replied. "He uses some +words derived from the Latin and some from the Greek. But by piecing +it out here and there, and by interpreting his motions I am able to +get at something." + +"And what is it all about?" + +"It is a strange story," the scientist replied. "He has only gone +about half way through it. Wait until he finishes and I will tell +you." + +The golden-armored giant, who had stopped in his narrative while Jack +was speaking, resumed. His gestures became more rapid, and his words +came faster. Several times Mr. Henderson held up his hand for him to +cease, while he puzzled out what was meant. + +At one point, the professor seemed much startled, and motioned for the +strange being to repeat the last part of his discourse. When this had +been done Mr. Henderson shook his head as though in doubt. + +At length the story was finished, and the lone giant, for there were +no others in sight now, folded his arms and seemed to await what the +professor's answer might be. Mr. Henderson turned to the boys, and to +the others of the Mermaid's company, who, by this time, had joined +him, and said: + +"Friends, I have just listened to a strange story. It is so strange +that, but for the fact that our own adventures are verging on the +marvelous, I could hardly believe it. In the first place, this man +here is the king of this country. That is why all the other natives +obeyed him. + +"In the second place it seems he has been a passenger in our boat, and +came here from the earth's surface with us!" + +"What's that?" cried Jack. + +"That explains the strange happenings!" ejaculated Mark. "No wonder I +could never solve the secret of the storeroom." + +"You are right, it does," replied Mr. Henderson. "I will not go into +all the details of how it happened, but it seems the big hole through +which we came is only one of two entrances to this inner world. Rather +it is the entrance, and there is another, close to it, which is the +exit. Through the latter a big stream of water spouts up, just as one +pours down through the opening we used. + +"Hankos, which is the name of the king, was for many years a student +of science. He longed to see where the big stream of upward spurting +water went, and wanted to know whence came the down-pouring one. So he +undertook a daring experiment. + +"He constructed a great cylinder, and, keeping his plans a secret, +conveyed it to the spouting water, entered it, and, by means of +pulleys and levers, after he had shut himself inside, cast himself +into the up-shooting column. He took along compressed air cylinders to +supply an atmosphere he could breathe, and some food to eat, for it +appears our giant friends are something of inventors in their way. The +current of water bore him to the surface of the earth, and he was cast +up on the ocean, in what was probably taken for a waterspout if any +one saw it. + +"Then a strange thing happened. No sooner did Hankos open his +cylinder, which served him as a boat, than he lost his gigantic size, +owing to the difference of the two atmospheres. He became almost of +the same size as ourselves, except that his skin hung in great folds +on him, and he seemed like a wrinkled old man. His clothes too, were a +world too large. + +"He had a terrible time before he reached shore, and a hard one after +it, for his strange appearance turned almost every one against him. He +was sorry he had ventured to solve the mystery of the up-shooting +stream of water, for he was worse than an outcast. + +"Then he began to plan to get back to his own inner world. But he +could not find the downward stream, and, not knowing the language of +the countries where he landed, he had no means of ascertaining. He +traveled from place to place, always seeking for something that would +lead him back to his own country. + +"Finally he heard of us, and of our ship, though how I do not know, as +I thought I had kept it a great secret. By almost superhuman struggles +he made his way to our island. He says he concealed himself aboard the +Mermaid the night before we sailed, but I hardly believe it possible. +It seems----" + +"He did it, for I saw him!" interrupted Mark. + +"You saw him!" cried Mr. Henderson. + +Then Mark told of the many things that had puzzled him so, how he had +seen the queer figure slinking aboard the boat, of the disappearance +of food from time to time, and of the strange noises in the storeroom. + +"That bears out what he told me," the professor said. "Hankos says he +used to steal out nights and take what food he could get, and he also +mentions some one, answering to Mark's description, who nearly +discovered him once as he hurried back into the apartment. + +"However, it seems to be true, since Mark confirms it. At any rate +Hankos stayed in hiding, and made the entire trip with us, and, just +as we all became overcome with the strange gas he escaped, having +begun to expand to his original giant size, and being unable to remain +any longer in his cramped quarters." + +"That's so, he did!" cried Mark. "I saw him come out of the place just +before I lost my senses. It was a terrible sight, and none of you +would believe me when I told you some of the occurrences afterward." + +"You must forgive us for that," the professor said. "We have learned +much since then." + +"What did Hankos do after he left the ship when it landed in this +country?" asked Jack. + +"He traveled until he came to this village, which is the chief one of +this country," replied the professor. "Part of the time he followed us +at a distance, being able to travel very fast." + +Mark remembered the strange figure of a giant he had seen on the hill +tops several times, and knew that he had been observing the being who +had played such a queer part in their lives. + +"When he came back among his own people," went on Mr. Henderson, "they +would not receive him at first, believing him to be an impostor. But +Hankos convinced them of his identity and was allowed to don the +golden armor, which is the badge of kingship. He had only been in +office for a little while when he heard of the arrival of the strange +thing, which turned out to be our ship. He recognized it from the +description, and, learning that we were likely to be sacrificed to the +fury and ignorance of the giants, he hurried here and saved our lives. + +"He says he can never thank us enough for being the means whereby he +was able to get back to his own country, and says the freedom of this +whole inner world is ours. He has given orders that we are to go +wherever we like, and none will molest us. He tells me the land is a +wonderful one, compared to our own, and urges us to make a long +journey. He would like to go with us, only, now that he has resumed +his natural size, he can not get inside the ship." + +"Hurrah for King Hankos!" cried Jack and the others joined him in a +hearty cheer. + +The giant in the golden armor evidently understood the compliment +which was paid him, for he waved his helmet in the air and responded +with a shout of welcome that made the ground tremble. + +Hankos waited until the professor had translated all of the story to +the other travelers. Then the genial giant began to talk some more, +and the professor listened intently. + +"He says," spoke Mr. Henderson to his friends, "that we will be +supplied with all the fruit we want, and with the best of the houses +to sleep in on our journey. He also tells me he has great stores of +shining stones and piles of the metal of which his armor is made, and +that we are welcome to as much as we want. If this means unlimited +gold and diamonds, we may make our fortunes." + +"Jest let me git ma' hand on a few sparklers an' I'll quit work!" +exclaimed Washington. + +"I have told him," the scientist went on, "that we will take advantage +of his kind offer. We will start on our trip in a day or so, after we +have looked over the ship to see if it is not damaged. He tells me the +gold and sparkling stones are several thousand miles away, on top of a +high mountain. We will make that our objective point." + +The interview between the king and Mr. Henderson having ended, the +former waved his sword in the air and the swarm of big men came back. +They had been hiding back in the woods. Now their manner was very +different. They carefully removed the rollers and ropes, and soon +there was brought to the adventurers an immense pile of fine fruits. +If our friends had stayed there a year they could not have eaten it +all. The giants were judging the appetites of the travelers by their +own. + +That night the adventurers slept more soundly than they had since +entering the strange world. They felt they had nothing to fear from +the giants. In the morning they were not molested, though big crowds +gathered to look at the ship. But they kept back a good distance. The +machinery was found to be in good shape, save for a few repairs, and +when these were made, the professor announced he would start on a long +journey. + +For several weeks after that the travelers swung about in their ship, +sometimes sailing in the air and again on big seas and lakes viewing +the wonders of the inner world. They were many and varied, and the +professor collected enough material for a score of books which he said +he would write when he got back to the outer world once more. + +One afternoon, as they were sailing over a vast stretch of woodland, +which did not seem to be inhabited, Mr. Henderson, looking at one of +the gages on the wall, asked: + +"Boys do you know how far you have traveled underground?" + +"How far?" asked Jack, who hated to guess riddles. + +"More than four thousand miles," was the answer. + +"But we haven't come to that mountain of gold and diamonds," said +Mark. "I am anxious to see that." + +"Have patience," replied the professor. "I have not steered toward it +yet. There are other things to see." + +Just then Washington's voice could be heard calling from the conning +tower: + +"We're coming to a big mountain!" + + + + +CHAPTER XXVIII + +THE TEMPLE OF TREASURE + + +"WHAT'S that?" fairly yelled the professor. + +"We am propelling ourselves in a contiguous direction an' in close +proximity to an elevated portion of th' earth's surface which rises in +antiguous proximity t' th' forward part of our present means of +locomotion!" said the colored man in a loud voice. + +"Which means there may be a collision," the professor said, as he and +the boys hurried toward the tower. + +"Jest what I said," retorted Washington. "What'll I do?" + +"Send the ship a little higher," answered Mr. Henderson. "We mustn't +hit any mountains." + +Washington forced more gas into the holder, and speeded the negative +gravity machine up some, so that the Mermaid, which was flying rather +low, ascended until it was in no danger of colliding with the peak +which reared its lofty height just ahead of them. + +As the ship sailed slowly over the mountain, Mark gazed down and +exclaimed: + +"Doesn't that look like the ruins of some building?" + +The professor took a pair of field glasses from a rack in the wall and +took a long view. + +"It must be the place," he said in a low voice. + +"What place?" asked Jack. + +"The temple of treasure," was the answer. "Hankos told me it was on +top of the highest mountain in the land, and this must be it, for it +is the loftiest place we have seen. But we must be careful, for there +is danger down there." + +"What kind?" asked Mark. + +"The place was long ago deserted by the giants," Mr. Henderson went +on. "Ages ago it was one of their storehouses for treasure, but there +were wars among themselves, Hankos said, and this part of the country +was laid waste. Savage beasts took up their abode in the temple, and +since then, in spite of the great size of the giants, they have not +dared to venture here. If we brave the animals we may have all the +gold and diamonds we can take away." + +"Then for one, I'm willin' t' go down an' begin th' extermination at +once," put in Andy. "I've always wanted t' be rich." + +"We must proceed cautiously," the professor said. "We are ill prepared +to fight any such beasts as we saw at the big geyser. At the same time +they may have deserted this place. I think we will lower the ship down +over the temple, and spend several hours in observation. Then, if +nothing develops, we can enter and see if the treasure is there." + +This plan was voted a good one, and the Mermaid after having been +steered directly over the ruined temple, was brought to a halt, and +enough gas let out so that it fell to about fifty feet in the air +above it. + +The adventurers began their watch. The afternoon waned and there were +no signs of any beasts in or about the temple. + +"I reckon we can take a chance," said Andy, who was anxious to get his +hands on some diamonds. + +"Better wait until morning," counseled Mr. Henderson. "It will soon be +dark, and it doesn't look like a nice place to go stumbling about in +by moonlight." + +So, though all but the scientist were anxious, they had to wait until +the night had passed. Several times Washington got up to see if the +temple had, by any chance, taken wings during the long hours of +darkness, but each time he found it was still in place. + +"Seems laik it'll never come mornin'." he said. + +But dawn came at length, and, after a hasty breakfast, preparations to +enter the temple were made. Andy loaded his gun for "bear" as he +expressed it, and the boys each took a revolver. + +The ship was lowered to as level a place as could be found, and then, +seeing that everything was in readiness for a quick departure, the +professor led the way out of the Mermaid. + +The entrance to the temple was through a big arched gateway. Some of +the stones had fallen down, and the whole structure looked as if it +might topple over at any moment. + +"Go carefully," cautioned Mr. Henderson, "Watch on all sides and up +above. Better let Andy and me go ahead." + +The scientist and the old hunter led the way. Through the arch they +went, and emerged into what must at one time have been a magnificent +courtyard. Before them was the temple proper, a vast structure, with +an opening through which fifty men might have marched abreast. But the +doors were gone, and the portal was but a black hole. + +"I hope there ain't any ghosts in there," said Washington, with a +shiver. + +"Nonsense!" exclaimed the professor. "There may be things as bad, but +there are no such things as ghosts. Have your gun ready, Andy." + +With every sense on the alert, the old hunter advanced. Every one was +a bit nervous, and, as Mark and Jack afterward admitted, they half +expected some terrible beast to rush out at them. But nothing of the +kind happened, and they went into the interior of the temple. + +At first it was so dark they could see nothing. There were vast dim +shapes on every side, and from the hollow echo of their footsteps they +judged the roof must be very high and the structure big in every way. + +Then, as their eyes became used to the darkness, they could make out, +up front, something like an altar or pulpit. + +"Perhaps that's where they offered up the gold and diamonds as a +sacrifice to their gods," spoke Mark in a whisper. + +"Sacrifice to their gods!" came back a hundred echoes and the sound +made every one shudder. + +"Oh!" said Washington, in a low voice. + +"Oh! Oh! Oh!" repeated the echoes in voices of thunder. + +"Well, this is pleasant," spoke Andy, in his natural tones, and, to +the surprise of all there was no echo. It was only when a person +whispered or spoke low that the sound was heard. After that they +talked naturally. + +"You stay here, and Andy and I will go up front and see what there +is," said Mr. Henderson. "Be on your guard, and if you hear us coming +back in a hurry, run!" + +It was with no little feeling of nervousness that the boys, Bill, Tom +and Washington watched the two men move off in the darkness. They +could hear their footsteps on the stone flags and could dimly see +them. + +"They must be almost to the altar by this time," said Mark, after a +long pause. + +Hardly had he spoken than there came a loud, sound from where Mr. +Henderson and Andy had gone. It was as if some giant wings were +beating the air. Then came shrill cries and the voice of the old +hunter could be heard calling: + +"Kneel down, Professor! Let me get a shot at the brute!" + +Those waiting in the rear of the temple huddled closer together. What +terrible beast could have been aroused? + +The next instant the place seemed illuminated as if by a lightning +flash, and a sound as of a thousand thunder claps resounded. + +"I think I winged him!" cried Andy's voice, and the boys knew he had +fired at something. + +Then there came a crash, and from the roof of the old temple a dozen +stones toppled off to one side, letting in a flood of colored light. + +By this illumination could be seen, flapping through the big space +overhead, an enormous bat, as large as three eagles. And, as it flew +about in a circle it gave utterance to shrill cries. + +"Bang!" Andy's gun spoke again, and the bat with a louder cry than +before, darted through the hole in the roof made by the falling +stones, which had been loosened by the concussion from the rifle. + +"Come on!" cried the old hunter. "That was the guardian of the +treasure! We are safe now!" + +Then, in the light which streamed through the broken roof, the +adventurers could see, heaped up on a great altar, behind which sat a +horrible graven image, piles of yellow metal, and sparkling stones. In +little heaps they were, arranged as if offerings to the terrible god +of the giants. There were bars and rings of gold, dishes of odd shape, +and even weapons. As for the sparkling stones, they were of many +colors, but the white ones were more plentiful than all the others. + +"Gold and diamonds! Diamonds and gold!" murmured the professor. "There +is the ransom of many kings in this ancient temple." + +"Wish I had a big bag!" exclaimed Washington, as he began filling all +his pockets with the precious metal and gems. "If I had a-thought I'd +have brought a dress-suit case!" + +"A dress-suit case full of diamonds!" exclaimed Mark. + +Then he too, as did all the others, fell to filling his pockets with +the wealth spread so lavishly before them. There was the riches of a +whole world in one place and no one but themselves to take it. + +For several minutes no one spoke. The only sound was the rattle of the +stones and the clink of gold, and when some of the diamonds dropped on +the floor they did not bother to gather them up. There were too many +on the altar. + +"We will be rich for life!" gasped old Andy, who had been poor all his +years. + +"I can't carry any more!" gasped Washington. "I'm goin' back for----" + +What he was going back for he never said, for, at that instant, +happening to look up at the hole in the roof, he gave a startled try: + +"Here come the terrible bats!" + +They all gazed upward. Through the opening they could see a great +flock of the awful birds, headed for the temple, and they were led by +one which seemed to fly with difficulty. It was the guardian of the +treasure that Andy had wounded. + +"Quick! We must get out of here!" shouted the old hunter. "They are +big enough and strong enough to tear us all to pieces. Hurry!" + +Down the centre of the temple they rushed, and not a moment too soon, +for, ere they had passed half way to the entrance, the opening in the +roof was darkened by the coming of the bats, and soon the flapping of +their wings awoke the thundering echoes in the ruined structure, while +their shrill cries struck terror to the hearts of the travelers. + +Up to the altar circled the bats, and then wheeling they flapped down +the dim aisles toward the adventurers. + +"Hurry! Hurry!" shouted Andy, who was in the rear. + +He raised his rifle and fired several shots into the midst of the +terrible creatures. + +A number of the bats were wounded, and the others were so frightened +by the sound of the shots and the flashes of fire that they turned +back. This enabled the fleeing ones to gain the entrance to the +temple, and soon they were outside. + +"To the ship!" yelled Bill. + +"There's little danger now!" called Andy, panting, for the run had +winded him. "They will hardly attack us in the light!" + +And he was right, for, though they could hear the bats flying about +inside the temple, and uttering their cries, none came outside. + +But no one felt like staying near the uncanny structure, and little +time was lost in reaching the Mermaid. Then the doors were fastened, +and the ship was sent high up into the air. + +"Which way?" asked Jack, when Mr. Henderson told him to go to the +conning tower and steer. + +"Back to where we first met the giants," replied the professor. "We +must prepare to start for our own earth again soon." + +"I've almost forgotten how real sunlight looks," thought Jack, as he +headed the ship around the other way. As he turned the levers a big +diamond dropped from his pocket and rolled on the floor. + +"This will be a good reminder of our trip though," he added. + +The travelers, even including Mr. Henderson, were so taken up with +their suddenly acquired riches that they hardly thought of meals. At +the professor's suggestion they tied their gold and stones up in small +packages convenient to carry. + +"Better place them where you can grab them in a hurry in case of +accident," the old scientist went on. "Of course if there should be +too bad an accident they would never be of any use to us down here, +but we'll look on the bright side of things." + +"Do you anticipate any accident?" asked Jack anxiously. + +"No, Oh no," replied Mr. Henderson, but Jack thought the aged man had +something weighing on his mind. + + + + +CHAPTER XXIX + +BACK HOME--CONCLUSION + + +ON and on sped the Mermaid. Now that the travelers felt their journey +accomplished they were anxious to begin the homeward trip. They made a +straight course for the village where they had so nearly met with +disaster, and where the king of the giants had saved them. They went +in a direct line, and did not travel here and there, as they had after +they left the town. Consequently they shortened the route by a great +distance. Yet it was long enough, and when they finally came in sight +of the place the dial registered a trip of five thousand miles +underground. + +It was one evening when they landed almost at the spot whence they had +taken flight eventually to reach the temple of the treasure. Most of +the giants had betaken themselves to their mound houses, but Hankos +was walking in the fields, and, when he caught sight of the airship +hovering above him he waved his great sword in welcome. + +He rushed up to shake hands with the travelers when they came out of +the ship, though to greet him it was only possible for the adventurers +to grasp one of his immense fingers. + +As soon as the greetings were over Hankos began to speak rapidly to +the professor, at the same time going through many strange motions. + +"It is as I feared!" suddenly exclaimed the scientist. + +"What is the matter?" asked Mark. + +"The worst has happened!" went on Mr. Henderson. "The great hole by +which we came into this place has been closed by an earthquake shock!" + +"The hole closed?" repeated Jack. + +"An earthquake shock!" murmured Mark. + +"Then how are we going to get back to earth?" asked old Andy. + +A terrible fear entered the hearts of the travelers. The closing of +the opening by which they had come to the strange world meant, in all +probability that they would have to spend the rest of their lives in +this underground place. + +"What good did it do us to get all those diamonds and that gold?" +asked Mark in a sorrowful tone. + +Hankos began to speak again, using his gestures which were almost as +eloquent as words. The professor watched and listened intently. Then +there seemed to come a more hopeful look to his face. He nodded +vigorously as Hankos went on with what seemed to be an explanation. + +"It's worth trying, at all events!" the scientist exclaimed. "It is +our only hope!" + +"What is?" asked Jack. + +"Friends," began the professor in solemn tones. "I must admit our +plight is desperate. At the same time there is a bare chance of our +getting back to our own earth. As you remember, Hankos went from this +place to the upper regions through the upward spouting column of +water." + +"If we had our submarine we might also," interrupted Jack. "But the +Mermaid isn't built to sail in that fashion." + +"Nor would the Porpoise have served us in this emergency," said the +professor. "It would prove too heavy. But, nevertheless, I think I +have a plan. Now, Mark, you are about to learn the secret of the +storeroom. The real one, not the hiding of Hankos in there, which you +imagined to be the cause of my desire to keep something hidden. When +we planned a trip to this underground world I had a dim idea that we +might meet with trouble. So I planned and made a cylinder lifeboat." + +"A cylinder lifeboat?" repeated Mark. + +"Yes," replied Mr. Henderson. "I have it in the storeroom. I did not +want any of you to see it for fear you would have faint hearts. I +thought there might be no necessity of using it. But, since there is, +we must do our best. I will admit it may be a fearful ordeal, but we +will have to risk something in order to escape. + +"I have in the storeroom a large cylinder, capable of holding us all. +It will also contain food and drink for a month, but we will all have +to go, packed almost like sardines in a box. My plan is to take the +Mermaid to the place where the column of water shoots up. There we +will get into the cylinder, close it, and trust ourselves to the +terrible force that may bring us back to the upper world. What do you +say? Shall we attempt it?" + +For a few seconds no one spoke. Then Jack said slowly: + +"I don't see that we can do anything else. I don't want to stay here +all my life." + +"I wants a chance t' wear some of them sparklers," put in Washington. + +"Then we will make the attempt," the professor added. "Now all aboard +for the place where the water shoots up!" + +Questioning Hankos, the professor learned how to reach the strange +place. It was in the midst of a desolate country where none of the +giants ever went, so afraid were they of the strange phenomenon. + +It was a week's journey. Sometimes the Mermaid flew through the air, +and again it sailed on vast lakes or inland seas. On the trip they met +with big waterfalls and terrible geysers that spouted a mile or more +into the air. They traveled by night as well as day, though it was +necessary to keep a sharp watch. + +Sometimes the ship passed through great flocks of birds that +surrounded her and sought to pierce the aluminum hull with their sharp +beaks and talons. Over the mountains and valleys the ship sailed +until, one evening, there sounded through the air a strange rumbling +sound. + +"It is thunder," said Old Andy. + +"It is the water column," replied the scientist. "We are at the end of +our trip. May the remainder be as successful!" + +The ship was lowered to the surface, as it was deemed best to approach +the column when the lights were shining. No one slept much that night, +for the roaring and rumbling never ceased. + +In the morning the ship was sent forward slowly. Ever and ever the +terrific sound increased, until it was almost deafening. They had to +call to each other to be heard. + +Then, as the Mermaid passed over a mountain, the adventurers saw, in a +valley below them, the up-shooting water. + +It was a vast column, nearly three hundred feet in thickness, and as +solid and white as a shaft of marble. Up, up, up, it went, until it +was lost to sight, but there were no falling drops, and not even a +spray came from the watery shafts. + +"There is a terrible power to it," the professor said. "May it prove +our salvation!" + +The ship was lowered about a hundred feet away from the waterspout. +All around them the ground was vibrating with the force of the fluid. + +"To think that connects with the world above!" exclaimed Jack. + +"It's a good thing for us that it does," Mark answered. + +"We must lose no time," the professor put in. "If the earthquake +destroyed the downward shaft, it may effect this one in time. We must +escape while we can." + +Then, for the first time, he opened the storeroom and the big cylinder +was disclosed to view. It was made of aluminum, and shaped like an +immense cigar. The hull was double, and it was strongly braced. Inside +were padded berths for the occupants, and there was just room enough +for the seven adventurers. Once they had entered they could not move +about, but must stay in their little compartment. + +Compressed air in strong cylinders furnished a means of breathing, and +there were tiny electric lights operated by a storage battery. There +was also a chamber to be filled with the lifting gas. The cylinder was +so arranged that it would float on it's long axis if thrown into the +water. A trap door hermetically sealed gave access to the interior. A +small propeller, worked by compressed air, furnished motive power. + +The food supply consisted of compressed capsules on which a man could +subsist for several days. There was also some water, but not much, +since that can not be compressed and would, therefore, take +considerable room. + +"The only thing for us to do," said the professor, "is to get into the +cylinder, seal it up, and trust to Providence. This is what I intended +to use when we were caught in the draught." + +"How can we get into the column of water after we shut ourselves into +the cylinder?" asked Mark. + +"The cylinder fits into a sort of improvised cannon," said Mr. +Henderson. "It is fired by electricity and compressed air. We will +aim it at the column, press the button and be projected into the midst +of the water. Then----" He did not finish the sentence, but the others +knew what he meant. + +"When are we to start?" asked Mark. + +"As soon as possible," replied the professor. "I must arrange the +cylinder, compress the air and lay out the food supply." + +It took the rest of the day to do this, as the inventor found it would +be advisable to attach a weight to the end of the cylinder, to hold it +upright in the column of water. The weight could be detached +automatically when they were shot up into the midst of the ocean, +where, as Hankos had told them, the column spurted forth. + +Then some food was stored in the tiny ship that was destined to be +their last hope, and some tanks of water were placed in it. + +"I think we are almost ready," Mr. Henderson said about noon the next +day. + +"What about our gold and diamonds?" asked Jack suddenly. "Can we take +them with us in the cylinder?" + +"That's so!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "I forgot about them. I'm afraid +we'll have to leave the riches behind. We will not be able to carry +them and the food we need, for it may be a week or more before we can +leave the cylinder. Gold and diamonds will be a poor substitute for +something to eat." + +"I'm goin' t' take mine!" said Washington with much conviction. "I +might as well starve rich as starve poor!" + +"We may be able to take a few diamonds," the professor answered. "The +gold will be too heavy. Let each one select the largest of the +diamonds he has and put them in his pockets." + +Then began a sorting of the wealth. It was strange, as they recalled +afterward, throwing away riches that would have made millionaires +envious, but it had to be done. All the wealth in the world would not +equal a beef capsule when they were starving, and they realized it. So +they only saved a few pieces of gold as souvenirs, and took the best +of the diamonds. But even then they had a vast fortune with them. + +At last all was in readiness. The cylinder had been placed in the tube +from which it was to be shot gently forth by compressed air, so that +it would fall into the upward spouting column of water. The charge of +compressed air was put in and the electric wires arranged. + +"Are we all ready?" asked Mr. Henderson. + +"I think so," said Jack, in what sounded like a whisper, but which was +loud, only the noise of the water muffled it. + +"Then we had better enter the cylinder," spoke the inventor. "Take a +last look at the Flying Mermaid, boys, for you will never see again +the ship that has borne us many thousand miles. She served us well, +and might again, but for the freak of nature that has placed us in +this position." + +For the first time the adventurers realized that they must abandon the +craft in which they had reached the new world. So it was with no +little feeling of sadness that they climbed up the ladder that had +been arranged and slid down into the cylinder. One by one they took +their places in the padded berths arranged for them. It was a snug +fit, for the professor knew if there was too much room he and the +others might be so tossed about as to be killed. + +Mr. Henderson was the last to enter. Standing at the manhole he took a +final look at his pet creation, the Mermaid. Through the opened +windows the colored lights came, shifting here and there. Outside the +terrible column of water was roaring as if anxious to devour them. + +"Good-bye, Mermaid!" said the professor softly. + +Then he closed down the manhole cover and tightened the screws that +held it in place. He touched a button that turned on the electric +lights and the interior of the cylinder was illuminated with a soft +glow. + +"Are you all ready?" he asked. + +"Jest as much as I ever will be," replied Washington, who, as the +crisis approached, seemed more light-hearted than any of the others. + +"Then here we go!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. + +His fingers touched the button that connected with the electric +machine, which operated the compressed air. + +There sounded a muffled report. Then it seemed to those in the +cylinder that the end of the world had come. They shot upward and +outward, through the top of the conning tower which had been removed. +The cylinder, launched straight at the column of water struck it +squarely and, an instant later was caught in the grasp of the giant +force and hurled toward the upper world. + +Up and up and up the mass of metal with its human freight went. Now it +was spinning like a top, again it shot toward the earth's crust like +an arrow from the archer's bow. + +It was moving with the velocity of a meteor, yet because of being +surrounded with water, and traveling with the same velocity as the +column, there was no friction. Had there been, the heat generated +would have melted the case in an instant. + +For the first few seconds those in the cylinder were dazed by the +sudden rush. Then as it became greater and greater there came a +curious dull feeling, and, one after another lost consciousness. The +terror of the water column, and the frightful speed, had made them +senseless. + + -------- + +It seemed like a month later, though, of course, it could have been +only a few hours or a day at most when Jack opened his eyes. He saw +his companions, white and senseless all around him, and at first +thought they were dead. Then he saw Mark looking at him, and +Washington asked: + +"Is any one livin' 'sides me?" + +"I am," replied Jack decidedly. + +Then, one after another they regained their senses. But they were in a +strange daze, for they were being carried along like a shooting star, +only, as they went at the same rate as did the element carrying them, +they did not realize this. + +"I think I'm hungry," said Bill, who had the best appetite of any of +the travelers. + +"You'll find a beef capsule in the little compartment over your head," +spoke the professor. + +Bill was about to reach for it, when they were all startled by a +sudden side motion of the cylinder. Then came a violent shock, and a +sound as of splashing water. Next the cylinder seemed to be falling, +and, a few minutes later to be shooting upward. Following this there +was another splash and the cylinder began to bob about like a cork on +a mill pond. + +"We have reached the sea! We are afloat on the ocean!" cried the +professor. + +Hurriedly he disengaged himself from the straps that held him to his +bunk. He pushed back the lever that opened the manhole. Into the +opening glowed the glorious sunlight, while to the occupants came the +breath of salt air. + +"Hurrah!" cried Jack. "We are safe at last!" + +"Safe at last!" the professor answered, and then they all gave a +cheer. + +For their cylinder, which might now be termed a boat, was floating on +the great Atlantic. The blue sky was overhead and the air of the sea +fanned their cheeks. + +They had shot up from the underground earth, in the column of water, +had been tossed high into the air, had fallen back when the liquid +shaft broke into spray, had descended into the ocean, gone down a +hundred feet or more, and then had shot up like a cork to bob about +the surface. + +For a week they were afloat, and then they were picked up by a passing +vessel, rather weak and very much cramped, but otherwise in good +shape. They said nothing of their adventures, save to explain that +they were experimenting in a new kind of boat. About a month later, +for the ship that had rescued them was a slow sailer, they were back +on the island whence that wonderful voyage was begun. + + -------- + +"Well, we solved the mystery of the center of the earth," remarked +Jack, one evening, when they were gathered in the old shack where so +many wonderful adventures had been planned. + +"Yes, we did," said Mr. Henderson. "And no one else is ever likely to +go there." + +"Why?" + +"Because the only way of getting there was destroyed by the +earthquake, and no one could ever force his way down through that +upward-shooting column of water." + +"That's so. Well, we have the diamonds, anyway," spoke Mark. "They +ought to make us rich." + +And the jewels did, for the stones proved to be of great value, even +though the adventurers had saved only a few of the many they found in +the ruined temple. + +But there was money enough so that they all could live in comfort; the +rest of their lives. As the professor was getting quite old, and +incapable of making any more wonderful inventions, he closed up his +workshop and settled down to a quiet life. As for Washington, Andy, +and Bill and Tom, they invested their money received from the sale of +the diamonds in different business ventures, and each one did well. + +"I am going in for a good education," said Jack to Mark. + +"Just what I am going to do," answered his chum. "And after we've got +that----" He paused suggestively. + +"We'll go in for inventing airships, or something like that, eh?" + +"Yes. We've learned a great deal from Mr. Henderson, and in the course +of time we ought to be able to turn out something even more wonderful +than the Electric Monarch, the Porpoise, or the Flying Mermaid." + +"Yes, and when we've invented something better----" + +"We'll take another trip." + +"Right you are!" + +And then the two chums shook hands warmly; and here we will say +good-bye. + + + + +THE END. + + + + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Five Thousand Miles Underground, by Roy Rockwood + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FIVE THOUSAND MILES UNDERGROUND *** + +***** This file should be named 4994.txt or 4994.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/4/9/9/4994/ + +Produced by Jim Weiler + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/20120829-4994.zip b/old/20120829-4994.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5d0888f --- /dev/null +++ b/old/20120829-4994.zip diff --git a/old/ftmun10.txt b/old/ftmun10.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..254463f --- /dev/null +++ b/old/ftmun10.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6518 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Five Thousand Miles Underground, by Roy Rockwood + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: Five Thousand Miles Underground + +Author: Roy Rockwood + +Release Date: January, 2004 [EBook #4994] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on April 7, 2002] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, FIVE THOUSAND MILES UNDERGROUND *** + + + + +This eBook was produced by Jim Weiler, xooqi.com + + + + Five Thousand Miles Underground + + Or + +The Mystery of the Centre of the Earth + +by Roy Rockwood, 1908 + + CHAPTER I + + WASHINGTON BACKS OUT + +"WASHINGTON! I say Washington!" + +Throughout a big shed, filled for the most part with huge pieces of +machinery, echoed the voice of Professor Amos Henderson. He did not +look up from a small engine over which he was bending. + +"Washington! Where are you? Why don't you answer me?" + +From somewhere underneath an immense pile of iron, steel and aluminum +came the voice of a colored man. + +"Yas sir, Perfesser, I'se goin' t' saggasiate my bodily presence in +yo' contiguous proximity an' attend t' yo' immediate conglomerated +prescriptions at th' predistined period. Yas, sir!" + +"Well, Washington, if you had started when you began that long speech +you would have been at least half way here by this time. Hurry up! +Never mind tightning those bolts now. Find the boys. I need them to +help me with this engine. They must be around somewhere." + +"I seen 'em goin' fishin' down by th' brook a little while ago," +answered the negro, crawling out from under what seemed to be a +combined airship and watercraft. "Jack says as how yo' gived him +permission t' occupy his indisputatious period of levity in +endeavorin' t' extract from th' liquid element some specimens of +swimmin' creatures." + +"If you mean I said he and Mark could go fishing in the brook, you're +right, Washington," replied the professor with a smile. "But you waste +a lot of time and breath trying to say it. Why, don't you give up +using big words?" + +"I reckon I was brought up t' it," replied the colored man grinning +from ear to ear. He did not always use big words but when he did they +were generally the wrong ones. Sometimes, he spoke quite correctly. + +"Well, I suppose you can't help it," resumed Mr. Henderson. "However, +never mind that. Find the boys and send them to me." + +"With th' least appreciatableness amount of postponement," answered +the messenger, and he went out. + +Washington White, who in color was just the opposite to his name, a +general helper and companion to Professor Henderson, found Mark +Sampson and Jack Darrow about a quarter of a mile from the big shed, +which was in the center of a wooded island off the coast of Maine. The +lads were seated on the bank of a small brook, fishing. + +"Perfesser wants yo' immediate," said Washington. + +"But we haven't caught a single fish," objected Mark. + +"Them's the orders from headquarters," replied the colored man. "Yo' +both got t' project yo'selves in th' vicinity of th' machine shop. I +reckon th' new fangled contraption that th' perfesser is goin' t' +navigate th' air an' sail th' angry seas in, am about done. He want's +t' try th' engine." + +"Come on then," said Jack. "We probably would not catch any fish, +anyhow, Mark." + +Accompanied by Washington, the youths, each of whom was about eighteen +years old, started toward the big shed. + +While they are on their way opportunity may be taken to tell a little +about them, as well as about Washington and the professor, and the +curious craft on which the scientist was working. + +A few years before this story opens Mr. Henderson had invented a +wonderful electric airship. He had it about completed when, one day, +he and the two boys became unexpectedly acquainted, and, as it +developed, friends. + +Mark and Jack were orphans. After having rather a hard time knocking +about the world trying to make a living, they chanced to meet, and +resolved to cast their lots together. They boarded a freight train, +and, as told in the first volume of this series, entitled, "Through +the Air to the North Pole; or the Wonderful Cruise of the Electric +Monarch," the cars were wrecked near where Professor Henderson was +building his strange craft. + +The boys were cared for by the scientist, and, after their recovery +from hurts received in the collision, they accepted his invitation to +make the trip through the upper regions in the airship, to search for +the north pole. With them went Andy Sudds, an old hunter, and Tom +Smith and Bill Jones, two farmers, but who were hired as helpers on +the voyage. The party had many adventures on the trip, having battles +with savage animals and more savage Esquimaux, and were tossed about +in terrible storms. After making some scientific observations, which +the professor was much interested in, they started back home. + +Having found he could successfully sail in the air, Mr. Henderson +resolved to try what it might be like under water. + +He moved his machine shop to a lonely spot on the Maine coast, and +there, with the help of the boys, Washington, Andy and two machinists +constructed a submarine boat, called the Porpoise. + +In this the professor resolved to seek the south pole, he having a +theory that it was surrounded by an open sea. After much hard work the +Porpoise was made ready for the voyage. + +What occurred on this great trip is described in the second book of +this series, called "Under the Ocean to the South Pole, or the Strange +Cruise of the Submarine Wonder." In that is told how once more Tom and +Bill, with Andy, the boys and Washington, accompanying Professor +Henderson, had many thrilling experiences. + +They were caught in the grip of the grass of the terrible Sargasso +Sea. Monstrous suckers grasped the boat in their powerful arms, and +had to be fought off. They were caught in a sea of boiling water and +imprisoned between big fields of ice. + +By means of strong diving suits they were able to leave the ship and +walk about on the bottom of the sea. They visited a graveyard of +sunken ships, saw many strange monsters as well as many beautiful fish +in the great depths to which they sunk. Many times they were in dire +peril but the resources of the professor, the bravery and daring of +the boys, no less than the help Washington and Andy Sudds, the hunter, +rendered at times, brought them through. + +Those of you who read of their adventures will recall the strange +island which they came upon in the Atlantic Ocean, far from the coast +of South America. + +When they first drew near this island they were almost sucked into the +depths of a great whirlpool, caused by water pouring down a big hole +that seemed to lead far into the earth. They reversed their ship just +in time. + +But, on going to another side of the island they were able to approach +safely, as at this point the great hole was farther from the shore. +Then they landed and investigated. + +They found the island was almost circular, and the hole was also +round, but not in the center of the land. It was an immense cavity, so +wide they could not see across, and as for the depth they could only +guess at it. Looking down they could only see rolling masses of vapor +and clouds caused by the water which poured down from the ocean with +the force of a Niagara. + +Gazing down into the big hole Mark suggested it might lead to the +centre of the earth, which some scientists claim is hollow. The +professor admitted that the cavity looked as though it led to China. + +They had no means of investigating further the mystery of the opening +and returned to their submarine, completing the voyage to the south +pole. + +It was now about two years since they had come back from that eventful +trip. One of the first things the professor did, after docking the +Porpoise, was to shut himself up in his study and begin to draw plans. +To the questions of the boys he returned no answer for several days. +Then he announced he was working on a craft which could both sail on +top of the water and navigate the air. + +In time the plans were done, and, in order to keep the work secret, +the shop was moved to an island which the professor owned. + +Parts of the Monarch and the Porpoise were used in constructing the +new craft, so there was no need to get other help than that which the +boys, Washington and Bill and Tom could give, since the two latter +accepted an offer of the professor to remain and work for him. The +boys, of course, would not leave their friend. + +The professor realized that he had a more difficult task in his new +venture than he had set himself on other occasions. For a ship to be +light enough to rise in the air, and, at another time, and with no +change, to be strong enough to navigate the ocean, was indeed +something to tax Mr. Henderson's ingenuity. + +However, in the course of a little over a year the larger part of the +work was done. Inside the big shed was the huge affair which, it was +hoped, would enable its owner to be master of both air and water. + +"Did the professor say anything special?" asked Mark of Washington. + +"Nope. I reckon he were too busy problamatin' the exact altitude +projected in an inverse direction by th' square root of th' new engine +when operated at a million times inside of a few seconds, but he +didn't say nothin' t' me. I were busy underneath th' ship, fixin' +bolts when he tole me t' find yo'. I wouldn't be s'prised if he had +th' thing goin' soon." + +"Do you think he'll be generating the new gas to-day?" asked Jack +eagerly. "That's the most troublesome part; to get that gas right." + +"He didn't say nothin' t' me 'bout it," Washington stated, as he +walked along beside the two boys. "He jest seemed anxious like." + +"We'd better hurry," advised Mark. "He may be at an important part in +his experiments and probably needs us. I hope it will work. He has +spent many days on it, and we all have worked hard. It ought to be a +success." + +"Perfesser allers makes things work," declared Washington stoutly. + +"That's a good way to feel about it, anyway," observed Mark. "Well, +we'll soon know." + +The three hurried to the shed which they could see as they rounded a +turn of the path through the wood. They noticed an elderly man +approaching with a gun on his shoulder. On one arm he carried a game +bag. + +"Guess Andy got something for dinner," remarked Jack. + +"I hopes so, honey," put in Washington. "I'se got a sort of gone +feelin' in my stomach!" + +"Any luck, Andy?" called Mark, when he came within hailing distance. + +"Fine," replied Andy Sudds. "Rabbits and quail. We'll have a good +dinner to-morrow." + +While Andy entered the living part of the big shed to put away his gun +and game, the boys and Washington kept on to the engine room. They +found the professor, with Bill and Tom, busy fitting pipes to the +small engine which was set up at one side of the structure. + +"Come, boys, I need your aid," remarked Mr. Henderson as they entered. +"Take off your coats and pitch in. Tighten up these bolts, Jack. Mark, +you mix up those chemicals the way I taught you, and see that the +dynamo is in working order for Washington to attend to." + +In a little while the shop was a veritable hive of industry, and it +resounded to the sound of hammers, wrenches and machinery. In the +background was the big ship, which seemed like two immense cigars, one +above the other, the lower one the larger. + +"Where was you calalatin' t' take this here ship when it gits done, +Perfesser?" asked Washington, during a lull in the operations. + +"Do you remember that big hole in the island we visited on our trip to +the south pole?" + +"I suah does," answered the colored man. + +"We are going to explore that," went on the scientist. "We are going +to make a voyage to the interior of the earth in our Flying Mermaid." + +"Go down into th' earth!" exclaimed Washington, his eyes big with +fright. + +"Certainly; why not?" + +"Not for mine!" cried the colored man, dropping the wrench he was +holding. "No sire I'm not goin' t' project myself int' a grave while +I'se alive. Time enough when I kicks th' bucket. No sir! If yo' an' +the boys wants t' risk yo' se'ves goin' down int' th' interior of th' +earth, where th' Bible says there's fiery furnaces, yo' kin go, but +Washington White stays on terra cotta! That's where he stays; He ain't +ready t' be buried, not jest yet!" and the frightened colored man +started to leave the shed. + + CHAPTER II + + THE FLYING MERMAID + +"HERE! Stop him!" cried Professor Henderson. "Don't let him get away. +We still need his help to get the ship in shape. He needn't be +frightened. We're not going to start at once." + +Mark and Jack ran after Washington, whose progress was somewhat +impeded because he kept looking back as if he feared the new ship was +chasing him. + +"Come on back!" said Mark. "There's no danger, and if there was we're +not going to start to-day." + +"Ain't yo' foolin' me?" asked Washington, pausing and looking +doubtfully at the boys. + +"Of course not," answered Mark. "You know Professor Henderson would +not make you do anything you didn't want to do, Wash. He wishes you to +stay and help him get ready, that's all." + +"Well, Washington," observed the aged scientist. "I didn't think you'd +go back on me." + +"I'd do mos' anything fer yo', Perfesser," said the colored man, "but +I got t' beg off this time," and he looked at the Flying Mermaid as if +he thought the metal sides would open and devour him. + +Then help me get things in shape to generate the gas," the scientist +said. "I want to give the new vapor the first real test in lifting +power to-day. On the success of it depends the future of the ship." + +Seeing there was no immediate danger of being carried to the centre of +the earth, Washington resumed his labors. The professor, the boys, +Bill and Tom were also hurrying matters to enable a test to be made +before night. + +As will readily be seen, even by those not familiar with the +construction of airships and submarines, the chief problem was to find +some agent strong enough to lift from the earth a weight heavier than +had ever before been put into an apparatus that was destined to +traverse the clouds. For the Flying Mermaid was not only an airship +but an ocean voyager as well. It had to be made light enough to be +lifted far above the earth, yet the very nature of it, necessitating +it being made heavy enough to stand the buffeting of the waves and the +pressure of water, was against its flying abilities. + +Professor Henderson realized this and knew that the chief concern +would be to discover a gas or vapor with five times the lifting power +of hydrogen, one of the lightest gases known, and one sometimes used +to inflate balloons. + +After long study he had been partially successful, but he knew from +experiments made that the gas he had so far been able to manufacture +would not answer. What he wanted was some element that could be mixed +with the gas, to neutralize the attraction of gravitation, or downward +pull of the earth. + +While he was seeking this, and experimenting on many lines, the +construction of the air-water ship went on. In general the outward +construction was two cigar shaped hulls, one above the other. +Aluminum, being the lightest and strongest metal that could be used +for the purpose, formed the main part of both bodies. + +The upper hull was one hundred feet long and twenty feet in diameter +at the widest part. It tapered to points at either end. It was +attached to the lower hull by strong braces, at either end, while from +the center there extended a pipe which connected with the lower +section. This pipe was intended to convey the lifting gas to the part +which corresponded to the bag of the balloon, save that it was of +metal instead of silk, or rubber as is usual. + +There were two reasons for this. One was that it would not be liable +to puncture, particularly in the proposed underground trip, and the +other was that it did not have to be so large as a cloth bag would +have had to be. It was also a permanent part of the ship, and on a +voyage where part of the time the travelers would be in the air and +part on the water, and when the change from one to the other would +have to be made quickly, this was necessary. It would have taken too +long to raise the ship in the air had a cloth bag been used to contain +the gas. + +The lower hull or main part of the craft was one hundred and fifty +feet long, and forty feet through at the largest part, in the centre. + +It was divided into four sections. The forward one contained the +sleeping quarters of Professor Henderson and his crew. There was a +small stateroom for each one. Above was a conning or observation +tower, reached by a small flight of steps. From this tower the ship +could be steered, stopped and started, as could also be done from the +engine room, which was in the after part of the hull. + +As in the Porpoise and Monarch, electricity formed the motive power +and was also used for many other purposes on board. Engines operated +by gas produced the current which heated, lighted and moved the ship, +as well as played a part in producing the wonderful gas. + +The ship moved forward or backward by means of a novel arrangement. +This was by the power of compressed air. From either end of the lower +hull there projected a short pipe working in a ball and socket joint, +so it could be turned in any direction. By means of strong pumps a +current of compressed air could be sent out from either pipe. Thus +when floating above the earth the ship was forced forward by the blast +of air rushing from the pipe at the stern. It was the same principle +as that on which a sky rocket is shot heavenward, save that gases +produced by the burning of powder in the pasteboard rocket form its +moving impulse. + +In the case of the Flying Mermaid, it could be made to move backward +by sending the air out of the forward tube. Thus, when in the water, +the compressed air rushing from the pipe struck the fluid and forced +the ship forward or backward as was desired. It floated on the +surface, the deck being about three feet out of water, while the +aluminum gas bag was overhead. + +The engine room was a marvel of machine construction. It contained +pumps for air and water, motors, dynamos, gas engines, and a maze of +wheels and levers. Yet everything was very compact and no room was +wasted. + +The use of the air method of propulsion did away with the necessity of +a large propellor such as most airships have to use, a propellor which +must of necessity be very light and which is easily broken. + +Next to the engine room was the kitchen. It contained an electric +range and all necessary appliances and utensils for preparing meals. +There were lockers and a large reserve storeroom which when the time +came would be well stocked with food. Forward of the kitchen was the +living and dining room. It contained comfortable seats, folding tables +and a small library. Here, also were many instruments designed to show +how the various machines were working. There were gages, pointers and +dials, which told the direction the ship was traveling, the speed and +the distance above the earth or below the surface. Similar indicators +were in the conning tower, which had a powerful search light. + +The ship was lighted throughout by incandescent lamps, and there was +even a small automatic piano worked by the electric current, on which +popular airs could be played. + +If the gas and the gravity neutralizer worked as Professor Henderson +hoped they would, as soon as the ship was completed, all that would be +necessary to start on the voyage would be to fill the aluminum bag and +set the air compressor in motion. + +The gas was made from common air, chemically treated and with a secret +material added which by means of a complicated machine in a measure +did away with the downward pull of the earth. Thus all that was +necessary to carry on a long voyage was a quantity of gasolene to +operate the engine which worked the electric machines, and some of +this secret compound. + +The professor and his helpers had been working to good advantage. At +last all was in readiness for the gas test. + +It was proposed to try it on an experimental scale. Some of the fluid +was to be generated and forced into an aluminum cylinder under the +same pressure it would be used in the air ship. To this cylinder were +attached weights in proportion to the weight of the Flying Mermaid +with its load of human freight, engines and equipment. + +"This cylinder is just one one-hundredth the size of the cylinder of +the ship," said the professor. "I am going to fasten to it a hundred +pound weight. If it lifts that our latest contrivance will be a +success." + +"You mean if the little cylinder pulls a hundred pounds up the big +ship will take us and the machinery up?" asked Mark. + +"Certainly," answered the professor. "If this cylinder lifts a hundred +pounds, one a hundred times as big (as that of the Mermaid is), will +lift a hundred times as much, or ten thousand pounds. That is five +tons, or more than a ton over what I figure to be the weight of our +ship and contents. The latest war balloon can lift one ton with ease, +and if my machine can not do five times as well I shall be +disappointed." + +The last adjustments were made, pipes were run from the gas generator +to the cylinder, and the hundred pound weight was attached. + +"Everybody look out now," said Mr. Henderson. "I am going to start the +machine and let the gas enter the cylinder. It is a very powerful gas +and may break the cylinder. If it does you must all duck." + +The scientist gave a last look at everything. The boys got behind some +boards whence they could see without being in danger. Washington, who +had little fear so long as there was no danger of going under ground, +took his place at the dynamo. Andy Sudds, with Bill and Tom, stationed +themselves in safe places. + +"All ready!" called the professor. + +He pulled a lever toward him, turned a wheel and signalled to +Washington to start the dynamo. There was a sound of buzzing +machinery, which was followed by a hiss as the gas began to enter the +cylinder under pressure. Would it stand the strain? That question was +uppermost in every one's mind save the professor's. He only cared to +see the cylinder leave the ground, carrying the weight with it. That +would prove his long labors were crowned with success. + +Faster and faster whirred the dynamo. The gas was being generated from +the air. The secret chemical made a hissing which could be heard for +some distance. The gage registered a heavy pressure. Anxiously the +professor watched the cylinder. + +"There!" he exclaimed at length. "It has all the gas it can hold. Now +to see if it works!" + +He disconnected the pipe leading from the generator. This left the +cylinder free. It seemed to tremble slightly. There appeared to be a +movement to the hundred pound weight which rested on the ground. It +was as if it was tugging to get loose. + +"There it goes! There it goes!" cried Mark, joyfully. + +"Hurrah!" shouted Jack. "There she rises!" + +"It suttinly am projectin' itself skyward!" yelled Washington, coming +from the dynamo. + +Sure enough the cylinder was slowly rising in the air, bearing the +weight with it. It had lifted it clear from the ground and was +approaching the roof of the big shed. + +"It will work! It will work!" exclaimed the professor, strangely +excited. + +The next instant the cylinder, carrying the weight, sailed right out +of an open skylight, and began drifting outside the shop, and across +the fields. + +"Quick! We must get it back!" cried Mr. Henderson. "If it gets away my +secret may be discovered and I will lose all! We must secure it!" + +But the cylinder was now two hundred feet in the air and being blown +to the east, the weight dangling below it, making it look like a +miniature airship. + +"We can never catch that!" cried Mark. + + CHAPTER III + + WASHINGTON DECIDES + +"WE must catch that cylinder!" the professor exclaimed. "Some one may +find it when it comes down and analyze the gas. Then he would discover +how to make it. The cylinder must come down!" + +"Don't see how we can proximate ourselves inter th' vicinity of it +lessen we delegate th' imperial functions of orinthological specimens +t' some member of this here party," observed Washington. + +"If you mean we can't catch that there contraption unless we turn into +birds I'll show you that you're mistaken!" cried Andy Sudds. "I guess +I have a trick or two up my sleeve," and the old hunter quickly threw +open the breech of his gun and inserted a couple of cartridges. + +He raised the piece to his shoulder and took quick aim. There was a +sliver of flame, a puff of smoke and a sharp report. The professor and +the boys who were watching the cylinder saw it vibrate up in the air. +Then there came a whistling sound. An instant later the metal body +began to descend, and it and the weight fell to the earth. + +"I'm sorry I had to put a bullet through it, Professor," said old Andy +with a queer smile, "but it was the only way I saw of bringing it +down. Hope it isn't damaged much." + +"It doesn't matter if it is," the scientist answered. "I can make more +cylinders, but I don't want that secret of the gas to become known. +Your bullet served a good turn, Andy, for it let the compressed vapor +out just in time." + +"Then we may consider the experiment a success," said Mark, as +Washington went to where the cylinder had fallen, to detach it from +the weight and bring both to the shed. + +"It seems so," Mr. Henderson answered. "True, it was only an +experiment. We have yet to test the ship itself." + +"When can we do that?" asked Jack. + +"I hope by Monday," the scientist answered. + +"Will you try it in the water or air first?" asked Mark. + +"I'm almost certain it will float in the water," the aged inventor +said. "It does not require much work to make a ship which will do +that. But the air proposition is another matter. However, since the +cylinder rose, I am pretty sure the Flying Mermaid will. + +"But we have done enough work to-day. Let's rest and have something to +eat. Then, with Sunday to sit around and talk matters over, we will be +ready for Monday's test." + +Some of the game Andy had killed was soon on the table, for +Washington, in addition to his other accomplishments, was an expert +cook. During the evening the boys and their friends sat in the living +room of the big shed and talked over the events of the day. + +Sunday was spent in discussing what adventures might lie before them +should they be able to descend into the big hole. Washington did not +say, much, but it was easy to see he had no notion of going. He even +began to pack his few belongings in readiness to leave the service of +Mr. Henderson, for whom he had worked a good many years. + +No one remained long abed Monday morning. Even Washington was up early +in spite of the interest he had lost in the professor's voyage. + +"I jest wants t' see yo' start fer that place where they buries live +folks," he said. + +In order to properly test the Flying Mermaid it was necessary to move +the craft from the shed from which place it had never been taken since +it's construction was started. It had been built on big rollers in +anticipation of this need, so that all which was now necessary was to +open the doors at the end, and roll the craft out. + +This was accomplished with no small amount of labor, and it was nearly +noon before the big ship was moved into the open. It was shoved along +to a little clearing in front of the shed, where no trees would +interfere with its possible upward movement. + +Everyone was bustling about. The professor was busiest of all. He went +from one machine to another; from this apparatus to that, testing +here, turning wheels there, adjusting valves and seeing that all was +in readiness for the generating of the powerful gas. + +As the airship was half round on the bottom and as it rested in a sort +of semi-circular cradle; it brought the entrance some distance above +the ground. To make it easier to get in and out while preparations for +the trial were going on, Bill and Tom had made an improvised pair of +steps, which were tied to the side of the ship with ropes. + +Up and down these the professor, the boys and Andy went, taking in +tools and materials, and removing considerable refuse which had +accumulated during the building of the craft. + +Finally all was in readiness for starting the making of the gas. The +ship was not wholly complete and no supplies or provisions for the +long voyage had been taken aboard. The Flying Mermaid was about a ton +lighter than it would be when fully fitted out, but to make up for +this the professor had left in the ship a lot of tools and surplus +machinery so that the craft held as much weight as it would under +normal conditions. If the gas lifted it now it would at any other +time. + +"Start the generator," said Mr. Henderson, to Mark. "We'll soon see +whether we are going to succeed or fail." + +The boy turned a number of levers and wheels. The machine which made +the powerful vapor was soon in operation. The professor had already +added enough of the secret compound to the tank containing the other +ingredients, and the big pump was sucking in air to be transformed +into the lifting gas. + +The boys and the professor were in the engine room. Andy Sudds, with +Bill and Tom, had taken their places in the living room, to more +evenly balance the ship, since the things in it were not yet all in +their proper places. As for Washington he was busy running from the +shed to the ship with various tools and bits of machinery the +professor desired. + +The gas was being generated rapidly. Throughout the ship there +resounded a hissing noise that told it was being forced through the +pipe into the aluminum shell above the ship proper. + +"I wonder how soon it will begin to lift us," said Mark. + +"It will take about half an hour," replied Mr. Henderson. "You see we +have first to fill the holder completely, since there is no gas in it. +After this we will keep some on hand, so that it will only need the +addition of a small quantity to enable the ship to rise." + +He was busy watching the pointer on a dial which indicated the +pressure of the gas, and the lifting force. The boys were kept busy +making adjustments to the machinery and oiling bearings. + +Suddenly, throughout the length of the craft there was felt a curious +trembling. It was as though the screw of a powerful steamer was +revolving in the water. + +"What is it?" asked Jack. + +"I hope it is the lifting power of the gas making itself felt," the +professor answered. "Perhaps the Flying Mermaid is getting ready to +try her wings." + +The trembling became more pronounced. The gas was being generated +faster than ever. The whole ship was trembling. Tom and Bill came from +the room, where they were stationed, to inquire the meaning, but were +reassured by the professor. + +"Don't be alarmed if you find yourselves up in the air pretty soon," +he remarked with a smile. "Remember the Electric Monarch, and the +flights she took. We may not go as high as we did in her, but it will +answer the same purpose." + +The gas was hissing through the big tube as it rushed into the +overhead holder. The gage indicated a heavy pressure. The ship began +to tremble more violently and to sway slightly from side to side. + +"I think we shall rise presently," said Mr. Henderson. His voice +showed the pride he felt at the seeming success with which his +invention was about to meet. + +Suddenly, with a little jerk, as though some one with a giant hand had +plucked the Flying Mermaid from the earth, the ship gave a little +bound into the air, and was floating free. + +"Here we go!" cried Mr. Henderson. "The ship is a success. Now we're +off for the hole in the earth!" + +The Flying Mermaid was indeed rising in the air. True it did not go up +so swiftly as had the Monarch, but then it was a much heavier and +stronger vessel, and flying was only one of its accomplishments. + +"It's a success! It's a success!" shouted Mark, capering about in his +excitement. + +"Now we'll see what the centre of the earth looks like," went on Jack. +"I can hardly wait for the time to come when we are to start on the +voyage." + +At that instant, when the ship was but a few feet from the ground, but +slowly rising, the boys and the professor heard a shouting below them. + +"What's that?" asked the scientist. "Is any one hurt?" + +Mark ran to a small window, something like a port hole in an ocean +steamer, and looked out. + +"Quick!" he shouted. "Stop the ship! Washington will be killed!" + +In fact from the agonized yells which proceeded from somewhere under +the craft it seemed that the accident was in process of happening. + +"Save me! Save me!" cried the colored man. "I'm goin' to fall! Catch +me, some one!" + +"What is it?" asked the professor, making ready to shut off the power +and let the ship settle back to earth, from which it had moved about +fifty feet. + +"It's Washington," explained Mark. "He evidently tried to walk up the +steps just as the boat mounted skyward. He rolled down and managed to +grab the end of the rope which was left over after the steps were +tied. Now he's swinging down there." + +"Are you going to lower the ship?" asked Jack. + +"Of course!" exclaimed the professor. "I only hope he hangs on until +his feet touch the earth." + +"Keep a tight hold!" shouted Mark, from out of the small window. + +"That's th' truest thing yo' ever said!" exclaimed Washington. "You +bet I'm goin' to hold on, and I'm comin' up too," which he proceeded +to do, hand over hand, like a sailor. + +The boys and the professor watched the colored man's upward progress. +The ship had hardly begun to settle as, in the excitement, not enough +gas had been let out. Closer and closer came Washington, until he was +able to grasp the edge of the opening, to which the steps were +fastened. + +"I thought you weren't coming with us," observed the professor, when +he saw that his helper was safe. + +"I changed my mind," said the colored man. "It's jest luck. Seems like +th' ship done wanted me t' go 'long, an' I'm goin'. I'll take my +chances on bein' buried alive. I ain't never seen th' centre of th' +earth, an' I want's to 'fore I die. I'm goin' 'long, Perfessor!" + + CHAPTER IV + + WHAT DID MARK SEE? + +"WELL, I'm glad you've decided at last," the professor remarked. "Now +come inside and we'll see how the ship works." + +Once over his fright, Washington made himself at home on the craft he +had helped build. He went from one room to another and observed the +engine. + +"She certainly am workin'" he observed with pride. "Are we still goin' +up, Perfessor?" + +"Still mounting," replied Mr. Henderson, "We are now three hundred +feet above the earth," he added as he glanced at a registering gage. + +The great air pump was set going and soon from the after tube, a big +stream of the compressed vapor rushed. It acted on the ship instantly +and sent the craft ahead at a rapid rate. By elevating or depressing +the tube the craft could be sent obliquely up or down. Then, by +forcing the air from the forward tube, the Mermaid was reversed and +scudded backward. + +But it was more with the ship's ability to rise and descend that +Professor Henderson was concerned, since on that depended their +safety. So various tests were made, in generating the gas and using +the negative gravity apparatus. + +All worked to perfection. Obeying the slightest turn of the wheels and +levers the Mermaid rose or fell. She stood still, suspended herself in +the air, or rushed backward and forward. + +Of course the machinery was new and did not operate as smoothly as it +would later, but the professor and his friends were very well +satisfied. + +"Now we'll try something new," said the scientist to the two boys as +they stood beside him in the tower. "I only hope this part succeeds, +and we shall soon be off on our voyage." + +He turned several levers. There was a hissing sound as the gas rushed +from the container, and the ship began to settle down. + +"What's th' matter? Are we goin' t' hit th' earth?" yelled Washington, +rushing from the engine room. + +"Keep quiet," ordered the professor. "We are only going down, that's +all." + +"But good land! Perfesser!" exclaimed the colored man. "The ocean's +right under us! You forgot you sailed sway from the island! We'll be +drowned suah!" + +"Leave it to me," said Mr. Henderson. "The Flying Mermaid is going to +take a bath!" + +"As long as it swims it will be all right," observed Mark in a low +tone to Jack. "I'm glad I can take care of myself in the water." + +Before Jack could reply the Mermaid seemed to take a sudden dive +through the air. The next instant she struck the water with a splash +that sent the waves rolling all about. The craft rocked violently to +and fro on the surface of the sea. For a while there were anxious +hearts aboard, for there was no certainty but that the ship might not +sink to the bottom. + +But the old professor had not calculated and builded in vain. After +rocking about like a vessel newly launched, the strange craft rode +safely and upright on the water. It set down far enough to bring the +propelling tubes well under, but not so far but that the conning tower +was well out and there was a small deck available. + +"Now to see if we can conquer the water as we did the air!" cried the +professor. "Mark, start the air pump. Jack, you steer, for I want to +watch the machinery under the additional strain." + +From the rear tube rushed such a volume of air that the ocean near it +bubbled and foamed. The ship trembled from stem to stern, and then, +after hanging for an instant as if undecided what to do, it began to +move forward as easily as though it had never sailed any other element +than the sea. + +"She fits her name!" the professor cried. "She is indeed the Flying +Mermaid, for she sails the ocean as easily as she navigates in the +clouds!" + +For a mile or two the craft was sent ahead over the waves. Then it was +reversed and run backwards. Satisfied that his long months of work had +not gone for naught, the professor after trying several experiments, +decided to try and raise the ship while in motion. + +With Jack and Mark to look after the air pumps, while Washington, Tom +and Bill busied themselves in the engine room, Mr. Henderson began to +generate the gas and start the negative gravity apparatus. All the +while the craft was forging ahead. + +There was again the hissing sound that told of the aluminum holder +being filled. For a few minutes there seemed to be no change, the +Mermaid plowing forward. + +Then like a bird rising from the waves, or like a flying fish leaping +from the sea to escape some pursuing monster of the deep, the new ship +shot up diagonally from the surface and winged its way into the upper +regions of the air. + +"Success! Success!" cried the professor. "This proves all I wanted to +know. Now. we are ready for our great trip!" + +Great were the rejoicings in the camp that night. It was like living +over again the days when they were aboard the diving Porpoise or the +flying Monarch. To the recollections were added the anticipations of +what was before them in the trip to the interior of the earth. + +Busy days followed, for there was still much to be done to the Flying +Mermaid. The machinery, which was only partly completed, had to be +finished. Besides this the professor was working on some apparatus, +the use of which he did not disclose to any one. It was stored aboard +the ship at the last minute. + +Plenty of provisions had to be taken aboard, and many supplies needed +to work the Mermaid and insure that it would go to the end of the +voyage. The materials for generating the gas and negative gravity, +spare parts, records for the automatic piano and other things were +stored away. + +Some guns and ammunition were taken along as were a few revolvers, +since old Andy had said it was best to prepare for any thing in the +shape of enemies or wild beasts that might be met with in the interior +regions. + +It was decided to make the start by sailing along the surface of the +sea for several days, as in the event of any weakness in the machinery +being discovered there would be less danger. If, at the end of four +days, no trouble developed, the professor said he would send the +Mermaid into the air and make the rest of the voyage through the sky. + +The night before the start was to be made the professor, with the +boys, Washington and the other helpers, went about through the various +shops and buildings, locking them up securely. For they could not tell +how long they would be away, and they had to leave behind much +valuable material. + +As there were several things that needed attention they divided the +work up. Mark had finished his share and was walking back toward the +living cabin where they were all quartered, when, down at the shore, +near where the boat was moored, he fancied he saw, in the gathering +darkness, a moving figure. + +"I wonder who that can be," he thought. "All the others are near the +machine shop, for I just left them there. Perhaps it's some one trying +to spy out how the Mermaid is built." + +Knowing the professor wanted his secret well guarded, Mark walked +softly toward the little dock that served as a place whence the +Mermaid could be easily boarded. As he approached he saw the figure +moving. Something struck the boy as peculiar. + +Though the object had some of the characteristics of a man it did not +walk like a human being, but shuffled along more like a huge ape or +monkey. It seemed bent over, as if it stooped toward the ground. + +"Who are you?" called Mark suddenly. + +For an instant the figure halted and then hurried on faster than +before, with a curious, shuffling walk. It was approaching the ship. + +Somehow it struck Mark as if it was an uncanny being; an inhabitant of +some other world. Then he laughed at his half-fear, and started on a +run toward the dock. + +"If it's some tramp trying to find a place to sleep he'd better not go +aboard the ship, he might do some damage," the boy thought. + +He could hardly see the figure now as it had passed into the shadow +cast by the boat. He was about to summon the professor to make an +investigation, when Washington started going the search light which +was placed just over the door of the living cabin. It was kept there +as a sort of beacon light, as, near the island was a dangerous ledge +of rocks. + +Then, in the blinding white glare from the big lantern as Washington +accidentally swung it toward the Mermaid, Mark beheld a strange sight. + +The figure he had been watching stood out in bold relief. Though it +was shaped like a human being it was not like any person the boy had +ever seen. It seemed covered with a skin twice too large for it; a +skin, which, in spite of the clothes that concealed it, hung in folds +about the arms and legs, dropping pendent like from the neck like a +big garment, and flapping in the wind. + +For an instant Mark was so startled he cried out, and the professor +and the others ran to see what was the matter. + +"There-- by the ship! A horrible creature!" exclaimed Mark. + +Shouting to Washington to keep the light steady in the direction of +the dock, Mr. Henderson ran toward the moored Mermaid. Jack, Andy, +Bill and Tom, with Mark in the rear followed him. + +"Nothing here," said the scientist, after a careful search about. "Are +you sure you saw something, Mark?" + +"Positively," replied the lad with a shudder. He described the vision +of the darkness. + +"I guess it was a big otter, or maybe an enormous turtle," the +professor said. + + CHAPTER V + + ATTACKED BY A WHALE + +BUT Mark was certain it was nothing like that, though a careful search +failed to reveal anything or any person near the ship. It was too dark +to examine for footprints, and even Mark, after taking a look all +about, felt he might have been deceived by shadows. Still he was a +little nervous, and could hardly sleep for imagining what the thing he +saw could have been. + +The next day every one was so busy that no one, not even Mark, +recalled the little excitement of the night before. Shortly after +noon, final preparations having been made, they all got aboard the +Mermaid and started off. + +It was a bright sunshiny day, and the craft, speeding away from the +island where it had been constructed, over the dancing blue waves, +must have presented a strange sight had there been any spectators. For +surely no such ship had ever before sailed those waters. + +However, there was no other vessel in sight, and the island, as far as +the professor and his friends knew, had never been inhabited. + +"We will not try for any great speed," Mr. Henderson remarked as he, +with Mark and Jack, stood in the conning tower managing the Mermaid. +"We don't want to strain any joints at the start or heat any engine +bearings. There will be time enough for speed later." + +"Yes, and we may need it more when we get into the centre of the earth +than we do now," observed Mark. + +"Why so?" asked Jack. + +"No telling what we may run up against underneath the ground," went on +Mark. "We may have to fight strange animals and stranger beings. +Besides, the atmosphere and water there can't be the same as up here; +do you think so, Professor?" + +For a few minutes the scientist was silent. He seemed to be thinking +deeply. + +"I will tell you what I believe," he said at length. "I have never +spoken of it before, but now that we are fairly started and may +eventually have a chance to prove my theory, I will say that I think +the centre of this earth on which we live is hollow. Inside of it, +forming a core, so to speak, I believe there is another earth, similar +to ours in some respects which revolves inside this larger sphere." + +They were well out to sea now, as they could observe when they emerged +on the little deck. Above their heads was the aluminum gas holder, +which served as a sort of protection from the sun that was quite warm. +The Mermaid rode with an easy motion, being submerged just enough to +make her steady, yet not deep enough to encounter much resistance from +the water. In fact it could not have been arranged better for speed or +comfort. + +"I think we will sail well to the eastward before making our course +south," Mr. Henderson said. "I do not care to meet too many ships, as +those aboard will be very curious and I do not want too much news of +this venture to get out. We will take an unfrequented route and avoid +delays by being hailed by every passing vessel whose captain will +wonder what queer craft he had met with." + +The boys enjoyed the sail, for the weather could not have been better. +Even old Andy, who seldom said much, seemed delighted with the +prospect of having strange adventures. He had his rifle with him, and, +indeed, he seldom went anywhere that he did not carry it. + +"For there's no telling when you may see something you want to shoot +or that ought to be shot," he used to say, "and it's always the man +without a gun who needs it most. So I'm taking no chances." + +They sailed all that afternoon without meeting with a craft of any +kind. Straight to the east they went, and when night began to settle +down Washington got supper. It was decided to run slowly after dark +until all hands were more familiar with the ship. + +Morning found the Mermaid about a hundred miles from the island where +she had been launched. The night had been uneventful, except that Mark +told Jack he heard some strange noise near his bunk several times. He +was nearest the storeroom where spare parts, and the curious cylinder +the professor had brought aboard, were kept. + +"I guess it was rats," said Jack. "They are always in ships." + +"Old wooden ships, yes," admitted Mark. "But I'll bet there's not a +rat aboard the Mermaid." + +"Then you were dreaming," said Jack, as if that settled it. + +Mark did not speak further of the noise, but he did considerable +thinking. However, the next night there was no further disturbance. + +The fourth day out, when everything had passed off well, the engines +doing their best, the professor decided to speed them up a bit, since +he was satisfied they had "found" themselves as mechanics term it. + +"We'll see how fast we can go through the water," said Mr. Henderson, +"and then I think we can safely turn our course south. We are well +beyond the ordinary lines of travel now." + +Having oiled the bearings well, and seen that everything was in place +and properly adjusted, the professor and the boys took their places in +the conning tower, while Washington, Tom and Bill remained in the +engine room. Andy stayed on deck with his gun. + +"I might see a big fish, and we could vary our bill of fare," he said +with a laugh. + +"Here we go!" exclaimed the professor as he shifted the levers and +turned some wheels and valves. "Now we'll see how fast we can travel." + +As he spoke the Mermaid responded to the added impulse of the +compressed air and shot through the water at a terrific speed. The +sudden increase in momentum almost threw the boys from their feet, and +they would have fallen had they not grasped some projecting levers. + +"I guess that will do," Said the scientist. "I think we have speed +enough for almost any emergency. I'll let her run at this rate for a +while, and then we'll slack up." + +Looking ahead, the boys could see the green waters parting in front of +the bow of the Mermaid, as if to make room for her. Two huge waves +were thrown upon either side. + +Suddenly, dead ahead, there loomed up a big black object. + +"Look out you'll hit the rock!" cried Mark to the professor, who was +steering. + +With a turn of his wrist Mr. Henderson moved the wheel which +controlled the tube. It was deflected and sent the boat to larboard. + +At that instant from the rock two small fountains of water rose in the +air, falling back in a shower of spray through which the sun gleamed. + +"That's not a rock! It's a big whale!" cried Jack. "And we're going to +hit him!" + +The professor had miscalculated the speed of the craft, or else had +not thrown her far enough to larboard, for, a second later, the +Mermaid was almost upon the big leviathan. + +With a desperate twirling of the steering wheel the professor veered +the craft as far as possible. But all he could do did not suffice, for +the craft hit the whale a glancing blow on the side, and the ship +careened as if she would turn turtle. + +At the same time there rang out from upon deck the sound of a rifle +shot. Old Andy had taken a chance at the enormous creature of the +deep. + +"Hurrah!" the bays heard him shout. "I give him one plumb in the eye! +A fine shot! And we hit him besides with the boat. I guess he's a +goner!" + +"I'm afraid not," muttered the professor. "That was a bad blow we +struck him, but I think it will only ruffle his temper. We'll have to +look sharp now, boys." + +By this time the ship had rushed past the whale, but the boys, looking +through a window in the rear of the tower could see the huge body. Now +the fountains of water which the whale spouted were tinged with red. + +"He's bleeding!" exclaimed the professor. "I guess Andy hit him in a +vital spot." + +"But not vital enough!" cried Mark. "See! He's coming after us!" + +And so it proved. The whale, angered, and, probably half crazed by the +pain of the bullet and the blow, was coursing after the ship, coming +on with the speed of an express train. Straight at the Mermaid he +lunged his huge bulk. + +"We must escape him!" cried Mr. Henderson. "If he hits us he'll send +us to the bottom!" + +He had made ready to slow up the Mermaid to see if it had sustained +any damage from the impact with the whale, but when he saw the monster +coming after the boat he knew the only safety lay in flight. + +"Let us go up into the air and so escape him!" cried Jack, with sudden +inspiration. + +For an instant neither Mark nor the professor grasped what Jack meant. +Then, with an exclamation, the professor pulled forward the lever that +generated the gas and set working the gravity neutralizer, which would +enable the ship to rise. + +Faster through the water went the Mermaid, and faster after her came +the whale. Above the hum of the engines was heard the hiss of the +powerful gas. The ship trembled more violently. + +"We are rising!" exclaimed the professor, as he looked at a gage. + +The boys could feel the craft lifting from the waves which clung to +her as if they hated to lose her. The boys knew the gas was beginning +to operate. + +"If it is not too late!" whispered Mark, half to himself. + +For the monster of the seas was coming on, lashing the water to foam +with his terrible flukes, and sending aloft a bloody spray. His speed +was awful. + +Now he was but ten feet away from the fleeing craft-- now but eight-- +now five! Ten seconds more and the big head, like the blunt stern of a +battle ship, forced forward by the tons of blubber, flesh, bone and +fat behind it would strike the Mermaid and crush it like an egg shell. + +Now if ever was the need for the Flying Mermaid to prove herself +worthy of the name. Now, if ever, was the time for her to leave the +watery element and take to the lighter one. + +And she did. With a last tremble, as if to free herself from the hold +of the waves, the gallant craft soared up into the air, leaving the +water, which dripped from her keel like a fountain's spray, and +shooting aloft like a bird, escaped her terrible enemy which passed +under her, so close that the lower part of the Flying Mermaid scraped +the whale's back. + +"Saved!" exclaimed the professor. + + CHAPTER VI + + THE CYCLONE + +IT was only in the nick of time, for a second later and the big mammal +of the ocean would have struck the ship and split it from stem to +stern. + +Higher and higher into the air mounted the Flying Mermaid, while in +the water below, the whale, incensed by missing his prey, was lashing +the waves to foam. + +"Well, that was a narrow squeak; as close as I ever care to come to +it!" exclaimed Andy as he let go of the steel rail to which he was +clinging and entered the conning tower. "I had no idea of hitting the +big fish." + +"I guess he would have taken after us whether you had fired at him or +not," said Mr. Henderson. "He was probably looking for trouble, and +took the first thing that came in his way, which happened to be us. +Some whales are like that, so I have read; big bull creatures, exiled +from the school to which they once belonged, they get like mad +creatures and know neither friend nor foe. Something like rogue +elephants, I imagine." + +Now, having thus unexpectedly risen into the air, the professor +decided to continue travel in that style for a while at least. It +would require less force to propel the ship, and the going would be +more comfortable, since in the upper regions the Mermaid rode on an +even keel, while in the water there was more or less rolling, due to +the action of the waves. + +Once recovered from their fright caused by the whale, and having lost +sight of the enormous creature, for they were now far above the ocean, +the adventurers began to think of something to eat. + +Washington lost little time in preparing a meal, and it was eaten with +a relish. The electric cooking stove worked to perfection, for the +colored man had learned how to use that aboard the Porpoise and +Monarch, and could be depended on to turn out appetizing dishes. + +"What do you say to traveling through the air at night?" asked Mr. +Henderson, as he arose from the table. + +"Suits me," replied Mark. "There's less danger than in the water, I +think," + +Bill, Tom and Washington arranged to stand the night watch, and, when +the professor had examined the engines and given orders about keeping +the ship on her course through the air, he retired to his bunk. Jack +and Mark soon followed. + +It must have been about midnight when Mark was awakened by a movement +that seemed to come from the storeroom next to where his sleeping +place was located. At first he thought he had been dreaming, but, as +he found he was wide awake, he knew it was no imagination that had +affected him. + +"I certainly heard something," he said to himself. "It sounded just as +it did the other night. I wonder if I ought to investigate." + +He thought over the matter carefully as he sat upright in his bunk in +the darkness. True the noise might be a natural one, due to the +vibration of the engine, or to some echo from the machinery. As Mark +listened he heard it again. + +This time he realized it was the slow movement of some heavy body. He +felt a cold shiver run over him and his hair evinced an uncomfortable +tendency to stand upright. But he conquered his feelings and resolved +to keep cool and see if he could discover what had awakened him. + +He got up and moved softly about the little room that contained his +bunk. He could hear better now, and knew it was no echo or vibration +that had come to his ears. + +Once again he heard the strange sound. It was exactly the same as +before; as if some big creature was pulling itself over the floor. + +"Maybe it's a snake; a water snake!" thought Mark. "It may have +crawled aboard when we did not notice it." + +Then he remembered that the ship had not been open in any way that +would enable a serpent to come on it, since it had been started on its +ocean trip. Before that, he was sure no snake had entered the Flying +Mermaid. Still it sounded more like a snake than anything else. + +"I'm going to make a search," decided the boy. + +He took a small portable electric light, run by a storage battery, +and, slipping on a pair of shoes and a bath robe, he left his +stateroom. + +He had decided that the noise came from the storage compartment and so +made for that. The door he knew was not locked, since he had seen Mr. +Henderson go in late that afternoon, and the professor had used no +key. + +Moving softly, Mark left his room and soon found himself in a +corridor, on either side of which were located the sleeping quarters +of the others. He did not want to awaken them, and, perhaps, be +laughed at for his curiosity. + +To get to the storeroom Mark had to go first from the corridor into +the dining room. He soon reached the door that guarded what he thought +might be a strange secret. Trying the knob softly he found it giving +under his fingers. + +"I wonder if I had better go in," he thought. "Perhaps, after all, it +was only rats, as Jack said." + +But, even as he listened he again heard the odd sound coming from the +room. This determined him. He would solve the mystery if possible. + +Cautiously he turned the knob. The door was slowly swinging open when +Mark was startled by a noise from behind him. He turned suddenly to +see Professor Henderson confronting him. + +"What is it, Mark? Is the ship on fire? What's the matter? Is any one +hurt?" + +"I was just going in this room to----" began Mark. + +"Don't do it! Don't do it!" exclaimed the professor in an excited +whisper. "No one must go in that room. I forgot to tell you and Jack +about it. No one must enter. It contains a secret!" + +"I heard a strange noise and----" Mark began again. + +"It could make no noise! It would be impossible for it to make a +noise!" the professor exclaimed. + +"I heard something," the boy insisted. + +"You were dreaming!" said the professor. "Now go back to bed, Mark, +and don't let this happen again. Remember, no one must enter that room +unless I give permission!" + +Somewhat crestfallen at the outcome of his investigations, but +realizing that the professor could do what he wanted to aboard his own +ship, Mark went back to bed. But he could not sleep. All the rest of +the night he was wondering whether Mr. Henderson had some strange +creature hidden aboard the Mermaid. He feared lest the old scientist's +mind might be affected and, in his wildness he had made some infernal +machine that would, in time, blow the whole ship apart. + +But tired nature asserted itself at last, and, weary with vain +imaginings, Mark fell into a slumber. The next morning he awoke with a +start from a dream that he was being devoured by an immense water +snake. + +He said nothing to the others about his night's adventure, for, as it +transpired, no one else had been awakened by his investigations. The +professor did not refer to his conversation with Mark. + +"There's something queer going on aboard the ship this trip," said +Mark to himself. "But I guess it's none of my business. Professor +Henderson seems to know what he is doing and I guess I can trust him." + +He resolved to think no more of the strange noises and movements, and, +for several nights thereafter he was not disturbed by them. + +The weather, which, up to this time had been fair, took a sudden turn +for the worse about the fourth day after Mark's little night +expedition. One evening the sun sank in a mass of dull lead-colored +clouds and a sharp wind sprang up. + +"We're going to have a storm," said Mr. Henderson. "It's liable to be +a bad one, too, from the way the barometer is falling." + +He looked at the glass, and scanned the various instruments that told +how high up the Mermaid was and how fast she was traveling. + +"We're pretty high up in the air," he said, "and scooting along at +about fifty miles an hour. We are going against the wind, too, but +fortunately it is not blowing hard." + +At that moment there sounded from without a peculiar howling sound, as +if a siren whistle was being blown. + +"'Pears like there's goin' t' be a tumultuous demonstration of +sub-maxiliary contortions in th' empherial regions contiguous t' th' +upper atmosphere!" exclaimed Washington, entering from the engine room +into the conning tower. + +"What's the trouble?" asked Mr. Henderson. + +"Terrible big black cloud chasin' us from behind!" exclaimed the +colored man. + +Noting the alarm in Washington's voice the professor glanced from the +rear window. What he saw caused him to exclaim: + +"It's a cyclone! We must drop down to avoid it!" + +He sprang to a lever controlling the gas and yanked it toward him. +There was a shrill hissing sound, and a second later the Mermaid began +to sink. The boys watching the gages on the wall of the tower, saw +that the craft was falling rapidly. + +But, with a rush and roar, the terrible wind was upon them. It caught +the craft in its fearful grip and heeled it over as a ship careens to +the ocean blast. + +"It's a storm in the upper regions! We'll find it calm below!" cried +the professor above the howling of the gale. He opened the gas outlet +wider and the ship fell more rapidly. + +"Are you sure we're over the ocean?" asked Mark. + +"Positive!" the professor called back. "We have been traveling +straight south over the Atlantic for the last week. We will land in +the midst of the waters and float safely." + +Lower and lower went the Mermaid. The wind was now blowing with the +force of a tornado, and, as the craft had to slant in order to +descend, it felt the power of the gale more than if it had scudded +before it. But, by skilful use of the directing tube, the professor +was able to keep the boat from turning over. As they came further down +toward the earth the force of the wind was felt less and less, until, +as they came within two hundred feet of the water which they saw below +them in the gathering dusk, it died out altogether. + +"Now we are free from it," said the professor as the Mermaid came down +on the waves like an immense swan. + +"Are you going ahead or going to stop here?" asked Mark + +"We'll keep right on," Mr. Henderson answered. "No telling when the +storm may strike down here. We'll go as far as we can to-night." + + CHAPTER VII + + A QUEER SAIL + +NOW that the fear and worriment was over they all began to feel +hungry, and, while Mark and Jack took charge of the conning tower +Washington got breakfast. The professor seemed preoccupied during the +meal, and several times, when Mark spoke to him, he did not reply. + +"I wonder if he is worried about something, or is thinking of +something which seems to be concealed in the storeroom," the boy +thought. + +But, after a while, the professor seemed to be more like himself. He +was busy over several maps and charts, and then announced the ship +would try air-sailing again for a while. + +"We can make better time above than we can on the water," he said, +"and I am anxious to get to the mysterious island and learn what is in +store for us." + +Perhaps if the professor had been able to look ahead, and see what was +soon going to happen, he would not have been so anxious for it to +occur. + +It was shortly after dinner when, the gas container having been +filled, the ship rose in the air, and began sailing over the ocean, +about a mile up. The day was a fine one, and, as they were moving +south, it was constantly growing warmer. Down on the water, in fact, +it was quite hot, but in the air it was just right. + +Like some immense bird the Mermaid went flying through the air. The +boys and the professor sat upon the deck in easy chairs. It was like +being on the top of some tall "sky-scraper" building which, by some +strange power, was being moved forward. Below them the ocean tumbled +in long, lazy swells. + +Suddenly Mark, who was looking through a telescope at the expanse of +water stretched out under them, gave a cry. + +"There's a ship! She's on fire!" + +"Where?" asked the professor, stretching out his hand for the glass. + +"Just to the port of the forward tube. See the smoke!" exclaimed Mark. + +Mr. Henderson looked. Through the lens he saw a column of black vapor +rising skyward. Mingled with it were red flames. + +"Lower the Mermaid!" he cried. "We must save those on board if we +can!" + +Mark ran to the conning tower, where Washington was, to give the +order. The colored man, who was looking ahead, intent on guiding the +ship, did not at first hear what Mark called. + +"Lower us! Send the Mermaid down!" Mark cried again. + +The sudden shout, and the excited voice of Mark so startled +Washington, that, fearing some accident had happened, he pulled the +lever, controlling the gas supply, with more force than necessary. + +There was a loud explosion, followed by a crackling sound, a flash of +light, and the Mermaid came to a sudden stop. + +"What's the matter?" cried Mark, feeling that something was wrong. + +"I don't know!" Washington replied, as he dashed toward the engine +room. + +The Mermaid, her forward flight checked, hung in the air, suspended, +neither rising or falling. + +"Why don't we go on down?" the professor asked, hurrying to the tower. + +"There has been an explosion-- an accident!" exclaimed Mark. "I guess +we can't go down!" + +"But we must!" Mr. Henderson insisted, seizing the lever which should +have produced a downward motion. The handle swung to and fro. It was +disconnected from the apparatus it operated. + +The ship was now stationary in the air, moving neither forward nor +backward, neither rising nor falling. Washington had stopped the air +pumps as soon as he learned something was wrong. + +When Mr. Henderson saw the useless lever, which had controlled the +outlet of gas from the holder, he ran out on deck. One glance told him +what had happened. One of the electric wires had become +short-circuited,-- that is, the insulation had worn off and allowed +the current to escape. This had produced a spark, which had exploded +the gas which was in the pipe leading from the generator up into the +aluminum holder. Fortunately there was an automatic cut-off for the +supply of vapor, or the whole tank would have gone up. + +As it was, only a small quantity had blown up, but this was enough to +break the machinery at the point where the lever in the conning tower +joined the pipe. If it had not been for the automatic cut-off all the +gas in the holder would have poured out in a great volume, and the +ship would have fallen like a shot. + +"Can we do nothing to save those on the burning vessel?" asked Mark, +pointing to where a cloud of smoke hung over the ocean. + +"I fear not, now," answered the professor. "We are in a bad plight +ourselves." + +"Are we in any danger?" asked Jack. + +"Not specially," Mr. Henderson replied. "But we must find a means of +lowering ourselves gradually." + +"Then it will be too late to save any of those on the ship," observed +Mark. + +"I'm afraid so," the scientist made reply. + +The Mermaid rested some distance above the surface of the waters. She +moved slightly to and fro with the wind, and rocked gently. The +professor was examining the broken machinery. + +"I have a plan!" suddenly cried Mark. + +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson. + +"Can't we bore a hole in the tank, insert a small faucet or tap, and +let the gas out that way gradually?" asked the boy. "When we get down +we can rescue those in danger of fire, and, later, can repair the +break." + +"The very thing!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "I never thought of that! +Here, Washington! Bring me a drill, and a small stop-cock!" + +The drill was obtained from the engine room. Working rapidly Mr. +Henderson bored a hole in the lower part of the holder. As soon as the +metal was penetrated the gas, which was under considerable pressure, +rushed from the tank with a hissing sound. At once the Mermaid began +to settle rapidly. + +But the professor was prepared for this. He thrust the end of the +stop-cock into the hole. It was screwed fast and the valve turned. +This stopped the flow of gas and checked the descent of the ship. +Then, by opening the tap the vapor was allowed to escape gradually, +bringing the Flying Mermaid gently to the water. + +As the adventurers approached they could see that the vessel was now a +mass of flames. The wind was driving the fire toward the forecastle, +and the crew had sought refuge aft. But this expedient could not last +long, for, already the tongues of fire were licking the sides of the +craft and coming nearer and nearer the seemingly doomed men. The +vessel was a large one, and heavily laden. + +As those in peril caught sight of the Mermaid settling down into the +water, apparently from the clouds, their fears gave place to +astonishment. So great was this that they ceased their cries of +terror. Then, as they saw that the strange craft navigated the ocean, +for the engines were started aboard the Mermaid, they began to call +for help. + + CHAPTER VIII + + THE FLYING MERMAID DISABLED + +"WE'LL save you!" shouted Mr. Henderson, who was on the deck, while +Mark was steering the craft. "Hold on a few minutes longer and we'll +be alongside!" + +"They're real! They're real!" some of those aboard the burning ship +could be heard to shout. Evidently more than one of them had taken the +Mermaid for a delusion of their fear-crazed brain. + +"They are real persons!" they called again and again. "They are coming +to save us!" + +Mr. Henderson ran his ship as near the burning craft as he dared. Then +he called to the crew to leap into the water and swim to him. He, with +Washington, Jack, Bill and Tom, stood ready to haul aboard any who +were too weak to help themselves. + +In a few minutes all of those left alive on the sailing vessel-- +fourteen in all-- had come safely aboard the Mermaid. The ship was now +completely enveloped in flames. + +"Are there any more left on her?" asked Mr. Henderson of one who +appeared to be a mate of the burning craft. + +"Not a soul!" was the answer. "The captain and ten men perished in the +flames. The fire broke out a week ago in the lower hold. We fought it +as well as we could but it got the best of us. Then it suddenly broke +through the decks, almost like an explosion, a little while ago, and +the captain and others were lost, and so were our small boats. We +managed to get aft but were about to give up when you appeared." + +"What ship is it and where are you from?" + +"The Good Hope, laden with logwood, hides, jute and other materials +from South America," the mate answered. "We were bound for New York." + +"It is more like the Last Hope instead of the Good Hope," observed Mr. +Henderson in a quiet voice, as he saw the flames mount higher and +higher over the ship. A few seconds later the craft seemed rent by an +internal explosion. It appeared to break in two parts, and, amid a +shower of sparks and a cloud of black smoke, the vessel sank under the +water and was seen no more. + +The rescued men turned to behold the final end of their ship. They +betrayed no particular emotion, and some of them even laughed, which +the professor thought, at the time, was rather strange. But there was +little opportunity for speculation. The men were in a sad plight. Few +of them had more than the clothes they stood in, though each one wore +about his waist a belt, and all of them seemed to guard the leather +circlets jealously. + +The professor and his crew were soon busy supplying remedies for +burns, since several of the men were seared by the flames. Then, as it +was learned they had eaten nothing for many hours, it having been +impossible to use the galley, a meal was prepared and the survivors of +the wreck were well fed. + +The hunger of the newcomers having been appeased, they showed much +curiosity over the strange craft that had so opportunely come to their +rescue. Most of the sailors were ignorant men, and the professor had +little fear of them learning anything concerning his secrets. He +explained briefly about the Mermaid, but said nothing of whither she +was bound. + +The addition of fourteen men to the rather small accommodations of the +Mermaid was a serious matter to consider. The ship was able to hold +them all, and even to sail through the air with them, since Mr. +Henderson had provided an excess of power. But it was going to be a +problem to feed so many, and still save enough provisions, for the +long voyage which lay ahead. + +However, Mr. Henderson felt his first duty to be toward his fellowmen, +even if his voyage must be delayed, or given up for a time, while he +got more provisions. There would be no sleeping quarters for the +sailors, but when this was explained to them they cheerfully said they +would sleep on deck if necessary. In fact some of them had to, but as +the weather was warm and clear this was no hardship. A few found +quarters in the engine room and other apartments of the Mermaid. + +Finding, after an examination, that his ship was in good order save +for the broken gas apparatus, Mr. Henderson gave orders to proceed +along the surface of the ocean. The sailors wanted to see how it felt +to mount into the air, but Mr. Henderson, refused to attempt a flight +until he had made complete repairs, and this would take a day or more. + +At this there appeared to be some discontent among the survivors, and +they muttered to each other as they stood in a group on deck. But the +professor and his assistants were too busy with their preparations for +fixing the break to notice this. + +While the men were gathered in a knot near the after part of the small +deck, the mate separated from them, and, coming close to where Mark +was standing, unscrewing some of the broken parts of the pipe said, in +a low voice. + +"Tell the captain to watch out." + +"What do you mean?" asked Mark quickly. + +"Hush! Not so loud!" the mate exclaimed. "If the men hear me talking +to you, or see me, they may kill me. Tell the captain to look out; +that's all. Be on guard, and watch the engine room carefully." + +"But why-- ?" Mark began, when, turning suddenly, the mate left him. +It was well he did so, for, at that instant, one of the sailors, who +had observed the two conversing, strolled in their direction. + +Much alarmed, Mark sought Mr. Henderson and told him what he had +heard. + +"I suppose the fire may have turned the poor man's head," the +scientist said. "I wonder if he thinks the men I rescued would mutiny +and take possession of my ship? If they did they would not know how to +work it, so what good would it do?" + +"Hadn't we better look out?" asked Mark. + +"I'm not afraid," replied the professor. "I will be too busy the next +few days, repairing the break, to think of anything else. Besides, +what would they want to harm us for? Didn't we save their lives?" + +Seeing the scientist placed no faith in what the mate had said, Mark +went back to his task. + +It soon became too dark to work, and it was decided, after supper, to +halt the ship until morning as it would be less risky. + +Mark did not sleep well, his dreams being disturbed by visions of +pirates and black flags. But morning came and nothing had developed. +The men seemed to recover their spirits with daybreak, and mast of the +crew, after breakfast, greeted Mr. Henderson pleasantly, and asked to +be allowed to help fix the ship. + +It took the skilled labor of the professor, Washington and the boys to +mend the break, and, even at that, it was four days in the repairing. +But at last the final bolt was in place, and the Mermaid was able to +resume her trips through the air. + +"We will rise the first thing in the morning," said the professor to +Mark and Jack that night. "I am anxious to see how the ship behaves +with a big load aboard." + + CHAPTER IX + + THE MUTINY + +MARK was awakened that night by feeling some one trying to turn him +over. At first he thought it was Jack, and sleepily muttered that he +wanted to be let alone. + +"Sorry I can't oblige ye, my hearty!" exclaimed a rough voice in his +ear, "but I got particular orders t' tie you up!" + +At that Mark tried to sit up, but he found he could not. He discovered +that he was closely bound with many turns of a rope, while in front of +his bunk stood one of the rescued sailors. + +"There," said the man, with a final tightening of the ropes. "I guess +you're safe." + +"What's the matter? What does it all mean?" asked Mark, much +bewildered. + +"It means that we have possession of the ship," the sailor answered, +"and, if you're wise you'll not make a fuss. It wouldn't do any good, +anyhow, as all your friends are in the same condition." + +Then, picking Mark up, as if he was a baby, the man slung him over his +shoulder and carried him to the living room. There Mark saw Jack, the +professor, Washington, and the others similarly bound. + +"Do you realize what you are doing?" asked the professor angrily of +his captors. "You are mutinying, and are liable to severe punishment." + +"If they ever get us," added one of the men. "We've got the ship now, +and we mean to keep her. You'll have to run her or show us how." + +"Never!" cried the professor. + +"I guess he will when he feels this," said one of the men, as he +dragged from a recess two wires. "I happen to know something of +electricity, and when he feels these perhaps he'll change his mind. +I'll start the dynamo." + +The sailor showed that he was acquainted with machinery, for soon the +hum of the electric apparatus was heard. + +"Now to make him tell!" the man with the wires exclaimed, advancing +toward the professor, who turned pale. + +"Stop! You must not torture the old man!" cried a voice, and the mate +of the Good Hope stepped in front of the sailor with the electrified +wires. + +"Who's going to stop me?" asked the man. + +"I will. It's not necessary," the mate went on quickly. "If we make +him weak we may kill him, and he can not tell us what we want to know. +One of the boys can tell us how to run the ship." + +The mate came quickly over to where Mark lay, and whispered: + +"Consent to tell. It is the only way of saving his life. Tell 'em how +to raise the craft. Then leave all to me. I will save you all and the +ship, too, if I can. But consent." + +Mark nodded his head, and the mate cried: + +"I knew I could fetch 'em. I have hypnotic power. This boy will raise +the ship for us. Loosen his bonds, some of you." + +Satisfied that they were now on the way to experiencing a new +sensation, the sailors took the ropes off Mark's arms and legs, and he +was allowed to rise. With a reassuring nod toward the professor he led +the way to the engine room, followed by half the men. He resolved to +start the gas machine slowly, so as to make the upward trip last +longer, thinking before it had gone far, some way of escape from the +mutineers might be found. + +While a crowd of the sailors stood near him, Mark operated the +machinery in the engine room that started the gas generating, and set +the negative gravity apparatus working. + +"You'd better not try any tricks on us," said one of the men in an +ugly tone of voice. + +"I'm not going to," replied Mark. "If you go out on deck you will soon +see the ship leaving the water and mounting into the air." + +"Some of you go," ordered a man with a big bushy red beard. "See if +the ship rises. When she begins to go up sing out. I'm going to stay +here and see how the young cub does it so I can work it myself." + +Obeying the red-bearded man, who seemed to be a leader, several of the +sailors went out on the deck. It was quite dark, but there was a +phosphorous glow to the water which made the rolling waves visible. + +The gas was being generated, as could be told by the hissing sound. +Mark watched the machinery anxiously, for he knew much depended on +him, and the professor was not at hand to guide and instruct him. He +watched the dial of the gage which registered the gas pressure and saw +it slowly moving. In a little while it would be at the point at which +the ship ought to rise. + +Presently a quiver seemed to run through the Mermaid. Now a shout came +from the watchers on deck. + +"She's going up!" + +The ship was indeed rising. The red-bearded man, who was addressed as +Tony, ran from the engine room to the deck. He saw that the ship was +now ten feet above the water. Back he came to where Mark stood by the +gas machine. + +"Lucky for you that you didn't fool us, lad," he said with a leer. +"See that you mind me hereafter. Now show me how the shebang works." + +When the ship had risen as far as Tony desired he made Mark send it +straight ahead. The boy adjusted the air tube to carry the craft +toward the south, but Tony, seeing by a compass in which direction +they were headed, ordered Mark to steer due east. + +"Fix things so they will stay so, too," added Tony. "I don't want to +stop until I get a thousand miles away. Then we'll come down, sail to +some sunny island, and enjoy life." + +Mark locked the steering apparatus so as to keep the Mermaid headed +due east. + +"Now you can go back to your friends," Tony said. "When I want you +I'll send for you." + +With a heavy heart Mark rejoined the professor and others. He found +them with their bonds removed. But to guard against their escape +several men were on watch outside the door. + +"What are they doing?" asked the professor eagerly as Mark entered, +and the boy told him what had taken place. + +"They will ruin my ship and spoil the whole trip," cried the old +scientist. "Oh, why did I ever go to the rescue of the scoundrels?" + +"Never mind," said Jack. "Perhaps we may yet outwit them." + +Morning came at last. The ship was still shooting forward at fast +speed, in an easterly direction. The sailors had learned, in their +short stay aboard, where the food and stores were kept, and they lost +little time in getting breakfast. They sent same in to their captives, +including a big pot of hot coffee, and, after partaking of this the +professor and his friends felt better. + +The mate of the Good Hope came in to help clear away the dishes. As he +passed Mark he slipped into the boy's hand a note. + +"Don't read it until you are alone," he said in a low voice, as he +hurried from the room. + +As soon as the other sailors had left, Mark glanced at the slip of +paper. It bore these words: + + "Open when you hear three raps, then two, then three, and keep + silent." + +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson. + +Mark showed him the paper. + +"I wonder what it means," the boy said. + +"Do you think he is a friend of ours?" the professor asked. + +Mark told him of the mate's conversation the night previous. + +"I think we can trust him," the scientist went on. "He must intend to +pay us a visit when the others are asleep. When we hear the knocks as +he specifies we must open the door and let him in." + +All that day the captives were kept in the living room. Once or twice +Mark was sent for to make some adjustment to the machinery, but the +apparatus, for the most part, was automatic, and needed little +attention. The professor, as well as the others, were all impatience +for the promised visit of the mate. Still they felt he would not come +until night. + +In fact it was long past midnight before Mark, Jack and the professor, +who were anxiously listening, heard the three raps, then two, then +three more. Mark quickly opened the door, and the mate stepped inside, +holding his finger to his lips as a sign of caution. Old Andy, +Washington, Bill and Tom had fallen asleep. + +"I have only time for a few words," the mate said. "I am closely +watched. Tony mistrusts me. I will save you if I can." + +"Why have they repaid my kindness with such actions?" asked Mr. +Henderson. + +"Because they are desperate men," replied the mate. "They are nothing +more than pirates. They mutinied on the other ship, killed the captain +and those of the crew who would not join them, and started off to seek +their fortunes. I pretended to join them to save my life, but I have +only been watching for a chance to escape. + +"Because of lax discipline the ship was sent on fire. We tried to put +it out but could not. The rest you know." + +"I heard them plan to capture this airship, but could do nothing to +stop them. Then I resolved to pretend to act with them. They fear +pursuit for their other mutiny, and are anxious to get as far away as +possible." + +"Do you think they will abandon the ship in a little while?" asked the +professor hopefully. + +"I'm afraid not," answered the mate. "I think they want to get rid of +all of you, so they can sail about as they please. Tony is a smart +man. He could soon learn to run this ship, he thinks." + +"I doubt it," Mr. Henderson answered. "But how are you going to help +us?" + +"I have not fully made up my plans," the mate answered. "However I +wanted you to know I would do my best to save you. Now I must go. Be +on the watch and when I can I will let you know what I have decided +on. I will hand Mark a note when I bring your meals, just as I did +to-day. I think----" + +"Hark! What was that?" asked the professor. + +There was a noise outside the door, as if some one was listening. + +"Put out the lights!" whispered the mate, and Jack switched off the +electric incandescents. + +A knock sounded on the door and the voice of Tony called: + +"Mark! Come here! I want you to look at the gas machine. It has +stopped working, and we are falling!" + + CHAPTER X + + FOOLING THEIR ENEMIES + +MARK hurried into the corridor, taking care to close the door after +him, so Tony could get no glimpse of the mate who had risked so much +to save his friends. But he need not have been alarmed for the leader +of the mutineers was too excited over the stopping of the gas +apparatus to give any heed to who was in with the captives. + +"Do you think you can fix it?" he asked the boy. + +"I guess so," Mark replied confidently. "If I can't there is no +danger, for we will fall gradually and land in the water." + +"But I don't want to do that," Tony objected. "I want to keep on +through the air." + +Mark did not reply. By this time he was at the gas machine. He soon +saw nothing was the matter save that new material must be placed in +the retort where the vapor was generated. He refilled it, the gas was +manufactured once more, and the ship began to rise. + +"I will know how to do it next time," Tony said with a grin. Mark +realized that every time he showed the leader of the mutineers +something about the ship it was putting the professor and his friends +more and more into the power of the scoundrels. But there was no help +for it. + +The ship was still plunging ahead, and kept about a mile above the +earth. As there was no further need of Mark, he was told he could go +back to his friends. When he reached the room where they were held +prisoners, he found the mate had gone away, promising again to do all +he could for them. + +The next night, which it seemed would never come, for the day, locked +as the captives were in their room, seemed endless, finally closed in. +Mark, Jack and the professor were anxious to know whether the mate +would pay them another visit. As for Andy, Tom and Bill, while they +were interested in the ship, and wanted to be free from the power of +the mutineers, they did not lose any sleep over it. + +Shortly after midnight, there came again the peculiar knock, and the +mate entered the room. He seemed much excited over something, and, as +soon as the portal was securely closed he said to Professor Henderson: + +"Is there an island any where near here where men could live for a +time?" + +"What do you mean?" asked the scientist. "Do you want us to desert the +ship and leave these scoundrels in charge?" + +"Nothing of the sort," replied the mate, who, had said his name was +Jack Rodgers. "But first answer my question. A great deal may depend +on it." + +Seeing Rodgers was in earnest, the professor looked over some maps and +charts, and announced that they were within a few hundred miles of a +group of islands. + +"When would we reach them?" was Rodgers's next question. + +Mr. Henderson made a few rapid calculations on a piece of paper. + +"At the present rate of sailing," he said, "we should be there about +ten o'clock to-morrow. That is, provided the ship does not slacken +speed or increase it." + +"There is no danger of either of those two things happening," said the +mate. "Tony is too afraid of the machinery to do anything to it. So +you may safely figure that our speed will continue the same." + +"Then I can guarantee, with all reasonable certainty," the professor +said, "that about ten o'clock to-morrow we will be less than a mile +from the islands. They are a group where friendly natives live, and +where many tropical fruits abound. One could scarcely select a better +place to be shipwrecked. But I hope the plans of Tony and his friends +do not include landing us there." + +"No, nothing like that," the mate answered. "Quite the contrary. But I +had better be going. I will try and see Mark some time to-morrow. Tony +does not mind when I speak to him." + +With this Rodgers left the captives, as he heard some of the sailors +moving about and did not want to be discovered. The professor and the +boys wondered what the mate's plan might be, but they had to be +content to wait and see. + +The night passed without incident. About nine o'clock the next morning +the mate came to the door of the room where the professor and his +friends were prisoners. He made no secret of his approach, but knocked +boldly. + +"Tell Mark I want to see him," he said, as the professor answered. +"All of you keep quiet," he added in a whisper. "There may be good +news soon." + +Mark slipped from the room. He followed the mate to the upper deck +which, at that time was deserted as all the sailors were in the dining +room eating, which practice they indulged in as often as they could. + +"I have a plan to get rid of these rough men," the mate said to Mark. +"It may work, and, again it may not. At any rate it is worth trying, +It all depends on you with what help I can give you." + +"I'm willing to do my share," Mark said, and for the next ten minutes +the boy and the mate were in earnest conversation. + +It was about thirty-five minutes later when there arose a sudden +commotion in the ship. Mark had returned to his friends and the mate +had disappeared. The confusion seemed to come from the engine room +where Tony had posted some of his men. + +"We're falling down! We'll all be killed!" shouted the men. "The ship +is falling into the sea!" + +"What is the trouble?" asked the professor as he heard the commotion. + +"It is part of the mate's plan," said Mark. "He told me to tell you to +do nothing. If Tony or any of the other men come to you just refer +them to me." + +Two minutes later Tony came rushing into the apartment where the +captives were held prisoners. + +"Here! Come quickly, Mark!" he exclaimed. "Something has gone wrong +with the gas machine again, and you must come and fix it before we are +all dashed to pieces!" + +With every appearance of haste Mark rushed from the apartment, +following Tony. The latter led the way to the engine room. + +"Can anything be done?" he asked. + +Mark took a survey of the machinery. + +"It is too late," he said as though much excited. "The ship is falling +down toward the sea with terrific force." + +It needed but a glance at the height gage to show this. The pointer +was revolving rapidly about the face of the dial. + +"Will the ship stand the blow?" asked Tony. + +"Not at the rate it is falling," replied Mark. "She will go all to +pieces when she strikes the water, and she may explode!" + +"What are we to do then?" asked the leader of the mutineers. + +"We must save ourselves!" cried the mate, running in at this juncture. +"Let our prisoners shift for themselves as best they can. Let's all +leap into the sea. There we at least have a chance for our lives. But +if we stay on this ship we will all be drowned like cats in a bag." + +"What do you propose?" asked Tony, his face white with fear. + +"When the ship comes near enough the surface of the water to make it +safe we should all drop overboard!" the mate exclaimed. "We are near +some islands, I understand, and we can thus save our lives by swimming +ashore." + +This plan seemed to meet with instant favor, and a little later there +was a rush for the deck, as each one wished to be the first to escape +from the boat they believed to be doomed. + +Lower and lower fell the Mermaid. She was like a wounded bird which +the shot of the hunter has crippled. Down and down she fluttered. + +By this time all the sailors, save the mate were on deck. He and Mark +remained in the engine room. + +"Don't let her get too low," the mate whispered. + +"I'll watch out," Mark replied. "I want to give them a good scare +while I'm at it." + +The ship was now within fifty feet of the water. There was a cry of +terror from the sailors. Some of them leaped over the rail and started +to swim ashore, as the ship was by this time close to a group of +islands. + +Suddenly, from the engine room the mate rushed. + +"Jump! Jump for your lives!" he exclaimed. "The ship is about to blow +up!" + + CHAPTER XI + + MYSTERIOUS HAPPENINGS + +THE voice of the mate echoed through the Mermaid. Those on deck heard +it, as did Tony in the engine room, where he was vainly trying to +understand the complicated machinery. + +An instant later there sounded from beneath the ship a series of +splashes. More sailors were leaping from the deck of the craft to the +ocean. The distance was not great, particularly as they all landed in +water. + +"Quick!" cried the mate to a group of sailors that hesitated before +taking the jump. "The ship may blow up any minute now." + +The men needed no second urging. As soon as they struck the water they +began to swim ashore, as it was not far away. One after another they +jumped over the rail. Tony was the last to go. He urged the captives +to follow him, but they all refused. + +A minute later the only one of the pirate crew left on the ship was +the mate. The others were all struggling in the sea. Eventually they +all reached shore in safety. + +The airship was now within about twenty feet of the water. It was +still falling but not so rapidly. + +"Better send her up, now," said the mate to Mark, and the boy turned +the necessary levers to accomplish this. + +Dipping into the water as a sea gull does when searching for food on +the wing, for she had come quite low, the Mermaid mounted once more +into the air, and was soon sailing along over the heads of Tony and +his gang. + +"What's it all about?" asked Mr. Henderson, who seemed in a sort of +stupor. "I thought the ship was broken. How, then, can it rise?" + +"It was only a trick of mine," Rodgers said. "The gas machine is not +broken. I had Mark fix it so that only a little vapor would be +generated. When the supply in the holder was not enough, and no more +was being made, the ship had to sink. Mark and I pretended it was +worse than it really was just to scare the scoundrels." + +"And you evidently succeeded," observed Mr. Henderson. "They have all +left us. I am glad you stayed." + +"So am I," said Rodgers. "I was just waiting for a chance to escape +from that crowd. This was the plan I thought of that night. I wanted +to see the men put on some island where they could manage to live, and +which was not too far away." + +The Mermaid was now mounting upward rapidly, as Mark had adjusted the +machinery properly. The craft was well rid of the pirate crew, and was +able to proceed on its way, and enable Mr. Henderson to carry out his +plans. + +When the Mermaid had reached a certain height her prow was turned the +other way, and she was sent back racing over the ground she had just +covered. But now the ship was in the hands of friends. Fortunately no +great damage had been done by the sailors, and the professor was soon +able to get things in ship-shape. The engines had not been molested +and were working better than ever. + +"Now to make another attempt to reach the big hole in the earth," the +professor cried. "We will be careful next time, who we rescue from +ships at sea." + +The island was soon left behind, becoming a mere speck on the ocean. +Those aboard the Mermaid knew no harm could befall the sailors, as +there were no savage tribes on the little spot of land. Eventually the +sailors were picked up by a passing vessel and taken to their homes. +The story of their first mutiny leaked out and they were properly +punished. + +It required several days travel before the airship regained the +distance she had lost because of the plans of the pirates. Also, there +were a number of minor repairs to make, and the professor and his +friends were kept busy. + +"How much longer before we come to the big hole?" asked Jack, one day. + +"I think we ought to be near it in about two weeks," the professor +replied. "I only hope we shall not be disappointed, and will be able +to explore it." + +"'Tain't goin' t' be no fun t' be decimated an' expurgitated inter a +conglomerous aggregation of elements constituting th' exterior portion +of human anatomy," said Washington in dubious tones. + +"You mean you're afraid of being boiled in the steam from the big +hole?" asked Mark. + +"Jest so," replied the colored man. + +"You don't need to worry about that," put in the professor. "I will +not take the ship down if there is any danger, though of course there +will be some risk." + +The ship, having been fully repaired, was now able to be speeded up, +and was sent scudding along toward her destination. Rodgers proved a +valuable acquisition toward the crew, for he had sailed many years in +the waters over which they were flying, and was able to give the +professor many valuable hints. He had heard vague stories of the +island with the big hole, but had never been near it. He did not make +the trip however, as, at his request, he was put off at an inhabited +island one night. + +It was about a week after the sailors were frightened from the ship, +that a curious experience befell Mark. Washington was on duty in the +conning tower, attending to the apparatus as the ship flew through the +air, and all the others had gone to bed. Mark had remained up, later +than the others as he was interested in reading a book on science. + +About ten o'clock he became hungry, and going to the pantry got some +bread and cold meat. He set these on a table, and then, remembering he +would need some water to drink, started after some in the cooler, +which was in a little room near the tower. + +Washington heard the boy as he turned the faucet to draw the liquid, +and spoke to him, as the colored man was rather lonesome at his post. +Mark did not linger more than a minute or two, but when he returned to +where he had left the food he was much surprised. + +There was not a trace of it to be seen. The dishes were on the table, +but every vestige of bread and meat had disappeared. + +"I wonder if a cat or dog has been here," was Mark's first thought. +Then he remembered that no such animals were aboard the Mermaid. + +Something on the floor caught his eye. He stooped and picked it up. It +was a slice of bread, but in such shape that the boy stared at it, +puzzled as to how it could have become so. + +It was flattened out quite thin, but the strangest part of it was that +it bore what seemed to be the marks of thumb and fingers from a very +large hand. So big, in fact, was the print, that Mark's hand scarce +covered half of it, and, where the bread had been squeezed into a +putty like mass (for it was quite fresh) the peculiar markings on the +skin of the tips of the fingers were visible. + +"It looks as if a giant grabbed this slice of bread," Mark observed. +"There are strange happenings aboard this ship. I wish I knew what +they meant." + +He looked all around for the food, thinking perhaps a rat had dragged +it off, but there was no trace of it. + +Suddenly the boy thought he heard a sound from the big storeroom. He +was almost sure he heard something moving in there. He started toward +the door when he was stopped by hearing the professor's voice call: + +"Don't open that door, Mark. Have I not told you that place must not +be entered?" + +"I thought I heard some one in there," Mark replied. + +"There is nothing in there but some apparatus of mine," Mr. Henderson +said. "I want no one to see it. What is the matter?" + +Mark explained matters to the scientist, who had, as he said later, +arisen on hearing the boy, moving about. + +"Oh, it was a rat that took your stuff," Mr. Henderson said. "I guess +there are some pretty big ones on the ship. Get some more food and go +to sleep." + +Mark felt it best to obey, though he was by no means satisfied with +the professor's explanation. He listened intently to see if any more +noises came from the storeroom, but none did, and he went to bed. + +Several times after that Mark tried the experiment of leaving food +about. On each occasion it was taken. + +"It looks as if the ship was haunted," he said. "Of course I know it +isn't, but it's very queer. They must be strange rats that can get +food from shelves when there is only the smooth side of the ship to +climb up," for on some occasions Mark had tried the experiment of +putting the food as nearly out of reach as possible. + +It took several nights to learn all this, and, as he did not want to +take any one into his confidence, he had to work in secret. But, with +all his efforts he learned nothing, save that there was something odd +about the ship that he could not fathom. + +At first he believed the professor had some strange animal concealed +in the storeroom, but he dismissed this idea almost as soon as he +thought of it. For what could the scientist want with an animal when +they were going to the interior of the earth? That some beast had +slipped aboard was out of the question. Mark was much puzzled, but +finally, deciding the matter did not concern him a great deal, gave up +trying to solve the mystery, at least for a time. + +The ship was now in the neighborhood of the equator and the climate +had become much warmer. So hot indeed were some nights that they slept +out on deck, with the Mermaid flying through the air at a moderate +pace, for it was deemed best not to go at any great speed after dark. + +One night the professor, after consulting various charts and maps, and +making calculations which covered several sheets of paper announced: + +"We should sight the mysterious island to-morrow." + +"That's good news!" exclaimed Jack. "I'm anxious to see what's below +inside of that big hole." + +"Everybody git ready for their funerals!" exclaimed Washington in a +deep voice. "I ain't got many----" + +"Cheer up," interrupted Jack, poking Washington in the ribs. The +colored man was very ticklish, and he began to laugh heartily, though, +perhaps, he did not feel like it. + +Suddenly, above the sound of his shouts, there came a crashing, +grinding noise from the engine room. + + CHAPTER XII + + THE BIG HOLE + +"SOMETHING has gone wrong!" exclaimed the professor as he jumped up. +He reached the engine room ahead of any one else, and when the two +boys got there they found him busy twisting wheels and shifting +levers. + +"Anything serious?" asked Jack. + +"It's the gas machine again," Mr. Henderson replied. "It broke where +we fixed it. However it doesn't matter. I was going to lower the ship +anyhow, as I want to approach the island from the water. We will go +down a little sooner than I counted on." + +The disabling of the gas machine caused the vapor to escape slowly +from the tank, and this made the ship sink gradually. By means of the +emergency stop-cock the descent could be controlled almost as well as +though the machinery was in working order. Half an hour later the +Mermaid rested on the water. + +It was a little rough, as there was quite a swell on, and not so +pleasant as floating in the air on an even keel, but they made the +best of it. + +On account of the little accident, and not being certain of its +extent, it was deemed best not to send the ship ahead. So they laid to +until morning. + +For the better part of two days all those on board the Mermaid had +their hands full mending the break and making other repairs found +necessary. In that time they lay to, floating idly with the currents, +or blown by the wind, for the professor would not start any of the +engines or apparatus until the ship was in good condition. + +In this time Mark had several times recalled the curious happenings in +regard to the disappearing food, and the mystery of the storeroom. But +there were no further manifestations, and no other signs that there +might be a strange visitor aboard. + +"I couldn't have imagined it all," said Mark, "but I guess what did +happen may have been caused by natural means, only I can't discover +them." + +It was about two days after this, the ship having sailed scores of +miles on the surface of the water, that Mark, who was in the conning +tower exclaimed: + +"That looks like a waterspout ahead of us." + +"That's what it is!" Jack agreed. "What shall we do?" + +"Call the professor!" said Mark. "He'll know." + +When Mr. Henderson came, he looked for a long time at a cloud of black +vapor which hung low in the east. + +"It may be a waterspout," he said. "We'll rise in the air and see if +we can avoid it." + +The ship was sent up into the air. As it rose higher and higher, the +professor, making frequent observations from his conning tower, cried +out: + +"That is no waterspout!" + +"What is it?" asked Mark. + +"It is the steam and vapor rising from the big hole in the earth! +Boys, we are almost there!" + +"Are you sure that's it?" asked Mark. + +"Almost positive," Mr. Henderson replied. "You can see how much warmer +it has become of late, as we approached the equator. We are almost due +at the island, and I have no doubt we have reached it." + +As the ship flew forward the mass of dark vapor became more +pronounced. Through the glasses it could be noticed to consist of +rolling masses of clouds. What lay beneath them no one knew. The +adventurers were going to try to find out. + +Now that they had arrived at the beginning of the main part of their +journey, the travelers felt their spirits sink a little. It was one +thing to plan to go down into the depths of the earth, but it was +quite another to make the actual attempt. Still, they were not going +to give up the project. The professor had confidence in his ship and +believed it could safely make the trip. Still it was with no little +apprehension that Mr. Henderson watched the nearer approach of the +craft to that strange island. + +"Perfesser, are yo' really an' truly goin' t' depress this elongated +spheroid an' its human consignment int' that conglomerous convoluted +mass of gaseous vapor regardless of th' consequences?" asked +Washington, as he gazed with wide opened eyes at the sight before him. + +"If you mean am I going to let the Mermaid go down into that hole you +are perfectly correct," the scientist answered, "though you could have +said it in fewer words, Washington." + +"I-- I guess I'll get out an' walk," the colored man made reply. + +"This isn't any trolley car," observed Mark. "Don't lose your nerve, +Wash. Stay with us, and we'll discover a gold or diamond mine, maybe." + +"Is there diamonds down there?" asked the colored man, his fright +seeming to leave him. + +"There are all sorts of things inside the earth," the professor +answered. + +"Then I'm goin' along!" Washington declared. "I always did want a +diamond ring, an' I knows a little colored gal that wants one, too. +I'm goin' all right! This suttenly am th' most kloslosterous +conjunctivity of combativeness that I ever sagaciated!" and he began +to do a sort of impromptu cake-walk. + + CHAPTER XIII + + DOWN INTO THE EARTH + +IT was now noon, but the adventurers did not think of dinner in the +excitement of approaching the mysterious island. The speed of the ship +was increased that they might the more quickly come to it. As they +approached they could see the masses of vapor more plainly, and it +appeared that some great commotion must be going on inside the big +hole, since clouds of steam arose. + +"I only hope it doesn't prove too hot for us," observed the professor. +"However, I provided a water jacket for the ship, and we may need it, +as well as the vacuum chambers to keep the heat from us." + +It was about three o'clock when the flying ship reached the edge of +the island. From there it was about a mile to the rim of the big hole, +over one side of which the waters of the ocean poured with a roar that +could be heard over half a mile off. + +"I think we had better halt and see that everything is in good shape +before proceeding," said Mr. Henderson. "Jack, you and Mark make a +thorough inspection of the engine room, and see that all the apparatus +is in working order," + +The two boys prepared to do as they were told. Mark, who was walking a +little ahead of Jack, entered the apartment from which the storeroom +opened. As he did so he saw, or thought he saw, the door of the place +where the extra supplies were kept, close. Without saying anything to +Jack he hurried forward, and tried the knob. It would not turn. + +"That's funny," said Mark to himself. "I could almost swear I saw some +one go into that room. Yet I know the professor did not enter, for I +just left him. And none of the others would dare to. I wonder if I +will ever solve the mystery." + +But he had too much to do to allow him to dwell on that matter. +Several of the dynamos needed adjusting and for two hours he and Jack +had all they could do. + +In the meanwhile the professor had gone over the other parts of the +ship, and gotten everything in readiness for the descent. The Mermaid +was lowered to within a few hundred feet of the sea, and, through a +hose that was let down, the compartments, provided for this emergency +were filled with water. These compartments were between the outer and +inner hulls of the lower part of the craft, and were designed to +prevent the interior becoming heated in case the travelers found they +had to pass close to fire. There were also vacuum chambers, and from +these the air was exhausted, as of course every schoolboy knows a +vacuum is a non-conductor of either heat or cold. + +"Now I think we are ready," the professor announced at length. + +"Everything's all right in the engine room," announced Jack. + +"Yes, an' everything's all right in th' kitchen," put in Washington. +"I've got a good meal ready as soon as any one wants to eat." + +"It will have to wait a while," Mr. Henderson remarked. "We are going +to start to make the descent before we dine." + +The hose was reeled up, and the ship was sent a few hundred feet +higher into the air, as Mr. Henderson wanted to take a last good +observation before he went down into the hole. + +But having risen some distance above the masses of rolling vapors he +found he was at no advantage, since the strongest telescope he could +bring to bear could not pierce the cloud masses. + +"We'll just have to trust to luck," the scientist said. "I judge we're +about over the centre of the opening. Lower away Mark!" + +The boy, who, under the watchful eye of the professor, was +manipulating the levers and wheels in the conning tower, shifted some +handles. The gas was expelled from the holder, the negative gravity +apparatus ceased to work, and the Flying Mermaid sank lower and lower, +toward the mysterious hole that yawned beneath her. + +The hearts of all beat strangely, if not with fear, at least with +apprehension, for they did not know what they might encounter. Perhaps +death in some terrible form awaited them. But the desire to discover +something new and strange had gripped all of them, and not one would +have voted to turn back. + +Even old Andy, who seldom got excited, was in unusual spirits. He took +down his gun and remarked: + +"Maybe I can kill some new kind of animal, and write a book about its +habits, for surely we will see strange beasts in the under-world." + +Lower and lower sank the ship. Now it was amid the first thin masses +of vapors, those that floated highest and were more like a light fog, +than anything else. By means of a window in the bottom of the craft, +which window was closed by a thick piece of plate glass, Professor +Henderson could look down and see what was beneath them. + +"The clouds seem to be getting thicker," he said, as he peered through +the small casement. "If they would only clear away we could see +something." + +But instead of doing this the vapors accumulated more thickly about +the ship. It was so dark inside the Mermaid now that the electric +lights had to be switched on. In the room with the floor-window the +lights were not used, as had they shone one could not have seen down +below. + +The professor maintained his position. The descent was a perilous one, +and he wanted to be on the watch to check it at once if the Mermaid +was liable to dash upon some pointed rock or fall into some fiery pit. +His hand was on the signal levers. + +Suddenly he looked up and glanced at a gage on the wall. The hand of +it was slowly revolving. + +"We are at the earth's surface," the scientist said. "Now we are below +it. Now we are fairly within the big hole! Boys, we may be on the +verge of a great discovery!" + +An instant later it seemed as if a hot wave had struck the Mermaid, or +as if the craft had been plunged into boiling water. + +"It's going to be hot!" cried the professor. "Lucky I provided the +water jackets!" + +Then the lights in the interior of the ship went out, leaving the +whole craft in darkness. + +"What has happened?" cried Mark. + + CHAPTER XIV + + MANY MILES BELOW + +"DON'T be alarmed," spoke the calm voice of the professor. "I have +only turned off the electrics. I want to switch on the search lights, +to see if we can learn anything about our position." + +As he spoke he turned a switch, and, the gloom below the ship, as the +boys could see by glimpses from the floor-window, was pierced by a +dazzling glare. In the bottom of the Mermaid were set a number of +powerful electric arc lights with reflectors, constructed to throw the +beams downward. The professor had built them in for just this +emergency, as he thought that at some time they might want to +illuminate what was below the craft. + +Not that it was of much avail on this occasion, for, though the lights +were powerful, they could not pierce the miles of gloom that lay below +them. The beams only served to accentuate the darkness. + +"I guess we'll have to trust to luck," the professor said, after a +vain attempt, by means of powerful glasses, to distinguish something. +"There is too much fog and vapor." + +"What makes it so warm?" asked Mark, removing his coat. + +"Well, you must remember you are approaching the interior of the +earth," the professor answered. "It has been calculated that the heat +increases one degree for every fifty-five feet you descend. We have +come down several hundred feet and of course it is getting warmer." + +"Then if we go down very far it will get so hot we will not be able to +stand it," Jack put in. + +"I do not believe we will suffer any great inconvenience," Mr. +Henderson went on. "I believe that after we pass a certain point it +will become cooler. I think the inner fires of the earth are more or +less heated gas in a sort of inner chamber between two shells. If we +can pass the second shell, we will be all right." + +"But aren't we liable to hit something, going down into the dark this +way?" asked Mark. + +"We will guard ourselves as far as possible," the scientist answered. + +The Mermaid seemed to be going down on a side of the immense shaft a +good way distant from the strange waterfall. When they had first +dropped into the hole the travelers could hear the rush of waters, but +now the noise was not audible. + +"I think the hole must widen out the farther down we go," the +professor said. "We are probably many miles from the fall now." + +"I'm sure I hope so," put in Jack. "It would be no fun to have to take +a shower bath in this place." + +After a meal, the boys and the professor took some more observations, +but with all their efforts nothing could be seen below the ship but a +vast black void, into which they were steadily descending. + +"I wonder when we're going to stop," asked Mark. "It's like playing +the game 'Going to Jerusalem,' you keep wondering when the music will +cease and you will have a chance to grab a chair. I only hope we have +a chair or something else to sit on, in case we go to smash." + +"We're not liable to have any accidents with the professor in charge," +Jack answered. "Didn't he bring us safe out of some pretty tight holes +when we went to the north pole in the airship, and again when we found +the south pole in the submarine?" + +"Yes, but this is different," objected Mark. + +"Well, I'm not worrying," Jack went on. "It doesn't do any good, and +only makes you lie awake nights. By the way, I wonder what time it is +getting to be." + +He looked at his watch and found it was close on to eight o'clock in +the evening. So late had dinner been served, and so varied were the +happenings of the last few hours, that time had passed quickly. + +"Why it's almost bed-time," said Jack. "I wonder if we are to go on +dropping into the depths of nowhere all night." + +At that moment the professor entered the room where the boys were. He +seemed quite pleased over something, and was smiling. + +"Everything is going along famously," he said. "I have just tested the +air and find it is rich in oxygen. We shall suffer nothing on that +score. The heat too, seems to have decreased. On the whole, everything +favors us." + +"Are we going on down?" asked Mark. + +"As far as we can," Mr. Henderson answered. "Let me see how far we are +below now." + +He went to the gage that indicated the vertical position of the ship. +Because of the changed conditions, the craft now sinking below the +surface of the earth instead of rising above it, as was its wont, some +calculations were necessary. These the scientist made as quickly as he +could. + +"We are now ten miles underground!" he exclaimed. "That is doing very +well. My theories are working out. I think we shall land somewhere +before long." + +"I hopes so!" exclaimed Washington coming in at this point. "I'm +mighty skeered shootin' down int' this dark hole, and no time-table t' +show when we's due t' arrive." + +"We ought to land in a couple of days more," the professor answered. +"Never mind about worrying Washington, I'll take care of you." + +"I hopes so, Perfesser," the colored man said. "I got a little girl +waitin' for me back in Georgia, an' I'd like t' see her 'fore I git +burned up." + +Accompanied by the professor, the boys made a tour of the ship to see +that all the machinery and apparatus were in working order. Owing to +the changed conditions the negative gravity engine had to be worked at +faster speed than usual, since the downward pull of the earth was +greater the farther they descended into the interior and they did not +want to fall too swiftly. But this was easily provided for, since the +professor had made the apparatus capable of standing a great strain. + +The ten miles had become fourteen when the professor, finding that +everything was in good shape, proposed that the boys go to bed. They, +did not want to, though they were sleepy, and they feared to miss some +strange sights. + +But when the professor had promised to call them in case anything +unusual developed, they consented to turn in, and Bill and Tom assumed +their duties, which were light enough, now that the ship was merely +falling into the immense shaft. + +When Mark turned into his bunk he could not go to sleep at once. It +may have been the excitement over their new position, or because he +had eaten too hearty a supper, but the fact was he remained awake for +some time. + +While thus tossing restlessly on his bed, wondering what ailed him, he +thought he heard a noise in the main apartment out of which the +storeroom opened. He crawled softly from his bed, and looked from his +stateroom door. + +In the light of a shaded electric Mark saw the figure of some one +glide across the floor and take refuge in the room, which Professor +Henderson always was so particular about. + +"I wonder what or who that was," reasoned Mark. "There is some mystery +in this. Can the professor have concealed some one on this ship whose +presence he does not want to admit? It certainly looks so." + +Not wanting to awaken the ship's crew, and remembering what Mr. +Henderson had said about any one entering the storeroom, Mark went +back to bed, to fall into an uneasy slumber. + +"Breakfast!" called Washington breaking in on a fine dream Jack was +having about being captain of a company of automobile soldiers. "Last +call for breakfast!" + +"Hello! Is it morning?" asked Jack. + +"Not so's you could notice it," Washington went on. "It's as dark as a +stack of black cats and another one throwed in. But breakfast is ready +jest the same." + +The boys were soon at the table, and learned that nothing of +importance had occurred during the night. The Mermaid had been kept +going slowly down, and about seven o'clock registered more than fifty +miles below the earth's surface. + +Still there was no change in the outward surroundings. It remained as +black as the interior of Egypt when that country was at its darkest. +The powerful electrics could not pierce the gloom. The ship was +working well, and the travelers were very comfortable. + +Down, down, down, went the Mermaid. The temperature, which had risen +to about ninety went back to sixty-nine, and there seemed to be no +more danger from the inner fires. + +They were now a hundred miles under the surface. But still the +professor kept the Mermaid sinking. Every now and again he would take +an observation, but only found the impenetrable darkness surrounded +them. + +"We must arrive somewhere, soon," he muttered. + +It was about six o'clock that night that the alarm bell set up a +sudden ringing. The professor who was making some calculations on a +piece of paper jumped to his feet, and so did a number of the others. + +"We are nearing the bottom!" he cried. "The bell has given us +warning!" + + CHAPTER XV + + IN THE STRANGE DRAUGHT + +THE boys ran to attend to the engines and apparatus to which they had +been assigned in view of this emergency. The professor, Washington, +Bill, Tom and Andy, who had kept to themselves since the descent, came +running out of the small cabin where they usually sat, and wanted to +know what it was all about. + +"We may hit something, in spite of all precautions," Mr. Henderson +remarked. "Slow down the ship." + +The Mermaid was, accordingly checked in her downward flight, by a +liberal use of the gas and the negative gravity machine. + +The bell continued to ring, and the dials pointed to the mark that +indicated the ship was more than one hundred and fifty miles down. + +Mark, who had run to the engine room to check the descent, came back. + +"Why didn't you slow her down?" asked the professor. + +"I did," replied the boy. "The negative gravity and the gas machines +are working at full speed." + +"Then why are we still descending?" asked the scientist. "For a while +our speed was checked, but now we are falling faster than before." + +"I attended to the apparatus," Mark insisted. + +Just then, from without the ship, came a terrible roaring sound, as +though there was a great cyclone in progress. At the same time, those +aboard the craft could feel themselves being pulled downward with +terrific force. + +"We are caught in a draught!" Mr. Henderson cried. "We are being +sucked down into the depths of the earth!" + +He ran to the engine room. With the help of the boys he set in motion +an auxiliary gravity machine, designed to exert a most powerful +influence against the downward pull of the earth. As they watched the +great wheels spin around, and heard the hum and whirr of the dynamos, +the boys watched the pointer which indicated how low they were +getting. + +And, as they watched, they saw that the needle of the dial kept +moving, moving, moving. + +"Our efforts are useless! We can't stop!" the professor cried. + +Grave indeed was the plight of the adventurers. In their ship they +were being sucked down into unknown regions and all their efforts did +not avail to save them. It was an emergency they could not guard +against, and which could not have been foreseen. + +"What are to do?" asked Mark. + +"We can only wait," Mr. Henderson replied. "The terrible suction may +cease, or it may carry us to some place of safety. Let us hope for the +best." + +Seeing there was no further use in running the engines in an effort to +check the downward rush the machines were stopped. Then they waited +for whatever might happen. + +Now that they seemed in imminent peril Washington was as cool as any +one. He went about putting his kitchen in order and getting ready for +the next meal as if they were sailing comfortably along on the surface +of the ocean. As for old Andy he was nervous and frightened, and +plainly showed it. With his gun in readiness he paced back and forth +as if on the lookout for strange beasts or birds. + +Bill and Tom were so alarmed that they were of little use in doing +anything, and they were not disturbed in their staterooms where they +went when it became known that the ship was unmanageable. + +The boys and the professor, while greatly frightened at the unexpected +turn of events, decided there was no use in giving way to foolish +alarm. They realized they could do nothing but await developments. + +At the same time they took every precaution. They piled all the +bedding on the floor of the living room, so that the pillows and +mattresses might form a sort of pad in case the ship was dashed down +on the bottom of the big hole. + +"Not that it would save us much," Jack observed with a grim smile, +"but somehow it sort of makes your mind easier." + +All this while the ship was being sucked down at a swift pace. The +pointer of the gage, indicating the depth, kept moving around and soon +they were several hundreds of miles below the surface of the earth. + +The professor tried, by means of several instruments, to discover in +which direction they were headed, and whether they were going straight +down or at an angle. But some strange influence seemed to affect the +gages and other pieces of apparatus, for the pointers and hands would +swing in all directions, at one time indicating that they were going +down, and, again, upward. + +"There must be a strong current of electricity here," Mr. Henderson +said, "or else there is, as many suspect, a powerful magnet at the +center of the earth, which we are nearing." + +"What will you do if the ship is pulled apart, or falls and is +smashed?" asked Mark with much anxiety. + +"You take a cheerful view of things," said Jack. + +"Well, it's a good thing to prepare for emergencies," Mark added. + +"If the ship was to be separated by the magnetic pull, or if it fell +on sharp rocks and was split in twain, I am afraid none of us could do +anything to save ourselves," the professor answered. "Still, if we +were given a little warning of the disaster, I have means at hand +whereby we might escape with our lives. But it would be a perilous way +of----" + +"I reckon yo' all better come out an' have supper," broke in +Washington. "Leastways we'll call it supper, though I don't rightly +know whether it's night or mornin'. Anyhow I've got a meal ready." + +"I don't suppose any of us feel much like eating," observed Mr. +Henderson, "but there is no telling when we will have the chance +again, so, perhaps, we had better take advantage of it." + +For a while they ate in silence, finding that they had better +appetites than they at first thought. Old Andy in particular did full +justice to the food Washington had prepared. + +"I always found it a good plan to eat as much and as often as you +can," the hunter remarked. "This is a mighty uncertain world." + +"You started to tell us a little while ago, Professor," said Mark, +"about a plan you had for saving out lives if worst came to worst, and +there was a chance to put it into operation. What is it?" + +"I will tell you," the aged inventor said. "It is something about +which I have kept silent, as I did not want to frighten any of you. It +was my latest invention, and I had only perfected it when we started +off on this voyage. Consequently I had no chance to try it. The +machine works in theory, but whether it does in practice is another +question. That is why I say there is a risk. But we may have to take +this risk. I have placed aboard this ship a----" + +The professor was interrupted in what he was about to say by a curious +tremor that made the whole ship shiver as though it had struck some +obstruction. Yet there was no sudden jolt or jar such as would have +been occasioned by that. + +At the same time Washington, who was out in the kitchen, came running +into the dining room, crying: + +"We're droppin' into a ragin' fire, Perfesser!" + +"What do you mean?" asked Mr. Henderson. + +"I jest took a look down through th' hole in th' bottom of the ship!" +cried Washington. "It's all flames an' smoke below us!" + +"I wonder if it is the end," the professor muttered in a low voice. + +Followed by the boys, the inventor hastened to the floor-window. The +lights were turned off to enable a better view to be had of what was +below them. + +Leaning over the glass protected aperture the boys and the professor +saw, far, far down, a bright light shining. It was as if they were +miles above a whole town of blast furnaces, the stacks of which were +belching forth flames and smoke. The rolling clouds of vapor were +illuminated by a peculiar greenish light, which, at times, turned to +red, blue, purple and yellowish hues. + +The effect was weird and beautiful though it was full of terror for +the travelers. It seemed as if they were falling into some terrible +pit of fire, for the reflection of what they feared were flames, could +plainly be seen. + +"I wish I'd never come on this terrible voyage!" wailed Washington. +"I'd rather freeze to death than be burned up." + +"Washington, be quiet!" commanded the professor sternly. "This is no +time for foolishness. We must work hard to save our lives, for we are +in dire peril. + +"Mark, you and Washington, with Jack, start the engines. Turn on every +bit of power you can. Fill the gas holder as full as it will hold, and +use extra heavy pressure. I will see if I can not work the negative +gravity apparatus to better advantage than we did before. We must +escape if possible!" + +The boys, as was also Washington, were only too glad to have something +to do to take their mind off their troubles. All three were much +frightened, but Mark and Jack tried not to show it. As for Washington +he was almost crying. + +Soon the whirr and hum of the machinery in the Mermaid was heard. The +craft, which was rushing in some direction, either downward, ahead or +backwards within the unknown depths, shivered from the speed of the +dynamos and other apparatus. Soon the boys could hear the professor +starting the negative gravity engine, and then began a struggle +between the forces of nature and those of mankind. + +Once more the adventurers anxiously watched the gages and indicators. +For a while the ship seemed to be holding out against the terrible +influence that was sucking her down. She appeared to hesitate. Then, +as the downward force triumphed over the mechanical energy in the +craft, she began to settle again, and soon was descending, if that was +the direction, as fast as before. + +"It is of no use," said the professor with a groan. "I must try our +last resort!" + +He started from the engine room where Mark and Jack had gone. As he +did so, he glanced at a thermometer hanging on the wall near the door. + +"Has any one turned on the heat?" he asked. + +"It's shut off," replied Mark, looking at the electric stove. + +"Then what makes it so hot?" asked the scientist. + +He pointed to the little silvery column in the tiny tube of the +instrument. It registered close to one hundred degrees, though a few +minutes before it had been but sixty. And the starting of the +machinery could not account for the rise in temperature, since most of +the apparatus was run by electricity and developed little heat save in +the immediate proximity. The thermometer was fully ten feet away from +any machine. + +"It's the fiery furnace that's doing it!" cried Washington. "We're +falling into th' terrible pit an' we're goin' t' be roasted alive!" + +"It certainly is getting warmer," observed Mark, as he took off his +coat. Soon he had to shed his vest, and Jack and the professor +followed his example. The others too, also found all superfluous +garments a burden, and, in a little while they were going about in +scanty attire. + +Still the heat increased, until it was almost torture to remain in the +engine room. Nor was it much cooler elsewhere. In vain did the +professor set a score of big electric fans to whirring. He even placed +cakes of ice, from the small ice machine that was carried, in front of +the revolving blades, to cool off the air. But the ice was melted +almost as soon as it was taken from the apparatus. + +"Them flames is gittin' worser!" Washington cried a little later. +"We's comin' nearer!" + +From the bottom window the professor and the boys looked down. True +enough the curious, changing, vari-colored lights seemed brighter. +They could almost see the tongues of flame shooting upward in +anticipation of what they were soon to devour. + +The heat was increasing every minute. The sides of the ship were hot. +The heads of the travelers were getting dizzy. They could hardly talk +or move about. + +"I must save our lives! I must trust to the----" The professor, who +was muttering to himself started toward the storeroom. As in a dream +Mark watched him. He remembered afterward that he had speculated on +what might be the outcome of the mystery the professor threw about the +place. "I will have to use it," he heard the scientist say softly. + +Just as Mr. Henderson was about to open the door there came a fiercer +blast of heat than any that had preceded. At the same instant the +conditions in the Mermaid became so fearful that each of the travelers +felt himself fainting away. + +"Go to-- storeroom-- get cylinder-- get in----" the professor +murmured, and then he fell forward in a faint. + + CHAPTER XVI + + THE NEW LAND + +"WHAT is it? Tell us!" exclaimed Jack, almost in his last breath, for, +a few seconds later he too toppled over senseless. Then Washington +went down, while Andy, Bill and Tom succumbed to the terrible heat. + +Mark felt his head swimming. His eyes were almost bulging from their +sockets. He dimly remembered trying to force himself to go to the +storeroom and see what was there. He started toward it with that +intention, but fell half way to it. + +As he did so he saw something which impressed itself on his mind, half +unconscious as he was. + +The door of the storeroom suddenly opened, and from it came a giant +shape, that seemed to expand until it filled the whole of the +apartment where the stricken ones lay. It was like the form of some +monster, half human, half beast. Mark shuddered, and then, closing his +eyes, he felt himself sinking down into some terrible deep and black +pit. A second later the whole ship was jarred as though it had hit +something. + +How long he and the others remained unconscious Mark did not know. He +was the first to revive, and his first sensation was one as though he +had slept hard and long, and did not want to get up. He felt very +comfortable, although he was lying flat on the floor, with his head +jammed against the side of a locker. It was so dark that he could not +distinguish his hand held close to his face. + +"I wonder if I'm dead, and if all the others are dead too," he thought +to himself. "What has happened? Let's see, the last I remember was +some horrible shape rushing from the storeroom. I wonder what it could +have been? Surely that was not the secret the professor referred to." + +Mark shuddered as he recalled the monster that seemed to have grown +more terrible as each second passed. Then the boy raised himself up +from his prostrate position. + +"Well, at any rate, some one has turned off the heat," he murmured. +"It's very comfortable in here now. I wish I could strike a light." + +He listened intently, to learn if any of the others were moving about. +He could hear them breathing, but so faintly as to indicate they were +insensible. Mark stretched out his hand and felt that some one was +lying close to him, but who of the adventurers it was he could not +determine. + +"If only the dynamo was working we could have light," he said. "But it +seems to have stopped," and, indeed there was a lacking of the +familiar purr and hum of the electrical machine. In fact none of the +apparatus in the ship was working. + +"The storage battery!" exclaimed Mark. "That would give light for a +while, if I can only find the switch in the dark." + +He began crawling about on his hands and knees. It was so intensely +black that he ran into many things and received severe bruises. At +last he came to a doorway, and as he did so his hand came in contact +with an easy chair. It was the only one aboard, and by that he knew he +had passed into the sitting room. He had his general direction now, +and knew if he kept straight on he would come to the engine room. +There he was familiar enough with the apparatus and levers to be able +to turn the electric switch. + +Crawling slowly and cautiously, he reached the room where all the +engines were. Then he had to feel around the sides to locate the +switch. At length he found it. There was a click, a little flash of +greenish fire, and the copper conductors came together, and the ship +was flooded with the glow from the incandescents. + +Mark hurried back to where the others were lying. They were still +unconscious, but an uneasy, movement on the part of Jack told that he +was coming out of the stupor. Mark got some ammonia and held it +beneath his comrade's nose. The strong fumes completed the work that +nature had started and Jack opened his eyes. + +"Where am I? What has happened? Are any of them dead?" he asked +quickly. + +"I hope no one is dead," Mark replied. "As to the other question, I +can't answer. I don't know whether we are a thousand miles +underground, or floating on the ocean, though I'm more inclined to the +former theory. But never mind that now. Help me to bring the others +back to their senses. I'll work on the professor and you can begin on +Bill or Tom. Washington seems to be all right," for at that moment the +colored man opened his eyes, stared about him and then got up. + +"I thought I was dead for suah!" he exclaimed. + +"Some of the others may be if we don't hurry," said Mark. "Get to +work, Wash!" + +With the colored man to help them the two boys, by the use of the +ammonia, succeeded in reviving Bill, Tom and old Andy. But the +professor, probably on account of his advanced age, did not respond so +readily to the treatment. The boys were getting quite alarmed, as even +some of the diluted ammonia, forced between his lips, did not cause +him to open his eyes, or increase his heart action. + +"If he should die, and leave us all alone with the ship in this +terrible place, what would we do?" asked Jack. + +"He's not going to die!" exclaimed Mark. "Here I have another plan. +Washington bring that medical electrical battery from the engine +room." This was a small machine the professor had brought along for +experimental purposes. + +Quickly adjusting it, Mark placed the handles in the nerveless fingers +of Mr. Henderson. Then he started the current. In about a minute the +eyelids of the aged inventor began to quiver, and, in less than five +minutes he had been revived sufficiently to enable him to sit up. He +passed his hand across his forehead. + +"What has happened?" he asked in a faint voice. + +"I don't know; none of us knows," Mark answered. "We all lost our +senses when it got so hot, and there seemed to be some peculiar vapor +in the air. The last I remember was seeing some horrible shape rush +from the storeroom, soon after the ship struck. Then I fainted away. +When I woke up I managed to turn the lights on, and then I came back +here." + +"I wonder where we are," the old man murmured. "I must find out. We +must take every precaution. Washington, go and look at the gage +indicating our depth." + +The colored man was gone but a few seconds. When he returned his eyes +were bulging in terror. + +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson, who, thanks to the battery, had +almost completely recovered. + +"It ain't possible!" gasped Washington. "I'll never believe it!" + +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson, while the others waited in anxiety +for the answer. + +"We're five hundred miles down!" declared Washington. + +"Five hundred miles!" muttered the inventor. "It does not seem +possible, but it must be so. We fell very rapidly and the terrible +draught sucked us down with incredible rapidity. But come, we must see +what our situation is, and where we are. We are stationary, and are +evidently on some solid substance." + +They all felt much recovered now, and, as the terrible fright of being +consumed in a fiery furnace had passed, they all were in better +spirits. + +At the suggestion of the professor, the boys and Washington made a +tour of the ship. They found, for some unaccountable reason, that +nearly all the engines and apparatuses were out of gear. In some the +parts had broken, and others were merely stopped, from the failure of +some other machine, on which they were dependent. + +"I'm afraid this is the end of the Mermaid," said Mark, in a sorrowful +tone. + +"Nonsense!" replied Jack, who was of a more cheerful nature. "Things +are not so bad as they look. The professor can fix everything." + +"I'm sure I hope so," Mark went on, not much encouraged, however, by +Jack's philosophy. "It would be no joke to have to stay five hundred +miles underground the rest of our lives." + +"You don't know," retorted Jack. "Don't judge of a country you've +never seen. This may be as fine a place as it is on the surface of the +earth. I want a chance to see it," and Jack began to whistle a +cheerful tune. + +They completed the tour of the ship, and found, that, aside from the +damage to the machinery, the Mermaid had not sustained any harm. The +hull was in good order, though of course they could not tell about the +gas holder. It was not possible to see this except by going into the +conning tower or out on the small deck, and this they did not venture +to do. The connections between the holder and the main ship seemed to +be all right, and there was still a small quantity of gas in the big +tank, as Mark found on opening a stop-cock. + +They went back to the professor and told him what they had observed. +He seemed somewhat alarmed, the more so as the experience he had just +passed through had weakened him considerably. + +"I hope I shall be able to make the repairs," he said. "It is our only +hope." + +As he spoke he looked up at the electric lights that shone overhead +from wall brackets. + +"Who is shutting down the power?" he asked. + +"There is no power on, Professor," replied Mark. "I am running the +lights from the storage battery. But something is the matter, for they +are growing dim." + +The filaments were now mere dull red wires, and the ship was being +shrouded in gloom again. + +"The battery is failing!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "We shall be left +in darkness, and there is no other way to produce light. I ought to +have brought some lamps or candles along in case of emergency," + +The next instant the Mermaid became as black as Egypt is popularly +supposed to be, and something like an exclamation of terror came from +the professor. + +For several minutes they all sat there in the blackness and gloom, +waiting for they knew not what. Then, suddenly, there sounded +throughout the ship, a creaking as of metal sliding along metal. Some +big lever creaked, and, a second later the whole place was flooded +with light. + +"What has happened?" cried the professor, starting to his feet in +alarm. + +"We are going to be burned up!" exclaimed old Andy. + +"It's all right! It's all right!" yelled Washington from the engine +room where the boys had left him. "Don't git skeered! I done it! I +opened the port holes, by yanking on the lever. Golly, but we's +arrived at the new land! Look out, everybody!" + + CHAPTER XVII + + A STRANGE COUNTRY + +THEY all ran to the port holes, which were openings in the side of the +ship. They were fitted with thick, double glass, and covered on the +outside with steel shutters. These shutters were worked by a single +lever from the engine room, so that one person could open or close +them in a second or two. Washington, by accident, it appeared later, +had slid back the protecting pieces of steel, and the rest followed. + +As the adventurers looked from the glass ports they saw that the light +which had flooded the ship came from without. They were in the midst +of a beautiful glow, which seemed to be diffused about them like rays +from a sun. + +Only, in place of being a yellow or white light, such as the sun gives +off at varying times, the glow was of violet hue. And, as they +watched, they saw the light change color, becoming a beautiful red, +then blue, and again green. + +"Well, this is certainly remarkable!" the professor said. "I wonder +what causes that." + +"We've arrived! We're here, anyhow!" Washington cried, coming into the +room. "See the country!" + +Then, for the first time, the travelers, taking their attention from +the curious light that was all around them, saw that they had indeed +arrived. They were on a vast plain, one, seemingly, boundless in +extent, though off to the left there was a range of lofty mountains, +while to the right there was the glimmer of what might be a big lake +or inland sea. + +"See, we are resting on the ground!" exclaimed Jack. He pointed out of +the window, and the others, looking close at hand, noted that the +Mermaid had settled down in the midst of what seemed to be a field of +flowers. Big red and yellow blossoms were all in front, and some grew +so tall as to almost be up to the edge of the port. + +"I wonder if we can be seeing aright," the professor muttered. "Is +this really the interior of the earth; such a beautiful place as +this?" + +There could be little doubt of it. The ship had descended through the +big shaft, had been sucked down by the terrible air current, and had +really landed in a strange country. + +Of its size, shape and general conditions the adventurers, as yet, +could but guess. They could see it was a pleasant place, and one where +there might be the means to sustain life. For, as the professor said +afterward, he felt that where there were flowers there would be +fruits, and where both of these provisions of nature were to be found +there would likely be animal life, and even, perhaps, human beings. + +But, for the time, they were content to look from the port on the +beautiful scene that lay stretched out before them. The ship rested on +an even keel and had landed so softly that none of the plates were +strained. + +"We have plenty of air, at all events," said the professor as he took +a deep breath. "I was afraid of that, but it seems there was no need. +The air appears to be as good and fresh as that on the surface of the +earth, only there is a curious property to it. It makes one feel +larger. I imagine it must be thinner than the air of the earth, which +is a rather strange thing, since the higher one goes the more rarefied +the air becomes, and the lower, the more dense. Still we can not apply +natural philosophy to conditions under the earth. All the usual +theories may be upset. However, we should be content to take things as +we find them, and be glad we were not dashed to pieces when the ship +was caught in the terrible current." + +"What do you suppose caused the awful heat, and then made it go away +again?" asked Jack. + +"I can only make a guess at it," Mr. Henderson answered. "There are +many strange things we will come across if we stay here long, I +believe. As for the fire I think we must have passed a sort of +interior volcano." + +"But what sort of a place do you think we have come to, Professor?" +asked Mark. + +"It is hard to say," the scientist replied. "We are certainly +somewhere within the earth. Our gage tells us it is five hundred +miles. That may or may not be correct, but I believe we are several +hundred miles under the crust, at all events. As to what sort of a +place it is, you can see for yourselves." + +"But how is it we can breathe here, and things can grow?" asked Bill, +who was beginning to lose his fright at the thought of being +practically buried alive. + +"I do not know what makes such things possible," Mr. Henderson +replied, "but that there is air here is a certainty. I can hardly +believe it is drawn from the surface of the earth, down the big hole, +and I am inclined to think this place of the under-world has an +atmosphere of its own, and one which produces different effects than +does our own." + +"They certainly have larger flowers than we have," said Mark. "See how +big they grow, and what strong colors they have." + +He pointed to the port, against which some of the blooms were nodding +in the wind that had sprung up, for, in spite of the many differences, +the under-world was in some respects like the upper one. + +"Probably the difference in the atmosphere accounts for that," the +professor said. "It enables things to grow larger. And, by the way, +Mark, that reminds me of something you said about seeing some horrible +monster fleeing from the ship. Did you dream that?" + +"I did see something horrible, Professor," he answered. "I'm not +positive what it was, but I'll tell you as nearly as I can what it was +like." + +Thereupon Mark detailed what he had seen. + +"But how could anything, least of all some big monster, be concealed +in the storeroom, and we not know anything about it?" asked Mr. +Henderson. + +"I thought you did know something of it," replied Mark. + +"Who, me? My dear boy, you must be dreaming again. Why should I want +to conceal any being in the storeroom? Come, there is something back +of this. Tell me all you know of it. I can't imagine why you think I +was hiding something in the apartment." + +"I thought so because you were always so anxious not to have me go +near it," answered the boy. "Don't you remember when you saw me going +toward it, several times, you warned me away?" + +"So I did!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson, a light breaking over his face. +"But, Mark, it was not because I had hidden some human being or animal +there. I can't tell you what it is yet, save that I can say it is +merely a machine of mine that I have invented. For reasons of my own I +don't want any one to see it yet. Perhaps it may never be seen. I +thought, not long ago, that we might have to undertake a terrible risk +in escaping from this place. I directed you to go to the storeroom-- +but there, I can't say any more, my friends. Sufficient that I had +nothing in the animal line concealed there." + +"But I am certain there was some beast or human being in there," +insisted Mark. "I heard curious noises in there. Besides, how do you +account for the food disappearing and the door being open at times?" + +"It might have been rats," said Jack. + +"I don't believe there are rats in the ship," put in the professor. +"More likely it was one of us who got up hungry and took the +victuals." + +"I'm sorry I can't agree with you," Mark added respectfully. "I am +sure some strange being was on board this ship, and I believe it has +now escaped. Who or what it was I can't say, but you'll find I'm +right, some day." + +"All right," spoke Mr. Henderson with a laugh. "I like to see any one +brave enough to stick up for his opinion, but, at the same time, I +can't very well imagine any person or thing being concealed in that +storeroom ever since we started. How could it get in?" + +Mark did not; answer, but there came to him the recollection of that +night, previous to the sailing of the Flying Mermaid, when he had +observed some strange shadow that seemed to glide aboard the craft. + +"Now let's forget all about such things," the professor went on. "We +are in a strange country, and there are many things to see and do. +Let's explore a little. Then we must see what we can do with the ship. +We are dependent on it, and it will not do to allow it to remain in a +damaged state. We expect to travel many miles in the interior of the +earth if it is possible, and we have only our craft to go in." + +"I reckon we'd all better assimilate into our interior progression +some molecules and atoms of partly disentegrated matter in order to +supply combustion for the carbonaceous elements and assist in the +manufacture of red corpuscles," said Washington, appearing in the +door, with a broad grin on his good-natured face. + +"Which, being interpreted," the professor said, "means, I suppose, +that we had better eat something to keep our digestive apparatus in +good working order?" + +"Yo' done guessed it!" exclaimed the colored man, relapsing into his +ordinary speech. "I'se got a meal all ready." + +They agreed that they might not have another opportunity soon to +partake of food, so they all gathered about the table, on which +Washington had spread a good meal. + +"Come on, let's go outside and view this new and strange land at +closer quarters," the professor said, when they had satisfied their +appetites. "We can't see much from inside the ship." + +Accordingly the heavy door in the side of the Mermaid was slid back, +and, for the first time the travelers stepped out on the surface of +the land in the interior of the earth. + +At first it seemed no different than the ordinary land to which they +were accustomed. But they soon found it had many strange attributes. +The queer shifting and changing light, with the myriad of hues was one +of them, but to this the adventurers had, by this time, become +accustomed, though it was, none the less, a marvel to them. It was odd +enough to see the landscape blood red one instant, and a pale green +the next, as it does when you look through differently colored +glasses. + +Then, too, they noticed that the grass and flowers grew much more +abundantly than in the outer part of the world. They saw clover six +feet high, and blades of grass even taller. In some places the growth +of grass was so big that they were in danger of getting lost in it. + +"If the grass is like this, what will the trees be?" asked Mark. + +"There are some away over there," Jack replied. "We'll have to take a +sail over. They must be several hundred feet high." + +"Well, at any rate, here's a little brook, and the water looks good to +drink," went on Mark. "I'm thirsty, so here goes." + +He hurried to where a stream was flowing sluggishly between grassy +banks. The water was as clear as crystal, and Mark got down on his +face and prepared to sip some of the liquid up. + +But, no sooner had his lips touched it, than he sprang up with a cry +and stood gazing at the water. + +"What's the matter?" asked Jack. "Hot?" + +"No, it isn't hot," Mark replied, "but it isn't water. It's white +molasses!" + +"White molasses?" repeated the professor, coming up at that moment. +"What are you talking about?" + +He stooped down and dipped his finger into the stream. He drew it up +quickly, and there ran from it big drops that flowed as slowly as the +extract of the sugarcane does in cold weather. + +"You're about right, Mark," he said. "It's water but it's almost as +thick as molasses." He touched his finger to his tongue. "It's good to +drink, all right," he went on, "only it will be a little slow going +down." + +Then he dipped up a palm full, and let it trickle down his throat. + +"It is the strangest water I ever saw," he added. "It must be that the +lack of some peculiar property of air, which we have on the surface, +has caused this. I must make some notes on it," and he drew out pencil +and paper. He was about to jot down some facts when he was interrupted +by a cry from Washington. + +"Come and see what's the matter with this stone!" he cried. + + CHAPTER XVIII + + CAUGHT BY A STRANGE PLANT + +"WASHINGTON is in trouble!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. Followed by the +two boys he ran to where the colored man stood in a stooping position +over a small pile of stones. + +"What is it? Has something bit you?" asked the scientist, as he came +up on the run. + +"No, but I can't git this stone up!" Washington said. "Look at what a +little stone it is, but I can't lift it. Something must have happened +to me. Maybe some one put th' evil eye on me! Maybe I'm bewitched!" + +"Nonsense!" exclaimed the professor, "what did you want the stone +for?" + +"Nothin' in particular," replied Washington, still tugging away at the +stone, which was the size of his head. "I was just goin' t' throw it +at a big bird, but when I went to lift it this little stone 'peared t' +be glued fast." + +Washington moved aside to give Mr. Henderson a chance to try to pick +up the piece of rock. As the scientist grasped it a look of surprise +came over his features: + +"This is most remarkable!" he exclaimed. "I can't budge it. I wonder +if a giant magnet is holding it down." + +He tugged and tugged until he was red in the face. Then he beckoned to +the two boys, and they came to his aid. There was barely room for them +all to each get one hand on the rock, and then, only after a powerful +tug did it come up. Almost instantly it dropped back to the earth. + +"This is remarkable!" the professor said. "I wonder if the other +stones are the same." + +He tried several others, and one and all resisted his efforts. It was +only the small stones he was able to lift alone, and these, he said, +were so weighty that it would have been a task to throw them any +distance. + +"The water and the stones are strangely heavy in this land," he said. +"I wonder what other queer things we shall see." + +"I saw a bird a little while ago, when I went to pick up that stone," +observed Washington. + +"What kind was it?" asked the inventor. + +"I don't know, only it was about as big as an eagle." + +The travelers wandered about a quarter of a mile from the ship. They +avoided the tall grass and the lofty nodding flowers that seemed to +grow in regular groves, and kept to places where they could walk with +comparative freedom. + +"Have you formed any idea, Professor, as to the nature of this +country?" asked Mark, who liked to get at the bottom of things. + +"I have, but it is only a theory," Mr. Henderson answered. "I believe +we are on a sort of small earth that is inside the larger one we live +on. This sphere floats in space, just as our earth does, and we have +passed through the void that lies between our globe and this interior +one. I think this new earth is about a quarter the size of ours and in +some respects the same. In others it is vastly different. + +"But we will not think of those things now. We must see what our +situation is, whether we are in any danger, and must look to repairing +our ship. There will be time enough for other matters later." + +The travelers were walking slowly along, noting the strange things on +every side. As they advanced the vegetation seemed to become more +luxuriant, as if nature had tried to out-do herself in providing +beautiful flowers and plants. The changing lights added to the beauty +and weirdness of the scene. + +The plain was a rolling one, and here and there were small hills and +hollows. As the travelers topped a rise Jack, who was in advance, +called out: + +"Oh what queer plants! They are giant Jacks-in-the-pulpit!" + +The others hastened forward to see what the boy had discovered. Jack +was too eager to wait, and pressed on. The hill which sloped away from +the top of the little plateau on which he stood, was steeper than he +had counted on. As he leaned forward he lost his balance and toppled, +head foremost, down the declivity, rolling over. + +"Look out!" cried Mark, who had almost reached his comrade's side. + +The scene that confronted the travelers was a strange one. Before them +in a sort of hollow, were scores of big plants, shaped somewhat like a +Jack-in-the-pulpit, or a big lily, with a curved top or flap to it. + +The plants were about eight feet tall, three feet across the top, and +the flap or covering was raised about two feet. They were nodding and +swaying in the wind on their short stems. + +"He's headed right for one of them!" Mr. Henderson exclaimed. "I hope +he'll not fall into one of the openings." + +"Is there any danger?" asked Mark. + +"I'm afraid there is," the inventor added. "Those plants are a variety +of the well-known pitcher plant, or fly-trap, as they are sometimes +called. In tropical countries they grow to a large size, but nothing +like these. They are filled, in the cup, with a sort of sticky, sweet +mixture, and this attracts insects. When one enters the cup the top +flap folds over, and the hapless insect is caught there. The plant +actually devours it, nature providing a sort of vegetable digestive +apparatus. These giant plants are the same, and they seem large enough +to take in a man, to say nothing of Jack!" + +With anxious faces the adventurers turned to watch the fate of their +comrade. Jack was slipping, sliding and rolling down the hill. He +could not seem to stop, though he was making desperate efforts to do +so. He was headed straight for one of the largest of the terrible +plants. + +In vain, as he saw what was in front of him, did he try to change the +course of his involuntary voyage. Over and over he rolled, until, at +length, he struck a little grassy hummock, bounced into the air, and +right into the opening of a monster pitcher plant. + +"It has him!" cried Mark. "We must save him! Come on everyone!" + +He raced down the hill, while the others came closely after him. They +reached the plant into which Jack had bounced. The flap, or top piece, +had closed down, tightly over the unfortunate boy. + +"Quick! We must save him or he will be smothered to death or drowned +in the liquid the cup contains!" Mr. Henderson exclaimed. "Attack the +plant with anything you can find!" + +"Let's cut through the side of the flower-cup!" suggested Mark. "That +seems softer than the stem." + +His idea was quickly put into operation. Andy's long hunting knife +came in very handy. While the sides of the long natural cup were +tough, the knife made an impression on them, and, soon, a small door +or opening had been cut in the side of the pitcher plant, large enough +to enable a human body to pass through. + +When the last fibre had been severed by Andy, who was chosen to wield +the knife because of his long practice as a hunter, there was a sudden +commotion within the plant. Then a dark object, dripping water, made a +spring and landed almost at the feet of the professor. + +It was Jack, and a sorry sight he presented. He was covered from head +to foot with some sticky substance, which dripped from all over him. + +With hasty movements he cleared the stuff from his eyes and mouth, and +spluttered: + +"It's a good thing you cut me out when you did. I couldn't have held +on much longer!" + + CHAPTER XIX + + THE BIG PEACH + +JACK soon recovered from his remarkable experience. The terrible plant +that had nearly eaten him alive was a mass of cut-up vegetable matter +which attracted a swarm of insects. Most of them were ants, but such +large ones the boys had never seen before, and the professor said they +exceeded in size anything he had read about. Some of them were as +large as big rats. They bit off large pieces of the fallen plant and +carried them to holes in the ground which were big enough for +Washington to slip his foot into, and he wore a No. 11 shoe. + +But the adventurers felt there were more important things for them to +look at than ants, so they started away again, the professor telling +them all to be careful and avoid accidents. + +It was while they were strolling through a little glade, which they +came upon unexpectedly, that Washington, who was in the lead called +out: + +"Gracious goodness! It must be Thanksgivin'!" + +"Why so?" asked Jack. + +"'Cause here's th' remarkablest extraordinary and expansionist of a +pumpkin that ever I laid eyes on!" the colored man cried. + +They all hurried to where Washington had come to a halt. There, on the +ground in front of him, was a big round object, about the size of a +hogshead. It was yellow in color, and was not unlike the golden +vegetable from which mothers make such delicious pies. + +"I allers was fond of pumpkins," said Washington, placing his hand on +the thing, which was almost as tall as he was, "but I never thought +I'd come across such a one as this." + +The professor and the two boys went closer to the monstrosity. Mr. +Henderson passed his hand over it and then, bending closer, smelled of +it. + +"That's not a pumpkin!" he exclaimed. + +"What is it then?" asked Washington. + +"It's a giant peach," the inventor remarked. "Can't you see the fuzz, +and smell it? Of course it's a peach." + +"Well I'll be horn-swoggled!" cried Washington, leaning against the +big fruit, which easily, supported him. + +"Hurrah!" cried Jack, drawing his knife from his pocket and opening +the largest blade. "I always did like peaches. Now I can have all I +want," and he drove the steel into the object, cutting off a big slice +which he began to eat. + +"It may be poisonous!" exclaimed Mark. + +"Too late now," responded Jack, the juice running down from his mouth. +"Taste's good, anyhow." + +They all watched Jack while he devoured his slice of fruit. Washington +acted as if he expected his friend to topple over unconscious, but +Jack showed no bad symptoms. + +"You'd better all have some," the boy said. "It's the best I ever +tasted." + +Encouraged by Jack's example, Mark thought he, too, would have some of +the fruit. He opened his knife and was about to take off some of the +peach when suddenly the thing began to roll forward, almost upon him. + +"Hi! Stop your shoving!" he exclaimed. "Do you want to have the thing +roll over me, Jack?" + +"I'm not shoving!" replied Jack. + +"Some one is!" Mark went on. He dodged around the far side of the +immense fruit and what he saw made him cry out in astonishment. + +Two grasshoppers, each one standing about three feet high, were +standing on their hind legs, and with their fore feet were pushing the +peach along the ground. They had been attracted to the fruit by some +juice which escaped from a bruise on that side, which was the ripest, +and, being fond of sweets had, evidently decided to take their find to +some safe place where they could eat it at their leisure. Or perhaps +they wanted to provide for their families if grasshoppers have them. + +"Did you ever see such monsters?" asked Jack. "They're as big as +dogs!" + +At the sound of his voice the two grasshoppers, becoming alarmed, +ceased their endeavors to roll the peach along, and, assuming a +crouching attitude seemed to be waiting. + +"They certainly are remarkable specimens," Mr. Henderson said. "If the +other animals are in proportion, and if there are persons in this new +world, we are likely to have a hard time of it." + +This time the immense insects concluded the strangers were not to +their liking. With a snapping of their big muscular legs and a whirr +of their wings that was like the starting of an automobile, the +grasshoppers rose into the air and sailed away over the heads of the +adventurers. Their flight was more than an eighth of a mile in extent, +and they came down in a patch of the very tall grass. + +"Let's go after them!" exclaimed old Andy. "I was so excited I forgot +to take a shot at them. Come on!" + +"I think we'd better not," counseled the professor. "In the first +place we don't need them. They would be no good for food. Then we +don't know but what they might attack us, and it would be no joke to +be bitten by a grasshopper of that size. Let them alone. We may find +other game which will need your attention, Andy. Better save your +ammunition." + +Somewhat against his will, Andy had to submit to the professor's +ruling. The old hunter consoled himself with the reflection that if +insects grew to that size he would have some excellent sport hunting +even the birds of the inner world. + +"I wonder what sort of a tree that peach grew on," Jack remarked, as +he cut off another slice, when the excitement caused by the discovery +of the grasshoppers had subsided. "It must be taller than a church +steeple. I wonder how the fruit got here, for there are no trees +around." + +"I fancy those insects rolled it along for a good distance," Mr. +Henderson put in. "You can see the marks on the ground, where they +pushed it. They are wonderful creatures." + +"Are we going any farther?" asked Mark. "Perhaps we can find the peach +tree, and, likely there are other fruit trees near it." + +At the professor's suggestion they strolled along for some distance. +They were now about three miles from the airship, and found that what +they had supposed was a rather level plain, was becoming a succession +of hills and hollows. It was while descending into a rather deep +valley that Jack pointed ahead and exclaimed: + +"I guess there's our peach orchard, but I never saw one like it +before." + +Nor had any of the others. Instead of trees the peaches were attached +to vines growing along the ground. They covered a large part of the +valley, and the peaches, some bigger than the one they first +discovered, some small and green, rose up amid the vines, just as +pumpkins do in a corn field. + +"Stranger and stranger," the professor murmured. "Peaches grow on +vines. I suppose potatoes will grow on trees. Everything seems to be +reversed here." + +They made their way down toward the peach "orchard" as Jack called it, +though "patch" would have been a better name. Besides peaches they +found plums, apples, and pears growing in the same way, and all of a +size proportionate to the first-named fruit. + +"Well, one thing is evident," Mr. Henderson remarked, "we shall not +starve here. There is plenty to eat, even if we have to turn +vegetarians." + +"I wonder what time it is getting to be," Jack remarked. "My watch +says twelve o'clock but whether it's noon or midnight I can't tell, +with this colored light coming and going. I wonder if it ever sets as +the sun does." + +"That is something we'll have to get used to," the professor said. +"But I think we had better go back to the ship now. We have many +things to do to get it in order again. Besides, I am a little afraid +to leave it unguarded so long. No telling but what some strange +beast-- or persons, for that matter-- might injure it." + +"I'm going to take back some slices of peaches with me, anyhow," Mark +said, and he and Jack cut off enough to make several meals, while +Bill, Tom and Washington took along all they could carry. + +As they walked back toward the ship the strange lights seemed to be +dying out. At first they hardly noticed this, but as they continued on +it became quite gloomy, and an odd sort of gloom it was too, first +green, then yellow, then red and then blue. + +"I believe whatever serves as a sun down here is setting," the +professor observed. "We must hurry. I don't want to be caught out here +after dark." + +They hurried on, the lights dying out more and more, until, as they +came in sight of their ship, it was so black they could hardly see. + +Mark who was in the rear turned around, glancing behind him. As he did +so he caught sight of a gigantic shadow moving along on top of the +nearest hill. The shadow was not unlike that of a man in shape, but of +such gigantic stature that Mark knew it could be like no human being +he had ever seen. At the same time it bore a curious resemblance to +the weird shadow he had seen slip into the Mermaid that night before +they sailed. + +"I wonder if it can be the same-- the same thing-- grown larger, just +as the peach grows larger than those in our world," Mark thought, +while a shiver of fear seemed to go over him. "I wonder if that-- that +thing could have been on the ship----" + +Then the last rays of light died away and there was total darkness. + + CHAPTER XX + + OVERHAULING THE SHIP + +"KEEP together!" shouted the professor. "It will not do to become lost +now. We are close to the ship, and will soon be there. Come after me." + +It was more by following the sound of the scientist's voice, than by +any sight which the others could get of him, that they managed to +trail along behind. They reached the ship in safety, however, and +entered. There was no sound as of beasts or insects within, and, +though Mark felt a little apprehensive on account of what he had seen, +he and the others as well, were glad to be again in something that +seemed like home. + +"I wish we had some candles, or some sort of a light to see by," the +professor remarked. "We can do nothing in the dark, and there is no +telling how long this night is going to last once it has set in. If I +could have a little illumination, I might be able to fix the dynamo, +and then we could turn on the incandescents. That portable light we +had is broken. + +"By cracky!" exclaimed Andy. "I believe I have the very thing!" + +"You don't mean to say you have a torch or a candle with you, do you?" +asked Mr. Henderson. + +"No, but I have my patent pipe lighting apparatus," the hunter said. +"I always carry it. It gives a little light, but not much, though it +may be enough to work by." + +Not until after several hours work, handicapped as they were by lack +of light, were the repairs to the ship completed. + +"Now we'll start the engine and see how we will come out," the +inventor exclaimed, as he wiped his hands on some waste. + +It did not take long to generate enough power to turn the dynamo. Soon +the familiar hum and whirr was heard, and, a few seconds later the +filaments in the lamps began to glow a dull red, which gradually +brightened until they were shining in all their usual brilliancy. + +"Hurrah!" cried the boys. "Now we can see!" + +They all felt in better spirits with the restoration of the lights, +and, washing off the grease and dirt of their labors in the engine +room, they prepared to sit down to the meal which Washington prepared. + +As soon as the dynamo was working well, care had to be taken not to +speed it too much on account of a mended belt. The professor turned +off part of the lights and switched some of the current into the +storage batteries, to provide for emergencies. For there was no +telling how long the night might last. + +Jack was the first one to finish the meal-- they did not know whether +to call it dinner, supper or breakfast. He went into the conning +tower, and, as soon as he reached it he called out: + +"Come on up here, professor! There's something strange going on!" + +Mr. Henderson, followed by Mark, hurried to the tower. As he reached +it and looked out of the forward window, a beautiful white glow +illuminated the whole scene, and then, from below the horizon, there +arose seven luminous disks. One was in the centre, while about it +circled the other six, like some immense pin-wheel. + +"It's the moon!" cried Mark. + +"It's seven moons!" Jack exclaimed. "Why it's almost as light as day!" + +And so it was, for the seven moons, if that is what they were, gave an +illumination not unlike the sun in brilliancy though it was like the +beams from the pale moon of the earth. + +"I guess we need not have worried about the darkness," the professor +remarked. "Still it is a good thing I fixed the dynamo." + +For some time he and the other adventurers watched the odd sight of +the moons, as they rose higher and higher overhead. The scene was a +beautiful, if weird one, for the whole plain was bathed in the soft +light. + +"I guess we can turn off the incandescents, and use all the power for +the storage batteries," Mr. Henderson went on, as he descended into +the ship, and opened the port shutters which had been closed when they +started off on their exploring tour. The interior of the Mermaid was +almost as light as when the odd colored beams had been playing over +the new earth to which they had come. + +"I think we had better continue with our work of making repairs," Mr. +Henderson said. "We can't count on these moons remaining here any +length of time, and I want to take advantage of them. So though some +of us perhaps need sleep, we will forego it and fix up the Mermaid. I +want to take a trip and see what other wonders await us." + +They all agreed that they would rather work than sleep, and soon the +entire force was busy in the engine room. There was much to be done, +and the most important things were attended to first. The motive power +was overhauled and found to be in need of several new parts. These +were put in and then the gas generator, and the negative gravity +machine, were put in shape. + +It would have taken something very substantial to have awakened any +one on board the Mermaid that night. They all slept soundly and awoke +to find the strange colored lights shining in through the glass +covered port holes. + +"Well, the sun, or what corresponds to it, is up," observed Jack, "and +I guess we had better do as the little boy in the school reader did, +and get up, too, Mark." + +Soon all the travelers were aroused, and the sound of Washington +bustling about in the kitchen, whence came the smell of coffee, bacon +and eggs, told the hungry ones that breakfast was under way. + +After the meal work was again started on repairing the ship, and by +noon the professor remarked: + +"I think we shall try a little flight after dinner. That is, if one +thing doesn't prevent us." + +"What is that?" asked Jack. + +"We may be held down, as were those stones," was the grave answer. + + CHAPTER XXI + + THE FISH THAT WALKED + +IT was with no little apprehension that the professor prepared to take +his first flight aboard the ship in the realms of the new world. He +knew little or nothing of the conditions he might meet with, the +density of the atmosphere, or how the Mermaid would behave under +another environment than that to which she was accustomed. + +Yet he felt it was necessary to make a start. They would have to +attempt a flight sooner or later, and Mr. Henderson was not the one to +delay matters. So, the last adjustment having been made to the +repaired machinery, they all took their places in the ship. + +The boys and the professor went to the conning tower to direct +matters, while Washington and the others were in the engine room to +see that the machinery worked properly. Mark gave a last look outside +as he closed the big steel cover over the hole through which admission +was had to the craft. He thought he might catch a glimpse of the queer +shadow, but nothing was in sight. It was like a beautiful summer's +day, save for the strange lights, shifting and changing. But the +travelers had become somewhat used to them by this time. + +The professor turned the valve that allowed the gas to enter the +holder. There was a hissing sound and a sort of trembling throughout +the entire ship. The dynamos were whizzing away and the negative +gravity machine was all ready to start. + +For several minutes the travelers waited until the big lifting tank +was filled with the strong vapor. They watched the gages which +indicated the pressure to be several hundred pounds. + +"I think we can chance it now," remarked Mr. Henderson, as he threw +over several levers. "We'll try, at any rate." + +With a tremor the Mermaid left the surface of the inner earth and went +sailing upward toward the-- well it wasn't exactly the sky, but it was +what corresponded to it in the new world, though there were no clouds +and no blue depths such as the boys were used to. At all events the +Mermaid was flying again, and, as the adventurers felt themselves +being lifted up they gave a spontaneous cheer at the success which had +crowned their efforts. + +The ship went up several hundred feet, and then, the professor, having +brought her to a stop, sent her ahead at a slow pace. He wanted to be +sure all the apparatus was in good working order before he tried any +speed. + +The Mermaid responded readily. Straight as an arrow through the air +she flew. + +"Well, this is almost as good as being on the regular earth!" +exclaimed Jack. + +"It's better," put in Mark. "We haven't seen half the wonders yet. +Let's open the floor shutter, and see how it looks down below." + +He and Jack went to the room where there was an opening in the floor +of the ship, covered by heavy glass. They slid back the steel shutter +and there, down below them, was the strange new, world they had come +to, stretched out like some big map. + +They could see mountains, forests, plains, and rivers, the water +sparkling in the colored light. Over green fields they flew, then +across some stretches where only sand and rocks were to be seen. +Faster and faster the ship went, as the professor found the machinery +was once more in perfect order. Jack was idly watching the play of +tinted lights over the surface of the ground. + +"I wonder what makes it," he said. + +"I have tried to account for it in several ways," said the professor, +who had called Washington to the conning tower and come to join the +boys. "I have had first one theory and then another, but the one I am +almost sure is correct is that hidden volcanic fires cause the +illumination. + +"I think they flare up and die away, and have become so regular that +they produce the same effect as night and day with us. Probably the +fires go out for lack of fuel, and when it is supplied they start up +again. Perhaps it is a sort of gas that they burn." + +"Well, it's queer enough, whatever it is," Jack remarked. "What +strikes me as funny, though, is that we haven't seen a single person +since we came here. Surely this place must be inhabited." + +Mark thought of the strange shadow he had seen, but said nothing. + +"I believe it is," the professor answered. "We will probably come upon +the inhabitants soon. I only hope they are a people who will do us no +harm." + +"If they tried any of their tricks we could mount up in our ship and +escape them," said Andy. + +"Provided they gave us the chance," Mr. Henderson put in. "Well, we'll +not worry about that now." + +For several hours the ship traveled on, until it had come to a +different sort of country. It was wilder and not so level, and there +were a number of streams and small lakes to be seen. + +"Are you going to sail all night?" asked Jack. + +"No," replied the professor. "I think we'll descend very soon now, and +camp out for a while. That lake just ahead seems to offer a good +place," and he pointed to a large sheet of water that sparkled in the +distance, for by this time they had all gone back to the conning +tower. + +The lake was in the midst of a wood that extended for some distance on +all sides, and was down in a sort of valley. The ship headed toward +it, and in a short time a landing was made close to shore. + +"Maybe we can have some fresh fish for supper," exclaimed Jack as he +ran from the ship as soon as the sliding door in the side was opened. +"Looks as if that lake had some in it. It is not thick water like in +that stream we stopped at," he added. + +"I believe you're right," old Andy put in, as he turned back to look +for some lines and hooks among his traps. He soon found what he +wanted, and gave them to the boys, taking his trusty gun along for +himself. + +While the professor, Washington, Tom and Bill remained behind to make +some adjustments to the machinery, and to get things in shape for the +night, which, they calculated would soon be upon them, Jack, Mark and +Andy went down to the shore of the lake. The boys cut some poles from +the trees, and baiting the hooks with some fat worms found under the +bark, threw in. + +"Let's see who'll get the first bite," spoke Jack. "I'm pretty +generally lucky at fishing." + +"Well, while you're waiting to decide that there contest, I think I'll +take a stroll along shore and see if I can see anything to shoot," +Andy remarked. + +For several minutes the boys sat in silence on the bank of the lake, +watching the play of the vari-colored lights on the water. Suddenly +Jack felt a quiver on his line, and his pole began to shake. + +"I've got something!" he cried. Then his pole bent almost double and +he began to pull for all he was worth. "It's a whopper!" he cried. +"Come and help me, Mark!" + +Mark ran to his friend's aid. Whatever was on the other end of the +line was strong enough to tax the muscles of both boys. They could +hear the pole beginning to break. But for the excellent quality of +Andy's line that would have parted some time before. + +All at once there came a sudden slacking of the pull from whatever was +in the water. And so quickly did it cease that both boys went over +backward in a heap. + +"He's got away!" cried Jack, getting up and brushing some of the dirt +from his clothes. + +"There's something that didn't get away!" cried Mark, who had risen to +his knees, and was pointing at the lake. Jack looked and what he saw +made him almost believe he was dreaming. + +For, emerging from the water, dragging the pole and line the boys had +dropped along with it, was a most curious creature. It was a big fish, +but a fish with four short legs on which it was walking, or rather +waddling along as much as a duck, with a double supply of feet, might +do. + +"Say, do I see that or is there something the matter with my eyes?" +sung out Jack, making ready to run away. + +"It's there all right!" exclaimed Mark. "Hi! Andy! Here's something to +shoot!" he yelled, for indeed the creature was big enough to warrant +attack with a gun. It was about five feet long and two feet through. + +On and on it came, straight at the boys, as if to have revenge for the +pain the fish hook must have caused it, for the barb could be seen +dangling from its lip. On and on it came, waddling forward, the water +dripping from it at every step. It had the body and general shape of a +fish, save that the tail was rather large in proportion. As it came +nearer the boys noted that the feet were webbed, like those of a water +fowl. + +"Come on!" cried Jack. "It may attack us!" + +At that moment the creature opened its mouth, showing a triple row of +formidable teeth, and gave utterance to a sort of groan and grunt +combined. + +This was enough to send Jack and Mark off on a run up the bank, and +did they stop until they heard Andy's voice hailing them. + +"What's the matter, boys?" + +"Come here! Quick!" answered Jack. + +The fish-animal had halted and seemed to be taking an observation. To +do this, as it could not turn its neck, it had to shift its whole +body. Old Andy came up on the run, his gun held in readiness. + +"Where is it?" he asked, and the boys pointed silently. + +The hunter could not repress a start of astonishment as he saw the +strange creature. But he did not hesitate a second. There was a crack +of the rifle, and the thing, whatever it was, toppled over, dead. + +Andy hurried up to it, to get a closer view. + +"Well, this is the limit!" he exclaimed. "First we have grasshoppers +that can roll peaches as big as hogsheads, and now we come across fish +that walk. I wonder what we will see next." + +"I don't want to go fishing in this lake any more," spoke Jack, as he +looked at the repulsive creature. "I never want to eat fish any more." + +"Same here," agreed Mark, and old Andy was of the opinion that the +thing killed would not make a wholesome dish for the table. + +"There don't seem to be any game in this section," he remarked. "Not a +sign could I see, nor have I since we have been here, unless you count +those grasshoppers. But the fruit is good, I'll say that." + +"Come on, we'd better be getting back," Mark said, as he noticed it +was getting dark. "I'm hungry." + + CHAPTER XXII + + THE SNAKE-TREE + +THEY managed to make a good meal of the food supplies they had brought +along, and as a dessert Washington made some peach short-cake from the +slices of the giant fruit they had found, the day before. Just as they +finished supper it got very dark, but, in about an hour, the +moon-beams, as the travelers called them, came up, and illuminated the +lake with a weird light. + +As the machinery of the Mermaid was now in working order there was no +further alarm because of the darkness. The ship rested on a level keel +about a hundred yards back from the lake, and, seeing that all was +snug, and the fastenings secure, the travelers went to bed. + +Though they had to forego fish for breakfast the travelers made a good +meal. After seeing that the ship was in readiness for a quick start, +the professor suggested they take a walk around and see what sort of +country they might be in now. + +They tramped on for several miles, meeting with no adventures, and +seeing nothing out of the ordinary. It was a pleasant day, just warm +enough to be comfortable, and a little wind was blowing through the +trees. + +"It would be almost like home if it wasn't for the strange lights, and +the memory of the queer things here," said Jack. "I feel fine. Let's +see if you can hit that dead tree over there, Mark." + +Jack stooped to grab up a stone, but no sooner had his fingers touched +it than he called out: + +"There! I forgot all about the stones here being heavier than lead. +Guess we can't throw any of 'em. But come on. I'll race you to the +dead tree!" + +Mark was willing, so the two boys set off at a fast pace. + +"Look out where you're going!" the professor called after them. "No +telling what may be in those woods," for the boys were approaching a +little glade, on the edge of which the dead tree stood. + +Jack reached the goal first, and stood leaning against the trunk, +waiting for Mark. + +"You'd better practice sprinting!" exclaimed the victor. + +Mark was about to excuse himself for his poor showing, on the plea of +having eaten too much breakfast, when to his horror he saw what seemed +to be a long thin snake spring out from the branches of a nearby tree +and twine itself about Jack. + +"Help me! Save me!" cried the unfortunate boy, as he was lifted high +into the air and pulled within the shadow of the wood. + +For an instant Mark was too horror-stricken to move. Then with a shout +that alarmed the others, who were coming along more slowly, he made a +dash for the place he had last seen Jack. + +Had old Andy not been on the watch, with those keen eyes of his, there +might have been a double tragedy. He had seen from afar the sudden +snatching up of Jack, and noted Mark's rush to save his chum. + +"Stand still! Don't go in there for your life!" yelled the hunter, at +the same time running forward with gun ready. + +His example was followed by the professor, Washington and the other +two men. + +"A snake has Jack!" called Mark, when Andy was at his side. + +"No! It's not a snake!" replied the hunter. "It's worse. It's the +snake-tree!" + +"What's that?" asked Mr. Henderson, hurrying up. + +"The snake-tree has Jack," the hunter went on. "It is a plant, half +animal, half-vegetable. It has long branches, not unlike a snake in +shape. They can move about and grab things." + +"One of them got a grip on Jack as he leaned against the dead tree +trunk. I just caught a glimpse of it, and called to prevent Mark from +running into danger." + +"Can't we save him?" asked Mr. Henderson. + +"I'm going to try!" replied Andy. "Quick! Gather up some pieces of dry +wood. I have some paper, and my pipe lighter. We must fight the +snake-tree with fire!" + + CHAPTER XXIII + + THE DESERTED VILLAGE + +JACK'S Cries were growing fainter and fainter. Peering in through the +branches of the dead tree the professor could see the whip-like limbs +winding closer and closer about the boy. + +"I am afraid we will be too late!" he said. + +Andy had twisted some paper into a rude torch. He set fire to it with +his pocket lighter, and, when Bill and Mark brought him some little +pieces of dead wood the old hunter added them to his bundle, which was +now blazing brightly. + +"How are you going to do it?" asked the professor. + +"I'll show you," replied Andy. He bound the sticks and paper together +with wisps of grass and then, when it was so hot he could hardly hold +it longer, he ran as close as he dared to the snake-tree and tossed +the torch at the foot of it. + +The blazing bundle fell among some damp leaves and grass, as Andy had +intended it should, and soon a dense smoke arose, pouring straight up +through the branches of the animal-tree, the limbs of which were +gathered in a knot about the half-unconscious form of the boy. + +For a few minutes they all waited anxiously. Would Andy's trick +succeed? Had the terrible tree not already squeezed the life from +Jack? + +But, while they watched, there seemed to come a change over the tree. +The snake-like arms waved less and less. They seemed to straighten +out, as though deprived of power by the smoke which was now so dense +as to hide Jack from sight. Then the arms suddenly relaxed and +something rolled from them and fell to the ground. With a quick +movement Andy darted in, crawling on his hands and knees beneath the +limbs, and brought Jack out. The boy was white and his eyes were +closed. + +"Get some water!" cried the old hunter. + +Mark ran toward a stream a little distance away. He brought some of +the curiously thick liquid in his hat, and while Andy held the boy the +professor sprinkled some of the drops on his face, and forced some +between his lips. In a little while Jack's eyes slowly opened. + +"Don't let it eat me!" he begged. + +"You're all right now," said Andy heartily. "Not a bit harmed, Jack. +But," he added in a low tone, "it was a close call." + +A few whiffs from a bottle of ammonia the professor carried soon +brought Jack's color back. + +"Do you feel better now?" asked Mark. + +"I guess so. Yes, I'm all right," replied Jack, struggling to his +feet. "What happened? Feels as if I had been tied up with a lot of +rope." + +"That's about what you were," Andy replied, "only it was the worst +kind of rope I ever saw. Those snake-trees are terrible things. I've +read of 'em, but I never saw one before. The book that told of them +says they squeeze their victims to death just as a snake does. The +only way to do is to make some smoke and fire at the bottom. This sort +of kills the branches or makes them stupid and they let go. The trees +are half animal, and awful things. I hope we don't meet with any +more." + +"Same here," added Jack fervently, as he grasped Andy's hand, and +thanked him for saving his life. + +"Do you think you can go on, or shall we return to the ship'?" the +professor asked. + +"Oh I can trail along, if you move a little slowly," Jack replied. +"I'm a bit stiff, that's all." + +So they resumed their journey. They had gone, perhaps, three miles +when Washington, who was in the lead, suddenly stopped and called: + +"Sounds like thunder." + +The others listened. Sure enough there was a dull rumble and roar +audible. It seemed off to the left, but they could see no clouds in +the sky, nor any signs of a storm. + +"Let's take a walk over that way and see what it is," Mr. Henderson +suggested. + +As they walked on the noise became louder, until in about half an hour +it was like the sound from a blast furnace. + +"What do you suppose it can be?" asked Mark. + +"Perhaps some new freak of nature," the professor replied. "We seem to +have a good many of them here." + +They were all on their guard now, for there was no telling into what +danger they might run. As they went up a little hill the noise became +much louder. The professor and Andy, who had taken the lead, kept a +sharp lookout ahead, that they might not unexpectedly fall into some +hidden stream or lake. As they topped the hill they saw before them a +deep valley, and in the midst of it was that which was causing the +roaring sound. + +From the centre of an immense mound of rock and earth there spouted up +a great column of water, three hundred feet or more, as straight as a +flag staff. It was about ten feet in diameter, and at the top it broke +into a rosette of sparkling liquid, which as the vari-colored lights +played on it, resembled some wonderful flower. + +"It's a great geyser!" the professor exclaimed. "We have come to a +place like Yellowstone Park. We must be very careful. The crust may be +very thin here, and let us down into some boiling spring." + +The others gathered around the professor, and, from a safe distance +watched the ever rising and falling shaft of water. + +It was not regular in motion. Sometimes it would shoot up to a great +distance, nearly a thousand feet, the professor estimated. Again it +would sink down, as the power sending it out lessened, until it was +only a few hundred feet above the rounded top of the mound from which +it spurted. But it never fell below this. All the while there was the +constant roaring sound, as though the forces of nature below the +surface were calling to be let out. + +"I hope there are not many of those about," Mr. Henderson remarked +after a pause. "If the ship should hit one during the night it would +be all up with us. We must keep a careful look-out." + +The spouting column had a fascination which held them to the spot for +some time. From the hill they had a good view of the surrounding +country, but did not see any more geysers. + +"Do you think it is hot water?" asked Mark. + +"There is no vapor," the professor answered, "but most of the geysers +are produced by the action of steam in the interior of the earth. +However we'll not take any chances by investigating. I fear it would +not be safe to go into that valley." + +"Look there!" cried Andy. "I guess we're better off here!" He pointed +a little to the right of where the water spouted. The others looked, +and saw, coming from a hole in the ground, some shaggy black object. + +"What is it?" asked Jack. + +"It looks like a bear," replied the hunter, "but I never saw one like +it before." + +Nor had any of the others, for the creature was a terrible one. It had +the body of a bear, but the feet and legs were those of an alligator, +while the tail trailed out behind like a snake, and the head had a +long snout, not unlike the trunk of an elephant. The creature was +about ten feet long and five feet in height. + +"Let me try a shot at it!" exclaimed Andy. "That is something worth +shooting," and he cocked his rifle. + +"Don't!" exclaimed the professor shortly. "You might only wound it, +and it would pursue us. We are not ready to fight such creatures as +that, and you are the only one armed." + +"I never missed anything I aimed at yet," said Andy, a little hurt +that any one should doubt his ability to kill at the first shot. + +"Perhaps not, but how do you know but what this creature has a bullet +proof armor under its hide. This is a strange world, Andy. It is +better to take no chances." + +"I hate to see him get away," the hunter said. + +But, as it happened, the beast was not to get away. As they watched +they saw the horrible animal approach the mound from which the water +spurted. Up the sides it climbed. + +"I guess he's going to get a drink," said Mark. + +That was evidently the beast's intention. It went close to the +spouting column of water, and thrust its head out so that its tongue +could lap from the side. It seemed to have been in the habit of doing +this. + +For once, and for the last time, however, it made a mistake. The water +seemed to veer to one side. In its eagerness to get a drink the animal +took another step forward. At that moment the direction of the column +changed again, and it tilted over toward the beast. + +Suddenly, as the travelers watched, the full force of the big column +caught the beast just under the fore shoulders. Up into the air the +creature shot, propelled by thousands of pounds pressure. Right up to +the top of the column it went, and this time the water rose a thousand +feet into the air. + +Up and up went the animal, struggling to get away from the remorseless +grip. Then, when the water had reached its height, it shot the beast +off to one side. Then the brute began to fall, twisting, turning, +wiggling and struggling. Down it came with a thud that could be heard +above the noise of the geyser. + +"I reckon that finishes him," observed Andy. And it had, for there was +not a sign of life from the creature. + +"I guess we have seen enough for one morning," the professor said, +"Let's go back to the airship. It must be nearly dinner time." + +They started away. Mark gave a last look at the queer column of water +and the dead body of the strange animal. As he passed down the hill he +thought he saw the creature move, and stayed to see if this was so. +But a second glance convinced him he was mistaken. + +The others had gone on and were some distance ahead. Mark hurried on +to join them. As he got a last glance at the top of the column, over +the brow of the hill, he happened to look off to the left. There was +another hill, about the size of the one they had been on. + +And, as Mark looked he saw something move. At first he thought it was +another beast. But, to his terror he saw that the creature had only +two legs, and that it stood upright like a man, but such a man as Mark +had never seen before, for he was nearly twelve feet tall. + +He was about to cry out and warn the others, when the thing, whatever +it was, sunk down, apparently behind some tall bushes, and disappeared +as if the earth had opened and swallowed it. + +"I wonder if I had better tell them," thought Mark. "I can't show them +anything. I wonder if I really saw it, or if it was only a shadow. I +guess I'll say nothing. But it is very strange." + +Then he hurried on to join the others. + +"What makes you so pale?" asked Jack of his chum. + +"Nothing," said Mark, somewhat confused. "I guess I'm a little tired, +that's all." + +They reached the ship in safety, and, having dinner started the +machinery and took the Mermaid up into the air. + +"We'll travel on and see if we can't find some human beings," the +professor said. + +All that afternoon they sailed, the country below them unfolding like +a panorama. They passed over big lakes, sailing on the surface of +some, and over rivers, and vast stretches of forest and dreary plains. +But they never saw a sign of human inhabitants. + +It was getting on to five o'clock, the hour when the brilliant lights +usually disappeared, when Mark, who was steering in the conning tower, +gave a cry. + +"What is it?" asked the professor, looking up from a rude map he was +making of the land they had just traversed. + +"It looks like a town before us," said the boy. + +Mr. Henderson and Jack looked to where Mark pointed. A few miles ahead +and below them were great mounds, not unlike that from which the +geyser had spouted. But they were arranged in regular form, like +houses on a street, row after row of them. And, as they approached +nearer, they could see that the mounds had doors and windows to them. +Some of the mounds wer rger than others, and some were of double and +triple formation. + +"It's a city! The first city of the new world!" cried Jack. + +"It is a deserted village!" said the professor. "We have found where +the people live, but we have not found them." And he was right, for +there was not a sign of life about the place, over which the airship +was now suspended. + + CHAPTER XXIV + + THE GIANTS + +"LET'S go down and investigate," suggested Jack. + +"Better wait," counseled the professor. "It will soon be dark, and, +though we will have moonlight, we can not see to advantage. I think it +will be best to keep the ship in the air to-night, and descend in the +morning. Then we can look about and decide on what to do." + +They all agreed this was the best plan, and, after making a circle +above the deserted village, and noting no signs of life, the Mermaid +was brought to a halt over the centre of the town, and about three +hundred feet above it. There the travelers would be comparatively +safe. + +It was deemed best to keep watch that night, and so, Mark, Jack, Bill +and Tom took turns, though there was nothing for them to do, as not a +thing happened. With the first appearance of dawn Mr. Henderson gave +orders to have the ship lowered, and it came to rest in the middle of +what corresponded to a street in the queer mound village. + +"Now to see what kind of people have lived here!" cried Jack. "They +must have been a queer lot. Something like the Esquimaux, only they +probably had more trouble keeping cool than the chaps up at the north +pole do." + +Now that they were down among the mound houses, they saw that the +dwellings were much larger than they had supposed. They towered high +above the boys' heads, and some of them were large enough in area to +have accomodated a company of soldiers. + +"Say, the chaps who lived in these must have been some pumpkins," said +Jack. "Why the ceilings are about fifteen feet high, and the doors +almost the same! Talk about giants! I guess we've struck where they +used to hang out, at any rate." + +The houses were a curious mixture of clay and soft stone. There were +doors, with big skins from animals as curtains, and the windows were +devoid of glass. Instead of stairs there were rude ladders, and the +furniture in the mound houses was of the roughest kind. + +There were fire-places in some of the houses, and the blackened and +smoked walls showed that they must have been used. In one or two of +the houses clay dishes, most of them broken, were scattered about, and +the size of them, in keeping with everything else, indicated that +those who used them were of no small stature. + +"Some of the bowls would do for bath tubs," said Jack, as he came +across one or two large ones. + +By this time the professor, Bill and Tom had joined the boys, and the +five went on with the exploring tour, while Washington and Andy +remained in the ship to get breakfast. + +"The inhabitants are evidently of a half-civilized race," the +professor said. "Their houses, and the manner in which they live, show +them to be allied to the Aztecs, though of course they are much larger +than that race." + +"What's bothering me," Bill said, "is not so much what race they +belong to, as what chance we'd stand in a race with them if they took +it into their heads to chase after us. I've read that them there +Azhandled races----" + +"You mean the Aztecs," interrupted the professor. + +"Well the Aztecs, then. But I've read they used to place their enemies +on a stone altar and cut their hearts out. Now I'm not hankerin' after +anything like that." + +"Don't be foolish," spoke Mr. Henderson. "Wait until you meet some of +the giants, if that is what they are, and then you can decide what to +do." + +"It may be too late then," remarked Bill in a low tone, and the boys +were somewhat inclined to agree with him. + +However, there seemed to be no immediate danger, as there was no sign +of any of the big people about the village. The adventurers walked +about for some time, but made no discoveries that would throw any +light on the reason for the place being left uninhabited. It seemed as +if there had been a sudden departure from the place, for in a number +of the houses the remains of half-cooked meals were seen. + +"Well, I think we have noted enough for the time being," the professor +remarked, after they had traversed almost half the length of what +seemed to be the principal street. "Let's go back to the ship and have +something to eat. Washington may have become alarmed at our absence." + +They made a circle in order to take in another part of the town on +their way back. While passing through a sort of alley, though it was +only narrow by comparison with the other thoroughfares that were very +wide, Mark came to a place where there was a circular slab of stone, +resting on the ground. In the centre was a big iron ring. + +"Hello! Here's something new!" he exclaimed. "Maybe it leads to a +secret passage, or covers some hidden treasure." + +"I guess it will have to continue to cover it then," Jack spoke. "That +probably weighs several tons. None of us could move it." + +They made their way back to the ship, where they found Washington and +Andy discussing the advisability of going off in search of them. + +"Breakfast is mighty near spoiled," said the colored man with an +injured air. + +But the travelers did full justice to the meal, notwithstanding this. +Deciding there was nothing to be gained by staying in that vicinity, +the professor started the ship off again. + +They traveled several hundred miles in the air, and, as the afternoon +was coming to a close, Jack, who was in charge of the conning tower, +spied, just ahead of them, another village. + +"We will descend there for the night," the professor said. "Does there +seem to be any sign of life about?" + +"None," replied Mark, who was observing through a telescope the town +they were approaching. "It's as dead as the other one." + +The airship settled down in a field back of some of the mound houses. + +"Now for supper!" cried Jack. "I'm as hungry as----" + +He stopped short, for, seeming to rise from the very ground, all about +the ship, there appeared a throng of men. And such men as they were! +For not one was less than ten feet tall, and some were nearly fifteen! + +"The giants have us!" cried Bill, as he saw the horde of creatures +surrounding the ship. + + CHAPTER XXV + + HELD BY THE ENEMY + +"KEEP the doors closed!" cried the professor. "It is our only hope! I +will send the ship up again!" + +But it was too late. Washington, who had obeyed the signal from the +conning tower to shut off the engines, had disconnected most of them +so they could not be started again save from the main room. At the +same time there came a yell of dismay from the colored man, who had +slid back the steel covering of the main side entrance to the Mermaid. + +"I'm caught!" cried Washington. + +As the professor and the boys hurried from the tower, they could hear +a struggle from where Washington was, and his voice calling: + +"Let me go! Let me go!" + +Reaching the engine room, which opened directly on the side entrance, +the professor saw a pair of enormous hands and arms dragging poor +Washington, feet first, out of the ship. Bill and Tom were crouched in +one corner, pale with fright. + +"Wait until I get my gun!" cried Andy, as he ran for his rifle. + +"Hold on!" called the professor in a loud voice. "It will be folly to +shoot them! We must try strategy!" + +Washington's cries ceased as he was drawn entirely from the ship, the +giant hands disappearing at the same time. + +"Follow me!" yelled Mr. Henderson, running out of the door. + +Hardly knowing what they did, the boys went after him, and their +hearts almost stopped beating in fright as they saw the terrible +things, which, in the glare of the changing lights, were on every side +of them. + +For the men were very repulsive looking. They there attired in +clothes, very similar in cut to those worn by the travelers, and which +seemed to be made of some sort of cloth. But they were loose and baggy +and only added to the queer appearance of the giants. Veritable giants +they were too. Their faces seemed as large as kegs, and they were so +clumsy in shape that Mark, even, frightened as he was, exclaimed: + +"They look like men made of putty!" At the same time he saw they bore +a resemblance to the creature he had observed on the hill top. + +"What shall we do?" asked Andy of the professor. "They are really +carrying Washington away!" + +Three of the giants were dragging the colored man along the ground, +while the other terrible beings stood about as if waiting to see the +outcome of the first sally. + +"I will try to speak to them," Mr. Henderson said. "I know several +languages. They may understand one." + +But before he could start on his parley a surprising thing happened. +There was a struggle in the little group about Washington. The colored +man seemed to be fighting, though the odds, it would appear, were too +great to enable him to accomplish anything. But, making a desperate +effort to escape, Washington quickly wrenched himself free from the +giants' hands and then, striking out with his fists, knocked the three +down, one after another. + +"I never knew Washington was so strong!" exclaimed Jack. + +"Nor I," put in Mark. "Why I should think the men could carry him in +one arm as if he was a baby." + +The three giants rose slowly to their feet. They uttered strange +cries, and motioned with their hands toward the professor, the boys, +and the others in the crowd. + +"Look out! They're goin' t' grab yo'!" cried Washington. + +Three of the giants approached Mark, and a like number closed in on +Jack. + +"Back to the ship!" cried the professor. "We must defend ourselves!" + +But by this time the big men had grabbed the two boys. Then a strange +thing took place. Mark and Jack, though they felt that the giants must +overcome them in a test of strength, struggled with all their might +against being captured. They fought, as a cornered rat will fight, +though it knows the odds to be overwhelming. But in this case the +unexpected happened. + +Both boys found they could easily break the holds of the giants, and +Mark, by a vigorous effort, pushed the three men away from him, one at +a time violently so that they fell in a heap, one on top of the other. + +"Hurrah! We can fight 'em!" cried Mark. "Don't be afraid. They're like +mush! They're putty men!" + +And, so it seemed, the giants were. Though big in size they were +flabby and had nothing like the muscle they should have had in +proportion to their build. They went down like meal sacks and were +slow to rise. + +Jack, seeing how successful his comrade was, attacked the three giants +who were striving to make him a captive. He succeeded in disposing of +them, knocking one down so hard that the man was unable to rise until +his companions helped him. + +"That's the way!" cried Washington. "They're soft as snow men!" + +The vanquished giants set up a sort of roar, which was answered by +their fellows, and soon there was a terrible din. + +"All get together!" called the professor. "They are evidently going to +make a rush for us. If we stand by one another we may fight them off, +though they outnumber us a hundred to one. Besides it will soon be +dark, and we may be able to escape!" + +Washington, Jack and Mark retreated toward the ship, in the direction +of which the others had also made their way. The big men had gathered +in a compact mass and were advancing on the adventurers. + +"What do you suppose makes them so soft?" asked Mark. "I believe I +could manage half a dozen." + +"It must be the effect of the climate and conditions here," the +professor replied. "Probably they have to be big to stand the pressure +of the thick water, and the increased attraction of gravitation. Then +too, being without the weight of the atmosphere to which we are +accustomed, they have probably expanded. If they were to go up to +earth, they might shrink to our size." + +"Do you think that possible?" + +"Of course. Why do you ask?" + +"Nothing in particular," replied Mark. But to himself, he added: "That +would explain it all." + +It was getting dusk now. The travelers had reached their ship, and +rushed inside and tried to close the doors in the face of the +advancing horde. But, by this time the giants were so close that one +or two of them thrust their big feet in, and prevented this movement. +At the same time they set up a great howling. + +"Quick!" cried the professor. "We must start the ship and get away!" + +"I can't close the door!" yelled Washington, who had been the last to +enter. + +"Never mind that! Go up with it open! Drag them along if they won't +let go!" answered Mr. Henderson, as he ran toward the engine room. + +There was a sudden rush among the giants, and a sound as if something +was being thrown over the top and ends of the ship. Mark turned the +gas machine on, while Jack worked the negative gravity apparatus. They +waited for the ship to rise. + +"Why don't we go up?" asked the professor. + +"'Cause they've caught us!" called out Washington. + +"Caught us? How?" + +"They've thrown ropes over the top and ends of the ship, and fastened +them to their big houses!" + +Running to a side window the professor saw that the Mermaid was +fastened down by a score of cables, each one six inches thick. They +were held captives by the enemy. + + CHAPTER XXVI + + A FRIEND INDEED + +THOUGH the giants, man for man, were no match for the travelers, +collectively the horde proved too much. They had swarmed about the +ship, and, by passing the big cables over her, effectively held her +down. + +"Let me get out and I'll cut 'em!" cried Andy. "We must get away from +these savages!" + +"No, no, don't go out!" exclaimed the professor. "They would +eventually kill you, though you might fight them off for a time. We +must wait and see what develops. They can have no object in harming +us, as we have not injured them." + +"I'd rather fight 'em," insisted the old hunter. + +But the professor had his way and Andy was forced to obey. The giants +had withdrawn their big feet from the side door and Washington had +closed it. But nothing else had been accomplished, and the ship could +not rise. The gas and negative gravity machines were stopped, as they +were only under a useless strain. + +Suddenly, the colored lights which had been growing dimmer and dimmer, +with the approach of night, went out altogether. Almost as suddenly, +Mark, who was watching the giants from the conning tower, as they made +fast the loose ends of the cables, saw them make a dash for the mound +houses. + +"They're afraid of the dark!" he cried. "Come on! We can go out now +and loosen the ropes!" + +He hurried to tell the professor what he had noticed. + +"Good!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "Perhaps we can escape now!" + +They waited a few minutes, listening to the sound of many big feet +running away from the ship, and then, Bill cautiously opened the side +door. The others were behind him, waiting, with knives and hatchets in +their hands, to rush out and cut the restraining cables. + +"All ready!" called Bill. "There doesn't seem to be a one in sight!" + +He stepped out but no sooner had he set foot on the ground than there +came a thud, and Bill went down as if some one had knocked his feet +from under him. + +"Go back! Go back!" he cried. "They hit me with something. I'm being +smothered!" + +"Bring a light!" cried the professor, for the sally had been started +in the dark. + +Jack brought the portable electric it having been repaired and flashed +it out of the door. In the gleam of it, Bill was seen lying prostrate, +half covered by an orange, about half as big as himself. The fruit was +as soft and mushy as some of the giants themselves, or Bill would not +have fared so easily. + +Then, as the others stood watching, and while Bill arose and wiped +some of the juice from his face, there came a regular shower of the +monstrous oranges. + +"Get inside quick! We'll be smothered under them!" Mr. Henderson +cried. + +Pausing only to rescue Bill, the adventurers retreated inside the +ship, and made fast the door. Outside they could hear the thud as the +oranges were thrown, some hitting the Flying Mermaid and many dropping +all about her. + +"I guess they are going to have things their own way," observed Bill, +as he gazed down on his clothes, which were covered with juice from +the fruit. + +The night was one of anxiety. The travelers took turns standing guard, +but nothing more occurred. The giants remained in their houses, and +the heavy ropes still held the ship fast. + +"We must hold a council of war," the professor decided as they +gathered at breakfast, which was far from a cheerful meal. + +With the return of the colored lights the giants again made their +appearance. They came swarming from the mound houses, and a great +crowd they proved to be. Several thousand at least, Jack estimated, +and when he went up into the conning tower and took a survey he could +see the strange and terrible creatures pouring in from the surrounding +country. + +"I'm afraid there will be trouble," he said, as he came down and +reported what he had seen. + +"We must hold a council of war," repeated the professor. "Has any one +anything to suggest?" + +"Get a lot of powder and blow 'em up!" cried Andy. + +"Arrange electric wires and shock 'em to death!" was Bill's plan. + +"Can't we slip the ropes in some way and escape?" asked Jack. "I don't +believe we can successfully fight the giants. They are too many, even +if they are weak, individually." + +"I think you're right there," Mr. Henderson said. "We must try some +sort of strategy, but what? That is the question." + +For a few minutes no one spoke. They were all thinking deeply, for +their lives might hang in the balance. + +"I think I have a plan," said Mark, at length. "Did we bring any +diving suits with us?" + +"There may be one or two," the professor replied. "But what good will +they do?" + +"Two of us could put them on," continued Mark, "and, as they afford +good protection from any missiles like fruit, we could crawl out on +the deck of the ship. From there, armed with hatchets or knives we +could cut the ropes. Then the ship could rise." + +"That's a good plan!" cried the scientist. "We'll try it at once." + +Search revealed that two diving suits were among the stores of the +Mermaid. Jack and Mark wanted to be the ones to don them, but as the +suits were rather large, and as the professor thought it would take +more strength than the boys had to do the work, it was decided that +Andy and Washington should make the attempt to cut the ropes. + +The hunter and colored man lost little time in getting into the modern +armor. In the meanwhile Jack, who had been posted as a lookout, +reported that there seemed to be some activity among the giants. They +were running here and there, and some seemed to be going off toward +the woods, that were not far away. + +"Now work quickly," urged the professor. "We will be on the watch, and +as soon as the last rope is cut we will start the machinery and send +the ship up. We will not wait for you to come back inside, so hold +fast as best you can when the Mermaid rises." + +"We will," answered Andy, just before the big copper helmet was +fastened on his head, and Washington nodded to show he understood. + +The two who were to attempt the rescue of their comrades were soon on +deck. In the conning tower Jack and the professor kept anxious watch, +while Mark, Bill and Tom were at the various machines, ready, at the +signal, to start the engines. + +The giants had now become so interested in whatever plan they had +afoot, that they paid little attention to the ship. Consequently +Washington and Andy, crawling along the deck in their diving suits, +did not, at first attract any attention. + +In fact they had cut several of the big ropes, and it began to look as +if the plan would succeed, particularly as they were partly hidden +from view by the upper gas holder. They were working with feverish +haste, sawing away at the big cables with keen knives. + +"I guess we'll beat 'em yet!" cried Jack. + +"I hope so," replied the professor. "It looks----" + +He stopped short, for at that moment a cry arose from the midst of the +giants, and one of them pointed toward the ship. An instant later the +air was darkened with a flight of big oranges, which the queer +creatures seemed to favor as missiles. Probably they found stones too +heavy. + +"Well, those things can't hurt 'em much with those heavy suits on," +observed Mr. Henderson. "There, Washington got one right on the head +that time, and it didn't bother him a bit." + +Jack had seen the fruit strike the big copper helmet and observed that +the colored man only moved his head slightly in order to get rid of +the orange. + +In fact the giants, seeing for themselves that this mode of warfare +was not going to answer, since the two men on the ship continued to +cut the restraining cables, gave it up. There was a good deal of +shouting among them, and a number ran here and there, seemingly +gathering up long poles. + +"I wonder if they are going to try the flailing method, and beat poor +Andy and Washington," said Mr. Henderson. "It looks so." + +The two rescuers were now about a quarter through their hard task. The +throwing of the oranges had ceased. But the giants were up to a new +trick. They divided into two sections, one taking up a position on one +side of the ship, and the other on the opposite. There were about two +hundred in each crowd, while the others in the horde drew some +distance back. + +"They're up to some queer dodge," observed Jack. "What are they +placing those sticks to their mouths for?" + +The professor observed the throng curiously for a few seconds. Then he +exclaimed: + +"They are using blow-guns! They are going to shoot arrows at +Washington and Andy! We must get them in at once!" + +He darted toward a door that opened from the conning tower out on the +deck. + +"Don't go!" cried Jack. "It's too late! They are beginning to blow!" + +He pointed to the throng of giants. The professor could see their +cheeks puffed out as the big creatures filled their lungs with air and +prepared to expel it through the hollow tubes. + +Then there came a sound as if a great wind was blowing. It howled and +roared over the ship, not unlike a hurricane in its fury. But there +was no flight of arrows through the air, such as would have come from +regular blow guns. + +"That is strange," said the professor. He thought for a moment. "I +have it!" he cried. "They are trying to blow Washington and Andy, off +the ship by the power of their breaths! They are not blowing arrows at +them! My, but they must have strong lungs!" + +And, in truth, that was the plan of the giants. The hollow tubes, made +from some sort of big weed, sent a blast of air at the two men on the +ship's deck, that made them lie flat and cling with both hands to +avoid being sent flying into the midst of the giants, on one side or +the other. But the giants had reckoned without the weight of the +diving suits, and it was those, with the big lead soles of the shoes, +that helped to hold Washington and Andy in place. + +"Come back! Came back!" cried the professor, opening the conning tower +door and calling to the two brave men. "Come back, both of you! Do you +hear?" + +As the portal slid back the rush of air was almost like that of a +cyclone. Then it suddenly ceased, as the giants saw their plan was not +likely to succeed. + +But now there arose from the outer circle of the horde a shout of +triumph. It was caused by the return of those who had, a little while +before, hurried off to the woods. They came back bearing big trees, +tall and slender, stripped of their branches, so that they resembled +flag staffs. It took a dozen giants to carry each one. + +The whole throng was soon busy laying the poles in a row in front of +the ship. + +"What can they be up to now?" asked Jack. + +"It looks as if they were going to slide the ship along on rollers," +the professor replied. + +Sure enough this was the giant's plan. A few minutes later those in +the Mermaid felt her moving forward, as the giants, massed behind, +shoved. On to the poles she slid. The ropes were loosened to permit +this, but not enough to enable the boat to rise. + +Then the travelers felt the ship being lifted up. + +"They are going to carry us away, with the poles for a big stretcher!" +cried the professor. + +Looking from the side windows the boys saw that a great crowd of the +big men were on either side of the Mermaid, each giant grasping a +pole, and lifting. Farther out were others, holding the ends of the +cables which Washington and Andy had not succeeded in cutting. + +The ship was being carried along by a thousand or more giants, as the +ancient warriors, slain in battle, were carried home on the spears of +their comrades. + +"This is the end of the Mermaid!" murmured Mr. Henderson in sorrowful +tones. + +As they looked from the conning tower the professor and the two boys +observed a commotion among the leaders of the giants. They seemed to +be wavering. Suddenly the forward part of the ship sank, as those +ahead laid their poles down on the ground. Then those behind did the +same, and the Mermaid, came to a stop, and once more rested on the +earth. + +"What does this mean?" asked the scientist in wonder. + +All at once the entire crowd of giants threw themselves down on their +faces, and there, standing at the bow of the ship, was a giant, half +again as large as any of the others. He was clad in a complete suit of +golden armor on which the changing lights played with beautiful +effect, and in his hand he held an immense golden sword. He pointed +the weapon at the ship as if he had raised it in protection, and his +hand was stretched in commanding gesture over the prostrate giants. + +"Perhaps he has come to save us!" cried Mark. + + CHAPTER XXVII + + A GREAT JOURNEY + +SUCH indeed, seemed to be the case. The golden-armored giant, after +standing for a few moments in an attitude of command, waved his sword +three times about his head, and uttered a command, in a voice that +sounded like thunder. Then the prostrate ones arose, and, making low +bows hurried away in all directions. + +Watching them disappear, the golden one sheathed his weapon and +approached the ship. He caught sight of the professor and the two boys +in the conning tower, for Mark had gone there when he found the ship +being transported, and held up his two hands, the palms outward. + +"It is the sign of peace in the language all natives employ," said the +professor. "I think I shall trust him." + +Followed by the boys he descended from the little platform in the +tower, and to the door that opened on the deck. + +"Shall we go out?" he asked. + +"We can't be much worse off," replied Mark. "Let's chance it." + +So, not without many misgivings, they slid back the portal and stepped +out to face the strange and terrible being who had so suddenly come to +their rescue. + +The giant in the golden armor did not seem surprised to see them. In +fact he acted as though he rather expected them. He continued to hold +up one hand, with the palm, outward, while, with the other, he removed +his helmet and bowed low. Then he cast his sword on the ground and +advanced toward the ship. When within ten feet he sat down on the +ground, and this brought his head nearer the earth, so that his +auditors could both see and hear him to better advantage. + +As soon as the giant saw the travelers were outside their ship he +began to speak to them in a voice, which, though he might have meant +it to be low and gentle, was like the bellowing of a bull. At the same +time he made many gestures, pointing to the ship, to himself and to +Mark. + +"What is he saying, professor?" asked Jack. + +"I can't understand all he says," Mr. Henderson replied. "He uses some +words derived from the Latin and some from the Greek. But by piecing +it out here and there, and by interpreting his motions I am able to +get at something." + +"And what is it all about?" + +"It is a strange story," the scientist replied. "He has only gone +about half way through it. Wait until he finishes and I will tell +you." + +The golden-armored giant, who had stopped in his narrative while Jack +was speaking, resumed. His gestures became more rapid, and his words +came faster. Several times Mr. Henderson held up his hand for him to +cease, while he puzzled out what was meant. + +At one point, the professor seemed much startled, and motioned for the +strange being to repeat the last part of his discourse. When this had +been done Mr. Henderson shook his head as though in doubt. + +At length the story was finished, and the lone giant, for there were +no others in sight now, folded his arms and seemed to await what the +professor's answer might be. Mr. Henderson turned to the boys, and to +the others of the Mermaid's company, who, by this time, had joined +him, and said: + +"Friends, I have just listened to a strange story. It is so strange +that, but for the fact that our own adventures are verging on the +marvelous, I could hardly believe it. In the first place, this man +here is the king of this country. That is why all the other natives +obeyed him. + +"In the second place it seems he has been a passenger in our boat, and +came here from the earth's surface with us!" + +"What's that?" cried Jack. + +"That explains the strange happenings!" ejaculated Mark. "No wonder I +could never solve the secret of the storeroom." + +"You are right, it does," replied Mr. Henderson. "I will not go into +all the details of how it happened, but it seems the big hole through +which we came is only one of two entrances to this inner world. Rather +it is the entrance, and there is another, close to it, which is the +exit. Through the latter a big stream of water spouts up, just as one +pours down through the opening we used. + +"Hankos, which is the name of the king, was for many years a student +of science. He longed to see where the big stream of upward spurting +water went, and wanted to know whence came the down-pouring one. So he +undertook a daring experiment. + +"He constructed a great cylinder, and, keeping his plans a secret, +conveyed it to the spouting water, entered it, and, by means of +pulleys and levers, after he had shut himself inside, cast himself +into the up-shooting column. He took along compressed air cylinders to +supply an atmosphere he could breathe, and some food to eat, for it +appears our giant friends are something of inventors in their way. The +current of water bore him to the surface of the earth, and he was cast +up on the ocean, in what was probably taken for a waterspout if any +one saw it. + +"Then a strange thing happened. No sooner did Hankos open his +cylinder, which served him as a boat, than he lost his gigantic size, +owing to the difference of the two atmospheres. He became almost of +the same size as ourselves, except that his skin hung in great folds +on him, and he seemed like a wrinkled old man. His clothes too, were a +world too large. + +"He had a terrible time before he reached shore, and a hard one after +it, for his strange appearance turned almost every one against him. He +was sorry he had ventured to solve the mystery of the up-shooting +stream of water, for he was worse than an outcast. + +"Then he began to plan to get back to his own inner world. But he +could not find the downward stream, and, not knowing the language of +the countries where he landed, he had no means of ascertaining. He +traveled from place to place, always seeking for something that would +lead him back to his own country. + +"Finally he heard of us, and of our ship, though how I do not know, as +I thought I had kept it a great secret. By almost superhuman struggles +he made his way to our island. He says he concealed himself aboard the +Mermaid the night before we sailed, but I hardly believe it possible. +It seems----" + +"He did it, for I saw him!" interrupted Mark. + +"You saw him!" cried Mr. Henderson. + +Then Mark told of the many things that had puzzled him so, how he had +seen the queer figure slinking aboard the boat, of the disappearance +of food from time to time, and of the strange noises in the storeroom. + +"That bears out what he told me," the professor said. "Hankos says he +used to steal out nights and take what food he could get, and he also +mentions some one, answering to Mark's description, who nearly +discovered him once as he hurried back into the apartment. + +"However, it seems to be true, since Mark confirms it. At any rate +Hankos stayed in hiding, and made the entire trip with us, and, just +as we all became overcome with the strange gas he escaped, having +begun to expand to his original giant size, and being unable to remain +any longer in his cramped quarters." + +"That's so, he did!" cried Mark. "I saw him come out of the place just +before I lost my senses. It was a terrible sight, and none of you +would believe me when I told you some of the occurrences afterward." + +"You must forgive us for that," the professor said. "We have learned +much since then." + +"What did Hankos do after he left the ship when it landed in this +country?" asked Jack. + +"He traveled until he came to this village, which is the chief one of +this country," replied the professor. "Part of the time he followed us +at a distance, being able to travel very fast." + +Mark remembered the strange figure of a giant he had seen on the hill +tops several times, and knew that he had been observing the being who +had played such a queer part in their lives. + +"When he came back among his own people," went on Mr. Henderson, "they +would not receive him at first, believing him to be an impostor. But +Hankos convinced them of his identity and was allowed to don the +golden armor, which is the badge of kingship. He had only been in +office for a little while when he heard of the arrival of the strange +thing, which turned out to be our ship. He recognized it from the +description, and, learning that we were likely to be sacrificed to the +fury and ignorance of the giants, he hurried here and saved our lives. + +"He says he can never thank us enough for being the means whereby he +was able to get back to his own country, and says the freedom of this +whole inner world is ours. He has given orders that we are to go +wherever we like, and none will molest us. He tells me the land is a +wonderful one, compared to our own, and urges us to make a long +journey. He would like to go with us, only, now that he has resumed +his natural size, he can not get inside the ship." + +"Hurrah for King Hankos!" cried Jack and the others joined him in a +hearty cheer. + +The giant in the golden armor evidently understood the compliment +which was paid him, for he waved his helmet in the air and responded +with a shout of welcome that made the ground tremble. + +Hankos waited until the professor had translated all of the story to +the other travelers. Then the genial giant began to talk some more, +and the professor listened intently. + +"He says," spoke Mr. Henderson to his friends, "that we will be +supplied with all the fruit we want, and with the best of the houses +to sleep in on our journey. He also tells me he has great stores of +shining stones and piles of the metal of which his armor is made, and +that we are welcome to as much as we want. If this means unlimited +gold and diamonds, we may make our fortunes." + +"Jest let me git ma' hand on a few sparklers an' I'll quit work!" +exclaimed Washington. + +"I have told him," the scientist went on, "that we will take advantage +of his kind offer. We will start on our trip in a day or so, after we +have looked over the ship to see if it is not damaged. He tells me the +gold and sparkling stones are several thousand miles away, on top of a +high mountain. We will make that our objective point." + +The interview between the king and Mr. Henderson having ended, the +former waved his sword in the air and the swarm of big men came back. +They had been hiding back in the woods. Now their manner was very +different. They carefully removed the rollers and ropes, and soon +there was brought to the adventurers an immense pile of fine fruits. +If our friends had stayed there a year they could not have eaten it +all. The giants were judging the appetites of the travelers by their +own. + +That night the adventurers slept more soundly than they had since +entering the strange world. They felt they had nothing to fear from +the giants. In the morning they were not molested, though big crowds +gathered to look at the ship. But they kept back a good distance. The +machinery was found to be in good shape, save for a few repairs, and +when these were made, the professor announced he would start on a long +journey. + +For several weeks after that the travelers swung about in their ship, +sometimes sailing in the air and again on big seas and lakes viewing +the wonders of the inner world. They were many and varied, and the +professor collected enough material for a score of books which he said +he would write when he got back to the outer world once more. + +One afternoon, as they were sailing over a vast stretch of woodland, +which did not seem to be inhabited, Mr. Henderson, looking at one of +the gages on the wall, asked: + +"Boys do you know how far you have traveled underground?" + +"How far?" asked Jack, who hated to guess riddles. + +"More than four thousand miles," was the answer. + +"But we haven't come to that mountain of gold and diamonds," said +Mark. "I am anxious to see that." + +"Have patience," replied the professor. "I have not steered toward it +yet. There are other things to see." + +Just then Washington's voice could be heard calling from the conning +tower: + +"We're coming to a big mountain!" + + CHAPTER XXVIII + + THE TEMPLE OF TREASURE + +"WHAT'S that?" fairly yelled the professor. + +"We am propelling ourselves in a contiguous direction an' in close +proximity to an elevated portion of th' earth's surface which rises in +antiguous proximity t' th' forward part of our present means of +locomotion!" said the colored man in a loud voice. + +"Which means there may be a collision," the professor said, as he and +the boys hurried toward the tower, + +"Jest what I said," retorted Washington. "What'll I do?" + +"Send the ship a little higher," answered Mr. Henderson. "We mustn't +hit any mountains." + +Washington forced more gas into the holder, and speeded the negative +gravity machine up some, so that the Mermaid, which was flying rather +low, ascended until it was in no danger of colliding with the peak +which reared its lofty height just ahead of them. + +As the ship sailed slowly over the mountain, Mark gazed down and +exclaimed: + +"Doesn't that look like the ruins of some building?" + +The professor took a pair of field glasses from a rack in the wall and +took a long view. + +"It must be the place," he said in a low voice. + +"What place?" asked Jack. + +"The temple of treasure," was the answer. "Hankos told me it was on +top of the highest mountain in the land, and this must be it, for it +is the loftiest place we have seen. But we must be careful, for there +is danger down there." + +"What kind?" asked Mark. + +"The place was long ago deserted by the giants," Mr. Henderson went +on. "Ages ago it was one of their storehouses for treasure, but there +were wars among themselves, Hankos said, and this part of the country +was laid waste. Savage beasts took up their abode in the temple, and +since then, in spite of the great size of the giants, they have not +dared to venture here. If we brave the animals we may have all the +gold and diamonds we can take away." + +"Then for one, I'm willin' t' go down an' begin th' extermination at +once," put in Andy. "I've always wanted t' be rich." + +"We must proceed cautiously," the professor said. "We are ill prepared +to fight any such beasts as we saw at the big geyser. At the same time +they may have deserted this place. I think we will lower the ship down +over the temple, and spend several hours in observation. Then, if +nothing develops, we can enter and see if the treasure is there." + +This plan was voted a good one, and the Mermaid after having been +steered directly over the ruined temple, was brought to a halt, and +enough gas let out so that it fell to about fifty feet in the air +above it. + +The adventurers began their watch. The afternoon waned and there were +no signs of any beasts in or about the temple. + +"I reckon we can take a chance," said Andy, who was anxious to get his +hands on some diamonds. + +"Better wait until morning," counseled Mr. Henderson. "It will soon be +dark, and it doesn't look like a nice place to go stumbling about in +by moonlight." + +So, though all but the scientist were anxious, they had to wait until +the night had passed. Several times Washington got up to see if the +temple had, by any chance, taken wings during the long hours of +darkness, but each time he found it was still in place. + +"Seems laik it'll never come mornin'." he said. + +But dawn came at length, and, after a hasty breakfast, preparations to +enter the temple were made. Andy loaded his gun for "bear" as he +expressed it, and the boys each took a revolver. + +The ship was lowered to as level a place as could be found, and then, +seeing that everything was in readiness for a quick departure, the +professor led the way out of the Mermaid. + +The entrance to the temple was through a big arched gateway. Some of +the stones had fallen down, and the whole structure looked as if it +might topple over at any moment. + +"Go carefully," cautioned Mr. Henderson, "Watch on all sides and up +above. Better let Andy and me go ahead." + +The scientist and the old hunter led the way. Through the arch they +went, and emerged into what must at one time have been a magnificent +courtyard. Before them was the temple proper, a vast structure, with +an opening through which fifty men might have marched abreast. But the +doors were gone, and the portal was but a black hole. + +"I hope there ain't any ghosts in there," said Washington, with a +shiver. + +"Nonsense!" exclaimed the professor. "There may be things as bad, but +there are no such things as ghosts. Have your gun ready, Andy." + +With every sense on the alert, the old hunter advanced. Every one was +a bit nervous, and, as Mark and Jack afterward admitted, they half +expected some terrible beast to rush out at them. But nothing of the +kind happened, and they went into the interior of the temple. + +At first it was so dark they could see nothing. There were vast dim +shapes on every side, and from the hollow echo of their footsteps they +judged the roof must be very high and the structure big in every way. + +Then, as their eyes became used to the darkness, they could make out, +up front, something like an altar or pulpit. + +"Perhaps that's where they offered up the gold and diamonds as a +sacrifice to their gods," spoke Mark in a whisper. + +"Sacrifice to their gods!" came back a hundred echoes and the sound +made every one shudder. + +"Oh!" said Washington, in a low voice. + +"Oh! Oh! Oh!" repeated the echoes in voices of thunder. + +"Well, this is pleasant," spoke Andy, in his natural tones, and, to +the surprise of all there was no echo. It was only when a person +whispered or spoke low that the sound was heard. After that they +talked naturally. + +"You stay here, and Andy and I will go up front and see what there +is," said Mr. Henderson. "Be on your guard, and if you hear us coming +back in a hurry, run!" + +It was with no little feeling of nervousness that the boys, Bill, Tom +and Washington watched the two men move off in the darkness. They +could hear their footsteps on the stone flags and could dimly see +them. + +"They must be almost to the altar by this time," said Mark, after a +long pause. + +Hardly had he spoken than there came a loud, sound from where Mr. +Henderson and Andy had gone. It was as if some giant wings were +beating the air. Then came shrill cries and the voice of the old +hunter could be heard calling: + +"Kneel down, Professor! Let me get a shot at the brute!" + +Those waiting in the rear of the temple huddled closer together. What +terrible beast could have been aroused? + +The next instant the place seemed illuminated as if by a lightning +flash, and a sound as of a thousand thunder claps resounded. + +"I think I winged him!" cried Andy's voice, and the boys knew he had +fired at something. + +Then there came a crash, and from the roof of the old temple a dozen +stones toppled off to one side, letting in a flood of colored light. + +By this illumination could be seen, flapping through the big space +overhead, an enormous bat, as large as three eagles. And, as it flew +about in a circle it gave utterance to shrill cries. + +"Bang!" Andy's gun spoke again, and the bat with a louder cry than +before, darted through the hole in the roof made by the falling +stones, which had been loosened by the concussion from the rifle. + +"Come on!" cried the old hunter. "That was the guardian of the +treasure! We are safe now!" + +Then, in the light which streamed through the broken roof, the +adventurers could see, heaped up on a great altar, behind which sat a +horrible graven image, piles of yellow metal, and sparkling stones. In +little heaps they were, arranged as if offerings to the terrible god +of the giants. There were bars and rings of gold, dishes of odd shape, +and even weapons. As for the sparkling stones, they were of many +colors, but the white ones were more plentiful than all the others. + +"Gold and diamonds! Diamonds and gold!" murmured the professor. "There +is the ransom of many kings in this ancient temple." + +"Wish I had a big bag!" exclaimed Washington, as he began filling all +his pockets with the precious metal and gems. "If I had a-thought I'd +have brought a dress-suit case!" + +"A dress-suit case full of diamonds!" exclaimed Mark. + +Then he too, as did all the others, fell to filling his pockets with +the wealth spread so lavishly before them. There was the riches of a +whole world in one place and no one but themselves to take it. + +For several minutes no one spoke. The only sound was the rattle of the +stones and the clink of gold, and when some of the diamonds dropped on +the floor they did not bother to gather them up. There were too many +on the altar. + +"We will be rich for life!" gasped old Andy, who had been poor all his +years. + +"I can't carry any more!" gasped Washington. "I'm goin' back for----" + +What he was going back for he never said, for, at that instant, +happening to look up at the hole in the roof, he gave a startled try: + +"Here come the terrible bats!" + +They all gazed upward. Through the opening they could see a great +flock of the awful birds, headed for the temple, and they were led by +one which seemed to fly with difficulty. It was the guardian of the +treasure that Andy had wounded. + +"Quick! We must get out of here!" shouted the old hunter. "They are +big enough and strong enough to tear us all to pieces. Hurry!" + +Down the centre of the temple they rushed, and not a moment too soon, +for, ere they had passed half way to the entrance, the opening in the +roof was darkened by the coming of the bats, and soon the flapping of +their wings awoke the thundering echoes in the ruined structure, while +their shrill cries struck terror to the hearts of the travelers. + +Up to the altar circled the bats, and then wheeling they flapped down +the dim aisles toward the adventurers. + +"Hurry! Hurry!" shouted Andy, who was in the rear. + +He raised his rifle and fired several shots into the midst of the +terrible creatures. + +A number of the bats were wounded, and the others were so frightened +by the sound of the shots and the flashes of fire that they turned +back. This enabled the fleeing ones to gain the entrance to the +temple, and soon they were outside. + +"To the ship!" yelled Bill. + +"There's little danger now!" called Andy, panting, for the run had +winded him. "They will hardly attack us in the light!" + +And he was right, for, though they could hear the bats flying about +inside the temple, and uttering their cries, none came outside. + +But no one felt like staying near the uncanny structure, and little +time was lost in reaching the Mermaid. Then the doors were fastened, +and the ship was sent high up into the air. + +"Which way?" asked Jack, when Mr. Henderson told him to go to the +conning tower and steer. + +"Back to where we first met the giants," replied the professor. "We +must prepare to start for our own earth again soon." + +"I've almost forgotten how real sunlight looks," thought Jack, as he +headed the ship around the other way. As he turned the levers a big +diamond dropped from his pocket and rolled on the floor. + +"This will be a good reminder of our trip though," he added. + +The travelers, even including Mr. Henderson, were so taken up with +their suddenly acquired riches that they hardly thought of meals. At +the professor's suggestion they tied their gold and stones up in small +packages convenient to carry. + +"Better place them where you can grab them in a hurry in case of +accident," the old scientist went on. "Of course if there should be +too bad an accident they would never be of any use to us down here, +but we'll look on the bright side of things." + +"Do you anticipate any accident?" asked Jack anxiously. + +"No, Oh no," replied Mr. Henderson, but Jack thought the aged man had +something weighing on his mind. + + CHAPTER XXIX + + BACK HOME-- CONCLUSION + +ON and on sped the Mermaid. Now that the travelers felt their journey +accomplished they were anxious to begin the homeward trip. They made a +straight course for the village where they had so nearly met with +disaster, and where the king of the giants had saved them. They went +in a direct line, and did not travel here and there, as they had after +they left the town. Consequently they shortened the route by a great +distance. Yet it was long enough, and when they finally came in sight +of the place the dial registered a trip of five thousand miles +underground. + +It was one evening when they landed almost at the spot whence they had +taken flight eventually to reach the temple of the treasure. Most of +the giants had betaken themselves to their mound houses, but Hankos +was walking in the fields, and, when he caught sight of the airship +hovering above him he waved his great sword in welcome. + +He rushed up to shake hands with the travelers when they came out of +the ship, though to greet him it was only possible for the adventurers +to grasp one of his immense fingers. + +As soon as the greetings were over Hankos began to speak rapidly to +the professor, at the same time going through many strange motions. + +"It is as I feared!" suddenly exclaimed the scientist. + +"What is the matter?" asked Mark. + +"The worst has happened!" went on Mr. Henderson. "The great hole by +which we came into this place has been closed by an earthquake shock!" + +"The hole closed?" repeated Jack. + +"An earthquake shock!" murmured Mark. + +"Then how are we going to get back to earth?" asked old Andy. + +A terrible fear entered the hearts of the travelers. The closing of +the opening by which they had come to the strange world meant, in all +probability that they would have to spend the rest of their lives in +this underground place. + +"What good did it do us to get all those diamonds and that gold?" +asked Mark in a sorrowful tone. + +Hankos began to speak again, using his gestures which were almost as +eloquent as words. The professor watched and listened intently. Then +there seemed to come a more hopeful look to his face. He nodded +vigorously as Hankos went on with what seemed to be an explanation. + +"It's worth trying, at all events!" the scientist exclaimed. "It is +our only hope!" + +"What is?" asked Jack. + +"Friends," began the professor in solemn tones. "I must admit our +plight is desperate. At the same time there is a bare chance of our +getting back to our own earth. As you remember, Hankos went from this +place to the upper regions through the upward spouting column of +water." + +"If we had our submarine we might also," interrupted Jack. "But the +Mermaid isn't built to sail in that fashion." + +"Nor would the Porpoise have served us in this emergency," said the +professor. "It would prove too heavy. But, nevertheless, I think I +have a plan. Now, Mark, you are about to learn the secret of the +storeroom. The real one, not the hiding of Hankos in there, which you +imagined to be the cause of my desire to keep something hidden. When +we planned a trip to this underground world I had a dim idea that we +might meet with trouble. So I planned and made a cylinder lifeboat." + +"A cylinder lifeboat?" repeated Mark. + +"Yes," replied Mr. Henderson. "I have it in the storeroom. I did not +want any of you to see it for fear you would have faint hearts. I +thought there might be no necessity of using it. But, since there is, +we must do our best. I will admit it may be a fearful ordeal, but we +will have to risk something in order to escape. + +"I have in the storeroom a large cylinder, capable of holding us all. +It will also contain food and drink for a month, but we will all have +to go, packed almost like sardines in a box. My plan is to take the +Mermaid to the place where the column of water shoots up. There we +will get into the cylinder, close it, and trust ourselves to the +terrible force that may bring us back to the upper world. What do you +say? Shall we attempt it?" + +For a few seconds no one spoke. Then Jack said slowly: + +"I don't see that we can do anything else. I don't want to stay here +all my life." + +"I wants a chance t' wear some of them sparklers," put in Washington. + +"Then we will make the attempt," the professor added. "Now all aboard +for the place where the water shoots up!" + +Questioning Hankos, the professor learned how to reach the strange +place. It was in the midst of a desolate country where none of the +giants ever went, so afraid were they of the strange phenomenon. + +It was a week's journey. Sometimes the Mermaid flew through the air, +and again it sailed on vast lakes or inland seas. On the trip they met +with big waterfalls and terrible geysers that spouted a mile or more +into the air. They traveled by night as well as day, though it was +necessary to keep a sharp watch. + +Sometimes the ship passed through great flocks of birds that +surrounded her and sought to pierce the aluminum hull with their sharp +beaks and talons. Over the mountains and valleys the ship sailed +until, one evening, there sounded through the air a strange rumbling +sound. + +"It is thunder," said Old Andy. + +"It is the water column," replied the scientist. "We are at the end of +our trip. May the remainder be as successful!" + +The ship was lowered to the surface, as it was deemed best to approach +the column when the lights were shining. No one slept much that night, +for the roaring and rumbling never ceased. + +In the morning the ship was sent forward slowly. Ever and ever the +terrific sound increased, until it was almost deafening. They had to +call to each other to be heard. + +Then, as the Mermaid passed over a mountain, the adventurers saw, in a +valley below them, the up-shooting water. + +It was a vast column, nearly three hundred feet in thickness, and as +solid and white as a shaft of marble. Up, up, up, it went, until it +was lost to sight, but there were no falling drops, and not even a +spray came from the watery shafts. + +"There is a terrible power to it," the professor said. "May it prove +our salvation!" + +The ship was lowered about a hundred feet away from the waterspout. +All around them the ground was vibrating with the force of the fluid. + +"To think that connects with the world above!" exclaimed Jack. + +"It's a good thing for us that it does," Mark answered. + +"We must lose no time," the professor put in. "If the earthquake +destroyed the downward shaft, it may effect this one in time. We must +escape while we can." + +Then, for the first time, he opened the storeroom and the big cylinder +was disclosed to view. It was made of aluminum, and shaped like an +immense cigar. The hull was double, and it was strongly braced. Inside +were padded berths for the occupants, and there was just room enough +for the seven adventurers. Once they had entered they could not move +about, but must stay in their little compartment. + +Compressed air in strong cylinders furnished a means of breathing, and +there were tiny electric lights operated by a storage battery. There +was also a chamber to be filled with the lifting gas. The cylinder was +so arranged that it would float on it's long axis if thrown into the +water. A trap door hermetically sealed gave access to the interior. A +small propeller, worked by compressed air, furnished motive power. + +The food supply consisted of compressed capsules on which a man could +subsist for several days. There was also some water, but not much, +since that can not be compressed and would, therefore, take +considerable room. + +"The only thing for us to do," said the professor, "is to get into the +cylinder, seal it up, and trust to Providence. This is what I intended +to use when we were caught in the draught." + +"How can we get into the column of water after we shut ourselves into +the cylinder?" asked Mark. + +"The cylinder fits into a sort of improvised cannon," said Mr. +Henderson. "It is fired by electricity and compressed air. "We will +aim it at the column, press the button and be projected into the midst +of the water. Then----" He did not finish the sentence, but the others +knew what he meant. + +"When are we to start?" asked Mark. + +"As soon as possible," replied the professor. "I must arrange the +cylinder, compress the air and lay out the food supply." + +It took the rest of the day to do this, as the inventor found it would +be advisable to attach a weight to the end of the cylinder, to hold it +upright in the column of water. The weight could be detached +automatically when they were shot up into the midst of the ocean, +where, as Hankos had told them, the column spurted forth. + +Then some food was stored in the tiny ship that was destined to be +their last hope, and some tanks of water were placed in it. + +"I think we are almost ready," Mr. Henderson said about noon the next +day. + +"What about our gold and diamonds?" asked Jack suddenly. "Can we take +them with us in the cylinder?" + +"That's so!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "I forgot about them. I'm afraid +we'll have to leave the riches behind. We will not be able to carry +them and the food we need, for it may be a week or more before we can +leave the cylinder. Gold and diamonds will be a poor substitute for +something to eat." + +"I'm goin' t' take mine!" said Washington with much conviction. "I +might as well starve rich as starve poor!" + +"We may be able to take a few diamonds," the professor answered. "The +gold will be too heavy. Let each one select the largest of the +diamonds he has and put them in his pockets." + +Then began a sorting of the wealth. It was strange, as they recalled +afterward, throwing away riches that would have made millionaires +envious, but it had to be done. All the wealth in the world would not +equal a beef capsule when they were starving, and they realized it. So +they only saved a few pieces of gold as souvenirs, and took the best +of the diamonds. But even then they had a vast fortune with them. + +At last all was in readiness. The cylinder had been placed in the tube +from which it was to be shot gently forth by compressed air, so that +it would fall into the upward spouting column of water. The charge of +compressed air was put in and the electric wires arranged. + +"Are we all ready?" asked Mr. Henderson. + +"I think so," said Jack, in what sounded like a whisper, but which was +loud, only the noise of the water muffled it. + +"Then we had better enter the cylinder," spoke the inventor. "Take a +last look at the Flying Mermaid, boys, for you will never see again +the ship that has borne us many thousand miles. She served us well, +and might again, but for the freak of nature that has placed us in +this position." + +For the first time the adventurers realized that they must abandon the +craft in which they had reached the new world. So it was with no +little feeling of sadness that they climbed up the ladder that had +been arranged and slid down into the cylinder. One by one they took +their places in the padded berths arranged for them. It was a snug +fit, for the professor knew if there was too much room he and the +others might be so tossed about as to be killed. + +Mr. Henderson was the last to enter. Standing at the manhole he took a +final look at his pet creation, the Mermaid. Through the opened +windows the colored lights came, shifting here and there. Outside the +terrible column of water was roaring as if anxious to devour them. + +"Good-bye, Mermaid!" said the professor softly. + +Then he closed down the manhole cover and tightened the screws that +held it in place. He touched a button that turned on the electric +lights and the interior of the cylinder was illuminated with a soft +glow. + +"Are you all ready?" he asked. + +"Jest as much as I ever will be," replied Washington, who, as the +crisis approached, seemed more light-hearted than any of the others. + +"Then here we go!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. + +His fingers touched the button that connected with the electric +machine, which operated the compressed air. + +There sounded a muffled report. Then it seemed to those in the +cylinder that the end of the world had come. They shot upward and +outward, through the top of the conning tower which had been removed. +The cylinder, launched straight at the column of water struck it +squarely and, an instant later was caught in the grasp of the giant +force and hurled toward the upper world. + +Up and up and up the mass of metal with its human freight went. Now it +was spinning like a top, again it shot toward the earth's crust like +an arrow from the archer's bow. + +It was moving with the velocity of a meteor, yet because of being +surrounded with water, and traveling with the same velocity as the +column, there was no friction. Had there been, the heat generated +would have melted the case in an instant. + +For the first few seconds those in the cylinder were dazed by the +sudden rush. Then as it became greater and greater there came a +curious dull feeling, and, one after another lost consciousness. The +terror of the water column, and the frightful speed, had made them +senseless. + _______ + +It seemed like a month later, though, of course, it could have been +only a few hours or a day at most when Jack opened his eyes. He saw +his companions, white and senseless all around him, and at first +thought they were dead. Then he saw Mark looking at him, and +Washington asked: + +"Is any one livin' 'sides me?" + +"I am," replied Jack decidedly. + +Then, one after another they regained their senses. But they were in a +strange daze, for they were being carried along like a shooting star, +only, as they went at the same rate as did the element carrying them, +they did not realize this. + +"I think I'm hungry," said Bill, who had the best appetite of any of +the travelers. + +"You'll find a beef capsule in the little compartment over your head," +spoke the professor. + +Bill was about to reach for it, when they were all startled by a +sudden side motion of the cylinder. Then came a violent shock, and a +sound as of splashing water. Next the cylinder seemed to be falling, +and, a few minutes later to be shooting upward. Following this there +was another splash and the cylinder began to bob about like a cork on +a mill pond. + +"We have reached the sea! We are afloat on the ocean!" cried the +professor. + +Hurriedly he disengaged himself from the straps that held him to his +bunk. He pushed back the lever that opened the manhole. Into the +opening glowed the glorious sunlight, while to the occupants came the +breath of salt air. + +"Hurrah!" cried Jack. "We are safe at last!" + +"Safe at last!" the professor answered, and then they all gave a +cheer. + +For their cylinder, which might now be termed a boat, was floating on +the great Atlantic. The blue sky was overhead and the air of the sea +fanned their cheeks. + +They had shot up from the underground earth, in the column of water, +had been tossed high into the air, had fallen back when the liquid +shaft broke into spray, had descended into the ocean, gone down a +hundred feet or more, and then had shot up like a cork to bob about +the surface. + +For a week they were afloat, and then they were picked up by a passing +vessel, rather weak and very much cramped, but otherwise in good +shape. They said nothing of their adventures, save to explain that +they were experimenting in a new kind of boat. About a month later, +for the ship that had rescued them was a slow sailer, they were back +on the island whence that wonderful voyage was begun. + _______ + +"Well, we solved the mystery of the center of the earth," remarked +Jack, one evening, when they were gathered in the old shack where so +many wonderful adventures had been planned. + +"Yes, we did," said Mr. Henderson. "And no one else is ever likely to +go there." + +"Why?" + +"Because the only way of getting there was destroyed by the +earthquake, and no one could ever force his way down through that +upward-shooting column of water." + +"That's so. Well, we have the diamonds, anyway," spoke Mark. "They +ought to make us rich." + +And the jewels did, for the stones proved to be of great value, even +though the adventurers had saved only a few of the many they found in +the ruined temple. + +But there was money enough so that they all could live in comfort; the +rest of their lives. As the professor was getting quite old, and +incapable of making any more wonderful inventions, he closed up his +workshop and settled down to a quiet life. As for Washington, Andy, +and Bill and Tom, they invested their money received from the sale of +the diamonds in different business ventures, and each one did well. + +"I am going in for a good education," said Jack to Mark. + +"Just what I am going to do," answered his chum. "And after we've got +that----" He paused suggestively. + +"We'll go in for inventing airships, or something like that, eh?" + +"Yes. We've learned a great deal from Mr. Henderson, and in the course +of time we ought to be able to turn out something even more wonderful +than the Electric Monarch, the Porpoise, or the Flying Mermaid." + +"Yes, and when we've invented something better----" + +"We'll take another trip." + +"Right you are!" + +And then the two chums shook hands warmly; and here we will say +good-bye. + + THE END. + + + + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, FIVE THOUSAND MILES UNDERGROUND *** + +This file should be named ftmun10.txt or ftmun10.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, ftmun11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, ftmun10a.txt + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +http://gutenberg.net or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext04 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext04 + +Or /etext03, 02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + diff --git a/old/ftmun10.zip b/old/ftmun10.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f15b125 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/ftmun10.zip diff --git a/old/ftmun10h.htm b/old/ftmun10h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ebbf164 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/ftmun10h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,6150 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<html> +<head> +<title>Five Thousand Miles Underground</title> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1"> +<style type="text/css"> +<!-- +body {margin:10%; text-align:justify} +blockquote {font-size:14pt} +P {font-size:14pt} +--> +</style> +</head> +<body> + + + + +<h1>The Project Gutenberg EBook of Five Thousand Miles Underground, by Roy Rockwood +</h1> +<pre> +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: Five Thousand Miles Underground + +Author: Roy Rockwood + +Release Date: January, 2004 [EBook #4994] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on April 7, 2002] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, FIVE THOUSAND MILES UNDERGROUND *** + + + + +This eBook was produced by Jim Weiler, xooqi.com + + + + +</pre> + +<h1> +Five Thousand Miles Underground</h1> +<h4>Or</h4> +<h2>The Mystery of the Centre of the Earth</h2> +<h2> +by Roy Rockwood, 1908</h2> +<HR> +<h3>CHAPTER I</h3> +<h4>WASHINGTON BACKS OUT</h4> +<P> +"WASHINGTON! I say Washington!" +<P> +Throughout a big shed, filled for the most part with huge pieces of machinery, +echoed the voice of Professor Amos Henderson. He did not look up from a small +engine over which he was bending. +<P> +"Washington! Where are you? Why don't you answer me?" +<P> +From somewhere underneath an immense pile of iron, steel and aluminum came +the voice of a colored man. +<P> +"Yas sir, Perfesser, I'se goin' t' saggasiate my bodily presence in yo' +contiguous proximity an' attend t' yo' immediate conglomerated prescriptions +at th' predistined period. Yas, sir!" +<P> +"Well, Washington, if you had started when you began that long speech you +would have been at least half way here by this time. Hurry up! Never mind +tightning those bolts now. Find the boys. I need them to help me with this +engine. They must be around somewhere." +<P> +"I seen 'em goin' fishin' down by th' brook a little while ago," answered +the negro, crawling out from under what seemed to be a combined airship and +watercraft. "Jack says as how yo' gived him permission t' occupy his +indisputatious period of levity in endeavorin' t' extract from th' liquid +element some specimens of swimmin' creatures." +<P> +"If you mean I said he and Mark could go fishing in the brook, you're right, +Washington," replied the professor with a smile. "But you waste a lot of +time and breath trying to say it. Why, don't you give up using big words?" +<P> +"I reckon I was brought up t' it," replied the colored man grinning from +ear to ear. He did not always use big words but when he did they were generally +the wrong ones. Sometimes, he spoke quite correctly. +<P> +"Well, I suppose you can't help it," resumed Mr. Henderson. "However, never +mind that. Find the boys and send them to me." +<P> +"With th' least appreciatableness amount of postponement," answered the +messenger, and he went out. +<P> +Washington White, who in color was just the opposite to his name, a general +helper and companion to Professor Henderson, found Mark Sampson and Jack +Darrow about a quarter of a mile from the big shed, which was in the center +of a wooded island off the coast of Maine. The lads were seated on the bank +of a small brook, fishing. +<P> +"Perfesser wants yo' immediate," said Washington. +<P> +"But we haven't caught a single fish," objected Mark. +<P> +"Them's the orders from headquarters," replied the colored man. "Yo' both +got t' project yo'selves in th' vicinity of th' machine shop. I reckon th' +new fangled contraption that th' perfesser is goin' t' navigate th' air an' +sail th' angry seas in, am about done. He want's t' try th' engine." +<P> +"Come on then," said Jack. "We probably would not catch any fish, anyhow, +Mark." +<P> +Accompanied by Washington, the youths, each of whom was about eighteen years +old, started toward the big shed. +<P> +While they are on their way opportunity may be taken to tell a little about +them, as well as about Washington and the professor, and the curious craft +on which the scientist was working. +<P> +A few years before this story opens Mr. Henderson had invented a wonderful +electric airship. He had it about completed when, one day, he and the two +boys became unexpectedly acquainted, and, as it developed, friends. +<P> +Mark and Jack were orphans. After having rather a hard time knocking about +the world trying to make a living, they chanced to meet, and resolved to +cast their lots together. They boarded a freight train, and, as told in the +first volume of this series, entitled, "Through the Air to the North Pole; +or the Wonderful Cruise of the Electric Monarch," the cars were wrecked near +where Professor Henderson was building his strange craft. +<P> +The boys were cared for by the scientist, and, after their recovery from +hurts received in the collision, they accepted his invitation to make the +trip through the upper regions in the airship, to search for the north pole. +With them went Andy Sudds, an old hunter, and Tom Smith and Bill Jones, two +farmers, but who were hired as helpers on the voyage. The party had many +adventures on the trip, having battles with savage animals and more savage +Esquimaux, and were tossed about in terrible storms. After making some scientific +observations, which the professor was much interested in, they started back +home. +<P> +Having found he could successfully sail in the air, Mr. Henderson resolved +to try what it might be like under water. +<P> +He moved his machine shop to a lonely spot on the Maine coast, and there, +with the help of the boys, Washington, Andy and two machinists constructed +a submarine boat, called the <I>Porpoise.</I> +<P> +In this the professor resolved to seek the south pole, he having a theory +that it was surrounded by an open sea. After much hard work the <I>Porpoise +</I>was made ready for the voyage. +<P> +What occurred on this great trip is described in the second book of this +series, called "Under the Ocean to the South Pole, or the Strange Cruise +of the Submarine Wonder." In that is told how once more Tom and Bill, with +Andy, the boys and Washington, accompanying Professor Henderson, had many +thrilling experiences. +<P> +They were caught in the grip of the grass of the terrible Sargasso Sea. Monstrous +suckers grasped the boat in their powerful arms, and had to be fought off. +They were caught in a sea of boiling water and imprisoned between big fields +of ice. +<P> +By means of strong diving suits they were able to leave the ship and walk +about on the bottom of the sea. They visited a graveyard of sunken ships, +saw many strange monsters as well as many beautiful fish in the great depths +to which they sunk. Many times they were in dire peril but the resources +of the professor, the bravery and daring of the boys, no less than the help +Washington and Andy Sudds, the hunter, rendered at times, brought them through. +<P> +Those of you who read of their adventures will recall the strange island +which they came upon in the Atlantic Ocean, far from the coast of South America. +<P> +When they first drew near this island they were almost sucked into the depths +of a great whirlpool, caused by water pouring down a big hole that seemed +to lead far into the earth. They reversed their ship just in time. +<P> +But, on going to another side of the island they were able to approach safely, +as at this point the great hole was farther from the shore. Then they landed +and investigated. +<P> +They found the island was almost circular, and the hole was also round, but +not in the center of the land. It was an immense cavity, so wide they could +not see across, and as for the depth they could only guess at it. Looking +down they could only see rolling masses of vapor and clouds caused by the +water which poured down from the ocean with the force of a Niagara. +<P> +Gazing down into the big hole Mark suggested it might lead to the centre +of the earth, which some scientists claim is hollow. The professor admitted +that the cavity looked as though it led to China. +<P> +They had no means of investigating further the mystery of the opening and +returned to their submarine, completing the voyage to the south pole. +<P> +It was now about two years since they had come back from that eventful trip. +One of the first things the professor did, after docking the <I>Porpoise, +</I>was to shut himself up in his study and begin to draw plans. To the questions +of the boys he returned no answer for several days. Then he announced he +was working on a craft which could both sail on top of the water and navigate +the air. +<P> +In time the plans were done, and, in order to keep the work secret, the shop +was moved to an island which the professor owned. +<P> +Parts of the <I>Monarch </I>and the <I>Porpoise </I>were used in constructing +the new craft, so there was no need to get other help than that which the +boys, Washington and Bill and Tom could give, since the two latter accepted +an offer of the professor to remain and work for him. The boys, of course, +would not leave their friend. +<P> +The professor realized that he had a more difficult task in his new venture +than he had set himself on other occasions. For a ship to be light enough +to rise in the air, and, at another time, and with no change, to be strong +enough to navigate the ocean, was indeed something to tax Mr. Henderson's +ingenuity. +<P> +However, in the course of a little over a year the larger part of the work +was done. Inside the big shed was the huge affair which, it was hoped, would +enable its owner to be master of both air and water. +<P> +"Did the professor say anything special?" asked Mark of Washington. +<P> +"Nope. I reckon he were too busy problamatin' the exact altitude projected +in an inverse direction by th' square root of th' new engine when operated +at a million times inside of a few seconds, but he didn't say nothin' t' +me. I were busy underneath th' ship, fixin' bolts when he tole me t' find +yo'. I wouldn't be s'prised if he had th' thing goin' soon." +<P> +"Do you think he'll be generating the new gas to-day?" asked Jack eagerly. +"That's the most troublesome part; to get that gas right." +<P> +"He didn't say nothin' t' me 'bout it," Washington stated, as he walked along +beside the two boys. "He jest seemed anxious like." +<P> +"We'd better hurry," advised Mark. "He may be at an important part in his +experiments and probably needs us. I hope it will work. He has spent many +days on it, and we all have worked hard. It ought to be a success." +<P> +"Perfesser allers makes things work," declared Washington stoutly. +<P> +"That's a good way to feel about it, anyway," observed Mark. "Well, we'll +soon know." +<P> +The three hurried to the shed which they could see as they rounded a turn +of the path through the wood. They noticed an elderly man approaching with +a gun on his shoulder. On one arm he carried a game bag. +<P> +"Guess Andy got something for dinner," remarked Jack. +<P> +"I hopes so, honey," put in Washington. "I'se got a sort of gone feelin' +in my stomach!" +<P> +"Any luck, Andy?" called Mark, when he came within hailing distance. +<P> +"Fine," replied Andy Sudds. "Rabbits and quail. We'll have a good dinner +to-morrow." +<P> +While Andy entered the living part of the big shed to put away his gun and +game, the boys and Washington kept on to the engine room. They found the +professor, with Bill and Tom, busy fitting pipes to the small engine which +was set up at one side of the structure. +<P> +"Come, boys, I need your aid," remarked Mr. Henderson as they entered. "Take +off your coats and pitch in. Tighten up these bolts, Jack. Mark, you mix +up those chemicals the way I taught you, and see that the dynamo is in working +order for Washington to attend to." +<P> +In a little while the shop was a veritable hive of industry, and it resounded +to the sound of hammers, wrenches and machinery. In the background was the +big ship, which seemed like two immense cigars, one above the other, the +lower one the larger. +<P> +"Where was you calalatin' t' take this here ship when it gits done, Perfesser?" +asked Washington, during a lull in the operations. +<P> +"Do you remember that big hole in the island we visited on our trip to the +south pole?" +<P> +"I suah does," answered the colored man. +<P> +"We are going to explore that," went on the scientist. "We are going to make +a voyage to the interior of the earth in our <I>Flying Mermaid."</I> +<P> +"Go down into th' earth!" exclaimed Washington, his eyes big with fright. +<P> +"Certainly; why not?" +<P> +"Not for mine!" cried the colored man, dropping the wrench he was holding. +"No sire I'm not goin' t' project myself int' a grave while I'se alive. Time +enough when I kicks th' bucket. No sir! If yo' an' the boys wants t' risk +yo' se'ves goin' down int' th' interior of th' earth, where th' Bible says +there's fiery furnaces, yo' kin go, but Washington White stays on terra cotta! +That's where he stays; He ain't ready t' be buried, not jest yet!" and the +frightened colored man started to leave the shed. +<h3>CHAPTER II</h3> +<h4>THE FLYING MERMAID</h4> +<P> +"HERE! Stop him!" cried Professor Henderson. "Don't let him get away. We +still need his help to get the ship in shape. He needn't be frightened. We're +not going to start at once." +<P> +Mark and Jack ran after Washington, whose progress was somewhat impeded because +he kept looking back as if he feared the new ship was chasing him. +<P> +"Come on back!" said Mark. "There's no danger, and if there was we're not +going to start to-day." +<P> +"Ain't yo' foolin' me?" asked Washington, pausing and looking doubtfully +at the boys. +<P> +"Of course not," answered Mark. "You know Professor Henderson would not make +you do anything you didn't want to do, Wash. He wishes you to stay and help +him get ready, that's all." +<P> +"Well, Washington," observed the aged scientist. "I didn't think you'd go +back on me." +<P> +"I'd do mos' anything fer yo', Perfesser," said the colored man, "but I got +t' beg off this time," and he looked at the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>as if he +thought the metal sides would open and devour him. +<P> +Then help me get things in shape to generate the gas," the scientist said. +"I want to give the new vapor the first real test in lifting power to-day. +On the success of it depends the future of the ship." +<P> +Seeing there was no immediate danger of being carried to the centre of the +earth, Washington resumed his labors. The professor, the boys, Bill and Tom +were also hurrying matters to enable a test to be made before night. +<P> +As will readily be seen, even by those not familiar with the construction +of airships and submarines, the chief problem was to find some agent strong +enough to lift from the earth a weight heavier than had ever before been +put into an apparatus that was destined to traverse the clouds. For the +<I>Flying Mermaid </I>was not only an airship but an ocean voyager as well. +It had to be made light enough to be lifted far above the earth, yet the +very nature of it, necessitating it being made heavy enough to stand the +buffeting of the waves and the pressure of water, was against its flying +abilities. +<P> +Professor Henderson realized this and knew that the chief concern would be +to discover a gas or vapor with five times the lifting power of hydrogen, +one of the lightest gases known, and one sometimes used to inflate balloons. +<P> +After long study he had been partially successful, but he knew from experiments +made that the gas he had so far been able to manufacture would not answer. +What he wanted was some element that could be mixed with the gas, to neutralize +the attraction of gravitation, or downward pull of the earth. +<P> +While he was seeking this, and experimenting on many lines, the construction +of the air-water ship went on. In general the outward construction was two +cigar shaped hulls, one above the other. Aluminum, being the lightest and +strongest metal that could be used for the purpose, formed the main part +of both bodies. +<P> +The upper hull was one hundred feet long and twenty feet in diameter at the +widest part. It tapered to points at either end. It was attached to the lower +hull by strong braces, at either end, while from the center there extended +a pipe which connected with the lower section. This pipe was intended to +convey the lifting gas to the part which corresponded to the bag of the balloon, +save that it was of metal instead of silk, or rubber as is usual. +<P> +There were two reasons for this. One was that it would not be liable to puncture, +particularly in the proposed underground trip, and the other was that it +did not have to be so large as a cloth bag would have had to be. It was also +a permanent part of the ship, and on a voyage where part of the time the +travelers would be in the air and part on the water, and when the change +from one to the other would have to be made quickly, this was necessary. +It would have taken too long to raise the ship in the air had a cloth bag +been used to contain the gas. +<P> +The lower hull or main part of the craft was one hundred and fifty feet long, +and forty feet through at the largest part, in the centre. +<P> +It was divided into four sections. The forward one contained the sleeping +quarters of Professor Henderson and his crew. There was a small stateroom +for each one. Above was a conning or observation tower, reached by a small +flight of steps. From this tower the ship could be steered, stopped and started, +as could also be done from the engine room, which was in the after part of +the hull. +<P> +As in the <I>Porpoise </I>and <I>Monarch, </I>electricity formed the motive +power and was also used for many other purposes on board. Engines operated +by gas produced the current which heated, lighted and moved the ship, as +well as played a part in producing the wonderful gas. +<P> +The ship moved forward or backward by means of a novel arrangement. This +was by the power of compressed air. From either end of the lower hull there +projected a short pipe working in a ball and socket joint, so it could be +turned in any direction. By means of strong pumps a current of compressed +air could be sent out from either pipe. Thus when floating above the earth +the ship was forced forward by the blast of air rushing from the pipe at +the stern. It was the same principle as that on which a sky rocket is shot +heavenward, save that gases produced by the burning of powder in the pasteboard +rocket form its moving impulse. +<P> +In the case of the <I>Flying Mermaid, </I>it could be made to move backward +by sending the air out of the forward tube. Thus, when in the water, the +compressed air rushing from the pipe struck the fluid and forced the ship +forward or backward as was desired. It floated on the surface, the deck being +about three feet out of water, while the aluminum gas bag was overhead. +<P> +The engine room was a marvel of machine construction. It contained pumps +for air and water, motors, dynamos, gas engines, and a maze of wheels and +levers. Yet everything was very compact and no room was wasted. +<P> +The use of the air method of propulsion did away with the necessity of a +large propellor such as most airships have to use, a propellor which must +of necessity be very light and which is easily broken. +<P> +Next to the engine room was the kitchen. It contained an electric range and +all necessary appliances and utensils for preparing meals. There were lockers +and a large reserve storeroom which when the time came would be well stocked +with food. Forward of the kitchen was the living and dining room. It contained +comfortable seats, folding tables and a small library. Here, also were many +instruments designed to show how the various machines were working. There +were gages, pointers and dials, which told the direction the ship was traveling, +the speed and the distance above the earth or below the surface. Similar +indicators were in the conning tower, which had a powerful search light. +<P> +The ship was lighted throughout by incandescent lamps, and there was even +a small automatic piano worked by the electric current, on which popular +airs could be played. +<P> +If the gas and the gravity neutralizer worked as Professor Henderson hoped +they would, as soon as the ship was completed, all that would be necessary +to start on the voyage would be to fill the aluminum bag and set the air +compressor in motion. +<P> +The gas was made from common air, chemically treated and with a secret material +added which by means of a complicated machine in a measure did away with +the downward pull of the earth. Thus all that was necessary to carry on a +long voyage was a quantity of gasolene to operate the engine which worked +the electric machines, and some of this secret compound. +<P> +The professor and his helpers had been working to good advantage. At last +all was in readiness for the gas test. +<P> +It was proposed to try it on an experimental scale. Some of the fluid was +to be generated and forced into an aluminum cylinder under the same pressure +it would be used in the air ship. To this cylinder were attached weights +in proportion to the weight of the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>with its load of +human freight, engines and equipment. +<P> +"This cylinder is just one one-hundredth the size of the cylinder of the +ship," said the professor. "I am going to fasten to it a hundred pound weight. +If it lifts that our latest contrivance will be a success." +<P> +"You mean if the little cylinder pulls a hundred pounds up the big ship will +take us and the machinery up?" asked Mark. +<P> +"Certainly," answered the professor. "If this cylinder lifts a hundred pounds, +one a hundred times as big (as that of the <I>Mermaid </I>is), will lift +a hundred times as much, or ten thousand pounds. That is five tons, or more +than a ton over what I figure to be the weight of our ship and contents. +The latest war balloon can lift one ton with ease, and if my machine can +not do five times as well I shall be disappointed." +<P> +The last adjustments were made, pipes were run from the gas generator to +the cylinder, and the hundred pound weight was attached. +<P> +"Everybody look out now," said Mr. Henderson. "I am going to start the machine +and let the gas enter the cylinder. It is a very powerful gas and may break +the cylinder. If it does you must all duck." +<P> +The scientist gave a last look at everything. The boys got behind some boards +whence they could see without being in danger. Washington, who had little +fear so long as there was no danger of going under ground, took his place +at the dynamo. Andy Sudds, with Bill and Tom, stationed themselves in safe +places. +<P> +"All ready!" called the professor. +<P> +He pulled a lever toward him, turned a wheel and signalled to Washington +to start the dynamo. There was a sound of buzzing machinery, which was followed +by a hiss as the gas began to enter the cylinder under pressure. Would it +stand the strain? That question was uppermost in every one's mind save the +professor's. He only cared to see the cylinder leave the ground, carrying +the weight with it. That would prove his long labors were crowned with success. +<P> +Faster and faster whirred the dynamo. The gas was being generated from the +air. The secret chemical made a hissing which could be heard for some distance. +The gage registered a heavy pressure. Anxiously the professor watched the +cylinder. +<P> +"There!" he exclaimed at length. "It has all the gas it can hold. Now to +see if it works!" +<P> +He disconnected the pipe leading from the generator. This left the cylinder +free. It seemed to tremble slightly. There appeared to be a movement to the +hundred pound weight which rested on the ground. It was as if it was tugging +to get loose. +<P> +"There it goes! There it goes!" cried Mark, joyfully. +<P> +"Hurrah!" shouted Jack. "There she rises!" +<P> +"It suttinly am projectin' itself skyward!" yelled Washington, coming from +the dynamo. +<P> +Sure enough the cylinder was slowly rising in the air, bearing the weight +with it. It had lifted it clear from the ground and was approaching the roof +of the big shed. +<P> +"It will work! It will work!" exclaimed the professor, strangely excited. +<P> +The next instant the cylinder, carrying the weight, sailed right out of an +open skylight, and began drifting outside the shop, and across the fields. +<P> +"Quick! We must get it back!" cried Mr. Henderson. "If it gets away my secret +may be discovered and I will lose all! We must secure it!" +<P> +But the cylinder was now two hundred feet in the air and being blown to the +east, the weight dangling below it, making it look like a miniature airship. +<P> +"We can never catch that!" cried Mark. +<h3>CHAPTER III</h3> +<h4>WASHINGTON DECIDES</h4> +<P> +"WE must catch that cylinder!" the professor exclaimed. "Some one may find +it when it comes down and analyze the gas. Then he would discover how to +make it. The cylinder must come down!" +<P> +"Don't see how we can proximate ourselves inter th' vicinity of it lessen +we delegate th' imperial functions of orinthological specimens t' some member +of this here party," observed Washington. +<P> +"If you mean we can't catch that there contraption unless we turn into birds +I'll show you that you're mistaken!" cried Andy Sudds. "I guess I have a +trick or two up my sleeve," and the old hunter quickly threw open the breech +of his gun and inserted a couple of cartridges. +<P> +He raised the piece to his shoulder and took quick aim. There was a sliver +of flame, a puff of smoke and a sharp report. The professor and the boys +who were watching the cylinder saw it vibrate up in the air. Then there came +a whistling sound. An instant later the metal body began to descend, and +it and the weight fell to the earth. +<P> +"I'm sorry I had to put a bullet through it, Professor," said old Andy with +a queer smile, "but it was the only way I saw of bringing it down. Hope it +isn't damaged much." +<P> +"It doesn't matter if it is," the scientist answered. "I can make more cylinders, +but I don't want that secret of the gas to become known. Your bullet served +a good turn, Andy, for it let the compressed vapor out just in time." +<P> +"Then we may consider the experiment a success," said Mark, as Washington +went to where the cylinder had fallen, to detach it from the weight and bring +both to the shed. +<P> +"It seems so," Mr. Henderson answered. "True, it was only an experiment. +We have yet to test the ship itself." +<P> +"When can we do that?" asked Jack. +<P> +"I hope by Monday," the scientist answered. +<P> +"Will you try it in the water or air first?" asked Mark. +<P> +"I'm almost certain it will float in the water," the aged inventor said. +"It does not require much work to make a ship which will do that. But the +air proposition is another matter. However, since the cylinder rose, I am +pretty sure the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>will. +<P> +"But we have done enough work to-day. Let's rest and have something to eat. +Then, with Sunday to sit around and talk matters over, we will be ready for +Monday's test." +<P> +Some of the game Andy had killed was soon on the table, for Washington, in +addition to his other accomplishments, was an expert cook. During the evening +the boys and their friends sat in the living room of the big shed and talked +over the events of the day. +<P> +Sunday was spent in discussing what adventures might lie before them should +they be able to descend into the big hole. Washington did not say, much, +but it was easy to see he had no notion of going. He even began to pack his +few belongings in readiness to leave the service of Mr. Henderson, for whom +he had worked a good many years. +<P> +No one remained long abed Monday morning. Even Washington was up early in +spite of the interest he had lost in the professor's voyage. +<P> +"I jest wants t' see yo' start fer that place where they buries live folks," +he said. +<P> +In order to properly test the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>it was necessary to move +the craft from the shed from which place it had never been taken since it's +construction was started. It had been built on big rollers in anticipation +of this need, so that all which was now necessary was to open the doors at +the end, and roll the craft out. +<P> +This was accomplished with no small amount of labor, and it was nearly noon +before the big ship was moved into the open. It was shoved along to a little +clearing in front of the shed, where no trees would interfere with its possible +upward movement. +<P> +Everyone was bustling about. The professor was busiest of all. He went from +one machine to another; from this apparatus to that, testing here, turning +wheels there, adjusting valves and seeing that all was in readiness for the +generating of the powerful gas. +<P> +As the airship was half round on the bottom and as it rested in a sort of +semi-circular cradle; it brought the entrance some distance above the ground. +To make it easier to get in and out while preparations for the trial were +going on, Bill and Tom had made an improvised pair of steps, which were tied +to the side of the ship with ropes. +<P> +Up and down these the professor, the boys and Andy went, taking in tools +and materials, and removing considerable refuse which had accumulated during +the building of the craft. +<P> +Finally all was in readiness for starting the making of the gas. The ship +was not wholly complete and no supplies or provisions for the long voyage +had been taken aboard. The <I>Flying Mermaid </I>was about a ton lighter +than it would be when fully fitted out, but to make up for this the professor +had left in the ship a lot of tools and surplus machinery so that the craft +held as much weight as it would under normal conditions. If the gas lifted +it now it would at any other time. +<P> +"Start the generator," said Mr. Henderson, to Mark. "We'll soon see whether +we are going to succeed or fail." +<P> +The boy turned a number of levers and wheels. The machine which made the +powerful vapor was soon in operation. The professor had already added enough +of the secret compound to the tank containing the other ingredients, and +the big pump was sucking in air to be transformed into the lifting gas. +<P> +The boys and the professor were in the engine room. Andy Sudds, with Bill +and Tom, had taken their places in the living room, to more evenly balance +the ship, since the things in it were not yet all in their proper places. +As for Washington he was busy running from the shed to the ship with various +tools and bits of machinery the professor desired. +<P> +The gas was being generated rapidly. Throughout the ship there resounded +a hissing noise that told it was being forced through the pipe into the aluminum +shell above the ship proper. +<P> +"I wonder how soon it will begin to lift us," said Mark. +<P> +"It will take about half an hour," replied Mr. Henderson. "You see we have +first to fill the holder completely, since there is no gas in it. After this +we will keep some on hand, so that it will only need the addition of a small +quantity to enable the ship to rise." +<P> +He was busy watching the pointer on a dial which indicated the pressure of +the gas, and the lifting force. The boys were kept busy making adjustments +to the machinery and oiling bearings. +<P> +Suddenly, throughout the length of the craft there was felt a curious trembling. +It was as though the screw of a powerful steamer was revolving in the water. +<P> +"What is it?" asked Jack. +<P> +"I hope it is the lifting power of the gas making itself felt," the professor +answered. "Perhaps the <I>Flying Mermaid is </I>getting ready to try her +wings." +<P> +The trembling became more pronounced. The gas was being generated faster +than ever. The whole ship was trembling. Tom and Bill came from the room, +where they were stationed, to inquire the meaning, but were reassured by +the professor. +<P> +"Don't be alarmed if you find yourselves up in the air pretty soon," he remarked +with a smile. "Remember the <I>Electric Monarch, </I>and the flights she +took. We may not go as high as we did in her, but it will answer the same +purpose." +<P> +The gas was hissing through the big tube as it rushed into the overhead holder. +The gage indicated a heavy pressure. The ship began to tremble more violently +and to sway slightly from side to side. +<P> +"I think we shall rise presently," said Mr. Henderson. His voice showed the +pride he felt at the seeming success with which his invention was about to +meet. +<P> +Suddenly, with a little jerk, as though some one with a giant hand had plucked +the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>from the earth, the ship gave a little bound into +the air, and was floating free. +<P> +"Here we go!" cried Mr. Henderson. "The ship is a success. Now we're off +for the hole in the earth!" +<P> +The <I>Flying Mermaid </I>was indeed rising in the air. True it did not go +up so swiftly as had the <I>Monarch, </I>but then it was a much heavier and +stronger vessel, and flying was only one of its accomplishments. +<P> +"It's a success! It's a success!" shouted Mark, capering about in his excitement. +<P> +"Now we'll see what the centre of the earth looks like," went on Jack. "I +can hardly wait for the time to come when we are to start on the voyage." +<P> +At that instant, when the ship was but a few feet from the ground, but slowly +rising, the boys and the professor heard a shouting below them. +<P> +"What's that?" asked the scientist. "Is any one hurt?" +<P> +Mark ran to a small window, something like a port hole in an ocean steamer, +and looked out. +<P> +"Quick!" he shouted. "Stop the ship! Washington will be killed!" +<P> +In fact from the agonized yells which proceeded from somewhere under the +craft it seemed that the accident was in process of happening. +<P> +"Save me! Save me!" cried the colored man. "I'm goin' to fall! Catch me, +some one!" +<P> +"What is it?" asked the professor, making ready to shut off the power and +let the ship settle back to earth, from which it had moved about fifty feet. +<P> +"It's Washington," explained Mark. "He evidently tried to walk up the steps +just as the boat mounted skyward. He rolled down and managed to grab the +end of the rope which was left over after the steps were tied. Now he's swinging +down there." +<P> +"Are you going to lower the ship?" asked Jack. +<P> +"Of course!" exclaimed the professor. "I only hope he hangs on until his +feet touch the earth." +<P> +"Keep a tight hold!" shouted Mark, from out of the small window. +<P> +"That's th' truest thing yo' ever said!" exclaimed Washington. "You bet I'm +goin' to hold on, and I'm comin' up too," which he proceeded to do, hand +over hand, like a sailor. +<P> +The boys and the professor watched the colored man's upward progress. The +ship had hardly begun to settle as, in the excitement, not enough gas had +been let out. Closer and closer came Washington, until he was able to grasp +the edge of the opening, to which the steps were fastened. +<P> +"I thought you weren't coming with us," observed the professor, when he saw +that his helper was safe. +<P> +"I changed my mind," said the colored man. "It's jest luck. Seems like th' +ship done wanted me t' go 'long, an' I'm goin'. I'll take my chances on bein' +buried alive. I ain't never seen th' centre of th' earth, an' I want's to +'fore I die. I'm goin' 'long, Perfessor!" +<h3>CHAPTER IV</h3> +<h4>WHAT DID MARK SEE?</h4> +<P> +"WELL, I'm glad you've decided at last," the professor remarked. "Now come +inside and we'll see how the ship works." +<P> +Once over his fright, Washington made himself at home on the craft he had +helped build. He went from one room to another and observed the engine. +<P> +"She certainly am workin'" he observed with pride. "Are we still goin' up, +Perfessor?" +<P> +"Still mounting," replied Mr. Henderson, "We are now three hundred feet above +the earth," he added as he glanced at a registering gage. +<P> +The great air pump was set going and soon from the after tube, a big stream +of the compressed vapor rushed. It acted on the ship instantly and sent the +craft ahead at a rapid rate. By elevating or depressing the tube the craft +could be sent obliquely up or down. Then, by forcing the air from the forward +tube, the <I>Mermaid </I>was reversed and scudded backward. +<P> +But it was more with the ship's ability to rise and descend that Professor +Henderson was concerned, since on that depended their safety. So various +tests were made, in generating the gas and using the negative gravity apparatus. +<P> +All worked to perfection. Obeying the slightest turn of the wheels and levers +the <I>Mermaid </I>rose or fell. She stood still, suspended herself in the +air, or rushed backward and forward. +<P> +Of course the machinery was new and did not operate as smoothly as it would +later, but the professor and his friends were very well satisfied. +<P> +"Now we'll try something new," said the scientist to the two boys as they +stood beside him in the tower. "I only hope this part succeeds, and we shall +soon be off on our voyage." +<P> +He turned several levers. There was a hissing sound as the gas rushed from +the container, and the ship began to settle down. +<P> +"What's th' matter? Are we goin' t' hit th' earth?" yelled Washington, rushing +from the engine room. +<P> +"Keep quiet," ordered the professor. "We are only going down, that's all." +<P> +"But good land! Perfesser!" exclaimed the colored man. "The ocean's right +under us! You forgot you sailed sway from the island! We'll be drowned suah!" +<P> +"Leave it to me," said Mr. Henderson. "The <I>Flying Mermaid </I>is going +to take a bath!" +<P> +"As long as it swims it will be all right," observed Mark in a low tone to +Jack. "I'm glad I can take care of myself in the water." +<P> +Before Jack could reply the <I>Mermaid </I>seemed to take a sudden dive through +the air. The next instant she struck the water with a splash that sent the +waves rolling all about. The craft rocked violently to and fro on the surface +of the sea. For a while there were anxious hearts aboard, for there was no +certainty but that the ship might not sink to the bottom. +<P> +But the old professor had not calculated and builded in vain. After rocking +about like a vessel newly launched, the strange craft rode safely and upright +on the water. It set down far enough to bring the propelling tubes well under, +but not so far but that the conning tower was well out and there was a small +deck available. +<P> +"Now to see if we can conquer the water as we did the air!" cried the professor. +"Mark, start the air pump. Jack, you steer, for I want to watch the machinery +under the additional strain." +<P> +From the rear tube rushed such a volume of air that the ocean near it bubbled +and foamed. The ship trembled from stem to stern, and then, after hanging +for an instant as if undecided what to do, it began to move forward as easily +as though it had never sailed any other element than the sea. +<P> +"She fits her name!" the professor cried. "She is indeed the <I>Flying Mermaid, +</I>for she sails the ocean as easily as she navigates in the clouds!" +<P> +For a mile or two the craft was sent ahead over the waves. Then it was reversed +and run backwards. Satisfied that his long months of work had not gone for +naught, the professor after trying several experiments, decided to try and +raise the ship while in motion. +<P> +With Jack and Mark to look after the air pumps, while Washington, Tom and +Bill busied themselves in the engine room, Mr. Henderson began to generate +the gas and start the negative gravity apparatus. All the while the craft +was forging ahead. +<P> +There was again the hissing sound that told of the aluminum holder being +filled. For a few minutes there seemed to be no change, the <I>Mermaid +</I>plowing forward. +<P> +Then like a bird rising from the waves, or like a flying fish leaping from +the sea to escape some pursuing monster of the deep, the new ship shot up +diagonally from the surface and winged its way into the upper regions of +the air. +<P> +"Success! Success!" cried the professor. "This proves all I wanted to know. +Now. we are ready for our great trip!" +<P> +Great were the rejoicings in the camp that night. It was like living over +again the days when they were aboard the diving <I>Porpoise </I>or the flying +<I>Monarch. </I>To the recollections were added the anticipations of what +was before them in the trip to the interior of the earth. +<P> +Busy days followed, for there was still much to be done to the <I>Flying +Mermaid. </I>The machinery, which was only partly completed, had to be finished. +Besides this the professor was working on some apparatus, the use of which +he did not disclose to any one. It was stored aboard the ship at the last +minute. +<P> +Plenty of provisions had to be taken aboard, and many supplies needed to +work the <I>Mermaid </I>and insure that it would go to the end of the voyage. +The materials for generating the gas and negative gravity, spare parts, records +for the automatic piano and other things were stored away. +<P> +Some guns and ammunition were taken along as were a few revolvers, since +old Andy had said it was best to prepare for any thing in the shape of enemies +or wild beasts that might be met with in the interior regions. +<P> +It was decided to make the start by sailing along the surface of the sea +for several days, as in the event of any weakness in the machinery being +discovered there would be less danger. If, at the end of four days, no trouble +developed, the professor said he would send the <I>Mermaid </I>into the air +and make the rest of the voyage through the sky. +<P> +The night before the start was to be made the professor, with the boys, +Washington and the other helpers, went about through the various shops and +buildings, locking them up securely. For they could not tell how long they +would be away, and they had to leave behind much valuable material. +<P> +As there were several things that needed attention they divided the work +up. Mark had finished his share and was walking back toward the living cabin +where they were all quartered, when, down at the shore, near where the boat +was moored, he fancied he saw, in the gathering darkness, a moving figure. +<P> +"I wonder who that can be," he thought. "All the others are near the machine +shop, for I just left them there. Perhaps it's some one trying to spy out +how the <I>Mermaid </I>is built." +<P> +Knowing the professor wanted his secret well guarded, Mark walked softly +toward the little dock that served as a place whence the <I>Mermaid </I>could +be easily boarded. As he approached he saw the figure moving. Something struck +the boy as peculiar. +<P> +Though the object had some of the characteristics of a man it did not walk +like a human being, but shuffled along more like a huge ape or monkey. It +seemed bent over, as if it stooped toward the ground. +<P> +"Who are you?" called Mark suddenly. +<P> +For an instant the figure halted and then hurried on faster than before, +with a curious, shuffling walk. It was approaching the ship. +<P> +Somehow it struck Mark as if it was an uncanny being; an inhabitant of some +other world. Then he laughed at his half-fear, and started on a run toward +the dock. +<P> +"If it's some tramp trying to find a place to sleep he'd better not go aboard +the ship, he might do some damage," the boy thought. +<P> +He could hardly see the figure now as it had passed into the shadow cast +by the boat. He was about to summon the professor to make an investigation, +when Washington started going the search light which was placed just over +the door of the living cabin. It was kept there as a sort of beacon light, +as, near the island was a dangerous ledge of rocks. +<P> +Then, in the blinding white glare from the big lantern as Washington accidentally +swung it toward the <I>Mermaid, </I>Mark beheld a strange sight. +<P> +The figure he had been watching stood out in bold relief. Though it was shaped +like a human being it was not like any person the boy had ever seen. It seemed +covered with a skin twice too large for it; a skin, which, in spite of the +clothes that concealed it, hung in folds about the arms and legs, dropping +pendent like from the neck like a big garment, and flapping in the wind. +<P> +For an instant Mark was so startled he cried out, and the professor and the +others ran to see what was the matter. +<P> +"There—by the ship! A horrible creature!" exclaimed Mark. +<P> +Shouting to Washington to keep the light steady in the direction of the dock, +Mr. Henderson ran toward the moored <I>Mermaid. </I>Jack, Andy, Bill and +Tom, with Mark in the rear followed him. +<P> +"Nothing here," said the scientist, after a careful search about. "Are you +sure you saw something, Mark?" +<P> +"Positively," replied the lad with a shudder. He described the vision of +the darkness. +<P> +"I guess it was a big otter, or maybe an enormous turtle," the professor +said. +<h3>CHAPTER V</h3> +<h4>ATTACKED BY A WHALE</h4> +<P> +BUT Mark was certain it was nothing like that, though a careful search failed +to reveal anything or any person near the ship. It was too dark to examine +for footprints, and even Mark, after taking a look all about, felt he might +have been deceived by shadows. Still he was a little nervous, and could hardly +sleep for imagining what the thing he saw could have been. +<P> +The next day every one was so busy that no one, not even Mark, recalled the +little excitement of the night before. Shortly after noon, final preparations +having been made, they all got aboard the <I>Mermaid </I>and started off. +<P> +It was a bright sunshiny day, and the craft, speeding away from the island +where it had been constructed, over the dancing blue waves, must have presented +a strange sight had there been any spectators. For surely no such ship had +ever before sailed those waters. +<P> +However, there was no other vessel in sight, and the island, as far as the +professor and his friends knew, had never been inhabited. +<P> +"We will not try for any great speed," Mr. Henderson remarked as he, with +Mark and Jack, stood in the conning tower managing the <I>Mermaid. </I>"We +don't want to strain any joints at the start or heat any engine bearings. +There will be time enough for speed later." +<P> +"Yes, and we may need it more when we get into the centre of the earth than +we do now," observed Mark. +<P> +"Why so?" asked Jack. +<P> +"No telling what we may run up against underneath the ground," went on Mark. +"We may have to fight strange animals and stranger beings. Besides, the +atmosphere and water there can't be the same as up here; do you think so, +Professor?" +<P> +For a few minutes the scientist was silent. He seemed to be thinking deeply. +<P> +"I will tell you what I believe," he said at length. "I have never spoken +of it before, but now that we are fairly started and may eventually have +a chance to prove my theory, I will say that I think the centre of this earth +on which we live is hollow. Inside of it, forming a core, so to speak, I +believe there is another earth, similar to ours in some respects which revolves +inside this larger sphere." +<P> +They were well out to sea now, as they could observe when they emerged on +the little deck. Above their heads was the aluminum gas holder, which served +as a sort of protection from the sun that was quite warm. The <I>Mermaid +</I>rode with an easy motion, being submerged just enough to make her steady, +yet not deep enough to encounter much resistance from the water. In fact +it could not have been arranged better for speed or comfort. +<P> +"I think we will sail well to the eastward before making our course south," +Mr. Henderson said. "I do not care to meet too many ships, as those aboard +will be very curious and I do not want too much news of this venture to get +out. We will take an unfrequented route and avoid delays by being hailed +by every passing vessel whose captain will wonder what queer craft he had +met with." +<P> +The boys enjoyed the sail, for the weather could not have been better. Even +old Andy, who seldom said much, seemed delighted with the prospect of having +strange adventures. He had his rifle with him, and, indeed, he seldom went +anywhere that he did not carry it. +<P> +"For there's no telling when you may see something you want to shoot or that +ought to be shot," he used to say, "and it's always the man without a gun +who needs it most. So I'm taking no chances." +<P> +They sailed all that afternoon without meeting with a craft of any kind. +Straight to the east they went, and when night began to settle down Washington +got supper. It was decided to run slowly after dark until all hands were +more familiar with the ship. +<P> +Morning found the <I>Mermaid </I>about a hundred miles from the island where +she had been launched. The night had been uneventful, except that Mark told +Jack he heard some strange noise near his bunk several times. He was nearest +the storeroom where spare parts, and the curious cylinder the professor had +brought aboard, were kept. +<P> +"I guess it was rats," said Jack. "They are always in ships." +<P> +"Old wooden ships, yes," admitted Mark. "But I'll bet there's not a rat aboard +the <I>Mermaid."</I> +<P> +"Then you were dreaming," said Jack, as if that settled it. +<P> +Mark did not speak further of the noise, but he did considerable thinking. +However, the next night there was no further disturbance. +<P> +The fourth day out, when everything had passed off well, the engines doing +their best, the professor decided to speed them up a bit, since he was satisfied +they had "found" themselves as mechanics term it. +<P> +"We'll see how fast we can go through the water," said Mr. Henderson, "and +then I think we can safely turn our course south. We are well beyond the +ordinary lines of travel now." +<P> +Having oiled the bearings well, and seen that everything was in place and +properly adjusted, the professor and the boys took their places in the conning +tower, while Washington, Tom and Bill remained in the engine room. Andy stayed +on deck with his gun. +<P> +"I might see a big fish, and we could vary our bill of fare," he said with +a laugh. +<P> +"Here we go!" exclaimed the professor as he shifted the levers and turned +some wheels and valves. "Now we'll see how fast we can travel." +<P> +As he spoke the <I>Mermaid </I>responded to the added impulse of the compressed +air and shot through the water at a terrific speed. The sudden increase in +momentum almost threw the boys from their feet, and they would have fallen +had they not grasped some projecting levers. +<P> +"I guess that will do," Said the scientist. "I think we have speed enough +for almost any emergency. I'll let her run at this rate for a while, and +then we'll slack up." +<P> +Looking ahead, the boys could see the green waters parting in front of the +bow of the <I>Mermaid, </I>as if to make room for her. Two huge waves were +thrown upon either side. +<P> +Suddenly, dead ahead, there loomed up a big black object. +<P> +"Look out you'll hit the rock!" cried Mark to the professor, who was steering. +<P> +With a turn of his wrist Mr. Henderson moved the wheel which controlled the +tube. It was deflected and sent the boat to larboard. +<P> +At that instant from the rock two small fountains of water rose in the air, +falling back in a shower of spray through which the sun gleamed. +<P> +"That's not a rock! It's a big whale!" cried Jack. "And we're going to hit +him!" +<P> +The professor had miscalculated the speed of the craft, or else had not thrown +her far enough to larboard, for, a second later, the <I>Mermaid </I>was almost +upon the big leviathan. +<P> +With a desperate twirling of the steering wheel the professor veered the +craft as far as possible. But all he could do did not suffice, for the craft +hit the whale a glancing blow on the side, and the ship careened as if she +would turn turtle. +<P> +At the same time there rang out from upon deck the sound of a rifle shot. +Old Andy had taken a chance at the enormous creature of the deep. +<P> +"Hurrah!" the bays heard him shout. "I give him one plumb in the eye! A fine +shot! And we hit him besides with the boat. I guess he's a goner!" +<P> +"I'm afraid not," muttered the professor. "That was a bad blow we struck +him, but I think it will only ruffle his temper. We'll have to look sharp +now, boys." +<P> +By this time the ship had rushed past the whale, but the boys, looking through +a window in the rear of the tower could see the huge body. Now the fountains +of water which the whale spouted were tinged with red. +<P> +"He's bleeding!" exclaimed the professor. "I guess Andy hit him in a vital +spot." +<P> +"But not vital enough!" cried Mark. "See! He's coming after us!" +<P> +And so it proved. The whale, angered, and, probably half crazed by the pain +of the bullet and the blow, was coursing after the ship, coming on with the +speed of an express train. Straight at the <I>Mermaid </I>he lunged his huge +bulk. +<P> +"We must escape him!" cried Mr. Henderson. "If he hits us he'll send us to +the bottom!" +<P> +He had made ready to slow up the <I>Mermaid </I>to see if it had sustained +any damage from the impact with the whale, but when he saw the monster coming +after the boat he knew the only safety lay in flight. +<P> +"Let us go up into the air and so escape him!" cried Jack, with sudden +inspiration. +<P> +For an instant neither Mark nor the professor grasped what Jack meant. Then, +with an exclamation, the professor pulled forward the lever that generated +the gas and set working the gravity neutralizer, which would enable the ship +to rise. +<P> +Faster through the water went the <I>Mermaid, </I>and faster after her came +the whale. Above the hum of the engines was heard the hiss of the powerful +gas. The ship trembled more violently. +<P> +"We are rising!" exclaimed the professor, as he looked at a gage. +<P> +The boys could feel the craft lifting from the waves which clung to her as +if they hated to lose her. The boys knew the gas was beginning to operate. +<P> +"If it is not too late!" whispered Mark, half to himself. +<P> +For the monster of the seas was coming on, lashing the water to foam with +his terrible flukes, and sending aloft a bloody spray. His speed was awful. +<P> +Now he was but ten feet away from the fleeing craft—now but eight—now five! +Ten seconds more and the big head, like the blunt stern of a battle ship, +forced forward by the tons of blubber, flesh, bone and fat behind it would +strike the <I>Mermaid </I>and crush it like an egg shell. +<P> +Now if ever was the need for the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>to prove herself worthy +of the name. Now, if ever, was the time for her to leave the watery element +and take to the lighter one. +<P> +And she did. With a last tremble, as if to free herself from the hold of +the waves, the gallant craft soared up into the air, leaving the water, which +dripped from her keel like a fountain's spray, and shooting aloft like a +bird, escaped her terrible enemy which passed under her, so close that the +lower part of the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>scraped the whale's back. +<P> +"Saved!" exclaimed the professor. +<h3>CHAPTER VI</h3> +<h4>THE CYCLONE</h4> +<P> +IT was only in the nick of time, for a second later and the big mammal of +the ocean would have struck the ship and split it from stem to stern. +<P> +Higher and higher into the air mounted the <I>Flying Mermaid, </I>while in +the water below, the whale, incensed by missing his prey, was lashing the +waves to foam. +<P> +"Well, that was a narrow squeak; as close as I ever care to come to it!" +exclaimed Andy as he let go of the steel rail to which he was clinging and +entered the conning tower. "I had no idea of hitting the big fish." +<P> +"I guess he would have taken after us whether you had fired at him or not," +said Mr. Henderson. "He was probably looking for trouble, and took the first +thing that came in his way, which happened to be us. Some whales are like +that, so I have read; big bull creatures, exiled from the school to which +they once belonged, they get like mad creatures and know neither friend nor +foe. Something like rogue elephants, I imagine." +<P> +Now, having thus unexpectedly risen into the air, the professor decided to +continue travel in that style for a while at least. It would require less +force to propel the ship, and the going would be more comfortable, since +in the upper regions the <I>Mermaid </I>rode on an even keel, while in the +water there was more or less rolling, due to the action of the waves. +<P> +Once recovered from their fright caused by the whale, and having lost sight +of the enormous creature, for they were now far above the ocean, the adventurers +began to think of something to eat. +<P> +Washington lost little time in preparing a meal, and it was eaten with a +relish. The electric cooking stove worked to perfection, for the colored +man had learned how to use that aboard the <I>Porpoise </I>and <I>Monarch, +</I>and could be depended on to turn out appetizing dishes. +<P> +"What do you say to traveling through the air at night?" asked Mr. Henderson, +as he arose from the table. +<P> +"Suits me," replied Mark. "There's less danger than in the water, I think," +<P> +Bill, Tom and Washington arranged to stand the night watch, and, when the +professor had examined the engines and given orders about keeping the ship +on her course through the air, he retired to his bunk. Jack and Mark soon +followed. +<P> +It must have been about midnight when Mark was awakened by a movement that +seemed to come from the storeroom next to where his sleeping place was located. +At first he thought he had been dreaming, but, as he found he was wide awake, +he knew it was no imagination that had affected him. +<P> +"I certainly heard something," he said to himself. "It sounded just as it +did the other night. I wonder if I ought to investigate." +<P> +He thought over the matter carefully as he sat upright in his bunk in the +darkness. True the noise might be a natural one, due to the vibration of +the engine, or to some echo from the machinery. As Mark listened he heard +it again. +<P> +This time he realized it was the slow movement of some heavy body. He felt +a cold shiver run over him and his hair evinced an uncomfortable tendency +to stand upright. But he conquered his feelings and resolved to keep cool +and see if he could discover what had awakened him. +<P> +He got up and moved softly about the little room that contained his bunk. +He could hear better now, and knew it was no echo or vibration that had come +to his ears. +<P> +Once again he heard the strange sound. It was exactly the same as before; +as if some big creature was pulling itself over the floor. +<P> +"Maybe it's a snake; a water snake!" thought Mark. "It may have crawled aboard +when we did not notice it." +<P> +Then he remembered that the ship had not been open in any way that would +enable a serpent to come on it, since it had been started on its ocean trip. +Before that, he was sure no snake had entered the <I>Flying Mermaid. </I>Still +it sounded more like a snake than anything else. +<P> +"I'm going to make a search," decided the boy. +<P> +He took a small portable electric light, run by a storage battery, and, slipping +on a pair of shoes and a bath robe, he left his stateroom. +<P> +He had decided that the noise came from the storage compartment and so made +for that. The door he knew was not locked, since he had seen Mr. Henderson +go in late that afternoon, and the professor had used no key. +<P> +Moving softly, Mark left his room and soon found himself in a corridor, on +either side of which were located the sleeping quarters of the others. He +did not want to awaken them, and, perhaps, be laughed at for his curiosity. +<P> +To get to the storeroom Mark had to go first from the corridor into the dining +room. He soon reached the door that guarded what he thought might be a strange +secret. Trying the knob softly he found it giving under his fingers. +<P> +"I wonder if I had better go in," he thought. "Perhaps, after all, it was +only rats, as Jack said." +<P> +But, even as he listened he again heard the odd sound coming from the room. +This determined him. He would solve the mystery if possible. +<P> +Cautiously he turned the knob. The door was slowly swinging open when Mark +was startled by a noise from behind him. He turned suddenly to see Professor +Henderson confronting him. +<P> +"What is it, Mark? Is the ship on fire? What's the matter? Is any one hurt?" +<P> +"I was just going in this room to——" began Mark. +<P> +"Don't do it! Don't do it!" exclaimed the professor in an excited whisper. +"No one must go in that room. I forgot to tell you and Jack about it. No +one must enter. It contains a secret!" +<P> +"I heard a strange noise and——" Mark began again. +<P> +"It could make no noise! It would be impossible for it to make a noise!" +the professor exclaimed. +<P> +"I heard something," the boy insisted. +<P> +"You were dreaming!" said the professor. "Now go back to bed, Mark, and don't +let this happen again. Remember, no one must enter that room unless I give +permission!" +<P> +Somewhat crestfallen at the outcome of his investigations, but realizing +that the professor could do what he wanted to aboard his own ship, Mark went +back to bed. But he could not sleep. All the rest of the night he was wondering +whether Mr. Henderson had some strange creature hidden aboard the <I>Mermaid. +</I>He feared lest the old scientist's mind might be affected and, in his +wildness he had made some infernal machine that would, in time, blow the +whole ship apart. +<P> +But tired nature asserted itself at last, and, weary with vain imaginings, +Mark fell into a slumber. The next morning he awoke with a start from a dream +that he was being devoured by an immense water snake. +<P> +He said nothing to the others about his night's adventure, for, as it transpired, +no one else had been awakened by his investigations. The professor did not +refer to his conversation with Mark. +<P> +"There's something queer going on aboard the ship this trip," said Mark to +himself. "But I guess it's none of my business. Professor Henderson seems +to know what he is doing and I guess I can trust him." +<P> +He resolved to think no more of the strange noises and movements, and, for +several nights thereafter he was not disturbed by them. +<P> +The weather, which, up to this time had been fair, took a sudden turn for +the worse about the fourth day after Mark's little night expedition. One +evening the sun sank in a mass of dull lead-colored clouds and a sharp wind +sprang up. +<P> +"We're going to have a storm," said Mr. Henderson. "It's liable to be a bad +one, too, from the way the barometer is falling." +<P> +He looked at the glass, and scanned the various instruments that told how +high up the <I>Mermaid </I>was and how fast she was traveling. +<P> +"We're pretty high up in the air," he said, "and scooting along at about +fifty miles an hour. We are going against the wind, too, but fortunately +it is not blowing hard." +<P> +At that moment there sounded from without a peculiar howling sound, as if +a siren whistle was being blown. +<P> +"'Pears like there's goin' t' be a tumultuous demonstration of sub-maxiliary +contortions in th' empherial regions contiguous t' th' upper atmosphere!" +exclaimed Washington, entering from the engine room into the conning tower. +<P> +"What's the trouble?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"Terrible big black cloud chasin' us from behind!" exclaimed the colored +man. +<P> +Noting the alarm in Washington's voice the professor glanced from the rear +window. What he saw caused him to exclaim: +<P> +"It's a cyclone! We must drop down to avoid it!" +<P> +He sprang to a lever controlling the gas and yanked it toward him. There +was a shrill hissing sound, and a second later the <I>Mermaid </I>began to +sink. The boys watching the gages on the wall of the tower, saw that the +craft was falling rapidly. +<P> +But, with a rush and roar, the terrible wind was upon them. It caught the +craft in its fearful grip and heeled it over as a ship careens to the ocean +blast. +<P> +"It's a storm in the upper regions! We'll find it calm below!" cried the +professor above the howling of the gale. He opened the gas outlet wider and +the ship fell more rapidly. +<P> +"Are you sure we're over the ocean?" asked Mark. +<P> +"Positive!" the professor called back. "We have been traveling straight south +over the Atlantic for the last week. We will land in the midst of the waters +and float safely." +<P> +Lower and lower went the <I>Mermaid. </I>The wind was now blowing with the +force of a tornado, and, as the craft had to slant in order to descend, it +felt the power of the gale more than if it had scudded before it. But, by +skilful use of the directing tube, the professor was able to keep the boat +from turning over. As they came further down toward the earth the force of +the wind was felt less and less, until, as they came within two hundred feet +of the water which they saw below them in the gathering dusk, it died out +altogether. +<P> +"Now we are free from it," said the professor as the <I>Mermaid </I>came +down on the waves like an immense swan. +<P> +"Are you going ahead or going to stop here?" asked Mark +<P> +"We'll keep right on," Mr. Henderson answered. "No telling when the storm +may strike down here. We'll go as far as we can to-night." +<h3>CHAPTER VII</h3> +<h4>A QUEER SAIL</h4> +<P> +NOW that the fear and worriment was over they all began to feel hungry, and, +while Mark and Jack took charge of the conning tower Washington got breakfast. +The professor seemed preoccupied during the meal, and several times, when +Mark spoke to him, he did not reply. +<P> +"I wonder if he is worried about something, or is thinking of something which +seems to be concealed in the storeroom," the boy thought. +<P> +But, after a while, the professor seemed to be more like himself. He was +busy over several maps and charts, and then announced the ship would try +air-sailing again for a while. +<P> +"We can make better time above than we can on the water," he said, "and I +am anxious to get to the mysterious island and learn what is in store for +us." +<P> +Perhaps if the professor had been able to look ahead, and see what was soon +going to happen, he would not have been so anxious for it to occur. +<P> +It was shortly after dinner when, the gas container having been filled, the +ship rose in the air, and began sailing over the ocean, about a mile up. +The day was a fine one, and, as they were moving south, it was constantly +growing warmer. Down on the water, in fact, it was quite hot, but in the +air it was just right. +<P> +Like some immense bird the <I>Mermaid </I>went flying through the air. The +boys and the professor sat upon the deck in easy chairs. It was like being +on the top of some tall "sky-scraper" building which, by some strange power, +was being moved forward. Below them the ocean tumbled in long, lazy swells. +<P> +Suddenly Mark, who was looking through a telescope at the expanse of water +stretched out under them, gave a cry. +<P> +"There's a ship! She's on fire!" +<P> +"Where?" asked the professor, stretching out his hand for the glass. +<P> +"Just to the port of the forward tube. See the smoke!" exclaimed Mark. +<P> +Mr. Henderson looked. Through the lens he saw a column of black vapor rising +skyward. Mingled with it were red flames. +<P> +"Lower the <I>Mermaid!" </I>he cried. "We must save those on board if we +can!" +<P> +Mark ran to the conning tower, where Washington was, to give the order. The +colored man, who was looking ahead, intent on guiding the ship, did not at +first hear what Mark called. +<P> +"Lower us! Send the <I>Mermaid </I>down!" Mark cried again. +<P> +The sudden shout, and the excited voice of Mark so startled Washington, that, +fearing some accident had happened, he pulled the lever, controlling the +gas supply, with more force than necessary. +<P> +There was a loud explosion, followed by a crackling sound, a flash of light, +and the <I>Mermaid </I>came to a sudden stop. +<P> +"What's the matter?" cried Mark, feeling that something was wrong. +<P> +"I don't know!" Washington replied, as he dashed toward the engine room. +<P> +The <I>Mermaid, </I>her forward flight checked, hung in the air, suspended, +neither rising or falling. +<P> +"Why don't we go on down?" the professor asked, hurrying to the tower. +<P> +"There has been an explosion—an accident!" exclaimed Mark. "I guess we can't +go down!" +<P> +"But we must!" Mr. Henderson insisted, seizing the lever which should have +produced a downward motion. The handle swung to and fro. It was disconnected +from the apparatus it operated. +<P> +The ship was now stationary in the air, moving neither forward nor backward, +neither rising nor falling. Washington had stopped the air pumps as soon +as he learned something was wrong. +<P> +When Mr. Henderson saw the useless lever, which had controlled the outlet +of gas from the holder, he ran out on deck. One glance told him what had +happened. One of the electric wires had become short-circuited,—that is, +the insulation had worn off and allowed the current to escape. This had produced +a spark, which had exploded the gas which was in the pipe leading from the +generator up into the aluminum holder. Fortunately there was an automatic +cut-off for the supply of vapor, or the whole tank would have gone up. +<P> +As it was, only a small quantity had blown up, but this was enough to break +the machinery at the point where the lever in the conning tower joined the +pipe. If it had not been for the automatic cut-off all the gas in the holder +would have poured out in a great volume, and the ship would have fallen like +a shot. +<P> +"Can we do nothing to save those on the burning vessel?" asked Mark, pointing +to where a cloud of smoke hung over the ocean. +<P> +"I fear not, now," answered the professor. "We are in a bad plight ourselves." +<P> +"Are we in any danger?" asked Jack. +<P> +"Not specially," Mr. Henderson replied. "But we must find a means of lowering +ourselves gradually." +<P> +"Then it will be too late to save any of those on the ship," observed Mark. +<P> +"I'm afraid so," the scientist made reply. +<P> +The <I>Mermaid </I>rested some distance above the surface of the waters. +She moved slightly to and fro with the wind, and rocked gently. The professor +was examining the broken machinery. +<P> +"I have a plan!" suddenly cried Mark. +<P> +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"Can't we bore a hole in the tank, insert a small faucet or tap, and let +the gas out that way gradually?" asked the boy. "When we get down we can +rescue those in danger of fire, and, later, can repair the break." +<P> +"The very thing!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "I never thought of that! Here, +Washington! Bring me a drill, and a small stop-cock!" +<P> +The drill was obtained from the engine room. Working rapidly Mr. Henderson +bored a hole in the lower part of the holder. As soon as the metal was penetrated +the gas, which was under considerable pressure, rushed from the tank with +a hissing sound. At once the <I>Mermaid </I>began to settle rapidly. +<P> +But the professor was prepared for this. He thrust the end of the stop-cock +into the hole. It was screwed fast and the valve turned. This stopped the +flow of gas and checked the descent of the ship. Then, by opening the tap +the vapor was allowed to escape gradually, bringing the <I>Flying Mermaid +</I>gently to the water. +<P> +As the adventurers approached they could see that the vessel was now a mass +of flames. The wind was driving the fire toward the forecastle, and the crew +had sought refuge aft. But this expedient could not last long, for, already +the tongues of fire were licking the sides of the craft and coming nearer +and nearer the seemingly doomed men. The vessel was a large one, and heavily +laden. +<P> +As those in peril caught sight of the <I>Mermaid </I>settling down into the +water, apparently from the clouds, their fears gave place to astonishment. +So great was this that they ceased their cries of terror. Then, as they saw +that the strange craft navigated the ocean, for the engines were started +aboard the <I>Mermaid, </I>they began to call for help. +<h3>CHAPTER VIII</h3> +<h4>THE FLYING MERMAID DISABLED</h4> +<P> +"WE'LL save you!" shouted Mr. Henderson, who was on the deck, while Mark +was steering the craft. "Hold on a few minutes longer and we'll be alongside!" +<P> +"They're real! They're real!" some of those aboard the burning ship could +be heard to shout. Evidently more than one of them had taken the <I>Mermaid +</I>for a delusion of their fear-crazed brain. +<P> +"They are real persons!" they called again and again. "They are coming to +save us!" +<P> +Mr. Henderson ran his ship as near the burning craft as he dared. Then he +called to the crew to leap into the water and swim to him. He, with Washington, +Jack, Bill and Tom, stood ready to haul aboard any who were too weak to help +themselves. +<P> +In a few minutes all of those left alive on the sailing vessel—fourteen +in all—had come safely aboard the <I>Mermaid. </I>The ship was now completely +enveloped in flames. +<P> +"Are there any more left on her?" asked Mr. Henderson of one who appeared +to be a mate of the burning craft. +<P> +"Not a soul!" was the answer. "The captain and ten men perished in the flames. +The fire broke out a week ago in the lower hold. We fought it as well as +we could but it got the best of us. Then it suddenly broke through the decks, +almost like an explosion, a little while ago, and the captain and others +were lost, and so were our small boats. We managed to get aft but were about +to give up when you appeared." +<P> +"What ship is it and where are you from?" +<P> +"The <I>Good Hope, </I>laden with logwood, hides, jute and other materials +from South America," the mate answered. "We were bound for New York." +<P> +"It is more like the <I>Last Hope </I>instead of the <I>Good Hope," +</I>observed Mr. Henderson in a quiet voice, as he saw the flames mount higher +and higher over the ship. A few seconds later the craft seemed rent by an +internal explosion. It appeared to break in two parts, and, amid a shower +of sparks and a cloud of black smoke, the vessel sank under the water and +was seen no more. +<P> +The rescued men turned to behold the final end of their ship. They betrayed +no particular emotion, and some of them even laughed, which the professor +thought, at the time, was rather strange. But there was little opportunity +for speculation. The men were in a sad plight. Few of them had more than +the clothes they stood in, though each one wore about his waist a belt, and +all of them seemed to guard the leather circlets jealously. +<P> +The professor and his crew were soon busy supplying remedies for burns, since +several of the men were seared by the flames. Then, as it was learned they +had eaten nothing for many hours, it having been impossible to use the galley, +a meal was prepared and the survivors of the wreck were well fed. +<P> +The hunger of the newcomers having been appeased, they showed much curiosity +over the strange craft that had so opportunely come to their rescue. Most +of the sailors were ignorant men, and the professor had little fear of them +learning anything concerning his secrets. He explained briefly about the +<I>Mermaid, </I>but said nothing of whither she was bound. +<P> +The addition of fourteen men to the rather small accommodations of the +<I>Mermaid </I>was a serious matter to consider. The ship was able to hold +them all, and even to sail through the air with them, since Mr. Henderson +had provided an excess of power. But it was going to be a problem to feed +so many, and still save enough provisions, for the long voyage which lay +ahead. +<P> +However, Mr. Henderson felt his first duty to be toward his fellowmen, even +if his voyage must be delayed, or given up for a time, while he got more +provisions. There would be no sleeping quarters for the sailors, but when +this was explained to them they cheerfully said they would sleep on deck +if necessary. In fact some of them had to, but as the weather was warm and +clear this was no hardship. A few found quarters in the engine room and other +apartments of the <I>Mermaid.</I> +<P> +Finding, after an examination, that his ship was in good order save for the +broken gas apparatus, Mr. Henderson gave orders to proceed along the surface +of the ocean. The sailors wanted to see how it felt to mount into the air, +but Mr. Henderson, refused to attempt a flight until he had made complete +repairs, and this would take a day or more. +<P> +At this there appeared to be some discontent among the survivors, and they +muttered to each other as they stood in a group on deck. But the professor +and his assistants were too busy with their preparations for fixing the break +to notice this. +<P> +While the men were gathered in a knot near the after part of the small deck, +the mate separated from them, and, coming close to where Mark was standing, +unscrewing some of the broken parts of the pipe said, in a low voice. +<P> +"Tell the captain to watch out." +<P> +"What do you mean?" asked Mark quickly. +<P> +"Hush! Not so loud!" the mate exclaimed. "If the men hear me talking to you, +or see me, they may kill me. Tell the captain to look out; that's all. Be +on guard, and watch the engine room carefully." +<P> +"But why—?" Mark began, when, turning suddenly, the mate left him. It was +well he did so, for, at that instant, one of the sailors, who had observed +the two conversing, strolled in their direction. +<P> +Much alarmed, Mark sought Mr. Henderson and told him what he had heard. +<P> +"I suppose the fire may have turned the poor man's head," the scientist said. +"I wonder if he thinks the men I rescued would mutiny and take possession +of my ship? If they did they would not know how to work it, so what good +would it do?" +<P> +"Hadn't we better look out?" asked Mark. +<P> +"I'm not afraid," replied the professor. "I will be too busy the next few +days, repairing the break, to think of anything else. Besides, what would +they want to harm us for? Didn't we save their lives?" +<P> +Seeing the scientist placed no faith in what the mate had said, Mark went +back to his task. +<P> +It soon became too dark to work, and it was decided, after supper, to halt +the ship until morning as it would be less risky. +<P> +Mark did not sleep well, his dreams being disturbed by visions of pirates +and black flags. But morning came and nothing had developed. The men seemed +to recover their spirits with daybreak, and mast of the crew, after breakfast, +greeted Mr. Henderson pleasantly, and asked to be allowed to help fix the +ship. +<P> +It took the skilled labor of the professor, Washington and the boys to mend +the break, and, even at that, it was four days in the repairing. But at last +the final bolt was in place, and the <I>Mermaid </I>was able to resume her +trips through the air. +<P> +"We will rise the first thing in the morning," said the professor to Mark +and Jack that night. "I am anxious to see how the ship behaves with a big +load aboard." +<h3>CHAPTER IX</h3> +<h4>THE MUTINY</h4> +<P> +MARK was awakened that night by feeling some one trying to turn him over. +At first he thought it was Jack, and sleepily muttered that he wanted to +be let alone. +<P> +"Sorry I can't oblige ye, my hearty!" exclaimed a rough voice in his ear, +"but I got particular orders t' tie you up!" +<P> +At that Mark tried to sit up, but he found he could not. He discovered that +he was closely bound with many turns of a rope, while in front of his bunk +stood one of the rescued sailors. +<P> +"There," said the man, with a final tightening of the ropes. "I guess you're +safe." +<P> +"What's the matter? What does it all mean?" asked Mark, much bewildered. +<P> +"It means that we have possession of the ship," the sailor answered, "and, +if you're wise you'll not make a fuss. It wouldn't do any good, anyhow, as +all your friends are in the same condition." +<P> +Then, picking Mark up, as if he was a baby, the man slung him over his shoulder +and carried him to the living room. There Mark saw Jack, the professor, +Washington, and the others similarly bound. +<P> +"Do you realize what you are doing?" asked the professor angrily of his captors. +"You are mutinying, and are liable to severe punishment." +<P> +"If they ever get us," added one of the men. "We've got the ship now, and +we mean to keep her. You'll have to run her or show us how." +<P> +"Never!" cried the professor. +<P> +"I guess he will when he feels this," said one of the men, as he dragged +from a recess two wires. "I happen to know something of electricity, and +when he feels these perhaps he'll change his mind. I'll start the dynamo." +<P> +The sailor showed that he was acquainted with machinery, for soon the hum +of the electric apparatus was heard. +<P> +"Now to make him tell!" the man with the wires exclaimed, advancing toward +the professor, who turned pale. +<P> +"Stop! You must not torture the old man!" cried a voice, and the mate of +the <I>Good Hope </I>stepped in front of the sailor with the electrified +wires. +<P> +"Who's going to stop me?" asked the man. +<P> +"I will. It's not necessary," the mate went on quickly. "If we make him weak +we may kill him, and he can not tell us what we want to know. One of the +boys can tell us how to run the ship." +<P> +The mate came quickly over to where Mark lay, and whispered: +<P> +"Consent to tell. It is the only way of saving his life. Tell 'em how to +raise the craft. Then leave all to me. I will save you all and the ship, +too, if I can. But consent." +<P> +Mark nodded his head, and the mate cried: +<P> +"I knew I could fetch 'em. I have hypnotic power. This boy will raise the +ship for us. Loosen his bonds, some of you." +<P> +Satisfied that they were now on the way to experiencing a new sensation, +the sailors took the ropes off Mark's arms and legs, and he was allowed to +rise. With a reassuring nod toward the professor he led the way to the engine +room, followed by half the men. He resolved to start the gas machine slowly, +so as to make the upward trip last longer, thinking before it had gone far, +some way of escape from the mutineers might be found. +<P> +While a crowd of the sailors stood near him, Mark operated the machinery +in the engine room that started the gas generating, and set the negative +gravity apparatus working. +<P> +"You'd better not try any tricks on us," said one of the men in an ugly tone +of voice. +<P> +"I'm not going to," replied Mark. "If you go out on deck you will soon see +the ship leaving the water and mounting into the air." +<P> +"Some of you go," ordered a man with a big bushy red beard. "See if the ship +rises. When she begins to go up sing out. I'm going to stay here and see +how the young cub does it so I can work it myself." +<P> +Obeying the red-bearded man, who seemed to be a leader, several of the sailors +went out on the deck. It was quite dark, but there was a phosphorous glow +to the water which made the rolling waves visible. +<P> +The gas was being generated, as could be told by the hissing sound. Mark +watched the machinery anxiously, for he knew much depended on him, and the +professor was not at hand to guide and instruct him. He watched the dial +of the gage which registered the gas pressure and saw it slowly moving. In +a little while it would be at the point at which the ship ought to rise. +<P> +Presently a quiver seemed to run through the <I>Mermaid. </I>Now a shout +came from the watchers on deck. +<P> +"She's going up!" +<P> +The ship was indeed rising. The red-bearded man, who was addressed as Tony, +ran from the engine room to the deck. He saw that the ship was now ten feet +above the water. Back he came to where Mark stood by the gas machine. +<P> +"Lucky for you that you didn't fool us, lad," he said with a leer. "See that +you mind me hereafter. Now show me how the shebang works." +<P> +When the ship had risen as far as Tony desired he made Mark send it straight +ahead. The boy adjusted the air tube to carry the craft toward the south, +but Tony, seeing by a compass in which direction they were headed, ordered +Mark to steer due east. +<P> +"Fix things so they will stay so, too," added Tony. "I don't want to stop +until I get a thousand miles away. Then we'll come down, sail to some sunny +island, and enjoy life." +<P> +Mark locked the steering apparatus so as to keep the <I>Mermaid </I>headed +due east. +<P> +"Now you can go back to your friends," Tony said. "When I want you I'll send +for you." +<P> +With a heavy heart Mark rejoined the professor and others. He found them +with their bonds removed. But to guard against their escape several men were +on watch outside the door. +<P> +"What are they doing?" asked the professor eagerly as Mark entered, and the +boy told him what had taken place. +<P> +"They will ruin my ship and spoil the whole trip," cried the old scientist. +"Oh, why did I ever go to the rescue of the scoundrels?" +<P> +"Never mind," said Jack. "Perhaps we may yet outwit them." +<P> +Morning came at last. The ship was still shooting forward at fast speed, +in an easterly direction. The sailors had learned, in their short stay aboard, +where the food and stores were kept, and they lost little time in getting +breakfast. They sent same in to their captives, including a big pot of hot +coffee, and, after partaking of this the professor and his friends felt better. +<P> +The mate of the <I>Good Hope </I>came in to help clear away the dishes. As +he passed Mark he slipped into the boy's hand a note. +<P> +"Don't read it until you are alone," he said in a low voice, as he hurried +from the room. +<P> +As soon as the other sailors had left, Mark glanced at the slip of paper. +It bore these words: + +<BLOCKQUOTE> + "Open when you hear three raps, then two, then three, and keep silent." +</BLOCKQUOTE> +<P> +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +Mark showed him the paper. +<P> +"I wonder what it means," the boy said. +<P> +"Do you think he is a friend of ours?" the professor asked. +<P> +Mark told him of the mate's conversation the night previous. +<P> +"I think we can trust him," the scientist went on. "He must intend to pay +us a visit when the others are asleep. When we hear the knocks as he specifies +we must open the door and let him in." +<P> +All that day the captives were kept in the living room. Once or twice Mark +was sent for to make some adjustment to the machinery, but the apparatus, +for the most part, was automatic, and needed little attention. The professor, +as well as the others, were all impatience for the promised visit of the +mate. Still they felt he would not come until night. +<P> +In fact it was long past midnight before Mark, Jack and the professor, who +were anxiously listening, heard the three raps, then two, then three more. +Mark quickly opened the door, and the mate stepped inside, holding his finger +to his lips as a sign of caution. Old Andy, Washington, Bill and Tom had +fallen asleep. +<P> +"I have only time for a few words," the mate said. "I am closely watched. +Tony mistrusts me. I will save you if I can." +<P> +"Why have they repaid my kindness with such actions?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"Because they are desperate men," replied the mate. "They are nothing more +than pirates. They mutinied on the other ship, killed the captain and those +of the crew who would not join them, and started off to seek their fortunes. +I pretended to join them to save my life, but I have only been watching for +a chance to escape. +<P> +"Because of lax discipline the ship was sent on fire. We tried to put it +out but could not. The rest you know." +<P> +"I heard them plan to capture this airship, but could do nothing to stop +them. Then I resolved to pretend to act with them. They fear pursuit for +their other mutiny, and are anxious to get as far away as possible." +<P> +"Do you think they will abandon the ship in a little while?" asked the professor +hopefully. +<P> +"I'm afraid not," answered the mate. "I think they want to get rid of all +of you, so they can sail about as they please. Tony is a smart man. He could +soon learn to run this ship, he thinks." +<P> +"I doubt it," Mr. Henderson answered. "But how are you going to help us?" +<P> +"I have not fully made up my plans," the mate answered. "However I wanted +you to know I would do my best to save you. Now I must go. Be on the watch +and when I can I will let you know what I have decided on. I will hand Mark +a note when I bring your meals, just as I did to-day. I think——" +<P> +"Hark! What was that?" asked the professor. +<P> +There was a noise outside the door, as if some one was listening. +<P> +"Put out the lights!" whispered the mate, and Jack switched off the electric +incandescents. +<P> +A knock sounded on the door and the voice of Tony called: +<P> +"Mark! Come here! I want you to look at the gas machine. It has stopped working, +and we are falling!" +<h3>CHAPTER X</h3> +<h4>FOOLING THEIR ENEMIES</h4> +<P> +MARK hurried into the corridor, taking care to close the door after him, +so Tony could get no glimpse of the mate who had risked so much to save his +friends. But he need not have been alarmed for the leader of the mutineers +was too excited over the stopping of the gas apparatus to give any heed to +who was in with the captives. +<P> +"Do you think you can fix it?" he asked the boy. +<P> +"I guess so," Mark replied confidently. "If I can't there is no danger, for +we will fall gradually and land in the water." +<P> +"But I don't want to do that," Tony objected. "I want to keep on through +the air." +<P> +Mark did not reply. By this time he was at the gas machine. He soon saw nothing +was the matter save that new material must be placed in the retort where +the vapor was generated. He refilled it, the gas was manufactured once more, +and the ship began to rise. +<P> +"I will know how to do it next time," Tony said with a grin. Mark realized +that every time he showed the leader of the mutineers something about the +ship it was putting the professor and his friends more and more into the +power of the scoundrels. But there was no help for it. +<P> +The ship was still plunging ahead, and kept about a mile above the earth. +As there was no further need of Mark, he was told he could go back to his +friends. When he reached the room where they were held prisoners, he found +the mate had gone away, promising again to do all he could for them. +<P> +The next night, which it seemed would never come, for the day, locked as +the captives were in their room, seemed endless, finally closed in. Mark, +Jack and the professor were anxious to know whether the mate would pay them +another visit. As for Andy, Tom and Bill, while they were interested in the +ship, and wanted to be free from the power of the mutineers, they did not +lose any sleep over it. +<P> +Shortly after midnight, there came again the peculiar knock, and the mate +entered the room. He seemed much excited over something, and, as soon as +the portal was securely closed he said to Professor Henderson: +<P> +"Is there an island any where near here where men could live for a time?" +<P> +"What do you mean?" asked the scientist. "Do you want us to desert the ship +and leave these scoundrels in charge?" +<P> +"Nothing of the sort," replied the mate, who, had said his name was Jack +Rodgers. "But first answer my question. A great deal may depend on it." +<P> +Seeing Rodgers was in earnest, the professor looked over some maps and charts, +and announced that they were within a few hundred miles of a group of islands. +<P> +"When would we reach them?" was Rodgers's next question. +<P> +Mr. Henderson made a few rapid calculations on a piece of paper. +<P> +"At the present rate of sailing," he said, "we should be there about ten +o'clock to-morrow. That is, provided the ship does not slacken speed or increase +it." +<P> +"There is no danger of either of those two things happening," said the mate. +"Tony is too afraid of the machinery to do anything to it. So you may safely +figure that our speed will continue the same." +<P> +"Then I can guarantee, with all reasonable certainty," the professor said, +"that about ten o'clock to-morrow we will be less than a mile from the islands. +They are a group where friendly natives live, and where many tropical fruits +abound. One could scarcely select a better place to be shipwrecked. But I +hope the plans of Tony and his friends do not include landing us there." +<P> +"No, nothing like that," the mate answered. "Quite the contrary. But I had +better be going. I will try and see Mark some time to-morrow. Tony does not +mind when I speak to him." +<P> +With this Rodgers left the captives, as he heard some of the sailors moving +about and did not want to be discovered. The professor and the boys wondered +what the mate's plan might be, but they had to be content to wait and see. +<P> +The night passed without incident. About nine o'clock the next morning the +mate came to the door of the room where the professor and his friends were +prisoners. He made no secret of his approach, but knocked boldly. +<P> +"Tell Mark I want to see him," he said, as the professor answered. "All of +you keep quiet," he added in a whisper. "There may be good news soon." +<P> +Mark slipped from the room. He followed the mate to the upper deck which, +at that time was deserted as all the sailors were in the dining room eating, +which practice they indulged in as often as they could. +<P> +"I have a plan to get rid of these rough men," the mate said to Mark. "It +may work, and, again it may not. At any rate it is worth trying, It all depends +on you with what help I can give you." +<P> +"I'm willing to do my share," Mark said, and for the next ten minutes the +boy and the mate were in earnest conversation. +<P> +It was about thirty-five minutes later when there arose a sudden commotion +in the ship. Mark had returned to his friends and the mate had disappeared. +The confusion seemed to come from the engine room where Tony had posted some +of his men. +<P> +"We're falling down! We'll all be killed!" shouted the men. "The ship is +falling into the sea!" +<P> +"What is the trouble?" asked the professor as he heard the commotion. +<P> +"It is part of the mate's plan," said Mark. "He told me to tell you to do +nothing. If Tony or any of the other men come to you just refer them to me." +<P> +Two minutes later Tony came rushing into the apartment where the captives +were held prisoners. +<P> +"Here! Come quickly, Mark!" he exclaimed. "Something has gone wrong with +the gas machine again, and you must come and fix it before we are all dashed +to pieces!" +<P> +With every appearance of haste Mark rushed from the apartment, following +Tony. The latter led the way to the engine room. +<P> +"Can anything be done?" he asked. +<P> +Mark took a survey of the machinery. +<P> +"It is too late," he said as though much excited. "The ship is falling down +toward the sea with terrific force." +<P> +It needed but a glance at the height gage to show this. The pointer was revolving +rapidly about the face of the dial. +<P> +"Will the ship stand the blow?" asked Tony. +<P> +"Not at the rate it is falling," replied Mark. "She will go all to pieces +when she strikes the water, and she may explode!" +<P> +"What are we to do then?" asked the leader of the mutineers. +<P> +"We must save ourselves!" cried the mate, running in at this juncture. "Let +our prisoners shift for themselves as best they can. Let's all leap into +the sea. There we at least have a chance for our lives. But if we stay on +this ship we will all be drowned like cats in a bag." +<P> +"What do you propose?" asked Tony, his face white with fear. +<P> +"When the ship comes near enough the surface of the water to make it safe +we should all drop overboard!" the mate exclaimed. "We are near some islands, +I understand, and we can thus save our lives by swimming ashore." +<P> +This plan seemed to meet with instant favor, and a little later there was +a rush for the deck, as each one wished to be the first to escape from the +boat they believed to be doomed. +<P> +Lower and lower fell the <I>Mermaid. </I>She was like a wounded bird which +the shot of the hunter has crippled. Down and down she fluttered. +<P> +By this time all the sailors, save the mate were on deck. He and Mark remained +in the engine room. +<P> +"Don't let her get too low," the mate whispered. +<P> +"I'll watch out," Mark replied. "I want to give them a good scare while I'm +at it." +<P> +The ship was now within fifty feet of the water. There was a cry of terror +from the sailors. Some of them leaped over the rail and started to swim ashore, +as the ship was by this time close to a group of islands. +<P> +Suddenly, from the engine room the mate rushed. +<P> +"Jump! Jump for your lives!" he exclaimed. "The ship is about to blow up!" +<h3>CHAPTER XI</h3> +<h4>MYSTERIOUS HAPPENINGS</h4> +<P> +THE voice of the mate echoed through the <I>Mermaid. </I>Those on deck heard +it, as did Tony in the engine room, where he was vainly trying to understand +the complicated machinery. +<P> +An instant later there sounded from beneath the ship a series of splashes. +More sailors were leaping from the deck of the craft to the ocean. The distance +was not great, particularly as they all landed in water. +<P> +"Quick!" cried the mate to a group of sailors that hesitated before taking +the jump. "The ship may blow up any minute now." +<P> +The men needed no second urging. As soon as they struck the water they began +to swim ashore, as it was not far away. One after another they jumped over +the rail. Tony was the last to go. He urged the captives to follow him, but +they all refused. +<P> +A minute later the only one of the pirate crew left on the ship was the mate. +The others were all struggling in the sea. Eventually they all reached shore +in safety. +<P> +The airship was now within about twenty feet of the water. It was still falling +but not so rapidly. +<P> +"Better send her up, now," said the mate to Mark, and the boy turned the +necessary levers to accomplish this. +<P> +Dipping into the water as a sea gull does when searching for food on the +wing, for she had come quite low, the <I>Mermaid </I>mounted once more into +the air, and was soon sailing along over the heads of Tony and his gang. +<P> +"What's it all about?" asked Mr. Henderson, who seemed in a sort of stupor. +"I thought the ship was broken. How, then, can it rise?" +<P> +"It was only a trick of mine," Rodgers said. "The gas machine is not broken. +I had Mark fix it so that only a little vapor would be generated. When the +supply in the holder was not enough, and no more was being made, the ship +had to sink. Mark and I pretended it was worse than it really was just to +scare the scoundrels." +<P> +"And you evidently succeeded," observed Mr. Henderson. "They have all left +us. I am glad you stayed." +<P> +"So am I," said Rodgers. "I was just waiting for a chance to escape from +that crowd. This was the plan I thought of that night. I wanted to see the +men put on some island where they could manage to live, and which was not +too far away." +<P> +The <I>Mermaid </I>was now mounting upward rapidly, as Mark had adjusted +the machinery properly. The craft was well rid of the pirate crew, and was +able to proceed on its way, and enable Mr. Henderson to carry out his plans. +<P> +When the <I>Mermaid </I>had reached a certain height her prow was turned +the other way, and she was sent back racing over the ground she had just +covered. But now the ship was in the hands of friends. Fortunately no great +damage had been done by the sailors, and the professor was soon able to get +things in ship-shape. The engines had not been molested and were working +better than ever. +<P> +"Now to make another attempt to reach the big hole in the earth," the professor +cried. "We will be careful next time, who we rescue from ships at sea." +<P> +The island was soon left behind, becoming a mere speck on the ocean. Those +aboard the <I>Mermaid </I>knew no harm could befall the sailors, as there +were no savage tribes on the little spot of land. Eventually the sailors +were picked up by a passing vessel and taken to their homes. The story of +their first mutiny leaked out and they were properly punished. +<P> +It required several days travel before the airship regained the distance +she had lost because of the plans of the pirates. Also, there were a number +of minor repairs to make, and the professor and his friends were kept busy. +<P> +"How much longer before we come to the big hole?" asked Jack, one day. +<P> +"I think we ought to be near it in about two weeks," the professor replied. +"I only hope we shall not be disappointed, and will be able to explore it." +<P> +"'Tain't goin' t' be no fun t' be decimated an' expurgitated inter a conglomerous +aggregation of elements constituting th' exterior portion of human anatomy," +said Washington in dubious tones. +<P> +"You mean you're afraid of being boiled in the steam from the big hole?" +asked Mark. +<P> +"Jest so," replied the colored man. +<P> +"You don't need to worry about that," put in the professor. "I will not take +the ship down if there is any danger, though of course there will be some +risk." +<P> +The ship, having been fully repaired, was now able to be speeded up, and +was sent scudding along toward her destination. Rodgers proved a valuable +acquisition toward the crew, for he had sailed many years in the waters over +which they were flying, and was able to give the professor many valuable +hints. He had heard vague stories of the island with the big hole, but had +never been near it. He did not make the trip however, as, at his request, +he was put off at an inhabited island one night. +<P> +It was about a week after the sailors were frightened from the ship, that +a curious experience befell Mark. Washington was on duty in the conning tower, +attending to the apparatus as the ship flew through the air, and all the +others had gone to bed. Mark had remained up, later than the others as he +was interested in reading a book on science. +<P> +About ten o'clock he became hungry, and going to the pantry got some bread +and cold meat. He set these on a table, and then, remembering he would need +some water to drink, started after some in the cooler, which was in a little +room near the tower. +<P> +Washington heard the boy as he turned the faucet to draw the liquid, and +spoke to him, as the colored man was rather lonesome at his post. Mark did +not linger more than a minute or two, but when he returned to where he had +left the food he was much surprised. +<P> +There was not a trace of it to be seen. The dishes were on the table, but +every vestige of bread and meat had disappeared. +<P> +"I wonder if a cat or dog has been here," was Mark's first thought. Then +he remembered that no such animals were aboard the <I>Mermaid.</I> +<P> +Something on the floor caught his eye. He stooped and picked it up. It was +a slice of bread, but in such shape that the boy stared at it, puzzled as +to how it could have become so. +<P> +It was flattened out quite thin, but the strangest part of it was that it +bore what seemed to be the marks of thumb and fingers from a very large hand. +So big, in fact, was the print, that Mark's hand scarce covered half of it, +and, where the bread had been squeezed into a putty like mass (for it was +quite fresh) the peculiar markings on the skin of the tips of the fingers +were visible. +<P> +"It looks as if a giant grabbed this slice of bread," Mark observed. "There +are strange happenings aboard this ship. I wish I knew what they meant." +<P> +He looked all around for the food, thinking perhaps a rat had dragged it +off, but there was no trace of it. +<P> +Suddenly the boy thought he heard a sound from the big storeroom. He was +almost sure he heard something moving in there. He started toward the door +when he was stopped by hearing the professor's voice call: +<P> +"Don't open that door, Mark. Have I not told you that place must not be entered?" +<P> +"I thought I heard some one in there," Mark replied. +<P> +"There is nothing in there but some apparatus of mine," Mr. Henderson said. +"I want no one to see it. What is the matter?" +<P> +Mark explained matters to the scientist, who had, as he said later, arisen +on hearing the boy, moving about. +<P> +"Oh, it was a rat that took your stuff," Mr. Henderson said. "I guess there +are some pretty big ones on the ship. Get some more food and go to sleep." +<P> +Mark felt it best to obey, though he was by no means satisfied with the +professor's explanation. He listened intently to see if any more noises came +from the storeroom, but none did, and he went to bed. +<P> +Several times after that Mark tried the experiment of leaving food about. +On each occasion it was taken. +<P> +"It looks as if the ship was haunted," he said. "Of course I know it isn't, +but it's very queer. They must be strange rats that can get food from shelves +when there is only the smooth side of the ship to climb up," for on some +occasions Mark had tried the experiment of putting the food as nearly out +of reach as possible. +<P> +It took several nights to learn all this, and, as he did not want to take +any one into his confidence, he had to work in secret. But, with all his +efforts he learned nothing, save that there was something odd about the ship +that he could not fathom. +<P> +At first he believed the professor had some strange animal concealed in the +storeroom, but he dismissed this idea almost as soon as he thought of it. +For what could the scientist want with an animal when they were going to +the interior of the earth? That some beast had slipped aboard was out of +the question. Mark was much puzzled, but finally, deciding the matter did +not concern him a great deal, gave up trying to solve the mystery, at least +for a time. +<P> +The ship was now in the neighborhood of the equator and the climate had become +much warmer. So hot indeed were some nights that they slept out on deck, +with the <I>Mermaid </I>flying through the air at a moderate pace, for it +was deemed best not to go at any great speed after dark. +<P> +One night the professor, after consulting various charts and maps, and making +calculations which covered several sheets of paper announced: +<P> +"We should sight the mysterious island to-morrow." +<P> +"That's good news!" exclaimed Jack. "I'm anxious to see what's below inside +of that big hole." +<P> +"Everybody git ready for their funerals!" exclaimed Washington in a deep +voice. "I ain't got many——" +<P> +"Cheer up," interrupted Jack, poking Washington in the ribs. The colored +man was very ticklish, and he began to laugh heartily, though, perhaps, he +did not feel like it. +<P> +Suddenly, above the sound of his shouts, there came a crashing, grinding +noise from the engine room. +<h3>CHAPTER XII</h3> +<h4>THE BIG HOLE</h4> +<P> +"SOMETHING has gone wrong!" exclaimed the professor as he jumped up. He reached +the engine room ahead of any one else, and when the two boys got there they +found him busy twisting wheels and shifting levers. +<P> +"Anything serious?" asked Jack. +<P> +"It's the gas machine again," Mr. Henderson replied. "It broke where we fixed +it. However it doesn't matter. I was going to lower the ship anyhow, as I +want to approach the island from the water. We will go down a little sooner +than I counted on." +<P> +The disabling of the gas machine caused the vapor to escape slowly from the +tank, and this made the ship sink gradually. By means of the emergency stop-cock +the descent could be controlled almost as well as though the machinery was +in working order. Half an hour later the <I>Mermaid </I>rested on the water. +<P> +It was a little rough, as there was quite a swell on, and not so pleasant +as floating in the air on an even keel, but they made the best of it. +<P> +On account of the little accident, and not being certain of its extent, it +was deemed best not to send the ship ahead. So they laid to until morning. +<P> +For the better part of two days all those on board the <I>Mermaid </I>had +their hands full mending the break and making other repairs found necessary. +In that time they lay to, floating idly with the currents, or blown by the +wind, for the professor would not start any of the engines or apparatus until +the ship was in good condition. +<P> +In this time Mark had several times recalled the curious happenings in regard +to the disappearing food, and the mystery of the storeroom. But there were +no further manifestations, and no other signs that there might be a strange +visitor aboard. +<P> +"I couldn't have imagined it all," said Mark, "but I guess what did happen +may have been caused by natural means, only I can't discover them." +<P> +It was about two days after this, the ship having sailed scores of miles +on the surface of the water, that Mark, who was in the conning tower exclaimed: +<P> +"That looks like a waterspout ahead of us." +<P> +"That's what it is!" Jack agreed. "What shall we do?" +<P> +"Call the professor!" said Mark. "He'll know." +<P> +When Mr. Henderson came, he looked for a long time at a cloud of black vapor +which hung low in the east. +<P> +"It may be a waterspout," he said. "We'll rise in the air and see if we can +avoid it." +<P> +The ship was sent up into the air. As it rose higher and higher, the professor, +making frequent observations from his conning tower, cried out: +<P> +"That is no waterspout!" +<P> +"What is it?" asked Mark. +<P> +"It is the steam and vapor rising from the big hole in the earth! Boys, we +are almost there!" +<P> +"Are you sure that's it?" asked Mark. +<P> +"Almost positive," Mr. Henderson replied. "You can see how much warmer it +has become of late, as we approached the equator. We are almost due at the +island, and I have no doubt we have reached it." +<P> +As the ship flew forward the mass of dark vapor became more pronounced. Through +the glasses it could be noticed to consist of rolling masses of clouds. What +lay beneath them no one knew. The adventurers were going to try to find out. +<P> +Now that they had arrived at the beginning of the main part of their journey, +the travelers felt their spirits sink a little. It was one thing to plan +to go down into the depths of the earth, but it was quite another to make +the actual attempt. Still, they were not going to give up the project. The +professor had confidence in his ship and believed it could safely make the +trip. Still it was with no little apprehension that Mr. Henderson watched +the nearer approach of the craft to that strange island. +<P> +"Perfesser, are yo' really an' truly goin' t' depress this elongated spheroid +an' its human consignment int' that conglomerous convoluted mass of gaseous +vapor regardless of th' consequences?" asked Washington, as he gazed with +wide opened eyes at the sight before him. +<P> +"If you mean am I going to let the <I>Mermaid </I>go down into that hole +you are perfectly correct," the scientist answered, "though you could have +said it in fewer words, Washington." +<P> +"I—I guess I'll get out an' walk," the colored man made reply. +<P> +"This isn't any trolley car," observed Mark. "Don't lose your nerve, Wash. +Stay with us, and we'll discover a gold or diamond mine, maybe." +<P> +"Is there diamonds down there?" asked the colored man, his fright seeming +to leave him. +<P> +"There are all sorts of things inside the earth," the professor answered. +<P> +"Then I'm goin' along!" Washington declared. "I always did want a diamond +ring, an' I knows a little colored gal that wants one, too. I'm goin' all +right! This suttenly am th' most kloslosterous conjunctivity of combativeness +that I ever sagaciated!" and he began to do a sort of impromptu cake-walk. +<h3>CHAPTER XIII</h3> +<h4>DOWN INTO THE EARTH</h4> +<P> +IT was now noon, but the adventurers did not think of dinner in the excitement +of approaching the mysterious island. The speed of the ship was increased +that they might the more quickly come to it. As they approached they could +see the masses of vapor more plainly, and it appeared that some great commotion +must be going on inside the big hole, since clouds of steam arose. +<P> +"I only hope it doesn't prove too hot for us," observed the professor. "However, +I provided a water jacket for the ship, and we may need it, as well as the +vacuum chambers to keep the heat from us." +<P> +It was about three o'clock when the flying ship reached the edge of the island. +From there it was about a mile to the rim of the big hole, over one side +of which the waters of the ocean poured with a roar that could be heard over +half a mile off. +<P> +"I think we had better halt and see that everything is in good shape before +proceeding," said Mr. Henderson. "Jack, you and Mark make a thorough inspection +of the engine room, and see that all the apparatus is in working order," +<P> +The two boys prepared to do as they were told. Mark, who was walking a little +ahead of Jack, entered the apartment from which the storeroom opened. As +he did so he saw, or thought he saw, the door of the place where the extra +supplies were kept, close. Without saying anything to Jack he hurried forward, +and tried the knob. It would not turn. +<P> +"That's funny," said Mark to himself. "I could almost swear I saw some one +go into that room. Yet I know the professor did not enter, for I just left +him. And none of the others would dare to. I wonder if I will ever solve +the mystery." +<P> +But he had too much to do to allow him to dwell on that matter. Several of +the dynamos needed adjusting and for two hours he and Jack had all they could +do. +<P> +In the meanwhile the professor had gone over the other parts of the ship, +and gotten everything in readiness for the descent. The <I>Mermaid </I>was +lowered to within a few hundred feet of the sea, and, through a hose that +was let down, the compartments, provided for this emergency were filled with +water. These compartments were between the outer and inner hulls of the lower +part of the craft, and were designed to prevent the interior becoming heated +in case the travelers found they had to pass close to fire. There were also +vacuum chambers, and from these the air was exhausted, as of course every +schoolboy knows a vacuum is a non-conductor of either heat or cold. +<P> +"Now I think we are ready," the professor announced at length. +<P> +"Everything's all right in the engine room," announced Jack. +<P> +"Yes, an' everything's all right in th' kitchen," put in Washington. "I've +got a good meal ready as soon as any one wants to eat." +<P> +"It will have to wait a while," Mr. Henderson remarked. "We are going to +start to make the descent before we dine." +<P> +The hose was reeled up, and the ship was sent a few hundred feet higher into +the air, as Mr. Henderson wanted to take a last good observation before he +went down into the hole. +<P> +But having risen some distance above the masses of rolling vapors he found +he was at no advantage, since the strongest telescope he could bring to bear +could not pierce the cloud masses. +<P> +"We'll just have to trust to luck," the scientist said. "I judge we're about +over the centre of the opening. Lower away Mark!" +<P> +The boy, who, under the watchful eye of the professor, was manipulating the +levers and wheels in the conning tower, shifted some handles. The gas was +expelled from the holder, the negative gravity apparatus ceased to work, +and the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>sank lower and lower, toward the mysterious +hole that yawned beneath her. +<P> +The hearts of all beat strangely, if not with fear, at least with apprehension, +for they did not know what they might encounter. Perhaps death in some terrible +form awaited them. But the desire to discover something new and strange had +gripped all of them, and not one would have voted to turn back. +<P> +Even old Andy, who seldom got excited, was in unusual spirits. He took down +his gun and remarked: +<P> +"Maybe I can kill some new kind of animal, and write a book about its habits, +for surely we will see strange beasts in the under-world." +<P> +Lower and lower sank the ship. Now it was amid the first thin masses of vapors, +those that floated highest and were more like a light fog, than anything +else. By means of a window in the bottom of the craft, which window was closed +by a thick piece of plate glass, Professor Henderson could look down and +see what was beneath them. +<P> +"The clouds seem to be getting thicker," he said, as he peered through the +small casement. "If they would only clear away we could see something." +<P> +But instead of doing this the vapors accumulated more thickly about the ship. +It was so dark inside the <I>Mermaid </I>now that the electric lights had +to be switched on. In the room with the floor-window the lights were not +used, as had they shone one could not have seen down below. +<P> +The professor maintained his position. The descent was a perilous one, and +he wanted to be on the watch to check it at once if the <I>Mermaid </I>was +liable to dash upon some pointed rock or fall into some fiery pit. His hand +was on the signal levers. +<P> +Suddenly he looked up and glanced at a gage on the wall. The hand of it was +slowly revolving. +<P> +"We are at the earth's surface," the scientist said. "Now we are below it. +Now we are fairly within the big hole! Boys, we may be on the verge of a +great discovery!" +<P> +An instant later it seemed as if a hot wave had struck the <I>Mermaid, </I>or +as if the craft had been plunged into boiling water. +<P> +"It's going to be hot!" cried the professor. "Lucky I provided the water +jackets!" +<P> +Then the lights in the interior of the ship went out, leaving the whole craft +in darkness. +<P> +"What has happened?" cried Mark. +<h3>CHAPTER XIV</h3> +<h4>MANY MILES BELOW</h4> +<P> +"DON'T be alarmed," spoke the calm voice of the professor. "I have only turned +off the electrics. I want to switch on the search lights, to see if we can +learn anything about our position." +<P> +As he spoke he turned a switch, and, the gloom below the ship, as the boys +could see by glimpses from the floor-window, was pierced by a dazzling glare. +In the bottom of the <I>Mermaid </I>were set a number of powerful electric +arc lights with reflectors, constructed to throw the beams downward. The +professor had built them in for just this emergency, as he thought that at +some time they might want to illuminate what was below the craft. +<P> +Not that it was of much avail on this occasion, for, though the lights were +powerful, they could not pierce the miles of gloom that lay below them. The +beams only served to accentuate the darkness. +<P> +"I guess we'll have to trust to luck," the professor said, after a vain attempt, +by means of powerful glasses, to distinguish something. "There is too much +fog and vapor." +<P> +"What makes it so warm?" asked Mark, removing his coat. +<P> +"Well, you must remember you are approaching the interior of the earth," +the professor answered. "It has been calculated that the heat increases one +degree for every fifty-five feet you descend. We have come down several hundred +feet and of course it is getting warmer." +<P> +"Then if we go down very far it will get so hot we will not be able to stand +it," Jack put in. +<P> +"I do not believe we will suffer any great inconvenience," Mr. Henderson +went on. "I believe that after we pass a certain point it will become cooler. +I think the inner fires of the earth are more or less heated gas in a sort +of inner chamber between two shells. If we can pass the second shell, we +will be all right." +<P> +"But aren't we liable to hit something, going down into the dark this way?" +asked Mark. +<P> +"We will guard ourselves as far as possible," the scientist answered. +<P> +The <I>Mermaid </I>seemed to be going down on a side of the immense shaft +a good way distant from the strange waterfall. When they had first dropped +into the hole the travelers could hear the rush of waters, but now the noise +was not audible. +<P> +"I think the hole must widen out the farther down we go," the professor said. +"We are probably many miles from the fall now." +<P> +"I'm sure I hope so," put in Jack. "It would be no fun to have to take a +shower bath in this place." +<P> +After a meal, the boys and the professor took some more observations, but +with all their efforts nothing could be seen below the ship but a vast black +void, into which they were steadily descending. +<P> +"I wonder when we're going to stop," asked Mark. "It's like playing the game +'Going to Jerusalem,' you keep wondering when the music will cease and you +will have a chance to grab a chair. I only hope we have a chair or something +else to sit on, in case we go to smash." +<P> +"We're not liable to have any accidents with the professor in charge," Jack +answered. "Didn't he bring us safe out of some pretty tight holes when we +went to the north pole in the airship, and again when we found the south +pole in the submarine?" +<P> +"Yes, but this is different," objected Mark. +<P> +"Well, I'm not worrying," Jack went on. "It doesn't do any good, and only +makes you lie awake nights. By the way, I wonder what time it is getting +to be." +<P> +He looked at his watch and found it was close on to eight o'clock in the +evening. So late had dinner been served, and so varied were the happenings +of the last few hours, that time had passed quickly. +<P> +"Why it's almost bed-time," said Jack. "I wonder if we are to go on dropping +into the depths of nowhere all night." +<P> +At that moment the professor entered the room where the boys were. He seemed +quite pleased over something, and was smiling. +<P> +"Everything is going along famously," he said. "I have just tested the air +and find it is rich in oxygen. We shall suffer nothing on that score. The +heat too, seems to have decreased. On the whole, everything favors us." +<P> +"Are we going on down?" asked Mark. +<P> +"As far as we can," Mr. Henderson answered. "Let me see how far we are below +now." +<P> +He went to the gage that indicated the vertical position of the ship. Because +of the changed conditions, the craft now sinking below the surface of the +earth instead of rising above it, as was its wont, some calculations were +necessary. These the scientist made as quickly as he could. +<P> +"We are now ten miles underground!" he exclaimed. "That is doing very well. +My theories are working out. I think we shall land somewhere before long." +<P> +"I hopes so!" exclaimed Washington coming in at this point. "I'm mighty skeered +shootin' down int' this dark hole, and no time-table t' show when we's due +t' arrive." +<P> +"We ought to land in a couple of days more," the professor answered. "Never +mind about worrying Washington, I'll take care of you." +<P> +"I hopes so, Perfesser," the colored man said. "I got a little girl waitin' +for me back in Georgia, an' I'd like t' see her 'fore I git burned up." +<P> +Accompanied by the professor, the boys made a tour of the ship to see that +all the machinery and apparatus were in working order. Owing to the changed +conditions the negative gravity engine had to be worked at faster speed than +usual, since the downward pull of the earth was greater the farther they +descended into the interior and they did not want to fall too swiftly. But +this was easily provided for, since the professor had made the apparatus +capable of standing a great strain. +<P> +The ten miles had become fourteen when the professor, finding that everything +was in good shape, proposed that the boys go to bed. They, did not want to, +though they were sleepy, and they feared to miss some strange sights. +<P> +But when the professor had promised to call them in case anything unusual +developed, they consented to turn in, and Bill and Tom assumed their duties, +which were light enough, now that the ship was merely falling into the immense +shaft. +<P> +When Mark turned into his bunk he could not go to sleep at once. It may have +been the excitement over their new position, or because he had eaten too +hearty a supper, but the fact was he remained awake for some time. +<P> +While thus tossing restlessly on his bed, wondering what ailed him, he thought +he heard a noise in the main apartment out of which the storeroom opened. +He crawled softly from his bed, and looked from his stateroom door. +<P> +In the light of a shaded electric Mark saw the figure of some one glide across +the floor and take refuge in the room, which Professor Henderson always was +so particular about. +<P> +"I wonder what or who that was," reasoned Mark. "There is some mystery in +this. Can the professor have concealed some one on this ship whose presence +he does not want to admit? It certainly looks so." +<P> +Not wanting to awaken the ship's crew, and remembering what Mr. Henderson +had said about any one entering the storeroom, Mark went back to bed, to +fall into an uneasy slumber. +<P> +"Breakfast!" called Washington breaking in on a fine dream Jack was having +about being captain of a company of automobile soldiers. "Last call for +breakfast!" +<P> +"Hello! Is it morning?" asked Jack. +<P> +"Not so's you could notice it," Washington went on. "It's as dark as a stack +of black cats and another one throwed in. But breakfast is ready jest the +same." +<P> +The boys were soon at the table, and learned that nothing of importance had +occurred during the night. The <I>Mermaid </I>had been kept going slowly +down, and about seven o'clock registered more than fifty miles below the +earth's surface. +<P> +Still there was no change in the outward surroundings. It remained as black +as the interior of Egypt when that country was at its darkest. The powerful +electrics could not pierce the gloom. The ship was working well, and the +travelers were very comfortable. +<P> +Down, down, down, went the <I>Mermaid. </I>The temperature, which had risen +to about ninety went back to sixty-nine, and there seemed to be no more danger +from the inner fires. +<P> +They were now a hundred miles under the surface. But still the professor +kept the <I>Mermaid </I>sinking. Every now and again he would take an +observation, but only found the impenetrable darkness surrounded them. +<P> +"We must arrive somewhere, soon," he muttered. +<P> +It was about six o'clock that night that the alarm bell set up a sudden ringing. +The professor who was making some calculations on a piece of paper jumped +to his feet, and so did a number of the others. +<P> +"We are nearing the bottom!" he cried. "The bell has given us warning!" +<h3>CHAPTER XV</h3> +<h4>IN THE STRANGE DRAUGHT</h4> +<P> +THE boys ran to attend to the engines and apparatus to which they had been +assigned in view of this emergency. The professor, Washington, Bill, Tom +and Andy, who had kept to themselves since the descent, came running out +of the small cabin where they usually sat, and wanted to know what it was +all about. +<P> +"We may hit something, in spite of all precautions," Mr. Henderson remarked. +"Slow down the ship." +<P> +The <I>Mermaid </I>was, accordingly checked in her downward flight, by a +liberal use of the gas and the negative gravity machine. +<P> +The bell continued to ring, and the dials pointed to the mark that indicated +the ship was more than one hundred and fifty miles down. +<P> +Mark, who had run to the engine room to check the descent, came back. +<P> +"Why didn't you slow her down?" asked the professor. +<P> +"I did," replied the boy. "The negative gravity and the gas machines are +working at full speed." +<P> +"Then why are we still descending?" asked the scientist. "For a while our +speed was checked, but now we are falling faster than before." +<P> +"I attended to the apparatus," Mark insisted. +<P> +Just then, from without the ship, came a terrible roaring sound, as though +there was a great cyclone in progress. At the same time, those aboard the +craft could feel themselves being pulled downward with terrific force. +<P> +"We are caught in a draught!" Mr. Henderson cried. "We are being sucked down +into the depths of the earth!" +<P> +He ran to the engine room. With the help of the boys he set in motion an +auxiliary gravity machine, designed to exert a most powerful influence against +the downward pull of the earth. As they watched the great wheels spin around, +and heard the hum and whirr of the dynamos, the boys watched the pointer +which indicated how low they were getting. +<P> +And, as they watched, they saw that the needle of the dial kept moving, moving, +moving. +<P> +"Our efforts are useless! We can't stop!" the professor cried. +<P> +Grave indeed was the plight of the adventurers. In their ship they were being +sucked down into unknown regions and all their efforts did not avail to save +them. It was an emergency they could not guard against, and which could not +have been foreseen. +<P> +"What are to do?" asked Mark. +<P> +"We can only wait," Mr. Henderson replied. "The terrible suction may cease, +or it may carry us to some place of safety. Let us hope for the best." +<P> +Seeing there was no further use in running the engines in an effort to check +the downward rush the machines were stopped. Then they waited for whatever +might happen. +<P> +Now that they seemed in imminent peril Washington was as cool as any one. +He went about putting his kitchen in order and getting ready for the next +meal as if they were sailing comfortably along on the surface of the ocean. +As for old Andy he was nervous and frightened, and plainly showed it. With +his gun in readiness he paced back and forth as if on the lookout for strange +beasts or birds. +<P> +Bill and Tom were so alarmed that they were of little use in doing anything, +and they were not disturbed in their staterooms where they went when it became +known that the ship was unmanageable. +<P> +The boys and the professor, while greatly frightened at the unexpected turn +of events, decided there was no use in giving way to foolish alarm. They +realized they could do nothing but await developments. +<P> +At the same time they took every precaution. They piled all the bedding on +the floor of the living room, so that the pillows and mattresses might form +a sort of pad in case the ship was dashed down on the bottom of the big hole. +<P> +"Not that it would save us much," Jack observed with a grim smile, "but somehow +it sort of makes your mind easier." +<P> +All this while the ship was being sucked down at a swift pace. The pointer +of the gage, indicating the depth, kept moving around and soon they were +several hundreds of miles below the surface of the earth. +<P> +The professor tried, by means of several instruments, to discover in which +direction they were headed, and whether they were going straight down or +at an angle. But some strange influence seemed to affect the gages and other +pieces of apparatus, for the pointers and hands would swing in all directions, +at one time indicating that they were going down, and, again, upward. +<P> +"There must be a strong current of electricity here," Mr. Henderson said, +"or else there is, as many suspect, a powerful magnet at the center of the +earth, which we are nearing." +<P> +"What will you do if the ship is pulled apart, or falls and is smashed?" +asked Mark with much anxiety. +<P> +"You take a cheerful view of things," said Jack. +<P> +"Well, it's a good thing to prepare for emergencies," Mark added. +<P> +"If the ship was to be separated by the magnetic pull, or if it fell on sharp +rocks and was split in twain, I am afraid none of us could do anything to +save ourselves," the professor answered. "Still, if we were given a little +warning of the disaster, I have means at hand whereby we might escape with +our lives. But it would be a perilous way of——" +<P> +"I reckon yo' all better come out an' have supper," broke in Washington. +"Leastways we'll call it supper, though I don't rightly know whether it's +night or mornin'. Anyhow I've got a meal ready." +<P> +"I don't suppose any of us feel much like eating," observed Mr. Henderson, +"but there is no telling when we will have the chance again, so, perhaps, +we had better take advantage of it." +<P> +For a while they ate in silence, finding that they had better appetites than +they at first thought. Old Andy in particular did full justice to the food +Washington had prepared. +<P> +"I always found it a good plan to eat as much and as often as you can," the +hunter remarked. "This is a mighty uncertain world." +<P> +"You started to tell us a little while ago, Professor," said Mark, "about +a plan you had for saving out lives if worst came to worst, and there was +a chance to put it into operation. What is it?" +<P> +"I will tell you," the aged inventor said. "It is something about which I +have kept silent, as I did not want to frighten any of you. It was my latest +invention, and I had only perfected it when we started off on this voyage. +Consequently I had no chance to try it. The machine works in theory, but +whether it does in practice is another question. That is why I say there +is a risk. But we may have to take this risk. I have placed aboard this ship +a——" +<P> +The professor was interrupted in what he was about to say by a curious tremor +that made the whole ship shiver as though it had struck some obstruction. +Yet there was no sudden jolt or jar such as would have been occasioned by +that. +<P> +At the same time Washington, who was out in the kitchen, came running into +the dining room, crying: +<P> +"We're droppin' into a ragin' fire, Perfesser!" +<P> +"What do you mean?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"I jest took a look down through th' hole in th' bottom of the ship!" cried +Washington. "It's all flames an' smoke below us!" +<P> +"I wonder if it is the end," the professor muttered in a low voice. +<P> +Followed by the boys, the inventor hastened to the floor-window. The lights +were turned off to enable a better view to be had of what was below them. +<P> +Leaning over the glass protected aperture the boys and the professor saw, +far, far down, a bright light shining. It was as if they were miles above +a whole town of blast furnaces, the stacks of which were belching forth flames +and smoke. The rolling clouds of vapor were illuminated by a peculiar greenish +light, which, at times, turned to red, blue, purple and yellowish hues. +<P> +The effect was weird and beautiful though it was full of terror for the +travelers. It seemed as if they were falling into some terrible pit of fire, +for the reflection of what they feared were flames, could plainly be seen. +<P> +"I wish I'd never come on this terrible voyage!" wailed Washington. "I'd +rather freeze to death than be burned up." +<P> +"Washington, be quiet!" commanded the professor sternly. "This is no time +for foolishness. We must work hard to save our lives, for we are in dire +peril. +<P> +"Mark, you and Washington, with Jack, start the engines. Turn on every bit +of power you can. Fill the gas holder as full as it will hold, and use extra +heavy pressure. I will see if I can not work the negative gravity apparatus +to better advantage than we did before. We must escape if possible!" +<P> +The boys, as was also Washington, were only too glad to have something to +do to take their mind off their troubles. All three were much frightened, +but Mark and Jack tried not to show it. As for Washington he was almost crying. +<P> +Soon the whirr and hum of the machinery in the <I>Mermaid </I>was heard. +The craft, which was rushing in some direction, either downward, ahead or +backwards within the unknown depths, shivered from the speed of the dynamos +and other apparatus. Soon the boys could hear the professor starting the +negative gravity engine, and then began a struggle between the forces of +nature and those of mankind. +<P> +Once more the adventurers anxiously watched the gages and indicators. For +a while the ship seemed to be holding out against the terrible influence +that was sucking her down. She appeared to hesitate. Then, as the downward +force triumphed over the mechanical energy in the craft, she began to settle +again, and soon was descending, if that was the direction, as fast as before. +<P> +"It is of no use," said the professor with a groan. "I must try our last +resort!" +<P> +He started from the engine room where Mark and Jack had gone. As he did so, +he glanced at a thermometer hanging on the wall near the door. +<P> +"Has any one turned on the heat?" he asked. +<P> +"It's shut off," replied Mark, looking at the electric stove. +<P> +"Then what makes it so hot?" asked the scientist. +<P> +He pointed to the little silvery column in the tiny tube of the instrument. +It registered close to one hundred degrees, though a few minutes before it +had been but sixty. And the starting of the machinery could not account for +the rise in temperature, since most of the apparatus was run by electricity +and developed little heat save in the immediate proximity. The thermometer +was fully ten feet away from any machine. +<P> +"It's the fiery furnace that's doing it!" cried Washington. "We're falling +into th' terrible pit an' we're goin' t' be roasted alive!" +<P> +"It certainly is getting warmer," observed Mark, as he took off his coat. +Soon he had to shed his vest, and Jack and the professor followed his example. +The others too, also found all superfluous garments a burden, and, in a little +while they were going about in scanty attire. +<P> +Still the heat increased, until it was almost torture to remain in the engine +room. Nor was it much cooler elsewhere. In vain did the professor set a score +of big electric fans to whirring. He even placed cakes of ice, from the small +ice machine that was carried, in front of the revolving blades, to cool off +the air. But the ice was melted almost as soon as it was taken from the +apparatus. +<P> +"Them flames is gittin' worser!" Washington cried a little later. "We's comin' +nearer!" +<P> +From the bottom window the professor and the boys looked down. True enough +the curious, changing, vari-colored lights seemed brighter. They could almost +see the tongues of flame shooting upward in anticipation of what they were +soon to devour. +<P> +The heat was increasing every minute. The sides of the ship were hot. The +heads of the travelers were getting dizzy. They could hardly talk or move +about. +<P> +"I must save our lives! I must trust to the——" The professor, who was muttering +to himself started toward the storeroom. As in a dream Mark watched him. +He remembered afterward that he had speculated on what might be the outcome +of the mystery the professor threw about the place. "I will have to use it," +he heard the scientist say softly. +<P> +Just as Mr. Henderson was about to open the door there came a fiercer blast +of heat than any that had preceded. At the same instant the conditions in +the <I>Mermaid </I>became so fearful that each of the travelers felt himself +fainting away. +<P> +"Go to—storeroom—get cylinder—get in——" the professor murmured, and then +he fell forward in a faint. +<h3>CHAPTER XVI</h3> +<h4>THE NEW LAND</h4> +<P> +"WHAT is it? Tell us!" exclaimed Jack, almost in his last breath, for, a +few seconds later he too toppled over senseless. Then Washington went down, +while Andy, Bill and Tom succumbed to the terrible heat. +<P> +Mark felt his head swimming. His eyes were almost bulging from their sockets. +He dimly remembered trying to force himself to go to the storeroom and see +what was there. He started toward it with that intention, but fell half way +to it. +<P> +As he did so he saw something which impressed itself on his mind, half +unconscious as he was. +<P> +The door of the storeroom suddenly opened, and from it came a giant shape, +that seemed to expand until it filled the whole of the apartment where the +stricken ones lay. It was like the form of some monster, half human, half +beast. Mark shuddered, and then, closing his eyes, he felt himself sinking +down into some terrible deep and black pit. A second later the whole ship +was jarred as though it had hit something. +<P> +How long he and the others remained unconscious Mark did not know. He was +the first to revive, and his first sensation was one as though he had slept +hard and long, and did not want to get up. He felt very comfortable, although +he was lying flat on the floor, with his head jammed against the side of +a locker. It was so dark that he could not distinguish his hand held close +to his face. +<P> +"I wonder if I'm dead, and if all the others are dead too," he thought to +himself. "What has happened? Let's see, the last I remember was some horrible +shape rushing from the storeroom. I wonder what it could have been? Surely +that was not the secret the professor referred to." +<P> +Mark shuddered as he recalled the monster that seemed to have grown more +terrible as each second passed. Then the boy raised himself up from his prostrate +position. +<P> +"Well, at any rate, some one has turned off the heat," he murmured. "It's +very comfortable in here now. I wish I could strike a light." +<P> +He listened intently, to learn if any of the others were moving about. He +could hear them breathing, but so faintly as to indicate they were insensible. +Mark stretched out his hand and felt that some one was lying close to him, +but who of the adventurers it was he could not determine. +<P> +"If only the dynamo was working we could have light," he said. "But it seems +to have stopped," and, indeed there was a lacking of the familiar purr and +hum of the electrical machine. In fact none of the apparatus in the ship +was working. +<P> +"The storage battery!" exclaimed Mark. "That would give light for a while, +if I can only find the switch in the dark." +<P> +He began crawling about on his hands and knees. It was so intensely black +that he ran into many things and received severe bruises. At last he came +to a doorway, and as he did so his hand came in contact with an easy chair. +It was the only one aboard, and by that he knew he had passed into the sitting +room. He had his general direction now, and knew if he kept straight on he +would come to the engine room. There he was familiar enough with the apparatus +and levers to be able to turn the electric switch. +<P> +Crawling slowly and cautiously, he reached the room where all the engines +were. Then he had to feel around the sides to locate the switch. At length +he found it. There was a click, a little flash of greenish fire, and the +copper conductors came together, and the ship was flooded with the glow from +the incandescents. +<P> +Mark hurried back to where the others were lying. They were still unconscious, +but an uneasy, movement on the part of Jack told that he was coming out of +the stupor. Mark got some ammonia and held it beneath his comrade's nose. +The strong fumes completed the work that nature had started and Jack opened +his eyes. +<P> +"Where am I? What has happened? Are any of them dead?" he asked quickly. +<P> +"I hope no one is dead," Mark replied. "As to the other question, I can't +answer. I don't know whether we are a thousand miles underground, or floating +on the ocean, though I'm more inclined to the former theory. But never mind +that now. Help me to bring the others back to their senses. I'll work on +the professor and you can begin on Bill or Tom. Washington seems to be all +right," for at that moment the colored man opened his eyes, stared about +him and then got up. +<P> +"I thought I was dead for suah!" he exclaimed. +<P> +"Some of the others may be if we don't hurry," said Mark. "Get to work, Wash!" +<P> +With the colored man to help them the two boys, by the use of the ammonia, +succeeded in reviving Bill, Tom and old Andy. But the professor, probably +on account of his advanced age, did not respond so readily to the treatment. +The boys were getting quite alarmed, as even some of the diluted ammonia, +forced between his lips, did not cause him to open his eyes, or increase +his heart action. +<P> +"If he should die, and leave us all alone with the ship in this terrible +place, what would we do?" asked Jack. +<P> +"He's not going to die!" exclaimed Mark. "Here I have another plan. Washington +bring that medical electrical battery from the engine room." This was a small +machine the professor had brought along for experimental purposes. +<P> +Quickly adjusting it, Mark placed the handles in the nerveless fingers of +Mr. Henderson. Then he started the current. In about a minute the eyelids +of the aged inventor began to quiver, and, in less than five minutes he had +been revived sufficiently to enable him to sit up. He passed his hand across +his forehead. +<P> +"What has happened?" he asked in a faint voice. +<P> +"I don't know; none of us knows," Mark answered. "We all lost our senses +when it got so hot, and there seemed to be some peculiar vapor in the air. +The last I remember was seeing some horrible shape rush from the storeroom, +soon after the ship struck. Then I fainted away. When I woke up I managed +to turn the lights on, and then I came back here." +<P> +"I wonder where we are," the old man murmured. "I must find out. We must +take every precaution. Washington, go and look at the gage indicating our +depth." +<P> +The colored man was gone but a few seconds. When he returned his eyes were +bulging in terror. +<P> +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson, who, thanks to the battery, had almost +completely recovered. +<P> +"It ain't possible!" gasped Washington. "I'll never believe it!" +<P> +"What is it?" asked Mr. Henderson, while the others waited in anxiety for +the answer. +<P> +"We're five hundred miles down!" declared Washington. +<P> +"Five hundred miles!" muttered the inventor. "It does not seem possible, +but it must be so. We fell very rapidly and the terrible draught sucked us +down with incredible rapidity. But come, we must see what our situation is, +and where we are. We are stationary, and are evidently on some solid substance." +<P> +They all felt much recovered now, and, as the terrible fright of being consumed +in a fiery furnace had passed, they all were in better spirits. +<P> +At the suggestion of the professor, the boys and Washington made a tour of +the ship. They found, for some unaccountable reason, that nearly all the +engines and apparatuses were out of gear. In some the parts had broken, and +others were merely stopped, from the failure of some other machine, on which +they were dependent. +<P> +"I'm afraid this is the end of the <I>Mermaid," </I>said Mark, in a sorrowful +tone. +<P> +"Nonsense!" replied Jack, who was of a more cheerful nature. "Things are +not so bad as they look. The professor can fix everything." +<P> +"I'm sure I hope so," Mark went on, not much encouraged, however, by Jack's +philosophy. "It would be no joke to have to stay five hundred miles underground +the rest of our lives." +<P> +"You don't know," retorted Jack. "Don't judge of a country you've never seen. +This may be as fine a place as it is on the surface of the earth. I want +a chance to see it," and Jack began to whistle a cheerful tune. +<P> +They completed the tour of the ship, and found, that, aside from the damage +to the machinery, the <I>Mermaid </I>had not sustained any harm. The hull +was in good order, though of course they could not tell about the gas holder. +It was not possible to see this except by going into the conning tower or +out on the small deck, and this they did not venture to do. The connections +between the holder and the main ship seemed to be all right, and there was +still a small quantity of gas in the big tank, as Mark found on opening a +stop-cock. +<P> +They went back to the professor and told him what they had observed. He seemed +somewhat alarmed, the more so as the experience he had just passed through +had weakened him considerably. +<P> +"I hope I shall be able to make the repairs," he said. "It is our only hope." +<P> +As he spoke he looked up at the electric lights that shone overhead from +wall brackets. +<P> +"Who is shutting down the power?" he asked. +<P> +"There is no power on, Professor," replied Mark. "I am running the lights +from the storage battery. But something is the matter, for they are growing +dim." +<P> +The filaments were now mere dull red wires, and the ship was being shrouded +in gloom again. +<P> +"The battery is failing!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "We shall be left in darkness, +and there is no other way to produce light. I ought to have brought some +lamps or candles along in case of emergency," +<P> +The next instant the <I>Mermaid </I>became as black as Egypt is popularly +supposed to be, and something like an exclamation of terror came from the +professor. +<P> +For several minutes they all sat there in the blackness and gloom, waiting +for they knew not what. Then, suddenly, there sounded throughout the ship, +a creaking as of metal sliding along metal. Some big lever creaked, and, +a second later the whole place was flooded with light. +<P> +"What has happened?" cried the professor, starting to his feet in alarm. +<P> +"We are going to be burned up!" exclaimed old Andy. +<P> +"It's all right! It's all right!" yelled Washington from the engine room +where the boys had left him. "Don't git skeered! I done it! I opened the +port holes, by yanking on the lever. Golly, but we's arrived at the new land! +Look out, everybody!" +<h3>CHAPTER XVII</h3> +<h4>A STRANGE COUNTRY</h4> +<P> +THEY all ran to the port holes, which were openings in the side of the ship. +They were fitted with thick, double glass, and covered on the outside with +steel shutters. These shutters were worked by a single lever from the engine +room, so that one person could open or close them in a second or two. Washington, +by accident, it appeared later, had slid back the protecting pieces of steel, +and the rest followed. +<P> +As the adventurers looked from the glass ports they saw that the light which +had flooded the ship came from without. They were in the midst of a beautiful +glow, which seemed to be diffused about them like rays from a sun. +<P> +Only, in place of being a yellow or white light, such as the sun gives off +at varying times, the glow was of violet hue. And, as they watched, they +saw the light change color, becoming a beautiful red, then blue, and again +green. +<P> +"Well, this is certainly remarkable!" the professor said. "I wonder what +causes that." +<P> +"We've arrived! We're here, anyhow!" Washington cried, coming into the room. +"See the country!" +<P> +Then, for the first time, the travelers, taking their attention from the +curious light that was all around them, saw that they had indeed arrived. +They were on a vast plain, one, seemingly, boundless in extent, though off +to the left there was a range of lofty mountains, while to the right there +was the glimmer of what might be a big lake or inland sea. +<P> +"See, we are resting on the ground!" exclaimed Jack. He pointed out of the +window, and the others, looking close at hand, noted that the <I>Mermaid +</I>had settled down in the midst of what seemed to be a field of flowers. +Big red and yellow blossoms were all in front, and some grew so tall as to +almost be up to the edge of the port. +<P> +"I wonder if we can be seeing aright," the professor muttered. "Is this really +the interior of the earth; such a beautiful place as this?" +<P> +There could be little doubt of it. The ship had descended through the big +shaft, had been sucked down by the terrible air current, and had really landed +in a strange country. +<P> +Of its size, shape and general conditions the adventurers, as yet, could +but guess. They could see it was a pleasant place, and one where there might +be the means to sustain life. For, as the professor said afterward, he felt +that where there were flowers there would be fruits, and where both of these +provisions of nature were to be found there would likely be animal life, +and even, perhaps, human beings. +<P> +But, for the time, they were content to look from the port on the beautiful +scene that lay stretched out before them. The ship rested on an even keel +and had landed so softly that none of the plates were strained. +<P> +"We have plenty of air, at all events," said the professor as he took a deep +breath. "I was afraid of that, but it seems there was no need. The air appears +to be as good and fresh as that on the surface of the earth, only there is +a curious property to it. It makes one feel larger. I imagine it must be +thinner than the air of the earth, which is a rather strange thing, since +the higher one goes the more rarefied the air becomes, and the lower, the +more dense. Still we can not apply natural philosophy to conditions under +the earth. All the usual theories may be upset. However, we should be content +to take things as we find them, and be glad we were not dashed to pieces +when the ship was caught in the terrible current." +<P> +"What do you suppose caused the awful heat, and then made it go away again?" +asked Jack. +<P> +"I can only make a guess at it," Mr. Henderson answered. "There are many +strange things we will come across if we stay here long, I believe. As for +the fire I think we must have passed a sort of interior volcano." +<P> +"But what sort of a place do you think we have come to, Professor?" asked +Mark. +<P> +"It is hard to say," the scientist replied. "We are certainly somewhere within +the earth. Our gage tells us it is five hundred miles. That may or may not +be correct, but I believe we are several hundred miles under the crust, at +all events. As to what sort of a place it is, you can see for yourselves." +<P> +"But how is it we can breathe here, and things can grow?" asked Bill, who +was beginning to lose his fright at the thought of being practically buried +alive. +<P> +"I do not know what makes such things possible," Mr. Henderson replied, "but +that there is air here is a certainty. I can hardly believe it is drawn from +the surface of the earth, down the big hole, and I am inclined to think this +place of the under-world has an atmosphere of its own, and one which produces +different effects than does our own." +<P> +"They certainly have larger flowers than we have," said Mark. "See how big +they grow, and what strong colors they have." +<P> +He pointed to the port, against which some of the blooms were nodding in +the wind that had sprung up, for, in spite of the many differences, the +under-world was in some respects like the upper one. +<P> +"Probably the difference in the atmosphere accounts for that," the professor +said. "It enables things to grow larger. And, by the way, Mark, that reminds +me of something you said about seeing some horrible monster fleeing from +the ship. Did you dream that?" +<P> +"I did see something horrible, Professor," he answered. "I'm not positive +what it was, but I'll tell you as nearly as I can what it was like." +<P> +Thereupon Mark detailed what he had seen. +<P> +"But how could anything, least of all some big monster, be concealed in the +storeroom, and we not know anything about it?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"I thought you did know something of it," replied Mark. +<P> +"Who, me? My dear boy, you must be dreaming again. Why should I want to conceal +any being in the storeroom? Come, there is something back of this. Tell me +all you know of it. I can't imagine why you think I was hiding something +in the apartment." +<P> +"I thought so because you were always so anxious not to have me go near it," +answered the boy. "Don't you remember when you saw me going toward it, several +times, you warned me away?" +<P> +"So I did!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson, a light breaking over his face. "But, +Mark, it was not because I had hidden some human being or animal there. I +can't tell you what it is yet, save that I can say it is merely a machine +of mine that I have invented. For reasons of my own I don't want any one +to see it yet. Perhaps it may never be seen. I thought, not long ago, that +we might have to undertake a terrible risk in escaping from this place. I +directed you to go to the storeroom—but there, I can't say any more, my +friends. Sufficient that I had nothing in the animal line concealed there." +<P> +"But I am certain there was some beast or human being in there," insisted +Mark. "I heard curious noises in there. Besides, how do you account for the +food disappearing and the door being open at times?" +<P> +"It might have been rats," said Jack. +<P> +"I don't believe there are rats in the ship," put in the professor. "More +likely it was one of us who got up hungry and took the victuals." +<P> +"I'm sorry I can't agree with you," Mark added respectfully. "I am sure some +strange being was on board this ship, and I believe it has now escaped. Who +or what it was I can't say, but you'll find I'm right, some day." +<P> +"All right," spoke Mr. Henderson with a laugh. "I like to see any one brave +enough to stick up for his opinion, but, at the same time, I can't very well +imagine any person or thing being concealed in that storeroom ever since +we started. How could it get in?" +<P> +Mark did not; answer, but there came to him the recollection of that night, +previous to the sailing of the <I>Flying Mermaid, </I>when he had observed +some strange shadow that seemed to glide aboard the craft. +<P> +"Now let's forget all about such things," the professor went on. "We are +in a strange country, and there are many things to see and do. Let's explore +a little. Then we must see what we can do with the ship. We are dependent +on it, and it will not do to allow it to remain in a damaged state. We expect +to travel many miles in the interior of the earth if it is possible, and +we have only our craft to go in." +<P> +"I reckon we'd all better assimilate into our interior progression some molecules +and atoms of partly disentegrated matter in order to supply combustion for +the carbonaceous elements and assist in the manufacture of red corpuscles," +said Washington, appearing in the door, with a broad grin on his good-natured +face. +<P> +"Which, being interpreted," the professor said, "means, I suppose, that we +had better eat something to keep our digestive apparatus in good working +order?" +<P> +"Yo' done guessed it!" exclaimed the colored man, relapsing into his ordinary +speech. "I'se got a meal all ready." +<P> +They agreed that they might not have another opportunity soon to partake +of food, so they all gathered about the table, on which Washington had spread +a good meal. +<P> +"Come on, let's go outside and view this new and strange land at closer +quarters," the professor said, when they had satisfied their appetites. "We +can't see much from inside the ship." +<P> +Accordingly the heavy door in the side of the <I>Mermaid </I>was slid back, +and, for the first time the travelers stepped out on the surface of the land +in the interior of the earth. +<P> +At first it seemed no different than the ordinary land to which they were +accustomed. But they soon found it had many strange attributes. The queer +shifting and changing light, with the myriad of hues was one of them, but +to this the adventurers had, by this time, become accustomed, though it was, +none the less, a marvel to them. It was odd enough to see the landscape blood +red one instant, and a pale green the next, as it does when you look through +differently colored glasses. +<P> +Then, too, they noticed that the grass and flowers grew much more abundantly +than in the outer part of the world. They saw clover six feet high, and blades +of grass even taller. In some places the growth of grass was so big that +they were in danger of getting lost in it. +<P> +"If the grass is like this, what will the trees be?" asked Mark. +<P> +"There are some away over there," Jack replied. "We'll have to take a sail +over. They must be several hundred feet high." +<P> +"Well, at any rate, here's a little brook, and the water looks good to drink," +went on Mark. "I'm thirsty, so here goes." +<P> +He hurried to where a stream was flowing sluggishly between grassy banks. +The water was as clear as crystal, and Mark got down on his face and prepared +to sip some of the liquid up. +<P> +But, no sooner had his lips touched it, than he sprang up with a cry and +stood gazing at the water. +<P> +"What's the matter?" asked Jack. "Hot?" +<P> +"No, it isn't hot," Mark replied, "but it isn't water. It's white molasses!" +<P> +"White molasses?" repeated the professor, coming up at that moment. "What +are you talking about?" +<P> +He stooped down and dipped his finger into the stream. He drew it up quickly, +and there ran from it big drops that flowed as slowly as the extract of the +sugarcane does in cold weather. +<P> +"You're about right, Mark," he said. "It's water but it's almost as thick +as molasses." He touched his finger to his tongue. "It's good to drink, all +right," he went on, "only it will be a little slow going down." +<P> +Then he dipped up a palm full, and let it trickle down his throat. +<P> +"It is the strangest water I ever saw," he added. "It must be that the lack +of some peculiar property of air, which we have on the surface, has caused +this. I must make some notes on it," and he drew out pencil and paper. He +was about to jot down some facts when he was interrupted by a cry from +Washington. +<P> +"Come and see what's the matter with this stone!" he cried. +<h3>CHAPTER XVIII</h3> +<h4>CAUGHT BY A STRANGE PLANT</h4> +<P> +"WASHINGTON is in trouble!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. Followed by the two +boys he ran to where the colored man stood in a stooping position over a +small pile of stones. +<P> +"What is it? Has something bit you?" asked the scientist, as he came up on +the run. +<P> +"No, but I can't git this stone up!" Washington said. "Look at what a little +stone it is, but I can't lift it. Something must have happened to me. Maybe +some one put th' evil eye on me! Maybe I'm bewitched!" +<P> +"Nonsense!" exclaimed the professor, "what did you want the stone for?" +<P> +"Nothin' in particular," replied Washington, still tugging away at the stone, +which was the size of his head. "I was just goin' t' throw it at a big bird, +but when I went to lift it this little stone 'peared t' be glued fast." +<P> +Washington moved aside to give Mr. Henderson a chance to try to pick up the +piece of rock. As the scientist grasped it a look of surprise came over his +features: +<P> +"This is most remarkable!" he exclaimed. "I can't budge it. I wonder if a +giant magnet is holding it down." +<P> +He tugged and tugged until he was red in the face. Then he beckoned to the +two boys, and they came to his aid. There was barely room for them all to +each get one hand on the rock, and then, only after a powerful tug did it +come up. Almost instantly it dropped back to the earth. +<P> +"This is remarkable!" the professor said. "I wonder if the other stones are +the same." +<P> +He tried several others, and one and all resisted his efforts. It was only +the small stones he was able to lift alone, and these, he said, were so weighty +that it would have been a task to throw them any distance. +<P> +"The water and the stones are strangely heavy in this land," he said. "I +wonder what other queer things we shall see." +<P> +"I saw a bird a little while ago, when I went to pick up that stone," observed +Washington. +<P> +"What kind was it?" asked the inventor. +<P> +"I don't know, only it was about as big as an eagle." +<P> +The travelers wandered about a quarter of a mile from the ship. They avoided +the tall grass and the lofty nodding flowers that seemed to grow in regular +groves, and kept to places where they could walk with comparative freedom. +<P> +"Have you formed any idea, Professor, as to the nature of this country?" +asked Mark, who liked to get at the bottom of things. +<P> +"I have, but it is only a theory," Mr. Henderson answered. "I believe we +are on a sort of small earth that is inside the larger one we live on. This +sphere floats in space, just as our earth does, and we have passed through +the void that lies between our globe and this interior one. I think this +new earth is about a quarter the size of ours and in some respects the same. +In others it is vastly different. +<P> +"But we will not think of those things now. We must see what our situation +is, whether we are in any danger, and must look to repairing our ship. There +will be time enough for other matters later." +<P> +The travelers were walking slowly along, noting the strange things on every +side. As they advanced the vegetation seemed to become more luxuriant, as +if nature had tried to out-do herself in providing beautiful flowers and +plants. The changing lights added to the beauty and weirdness of the scene. +<P> +The plain was a rolling one, and here and there were small hills and hollows. +As the travelers topped a rise Jack, who was in advance, called out: +<P> +"Oh what queer plants! They are giant Jacks-in-the-pulpit!" +<P> +The others hastened forward to see what the boy had discovered. Jack was +too eager to wait, and pressed on. The hill which sloped away from the top +of the little plateau on which he stood, was steeper than he had counted +on. As he leaned forward he lost his balance and toppled, head foremost, +down the declivity, rolling over. +<P> +"Look out!" cried Mark, who had almost reached his comrade's side. +<P> +The scene that confronted the travelers was a strange one. Before them in +a sort of hollow, were scores of big plants, shaped somewhat like a +Jack-in-the-pulpit, or a big lily, with a curved top or flap to it. +<P> +The plants were about eight feet tall, three feet across the top, and the +flap or covering was raised about two feet. They were nodding and swaying +in the wind on their short stems. +<P> +"He's headed right for one of them!" Mr. Henderson exclaimed. "I hope he'll +not fall into one of the openings." +<P> +"Is there any danger?" asked Mark. +<P> +"I'm afraid there is," the inventor added. "Those plants are a variety of +the well-known pitcher plant, or fly-trap, as they are sometimes called. +In tropical countries they grow to a large size, but nothing like these. +They are filled, in the cup, with a sort of sticky, sweet mixture, and this +attracts insects. When one enters the cup the top flap folds over, and the +hapless insect is caught there. The plant actually devours it, nature providing +a sort of vegetable digestive apparatus. These giant plants are the same, +and they seem large enough to take in a man, to say nothing of Jack!" +<P> +With anxious faces the adventurers turned to watch the fate of their comrade. +Jack was slipping, sliding and rolling down the hill. He could not seem to +stop, though he was making desperate efforts to do so. He was headed straight +for one of the largest of the terrible plants. +<P> +In vain, as he saw what was in front of him, did he try to change the course +of his involuntary voyage. Over and over he rolled, until, at length, he +struck a little grassy hummock, bounced into the air, and right into the +opening of a monster pitcher plant. +<P> +"It has him!" cried Mark. "We must save him! Come on everyone!" +<P> +He raced down the hill, while the others came closely after him. They reached +the plant into which Jack had bounced. The flap, or top piece, had closed +down, tightly over the unfortunate boy. +<P> +"Quick! We must save him or he will be smothered to death or drowned in the +liquid the cup contains!" Mr. Henderson exclaimed. "Attack the plant with +anything you can find!" +<P> +"Let's cut through the side of the flower-cup!" suggested Mark. "That seems +softer than the stem." +<P> +His idea was quickly put into operation. Andy's long hunting knife came in +very handy. While the sides of the long natural cup were tough, the knife +made an impression on them, and, soon, a small door or opening had been cut +in the side of the pitcher plant, large enough to enable a human body to +pass through. +<P> +When the last fibre had been severed by Andy, who was chosen to wield the +knife because of his long practice as a hunter, there was a sudden commotion +within the plant. Then a dark object, dripping water, made a spring and landed +almost at the feet of the professor. +<P> +It was Jack, and a sorry sight he presented. He was covered from head to +foot with some sticky substance, which dripped from all over him. +<P> +With hasty movements he cleared the stuff from his eyes and mouth, and +spluttered: +<P> +"It's a good thing you cut me out when you did. I couldn't have held on much +longer!" +<h3>CHAPTER XIX</h3> +<h4>THE BIG PEACH</h4> +<P> +JACK soon recovered from his remarkable experience. The terrible plant that +had nearly eaten him alive was a mass of cut-up vegetable matter which attracted +a swarm of insects. Most of them were ants, but such large ones the boys +had never seen before, and the professor said they exceeded in size anything +he had read about. Some of them were as large as big rats. They bit off large +pieces of the fallen plant and carried them to holes in the ground which +were big enough for Washington to slip his foot into, and he wore a No. 11 +shoe. +<P> +But the adventurers felt there were more important things for them to look +at than ants, so they started away again, the professor telling them all +to be careful and avoid accidents. +<P> +It was while they were strolling through a little glade, which they came +upon unexpectedly, that Washington, who was in the lead called out: +<P> +"Gracious goodness! It must be Thanksgivin'!" +<P> +"Why so?" asked Jack. +<P> +"'Cause here's th' remarkablest extraordinary and expansionist of a pumpkin +that ever I laid eyes on!" the colored man cried. +<P> +They all hurried to where Washington had come to a halt. There, on the ground +in front of him, was a big round object, about the size of a hogshead. It +was yellow in color, and was not unlike the golden vegetable from which mothers +make such delicious pies. +<P> +"I allers was fond of pumpkins," said Washington, placing his hand on the +thing, which was almost as tall as he was, "but I never thought I'd come +across such a one as this." +<P> +The professor and the two boys went closer to the monstrosity. Mr. Henderson +passed his hand over it and then, bending closer, smelled of it. +<P> +"That's not a pumpkin!" he exclaimed. +<P> +"What is it then?" asked Washington. +<P> +"It's a giant peach," the inventor remarked. "Can't you see the fuzz, and +smell it? Of course it's a peach." +<P> +"Well I'll be horn-swoggled!" cried Washington, leaning against the big fruit, +which easily, supported him. +<P> +"Hurrah!" cried Jack, drawing his knife from his pocket and opening the largest +blade. "I always did like peaches. Now I can have all I want," and he drove +the steel into the object, cutting off a big slice which he began to eat. +<P> +"It may be poisonous!" exclaimed Mark. +<P> +"Too late now," responded Jack, the juice running down from his mouth. "Taste's +good, anyhow." +<P> +They all watched Jack while he devoured his slice of fruit. Washington acted +as if he expected his friend to topple over unconscious, but Jack showed +no bad symptoms. +<P> +"You'd better all have some," the boy said. "It's the best I ever tasted." +<P> +Encouraged by Jack's example, Mark thought he, too, would have some of the +fruit. He opened his knife and was about to take off some of the peach when +suddenly the thing began to roll forward, almost upon him. +<P> +"Hi! Stop your shoving!" he exclaimed. "Do you want to have the thing roll +over me, Jack?" +<P> +"I'm not shoving!" replied Jack. +<P> +"Some one is!" Mark went on. He dodged around the far side of the immense +fruit and what he saw made him cry out in astonishment. +<P> +Two grasshoppers, each one standing about three feet high, were standing +on their hind legs, and with their fore feet were pushing the peach along +the ground. They had been attracted to the fruit by some juice which escaped +from a bruise on that side, which was the ripest, and, being fond of sweets +had, evidently decided to take their find to some safe place where they could +eat it at their leisure. Or perhaps they wanted to provide for their families +if grasshoppers have them. +<P> +"Did you ever see such monsters?" asked Jack. "They're as big as dogs!" +<P> +At the sound of his voice the two grasshoppers, becoming alarmed, ceased +their endeavors to roll the peach along, and, assuming a crouching attitude +seemed to be waiting. +<P> +"They certainly are remarkable specimens," Mr. Henderson said. "If the other +animals are in proportion, and if there are persons in this new world, we +are likely to have a hard time of it." +<P> +This time the immense insects concluded the strangers were not to their liking. +With a snapping of their big muscular legs and a whirr of their wings that +was like the starting of an automobile, the grasshoppers rose into the air +and sailed away over the heads of the adventurers. Their flight was more +than an eighth of a mile in extent, and they came down in a patch of the +very tall grass. +<P> +"Let's go after them!" exclaimed old Andy. "I was so excited I forgot to +take a shot at them. Come on!" +<P> +"I think we'd better not," counseled the professor. "In the first place we +don't need them. They would be no good for food. Then we don't know but what +they might attack us, and it would be no joke to be bitten by a grasshopper +of that size. Let them alone. We may find other game which will need your +attention, Andy. Better save your ammunition." +<P> +Somewhat against his will, Andy had to submit to the professor's ruling. +The old hunter consoled himself with the reflection that if insects grew +to that size he would have some excellent sport hunting even the birds of +the inner world. +<P> +"I wonder what sort of a tree that peach grew on," Jack remarked, as he cut +off another slice, when the excitement caused by the discovery of the +grasshoppers had subsided. "It must be taller than a church steeple. I wonder +how the fruit got here, for there are no trees around." +<P> +"I fancy those insects rolled it along for a good distance," Mr. Henderson +put in. "You can see the marks on the ground, where they pushed it. They +are wonderful creatures." +<P> +"Are we going any farther?" asked Mark. "Perhaps we can find the peach tree, +and, likely there are other fruit trees near it." +<P> +At the professor's suggestion they strolled along for some distance. They +were now about three miles from the airship, and found that what they had +supposed was a rather level plain, was becoming a succession of hills and +hollows. It was while descending into a rather deep valley that Jack pointed +ahead and exclaimed: +<P> +"I guess there's our peach orchard, but I never saw one like it before." +<P> +Nor had any of the others. Instead of trees the peaches were attached to +vines growing along the ground. They covered a large part of the valley, +and the peaches, some bigger than the one they first discovered, some small +and green, rose up amid the vines, just as pumpkins do in a corn field. +<P> +"Stranger and stranger," the professor murmured. "Peaches grow on vines. +I suppose potatoes will grow on trees. Everything seems to be reversed here." +<P> +They made their way down toward the peach "orchard" as Jack called it, though +"patch" would have been a better name. Besides peaches they found plums, +apples, and pears growing in the same way, and all of a size proportionate +to the first-named fruit. +<P> +"Well, one thing is evident," Mr. Henderson remarked, "we shall not starve +here. There is plenty to eat, even if we have to turn vegetarians." +<P> +"I wonder what time it is getting to be," Jack remarked. "My watch says twelve +o'clock but whether it's noon or midnight I can't tell, with this colored +light coming and going. I wonder if it ever sets as the sun does." +<P> +"That is something we'll have to get used to," the professor said. "But I +think we had better go back to the ship now. We have many things to do to +get it in order again. Besides, I am a little afraid to leave it unguarded +so long. No telling but what some strange beast—or persons, for that +matter—might injure it." +<P> +"I'm going to take back some slices of peaches with me, anyhow," Mark said, +and he and Jack cut off enough to make several meals, while Bill, Tom and +Washington took along all they could carry. +<P> +As they walked back toward the ship the strange lights seemed to be dying +out. At first they hardly noticed this, but as they continued on it became +quite gloomy, and an odd sort of gloom it was too, first green, then yellow, +then red and then blue. +<P> +"I believe whatever serves as a sun down here is setting," the professor +observed. "We must hurry. I don't want to be caught out here after dark." +<P> +They hurried on, the lights dying out more and more, until, as they came +in sight of their ship, it was so black they could hardly see. +<P> +Mark who was in the rear turned around, glancing behind him. As he did so +he caught sight of a gigantic shadow moving along on top of the nearest hill. +The shadow was not unlike that of a man in shape, but of such gigantic stature +that Mark knew it could be like no human being he had ever seen. At the same +time it bore a curious resemblance to the weird shadow he had seen slip into +the <I>Mermaid </I>that night before they sailed. +<P> +"I wonder if it can be the same—the same thing—grown larger, just as the +peach grows larger than those in our world," Mark thought, while a shiver +of fear seemed to go over him. "I wonder if that—that thing could have been +on the ship——" +<P> +Then the last rays of light died away and there was total darkness. +<h3>CHAPTER XX</h3> +<h4>OVERHAULING THE SHIP</h4> +<P> +"KEEP together!" shouted the professor. "It will not do to become lost now. +We are close to the ship, and will soon be there. Come after me." +<P> +It was more by following the sound of the scientist's voice, than by any +sight which the others could get of him, that they managed to trail along +behind. They reached the ship in safety, however, and entered. There was +no sound as of beasts or insects within, and, though Mark felt a little +apprehensive on account of what he had seen, he and the others as well, were +glad to be again in something that seemed like home. +<P> +"I wish we had some candles, or some sort of a light to see by," the professor +remarked. "We can do nothing in the dark, and there is no telling how long +this night is going to last once it has set in. If I could have a little +illumination, I might be able to fix the dynamo, and then we could turn on +the incandescents. That portable light we had is broken. +<P> +"By cracky!" exclaimed Andy. "I believe I have the very thing!" +<P> +"You don't mean to say you have a torch or a candle with you, do you?" asked +Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"No, but I have my patent pipe lighting apparatus," the hunter said. "I always +carry it. It gives a little light, but not much, though it may be enough +to work by." +<P> +Not until after several hours work, handicapped as they were by lack of light, +were the repairs to the ship completed. +<P> +"Now we'll start the engine and see how we will come out," the inventor +exclaimed, as he wiped his hands on some waste. +<P> +It did not take long to generate enough power to turn the dynamo. Soon the +familiar hum and whirr was heard, and, a few seconds later the filaments +in the lamps began to glow a dull red, which gradually brightened until they +were shining in all their usual brilliancy. +<P> +"Hurrah!" cried the boys. "Now we can see!" +<P> +They all felt in better spirits with the restoration of the lights, and, +washing off the grease and dirt of their labors in the engine room, they +prepared to sit down to the meal which Washington prepared. +<P> +As soon as the dynamo was working well, care had to be taken not to speed +it too much on account of a mended belt. The professor turned off part of +the lights and switched some of the current into the storage batteries, to +provide for emergencies. For there was no telling how long the night might +last. +<P> +Jack was the first one to finish the meal—they did not know whether to call +it dinner, supper or breakfast. He went into the conning tower, and, as soon +as he reached it he called out: +<P> +"Come on up here, professor! There's something strange going on!" +<P> +Mr. Henderson, followed by Mark, hurried to the tower. As he reached it and +looked out of the forward window, a beautiful white glow illuminated the +whole scene, and then, from below the horizon, there arose seven luminous +disks. One was in the centre, while about it circled the other six, like +some immense pin-wheel. +<P> +"It's the moon!" cried Mark. +<P> +"It's seven moons!" Jack exclaimed. "Why it's almost as light as day!" +<P> +And so it was, for the seven moons, if that is what they were, gave an +illumination not unlike the sun in brilliancy though it was like the beams +from the pale moon of the earth. +<P> +"I guess we need not have worried about the darkness," the professor remarked. +"Still it is a good thing I fixed the dynamo." +<P> +For some time he and the other adventurers watched the odd sight of the moons, +as they rose higher and higher overhead. The scene was a beautiful, if weird +one, for the whole plain was bathed in the soft light. +<P> +"I guess we can turn off the incandescents, and use all the power for the +storage batteries," Mr. Henderson went on, as he descended into the ship, +and opened the port shutters which had been closed when they started off +on their exploring tour. The interior of the <I>Mermaid </I>was almost as +light as when the odd colored beams had been playing over the new earth to +which they had come. +<P> +"I think we had better continue with our work of making repairs," Mr. Henderson +said. "We can't count on these moons remaining here any length of time, and +I want to take advantage of them. So though some of us perhaps need sleep, +we will forego it and fix up the <I>Mermaid. </I>I want to take a trip and +see what other wonders await us." +<P> +They all agreed that they would rather work than sleep, and soon the entire +force was busy in the engine room. There was much to be done, and the most +important things were attended to first. The motive power was overhauled +and found to be in need of several new parts. These were put in and then +the gas generator, and the negative gravity machine, were put in shape. +<P> +It would have taken something very substantial to have awakened any one on +board the <I>Mermaid </I>that night. They all slept soundly and awoke to +find the strange colored lights shining in through the glass covered port +holes. +<P> +"Well, the sun, or what corresponds to it, is up," observed Jack, "and I +guess we had better do as the little boy in the school reader did, and get +up, too, Mark." +<P> +Soon all the travelers were aroused, and the sound of Washington bustling +about in the kitchen, whence came the smell of coffee, bacon and eggs, told +the hungry ones that breakfast was under way. +<P> +After the meal work was again started on repairing the ship, and by noon +the professor remarked: +<P> +"I think we shall try a little flight after dinner. That is, if one thing +doesn't prevent us." +<P> +"What is that?" asked Jack. +<P> +"We may be held down, as were those stones," was the grave answer. +<h3>CHAPTER XXI</h3> +<h4>THE FISH THAT WALKED</h4> +<P> +IT was with no little apprehension that the professor prepared to take his +first flight aboard the ship in the realms of the new world. He knew little +or nothing of the conditions he might meet with, the density of the atmosphere, +or how the <I>Mermaid </I>would behave under another environment than that +to which she was accustomed. +<P> +Yet he felt it was necessary to make a start. They would have to attempt +a flight sooner or later, and Mr. Henderson was not the one to delay matters. +So, the last adjustment having been made to the repaired machinery, they +all took their places in the ship. +<P> +The boys and the professor went to the conning tower to direct matters, while +Washington and the others were in the engine room to see that the machinery +worked properly. Mark gave a last look outside as he closed the big steel +cover over the hole through which admission was had to the craft. He thought +he might catch a glimpse of the queer shadow, but nothing was in sight. It +was like a beautiful summer's day, save for the strange lights, shifting +and changing. But the travelers had become somewhat used to them by this +time. +<P> +The professor turned the valve that allowed the gas to enter the holder. +There was a hissing sound and a sort of trembling throughout the entire ship. +The dynamos were whizzing away and the negative gravity machine was all ready +to start. +<P> +For several minutes the travelers waited until the big lifting tank was filled +with the strong vapor. They watched the gages which indicated the pressure +to be several hundred pounds. +<P> +"I think we can chance it now," remarked Mr. Henderson, as he threw over +several levers. "We'll try, at any rate." +<P> +With a tremor the <I>Mermaid </I>left the surface of the inner earth and +went sailing upward toward the—well it wasn't exactly the sky, but it was +what corresponded to it in the new world, though there were no clouds and +no blue depths such as the boys were used to. At all events the <I>Mermaid +</I>was flying again, and, as the adventurers felt themselves being lifted +up they gave a spontaneous cheer at the success which had crowned their efforts. +<P> +The ship went up several hundred feet, and then, the professor, having brought +her to a stop, sent her ahead at a slow pace. He wanted to be sure all the +apparatus was in good working order before he tried any speed. +<P> +The <I>Mermaid </I>responded readily. Straight as an arrow through the air +she flew. +<P> +"Well, this is almost as good as being on the regular earth!" exclaimed Jack. +<P> +"It's better," put in Mark. "We haven't seen half the wonders yet. Let's +open the floor shutter, and see how it looks down below." +<P> +He and Jack went to the room where there was an opening in the floor of the +ship, covered by heavy glass. They slid back the steel shutter and there, +down below them, was the strange new, world they had come to, stretched out +like some big map. +<P> +They could see mountains, forests, plains, and rivers, the water sparkling +in the colored light. Over green fields they flew, then across some stretches +where only sand and rocks were to be seen. Faster and faster the ship went, +as the professor found the machinery was once more in perfect order. Jack +was idly watching the play of tinted lights over the surface of the ground. +<P> +"I wonder what makes it," he said. +<P> +"I have tried to account for it in several ways," said the professor, who +had called Washington to the conning tower and come to join the boys. "I +have had first one theory and then another, but the one I am almost sure +is correct is that hidden volcanic fires cause the illumination. +<P> +"I think they flare up and die away, and have become so regular that they +produce the same effect as night and day with us. Probably the fires go out +for lack of fuel, and when it is supplied they start up again. Perhaps it +is a sort of gas that they burn." +<P> +"Well, it's queer enough, whatever it is," Jack remarked. "What strikes me +as funny, though, is that we haven't seen a single person since we came here. +Surely this place must be inhabited." +<P> +Mark thought of the strange shadow he had seen, but said nothing. +<P> +"I believe it is," the professor answered. "We will probably come upon the +inhabitants soon. I only hope they are a people who will do us no harm." +<P> +"If they tried any of their tricks we could mount up in our ship and escape +them," said Andy. +<P> +"Provided they gave us the chance," Mr. Henderson put in. "Well, we'll not +worry about that now." +<P> +For several hours the ship traveled on, until it had come to a different +sort of country. It was wilder and not so level, and there were a number +of streams and small lakes to be seen. +<P> +"Are you going to sail all night?" asked Jack. +<P> +"No," replied the professor. "I think we'll descend very soon now, and camp +out for a while. That lake just ahead seems to offer a good place," and he +pointed to a large sheet of water that sparkled in the distance, for by this +time they had all gone back to the conning tower. +<P> +The lake was in the midst of a wood that extended for some distance on all +sides, and was down in a sort of valley. The ship headed toward it, and in +a short time a landing was made close to shore. +<P> +"Maybe we can have some fresh fish for supper," exclaimed Jack as he ran +from the ship as soon as the sliding door in the side was opened. "Looks +as if that lake had some in it. It is not thick water like in that stream +we stopped at," he added. +<P> +"I believe you're right," old Andy put in, as he turned back to look for +some lines and hooks among his traps. He soon found what he wanted, and gave +them to the boys, taking his trusty gun along for himself. +<P> +While the professor, Washington, Tom and Bill remained behind to make some +adjustments to the machinery, and to get things in shape for the night, which, +they calculated would soon be upon them, Jack, Mark and Andy went down to +the shore of the lake. The boys cut some poles from the trees, and baiting +the hooks with some fat worms found under the bark, threw in. +<P> +"Let's see who'll get the first bite," spoke Jack. "I'm pretty generally +lucky at fishing." +<P> +"Well, while you're waiting to decide that there contest, I think I'll take +a stroll along shore and see if I can see anything to shoot," Andy remarked. +<P> +For several minutes the boys sat in silence on the bank of the lake, watching +the play of the vari-colored lights on the water. Suddenly Jack felt a quiver +on his line, and his pole began to shake. +<P> +"I've got something!" he cried. Then his pole bent almost double and he began +to pull for all he was worth. "It's a whopper!" he cried. "Come and help +me, Mark!" +<P> +Mark ran to his friend's aid. Whatever was on the other end of the line was +strong enough to tax the muscles of both boys. They could hear the pole beginning +to break. But for the excellent quality of Andy's line that would have parted +some time before. +<P> +All at once there came a sudden slacking of the pull from whatever was in +the water. And so quickly did it cease that both boys went over backward +in a heap. +<P> +"He's got away!" cried Jack, getting up and brushing some of the dirt from +his clothes. +<P> +"There's something that didn't get away!" cried Mark, who had risen to his +knees, and was pointing at the lake. Jack looked and what he saw made him +almost believe he was dreaming. +<P> +For, emerging from the water, dragging the pole and line the boys had dropped +along with it, was a most curious creature. It was a big fish, but a fish +with four short legs on which it was walking, or rather waddling along as +much as a duck, with a double supply of feet, might do. +<P> +"Say, do I see that or is there something the matter with my eyes?" sung +out Jack, making ready to run away. +<P> +"It's there all right!" exclaimed Mark. "Hi! Andy! Here's something to shoot!" +he yelled, for indeed the creature was big enough to warrant attack with +a gun. It was about five feet long and two feet through. +<P> +On and on it came, straight at the boys, as if to have revenge for the pain +the fish hook must have caused it, for the barb could be seen dangling from +its lip. On and on it came, waddling forward, the water dripping from it +at every step. It had the body and general shape of a fish, save that the +tail was rather large in proportion. As it came nearer the boys noted that +the feet were webbed, like those of a water fowl. +<P> +"Come on!" cried Jack. "It may attack us!" +<P> +At that moment the creature opened its mouth, showing a triple row of formidable +teeth, and gave utterance to a sort of groan and grunt combined. +<P> +This was enough to send Jack and Mark off on a run up the bank, and did they +stop until they heard Andy's voice hailing them. +<P> +"What's the matter, boys?" +<P> +"Come here! Quick!" answered Jack. +<P> +The fish-animal had halted and seemed to be taking an observation. To do +this, as it could not turn its neck, it had to shift its whole body. Old +Andy came up on the run, his gun held in readiness. +<P> +"Where is it?" he asked, and the boys pointed silently. +<P> +The hunter could not repress a start of astonishment as he saw the strange +creature. But he did not hesitate a second. There was a crack of the rifle, +and the thing, whatever it was, toppled over, dead. +<P> +Andy hurried up to it, to get a closer view. +<P> +"Well, this is the limit!" he exclaimed. "First we have grasshoppers that +can roll peaches as big as hogsheads, and now we come across fish that walk. +I wonder what we will see next." +<P> +"I don't want to go fishing in this lake any more," spoke Jack, as he looked +at the repulsive creature. "I never want to eat fish any more." +<P> +"Same here," agreed Mark, and old Andy was of the opinion that the thing +killed would not make a wholesome dish for the table. +<P> +"There don't seem to be any game in this section," he remarked. "Not a sign +could I see, nor have I since we have been here, unless you count those +grasshoppers. But the fruit is good, I'll say that." +<P> +"Come on, we'd better be getting back," Mark said, as he noticed it was getting +dark. "I'm hungry." +<h3>CHAPTER XXII</h3> +<h4>THE SNAKE-TREE</h4> +<P> +THEY managed to make a good meal of the food supplies they had brought along, +and as a dessert Washington made some peach short-cake from the slices of +the giant fruit they had found, the day before. Just as they finished supper +it got very dark, but, in about an hour, the moon-beams, as the travelers +called them, came up, and illuminated the lake with a weird light. +<P> +As the machinery of the <I>Mermaid </I>was now in working order there was +no further alarm because of the darkness. The ship rested on a level keel +about a hundred yards back from the lake, and, seeing that all was snug, +and the fastenings secure, the travelers went to bed. +<P> +Though they had to forego fish for breakfast the travelers made a good meal. +After seeing that the ship was in readiness for a quick start, the professor +suggested they take a walk around and see what sort of country they might +be in now. +<P> +They tramped on for several miles, meeting with no adventures, and seeing +nothing out of the ordinary. It was a pleasant day, just warm enough to be +comfortable, and a little wind was blowing through the trees. +<P> +"It would be almost like home if it wasn't for the strange lights, and the +memory of the queer things here," said Jack. "I feel fine. Let's see if you +can hit that dead tree over there, Mark." +<P> +Jack stooped to grab up a stone, but no sooner had his fingers touched it +than he called out: +<P> +"There! I forgot all about the stones here being heavier than lead. Guess +we can't throw any of 'em. But come on. I'll race you to the dead tree!" +<P> +Mark was willing, so the two boys set off at a fast pace. +<P> +"Look out where you're going!" the professor called after them. "No telling +what may be in those woods," for the boys were approaching a little glade, +on the edge of which the dead tree stood. +<P> +Jack reached the goal first, and stood leaning against the trunk, waiting +for Mark. +<P> +"You'd better practice sprinting!" exclaimed the victor. +<P> +Mark was about to excuse himself for his poor showing, on the plea of having +eaten too much breakfast, when to his horror he saw what seemed to be a long +thin snake spring out from the branches of a nearby tree and twine itself +about Jack. +<P> +"Help me! Save me!" cried the unfortunate boy, as he was lifted high into +the air and pulled within the shadow of the wood. +<P> +For an instant Mark was too horror-stricken to move. Then with a shout that +alarmed the others, who were coming along more slowly, he made a dash for +the place he had last seen Jack. +<P> +Had old Andy not been on the watch, with those keen eyes of his, there might +have been a double tragedy. He had seen from afar the sudden snatching up +of Jack, and noted Mark's rush to save his chum. +<P> +"Stand still! Don't go in there for your life!" yelled the hunter, at the +same time running forward with gun ready. +<P> +His example was followed by the professor, Washington and the other two men. +<P> +"A snake has Jack!" called Mark, when Andy was at his side. +<P> +"No! It's not a snake!" replied the hunter. "It's worse. It's the snake-tree!" +<P> +"What's that?" asked Mr. Henderson, hurrying up. +<P> +"The snake-tree has Jack," the hunter went on. "It is a plant, half animal, +half-vegetable. It has long branches, not unlike a snake in shape. They can +move about and grab things." +<P> +"One of them got a grip on Jack as he leaned against the dead tree trunk. +I just caught a glimpse of it, and called to prevent Mark from running into +danger." +<P> +"Can't we save him?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"I'm going to try!" replied Andy. "Quick! Gather up some pieces of dry wood. +I have some paper, and my pipe lighter. We must fight the snake-tree with +fire!" +<h3>CHAPTER XXIII</h3> +<h4>THE DESERTED VILLAGE</h4> +<P> +JACK'S Cries were growing fainter and fainter. Peering in through the branches +of the dead tree the professor could see the whip-like limbs winding closer +and closer about the boy. +<P> +"I am afraid we will be too late!" he said. +<P> +Andy had twisted some paper into a rude torch. He set fire to it with his +pocket lighter, and, when Bill and Mark brought him some little pieces of +dead wood the old hunter added them to his bundle, which was now blazing +brightly. +<P> +"How are you going to do it?" asked the professor. +<P> +"I'll show you," replied Andy. He bound the sticks and paper together with +wisps of grass and then, when it was so hot he could hardly hold it longer, +he ran as close as he dared to the snake-tree and tossed the torch at the +foot of it. +<P> +The blazing bundle fell among some damp leaves and grass, as Andy had intended +it should, and soon a dense smoke arose, pouring straight up through the +branches of the animal-tree, the limbs of which were gathered in a knot about +the half-unconscious form of the boy. +<P> +For a few minutes they all waited anxiously. Would Andy's trick succeed? +Had the terrible tree not already squeezed the life from Jack? +<P> +But, while they watched, there seemed to come a change over the tree. The +snake-like arms waved less and less. They seemed to straighten out, as though +deprived of power by the smoke which was now so dense as to hide Jack from +sight. Then the arms suddenly relaxed and something rolled from them and +fell to the ground. With a quick movement Andy darted in, crawling on his +hands and knees beneath the limbs, and brought Jack out. The boy was white +and his eyes were closed. +<P> +"Get some water!" cried the old hunter. +<P> +Mark ran toward a stream a little distance away. He brought some of the curiously +thick liquid in his hat, and while Andy held the boy the professor sprinkled +some of the drops on his face, and forced some between his lips. In a little +while Jack's eyes slowly opened. +<P> +"Don't let it eat me!" he begged. +<P> +"You're all right now," said Andy heartily. "Not a bit harmed, Jack. But," +he added in a low tone, "it was a close call." +<P> +A few whiffs from a bottle of ammonia the professor carried soon brought +Jack's color back. +<P> +"Do you feel better now?" asked Mark. +<P> +"I guess so. Yes, I'm all right," replied Jack, struggling to his feet. "What +happened? Feels as if I had been tied up with a lot of rope." +<P> +"That's about what you were," Andy replied, "only it was the worst kind of +rope I ever saw. Those snake-trees are terrible things. I've read of 'em, +but I never saw one before. The book that told of them says they squeeze +their victims to death just as a snake does. The only way to do is to make +some smoke and fire at the bottom. This sort of kills the branches or makes +them stupid and they let go. The trees are half animal, and awful things. +I hope we don't meet with any more." +<P> +"Same here," added Jack fervently, as he grasped Andy's hand, and thanked +him for saving his life. +<P> +"Do you think you can go on, or shall we return to the ship'?" the professor +asked. +<P> +"Oh I can trail along, if you move a little slowly," Jack replied. "I'm a +bit stiff, that's all." +<P> +So they resumed their journey. They had gone, perhaps, three miles when +Washington, who was in the lead, suddenly stopped and called: +<P> +"Sounds like thunder." +<P> +The others listened. Sure enough there was a dull rumble and roar audible. +It seemed off to the left, but they could see no clouds in the sky, nor any +signs of a storm. +<P> +"Let's take a walk over that way and see what it is," Mr. Henderson suggested. +<P> +As they walked on the noise became louder, until in about half an hour it +was like the sound from a blast furnace. +<P> +"What do you suppose it can be?" asked Mark. +<P> +"Perhaps some new freak of nature," the professor replied. "We seem to have +a good many of them here." +<P> +They were all on their guard now, for there was no telling into what danger +they might run. As they went up a little hill the noise became much louder. +The professor and Andy, who had taken the lead, kept a sharp lookout ahead, +that they might not unexpectedly fall into some hidden stream or lake. As +they topped the hill they saw before them a deep valley, and in the midst +of it was that which was causing the roaring sound. +<P> +From the centre of an immense mound of rock and earth there spouted up a +great column of water, three hundred feet or more, as straight as a flag +staff. It was about ten feet in diameter, and at the top it broke into a +rosette of sparkling liquid, which as the vari-colored lights played on it, +resembled some wonderful flower. +<P> +"It's a great geyser!" the professor exclaimed. "We have come to a place +like Yellowstone Park. We must be very careful. The crust may be very thin +here, and let us down into some boiling spring." +<P> +The others gathered around the professor, and, from a safe distance watched +the ever rising and falling shaft of water. +<P> +It was not regular in motion. Sometimes it would shoot up to a great distance, +nearly a thousand feet, the professor estimated. Again it would sink down, +as the power sending it out lessened, until it was only a few hundred feet +above the rounded top of the mound from which it spurted. But it never fell +below this. All the while there was the constant roaring sound, as though +the forces of nature below the surface were calling to be let out. +<P> +"I hope there are not many of those about," Mr. Henderson remarked after +a pause. "If the ship should hit one during the night it would be all up +with us. We must keep a careful look-out." +<P> +The spouting column had a fascination which held them to the spot for some +time. From the hill they had a good view of the surrounding country, but +did not see any more geysers. +<P> +"Do you think it is hot water?" asked Mark. +<P> +"There is no vapor," the professor answered, "but most of the geysers are +produced by the action of steam in the interior of the earth. However we'll +not take any chances by investigating. I fear it would not be safe to go +into that valley." +<P> +"Look there!" cried Andy. "I guess we're better off here!" He pointed a little +to the right of where the water spouted. The others looked, and saw, coming +from a hole in the ground, some shaggy black object. +<P> +"What is it?" asked Jack. +<P> +"It looks like a bear," replied the hunter, "but I never saw one like it +before." +<P> +Nor had any of the others, for the creature was a terrible one. It had the +body of a bear, but the feet and legs were those of an alligator, while the +tail trailed out behind like a snake, and the head had a long snout, not +unlike the trunk of an elephant. The creature was about ten feet long and +five feet in height. +<P> +"Let me try a shot at it!" exclaimed Andy. "That is something worth shooting," +and he cocked his rifle. +<P> +"Don't!" exclaimed the professor shortly. "You might only wound it, and it +would pursue us. We are not ready to fight such creatures as that, and you +are the only one armed." +<P> +"I never missed anything I aimed at yet," said Andy, a little hurt that any +one should doubt his ability to kill at the first shot. +<P> +"Perhaps not, but how do you know but what this creature has a bullet proof +armor under its hide. This is a strange world, Andy. It is better to take +no chances." +<P> +"I hate to see him get away," the hunter said. +<P> +But, as it happened, the beast was not to get away. As they watched they +saw the horrible animal approach the mound from which the water spurted. +Up the sides it climbed. +<P> +"I guess he's going to get a drink," said Mark. +<P> +That was evidently the beast's intention. It went close to the spouting column +of water, and thrust its head out so that its tongue could lap from the side. +It seemed to have been in the habit of doing this. +<P> +For once, and for the last time, however, it made a mistake. The water seemed +to veer to one side. In its eagerness to get a drink the animal took another +step forward. At that moment the direction of the column changed again, and +it tilted over toward the beast. +<P> +Suddenly, as the travelers watched, the full force of the big column caught +the beast just under the fore shoulders. Up into the air the creature shot, +propelled by thousands of pounds pressure. Right up to the top of the column +it went, and this time the water rose a thousand feet into the air. +<P> +Up and up went the animal, struggling to get away from the remorseless grip. +Then, when the water had reached its height, it shot the beast off to one +side. Then the brute began to fall, twisting, turning, wiggling and struggling. +Down it came with a thud that could be heard above the noise of the geyser. +<P> +"I reckon that finishes him," observed Andy. And it had, for there was not +a sign of life from the creature. +<P> +"I guess we have seen enough for one morning," the professor said, "Let's +go back to the airship. It must be nearly dinner time." +<P> +They started away. Mark gave a last look at the queer column of water and +the dead body of the strange animal. As he passed down the hill he thought +he saw the creature move, and stayed to see if this was so. But a second +glance convinced him he was mistaken. +<P> +The others had gone on and were some distance ahead. Mark hurried on to join +them. As he got a last glance at the top of the column, over the brow of +the hill, he happened to look off to the left. There was another hill, about +the size of the one they had been on. +<P> +And, as Mark looked he saw something move. At first he thought it was another +beast. But, to his terror he saw that the creature had only two legs, and +that it stood upright like a man, but such a man as Mark had never seen before, +for he was nearly twelve feet tall. +<P> +He was about to cry out and warn the others, when the thing, whatever it +was, sunk down, apparently behind some tall bushes, and disappeared as if +the earth had opened and swallowed it. +<P> +"I wonder if I had better tell them," thought Mark. "I can't show them anything. +I wonder if I really saw it, or if it was only a shadow. I guess I'll say +nothing. But it is very strange." +<P> +Then he hurried on to join the others. +<P> +"What makes you so pale?" asked Jack of his chum. +<P> +"Nothing," said Mark, somewhat confused. "I guess I'm a little tired, that's +all." +<P> +They reached the ship in safety, and, having dinner started the machinery +and took the <I>Mermaid </I>up into the air. +<P> +"We'll travel on and see if we can't find some human beings," the professor +said. +<P> +All that afternoon they sailed, the country below them unfolding like a panorama. +They passed over big lakes, sailing on the surface of some, and over rivers, +and vast stretches of forest and dreary plains. But they never saw a sign +of human inhabitants. +<P> +It was getting on to five o'clock, the hour when the brilliant lights usually +disappeared, when Mark, who was steering in the conning tower, gave a cry. +<P> +"What is it?" asked the professor, looking up from a rude map he was making +of the land they had just traversed. +<P> +"It looks like a town before us," said the boy. +<P> +Mr. Henderson and Jack looked to where Mark pointed. A few miles ahead and +below them were great mounds, not unlike that from which the geyser had spouted. +But they were arranged in regular form, like houses on a street, row after +row of them. And, as they approached nearer, they could see that the mounds +had doors and windows to them. Some of the mounds wer rger than others, +and some were of double and triple formation. +<P> +"It's a city! The first city of the new world!" cried Jack. +<P> +"It is a deserted village!" said the professor. "We have found where the +people live, but we have not found them." And he was right, for there was +not a sign of life about the place, over which the airship was now suspended. +<h3>CHAPTER XXIV</h3> +<h4>THE GIANTS</h4> +<P> +"LET'S go down and investigate," suggested Jack. +<P> +"Better wait," counseled the professor. "It will soon be dark, and, though +we will have moonlight, we can not see to advantage. I think it will be best +to keep the ship in the air to-night, and descend in the morning. Then we +can look about and decide on what to do." +<P> +They all agreed this was the best plan, and, after making a circle above +the deserted village, and noting no signs of life, the <I>Mermaid </I>was +brought to a halt over the centre of the town, and about three hundred feet +above it. There the travelers would be comparatively safe. +<P> +It was deemed best to keep watch that night, and so, Mark, Jack, Bill and +Tom took turns, though there was nothing for them to do, as not a thing happened. +With the first appearance of dawn Mr. Henderson gave orders to have the ship +lowered, and it came to rest in the middle of what corresponded to a street +in the queer mound village. +<P> +"Now to see what kind of people have lived here!" cried Jack. "They must +have been a queer lot. Something like the Esquimaux, only they probably had +more trouble keeping cool than the chaps up at the north pole do." +<P> +Now that they were down among the mound houses, they saw that the dwellings +were much larger than they had supposed. They towered high above the boys' +heads, and some of them were large enough in area to have accomodated a company +of soldiers. +<P> +"Say, the chaps who lived in these must have been some pumpkins," said Jack. +"Why the ceilings are about fifteen feet high, and the doors almost the same! +Talk about giants! I guess we've struck where they used to hang out, at any +rate." +<P> +The houses were a curious mixture of clay and soft stone. There were doors, +with big skins from animals as curtains, and the windows were devoid of glass. +Instead of stairs there were rude ladders, and the furniture in the mound +houses was of the roughest kind. +<P> +There were fire-places in some of the houses, and the blackened and smoked +walls showed that they must have been used. In one or two of the houses clay +dishes, most of them broken, were scattered about, and the size of them, +in keeping with everything else, indicated that those who used them were +of no small stature. +<P> +"Some of the bowls would do for bath tubs," said Jack, as he came across +one or two large ones. +<P> +By this time the professor, Bill and Tom had joined the boys, and the five +went on with the exploring tour, while Washington and Andy remained in the +ship to get breakfast. +<P> +"The inhabitants are evidently of a half-civilized race," the professor said. +"Their houses, and the manner in which they live, show them to be allied +to the Aztecs, though of course they are much larger than that race." +<P> +"What's bothering me," Bill said, "is not so much what race they belong to, +as what chance we'd stand in a race with them if they took it into their +heads to chase after us. I've read that them there Azhandled races——" +<P> +"You mean the Aztecs," interrupted the professor. +<P> +"Well the Aztecs, then. But I've read they used to place their enemies on +a stone altar and cut their hearts out. Now I'm not hankerin' after anything +like that." +<P> +"Don't be foolish," spoke Mr. Henderson. "Wait until you meet some of the +giants, if that is what they are, and then you can decide what to do." +<P> +"It may be too late then," remarked Bill in a low tone, and the boys were +somewhat inclined to agree with him. +<P> +However, there seemed to be no immediate danger, as there was no sign of +any of the big people about the village. The adventurers walked about for +some time, but made no discoveries that would throw any light on the reason +for the place being left uninhabited. It seemed as if there had been a sudden +departure from the place, for in a number of the houses the remains of +half-cooked meals were seen. +<P> +"Well, I think we have noted enough for the time being," the professor remarked, +after they had traversed almost half the length of what seemed to be the +principal street. "Let's go back to the ship and have something to eat. +Washington may have become alarmed at our absence." +<P> +They made a circle in order to take in another part of the town on their +way back. While passing through a sort of alley, though it was only narrow +by comparison with the other thoroughfares that were very wide, Mark came +to a place where there was a circular slab of stone, resting on the ground. +In the centre was a big iron ring. +<P> +"Hello! Here's something new!" he exclaimed. "Maybe it leads to a secret +passage, or covers some hidden treasure." +<P> +"I guess it will have to continue to cover it then," Jack spoke. "That probably +weighs several tons. None of us could move it." +<P> +They made their way back to the ship, where they found Washington and Andy +discussing the advisability of going off in search of them. +<P> +"Breakfast is mighty near spoiled," said the colored man with an injured +air. +<P> +But the travelers did full justice to the meal, notwithstanding this. Deciding +there was nothing to be gained by staying in that vicinity, the professor +started the ship off again. +<P> +They traveled several hundred miles in the air, and, as the afternoon was +coming to a close, Jack, who was in charge of the conning tower, spied, just +ahead of them, another village. +<P> +"We will descend there for the night," the professor said. "Does there seem +to be any sign of life about?" +<P> +"None," replied Mark, who was observing through a telescope the town they +were approaching. "It's as dead as the other one." +<P> +The airship settled down in a field back of some of the mound houses. +<P> +"Now for supper!" cried Jack. "I'm as hungry as——" +<P> +He stopped short, for, seeming to rise from the very ground, all about the +ship, there appeared a throng of men. And such men as they were! For not +one was less than ten feet tall, and some were nearly fifteen! +<P> +"The giants have us!" cried Bill, as he saw the horde of creatures surrounding +the ship. +<h3>CHAPTER XXV</h3> +<h4>HELD BY THE ENEMY</h4> +<P> +"KEEP the doors closed!" cried the professor. "It is our only hope! I will +send the ship up again!" +<P> +But it was too late. Washington, who had obeyed the signal from the conning +tower to shut off the engines, had disconnected most of them so they could +not be started again save from the main room. At the same time there came +a yell of dismay from the colored man, who had slid back the steel covering +of the main side entrance to the <I>Mermaid.</I> +<P> +"I'm caught!" cried Washington. +<P> +As the professor and the boys hurried from the tower, they could hear a struggle +from where Washington was, and his voice calling: +<P> +"Let me go! Let me go!" +<P> +Reaching the engine room, which opened directly on the side entrance, the +professor saw a pair of enormous hands and arms dragging poor Washington, +feet first, out of the ship. Bill and Tom were crouched in one corner, pale +with fright. +<P> +"Wait until I get my gun!" cried Andy, as he ran for his rifle. +<P> +"Hold on!" called the professor in a loud voice. "It will be folly to shoot +them! We must try strategy!" +<P> +Washington's cries ceased as he was drawn entirely from the ship, the giant +hands disappearing at the same time. +<P> +"Follow me!" yelled Mr. Henderson, running out of the door. +<P> +Hardly knowing what they did, the boys went after him, and their hearts almost +stopped beating in fright as they saw the terrible things, which, in the +glare of the changing lights, were on every side of them. +<P> +For the men were very repulsive looking. They there attired in clothes, very +similar in cut to those worn by the travelers, and which seemed to be made +of some sort of cloth. But they were loose and baggy and only added to the +queer appearance of the giants. Veritable giants they were too. Their faces +seemed as large as kegs, and they were so clumsy in shape that Mark, even, +frightened as he was, exclaimed: +<P> +"They look like men made of putty!" At the same time he saw they bore a +resemblance to the creature he had observed on the hill top. +<P> +"What shall we do?" asked Andy of the professor. "They are really carrying +Washington away!" +<P> +Three of the giants were dragging the colored man along the ground, while +the other terrible beings stood about as if waiting to see the outcome of +the first sally. +<P> +"I will try to speak to them," Mr. Henderson said. "I know several languages. +They may understand one." +<P> +But before he could start on his parley a surprising thing happened. There +was a struggle in the little group about Washington. The colored man seemed +to be fighting, though the odds, it would appear, were too great to enable +him to accomplish anything. But, making a desperate effort to escape, Washington +quickly wrenched himself free from the giants' hands and then, striking out +with his fists, knocked the three down, one after another. +<P> +"I never knew Washington was so strong!" exclaimed Jack. +<P> +"Nor I," put in Mark. "Why I should think the men could carry him in one +arm as if he was a baby." +<P> +The three giants rose slowly to their feet. They uttered strange cries, and +motioned with their hands toward the professor, the boys, and the others +in the crowd. +<P> +"Look out! They're goin' t' grab yo'!" cried Washington. +<P> +Three of the giants approached Mark, and a like number closed in on Jack. +<P> +"Back to the ship!" cried the professor. "We must defend ourselves!" +<P> +But by this time the big men had grabbed the two boys. Then a strange thing +took place. Mark and Jack, though they felt that the giants must overcome +them in a test of strength, struggled with all their might against being +captured. They fought, as a cornered rat will fight, though it knows the +odds to be overwhelming. But in this case the unexpected happened. +<P> +Both boys found they could easily break the holds of the giants, and Mark, +by a vigorous effort, pushed the three men away from him, one at a time violently +so that they fell in a heap, one on top of the other. +<P> +"Hurrah! We can fight 'em!" cried Mark. "Don't be afraid. They're like mush! +They're putty men!" +<P> +And, so it seemed, the giants were. Though big in size they were flabby and +had nothing like the muscle they should have had in proportion to their build. +They went down like meal sacks and were slow to rise. +<P> +Jack, seeing how successful his comrade was, attacked the three giants who +were striving to make him a captive. He succeeded in disposing of them, knocking +one down so hard that the man was unable to rise until his companions helped +him. +<P> +"That's the way!" cried Washington. "They're soft as snow men!" +<P> +The vanquished giants set up a sort of roar, which was answered by their +fellows, and soon there was a terrible din. +<P> +"All get together!" called the professor. "They are evidently going to make +a rush for us. If we stand by one another we may fight them off, though they +outnumber us a hundred to one. Besides it will soon be dark, and we may be +able to escape!" +<P> +Washington, Jack and Mark retreated toward the ship, in the direction of +which the others had also made their way. The big men had gathered in a compact +mass and were advancing on the adventurers. +<P> +"What do you suppose makes them so soft?" asked Mark. "I believe I could +manage half a dozen." +<P> +"It must be the effect of the climate and conditions here," the professor +replied. "Probably they have to be big to stand the pressure of the thick +water, and the increased attraction of gravitation. Then too, being without +the weight of the atmosphere to which we are accustomed, they have probably +expanded. If they were to go up to earth, they might shrink to our size." +<P> +"Do you think that possible?" +<P> +"Of course. Why do you ask?" +<P> +"Nothing in particular," replied Mark. But to himself, he added: "That would +explain it all." +<P> +It was getting dusk now. The travelers had reached their ship, and rushed +inside and tried to close the doors in the face of the advancing horde. But, +by this time the giants were so close that one or two of them thrust their +big feet in, and prevented this movement. At the same time they set up a +great howling. +<P> +"Quick!" cried the professor. "We must start the ship and get away!" +<P> +"I can't close the door!" yelled Washington, who had been the last to enter. +<P> +"Never mind that! Go up with it open! Drag them along if they won't let go!" +answered Mr. Henderson, as he ran toward the engine room. +<P> +There was a sudden rush among the giants, and a sound as if something was +being thrown over the top and ends of the ship. Mark turned the gas machine +on, while Jack worked the negative gravity apparatus. They waited for the +ship to rise. +<P> +"Why don't we go up?" asked the professor. +<P> +"'Cause they've caught us!" called out Washington. +<P> +"Caught us? How?" +<P> +"They've thrown ropes over the top and ends of the ship, and fastened them +to their big houses!" +<P> +Running to a side window the professor saw that the <I>Mermaid </I>was fastened +down by a score of cables, each one six inches thick. They were held captives +by the enemy. +<h3>CHAPTER XXVI</h3> +<h4>A FRIEND INDEED</h4> +<P> +THOUGH the giants, man for man, were no match for the travelers, collectively +the horde proved too much. They had swarmed about the ship, and, by passing +the big cables over her, effectively held her down. +<P> +"Let me get out and I'll cut 'em!" cried Andy. "We must get away from these +savages!" +<P> +"No, no, don't go out!" exclaimed the professor. "They would eventually kill +you, though you might fight them off for a time. We must wait and see what +develops. They can have no object in harming us, as we have not injured them." +<P> +"I'd rather fight 'em," insisted the old hunter. +<P> +But the professor had his way and Andy was forced to obey. The giants had +withdrawn their big feet from the side door and Washington had closed it. +But nothing else had been accomplished, and the ship could not rise. The +gas and negative gravity machines were stopped, as they were only under a +useless strain. +<P> +Suddenly, the colored lights which had been growing dimmer and dimmer, with +the approach of night, went out altogether. Almost as suddenly, Mark, who +was watching the giants from the conning tower, as they made fast the loose +ends of the cables, saw them make a dash for the mound houses. +<P> +"They're afraid of the dark!" he cried. "Come on! We can go out now and loosen +the ropes!" +<P> +He hurried to tell the professor what he had noticed. +<P> +"Good!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "Perhaps we can escape now!" +<P> +They waited a few minutes, listening to the sound of many big feet running +away from the ship, and then, Bill cautiously opened the side door. The others +were behind him, waiting, with knives and hatchets in their hands, to rush +out and cut the restraining cables. +<P> +"All ready!" called Bill. "There doesn't seem to be a one in sight!" +<P> +He stepped out but no sooner had he set foot on the ground than there came +a thud, and Bill went down as if some one had knocked his feet from under +him. +<P> +"Go back! Go back!" he cried. "They hit me with something. I'm being smothered!" +<P> +"Bring a light!" cried the professor, for the sally had been started in the +dark. +<P> +Jack brought the portable electric it having been repaired and flashed it +out of the door. In the gleam of it, Bill was seen lying prostrate, half +covered by an orange, about half as big as himself. The fruit was as soft +and mushy as some of the giants themselves, or Bill would not have fared +so easily. +<P> +Then, as the others stood watching, and while Bill arose and wiped some of +the juice from his face, there came a regular shower of the monstrous oranges. +<P> +"Get inside quick! We'll be smothered under them!" Mr. Henderson cried. +<P> +Pausing only to rescue Bill, the adventurers retreated inside the ship, and +made fast the door. Outside they could hear the thud as the oranges were +thrown, some hitting the <I>Flying Mermaid </I>and many dropping all about +her. +<P> +"I guess they are going to have things their own way," observed Bill, as +he gazed down on his clothes, which were covered with juice from the fruit. +<P> +The night was one of anxiety. The travelers took turns standing guard, but +nothing more occurred. The giants remained in their houses, and the heavy +ropes still held the ship fast. +<P> +"We must hold a council of war," the professor decided as they gathered at +breakfast, which was far from a cheerful meal. +<P> +With the return of the colored lights the giants again made their appearance. +They came swarming from the mound houses, and a great crowd they proved to +be. Several thousand at least, Jack estimated, and when he went up into the +conning tower and took a survey he could see the strange and terrible creatures +pouring in from the surrounding country. +<P> +"I'm afraid there will be trouble," he said, as he came down and reported +what he had seen. +<P> +"We must hold a council of war," repeated the professor. "Has any one anything +to suggest?" +<P> +"Get a lot of powder and blow 'em up!" cried Andy. +<P> +"Arrange electric wires and shock 'em to death!" was Bill's plan. +<P> +"Can't we slip the ropes in some way and escape?" asked Jack. "I don't believe +we can successfully fight the giants. They are too many, even if they are +weak, individually." +<P> +"I think you're right there," Mr. Henderson said. "We must try some sort +of strategy, but what? That is the question." +<P> +For a few minutes no one spoke. They were all thinking deeply, for their +lives might hang in the balance. +<P> +"I think I have a plan," said Mark, at length. "Did we bring any diving suits +with us?" +<P> +"There may be one or two," the professor replied. "But what good will they +do?" +<P> +"Two of us could put them on," continued Mark, "and, as they afford good +protection from any missiles like fruit, we could crawl out on the deck of +the ship. From there, armed with hatchets or knives we could cut the ropes. +Then the ship could rise." +<P> +"That's a good plan!" cried the scientist. "We'll try it at once." +<P> +Search revealed that two diving suits were among the stores of the <I>Mermaid. +</I>Jack and Mark wanted to be the ones to don them, but as the suits were +rather large, and as the professor thought it would take more strength than +the boys had to do the work, it was decided that Andy and Washington should +make the attempt to cut the ropes. +<P> +The hunter and colored man lost little time in getting into the modern armor. +In the meanwhile Jack, who had been posted as a lookout, reported that there +seemed to be some activity among the giants. They were running here and there, +and some seemed to be going off toward the woods, that were not far away. +<P> +"Now work quickly," urged the professor. "We will be on the watch, and as +soon as the last rope is cut we will start the machinery and send the ship +up. We will not wait for you to come back inside, so hold fast as best you +can when the <I>Mermaid </I>rises." +<P> +"We will," answered Andy, just before the big copper helmet was fastened +on his head, and Washington nodded to show he understood. +<P> +The two who were to attempt the rescue of their comrades were soon on deck. +In the conning tower Jack and the professor kept anxious watch, while Mark, +Bill and Tom were at the various machines, ready, at the signal, to start +the engines. +<P> +The giants had now become so interested in whatever plan they had afoot, +that they paid little attention to the ship. Consequently Washington and +Andy, crawling along the deck in their diving suits, did not, at first attract +any attention. +<P> +In fact they had cut several of the big ropes, and it began to look as if +the plan would succeed, particularly as they were partly hidden from view +by the upper gas holder. They were working with feverish haste, sawing away +at the big cables with keen knives. +<P> +"I guess we'll beat 'em yet!" cried Jack. +<P> +"I hope so," replied the professor. "It looks——" +<P> +He stopped short, for at that moment a cry arose from the midst of the giants, +and one of them pointed toward the ship. An instant later the air was darkened +with a flight of big oranges, which the queer creatures seemed to favor as +missiles. Probably they found stones too heavy. +<P> +"Well, those things can't hurt 'em much with those heavy suits on," observed +Mr. Henderson. "There, Washington got one right on the head that time, and +it didn't bother him a bit." +<P> +Jack had seen the fruit strike the big copper helmet and observed that the +colored man only moved his head slightly in order to get rid of the orange. +<P> +In fact the giants, seeing for themselves that this mode of warfare was not +going to answer, since the two men on the ship continued to cut the restraining +cables, gave it up. There was a good deal of shouting among them, and a number +ran here and there, seemingly gathering up long poles. +<P> +"I wonder if they are going to try the flailing method, and beat poor Andy +and Washington," said Mr. Henderson. "It looks so." +<P> +The two rescuers were now about a quarter through their hard task. The throwing +of the oranges had ceased. But the giants were up to a new trick. They divided +into two sections, one taking up a position on one side of the ship, and +the other on the opposite. There were about two hundred in each crowd, while +the others in the horde drew some distance back. +<P> +"They're up to some queer dodge," observed Jack. "What are they placing those +sticks to their mouths for?" +<P> +The professor observed the throng curiously for a few seconds. Then he exclaimed: +<P> +"They are using blow-guns! They are going to shoot arrows at Washington and +Andy! We must get them in at once!" +<P> +He darted toward a door that opened from the conning tower out on the deck. +<P> +"Don't go!" cried Jack. "It's too late! They are beginning to blow!" +<P> +He pointed to the throng of giants. The professor could see their cheeks +puffed out as the big creatures filled their lungs with air and prepared +to expel it through the hollow tubes. +<P> +Then there came a sound as if a great wind was blowing. It howled and roared +over the ship, not unlike a hurricane in its fury. But there was no flight +of arrows through the air, such as would have come from regular blow guns. +<P> +"That is strange," said the professor. He thought for a moment. "I have it!" +he cried. "They are trying to blow Washington and Andy, off the ship by the +power of their breaths! They are not blowing arrows at them! My, but they +must have strong lungs!" +<P> +And, in truth, that was the plan of the giants. The hollow tubes, made from +some sort of big weed, sent a blast of air at the two men on the ship's deck, +that made them lie flat and cling with both hands to avoid being sent flying +into the midst of the giants, on one side or the other. But the giants had +reckoned without the weight of the diving suits, and it was those, with the +big lead soles of the shoes, that helped to hold Washington and Andy in place. +<P> +"Come back! Came back!" cried the professor, opening the conning tower door +and calling to the two brave men. "Come back, both of you! Do you hear?" +<P> +As the portal slid back the rush of air was almost like that of a cyclone. +Then it suddenly ceased, as the giants saw their plan was not likely to succeed. +<P> +But now there arose from the outer circle of the horde a shout of triumph. +It was caused by the return of those who had, a little while before, hurried +off to the woods. They came back bearing big trees, tall and slender, stripped +of their branches, so that they resembled flag staffs. It took a dozen giants +to carry each one. +<P> +The whole throng was soon busy laying the poles in a row in front of the +ship. +<P> +"What can they be up to now?" asked Jack. +<P> +"It looks as if they were going to slide the ship along on rollers," the +professor replied. +<P> +Sure enough this was the giant's plan. A few minutes later those in the +<I>Mermaid </I>felt her moving forward, as the giants, massed behind, shoved. +On to the poles she slid. The ropes were loosened to permit this, but not +enough to enable the boat to rise. +<P> +Then the travelers felt the ship being lifted up. +<P> +"They are going to carry us away, with the poles for a big stretcher!" cried +the professor. +<P> +Looking from the side windows the boys saw that a great crowd of the big +men were on either side of the <I>Mermaid, </I>each giant grasping a pole, +and lifting. Farther out were others, holding the ends of the cables which +Washington and Andy had not succeeded in cutting. +<P> +The ship was being carried along by a thousand or more giants, as the ancient +warriors, slain in battle, were carried home on the spears of their comrades. +<P> +"This is the end of the <I>Mermaid!" </I>murmured Mr. Henderson in sorrowful +tones. +<P> +As they looked from the conning tower the professor and the two boys observed +a commotion among the leaders of the giants. They seemed to be wavering. +Suddenly the forward part of the ship sank, as those ahead laid their poles +down on the ground. Then those behind did the same, and the <I>Mermaid, +</I>came to a stop, and once more rested on the earth. +<P> +"What does this mean?" asked the scientist in wonder. +<P> +All at once the entire crowd of giants threw themselves down on their faces, +and there, standing at the bow of the ship, was a giant, half again as large +as any of the others. He was clad in a complete suit of golden armor on which +the changing lights played with beautiful effect, and in his hand he held +an immense golden sword. He pointed the weapon at the ship as if he had raised +it in protection, and his hand was stretched in commanding gesture over the +prostrate giants. +<P> +"Perhaps he has come to save us!" cried Mark. +<h3>CHAPTER XXVII</h3> +<h4>A GREAT JOURNEY</h4> +<P> +SUCH indeed, seemed to be the case. The golden-armored giant, after standing +for a few moments in an attitude of command, waved his sword three times +about his head, and uttered a command, in a voice that sounded like thunder. +Then the prostrate ones arose, and, making low bows hurried away in all +directions. +<P> +Watching them disappear, the golden one sheathed his weapon and approached +the ship. He caught sight of the professor and the two boys in the conning +tower, for Mark had gone there when he found the ship being transported, +and held up his two hands, the palms outward. +<P> +"It is the sign of peace in the language all natives employ," said the professor. +"I think I shall trust him." +<P> +Followed by the boys he descended from the little platform in the tower, +and to the door that opened on the deck. +<P> +"Shall we go out?" he asked. +<P> +"We can't be much worse off," replied Mark. "Let's chance it." +<P> +So, not without many misgivings, they slid back the portal and stepped out +to face the strange and terrible being who had so suddenly come to their +rescue. +<P> +The giant in the golden armor did not seem surprised to see them. In fact +he acted as though he rather expected them. He continued to hold up one hand, +with the palm, outward, while, with the other, he removed his helmet and +bowed low. Then he cast his sword on the ground and advanced toward the ship. +When within ten feet he sat down on the ground, and this brought his head +nearer the earth, so that his auditors could both see and hear him to better +advantage. +<P> +As soon as the giant saw the travelers were outside their ship he began to +speak to them in a voice, which, though he might have meant it to be low +and gentle, was like the bellowing of a bull. At the same time he made many +gestures, pointing to the ship, to himself and to Mark. +<P> +"What is he saying, professor?" asked Jack. +<P> +"I can't understand all he says," Mr. Henderson replied. "He uses some words +derived from the Latin and some from the Greek. But by piecing it out here +and there, and by interpreting his motions I am able to get at something." +<P> +"And what is it all about?" +<P> +"It is a strange story," the scientist replied. "He has only gone about half +way through it. Wait until he finishes and I will tell you." +<P> +The golden-armored giant, who had stopped in his narrative while Jack was +speaking, resumed. His gestures became more rapid, and his words came faster. +Several times Mr. Henderson held up his hand for him to cease, while he puzzled +out what was meant. +<P> +At one point, the professor seemed much startled, and motioned for the strange +being to repeat the last part of his discourse. When this had been done Mr. +Henderson shook his head as though in doubt. +<P> +At length the story was finished, and the lone giant, for there were no others +in sight now, folded his arms and seemed to await what the professor's answer +might be. Mr. Henderson turned to the boys, and to the others of the +<I>Mermaid's </I>company, who, by this time, had joined him, and said: +<P> +"Friends, I have just listened to a strange story. It is so strange that, +but for the fact that our own adventures are verging on the marvelous, I +could hardly believe it. In the first place, this man here is the king of +this country. That is why all the other natives obeyed him. +<P> +"In the second place it seems he has been a passenger in our boat, and came +here from the earth's surface with us!" +<P> +"What's that?" cried Jack. +<P> +"That explains the strange happenings!" ejaculated Mark. "No wonder I could +never solve the secret of the storeroom." +<P> +"You are right, it does," replied Mr. Henderson. "I will not go into all +the details of how it happened, but it seems the big hole through which we +came is only one of two entrances to this inner world. Rather it is the entrance, +and there is another, close to it, which is the exit. Through the latter +a big stream of water spouts up, just as one pours down through the opening +we used. +<P> +"Hankos, which is the name of the king, was for many years a student of science. +He longed to see where the big stream of upward spurting water went, and +wanted to know whence came the down-pouring one. So he undertook a daring +experiment. +<P> +"He constructed a great cylinder, and, keeping his plans a secret, conveyed +it to the spouting water, entered it, and, by means of pulleys and levers, +after he had shut himself inside, cast himself into the up-shooting column. +He took along compressed air cylinders to supply an atmosphere he could breathe, +and some food to eat, for it appears our giant friends are something of inventors +in their way. The current of water bore him to the surface of the earth, +and he was cast up on the ocean, in what was probably taken for a waterspout +if any one saw it. +<P> +"Then a strange thing happened. No sooner did Hankos open his cylinder, which +served him as a boat, than he lost his gigantic size, owing to the difference +of the two atmospheres. He became almost of the same size as ourselves, except +that his skin hung in great folds on him, and he seemed like a wrinkled old +man. His clothes too, were a world too large. +<P> +"He had a terrible time before he reached shore, and a hard one after it, +for his strange appearance turned almost every one against him. He was sorry +he had ventured to solve the mystery of the up-shooting stream of water, +for he was worse than an outcast. +<P> +"Then he began to plan to get back to his own inner world. But he could not +find the downward stream, and, not knowing the language of the countries +where he landed, he had no means of ascertaining. He traveled from place +to place, always seeking for something that would lead him back to his own +country. +<P> +"Finally he heard of us, and of our ship, though how I do not know, as I +thought I had kept it a great secret. By almost superhuman struggles he made +his way to our island. He says he concealed himself aboard the <I>Mermaid +</I>the night before we sailed, but I hardly believe it possible. It seems——" +<P> +"He did it, for I saw him!" interrupted Mark. +<P> +"You saw him!" cried Mr. Henderson. +<P> +Then Mark told of the many things that had puzzled him so, how he had seen +the queer figure slinking aboard the boat, of the disappearance of food from +time to time, and of the strange noises in the storeroom. +<P> +"That bears out what he told me," the professor said. "Hankos says he used +to steal out nights and take what food he could get, and he also mentions +some one, answering to Mark's description, who nearly discovered him once +as he hurried back into the apartment. +<P> +"However, it seems to be true, since Mark confirms it. At any rate Hankos +stayed in hiding, and made the entire trip with us, and, just as we all became +overcome with the strange gas he escaped, having begun to expand to his original +giant size, and being unable to remain any longer in his cramped quarters." +<P> +"That's so, he did!" cried Mark. "I saw him come out of the place just before +I lost my senses. It was a terrible sight, and none of you would believe +me when I told you some of the occurrences afterward." +<P> +"You must forgive us for that," the professor said. "We have learned much +since then." +<P> +"What did Hankos do after he left the ship when it landed in this country?" +asked Jack. +<P> +"He traveled until he came to this village, which is the chief one of this +country," replied the professor. "Part of the time he followed us at a distance, +being able to travel very fast." +<P> +Mark remembered the strange figure of a giant he had seen on the hill tops +several times, and knew that he had been observing the being who had played +such a queer part in their lives. +<P> +"When he came back among his own people," went on Mr. Henderson, "they would +not receive him at first, believing him to be an impostor. But Hankos convinced +them of his identity and was allowed to don the golden armor, which is the +badge of kingship. He had only been in office for a little while when he +heard of the arrival of the strange thing, which turned out to be our ship. +He recognized it from the description, and, learning that we were likely +to be sacrificed to the fury and ignorance of the giants, he hurried here +and saved our lives. +<P> +"He says he can never thank us enough for being the means whereby he was +able to get back to his own country, and says the freedom of this whole inner +world is ours. He has given orders that we are to go wherever we like, and +none will molest us. He tells me the land is a wonderful one, compared to +our own, and urges us to make a long journey. He would like to go with us, +only, now that he has resumed his natural size, he can not get inside the +ship." +<P> +"Hurrah for King Hankos!" cried Jack and the others joined him in a hearty +cheer. +<P> +The giant in the golden armor evidently understood the compliment which was +paid him, for he waved his helmet in the air and responded with a shout of +welcome that made the ground tremble. +<P> +Hankos waited until the professor had translated all of the story to the +other travelers. Then the genial giant began to talk some more, and the professor +listened intently. +<P> +"He says," spoke Mr. Henderson to his friends, "that we will be supplied +with all the fruit we want, and with the best of the houses to sleep in on +our journey. He also tells me he has great stores of shining stones and piles +of the metal of which his armor is made, and that we are welcome to as much +as we want. If this means unlimited gold and diamonds, we may make our fortunes." +<P> +"Jest let me git ma' hand on a few sparklers an' I'll quit work!" exclaimed +Washington. +<P> +"I have told him," the scientist went on, "that we will take advantage of +his kind offer. We will start on our trip in a day or so, after we have looked +over the ship to see if it is not damaged. He tells me the gold and sparkling +stones are several thousand miles away, on top of a high mountain. We will +make that our objective point." +<P> +The interview between the king and Mr. Henderson having ended, the former +waved his sword in the air and the swarm of big men came back. They had been +hiding back in the woods. Now their manner was very different. They carefully +removed the rollers and ropes, and soon there was brought to the adventurers +an immense pile of fine fruits. If our friends had stayed there a year they +could not have eaten it all. The giants were judging the appetites of the +travelers by their own. +<P> +That night the adventurers slept more soundly than they had since entering +the strange world. They felt they had nothing to fear from the giants. In +the morning they were not molested, though big crowds gathered to look at +the ship. But they kept back a good distance. The machinery was found to +be in good shape, save for a few repairs, and when these were made, the professor +announced he would start on a long journey. +<P> +For several weeks after that the travelers swung about in their ship, sometimes +sailing in the air and again on big seas and lakes viewing the wonders of +the inner world. They were many and varied, and the professor collected enough +material for a score of books which he said he would write when he got back +to the outer world once more. +<P> +One afternoon, as they were sailing over a vast stretch of woodland, which +did not seem to be inhabited, Mr. Henderson, looking at one of the gages +on the wall, asked: +<P> +"Boys do you know how far you have traveled underground?" +<P> +"How far?" asked Jack, who hated to guess riddles. +<P> +"More than four thousand miles," was the answer. +<P> +"But we haven't come to that mountain of gold and diamonds," said Mark. "I +am anxious to see that." +<P> +"Have patience," replied the professor. "I have not steered toward it yet. +There are other things to see." +<P> +Just then Washington's voice could be heard calling from the conning tower: +<P> +"We're coming to a big mountain!" +<h3>CHAPTER XXVIII</h3> +<h4>THE TEMPLE OF TREASURE</h4> +<P> +"WHAT'S that?" fairly yelled the professor. +<P> +"We am propelling ourselves in a contiguous direction an' in close proximity +to an elevated portion of th' earth's surface which rises in antiguous proximity +t' th' forward part of our present means of locomotion!" said the colored +man in a loud voice. +<P> +"Which means there may be a collision," the professor said, as he and the +boys hurried toward the tower, +<P> +"Jest what I said," retorted Washington. "What'll I do?" +<P> +"Send the ship a little higher," answered Mr. Henderson. "We mustn't hit +any mountains." +<P> +Washington forced more gas into the holder, and speeded the negative gravity +machine up some, so that the <I>Mermaid, </I>which was flying rather low, +ascended until it was in no danger of colliding with the peak which reared +its lofty height just ahead of them. +<P> +As the ship sailed slowly over the mountain, Mark gazed down and exclaimed: +<P> +"Doesn't that look like the ruins of some building?" +<P> +The professor took a pair of field glasses from a rack in the wall and took +a long view. +<P> +"It must be the place," he said in a low voice. +<P> +"What place?" asked Jack. +<P> +"The temple of treasure," was the answer. "Hankos told me it was on top of +the highest mountain in the land, and this must be it, for it is the loftiest +place we have seen. But we must be careful, for there is danger down there." +<P> +"What kind?" asked Mark. +<P> +"The place was long ago deserted by the giants," Mr. Henderson went on. "Ages +ago it was one of their storehouses for treasure, but there were wars among +themselves, Hankos said, and this part of the country was laid waste. Savage +beasts took up their abode in the temple, and since then, in spite of the +great size of the giants, they have not dared to venture here. If we brave +the animals we may have all the gold and diamonds we can take away." +<P> +"Then for one, I'm willin' t' go down an' begin th' extermination at once," +put in Andy. "I've always wanted t' be rich." +<P> +"We must proceed cautiously," the professor said. "We are ill prepared to +fight any such beasts as we saw at the big geyser. At the same time they +may have deserted this place. I think we will lower the ship down over the +temple, and spend several hours in observation. Then, if nothing develops, +we can enter and see if the treasure is there." +<P> +This plan was voted a good one, and the <I>Mermaid </I>after having been +steered directly over the ruined temple, was brought to a halt, and enough +gas let out so that it fell to about fifty feet in the air above it. +<P> +The adventurers began their watch. The afternoon waned and there were no +signs of any beasts in or about the temple. +<P> +"I reckon we can take a chance," said Andy, who was anxious to get his hands +on some diamonds. +<P> +"Better wait until morning," counseled Mr. Henderson. "It will soon be dark, +and it doesn't look like a nice place to go stumbling about in by moonlight." +<P> +So, though all but the scientist were anxious, they had to wait until the +night had passed. Several times Washington got up to see if the temple had, +by any chance, taken wings during the long hours of darkness, but each time +he found it was still in place. +<P> +"Seems laik it'll never come mornin'." he said. +<P> +But dawn came at length, and, after a hasty breakfast, preparations to enter +the temple were made. Andy loaded his gun for "bear" as he expressed it, +and the boys each took a revolver. +<P> +The ship was lowered to as level a place as could be found, and then, seeing +that everything was in readiness for a quick departure, the professor led +the way out of the <I>Mermaid.</I> +<P> +The entrance to the temple was through a big arched gateway. Some of the +stones had fallen down, and the whole structure looked as if it might topple +over at any moment. +<P> +"Go carefully," cautioned Mr. Henderson, "Watch on all sides and up above. +Better let Andy and me go ahead." +<P> +The scientist and the old hunter led the way. Through the arch they went, +and emerged into what must at one time have been a magnificent courtyard. +Before them was the temple proper, a vast structure, with an opening through +which fifty men might have marched abreast. But the doors were gone, and +the portal was but a black hole. +<P> +"I hope there ain't any ghosts in there," said Washington, with a shiver. +<P> +"Nonsense!" exclaimed the professor. "There may be things as bad, but there +are no such things as ghosts. Have your gun ready, Andy." +<P> +With every sense on the alert, the old hunter advanced. Every one was a bit +nervous, and, as Mark and Jack afterward admitted, they half expected some +terrible beast to rush out at them. But nothing of the kind happened, and +they went into the interior of the temple. +<P> +At first it was so dark they could see nothing. There were vast dim shapes +on every side, and from the hollow echo of their footsteps they judged the +roof must be very high and the structure big in every way. +<P> +Then, as their eyes became used to the darkness, they could make out, up +front, something like an altar or pulpit. +<P> +"Perhaps that's where they offered up the gold and diamonds as a sacrifice +to their gods," spoke Mark in a whisper. +<P> +"Sacrifice to their gods!" came back a hundred echoes and the sound made +every one shudder. +<P> +"Oh!" said Washington, in a low voice. +<P> +"Oh! Oh! Oh!" repeated the echoes in voices of thunder. +<P> +"Well, this is pleasant," spoke Andy, in his natural tones, and, to the surprise +of all there was no echo. It was only when a person whispered or spoke low +that the sound was heard. After that they talked naturally. +<P> +"You stay here, and Andy and I will go up front and see what there is," said +Mr. Henderson. "Be on your guard, and if you hear us coming back in a hurry, +run!" +<P> +It was with no little feeling of nervousness that the boys, Bill, Tom and +Washington watched the two men move off in the darkness. They could hear +their footsteps on the stone flags and could dimly see them. +<P> +"They must be almost to the altar by this time," said Mark, after a long +pause. +<P> +Hardly had he spoken than there came a loud, sound from where Mr. Henderson +and Andy had gone. It was as if some giant wings were beating the air. Then +came shrill cries and the voice of the old hunter could be heard calling: +<P> +"Kneel down, Professor! Let me get a shot at the brute!" +<P> +Those waiting in the rear of the temple huddled closer together. What terrible +beast could have been aroused? +<P> +The next instant the place seemed illuminated as if by a lightning flash, +and a sound as of a thousand thunder claps resounded. +<P> +"I think I winged him!" cried Andy's voice, and the boys knew he had fired +at something. +<P> +Then there came a crash, and from the roof of the old temple a dozen stones +toppled off to one side, letting in a flood of colored light. +<P> +By this illumination could be seen, flapping through the big space overhead, +an enormous bat, as large as three eagles. And, as it flew about in a circle +it gave utterance to shrill cries. +<P> +"Bang!" Andy's gun spoke again, and the bat with a louder cry than before, +darted through the hole in the roof made by the falling stones, which had +been loosened by the concussion from the rifle. +<P> +"Come on!" cried the old hunter. "That was the guardian of the treasure! +We are safe now!" +<P> +Then, in the light which streamed through the broken roof, the adventurers +could see, heaped up on a great altar, behind which sat a horrible graven +image, piles of yellow metal, and sparkling stones. In little heaps they +were, arranged as if offerings to the terrible god of the giants. There were +bars and rings of gold, dishes of odd shape, and even weapons. As for the +sparkling stones, they were of many colors, but the white ones were more +plentiful than all the others. +<P> +"Gold and diamonds! Diamonds and gold!" murmured the professor. "There is +the ransom of many kings in this ancient temple." +<P> +"Wish I had a big bag!" exclaimed Washington, as he began filling all his +pockets with the precious metal and gems. "If I had a-thought I'd have brought +a dress-suit case!" +<P> +"A dress-suit case full of diamonds!" exclaimed Mark. +<P> +Then he too, as did all the others, fell to filling his pockets with the +wealth spread so lavishly before them. There was the riches of a whole world +in one place and no one but themselves to take it. +<P> +For several minutes no one spoke. The only sound was the rattle of the stones +and the clink of gold, and when some of the diamonds dropped on the floor +they did not bother to gather them up. There were too many on the altar. +<P> +"We will be rich for life!" gasped old Andy, who had been poor all his years. +<P> +"I can't carry any more!" gasped Washington. "I'm goin' back for——" +<P> +What he was going back for he never said, for, at that instant, happening +to look up at the hole in the roof, he gave a startled try: +<P> +"Here come the terrible bats!" +<P> +They all gazed upward. Through the opening they could see a great flock of +the awful birds, headed for the temple, and they were led by one which seemed +to fly with difficulty. It was the guardian of the treasure that Andy had +wounded. +<P> +"Quick! We must get out of here!" shouted the old hunter. "They are big enough +and strong enough to tear us all to pieces. Hurry!" +<P> +Down the centre of the temple they rushed, and not a moment too soon, for, +ere they had passed half way to the entrance, the opening in the roof was +darkened by the coming of the bats, and soon the flapping of their wings +awoke the thundering echoes in the ruined structure, while their shrill cries +struck terror to the hearts of the travelers. +<P> +Up to the altar circled the bats, and then wheeling they flapped down the +dim aisles toward the adventurers. +<P> +"Hurry! Hurry!" shouted Andy, who was in the rear. +<P> +He raised his rifle and fired several shots into the midst of the terrible +creatures. +<P> +A number of the bats were wounded, and the others were so frightened by the +sound of the shots and the flashes of fire that they turned back. This enabled +the fleeing ones to gain the entrance to the temple, and soon they were outside. +<P> +"To the ship!" yelled Bill. +<P> +"There's little danger now!" called Andy, panting, for the run had winded +him. "They will hardly attack us in the light!" +<P> +And he was right, for, though they could hear the bats flying about inside +the temple, and uttering their cries, none came outside. +<P> +But no one felt like staying near the uncanny structure, and little time +was lost in reaching the <I>Mermaid. </I>Then the doors were fastened, and +the ship was sent high up into the air. +<P> +"Which way?" asked Jack, when Mr. Henderson told him to go to the conning +tower and steer. +<P> +"Back to where we first met the giants," replied the professor. "We must +prepare to start for our own earth again soon." +<P> +"I've almost forgotten how real sunlight looks," thought Jack, as he headed +the ship around the other way. As he turned the levers a big diamond dropped +from his pocket and rolled on the floor. +<P> +"This will be a good reminder of our trip though," he added. +<P> +The travelers, even including Mr. Henderson, were so taken up with their +suddenly acquired riches that they hardly thought of meals. At the professor's +suggestion they tied their gold and stones up in small packages convenient +to carry. +<P> +"Better place them where you can grab them in a hurry in case of accident," +the old scientist went on. "Of course if there should be too bad an accident +they would never be of any use to us down here, but we'll look on the bright +side of things." +<P> +"Do you anticipate any accident?" asked Jack anxiously. +<P> +"No, Oh no," replied Mr. Henderson, but Jack thought the aged man had something +weighing on his mind. +<h3>CHAPTER XXIX</h3> +<h4>BACK HOME—CONCLUSION</h4> +<P> +ON and on sped the <I>Mermaid. </I>Now that the travelers felt their journey +accomplished they were anxious to begin the homeward trip. They made a straight +course for the village where they had so nearly met with disaster, and where +the king of the giants had saved them. They went in a direct line, and did +not travel here and there, as they had after they left the town. Consequently +they shortened the route by a great distance. Yet it was long enough, and +when they finally came in sight of the place the dial registered a trip of +five thousand miles underground. +<P> +It was one evening when they landed almost at the spot whence they had taken +flight eventually to reach the temple of the treasure. Most of the giants +had betaken themselves to their mound houses, but Hankos was walking in the +fields, and, when he caught sight of the airship hovering above him he waved +his great sword in welcome. +<P> +He rushed up to shake hands with the travelers when they came out of the +ship, though to greet him it was only possible for the adventurers to grasp +one of his immense fingers. +<P> +As soon as the greetings were over Hankos began to speak rapidly to the +professor, at the same time going through many strange motions. +<P> +"It is as I feared!" suddenly exclaimed the scientist. +<P> +"What is the matter?" asked Mark. +<P> +"The worst has happened!" went on Mr. Henderson. "The great hole by which +we came into this place has been closed by an earthquake shock!" +<P> +"The hole closed?" repeated Jack. +<P> +"An earthquake shock!" murmured Mark. +<P> +"Then how are we going to get back to earth?" asked old Andy. +<P> +A terrible fear entered the hearts of the travelers. The closing of the opening +by which they had come to the strange world meant, in all probability that +they would have to spend the rest of their lives in this underground place. +<P> +"What good did it do us to get all those diamonds and that gold?" asked Mark +in a sorrowful tone. +<P> +Hankos began to speak again, using his gestures which were almost as eloquent +as words. The professor watched and listened intently. Then there seemed +to come a more hopeful look to his face. He nodded vigorously as Hankos went +on with what seemed to be an explanation. +<P> +"It's worth trying, at all events!" the scientist exclaimed. "It is our only +hope!" +<P> +"What is?" asked Jack. +<P> +"Friends," began the professor in solemn tones. "I must admit our plight +is desperate. At the same time there is a bare chance of our getting back +to our own earth. As you remember, Hankos went from this place to the upper +regions through the upward spouting column of water." +<P> +"If we had our submarine we might also," interrupted Jack. "But the <I>Mermaid +</I>isn't built to sail in that fashion." +<P> +"Nor would the <I>Porpoise </I>have served us in this emergency," said the +professor. "It would prove too heavy. But, nevertheless, I think I have a +plan. Now, Mark, you are about to learn the secret of the storeroom. The +real one, not the hiding of Hankos in there, which you imagined to be the +cause of my desire to keep something hidden. When we planned a trip to this +underground world I had a dim idea that we might meet with trouble. So I +planned and made a cylinder lifeboat." +<P> +"A cylinder lifeboat?" repeated Mark. +<P> +"Yes," replied Mr. Henderson. "I have it in the storeroom. I did not want +any of you to see it for fear you would have faint hearts. I thought there +might be no necessity of using it. But, since there is, we must do our best. +I will admit it may be a fearful ordeal, but we will have to risk something +in order to escape. +<P> +"I have in the storeroom a large cylinder, capable of holding us all. It +will also contain food and drink for a month, but we will all have to go, +packed almost like sardines in a box. My plan is to take the <I>Mermaid </I>to +the place where the column of water shoots up. There we will get into the +cylinder, close it, and trust ourselves to the terrible force that may bring +us back to the upper world. What do you say? Shall we attempt it?" +<P> +For a few seconds no one spoke. Then Jack said slowly: +<P> +"I don't see that we can do anything else. I don't want to stay here all +my life." +<P> +"I wants a chance t' wear some of them sparklers," put in Washington. +<P> +"Then we will make the attempt," the professor added. "Now all aboard for +the place where the water shoots up!" +<P> +Questioning Hankos, the professor learned how to reach the strange place. +It was in the midst of a desolate country where none of the giants ever went, +so afraid were they of the strange phenomenon. +<P> +It was a week's journey. Sometimes the <I>Mermaid </I>flew through the air, +and again it sailed on vast lakes or inland seas. On the trip they met with +big waterfalls and terrible geysers that spouted a mile or more into the +air. They traveled by night as well as day, though it was necessary to keep +a sharp watch. +<P> +Sometimes the ship passed through great flocks of birds that surrounded her +and sought to pierce the aluminum hull with their sharp beaks and talons. +Over the mountains and valleys the ship sailed until, one evening, there +sounded through the air a strange rumbling sound. +<P> +"It is thunder," said Old Andy. +<P> +"It is the water column," replied the scientist. "We are at the end of our +trip. May the remainder be as successful!" +<P> +The ship was lowered to the surface, as it was deemed best to approach the +column when the lights were shining. No one slept much that night, for the +roaring and rumbling never ceased. +<P> +In the morning the ship was sent forward slowly. Ever and ever the terrific +sound increased, until it was almost deafening. They had to call to each +other to be heard. +<P> +Then, as the <I>Mermaid </I>passed over a mountain, the adventurers saw, +in a valley below them, the up-shooting water. +<P> +It was a vast column, nearly three hundred feet in thickness, and as solid +and white as a shaft of marble. Up, up, up, it went, until it was lost to +sight, but there were no falling drops, and not even a spray came from the +watery shafts. +<P> +"There is a terrible power to it," the professor said. "May it prove our +salvation!" +<P> +The ship was lowered about a hundred feet away from the waterspout. All around +them the ground was vibrating with the force of the fluid. +<P> +"To think that connects with the world above!" exclaimed Jack. +<P> +"It's a good thing for us that it does," Mark answered. +<P> +"We must lose no time," the professor put in. "If the earthquake destroyed +the downward shaft, it may effect this one in time. We must escape while +we can." +<P> +Then, for the first time, he opened the storeroom and the big cylinder was +disclosed to view. It was made of aluminum, and shaped like an immense cigar. +The hull was double, and it was strongly braced. Inside were padded berths +for the occupants, and there was just room enough for the seven adventurers. +Once they had entered they could not move about, but must stay in their little +compartment. +<P> +Compressed air in strong cylinders furnished a means of breathing, and there +were tiny electric lights operated by a storage battery. There was also a +chamber to be filled with the lifting gas. The cylinder was so arranged that +it would float on it's long axis if thrown into the water. A trap door +hermetically sealed gave access to the interior. A small propeller, worked +by compressed air, furnished motive power. +<P> +The food supply consisted of compressed capsules on which a man could subsist +for several days. There was also some water, but not much, since that can +not be compressed and would, therefore, take considerable room. +<P> +"The only thing for us to do," said the professor, "is to get into the cylinder, +seal it up, and trust to Providence. This is what I intended to use when +we were caught in the draught." +<P> +"How can we get into the column of water after we shut ourselves into the +cylinder?" asked Mark. +<P> +"The cylinder fits into a sort of improvised cannon," said Mr. Henderson. +"It is fired by electricity and compressed air. "We will aim it at the column, +press the button and be projected into the midst of the water. Then——" He +did not finish the sentence, but the others knew what he meant. +<P> +"When are we to start?" asked Mark. +<P> +"As soon as possible," replied the professor. "I must arrange the cylinder, +compress the air and lay out the food supply." +<P> +It took the rest of the day to do this, as the inventor found it would be +advisable to attach a weight to the end of the cylinder, to hold it upright +in the column of water. The weight could be detached automatically when they +were shot up into the midst of the ocean, where, as Hankos had told them, +the column spurted forth. +<P> +Then some food was stored in the tiny ship that was destined to be their +last hope, and some tanks of water were placed in it. +<P> +"I think we are almost ready," Mr. Henderson said about noon the next day. +<P> +"What about our gold and diamonds?" asked Jack suddenly. "Can we take them +with us in the cylinder?" +<P> +"That's so!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. "I forgot about them. I'm afraid we'll +have to leave the riches behind. We will not be able to carry them and the +food we need, for it may be a week or more before we can leave the cylinder. +Gold and diamonds will be a poor substitute for something to eat." +<P> +"I'm goin' t' take mine!" said Washington with much conviction. "I might +as well starve rich as starve poor!" +<P> +"We may be able to take a few diamonds," the professor answered. "The gold +will be too heavy. Let each one select the largest of the diamonds he has +and put them in his pockets." +<P> +Then began a sorting of the wealth. It was strange, as they recalled afterward, +throwing away riches that would have made millionaires envious, but it had +to be done. All the wealth in the world would not equal a beef capsule when +they were starving, and they realized it. So they only saved a few pieces +of gold as souvenirs, and took the best of the diamonds. But even then they +had a vast fortune with them. +<P> +At last all was in readiness. The cylinder had been placed in the tube from +which it was to be shot gently forth by compressed air, so that it would +fall into the upward spouting column of water. The charge of compressed air +was put in and the electric wires arranged. +<P> +"Are we all ready?" asked Mr. Henderson. +<P> +"I think so," said Jack, in what sounded like a whisper, but which was loud, +only the noise of the water muffled it. +<P> +"Then we had better enter the cylinder," spoke the inventor. "Take a last +look at the <I>Flying Mermaid, </I>boys, for you will never see again the +ship that has borne us many thousand miles. She served us well, and might +again, but for the freak of nature that has placed us in this position." +<P> +For the first time the adventurers realized that they must abandon the craft +in which they had reached the new world. So it was with no little feeling +of sadness that they climbed up the ladder that had been arranged and slid +down into the cylinder. One by one they took their places in the padded berths +arranged for them. It was a snug fit, for the professor knew if there was +too much room he and the others might be so tossed about as to be killed. +<P> +Mr. Henderson was the last to enter. Standing at the manhole he took a final +look at his pet creation, the <I>Mermaid. </I>Through the opened windows +the colored lights came, shifting here and there. Outside the terrible column +of water was roaring as if anxious to devour them. +<P> +"Good-bye, <I>Mermaid!" </I>said the professor softly. +<P> +Then he closed down the manhole cover and tightened the screws that held +it in place. He touched a button that turned on the electric lights and the +interior of the cylinder was illuminated with a soft glow. +<P> +"Are you all ready?" he asked. +<P> +"Jest as much as I ever will be," replied Washington, who, as the crisis +approached, seemed more light-hearted than any of the others. +<P> +"Then here we go!" exclaimed Mr. Henderson. +<P> +His fingers touched the button that connected with the electric machine, +which operated the compressed air. +<P> +There sounded a muffled report. Then it seemed to those in the cylinder that +the end of the world had come. They shot upward and outward, through the +top of the conning tower which had been removed. The cylinder, launched straight +at the column of water struck it squarely and, an instant later was caught +in the grasp of the giant force and hurled toward the upper world. +<P> +Up and up and up the mass of metal with its human freight went. Now it was +spinning like a top, again it shot toward the earth's crust like an arrow +from the archer's bow. +<P> +It was moving with the velocity of a meteor, yet because of being surrounded +with water, and traveling with the same velocity as the column, there was +no friction. Had there been, the heat generated would have melted the case +in an instant. +<P> +For the first few seconds those in the cylinder were dazed by the sudden +rush. Then as it became greater and greater there came a curious dull feeling, +and, one after another lost consciousness. The terror of the water column, +and the frightful speed, had made them senseless. +<P> + <HR> +<P> +It seemed like a month later, though, of course, it could have been only +a few hours or a day at most when Jack opened his eyes. He saw his companions, +white and senseless all around him, and at first thought they were dead. +Then he saw Mark looking at him, and Washington asked: +<P> +"Is any one livin' 'sides me?" +<P> +"I am," replied Jack decidedly. +<P> +Then, one after another they regained their senses. But they were in a strange +daze, for they were being carried along like a shooting star, only, as they +went at the same rate as did the element carrying them, they did not realize +this. +<P> +"I think I'm hungry," said Bill, who had the best appetite of any of the +travelers. +<P> +"You'll find a beef capsule in the little compartment over your head," spoke +the professor. +<P> +Bill was about to reach for it, when they were all startled by a sudden side +motion of the cylinder. Then came a violent shock, and a sound as of splashing +water. Next the cylinder seemed to be falling, and, a few minutes later to +be shooting upward. Following this there was another splash and the cylinder +began to bob about like a cork on a mill pond. +<P> +"We have reached the sea! We are afloat on the ocean!" cried the professor. +<P> +Hurriedly he disengaged himself from the straps that held him to his bunk. +He pushed back the lever that opened the manhole. Into the opening glowed +the glorious sunlight, while to the occupants came the breath of salt air. +<P> +"Hurrah!" cried Jack. "We are safe at last!" +<P> +"Safe at last!" the professor answered, and then they all gave a cheer. +<P> +For their cylinder, which might now be termed a boat, was floating on the +great Atlantic. The blue sky was overhead and the air of the sea fanned their +cheeks. +<P> +They had shot up from the underground earth, in the column of water, had +been tossed high into the air, had fallen back when the liquid shaft broke +into spray, had descended into the ocean, gone down a hundred feet or more, +and then had shot up like a cork to bob about the surface. +<P> +For a week they were afloat, and then they were picked up by a passing vessel, +rather weak and very much cramped, but otherwise in good shape. They said +nothing of their adventures, save to explain that they were experimenting +in a new kind of boat. About a month later, for the ship that had rescued +them was a slow sailer, they were back on the island whence that wonderful +voyage was begun. +<P> + <HR> +<P> +"Well, we solved the mystery of the center of the earth," remarked Jack, +one evening, when they were gathered in the old shack where so many wonderful +adventures had been planned. +<P> +"Yes, we did," said Mr. Henderson. "And no one else is ever likely to go +there." +<P> +"Why?" +<P> +"Because the only way of getting there was destroyed by the earthquake, and +no one could ever force his way down through that upward-shooting column +of water." +<P> +"That's so. Well, we have the diamonds, anyway," spoke Mark. "They ought +to make us rich." +<P> +And the jewels did, for the stones proved to be of great value, even though +the adventurers had saved only a few of the many they found in the ruined +temple. +<P> +But there was money enough so that they all could live in comfort; the rest +of their lives. As the professor was getting quite old, and incapable of +making any more wonderful inventions, he closed up his workshop and settled +down to a quiet life. As for Washington, Andy, and Bill and Tom, they invested +their money received from the sale of the diamonds in different business +ventures, and each one did well. +<P> +"I am going in for a good education," said Jack to Mark. +<P> +"Just what I am going to do," answered his chum. "And after we've got that——" +He paused suggestively. +<P> +"We'll go in for inventing airships, or something like that, eh?" +<P> +"Yes. We've learned a great deal from Mr. Henderson, and in the course of +time we ought to be able to turn out something even more wonderful than the +<I>Electric Monarch, </I>the <I>Porpoise, </I>or the <I>Flying Mermaid."</I> +<P> +"Yes, and when we've invented something better——" +<P> +"We'll take another trip." +<P> +"Right you are!" +<P> +And then the two chums shook hands warmly; and here we will say good-bye. +<h4>THE END.</h4> +<pre> +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, FIVE THOUSAND MILES UNDERGROUND *** + +This file should be named ftmun10.txt or ftmun10.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, ftmun11.txt +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, ftmun10a.txt + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +<a href="http://gutenberg.net">http://gutenberg.net</a> or +<a href="http://promo.net/pg">http://promo.net/pg</a> + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +<a href="http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext04">http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext04</a> or +<a href="ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03">ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03</a> + +Or /etext03, 02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +<a href="http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html">http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html</a> + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +<a href="mailto:hart@pobox.com">hart@pobox.com</a> + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + + +</pre> + +</BODY></HTML> + diff --git a/old/ftmun10h.zip b/old/ftmun10h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5db6b2e --- /dev/null +++ b/old/ftmun10h.zip |